OFDMA / TDMA TDD Broadband Wireless Access System (XGP

ARIB STD-T95
OFDMA/TDMA TDD
Broadband Wireless Access System
(XGP)
ARIB STANDARD
ARIB STD-T95 Version 3.5
Version 1.0
Version 1.1
Version 1.2
Version 1.3
Version 2.0
Version 2.1
Version 2.2
Version 3.0
Version 3.1
Version 3.2
Version 3.3
Version 3.4
Version 3.5
December
June
March
December
July
February
December
July
March
July
March
December
September
12th 2007
6th 2008
18th 2009
16th 2009
7th 2011
14th 2012
18th 2012
3rd 2013
18th 2014
31th 2014
17th 2015
3rd 2015
29th 2016
Association of Radio Industries and Businesses
General Notes to ARIB Standards and Technical Reports.
1. The copyright of this document is ascribed to the Association of Radio Industries and Businesses
(ARIB).
2. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of ARIB.
3. Attachment 3 is reproduced with the consent of XGP Forum which owns the copyright in it.
4. The establishment, revision and abolishment of ARIB Standards are approved at the ARIB Standard
Assembly which meets several times a year. Approved ARIB Standards in their original language
are made publicly available in hard copy, CDs or through web posting, generally in about one month
after the date of approval.
5. The note about IPR (Industrial Property Rights) of the standard applies to the use of Essential IPR
for the ARIB Standard in Japan. If the ARIB Standard is adopted outside Japan, Essential IPR will
be treated in accordance with policies stated by each IPR owner. The IPR owners are, however,
expected to apply the rules of the preface of the "Guidelines for Treatment of Industrial Property
Rights in connection with the ARIB standard” (September 5, 1995, approved by the 1st Standard
Assembly Meeting). In the preface of the Guidelines, it is stated that it is "desirable that the
Essential IPR which relates to any or all parts of the contents of the ARIB Standards should be used
free of charge by anyone and that it would not block the uses of such Essential IPR in any other
country where such an ARIB Standard is adopted"
ARIB STD-T95
Preface
Introduction
Association of Radio Industries and Businesses (hereinafter ARIB) investigates and
summarizes the basic technical requirements for various radio systems in the form of “technical
standard (ARIB STD)”. These standards are being developed with the participation of, and
through discussions amongst various radio equipment manufacturers, operators and users.
ARIB standards include “government technical standards” (mandatory standards) that are
set for the purpose of encouraging effective use of frequency resources and preventing
interference, and “private technical standards” (voluntary standards) that are defined in order
to guarantee compatibility between radio facilities, to secure adequate transmission quality as
well as to offer greater convenience to radio equipment manufacturers and users, etc.
An ARIB STANDARD herein is published as "OFDMA/TDMA TDD Broadband Wireless
Access System (XGP)".
In order to ensure fairness and transparency in the defining stage, the
standard was set by consensus of the standard council with participation of interested parties
including radio equipment manufacturers, telecommunications operators, broadcasters, testing
organizations, general users, etc. with impartiality.
ARIB sincerely hopes that this standard be utilized actively by radio equipment
manufacturers, telecommunications operators, and users, etc.
ARIB STD-T95
INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (IPRs)
Although this ARIB Standard contains no specific reference to any Essential Industrial
Property Rights relating thereto, the holders of such Essential Industrial Property Rights state
to the effect that the rights listed in Attachment 1 and 2, which are the Industrial Property
Rights relating to this standard, are held by the parties also listed therein, and that to the users
of this standard, in the case of Attachment 1 (selection of option 1), such holders shall not assert
any rights and shall unconditionally grant a license to practice such Industrial Property Rights
contained therein, and in the case of Attachment 2 (selection of option 2), the holders shall grant,
under the reasonable terms and conditions, a non-exclusive and non-discriminatory license to
practice the Industrial Property Rights contained therein. However, this does not apply to
anyone who uses this ARIB Standard and also owns and lays claim to any other Essential
Industrial Property Rights of which is covered in whole or part in the contents of provisions of
this ARIB Standard.
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (IPRs)
The lists of Essential Industrial Property Rights (IPRs) are shown in the following
attachments.
Attachment 1 List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (selection of option 1)
Attachment 2 List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (selection of option 2)
ARIB STD-T95
Contents
Preface
INTRODUCTION
INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (IPRs)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (IPRs)
Chapter 1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Scope of the Standard .......................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Reference Regulations ......................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Reference Documents........................................................................................................... 2
Chapter 2 Technical Requirements for Radio Facilities .................................................................. 3
2.1 General Conditions .............................................................................................................. 3
2.1.1 System Structure (ORE, Article 49.29) ........................................................................ 3
2.1.2 Radio Frequency Band (ORE, Article 49.29) ................................................................ 3
2.1.3 Modulation Method (ORE, Article 49.29) ..................................................................... 3
2.1.4 General Requirement (ORE, Article 49.29) .................................................................. 3
2.1.5 Carrier Aggregation (ORE Article 49.29, 2014) (NT No.339,2014) ............................. 5
2.2 Conditions Relating to Transmitter and Receiver .............................................................. 5
2.2.1 Transmission Characteristics ....................................................................................... 5
2.2.1.1 Transmission Power (ORE, Article 49.29 2014) (NT No.345,2014) ...................... 5
2.2.1.2 Adjacent Channel Leakage (ACL) Power and Outband Unwanted Emission (NT
No.435, 2012) .......................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1.3 Transmission Intermodulation (NT No. 435, 2012)............................................... 8
2.2.1.4 Transmission Synchronization (NT No. 435, 2012) ............................................... 9
2.2.1.5 Carrier off Time Leakage Power (ORE, Article 49.29) ........................................ 11
2.2.1.6 Tolerance Limits of the Intensity of Unwanted Emission in Spurious Domain
(NT No. 435, 2012) ................................................................................................ 11
2.2.1.7 Allowed Value for Occupied Bandwidth (ORE, Article 6, Table 2)...................... 13
2.2.1.8 Frequency Stability (ORE, Article 5, Table 1) ..................................................... 13
2.2.1.9 Transmission Antennas (ORE, Article 49.29) ...................................................... 13
2.2.1.10 SAR (ORE,Article 14.2) (NT 435, 2012) ............................................................. 14
2.2.1.11 System condition (only Non-regenerative repeating of Low Power Repeater) . 14
2.2.1.12 Out of band gain (only Non-regenerative repeating of Low Power Repeater)
-i-
ARIB STD-T95
(NT 435, 2012) ...................................................................................................... 14
2.2.2 Reception Characteristics ........................................................................................... 14
2.2.2.1 Sensitivity ............................................................................................................. 14
2.2.2.2 Adjacent Channel Selectivity ............................................................................... 15
2.2.2.3 Intermodulation Characteristic ........................................................................... 15
2.2.2.4 Spurious Response Immunity .............................................................................. 16
2.2.2.5 Conducted Spurious Component (ORE, Article 24)............................................. 16
Chapter 3 Physical and MAC Layer Specifications ....................................................................... 18
Chapter 4 Japanese specific matters ............................................................................................. 19
Chapter 5 Measurement Method ................................................................................................... 20
Attachment
Attachment 1 List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (selection of option 1)
Attachment 2 List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (selection of option 2)
Attachment 3 XGP specifications
Change History
-ii-
ARIB STD-T95
Chapter 1 General Descriptions
1.1 Overview
This standard specifies requirements of the radio equipment of radio stations stipulated in
the Ministry of Internal Affair and Communications (MIC), Ordinance Regulating Radio
Equipment, Article 49.29 (this refers to the radio equipment of radio stations of OFDMA/TDMA
or SC-FDMA/TDMA TDD Broadband Wireless Access System using 2.5 GHz band. XGP, which
is defined as the technology for personal wireless broadband services based on all-IP core
network.
The standard shall be in accordance with MIC Ordinance Regulating Radio Equipment,
Article 49.29 (including related notifications) when XGP facilities are used in Japan.
1.2 Scope of the Standard
XGP Network consists of Mobile Station (MS), Base Station (BS) and IP networks, and the
scope of the standard is shown in Figure 1.1.
MS
BS
MS
BS
MS
BS
GateWay
IP Core
Network
Scope of the standard
Figure 1.1 Configuration of XGP Network
Mobile Station (MS) is used by the end users to access the network. XGP Network comprises
base stations (BS) and Gateways. BS is responsible for providing the air interface to MS, while
Gateway typically acts as IP layer transporter to Network.
This standard defines the minimum level of specifications required for connection and
services for XGP. This consists of two different specifications, i.e., Japanese regulatory
-1-
ARIB STD-T95
specifications applied for radio systems, and Physical and MAC layers specifications. The
Japanese regulatory specifications are developed by national regulatory administration, i.e. the
Ministry of Internal Affair and Communications (MIC). The physical and MAC layers
specifications are developed by international standard organization, i.e., XGP Forum.
This standard is intended to combine the national regulations and the international
specifications, however in case of inconsistency between them, the national regulations shall
prevail. The national regulations are the mandatory requirements for operation of XGP in
Japan.
1.3 Reference Regulations
The acronyms of the referenced regulations used in this standard are as follows;
RERL: Regulations for Enforcement of Radio Law
ORE: Ordinance Regulating Radio Equipment
OTRCC: Ordinance Concerning Technical Regulations Conformity Certification etc. of
Specified Radio Equipment.
OTF: Ordinance Concerning Terminal Facilities etc.
RTCCA: Rules Concerning the Technical Conditions Compliance approval etc. for Terminal
Equipment.
NT: “Notification” refers to a Notification of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and
Communications.
1.4 Reference Documents
- A-GN4.00-03-TS “XGP Specifications”
-2-
ARIB STD-T95
Chapter 2 Technical Requirements for Radio Facilities
This chapter has regulations regarding the technical requirements for radio facilities for the
radio station of XGP in Japan.
MIC Ordinances and related Notifications contained in the chapter 2 are translated into
English from the original Japanese regulations of MIC Ordinances and related Notifications.
The original Japanese regulations shall prevail if any ambiguity exists between the
requirements and the original in Japanese.
2.1 General Conditions
2.1.1 System Structure (ORE, Article 49.29)
(1) Base Station (BS)
(2) Mobile Station (MS)
(3) Low Power Repeater
Low Power Repeaters is Mobile Station that relays between BS and MS.
(4) Relay Station (RS)
For the technical requirement of RS, the radio equipment (uplink) which communicates
with BS complies with the technical requirement of MS and the radio equipment
(downlink) which communicates with MS complies with the technical requirement of BS.
(5) Radio station which establishes communication and other operation for maintenance of
radio equipment
If communication is not possible between a radio station which establishes
communication to maintain or adjust a radio equipment of BS in OFDM / TDM access
scheme broadband mobile radio access system or such BS and MS which is a partner of
such BS in communication, it means a radio station operating as RS.
2.1.2 Radio Frequency Band (ORE, Article 49.29)
The radio frequency band is the 2.5 GHz band (over 2,545 MHz - 2,655 MHz or less).
2.1.3 Modulation Method (ORE, Article 49.29)
The modulation methods are BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM and 256QAM.
2.1.4 General Requirement (ORE, Article 49.29)
(1) Communication method shall be as follows:
- For transmission from BS or RS to MS, or from BS to RS, from Low Power Repeater to
-3-
ARIB STD-T95
MS; (downlink)
The multiplexing method is a combination of OFDM and TDM, or OFDM, TDM and
SDM.
- For transmission from MS or RS to BS, or from MS to RS, from Low Power Repeater to
BS; (uplink)
The access method is a combination of OFDMA and TDMA, a combination of OFDMA,
TDMA and SDMA, or a combination of SC-FDMA and TDMA, a combination of
SC-FDMA, TDMA and SDMA.
(2) Transmission equipment of each MS which establishes communication with BS or RS
shall be automatically identified.
(3) Switching from a traffic channel of one BS or RS to a traffic channel of other BS or RS
shall be automatically performed. (Except that communication system is configured by
MS with absolute gain of transmission antenna of over 4 dBi.)
(4) Radio equipment of BS shall be connectable to telecommunication line equipment.
(5) The power supply of radio equipment in MS of which absolute gain of transmission
antenna is 4 dBi or higher and 10 dBi or lower shall be AC (alternate current) power.
(6) The radio frequency transmitted from MS shall be automatically selected by receiving
the radio wave from its partner BS or radio station which establishes communication to
test the radio equipment in this system.
(7) In addition to the above items, radio equipment shall comply with the technical
requirement separately notified by Minister for Internal Affairs and Communications.
(8) Type of repeater shall be as follows: (only Low Power Repeater)
The repeater shall be of Non-regenerative and Generative repeating type.
Table 2.1.4-1 Type of Repeater
Type of Repeater
Relay frequency
Configuration
Non-regenerative repeater
Generative repeater
Same
Different
Same
Different
frequency
frequency
frequency
frequency
Integrated or separated type
-4-
Integrated or separated type
ARIB STD-T95
2.1.5 Carrier Aggregation (ORE Article 49.29, 2014) (NT No.339.2014)
The Carrier Aggregation (CA) technology is applied to the transmission from a single or
multiple base stations (including SC-FDMA (ORE Article 49.6.9, 2014) (ORE Article
49.6.10, 2014) base stations operated by operators) to a single mobile station. However,
nationwide mobile operators (operating the frequency of less 2575 MHz or over 2595
MHz) shall not use the frequency of over 2575 MHz to 2595 MHz or less for CA.
2.2 Conditions Relating to Transmitter and Receiver
2.2.1 Transmission Characteristics
2.2.1.1 Transmission Power (ORE, Article 49.29 2014) (NT No.345.2014)
(1) The transmission power of BS shall be as follows.
2.5/5/10MHz System: 20 W or less
20MHz system: 40 W or less
(2) The transmission power of MS shall be as follows
1: In case of Generative repeater of a single carrier Low Power repeater, the antenna
transmission power shall be 200mW or less.
In case of Generative repeater of multiple carrier Low Power repeater, the antenna
transmission power shall be 200mW or less per a single carrier. In addition, in case
of a repeater from MS to BS or from BS to MS, total power of the antennas
transmission shall be 600mW or less.
2: In case of Non-regenerative repeater from MS to BS or from BS to MS, total power of
antennas transmission shall be 200mW or less.
3: In any case except 1 and 2, total power of antennas transmission shall be 200mW or less.
(3) The transmitter in RS (ORE, Article 14)
- Transmission to BS:
The value for MS shown in the Table 2.2 and Table 2.3 should be referred.
- Transmission to MS:
The value for BS shown in the Table 2.1 should be referred.
(4) Tolerance for transmission power (ORE, Article 14)
BS: Within +87 %, -47 %
MS: Within +87 %, -79 %
-5-
ARIB STD-T95
Low Power Repeater: Within +87 %, -47 %
2.2.1.2 Adjacent Channel Leakage (ACL) Power and Outband Unwanted Emission (NT No.435,
2012)
(1) Standards
The adjacent channel leakage power and outband unwanted emission of the transmitter
in RS shall apply as follows.
- Transmission to BS:
The value for MS shown in the Table 2.1.2-1 should be referred.
- Transmission to MS:
The value for BS shown in the Table 2.1.2-2 should be referred.
Table 2.2.1.2-1 Adjacent Channel Leakage (ACL) Power and Outband Unwanted Emission of
MS and the Low Power Repeater
Channel spacing
Allowed levels of Adjacent channel leakage power (1), and Outband
unwanted emission (2), (3)
2.5 MHz
(1) In the band of ±1.25 MHz from the offset frequency of ±2.5 MHz: 2 dBm
or less
(2) In the band of the offset frequency from 3.75 MHz to less than 6.25
MHz: -10 dBm /MHz or less.
5 MHz
(1) In the band of ±2.5 MHz from the offset frequency of ±5 MHz: 2dBm or
less
(2) In the band of the offset frequency from 7.5 MHz to less than 12.5 MHz:
-10 dBm/MHz or less
10 MHz
(1) In the band of ±5MHz from the offset frequency of ±10 MHz: 2 dBm or
less
(2) In the band of the offset frequency from 15 MHz to less than 20 MHz: 25dBm/MHz or less
(3) In the band of the offset frequency from 20 MHz to less than 25 MHz:
-30 dBm/MHz or less
20 MHz
(1) In the band of ±10MHz from the offset frequency of ±20 MHz: 3 dBm or
less
-6-
ARIB STD-T95
(2) In the band of the offset frequency from 30 MHz to less than 35 MHz:
-25 dBm/MHz or less
(3) In the band of the offset frequency from 35 MHz to less than 50 MHz:
-30 dBm/MHz or less
Table 2.2.1.2-2 Adjacent Channel Leakage (ACL) Power and Outband Unwanted Emission of BS
Channel spacing
Allowed levels of Adjacent channel leakage power (1), and Outband
unwanted emission (2)
2.5 MHz
(1) In the band of ±1.25 MHz from the offset frequency of ±2.5 MHz: 3 dBm
or less
(2) In the band of the offset frequency from 3.75 MHz to less than 6.25
MHz: -5.25 dBm/MHz or less
5 MHz
(1) In the band of ±2.5 MHz from the offset frequency of ±5 MHz: 3 dBm or
less
(2) In the band of the offset frequency from 7.5 MHz to less than 12.5 MHz:
-15.7 dBm/MHz or less
10 MHz
(1) In the band of ±5 MHz from the offset frequency of ±10 MHz: 3 dBm or
less
(2) In the band of the offset frequency from 15 MHz to less than 25 MHz:
-22 dBm/MHz or less
20 MHz
(1) In the band of ±10MHz from the offset frequency of ±20 MHz: 6 dBm
or less
(2) In the band of the offset frequency from 30 MHz to less than 50 MHz: 22 dBm/MHz or less
Note about the four items of ACL Power (1) in the above BS table: (NT No.435, 2012)
In the case the multiple carriers (with 2.5MHz, 5MHz, 10MHz, or 20MHz channel spacing) are
transmitted from single transmission equipment, following conditions are applied.
(a) In regard to the frequency range which is higher than the highest carrier of the
simultaneous multiple carriers, the highest carrier is taken as the measurement object. In
regard to the frequency range which is lower than the lowest carrier of the multiple carriers,
the lowest carrier is taken as the measurement object.
-7-
ARIB STD-T95
(b) Between the frequency range of simultaneous transmission of non-contiguous multiple
carriers, the specification shall be met per each carrier. (In the case that the band of one
single carrier and the band of other carriers are overlapped, either the allowable level
specified for the one single carrier or the allowable levels specified for the other concerned
carriers are applied.)
Note about the four items of Outband Unwanted Emission (2) in the above BS table: (NT
No.435, 2012)
In the case the multiple carriers (with 2.5MHz, 5MHz, 10MHz, or 20MHz channel spacing) are
transmitted from single transmission equipment, following conditions are applied.
(c) In regard to the frequency range which is higher than the highest carrier of the
simultaneous multiple carriers, the highest carrier is taken as the measurement object. In
regard to the frequency range which is lower than the lowest carrier of the multiple carriers,
the lowest carrier is taken as the measurement object.
(d) Between the frequency range of simultaneous transmission of non-contiguous multiple
carriers, the specification shall be met per each carrier. (In the case that the band of one
single carrier and the band of other carriers are overlapped, either the allowable level
specified for the one single carrier or the allowable levels specified for the other concerned
carriers are applied.)
However, this requirement is not applicable in the case that the frequency range of this
table about the single carrier is overlapped with the range of ACL Power.
2.2.1.3 Transmission Intermodulation (NT No. 435, 2012)
Intermodulation characteristic of BS and RS (only RS transmitted to MS) shall be as
follows.
(1) Channel spacing of 2.5 MHz
Under the condition of rated output desired wave, when the interference wave of +/-2.5
MHz and +/-5 MHz away from the desired wave is added by the transmission power of 30
dB lower than the rated output desired wave, intermodulation power shall not exceed
the allowed values of the adjacent channel leakage power and the outband unwanted
emission (2.2.1.2).
-8-
ARIB STD-T95
(2) Channel spacing of 5 MHz
Under the condition of rated output desired wave, when the interference wave of +/-5
MHz and +/-10 MHz away from the desired wave is added by the transmission power of
30 dB lower than the rated output desired wave, intermodulation power shall not exceed
the allowed values of the adjacent channel leakage power and the outband unwanted
emission (2.2.1.2 ).
(3) Channel spacing of 10 MHz
Under the condition of rated output desired wave, when the interference wave of +/-10
MHz and +/-20 MHz away from the desired wave is added by the transmission power of
30 dB lower than the rated output desired wave, intermodulation power shall not exceed
the allowed values of the adjacent channel leakage power and the outband unwanted
emission (2.2.1.2).
(4) Channel spacing of 20 MHz
Under the condition of rated output desired wave, when the interference wave of +/-20
MHz and +/-40 MHz away from the desired wave is added by the transmission power of
30 dB lower than the rated output desired wave, intermodulation power shall not exceed
the allowed values of the adjacent channel leakage power and the outband unwanted
emission (2.2.1.2).
2.2.1.4 Transmission Synchronization (NT No. 435, 2012)
(1) Transmission burst cycle
Within 2.5 msec, 5 msec, 10 msec
(2) Transmission burst length
Transmission burst length shall be as follows.
Table 2.2.1.4-1 Transmission Burst Length
BS and
MS and
Low Power Repeater to MS
Low Power Repeater to BS
Within M×625μs (Note1)
Within N×625μs (Note1)
Within P×1,000μs (Note2)
Within Q×1,000μs (Note2)
Note1: M+N=4, 8, or 16 (M, N is a positive integer)
Note2: P+Q=5, or 10 (P, Q is a positive number, including the decimal)
Note3: Transmission burst length for the radio frequency of over 2575 MHz to 2580 MHz or
-9-
ARIB STD-T95
less may be equal to the transmission burst length for the radio equipment in BS
and MS (except for relay operation) for the use of the frequency of over 2545 MHz to
2575 MHz or less.
Note4: Transmission burst length for the radio frequency of over 2590 MHz to 2595 MHz or
less may be equal to the transmission burst length for the radio equipment in BS
and MS (except for relay operation) for the use of the frequency of over 2595 MHz to
2625 MHz or less.
Note5: The transmitter in RS
- Transmission to BS should be referring the value for MS.
- Transmission to MS should be referring the value for BS.
Note6: Such burst length is not defined in the standard of XGP referred to Chapter 3 at this
time.
-10-
ARIB STD-T95
2.2.1.5 Carrier off Time Leakage Power (ORE, Article 49.29)
(1) Standards
a) MS: -30 dBm or less
b) BS: -30 dBm or less
c) Low Power Repeater: -30 dBm or less
2.2.1.6 Tolerance Limits of the Intensity of Unwanted Emission in Spurious Domain (NT No. 435,
2012)
(1) Standards
The tolerance limits of the intensity of unwanted emission of the transmitter in RS shall
apply as follows.
- Transmission to BS:
The value for MS shown in the Table 2.8 should be referred.
- Transmission to MS:
The value for BS shown in the Table 2.9 should be referred.
Table 2.2.1.6-1 Tolerance Limits of the Intensity of Unwanted Emission in Spurious Domain of
MS and the Low Power Repeater
Frequency
From 9 kHz to less than 150 kHz
From 150 kHz to less than 30 MHz
From 30 MHz to less than 1000 MHz
From 1000 MHz to less than 2505 MHz
From 2505 MHz to less than 2530 MHz
From 2530 MHz to less than 2535 MHz
From 2535 MHz to less than 2655 MHz (Note)
Tolerance limits of the intensity
Average power for arbitrary 1 kHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 10 kHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 100 kHz band is
-13 dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -30
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is
equal to -25 dBm or less
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -30
-11-
ARIB STD-T95
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -13
2655 MHz or more
dBm or less.
(Note) Applied to the cases below only:
- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 2.5 MHz: Offset frequency of 6.25 MHz or
more
- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 5 MHz: Offset frequency of 12.5 MHz or more
- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 10 MHz: Offset frequency of 25 MHz or more
- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 20 MHz: Offset frequency of 50 MHz or more
Table 2.2.1.6-2 Tolerance Limits of the Intensity of Unwanted Emission in Spurious Domain of
BS
Frequency
From 9 kHz to less than 150 kHz
From 150 kHz to less than 30 MHz
From 30 MHz to less than 1000 MHz
From 1000 MHz to less than 2505 MHz
From 2505 MHz to less than 2535 MHz
From 2535 MHz to less than 2655 MHz (Note)
2655 MHz or more
Tolerance limits of the intensity
Average power for arbitrary 1 kHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 10 kHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 100 kHz band is
-13 dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -42
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -22
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -13
dBm or less.
(Note) Applied to the cases below only:
- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 2.5 MHz: Offset frequency of 6.25 MHz or
more
- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 5 MHz: Offset frequency of 12.5 MHz or more
- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 10 MHz: Offset frequency of 25 MHz or more
- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 20 MHz: Offset frequency of 50 MHz or more
-12-
ARIB STD-T95
Note about “Unwanted Emission in Spurious Domain” in the above BS table: (NT No.435,
2012)
In the case the multiple carriers (with 2.5MHz, 5MHz, 10MHz, or 20MHz channel spacing) are
transmitted from single transmission equipment, following conditions are applied.
(a)
In regard to the frequency range which is higher than the highest carrier of the
simultaneous multiple carriers, the highest carrier is taken as the measurement object.
In regard to the frequency range which is lower than the lowest carrier of the multiple
carriers, the lowest carrier is taken as the measurement object.
(b)
Between the frequency range of simultaneous transmission of non-contiguous multiple
carriers, the specification shall be met per each carrier.
2.2.1.7 Allowed Value for Occupied Bandwidth (ORE, Article 6, Table 2)
(1) Standards
2.5 MHz system: 2.5 MHz or less
5 MHz system: 5 MHz or less
10 MHz system: 10 MHz or less
20 MHz system: 20 MHz or less
If this allowed value is applied, it shall be added to the types of radio wave as prefix.
2.2.1.8 Frequency Stability (ORE, Article 5, Table 1)
(1) Standards
Frequency error:
MS: ±3 × 10-6 or less
BS: ±3 × 10-6 or less
Low Power Repeater: ±3 × 10-6 or less
2.2.1.9 Transmission Antennas (ORE, Article 49.29)
a) MS: 4 dBi or less
b) BS:
17 dBi or less
c) Low Power Repeater:
4 dBi or less
-13-
ARIB STD-T95
2.2.1.10 SAR (ORE, Article 14.2) (NT 323, 2013)
MS shall ensure that specific absorption rate (SAR) of the radio wave emitted from a MS in
the human body is 2 watts per kilogram or less, and in the extremities of a human body is 4
watts per kilogram or less(Note: In the case MS transmitted multiple carriers are also
applied). SAR means the value that the energy which a body tissue of 10 grams exposed to
radio wave absorbed for 6 minutes is divided by 10 grams and 6 minutes.
2.2.1.11 System condition (only Non-regenerative repeating of Low Power Repeater)
Maximum number of repeaters per BS would be about 100.
2.2.1.12 Out of band gain (only Non-regenerative repeating of Low Power Repeater) (NT 435,
2012)
In case of Non-regenerative repeating, out of band gain refers to the gain of the repeater
outside the pass band. The gain outside the pass band shall not exceed the maximum level
specified in the Table 2.10.
Table 2.2.1.12-1 Out of band gain limits
Frequency Offset from the Edge Frequency
Maximum Gain
5MHz
35dB
10MHz
20dB
40MHz
0dB
2.2.2 Reception Characteristics
2.2.2.1 Sensitivity
(1) Definition
Reception sensitivity is the minimum receiving power measured by antenna terminal
which is required to receive QPSK modulated signal with the specified quality (more
than 95% of the maximum throughput). It shall not exceed the following value
(reference sensitivity) in static characteristic.
(2) Standards
In static characteristic,
-14-
ARIB STD-T95
MS: -94 dBm or less
BS: -101.5 dBm or less
Low Power Repeater: -94 dBm or less (only regenerative repeating)
2.2.2.2 Adjacent Channel Selectivity
(1) Definition
Adjacent channel selectivity is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a desired
signal in the existence of modulated interference signal assigned to adjacent carrier
frequency. When the desired signal and modulated interference signal in adjacent
frequency band are added by the following condition, QPSK modulated signal shall be
received with the specified quality (more than 95% of the maximum throughput).
(2) Standards
In static characteristic,
MS: desired signal reference sensitivity +14 dB, modulated interference signal -54.5
dBm
BS: desired signal reference sensitivity +6 dB, modulated interference signal -52 dBm
Low Power Repeater: desired signal reference sensitivity +14 dB, modulated
interference signal -54.5 dBm (only regenerative repeating)
2.2.2.3 Intermodulation Characteristic
(1) Definition
Intermodulation characteristic is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a desired
signal in the existence of two non-modulated interference signals which are equal in
power and can generate the third-order intermodulation or either modulated
interference signal of such two interference signals. When the desired signal and both of
non-modulated and modulated interference signals, which can generate the third-order
intermodulation, are added by the following condition, QPSK modulated signal shall be
received with the specified quality (more than 95% of the maximum throughput).
(2) Standards
In static characteristic,
MS: desired signal: reference sensitivity +9 dB
non-modulated interference signal (adjacent channel): -46dBm
modulated interference signal (second adjacent channel): -46dBm
BS: desired signal: reference sensitivity +6 dB
non-modulated interference signal (adjacent channel): -52 dBm
-15-
ARIB STD-T95
modulated interference signal (second adjacent channel): -52 dBm
Low Power Repeater: desired signal: reference sensitivity +9 dB
non-modulated interference signal (adjacent channel): -46dBm
modulated interference signal (second adjacent channel): -46dBm
(only regenerative repeating)
2.2.2.4 Spurious Response Immunity
(1) Definition
Spurious response is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a desired signal in the
existence of a non-modulated interference signal. When the desired signal and
non-modulated interference signal are added by the following condition, QPSK
modulated signal shall be received with the specified quality (more than 95% of the
maximum throughput).
(2) Standards
In static characteristic,
MS: desired signal reference sensitivity +9 dB, non-modulated interference signal: -44
dBm
BS: desired signal reference sensitivity +6 dB, non-modulated interference signal: -45
dBm
Low Power Repeater: desired signal reference sensitivity +9 dB, non-modulated
interference signal: -44 dBm (only regenerative repeating)
2.2.2.5 Conducted Spurious Component (ORE, Article 24)
(1) Definition
Conducted spurious component is spurious emissions while reception, which are any
emissions present at the antenna terminals of the equipment.
(2) Standards
a) Only BS with absolute gain of transmission antenna of 17 dBi or less, MS with
absolute gain of transmission antenna of 4 dBi or less, and RS with absolute gain for
BS of 4 dBi or less.
Table 2.2.2.5-1 BS and MS
Frequency bands
Conducted spurious component
From 9 kHz to less than 150 kHz
Average power for arbitrary 1 kHz band is
-16-
ARIB STD-T95
-54 dBm or less.
From 150 kHz to less than 30 MHz
Average power for arbitrary 10 kHz band is
-54 dBm or less.
From 30 MHz to less than 1000 MHz
Average power for arbitrary 100 kHz band is
-54 dBm or less.
1000 MHz or more
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is
-47 dBm or less.
b) Receiving equipment in BS with absolute gain of transmission antenna of over 17
dBi, MS with absolute gain of transmission antenna of over 4 dBi, and a land mobile
relay station with absolute gain of transmission antenna for BS of over 4 dBi shall
comply with the requirement described in the following table.
-17-
ARIB STD-T95
Chapter 3 Physical and MAC Layer Specifications
In this chapter, Physical and MAC layer of XGP in Japan is specified.
This specification is defined by following Attachment 3.
Attachment 3:
“XGP Specifications”
This Attachment 3 is reproduced from "A-GN4.00-03-TS “XGP Specifications” which is
standardized by XGP Forum.
This Attachment 3 is reproduced without any modification from original document.
-18-
ARIB STD-T95
Chapter 4 Japanese specific matters
In this chapter, it is listed the items of Attachment 3 which are not adopted by this standard.
The following items are not adopted in this standard because they do not comply with the
Japanese Regulations.
Table 4.1 Points of difference
Attachment 3
Marks
section number
2.3.1
There is a description of 22.5/25/30 MHz system bandwidth.
2.3.4
There is a description of 22.5/25/30 MHz system bandwidth.
2.4.1
Table 2.2, there is a description of 22.5/25/30 MHz system bandwidth in
“Number of subchannels”.
2.4.3.2
Figure 2.8, there is an expression of 22.5/25/30 MHz system bandwidth.
2.5
Figure 2.11, m equal 22/24/27/28/29/30 express 22.5/25/30 MHz system
bandwidth.
Table 2.3, there is a description of 22/5,25/30 MHz system bandwidth.
2.6
Figure 2.12, m equal 22/24/27/28/29/30 express 22.5/25/30 MHz system
bandwidth
3.2.3
Table 3.1, there is a description of 22.5/25/30 MHz system bandwidth.
5.5.6.1.2
“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth
5.5.6.1.3
“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth
5.5.6.1.4
“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth
5.5.6.1.5
“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth
5.5.6.1.6
“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth
7.3.3.6
“SCH = 128” in MAP Origin express 30MHz system bandwidth
7.3.3.7
“SCH = 128” in MAP Origin express 30MHz system bandwidth
7.3.3.8
“SCH = 128” in MAP Origin express 30MHz system bandwidth
7.3.3.15
“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth
“SCH = 128” in MAP Origin express 30MHz system bandwidth
7.3.3.22
“SCH = 128” in MAP Origin express 30MHz system bandwidth
10
FDD description in reference documents do not comply with the
Japanese Regulations
Annex X
They comply with the Taiwan Regulations
-19-
ARIB STD-T95
Chapter 5 Measurement Method
As for the items stipulated in Ordinance Concerning Technical Regulations Conformity
Certification etc. of Specified Radio Equipment Appendix Table No.1 item 1(3), measurement
methods are specified by MIC Notification (Note) or a method that surpasses or is equal to the
method.
Note: This Notification refers to MIC Notification No.88 “The Testing Method for the
Characteristics Examination” (January 26, 2004) as of the date of the revision of this standard
version 2.0 (issued at July, 2011). Thereafter, the latest version of Notification would be applied
if this Notification or contents of this Notification would be revised.
-20-
Attachment 1
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 1)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
AT1-1
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
Hitachi, Ltd.*10
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
KYOCERA*10
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
NetIndex Inc. *10
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
(selection of option 2)
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
NTT DoCoMo Inc.*10 A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
AT2-1
Oki Electric
Industry Co.,Ltd.*10
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
Qualcomm Inc.*10
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
SANYO Electric
Co.;Ltd*10.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
WILLCOM Inc.*10
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
ARIB STD-T95
*10:These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
TOSHIBA
CORPORATION.*10
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
*10:These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Approved by the 70th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
AT2-2
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
㈱日立コミュニケーシ インタリーブ方法及び無線通信装置
ョンテクノロジー *10
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
特願2007-223384
*10:These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.
AT2-3
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *10
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-4
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2003-529971
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US 20080008136, US 7,289,473,
BR, CN, DE, EP, ES, FI, FR, GB,
HK, IT, KR, SE, WO
Reducing radio link supervision time in a high data
rate system
JP2003-524965
AU, BR, CA, CN, DE, EP, FI, FR,
GB, HK, ID, IL, IN, KR, MX, NO,
RU, SE, SG, TW, UA, US, WO
A method and an apparatus for a quick
retransmission of signals in a communication system
JP2003-533078
US 6,694,469, US 7,127,654, US
20070168825, AU, BR, CA, CN,
EP, HK, ID, IL, IN, KR, MX, NO,
WO, RU, SG, TW, UA
Method and apparatus for fast closed-loop rate
adaptation in a high rate packet data transmission
JP2004-515932
US 7,245,594, US 20070064646,
US 20070263655, AU, BR, CA, CN,
EP, HK, ID, IL, IN, JP, KR, MX,
NO, RU, SG, TW, UA, WO
Method and apparatus for controlling data rate in a
wireless communication system
JP2005-507208
US, CN, DE, EP, ES, FI, FR, GB,
IT, KR, SE, SG, TW, WO
Method and Apparatus for High Rate Packet Data
and Low Delay Data Transmissions
JP 2004-514369
US 7,068,683, US 20060187877,
AU, BR, CA, CN, EP, HK, ID, IL,
IN, KR, MX, NO, RU, SG, TW, UA,
WO
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Synchronized Pilot Reference Transmission for a
Wireless Communication System
*10: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Approved by the 73rd Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *10
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-5
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US 6,961,388, US 20050276344,
BR, CN, EP, HK, KR, TW, WO
Closed-Loop Rate Control for a Multi-Channel
Communication System
JP2006-504372
US, AU, BR, CA, CN, EP, HK, ID,
IL, IN, KR, MX, RU, TW, UA, WO
Multicarrier Transmission Using a Plurality of
Symbol Lengths
JP2006-504367
US, AU, BR, CA, CN, EP, HK, ID,
IL, IN, KR, MX, RU, TW, UA, WO
Method, Station and Medium Storing a Program for a
Priority Based Scheduler with Variable Scheduling
Periods and Variable Scheduled Periods
JP2007-508791
US, BR, CA, CN, EP, HK, IN, KR,
RU, TW, WO
System and method for diversity interleaving
JP2008-508815
US, AU, BR, CA, CN, EG, EP, HK,
ID, IL, IN, KR, MX, NO, NZ, PH,
RU, SG, UA, VN, WO, ZA
Unified pulse shaping for multi-carrier and
single-carrier waveforms
JP2008-511208
US, AR, CA, CN, EP, HK, IN, KR,
MY, TW, WO
Pilot Transmission and Channel Estimation for a
Communication System Utilizing Frequency Division
Multiplexing
JP2008-536359
US, AR, AU, BR, CA, CL, CN, EP,
HK, ID, IL, IN, KR, MX, MY, NO,
NZ, PH, RU, SG, TW, UA, VN, WO
Power control for serving sector
JP B0008P0995
US, AR, AU, BR, CA, CN, EP, ID,
IL, IN, KR, MX, MY, NO, NZ, PH,
RU, SG, TW, UA, VN, WO
Coding scheme for a wireless communication system
*10: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2004-535694
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *10
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-6
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO07101041
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US, BR, CA, CN, EP, IN, JP, KR,
RU, SG, TW
Method and apparatus for efficient reporting of
information in a wireless communication system
WO07075744
US, CN, EP, IN, JP, KR, TW
Mapping of subpackets to resources in a
communication system
WO08086074
US, TW
Apparatus and method for uplink power control of
wireless communications
WO08101053
US, TW
A power control subsystem
JP2002-501689
US 5,991,284, CN, DE, US
6,240,071, US 20010010684, EP,
FR, GB, HK, JP, KR, WO
Apparatus and Method for Reducing Power
Consumption in a Mobile Communications Receiver
JP3193380
US 5,509,015, AU, BR, BG, CA, DE,
DK, KP, EP, FI, FR, GB, HK, HU,
IE, IL, IT, KR, MX, NL, WO, CN,
RU, ZA, SE, SK
Channel structure for communication systems
JP4152584
US 6,377,809, US 09/503,401, US
6,167,270, US 6,526,030, AU, BR,
CA, CL, RU, DE, EP, FI, FR, GB,
HK, ID, IT, KR, MX, NO, WO, CN,
TW, SE, SG, UA
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for sending signaling
information via channel IDS
*10: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *13
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Approved by the 75th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95
Ver.1.3.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
*13: This patent is applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.3.
AT2-7
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95
Ver.2.0.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
*20: This patent is applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Approved by the 80th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
AT2-8
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Approved by the 83rd Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95
Ver.2.1.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
*21: This patent is applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
AT2-9
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method, Apparatus and System for Signal Prediction
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2004-506206
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US6,775,802; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IN; KR; MX; SG; VN
AT2-10
Method for performing radio resource level registration
in a wireless communication system
JP4607411
US7,155,222; US7,773,987;
US8,010,104; BE; BR; CN; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IT; KR;
NL; SE; TW
Handoff method for digital base stations with different
spectral capabilities
JP4795608
US6,535,739; US6,853,843;
US7,151,933; US7,373,149; AU; BE;
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX;
NL; NO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA
Multiplexing of real time services and non-real time
services for OFDM systems
JP2004-503181
US6,952,454; US7,751,492;
US7,813,441; US7,664,193;
US20100142638; BR; CN; EP; HK;
KR; TW
Method and apparatus for adaptive transmission control
in a high data rate communication system
JP2003-531518
US7,088,701; BR; CN; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IT; KR; NL; SE;
TW
Method and Apparatus for Multiplexing High-Speed
Packet Data Transmission with Voice/Data
Transmission
JP4068455
US6,775,254; US20040240401;
JP; AU; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES;
FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX;
NO; RU; SG; TW; UA
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
GPS Satellite Signal Acquisition Assistance System and
Method in a Wireless Communications Network
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4018535
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,254,402; USRE42,543; AU;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
SG; VN
AT2-11
JP2004-512708
US7,042,869; AU; BR; CA; CL;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID;
IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO; NZ; RU;
SE; SG; TW; UA
Method and apparatus for satellite positioning system
based time measurement
JP4316676
US5,812,087; US6,052,081;
US6,239,742; JP; BR; CH; CN; DE;
DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; IE;
PT; SE
Method and system for using altitude information in a
satellite positioning system
JP2002-532679
US6,061,018; US6,307,504; JP;
AU; BE; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; NL; SE; SG
Method and apparatus for operating a satellite
positioning system receiver
JP2002-530628
US6,104,338; JP; AU; BE; BR;
CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HK; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL;
SE; SG
Satellite positioning system augmentation with wireless
communication signals
JP2002-512373
US5,999,124; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID;
IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; SE; SG
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Method and Apparatus for Gated ACK/NAK Channel in
a Communication System
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for determining a data rate in a
high rate packet data wireless communications system
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4083578
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US6,973,098; US20050254465;
AT; AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE;
DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; ID;
IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO; PT;
RU; SE; SG; TW; UA
AT2-12
Method and apparatus for handoff of a wireless packet
data services connection
JP4194840
US7,079,511; US7,860,061;
US7,561,555; AU; BR; CA; CN; DE;
EP; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT;
KR; MX; NO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA
Method and apparatus for utilizing channel state
information in a wireless communication system
JP4593878
US6,771,706; US7,590,182;
US7,949,060; US7,411,929; JP; BE;
BR; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HK; IE; IT; KR; LU; NL; SE; TW
Method and apparatus for link quality feedback in a
wireless communication system
JP4723617
US6,985,453; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID;
IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO; RU;
SG; TW; UA
Method and apparatus for testing assisted position
location capable devices
JP4593925
US6,760,582; AU; BR; CN; EP;
HK; IL; IN; KR; RU
Synchronization of stored service parameters in a
communication system
JP4426187
US7,499,698; US7,881,714;
US7,747,283; US7,778,631; JP; BE;
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL; SE; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Ceasing transmission of data rate control information in
a CDMA communication system when the mobile station
transmits to the idle open state
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4236579
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,103,021; US7,924,781;
US20110243082; BR; CN; DE; EP;
FR; GB; HK; KR; NO; TW
AT2-13
JP2005-525713
US7,180,879; US7,417,976;
US20070086391; US7,986,674;
US7,894,403; JP; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IN;
IT; KR; NL; SE; TW
Method and apparatus for time-aligning transmissions
from multiple base stations in a CDMA communication
System
JP4546081
US6,775,242; AU; BE; BG; BR;
CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; ID; IE; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL;
NO; SE; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for security in a data processing
system
JP4282992
US20020141591; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; KR; MX; TW
Method and system for signaling in broadcast
communication system
JP4307998
US6,980,820; US7,415,283;
US7,689,226; JP; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IN;
IT; KR; NL; SE; TW
Method and apparatus for data packet transport in a
wireless communications system using an internet
protocol
JP2008-211793
US7,697,523; US20100142432;
JP; BR; CN; EP; HK; KR; TW
Method and apparatus for security in a data processing
system
JP4732687
US7,352,868; US20080226073;
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; RU; SG; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Method and apparatus for call setup latency reduction
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Concatenated encoding and decoding for multilayer
communication protocol
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4274942
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,649,829; US20100107041;
US20100272124; BR; CN; DE; EP;
FR; GB; HK; IT; KR; NL; TW
AT2-14
Method and system for a multicast service initiation in a
communication system
JP4847603
US6,876,636; US20050169203;
JP; BE; BG; BR; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IT; KR;
NL; PL; RO; SE; TW
Handoff in a hybrid communication network
JP4554212
JP; AR; CL; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR;
MY; SG; TH; TW; ZA
Frame formatting, coding and transmit power control
method for a multicast/broadcast system
JP4508865
US7,177,658; US7,583,977;
US20100172279; US7,593,746; JP;
BR; CN; EP; HK; KR; TW
Handoff in dormant mode in a packet data network
JP4472528
US7,110,377; US8,023,464; JP;
AU; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; FI; FR;
GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; RU;
SE; TW; UA
Key generation in a communication system
JP2010-213305
US7,190,793; US20070269048;
JP; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; RU; TW
Beam-steering and beam-forming for wideband
MIMO/MISO systems
JP2005-537751
US6,940,917; US7,194,040; JP;
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; RU; TW; UA
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
MIMO WLAN System
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2006-504335
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20040082356;
US20080285488; US20080285669;
US20080285670; AU; BE; BG; BR;
CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; NL; RO; RU; SE; TW; UA
AT2-15
Uplink pilot and signaling transmission in wireless
communication systems
JP2006-505230
US6,928,062; US7,042,857;
US20060279435; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; PH; RU;
SG; TW; ZA
Transmission Schemes for Multi-Antenna
Communication Systems Utilizing Multi-Carrier
Modulation
JP4833830
US7,095,790; US7,606,326;
US20100003931; BR; CA; CL; CN;
EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; RU; SG;
TW; VN
Pilots for MIMO communication systems
JP4657918
US7,986,742; US20110235744;
JP; AT; AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CN;
DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR;
HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX;
NL; PT; RO; RU; SE; TW; UA
Rate adaptive transmission scheme for MIMO systems
JP2006-503522
US6,873,606; US7,675,886;
US20100119005; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; NZ; RU; TW
ARIB STD-T95
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Download and display of system tags in wireless
communication systems
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4472531
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,043,239; US7,292,852;
US20080085705; AU; BE; BG; BR;
CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; NL; RO; RU; SE; TW; UA
AT2-16
Pilot transmission schemes for wireless multi-carrier
communication systems
JP2006-517759
US7,280,467; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; RU; TW; UA
Hybrid protocol to support communications with multiple
networks
JP4806068
US7,916,715; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; NO; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus to count broadcast content
recipients in a wireless telephone network
JP4376898
US7,062,272; US7,409,212;
US7,251,487; US7,813,732; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
RU; TW; UA
System and method for managing reverse link
communication resources in a distributed
communication system and corresponding apparatus
JP4713470
US7,979,078; US7,197,319;
US8,000,717; JP; CN; EP; HK; KR;
TW
Variable packet lengths for high packet data rate
communications
JP4537382
US7,280,562; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; RU; TW;
UA
Incremental redundancy transmission in a MIMO
communication system
JP4741495
US20050052991; JP; AR; AU; BE;
BG; BR; CA; CL; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; NL; PH; PL; RO; RU;
SE; SG; TW; VN
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
AT2-17
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Apparatus and method for a secure broadcast system
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2007-529147
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20050010774; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; TH; TW; VN
JP4409576
US20050120097; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EG; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN;
ZA
Mimo system with multiple spatial multiplexing modes
JP4860924
US20040136349;
US20100119001; US20080267098;
US20080267138; JP; AU; BE; BG;
BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; NL; RO; RU; SE; TW; UA
Transmit diversity processing for a multi-antenna
communication system
JP4739952
US7,002,900; US20060039275;
US20100208841; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; RU;
TW; UA
Method and apparatus for security in a data processing
system
JP2007-531337
US20040120527; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; PH;
RU; SG; TH; TW; VN
Method and apparatus for automatic configuration of
wireless communication networks
JP2008-533857
US20060203746; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
AT2-18
Method and apparatus for providing an efficient control
channel structure in a wireless communication system
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Pilot transmission and channel estimation for an OFDM
system with excess delay spread
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2007-519368
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,339,999; US20080152033;
US8,027,399; JP; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CL; CN; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; PH;
RU; SG; TH; TW; VN
AT2-19
JP4768615
US7,318,187; US20080098283;
US20080151805; US20080141097;
JP; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR;
MX; TW
Method and apparatus for acknowledging reverse link
transmissions in a communications system
JP4668908
US7,957,263; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; MX; TW
Systems and methods for multiplexing control data For
multiple data channels onto a single control channel
JP4382817
US7,613,144; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; RU; TW;
UA
Systems and methods for communicating control data
using multiple slot formats
JP4409574
US7,474,643; US8,023,474; AU;
BE; BG; BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; NL; PL; RO; RU; SE;
TW; UA
Spatial spreading in a multi-antenna communication
system
JP4607901
US20050175115; AU; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; PH; RU; SG; TW; VN
Staggered pilot transmission for channel estimation and
time tracking
JP2007-536803
US7,457,231; US7,907,593; JP;
BE; BG; CA; CL; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT;
KR; NL; PL; RO; SE; TH; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Outer coding methods for broadcast/multicast content
and related apparatus
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Hard handoff from a wireless local area network to a
cellular telephone network
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-507429
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20070049274; CN; DE; EP;
FR; GB; IN; KR
AT2-20
Transmission of signaling information for broadcast and
multicast services
JP4705048
US20050195852; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; NZ; RU; SE; TW; UA
System and method for power control in wireless
communication systems
JP2007-527677
US20050201180;
US20080200204; JP; BE; BG; CA;
CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HK; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO;
SE
Methods and apparatus for mitigating multi-antenna
correlation effect in communication systems
JP2008-526116
US7,974,359; AR; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Signal acquisition in a wireless communication system
JP4763692
US8,027,372; JP; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CL; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
PH; RU; SG; TH; VN
Multiplexing for a multi-carrier cellular communication
system
JP4791459
US7,724,777; US20100195360;
JP; AU; BR; CA; CL; CN; EG; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN; ZA
OFDM system with code spreading of signalling data
JP2008-511269
US7,852,746; US20110069737;
JP; AR; CA; CL; EP; MY; TW
A method of providing a gap indication during a sticky
assignment
JP4834174
US20060034173; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CL; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK;
HU; ID; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; MY; NL;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TH; UA; VN
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
AT2-21
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Continuous beamforming for a MIMO-OFDM system
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4643632
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20050265275;
US20090290657; JP; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; MY; TW
AT2-22
Systems and methods for reducing uplink resources to
provide channel performance feedback for adjustment
of downlink MIMO channel data rates
JP4796122
US20060205357; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Connected-state radio session transfer in wireless
communication systems
JP4542140
US20050266847; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; MX; MY; TW
Method and apparatus for performing position
determination with pre-session action
JP4653180
US7,747,258; US20100261483;
JP; EP; HK; IL; KR; SG
Dynamic assignment of home agent and home address
in wireless communications
JP4787250
US20060002356; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; MX; TW
Coded-bit scrambling for multi-stream communication in
a MIMO channel
JP2008-512053
JP; BE; BG; BR; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT;
KR; MX; MY; NL; PL; RO; SE; TW
Shared signaling channel for a communication system
JP2008-507896
US20060018347; CA; CL; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; TW
Efficient signaling over access channel
JP4625079
US20060018336; JP; AR; AU; BE;
BG; BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IL; IN; IT;
KR; MX; NL; PH; PL; RO; RU; SE;
SG; TH; TW; VN
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for pseudo-secret key generation
to generate a response to a challenge received from
service provider
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-123713
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20060046690; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; MY; TH; TW
AT2-23
JP2008-510395
US20060040645; JP; BR; CN; DE;
EP; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IT; KR;
MX; RU; SE; TW; UA
Apparatus, system, and method for managing
transmission power in a wireless communication system
JP4598074
US7,899,480; US20110165907;
JP; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR;
MX; TW
Minimizing feedback by sending a quality indicator for a
non-restrictive reuse set and a vectored quality
indicator for other reuse sets
JP4664378
US7,548,752; US20100002597;
JP; AR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; TW
Method and apparatus for enhancing signal-to-noise
ratio of position location measurements
JP2008-537387
US7,920,544; US20110149922;
JP; CA; EP; HK; RU
Method of communicating a frame having a plurality of
modulation schemes
JP2011-193484
US20060133455; CA; CL; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; MY; TW; VE
Interference control in a wireless communication system
JP2011-156772
US20060209721; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; DE; EP; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG;
TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for high rate data transmission in
wireless communication
JP2008-538061
US20060221883; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; MY; RU; SG; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Default configurations with differential encoding in a
wireless communication system
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and systems for providing enhanced position
location in wireless communications
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-521192
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,893,873; US20110149863;
US7,876,265; BR; CA; CN; EP; IN;
KR; RU; TW
AT2-24
Wireless handoffs between multiple wireless networks
JP2008-541512
Systems and methods for control channel signaling
JP4752003
US20060223449; JP; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for enhanced file distribution in
multicast or broadcast
JP2008-536405
US20060248090; JP; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; MY; TW
Multi-carrier operation in data transmission systems
JP4750843
US7,961,700; JP; AU; BE; BG;
BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PH; PL; RO;
RU; SE; SG; TW; UA; VN
Ciphering and re-ordering packets in a wireless
communication system
JP2008-539678
US20070041382; CN; EP; IN; KR;
MY; TW
Code division multiplexing in a single-carrier frequency
division multiple access system
JP2009-505504
US20070041404; CL; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; TW
Method and apparatus for adaptive registration and
paging area determination
JP2008-547279
US20060286982; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CL; CN; EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
VOIP emergency call handling
JP2009-505455
US20070060097; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; KR; RU; SG; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
US20060245395; CN; EP; IN; KR
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Distributed protocol over a wireless connection
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-506649
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,899,004; AR; BR; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
AT2-25
JP2009-513036
US20060293066; JP; BR; CA; EP;
HK; IL; IN; KR; RU; SG
Methods and apparatus for efficient providing of
scheduling information
JP4787319
US20060285515; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for selection of virtual antennas
JP4819897
US8,073,068; JP; AR; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; RU; TH; TW; UA; VN
Inter-system handover using legacy interface
JP2009-503941
US20070021120; CN; EP; IN; KR;
MY; TW
Method and apparatus for pilot multiplexing in a wireless
communication system
JP2009-524362
US20070195906;
US20100142490; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for packet communications in
wireless systems
JP2009-508372
US20070133479;
US20110026462; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
System and method for multi-network coverage
JP2009-529838
US20070211675;
US20080304461; US20100110993;
JP; AR; CN; EP; IN; KR
A method and apparatus for pre-coding frequency
division duplexing system
JP4763797
US20070097889; BR; CA; CL;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; TH; TW; UA; VN
ARIB STD-T95
Efficient periodic location reporting in a radio access
network
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
AT2-26
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Unitary precoding based on randomized FFT matrices
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-516942
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20070097856; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
AT2-27
JP2009-514447
US20070098050; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; UA; VN
Precoding for segment sensitive scheduling in wireless
communication systems
JP2009-514400
US20070098099; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; UA; VN
Resource allocation during tune-away
JP4814334
US20070099614; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; RU;
TW; UA; VN
A method and apparatus for bootstraping information in
a communication system
JP2009-514452
US20070097897; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatus for saving power by designating
frame interlaces in communication systems
JP4824766
US20070097894; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
RU; SG; TH; UA; VN
Shared signaling channel
JP2009-514450
US20070097853; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CL; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN
Method and apparatus for achieving flexible bandwidth
using variable guard bands
JP2009-514397
US20070147226; JP; AR; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; SG; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Pilot symbol transmission in wireless communication
systems
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Frequency hopping of pilot tones
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-538058
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
BR; CN; EP; HK; IN; RU; SG
AT2-28
Efficient transmission on a shared data channel for
wireless communication
JP2008-514485
US20070177569; BR; CA; CN;
EP; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Data state transition during handoff
JP4843052
US20070177547; AR; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; TW
FLEXIBLE MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) FOR
AD HOC DEPLOYED WIRELESS NETWORKS
JP2009-514441
US20070105575;
US20090176503; US20100260133;
AR; BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU;
TH; TW
Methods and apparatus for determining the location of a
mobile device in an OFDM wireless network
JP4819910
US7,706,328; US20090117917;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Privacy protection in communications systems
JP2009-523396
US20070168662; BR; EP; IN; KR;
RU; TW
Global navigation satellite system
JP2008-550408
US7,768,449; US20110187589;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Selection of an access point in a communications
system
JP2010-502156
US20080049702; JP; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; TW
Open loop power offset update
JP2010-532646
US7,957,757; US20110256902;
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
An apparatus and method for fast access in a wireless
communication system
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-529251
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20070183361; BE; BG; BR;
CA; CL; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PH; PL; RO;
RU; SE; TW; VN
AT2-29
JP2010-521162
AU; BR; CN; EP; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA;
VN
Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing based
spread spectrum multiple access
JP3703002
US6,473,418; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; ID; IN; IT;
KR
Communications system employing orthogonal
frequency division multiplexing based spread spectrum
multiple access
JP4593767
US6,553,019; AU; BE; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE;
IN; IT; KR; NL; SE
Methods and apparatus of providing transmit and/or
receive diversity with multiple antennas in wireless
communication systems
JP4685789
US7,039,370; US7,610,024;
US20100041355; JP; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR
Efficient paging in a wireless communication system
JP4638497
US7,711,377; US20100190514;
US20100178942; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; UA; VN; ZA
Methods and apparatus for determining, communicating
and using information which can be used for
interference control purposes
JP4791592
US20060083161; BR; CN; EG;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; VN; ZA
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Methods and apparatuses for transmitting
non-decodable packets
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatus for communicating transmission
backlog information
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-521850
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20070159969; AR; AT; BE; CH;
CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
GR; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL; NO;
PL; PT; RO; SE; TH; TW
AT2-30
Methods and apparatus of implementing and/or using a
dedicated control channel
JP2009-521847
US20070149227; AR; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; TH; TW
Methods and apparatus for flexible reporting of control
information
JP2009-521852
US20070149228; BE; BG; CL;
CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE;
TH; TW
Methods and apparatus for communicating and/or using
transmission power information
JP4801172
US20070149238; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Grouping of users for MIMO transmission in a wireless
communication system
JP2009-530987
US20070223423; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; TW; UA; VN
Resource allocation to support single-user and
multi-user MIMO transmissions
JP2009-530988
US8,059,609; US13/295,381; BR;
CA; CL; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
VN
Uplink channel estimation using a signaling channel
JP2009-530992
US20080032630; AR; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; TW
Methods and apparatus for supporting mobile virtual
network
JP2009-533980
US20070245007; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-31
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20070242764; AR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Pseudo wires for mobility management
JP2009-533985
US20070242637; CN; EP; IN; KR
Feedback of channel state information for MIMO and
sub-band scheduling in a wireless communication
system
JP2009-531993
US8,014,455; US13/214,621; AR;
BE; BG; BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT;
KR; NL; PL; RO; RU; SE; SG; TW
An apparatus and method for fast access in a wireless
communication system
JP2009-530990
US20080019306; AU; BR; CA; CL;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Expedited handoff
JP2009-544252
US8,064,401; US13/275,138; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; TW
Method and apparatus for quick-paging of terminals in a
wireless communication system
JP2009-544244
US20080014969; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Uplink access request in an OFDM communication
environment
JP2009-544241
US7,869,421; US20110075639; CN;
EP; IN; KR
Method and apparatus for enhanced paging
JP2009-535941
US20070254679; US20110201361;
JP; AU; BE; BG; BR; CA; CL; CN;
CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK;
HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; MY;
NL; NO; NZ; PH; PL; RO; RU; SE;
SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatus related to using a wireless
terminal scrambling identifier
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-533981
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-32
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-543528
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20080090528; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Propagating session state changes to network functions
in an active set
JP2009-540695
US20070286206; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; KR; RU; SG; TW
Signal acquisition in a wireless communication system
JP2009-538576
US20080285526; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TH; TW
Signal acquisition for wireless communication systems
JP2009-544178
US20070281642; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Preamble structure and acquisition for a wireless
communication system
JP2009-540769
US20080279220; BR; CA; CN; DE;
EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT;
KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG;
TW; UA; VN
Using codewords in a wireless communication system
JP2010-518761
US7,839,308; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Data routing via lower layers in a communication system
JP2009-542119
US20080101356; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR
Method and apparatus for selection mechanism
between OFDM-MIMO and LFDM-SIMO
JP2009-542164
US20080095263; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Dynamic frequency allocation and modulation scheme
for control information
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-33
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20080089286; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Frequency selective and frequency diversity
transmissions in a wireless communication system
JP2009-544258
US20080013599; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Variable control channel for a wireless communication
system
JP2010-512033
US20080095106; AT; AU; BE; BR;
CA; CH; CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PH;
PL; PT; RO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA;
VN
Method and apparatus for sending signaling for data
transmission in a wireless communication system
JP2009-545276
US20080025267; US20100284377;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; RU;
SG; TW
Method and apparatus for random access in an
orthogonal multiple-access communication system
JP2010-502120
US20080273610; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatus for power allocation and/or rate
selection for UL MIMO/SIMO operations with PAR
considerations
JP2010-509863
US20100029320; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Feedback of precoding control indication (PCI) and
channel quality indication (CQI) in a wireless
communication system
JP2010-502114
US20080043867; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Frequency hopping in an SC-FDMA environment
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-544189
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-34
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-502118
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20080089312; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; VN
Semi-persistent scheduling for traffic spurts in wireless
communication
JP2010-502127
US20080117891; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Acquisition in frequency division multiple access
systems
JP2010-502128
US20080089282; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Systems and methods for key management for wireless
communications systems
JP2010-502132
US20080070577; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for acknowledgment repetition in
orthogonal systems
JP2010-503291
US20080095109; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Signaling transmission with localized spreading for
wireless communication
JP2010-503348
US20080101441; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Codeword permutation and reduced feedback for
grouped antennas
JP2010-503335
US20080080641; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for preparing connection transfer
between an IP based communication system (LTE/SAE)
and a PDP context based communication system
(UMTS/GPRS)
JP2010-506462
US7,920,522; BR; CA; CN; EP; IN;
KR; RU; SG; TW
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for flexible pilot pattern
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-35
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20110002430; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Sub-band dependent resource management
JP2010-508792
US20100027502; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN
Random access signaling transmission for system
access in wireless communication
JP2010-506508
US20100309877; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Re-synchronization of temporary UE IDS in a wireless
communication system
JP2010-506504
US20100189071; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for handling user equipment
capability information
JP2010-510694
US20090093280; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Frequency domain PN sequence
JP2011-525199
US20100054211; BR; CN; EP; IL;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN
Method and apparatus for increasing ack resources for
a wireless communication system
JP2010-508783
US20100034156; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Space division multiple access channelization in
wireless communication systems
JP2010-506546
US7,903,615; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN
A method and apparatus for setting reverse link CQI
reporting modes in wireless communication system
JP2009-514417
US7,924,800; US20110280183; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR
Synchronization transmissions in a wireless
communication system
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-506502
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-36
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4785930
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,864,819; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR
Reverse link resource assignment and reverse link
power control for wireless communication systems
JP2010-507288
US8,050,701; US13/230,761; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; UA;
VN
Apparatus and method of random access for wireless
communication
JP2010-508785
US20100093386; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Reliable uplink resource request
JP2010-508786
US20100074193; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for hybrid FDM-CDM structure
for single carrier based control channels
JP2010-508777
US20100118855; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Systems and methods for using internet mobility
protocols with non internet mobility protocols
JP2010-507936
US20080175201; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Multiplexing of control and data with varying power
offsets in a SC-FDMA system
JP2010-508778
US20100027450; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Frame structures for wireless communication systems.
JP2010-507993
US20090232079; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
A method and apparatus for bit demultiplexing in a
wireless communication systems
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-37
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,961,640; US20110222627; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
VN
Inter-enode B handover procedure
JP2009-535426
US20100238903; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Selective phase connection establishment
JP2010-528497
US20080310378; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
MIMO transmission with layer permutation in a wireless
communication system
JP2010-509861
US20100027697; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method for transmit power control dependent on
subband load
JP2010-509866
US20100093363; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; UA; VN
Uplink timing control
JP2010-522505
US20080279131; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Providing antenna diversity in a wireless communication
system
JP2010-509875
US20080117999; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Codeword level scrambling for MIMO transmission
JP2010-509860
US20100074350; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for codebook exchange in a
multiple access wireless communication system
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-508720
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,995,534; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; RU; SG
System selection based on application requirements
and preferences
JP2010-531565
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN
Methods and apparatus for implementing proxy mobile
IP in foreign agent care-of address mode
JP2010-510728
US20080159227; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatus for transferring a mobile device
from a source eNB to a target eNB
JP2010-512125
US20080130580; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Methods and apparatus for RLC re-transmission
schemes
JP2010-512691
US20080139113; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
MIMO transmission with rank-dependent precoding
JP2010-518763
US7,995,671; US20110280342; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA;
VN
Using DTX and DRX in a wireless communication
system
JP2010-516208
US20090122736; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; UA; VN
Fast cell search
JP2010-516204
US20090131037; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; UA; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for SRNS relocation in wireless
communication systems
AT2-38
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-509870
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-39
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20080167042; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Pilot transmission in a wireless communication system
JP2010-516121
US20080165969; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
CQI reporting for MIMO transmission in a wireless
communication system
JP2010-516198
US20080188259;
US201102866353; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Transmission of information using cyclically shifted
sequences
JP2010-516203
US20080165893; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Pilot structure with multiplexed unicast and SFN
transmissions
JP2010-516201
US8,077,801; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
A method and apparatus for new key derivation upon
handoff in wireless networks
JP2010-525764
US20080267407; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Mapping uplink acknowledgement transmission based
on downlink virtual resource blocks
JP2010-517445
US20080205348; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; UA; VN
Flexible DTX and DRX in a wireless communication
system
JP2010-519793
US20080186892; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Radio resource connection (RRC) establishment for
wireless systems
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-535433
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-40
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-518709
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20080227428; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Demodulation of a subset of available link assignment
blocks
JP2010-517489
US20080182585; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method an apparatus for power control during DTX
operation
JP2010-518705
US7,881,742; US8,060,130; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Hopping structures for broadband pilot signals
JP2010-518755
US20080187027; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for inter-system handover
JP2010-519855
US20110206009; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatus for performing channel tree
operations
JP2010-523057
US20080239992; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for handoff between access
systems
JP2010-521924
US20080259869; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Hybrid pilot configuration
JP2010-521890
US20080225993; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for emergency broadcast using
an emergency broadcast-multicast service
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-41
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20080227449; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for polling in a wireless
communication system
JP2010-521933
US20080225824; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Connection independent session handoff from source
session reference network controller to target SRNC
JP2010-522509
US20080261598; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Apparatus and method of performing a handoff in a
communication network
JP2010-524301
US20080240039; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for determining broadcast
messages in wireless signals
JP2010-522523
US20080232294; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Circular buffer based rate matching
JP2010-523064
US20090049359; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Handoff of data attachment point
JP2010-524359
US8,059,595; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Enhanced pilot signal
JP2010-529721
US20090124265; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; UA; VN
PICH-HS timing and operation
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-521897
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-42
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-525681
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20080259873; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Postition location for wireless communication systems
JP2010-529419
US20080274753; CN; EP; IN; KR
Flexible signaling of resources on a control channel
JP2010-526499
US20090325585; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for UL ACK allocation
JP2010-527543
US20080273513; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Mobile IP home agent discovery
JP2010-529790
US20090010206; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Scrambling methods for synchronization channels
JP2010-528565
US7,920,598; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR;
TW
Method and apparatus for sending scheduling
information for broadcast and multicast services in a
cellular communication system
JP2010-530662
US20090046617; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Pseudo-random sequence mapping in wireless
communications
JP2010-530667
US20080305788; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Quality of service information configuration
JP2010-531097
US20080310303; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for providing gateway relocation
when performing a handover
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-43
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20080311914; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN
Rate matching with multiple code block sizes
JP2010-512361
US20090041110; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for PDCP reordering at handoff
JP2010-531115
US20080310367; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Delivery of handover command
JP2010-531117
US20090046656; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Multiplexing of sounding singals in ACK and CQI
channels
JP2010-530724
US20090073955; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for fast inter-system handover
JP2010-531116
US20090016300; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Control channel format indicator frequency mapping
JP2010-531119
US20090022235; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Encryption of the scheduled uplink message in random
access procedure
JP2010-531582
US20090041246; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatus for neighbor discovery of base
stations in a communication system
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-530723
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-44
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-531627
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090029706; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG;
TW; UA; VN
Scrambling codes for secondary sychronization codes in
wireless communication systems
JP2011-501517
US20090122839; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
MIP/PMIP concatenation when overlapping address
space are used
JP2010-534034
US20090016270; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Mobile IP multiple registrations and PCC interactions
JP2011-511602
US20090196231; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Methods and systems for CDMA network switching
notification in a WIMAX network
JP2011-523812
US20090285186; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Methods and apparatus for resolving pilot
pseudorandom noise code conflicts in a communication
system
JP2010-534036
US20090023464; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Optimizing in-order delivery of data packets during
wireless communication handover
JP2010-537505
US20090052397; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods, apparatuses and computer program products
for inter-system handoff implementing tunneling
between source and target access systems
JP2010-534046
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Recovery from handoff error due to false detection of
handoff completion signal at access terminal
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-45
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090040981; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Multiplexing and transmission of traffic data and control
information in a wireless communication system
JP2010-536260
US20090073922; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN
Quality of service continuity
JP2011-514746
US20090201884; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Frequency diverse transmissions in a wireless
communication system
JP2010-537501
US20090073929; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for supporting broadcast and
multicast services in a wireless communication system
JP2010-538503
US20090047942; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Mimo transmission with spatial pre-coding
JP2011-517373
US20090046800; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; VN
Secondary synchronization codebook for E-UTRAN
JP2010-537497
BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU; SG;
TW
Resource scaling in wireless communication systems
JP2011-504326
US20090116389; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatus for in-order delivery of data
packets during handoff
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-534453
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-46
Paging user devices in a wireless access network
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-538584
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090061851; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Resolving node identifier confusion
JP2011-504060
US20090132674; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Configuring an access point of a FEMTO cell
JP2011-504352
US20090129354; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatus for including communication
mode information (TDD or FDD) in a transmission frame
for system acquisition
JP2010-539799
US7,860,036; US20110064007; AU;
BE; BG; BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL;
IN; IT; KR; MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PL;
RO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA; VN
FEMTO cell synchronization and pilot search
methodology
JP2011-501526
US20090097452; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus of power control for a public
warning system
JP2011-501885
US20090130972; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN
Integrity protection and/or ciphering for UE registration
with a wireless network
JP2011-525207
US20100054472; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-47
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090221283; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Medium access control header format
JP2010-541495
US20090141670; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN
Method and apparatus for implementing LTE RLC
header formats
JP2010-528104
US20090086710; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Efficient system identification schemes for
communication systems
JP2011-504310
US20090129298; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatus for self configuring network
relations
JP2011-504674
US20090191866; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Arrangement and method for transmitting control
information in wireless communication systems
JP2011-502436
US20090110038; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Buffer status report triggers in wireless communications
US20100070814*
TW
Methods and systems for HFN handling at inter-base
station handover in mobile communication networks
JP2011-502438
US20090122762; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Assisted initial network acquisition and system
determination
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-514778
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-48
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-504675
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090116399; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Time slot reservation for a dominant interference
scenario in a wireless
communication network through direct communication
between interferred and
Interfering base station
JP2011-504062
US20090131065; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Interference management in a wireless communication
system using adaptive path loss adjustment
JP2011-517863
US20090137241; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Concurrent transmission of ACK/NACK, CQI and CQI
from user equipment
US20100232311*
Control information allocation method in a
communications system
JP2011-514727
US20090196247; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for sending and receiving
random access response in a wireless communication
system
JP2011-509565
US20090156194; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for transfer of a message on a
common control channel for random access in a
wireless communication network
JP2011-508538
US20090163211; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
System information modification notification and
detection in wireless communications
JP2011-512709
US20090181661; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Service data unit discard timers
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090182883; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
JP2011-514716
US20090196277; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA
JP2011-504351
US20090129291; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Enhanced multiplexing system and technique for uplink
control channels
JP2011-511603
US20090201869; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Policy control for encapsulated data flows
JP2011-517864
US20090199268; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatus for controlling transmission of a
base station
JP2011-514758
US20090213825; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and systems for parallel acquistion of system
information from multiple base stations
JP2011-527905
US20100067448; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Transmission and reception of dedicated reference
signals
JP2011-519509
US20100062783; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Policy control and charging (PCC) rules based on
mobility protocol
Wireless network synchronization
Configuring an identifier for an access point of
FEMTO cell
AT2-49
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
a
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-514029
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-50
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-519195
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090232019; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Dynamic assignment of ACK resource in a wireless
communication system
JP2011-517191
US20090245194; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method of network management by assistance from
terminal using control-plane signaling between terminal
and network
JP2011-515955
US20090257353; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Filtering semi-persistent scheduling false alarms
JP2011-515959
US20090257385; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for resource management in a
wireless communication system
JP2011-517892
US20090238131; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Cell selection and reselection in deployments with home
nodeBs
JP2011-518472
US20090238114; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Dynamic home network
JP2011-519198
US20090238099; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
JP2011-517186
US20090245176; AU; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Providing multiple levels of service for wireless
communication
assignment
Device managed access point lists in wireless
communications
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-51
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090245284; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for mapping virtual resources to
physical resources in a wireless communication system
JP2011-516006
US20090245193; AU; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Scrambling and modulation to constrain the
constellation size of ACK/NAK transmission on the data
channel
JP2011-516008
US20090245421; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for resource allocation in
wireless communication systems
JP2011-519200
US20090279493; AU; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods of reliably sending control signal
JP2011-519205
US20090257449; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and system for facilitating execution of
automatic neighbor relation functions
JP2011-517905
US20090247159; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Determinative segmentation resegmentation and
padding in radio link control (RLC) service data units
(SDU)
JP2011-517904
US20090252182; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Generic positioning protocol
JP2011-523244
US20090253440; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Encoding and decoding of control information for
wireless communication
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-518496
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-52
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-521512
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090252077; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Systems and methods to define control channels using
reserved resource blocks
JP2011-517234
US20090257388; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Selective bearer establishment in evolved universal
terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) and evolved packet
system (EPS)
JP2011-517217
US20090252132; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for management of automatic
neighbor relation function in wireless networks
JP2011-518531
US20090264130; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatuses for uplink control and data
transmission in a mixed single and multiple carrier
network
WO2011011636*
US20110176498; TW
Partial radio link control status report
JP2011-521537
US20090268683; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for uplink ACK/NACK resource
allocation
JP2011-520360
US20090274109; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Autonomous downlink code selection for FEMTO cells
JP2011-522468
US20100118801; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Using multicast broadcast single frequency network
(MBSFN) subframes to send unicast information
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-53
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100034163; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Multi-carrier design for control and procedures
comprising pairing of carriers
JP2011-523073
US20100035625; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Downlink grants in a multicarrier wireless
communication system
JP2011-523072
US20100034303; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; NZ; PH; RU; SG;
TW
Multi-carrier grant design
JP2011-523142
US20100040004; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
A method and apparatus for PCC enhancement for flow
based mobility
JP2011-523332
US20090305701; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Correlating registrations originating from a device
JP2011-522247
US20100197305; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Using identifiers to establish communication
JP2011-504690
US20090132675; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Registration and access control in FEMTO cell
deployments
JP2011-523308
US20090305699; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Anchor carrier in a multiple carrier wireless
communication system
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-523074
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-54
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-524693
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090310503; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Apparatus and method for generating performance
measurements in wireless networks
JP2011-525326
US20090310501; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Conveying session continuity information in a
multi-component communication session
JP2011-525752
US20090319676; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
System and method for network management
JP2011-520241
US20100022263; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Coordinated transmission between cells of a base
station in a wireless communications system
JP2011-522228
US20100035600; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for power control of first data
transmission in random access procedure of FDMA
communication system
JP2011-525786
US20100041428; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Network element configuration scheme
JP2011-527162
US20100002603; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for handling measurement gaps
in wireless networks
JP2011-522282
US20100034126; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for initiating random access
procedure in wireless networks
JP2011-522187
US20100034141; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for managing interaction
between DRX cycles and paging cycles
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-55
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100013701; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Cell identifier assignment and selection
JP2011-520240
US20100020710; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN
RNTI-dependent scrambling sequence initialization
JP2011-522275
US20100034161; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Processing polling requests from radio link control peers
JP2011-522293
US20100034095; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Intra-frequency cell reselection restriction in wireless
communications
JP2011-522074
US20100035615; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Utilizing HARQ for uplink grants received in wireless
communications
JP2011-522283
US20100037113; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatuses for processing measurement
gaps in a wireless communication system
JP2011-523125
US20100034158; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
System, methods and apparatus for facilitating buffer
status report robustness
JP2011-523123
US20100034147; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Methods and apparatuses for requesting/providing
assistance data associated with various satellite
positioning systems in wireless communication
networks
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-528785
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-56
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-523141
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100040001; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN
Control plane solution for location service to support
wireless access
JP2011-523916
US20100041418; CA; EP; TW
Efficiently identifying system waveform in uplink
transmission
JP2011-527009
US20100067591; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Interference management for different wireless
communication technologies
JP2011-527008
US20100067469; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for managing a new data
indicator in a wireless communication system
JP2011-526311
US20100067468; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Reference signal design for LTE advanced
JP2011-528017
US20100075706; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IN; KR; MX; MY; RU;
SG; TW; ZA
Apparatus and method for facilitating transmit diversity
for communications
JP2011-529195
US20100074210; BR; CA; CN; EP;
ID; IL; IN; KR; MY; PH; RU; TW; ZA
Highly detectable pilot structure
JP2011-529193
US20100074344; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Synchronizing a base station in a wireless
communication system
JP2011-528005
US20100074180; BR; CA; CN; EP;
ID; IN; KR; PH; RU; TW; ZA
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Handling uplink grant in random access response
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-57
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100074109; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for reducing successive
pre-registration attempts by access terminals
JP2011-529197
US20100075680; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Synchronizing bearer context
JP2011-529333
US20100081444; AE; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; MY; PH; RU; TW;
VN; ZA
System and methods to facilitate connections to access
networks
JP2011-542279
US20100205099; AE; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; UA; VN; ZA
Methods and apparatus for system selection in a
multimode wireless device
JP2011-533345
US20100099412; AE; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IN; KR; RU; TW; UA;
VN; ZA
Support for multiple access modes for home base
stations
JP2011-534829
US20100112980; AE; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IN; KR; RU; TW; ZA
A method and apparatus for supporting the large service
data unit (SDU)
JP2011-535760
US20100135212; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Transport block size (TBS) signaling enhancement
JP3850826
US7,289,452; AU; BR; CA; CN; DE;
EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; HU; IN; IT; KR;
MX; MY; NL; RO; RU; TW
Network and mobile device initiated quality of service
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-528018
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-58
Diversity transmitter and diversity transmission method
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP3978426
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,158,579; US7,623,590;
US20100098187; BE; CA; CN; DE;
EP; ES; FR; GB; ID; IE; IN; IT; KR;
NL; SE
Signalling method
JP3502604
US6,751,227; USRE41,773; AT; AU;
BR; CA; CH; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; IT; KR; MX; NL; SE; TR
Transporting QoS Mapping Information in a Packet
Radio Network
JP3625769
US7,167,447; US20060126547; AU;
BE; CA; CH; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; IT; MX
Measurement reporting in a telecommunication system
JP4122132
US7,003,290; US7,499,701; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IT;
NL; SE
Services on demand in mobile communications system
JP2009-144220
US6,957,063; US7,266,366;
US7,873,354; BE; CN; DE; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; IE; IT; NL; SE
A method for controlling connections to a mobile station
JP3515073
US6,807,421; US7,684,361; JP; BE;
BR; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; IT;
NL; SE
Radio resource management
JP4619621
US7,072,663; JP; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; FR; GB; IT; NL; RU
A method for initiating in a terminal of a cellular network
the measurement of power levels of signals and a
terminal
JP2006-129531
US7,096,021; AT; BR; CA; CH; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; IT; KR; NL;
SE
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-59
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20110110296; JP; CN; IN; TW
Hearability improvements for reference signals
JP2011-544681
US20100172311; AE; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; MX; PH; RU; TW; ZA
Provision of inter-frequency subframe configuration in
wireless communication
JP2011-544663
US20100172272; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Method and apparatus for computing and reporting
channel quality indication (CQI)
JP2011-545483
US20100177653; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Frequency hopping in a wireless communication
network
JP2011-547927
US20100189032; CA; CN; EP; ID;
IN; KR; MY; RU; TW; UA; ZA
Flexible data and control multiplexing
US20100214938*
JP; BR; CA; CN; EP; ID; IN; KR; PH;
RU; TW; ZA
Antenna virtualization in a wireless communication
environment
JP2011-548403
US20100202560; AE; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; RU; TW; ZA
PCFICH design for multicarrier operation
WO2010127292*
US20110096734; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Systems, methods and apparatus for facilitating
discontinuous reception in a multi-carrier wireless
communication system
WO2010129597*
US20110105069; JP; CN; EP; IN;
TW
Method and apparatus for maintaining location
continuity for a UE following handover
JP2011-549340
US20100202407; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Data and control multiplexing in wireless
communications
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2010129605*
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-60
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-549336
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100202559; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Managing access control to closed subscriber groups
JP2011-549342
US20100203865; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Fall back using mobile device assisted terminating
access domain selection
WO2010115045*
US20100303012; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; PH; RU; UA; ZA
Timing adjustment for synchronous operation in a
wireless network
US20100222068*
JP; BR; CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
Discontinuous uplink transmission operation and
interference avoidance for a multi-carrier system
US20100260121*
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
Methods and apparatus for adjacent channel
interference mitigation in access point base stations
WO2010105232*
US20100234040; JP; BR; CN; EP;
IN; KR; TW
Method and apparatus for handling inconsistent control
information in a wireless communication system
US20100238823*
JP; AE; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; ID; IN;
KR; MY; PH; RU; TH; TW; ZA
Method and apparatus for uplink power control in a
multicarrier wireless communication system
WO2010129616*
US20110111788; JP; AE; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IN; MY; PH; TW; ZA
Re-establishment procedure for an emergency call
WO2010115155*
US20100255807; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Methods and apparatus for generation and use of
reference signals in a communications system
WO2010120530*
US20100246527; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MY; PH; RU; TH;
TW; ZA
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Multiplexing and coding schemes for multiple transmit
antennas in a wireless communication system
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-61
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100260168; JP; AU; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; PH; TH; TW; ZA
Minimizing the impact of self synchronization on
wireless communication devices
WO2010118260*
US20100260169; JP; BR; CN; EP;
IN; KR; TW
Control of radio links in a multiple carrier system
WO2010120981*
US20100271939; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Method, apparatus and computer program product for
determining QOS of communications based on CSG
membership
WO2010121198*
US20100265827; JP; BR; CN; EP;
IN; KR; TW
Systems, methods, and devices to enable selection of
radio access technology
WO2010123924*
US20100265914; JP; AE; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IN; KR; MY; RU; TW;
VN; ZA
Method and apparatus for control and data multiplexing
in a MIMO communication system
WO2010124244*
US20110103498; JP; CA; CN; EP;
ID; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH; TH; TW; ZA
Establishing packet data network connectivity for local
internet protocol access traffic
WO2010123643*
US20100272013; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IN; KR; PH; TH; TW; VN;
ZA
Systems, apparatus and methods for facilitating
emergency call service in wireless communication
systems
WO2010127331*
US20100279648; JP; AE; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; TH; TW; ZA
Transmission and detection of overhead channels and
signals in a wireless network
WO2010127332*
US20100278132; JP; BR; CN; EP;
IN; KR; TW
Conveying synchronization stratum information
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2010118261*
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-62
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2010127300*
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20110110316; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Semi-persistent scheduling for multi-carrier wireless
communication
WO2010129617*
US20110116454; JP; CN; IN; TW
Multicarrier retransmission feedback
WO2010129810*
US20110116457; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; IN; MY; PH; TH; TW; ZA
Transaction management
WO2010135473*
US20110130157; JP; AE; CA; CN;
EP; IN; MY; PH; SG; TW
Method and apparatus for assisted positioning in a
wireless communication system
US20110117925*
Downlink control channel for relay resource allocation
WO2011005787*
US20110164550; TW
Low reuse preamble
WO2011008878*
US20110013531; TW
Synchronization of devices in a wireless communication
network
WO2011011760*
US20110176483; TW
Determining control region parameters for multiple
transmission points
WO2011014829*
US20110026473; TW
Resource specification for broadcast/multicast services
WO2011019977*
US20110194477; TW
Method and apparatus for uplink power control for
multiple transmit antennas
WO2011017462*
US20110044296; TW
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
PDCCH search space design for LTE-A multi-carrier
operation
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-63
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20110070845; TW
Signaling identification of machine to machine devices
and services
WO2011041459*
US20110256896; TW
Uplink control channel resource allocation for transmit
diversity
WO2011041445*
US20110228731; TW
UE-RS sequence initialization for
communication systems
WO2011041544*
US20110237267; TW
Methods and apparatuses for rate adaption in response
to network congestion
WO2011041519*
US20110075563; TW
Carrier indicator field for cross carrier assignments
WO2011044038*
US20110080883; TW
Resource management and admission control for
non-members of a closed subscriber group in home
radio access networks
WO2011059764*
US20110218004; TW
Method, apparatuses and computer program product for
a circuit switched fallback procedure handling conflict
when handover occurs during CS fallback
WO2011053849*
US20110216645; TW
Method and apparatus for managing a select IP traffic
offload for mobile communications based on user
location
WO2011069119*
US20110235546; TW
Multiple carrier indication and downlink control
information interaction
wireless
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2011032035*
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Apparatus and method for assigning frequency to
support high-speed downlink packet access service in
orthogonal frequency division multiplexing mobile
communication system
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4243264
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,826,415; AU; EP; IN; KR
AT2-64
Method for configuring and managing channel in a
wireless communication system using AMC channel and
diversity channel, transmission/reception apparatus
therefor, and system thereof
JP2008-541548
US20060268983; AU; BR; IN; KR;
RU
Methods and apparatus for channel quality indication
feedback in a communication system
JP2011-509559
US20090163142; CN; EP; IN; KR
Method and apparatus for multiplexing data and control
information in wireless communication systems based
on frequency division multiple access
JP4319665
US7,613,245; US7,697,631;
US7,929,590; US20110170533; AU;
CN; EP; IN; KR; RU
Appareil et procede de generation de turbocodes quasi
complimentaires
JP3636708
US7,093,185; US7,200,796; JP;
AU; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; FI; FR;
GB; IN; IT; KR; RU; SE
Method and apparatus for managing local internet
protocol offload
WO2011130294*
Method and apparatus for transmitting the sync channel
message in a multi-carrier communication system
JP4499299
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
US13/080,479; AR; TW
US6,925,067; US7,486,653;
US7,447,189; US7,508,790;
US20090059893; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IN; KR; MX; NO; RU;
SG; TW; UA
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for estimating reverse link
loading in a wireless communication system
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4668491
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US6,397,070; BR; CN; EP; HK;
KR; TW
AT2-65
JP2011-055507
US6,778,507; JP; BR; CN; DE;
EP; FR; GB; HK; KR; TW
Method and apparatus for providing mobility within a
network
JP4638109
US6,366,561; US7,272,138; JP;
AU; BR; CN; DE; EP; FR; GB; HK;
KR
Method and apparatus for concurrently processing
multiple calls in a spread spectrum communications
system
JP4307772
US6,625,198; US7,184,459;
US7,466,741; JP; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; NO; RU; SE; SG; TW;
UA
Transmission method in multiplex-antenna
communications system, base station, and the
multiplex-antenna communications system
JP4851124
US6,473,467; JP; AT; AU; BE; BR;
CA; CH; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; GR; HK; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; NL; NO; PT; RU; SE; SG; TW;
UA
An Improved GPS Receiver Utilizing a Communication
Link
JP2000-506348
US5,841,396; US6,064,336; JP;
CH; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
GR; HK; IE; IT; KR; NL; PT; SE
Method and apparatus for determining time for GPS
receivers
JP2001-505665
US5,945,944; US6,150,980;
US6,433,734; JP; BE; CH; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; IE; IT;
KR; LI; NL; PT; SE
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Method and apparatus for beamforming in a wireless
communication system
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for acquiring satellite positioning
system signals
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2002-532724
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US6,133,874; AU; BE; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID;
IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; SE; SG
AT2-66
Method and apparatus for satellite positioning system
(SPS) time measurement
JP2003-523500
US6,377,209; US6,583,757; JP;
AU; BE; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IN; IT; KR; MX;
NL; SE
Call setup latency reduction by encapsulating signalling
messages
JP4163108
US6,952,411; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IN;
IT; KR; NL; SE; TW
Method and apparatus for secure data transmission in a
mobile communication system
JP2005-537713
US7,185,362; US20070116282;
JP; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR;
MX; TW
Method and apparatus for data packet transport in a
wireless communications system using an internet
protocol
JP2005-534202
US7,184,789; JP; BE; BG; BR;
CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL;
NO; SE; SG; TW
Packet flow processing in a communication system
JP2005-529554
US20060256719;
US20110273984; JP; BR; CN; DE;
EP; GB; HK; KR; TW
User terminal-initiated hard handoff from a wireless local
area network to a cellular network
JP2009-512354
US7,706,796; US20110064058;
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR
Power control using erasure techniques
JP4643636
US7,536,626; JP; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN;
ZA
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
AT2-67
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Robust erasure detection and erasure-rate-based
closed loop power control
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4575442
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,197,692; US20070150799;
US20110296279; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CL; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN;
ZA
AT2-68
Power control for a wireless communication system
utilizing orthogonal multiplexing
JP4616339
US20060019694;
US20090023466; US20080214121;
JP; AR; AU; BE; BG; BR; CA; CL;
CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX;
NL; NO; NZ; PH; PL; RO; RU; SG;
TW; UA; VN; ZA
Systems and methods for providing channel quality
feedback for downlink MIMO transmission adjustment
JP2010-502121
US20070105503; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Multiplexing of W-CDMA and OFDM signals in a
wireless communication system
JP2008-502225
US7,920,884; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
RU; TW; UA
Transmission of overhead information for broadcast and
multicast services in a wireless communication system
JP4653165
US20060018269; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
RU; TW; UA
Wireless communication system with configurable cyclic
prefix length
JP4612046
US20060013325; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
RU; TW; UA
Coding and modulation for broadcast and multicast
services in a wireless communication system
JP2008-502220
US20060013168; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
RU; TW; UA
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
AT2-69
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Multicarrier Modulation System with Cyclic Delay
Diversity
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2008-502223
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20060013186;
US20090304120; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; RU;
TW; UA
AT2-70
Interference control in a wireless communication system
JP2008-533924
US20060285503; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CL; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TH; TW;
UA; VN
Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency
division wireless communication system
JP2009-514459
US20060209732; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; DE; EP; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG;
TW; UA; VN
Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency
division wireless communication system
JP2008-533928
US20060209670; BR; CA; CL;
CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TH;
TW
Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency
division wireless communication system
JP2008533927
US20060209973; JP; AR; BE; BG;
BR; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; MY; NL; PL;
RO; RU; SE; SG; TW
Systems and methods for beamforming in multi-input
multi-output communication systems
JP4723632
US20060203794; JP; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA;
VN
Systems and methods for beamforming and rate control
in a multi-input multi-output communication systems
JP4768805
US20060203891; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TH; UA; VN
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
AT2-71
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Frequency hopping design for IFDMA, LFDMA and
OFDMA systems
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2008-538488
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20060233124; US13/299,898;
JP; BE; BG; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL;
PL; RO; SE; TW
AT2-72
Method and Apparatus for Locating a Wireless Local
Area Network in a Wide Area Network
JP4791545
US20070019586; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and Apparatus for Maintaining a Fingerprint for
a Wireless Network
JP4791546
US20070021126; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Resource allocation for shared signalin channels in
OFDM
JP2009-514455
AU; BR; CA; CL; CN; EP; HK; ID;
IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Global navigation satellite system
JP2010-533862
US7,893,869; US20110187593;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Enhanced techniques for using core based nodes for
state transfer
JP2011-125049
US7,668,541; US20110019614;
JP; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR
Methods and apparatus for determining, communicating
and using information including loading factors for
interference control
JP4782841
US20070140168; CL; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TH; TW
Methods and apparatus for determining, communicating
and using information including loading factors for
interference control
JP2009-512357
US20070104164; CL; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TH; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatus for determining, communicating
and using information which can be used for
interference control purposes
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-507284
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US11/549,617; CN; EP; IN; KR
AT2-73
JP2009-512360
US20070253355; CL; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TH; TW
Methods and apparatus for controlling a base station's
transmission power
JP4782842
US20070253385; CL; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; TH; TW
Communications methods and apparatus using physical
attachment point identifiers
JP2009-521846
US20070147377; BR; CA; CL;
CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TH;
TW
Communications methods and apparatus using physical
attachment point identifiers which support dual
communications links
JP2009-521866
US20070147286; AR; BR; CN;
DE; EP; GB; IN; KR; RU; TW
Method and apparatus for end node assisted neighbor
discovery
JP4733190
US20070147283; AR; BE; BG;
BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO;
RU; SE; SG; TW
Methods and apparatus for reporting and/or using
control information
JP2009-521861
US20070149128; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Methods and apparatus for communicating backlog
related information
JP2009-521856
US20070258365; AR; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; TH; TW
Methods and apparatus related to selecting reporting
alternative in a request report
JP2009-521897
US20070253358; BE; BG; CN;
CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK;
HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE;
TW
ARIB STD-T95
Methods and apparatus for broadcasting loading
information corresponding to neighboring base stations
ARIB STD-T95
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
AT2-74
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatus related to selecting a request
group for a request report
Methods and apparatus for communicating transmission
backlog information
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-521858
JP2009-521870
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20070253357; CN; DE; EP;
GB; HK; IN; KR; TW
US20070149129;
US20100220626; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE;
IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE; TW
AT2-75
JP2009-521855
US20070149137; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE;
IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE; TW
Methods and apparatus for communicating information
utilizing a plurality of dictionaries
JP2009-521873
US20070149138; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Methods and apparatus for selecting control channel
reporting formats
JP2009-521871
US20070149132; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Methods and apparatus of implementing and/or using a
dedicated control channel
JP2009-521859
US20070149131; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE;
IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; SE; TW
Method and apparatus for selecting between a plurality
of dictionaries
JP2009-521860
US20070249287; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE;
IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE; TW
Methods and apparatus for determining,
communicating, and/or using delay information in a
wireless communications system
JP2009-521853
US20070249360; AR; CN; DE; EP;
GB; HK; IN; KR; TH; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Methods and apparatus for communicating control
information
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-76
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-521872
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20070253449; CN; DE; EP; GB;
HK; IN; KR; TH; TW
Provision of a move indication to a rescource requester
JP2009-509466
US20070086389; CN; EP; IN; KR
Packet routing in a wireless communications
environment
JP2009-509468
US20070076653; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HU; IE; IN;
IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE
Provision of QOS treatment based upon multiple
requests
JP2009-509467
US20070076658; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR
Methods and apparatus for supporting quality of service
in communication systems
JP2009-533982
US20070243879; CN; EP; IN; KR
Providing quality of service for various traffic flows in a
communications environment
JP2009-533984
US7,907,970; AR; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Methods and systems for processing overhead
reduction for control channel packets
JP2009-542126
US20110255522; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NO; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; VN
Method and apparatus for low-overhead packet data
transmission and control of reception mode
JP2010-501148
US20080056229; AU; BE; BG; BR;
CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PH; PL; RO;
RU; SE; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for cell search in an orthogonal
wireless communication system
JP2010-508788
US20100103906; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatus determining, communicating,
and/or using delay information
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-77
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100035611; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Resource requests for a wireless communication
system
JP2010-517490
US20080186931; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Control channel constraints in wireless communications
JP2010-517491
US20080188233; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW
Cyclic delay diversity and precoding for wireless
communication
JP2010-519794
US20080247364; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Apparatus and method for MIMO transmission with
explicit and implicit cyclic delays
JP2010-518757
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN
Preamble based uplink power control for LTE
JP2010-518787
US7,986,959; US20110294530; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA;
VN
Uplink power control for LTE
JP2010-518788
US20080280638; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Positioning using enhanced pilot signal
JP2011-511502
US20090203386; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Reference signal design for cell search in an orthogonal
wireless communication system
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-508789
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-78
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-529720
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20080287155; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Pilot structures for ACK and CQI in a wireless
communication system
JP2010-528534
US20080298502; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW
Apparatus and method of determining a precoding
matrix in a multi-input multi-output (MIMO) system
JP2010-537515
US8,014,265; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for beamforming of control
information in a wireless communication system
JP2010-537516
US8,009,617; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Utilizing restriction codes in wireless access point
connection attempts
JP2011-504055
US20090137228; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Favoring access points in wireless communications
JP2011-504056
US20090137249; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Utilizing broadcast signals to convey restricted
association information
JP2011-504057
US20090129338; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Classifying access points using pilot identifiers
JP2011-504059
US20090135784; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for multiplexing and power
control of uplink control channels in a wireless
communication system
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-79
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090129327; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Access management for wireless communication
JP2010-541514
US20090094680; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Provisioning communication nodes
JP2011-501917
US20090093232; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Access terminal configuration and access control
JP2010-541515
US20090094351; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Method and apparatus for supporting positioning for
terminals in a wireless network
WO2010124011*
US20110098057; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MY; PH; SG;
TH; TW; VN; ZA
Supporting version negotiation for positioning for
terminals in a wireless network
US20110212733*
Wireless communication paging utilizing multiple types
of node identifiers
JP2011-512070
US20090181672; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Wireless communication paging and registration utilizing
multiple types of node identifiers
JP2011-512071
US20100069062; AU; BR; CN; EP;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Sector identification using sector parameters signatures
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-504689
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
(selection of option 2)
AT2-80
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-526137
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20090316657; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Concentrator for multiplexing access point to wireless
network connections
JP2011-525785
US20090316604; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Concentrator for multiplexing access point to wireless
network connections
JP2011-526457
US20090316629; AT; AU; BE; BR;
CA; CH; CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PH;
PL; PT; RO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA;
VN
Access terminal assisted node identifier confusion
resolution using a time gap
JP2011-525341
US20090316654; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Access terminal assisted node identifier confusion
resolution
JP2011-525342
US20090316655; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Techinques for supporting relay operation in wireless
communication systems
JP2011-530148
US20100080139; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Techniques for supporting relay operation in wireless
communication systems
JP2011-530149
US20100080166; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Cell relay network attachment procedures
JP2011-533385
US20100103857; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Concentrator for multiplexing access point to wireless
network connections
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-81
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100103863; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Header compression for cell relay communications
JP2011-533413
US20100103865; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Transmission of feedback information for multi-carrier
operation
WO2010129618*
US20110110246; JP; CN; IN; TW
Transmission of feedback information in multi-carriers
systems and determination of up-link ACK/NACK
resources from down-link CCE of the down-link grant
WO2010129619*
US20110116455; JP; AU; CA; CN;
ID; IN; TW; VN; ZA
Switching wireless network selection modes in
conjunction with selection of a wireless cell set
JP2011-535628
US20100113020; AE; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; PH; RU; TW; VN; ZA
Selection of wireless network in conjunction with
selection of a wireless cell set
JP2011-535629
US20100110987; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Maintaining closed subscriber group information for
access control
JP2011-543661
US20100161794; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
A technique for compressing a header field in a data
packet
JP4159287
US6,680,955; JP; AU; BE; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; IE; IN;
IT; KR; MX; NL; RU; SE
Radio link failure reporting
JP2011-536569
US20100124173; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; RU; TW; ZA
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Bearer QoS mapping for cell relays
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-533388
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Mobility management based on radio link failure
reporting
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-536568
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100124918; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; RU; TW; ZA
AT2-82
Access point handover control based on closed
subscriber group subscription information
JP2011-543663
US20100157943; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Handover control based on closed subscriber group
subscription information
JP2011-543664
US20100157944; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Handover failure messaging schemes
JP2011-545410
US20100173633; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Adaption of handover parameters
JP2011-545411
US20100173626; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Method and apparatus for enabling multiple
transmission modes based on multiple search spaces
JP2011-545529
US20100177700; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
Method and apparatus for enabling multiple
transmission modes in a wireless communication
system
JP2011-545531
US20100177810; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
CSG membership indication
JP2011-548355
US20100197285; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Access control for access terminals at access points
associated with closed subscriber groups
JP2011-548358
US20100197307; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW
QOS mapping for relay nodes
WO2010118426*
US20100260129; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Header compression for IP relay nodes
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2010118431*
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100260098; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
AT2-83
WO2010120828*
US20100260097; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Minimizing interference to non-associated users
WO2010135466*
US20100298005; JP; CN; EP; IN;
TW
Minimizing interference to non-associated users
WO2010135471*
US20100297997; JP; CN; EP; IN;
TW
Maintaining controllee information in collaborative
sessions
WO2010132820*
US20100312834; JP; CN; EP; IN;
TW
Controlling media and informing controller status in
collaborative sessions
WO2010132824*
US20100312841; JP; CN; EP; IN;
TW
Rank and precoding indication for MIMO operation
WO2010124248*
US20110103510; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Rank and precoding indication for MIMO operation
WO2010124252*
US20110110455; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Rank and precoding indication for MIMO operation
WO2010124254*
US20110105137; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW
Access mode-based access control
WO2010129612*
US20100278147; JP; CN; IN; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Device mobility for split-cell relay networks
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Access mode-based access control
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2010129613*
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100279687; JP; BR; CN; IN;
KR; TW
WO2011019771*
US20110191430; TW
Identifying a domain for delivery of message service
information
WO2011019772*
US20110188448; TW
Apparatus and Method for Reducing Message Collision
Between Mobile Stations Simultaneously Accessing a
Base Station in a CDMA Cellular Communications
System
JP3152353
US5,544,196; US6,615,050;
US6,985,728; US20060121897;
US7,734,260; US7,426,391; AT; AU;
BE; BG; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; IE;
IL; IT; KP; KR; MX; NL; PT; RU; SE;
SK; ZA
High data rate CDMA wireless communication system
JP4263749
US5,930,230; US6,535,496;
US6,728,230; US6,424,619; JP; AT;
AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; IE; IL;
IN; IT; KR; LU; MC; MX; NL; PT; SE;
SG; TW; ZA
A subscriber unit and method for use in a wireless
communication system
JP4132088
US7,715,461; US20100177744;
US6,678,311; US6,621,875; AR; AT;
AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CL; CN; CY;
CZ; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
GR; HK; IE; IL; IT; KR; LU; MC; MX;
NL; NO; NZ; PT; RU; SE; SG; VN
AT2-84
Domain selection for mobile-originated message service
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
A subscriber unit and method for use in a wireless
communication system
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4130484
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US6,549,525; US6,396,804; JP;
AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CL; CN; DE;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; ID; IE;
IL; IN; IT; KR; LU; MC; MX; MY; NL;
NO; PT; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA
AT2-85
Subscriber Unit for a CDMA Wireless Communication
System
JP3998716
US5,926,500; AR; AT; AU; BR;
CA; CH; CL; CN; DE; DK; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; IE; IT; KR; NL;
PT; SE
A wireless communication device and method
JP4790879
US6,011,978; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IL;
IT; KR; MX; NO; RU; SE; SG
Method for acquiring an alternate communication
system
JP4542176
US6,463,298; JP; AM; AR; AU;
AZ; BR; BY; CA; EA; IL; IN; KG; KR;
KZ; MD; MY; RU; SG; TJ; TM
Method of and apparatus for encrypting signals for
transmission
JP4260896
US6,075,859; US6,385,316;
US6,768,797; US7,995,751;
US13/206,300; BE; BR; CA; CN; DE;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IN; IT;
KR; MX; MY; NL; RO; RU; SE; ZA
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
A Method of and Apparatus for Paging a Wireless
Terminal in a Wireless Telecommunications System
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP3983818
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US6,832,094; US20050064880;
US8,046,005; US7,983,695;
US7,970,420; US7,555,302;
US8,068,859; US6,393,295; JP; AR;
AT; AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CL; CN;
CY; CZ; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
GR; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; LI;
LU; MC; MX; MY; NL; NZ; PL; PT;
RU; SE; SG; TW; UA; ZA
JP4339508
US6,574,211; US7,079,550;
US7,184,426; US20060280160;
US7,848,284; US8,077,655;
US8,005,042; US7,848,283;
US8,009,625; US20070025267;
US7,848,285; US7,499,427;
US7,848,282; US7,995,531;
US20090310588; US20070025320;
JP; AR; AT; AU; BE; BR; CA; CH;
CL; CN; CY; CZ; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN;
IT; KR; LU; MC; MX; MY; NL; NO;
NZ; PL; PT; RO; RU; SE; SG; UA;
VN; ZA
Method and apparatus for coordinating transmission of
short messages with hard handoff searches in a
wireless communications system
JP4833898
US6,535,563; US7,010,068;
US7,664,209; US7,653,157; JP; AU;
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; FI; FR; GB;
HK; IL; IT; KR; MX; NO; SE; SG; TW
AT2-86
Method and apparatus for high rate packet data
transmission
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatuses for fast power control of
signals transmitted on a mulitple access channel
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4499285
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US6,275,478; US7,286,499;
US20080102878; JP; CN; DE; EP;
FR; GB; HK; KR; TW
AT2-87
Distributed infrastructure for wireless cata
communications
JP4673435
US6,215,779; JP; CN; DE; EP;
FR; GB; HK; KR
Distributed infrastructure for wireless data
communications
JP2004-525578
US7,248,572; US7,715,356;
US20100220688; JP; AT; BE; BR;
CA; CH; CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; GR; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; NL; NO; PT; RU; SE; SG; UA
Method for robust handoff in wireless communication
system
JP4536926
US6,360,100; US7,233,794;
US20070105584; JP; AU; BE; BR;
CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HK; ID; IE; IL; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO;
RU; SE; SG; UA
Reservation multiple access
JP4485687
US6,256,301; CN; EP; HK; KR
Reservation multiple access
JP4638052
ARIB STD-T95
*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
US6,987,982; US7,613,462;
US8,014,805; US6,788,937; JP; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IT; KR;
NL; SE
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method, Device and System for Implementing Optimized
Inter-RAT Handover
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2012-16345
AT2-88
METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING
INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN IP DOMAINS
JP2012-5959
Method, System and Device for Processing Circuit Switched
Services in an Evolved Packet Network
JP2012-6889
METHOD AND
SCHEDULING
RESOURCE
JP2011-277483
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING SERVICES FOR
USER
JP2011-245402
A DATA PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM
JP2011-165390
RELAY TRANSMISSION METHOD AND NETWORK NODE
JP2011-534997
Method and system for allocating communication resources
JP2011-90014
METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING UPLINK
CARRIER FREQUENCIES
JP2011-546577
METHOD
FOR
SIGNALLING
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
WIRELESS
JP2011-542652
Method and Apparatus for Binding Redundancy Versions with a
System Frame Number and Subframe Numbers
JP2011-527189
SYSTEM
FOR
MEDIA
IN
A
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method, User Equipment and Server for Multimedia Session
Transfer
System and Method for SR-VCC of IMS Emergency Sessions
Method and System for Session Controlling
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-528175
JP2011-517742
JP2011-517741
JP2011-546576
Tunnel Management Method, Tunnel Management Apparatus,
and Communications System
JP2011-517739
PAGING METHOD, NETWORK ELEMENT, MANAGEMENT
NETWORK ELEMENT AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
JP2011-521426
Method, Apparatus and System for Paging Processing and
Information Displaying
JP2011-534994
Access Control Method, Access Control Apparatus and
Communication System
JP2011-532484
DECISION-MAKING METHOD, DECISION-MAKING SYSTEM,
AND POLICY DECISION FUNCTION
JP2010-541686
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REPORTING USE AMOUNT OF
DATA SERVICE, MEDIA PROCESSOR AND MEDIA
CONTROLLER
JP2010-542508
Method, Device, and System for Controlling User Equipment to
Release Uplink Resources
JP2010-541009
UPDATING
AT2-89
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
ARIB STD-T95
APN
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR
SUBSCRIPTION CONFIGURATION
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
SIGNAL ENCODING METHOD AND DEVICE, METHOD FOR
ENCODING JOINT FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-550400
Method, Apparatus and System for Recommending Media JP2011-515070
Content
AT2-90
Method, System and Device for Processing Circuit Switched
Services in an Evolved Packet Network
JP2010-542499
POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION MANAGEMENT
METHOD, MANAGEMENT NETWORK ELEMENT, AND
NETWORK SYSTEM
JP2010-530265
METHOD AND DEVICE
RELEASE PROCESSING
JP2010-533424
OF
NETWORK
RESOURCE
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR HOLDING CALLS
JP2010-536314
Method for controlling charging of packet data service
JP2010-091482
System and method for providing RBT in communication network
JP2010-003407
Method and Apparatus for Accessing Old Network through
Temporary ID of Evolved Network
JP2010-521290
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT
NETWORK ELEMENT, METHOD FOR PROCESSING
RESOURCE
JP2010-535203
Method and Device for Obtaining Media Description Information
of IPTV Services
JP2010-530255
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
METHOD, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING
BIDDING DOWN ATTACKS DURING MOTION OF USER
EQUIPMENT
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-520411
AT2-91
Policy Decision Function Addressing Method, Network Element
and Network System
JP2010-526137
Method, Device and System for Implementing Optimized
Inter-RAT Handover
JP2010-512499
METHOD, APPARATUS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM OF DETERMINING A SET OF ZERO CORRELATION
ZONE LENGTHS
JP2010-504427
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING USER JP2010-517260
EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND
ALLOCATING A TEMPORARY IDENTIFIER
BEARER SUSPENSION METHOD, BEARER RESUMPTION JP2010-516358
METHOD, AND GATEWAY AGENT
METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR MULTICAST SERVICE JP2010-509662
AUTHORIZATION CONTROL
JP2009-553894
METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING JP2010-500058
MULTICAST BEARER RESOURCES
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
ARIB STD-T95
CONTROL METHOD, SYSTEM AND FUNCTION ENTITY FOR
REPORTING BEARER EVENT OF SIGNALING IP FLOW
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
TIME-SHIFT TV SERVICE ESTABLISHMENT METHOD AND JP2009-550196
TIME-SHIFT TV MEDIA FUNCTION ENTITY
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and Network Device for Creating and Deleting JP2009-551096
Resources
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IDLE MODE SIGNALING JP2010-512500
REDUCTION
AT2-92
MEDIUM RESOURCE RESERVATION METHOD, SERVICE JP2010-534353
PACKAGE INFORMATION OBTAINING METHOD AND
APPARATUS
METHOD, SYSTEM, TERMINAL, ACCESS NODE AND JP2009-545801
GATEWAY FOR HANDING OVER TERMINAL TO
MACROCELL
METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR NEGOTIATING JP2010-513633
SECURITY CAPABILITY WHEN TERMINAL MOVES
METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ASSIGNING ACK JP2010-509668
CHANNELS TO USERS
Method and System for Implementing Multimedia Ring Back JP2009-552993
Tone Service and Multimedia Caller Identification Service
Method and Apparatus for Allocating
Sequences in Communication System
and
Processing JP2009-546637
A MEDIA GATEWAY AND METHOD FOR REPORTING THE JP2008-547830
TERMINAL STATISTIC PARAMETER VALUE
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
(selection of option 2)
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR IDENTIFYING AND OBTAINING JP2010-534347
AUTHORITY INFORMATION IN SDP PROTOCOL
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
SERVICE PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM, AND JP2009-546630
POLICY CONTROL AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION
A interactive method of reporting the location report by target ue JP2006-508100
in the location service
AT2-93
CALLING METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR VIDEO PHONE
JP2009-549763
Multimedia Session Call Control Method and Application Server
JP2010-531404
ENCODING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FRAME JP2009-552052
SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL
Method and Apparatus for Feeding Back and Receiving JP2010-536315
Acknowledgement Information of Semi-Persistent Scheduling
Data Packets
SYSTEM, METHOD, AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING JP2009-537470
MULTIMEDIA CALL CONTINUITY
CALL CONTROL METHOD, CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DOMAIN JP2009-551095
ADAPTER
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
ARIB STD-T95
METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING
JP2010-532417
WORKING MODE OF HSDPA SYSTEM
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
METHOD
AND
APPARATUS
FOR
SEQUENCE JP2009-529504
DISTRIBUTING AND SEQUENCE PROCESSING IN
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
SECURITY CAPABILITY NEGOTIATION METHOD, SYSTEM, JP2009-553896
AND EQUIPMENT
AT2-94
A DATA PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM
JP2009-524069
Method and Apparatus for Updating Serving Cell
JP2009-524870
Method, System and Device for Accessing Network
JP2009-519782
METHOD FOR REDUCING FEEDBACK INFORMATION JP2009-515687
OVERHEAD N PRECODED MIMO-OFDM SYSTEMS
METHOD AND APPARATUS OF ESTABLISHING A JP2009-547518
SYNCHRONISATION SIGNAL IN A COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM
METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS OF CHARGING FOR
GROUP MODE SERVICE
METHOD AND
SCHEDULING
SYSTEM
FOR
MEDIA
JP2009-505705
RESOURCE JP2008-554581
Streaming Media Network System, Streaming Media Service JP2008-554582
Realization Method and Streaming Media Service Enabler
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
System, Method and Apparatus for Establishing Interactive JP2008-554583
Media Session Based on IP Multimedia Subsystem
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method for Improving Synchronization
Transmission in a Communication System
and
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
Information JP2008-550603
Method and System for Synchronization in Communication JP2008-550604
System
METHOD,
DEVICE
RETRANSMISSION
AND
SYSTEM
FOR
DATA JP2008-542582
AT2-95
Method for Activating Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast Service
JP2007-521776
Method, Devices and System for Implementing a Time-shift JP2008-534853
Television
Method of handling periodic location information request
JP2006-540137
RESOURCE ADMISSION CONTROL PROCESSING METHOD JP2006-237314
AND RESOURCE ADMISSION CONTROL PROCESSOR
A
method of implementing multicasting service
Method for multimedia broadcast/multicast service registration
JP2006-548078
ARIB STD-T95
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
JP2006-537040
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2007-545822
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method for information transmission
RESOURCE REVOKING METHOD BASED ON RACS, AND
JP2006-238214
NETWORK DEVICE
A METHOD FOR PROCESSING LOCATION
OF CHANGE OF AREA EVENT
REQUEST JP2006-515637
Method ,system and device for implementing interconnection JP2007-530574
between IP domains
AT2-96
A fast interactive method of user terminal in the wireless local JP2006-529561
area network selecting access mobile network
Method for controlling charging of packet data service
JP2007-503178
A METHOD OF USER ACCESS AUTHORIZATION IN THE JP2006-508099
WLAN
method for activating multimedia broadcast/multicast service
JP2007-505357
A method for processing requests for location
JP2006-549838
Method for releasing a service tunnel in a wireless local area JP2006-548074
network
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
Method and apparatus for controlling power of uplink physical JP2007-216412
channel
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
(selection of option 2)
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
An optimized interworking method for a wlan user terminal JP2006-521374
selecting a mobile network to access
Interactive processing method for network selection information JP2006-517939
of user terminal in wireless local area network
System and method for providing RBT in communication JP2006-529557
network
AT2-97
Method and apparatus for coding of e-dch dedicated physical JP2007-531571
control channel
Method for implementing data segmentation and concatenation JP2007-543684
and reassembly and transmitter thereof
Method for processing the re-authentication based on the JP2007-524161
charging of the packet data flow
Method, device and system for terminating a user session in a JP2006-178630
multicast service
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
ARIB STD-T95
Method and apparatus for service identifying and routing in JP2007-528567
multimedia broadcast/multicast service system
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
Enhanced charging rule for packet data service data service JP2007-502176
and operation method thereof
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method for wireless network re-selection in a plurality of JP2006-549835
networks environment
Method of obtaining the user identification for the network
application entity
JP2006-548082
A processing method based on charging trigger event and JP2007-501099
re-authentication event of packet data flow
AT2-98
A METHOD OF LIMITING QUANTITY OF FLOW OF JP2006-504209
LOCATION INFORMATION REQUEST IN LOCATION
SERVICE
COLLECTION APPARATUS OF DATA SERVICE BILLING JP2006-537037
INFORMATION AND BILLING METHOD
Method of informing a network of change of user equipment JP2007-515766
capability
Method and system for allocating communication resources
JP2008-516102
Method for verifying the validity of a user
JP2006-538634
Method and system for WLAN user equipment accessing new JP2006-549836
operation network
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR DISTRIBUTING JP2008-550615
RESOURCE OF BASE STATION NODE
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING SERVICES FOR JP2010-542504
USER
Method for processing network selection information of user JP2006-517940
terminal in wireless local area network
AT2-99
SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING
EQUIPMENT TO ACCESS NETWORKS BY
GENERIC ,AUTHENTICATION ARCHITECTURE
USER JP2007-509860
USING
service transmission method for multimedia broadcast/multicast JP2007-525151
service
METHOD
FOR
PROCESSING
INFORMATION REQUEST IN LICATION
LOCATION JP2006-517938
SERVICE
METHOD OF INTER-FREQUENCY/SYSTEM MEASUREMENT JP2008-508057
AND METHOD OF DETERMINING MEASUREMENT
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT THEREOF
A method for reducing interface load of home subscriber server
JP2006-548075
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
ARIB STD-T95
A method for notifying changes of cell information in multimedia
JP2007-509861
broadcast/multicast service
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
HUAWEI
TECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
Method of counting the number of multimedia broadcasting JP2007-507646
multicast service subscribers
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
A method, a system and a terminal for realizing presenting JP2004-549031
information interaction of the wireless lan users
A Process Method about A Process Method about the Service JP2004-557750
Connection between the Wireless Local Area Network and User
Terminal
AT2-100
WLAN SERVICE SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CHARGING JP2004-557747
BASED ON USER DATA FLOW
Method for generation of training sequence in channel JP2002-511499
estimation
A method for processing create packet data protocol context JP2006-523507
request
Method for processing a location service
*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.
JP2006-548079
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Approved by the 86th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION
NO./
APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
AT2-101
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-102
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2003-533078
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
AU; BE; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; HK; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; JP; KR;
MX; NL; NO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA;
US6,694,469;
US7,127,654;
US7,613,978; US20100046497
Method, user agent, application gateway and program for
soft handoff across different networks assisted by an
end-to-end application protocol
JP2011-125033
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
JP; KR; MX; RU; TW; UA;
US8,037,188; US20110317667
Adaptive pilot insertion for a MIMO-OFDM system
JP4690401
CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; IN;
IT; KR; MY; TW; US8,000,221;
US20100067590
Initial pilot frequency selection
JP4950068
CL; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; IN;
IT; KR; TW; US8,009,551
Semi-connected operations for wireless communications
JP2010-541330
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; IN;
IT; JP; KR; RU; SG; TW;
US20090082072
Mobile access in a diverse access point network
JP2010-541487
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN; US20090088131
Access point configuration based on received access point
signals
JP2011-504328
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN; US20090122773
Bundling of ACK information in a wireless communication
system
JP2011-520394
AT; AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE;
DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; HU;
ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; MY; NL; NO;
NZ; PL; PT; RO; RU; SE; SG; TW;
UA; VN; US20090279460
A method for initiating in a terminal of a cellular network the
measurement of power levels of signals and a terminal
JP4933099
AT; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; IT; KR; NL; SE; US7,096,021
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
A method and an apparatus for a quick retransmission of
signals in a communication system
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.1]
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.1]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-103
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
CN; EP; IN; KR; TW; US20110158200
Method and apparatus for communicating antenna port
assignments
JP2012-519589
CN; EP; IN; KR; TW; US20110158351
Extension of UE-RS to DWPTS
JP2012-523740
AE; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; ID; IN; KR;
RU; TW; VN; ZA; US20110205954
Method and apparatus for supporting single-user
multiple-input multiple-output (SU-MIMO) and multi-user
mimo (MU-MIMO)
JP2012-524885
BR; CN; EP;
US20110194504
IN;
KR;
TW;
MIMO related signaling in wireless communication
JP2012-525646
BR; CN; EP;
US20110188587
IN;
KR;
TW;
Method and apparatus for determining time for GPS
receivers
JP2001-505665
BE; CH; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
GR; HK; IE; IT; JP; KR; LI; NL; PT;
SE;
US5,945,944;
US6,150,980;
US6,433,734
Method and apparatus for cell search in an orthogonal
wireless communication system
JP2010-508788
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
JP; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN; US20100103906
Reference signal design for cell search in an orthogonal
wireless communication system
JP2010-508789
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG;
TW; UA; VN; US20100035611
Cyclic delay diversity
communication
wireless
JP2010-519794
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN; US20080247364
Apparatus and method for MIMO transmission with explicit
and implicit cyclic delays
JP2010-518757
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN; US20090197546
Transmitter Power Control System
JP2935896
AT; AU; BG; BR; CA; CH; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; IE;
IL; IT; KR; LU; MC; MX; NL; RO; SE;
TW; ZA; US5,485,486
Positioning reference signals in a telecommunication system
and
precoding
for
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2012-517912
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION
NO./
APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.0]
Approved by the 88th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
AT2-104
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-105
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20110216704;US8,077,692;JP;EP
;BE;BG;CL;CZ;DE;ES;FI;FR;GB;HK;
HU;IE;IN;IT;KR;MY;NL;PL;RO;TW
Reverse link power control for an OFDMA system
JP2009-506654
US20100027451;US20100034315;U
S7,965,789;JP;EP;AR;AT;BE;CH;CN;
DE;DK;ES;FI;FR;GB;GR;HU;IE;IN;IT;
KR;NL;PL;PT;RO;SE;TH;TW
A broadcast channel for E-UTRA
JP5215291
US20080072269;JP;EP;AR;BR;CA;C
N;HK;IN;KR;RU;TW
Method and apparatus for fragmenting a control message
in a wireless communication system
JP5096495
US8,000,326;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Method and apparatus for data symbol and control symbol
multiplexing
JP4903872
US20130136112;US8,363,606;NO;E
P;BR;CN;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;NZ;PH;
RU;UA;VN
Dynamic channel quality
communication system
wireless
JP5021748
US8,068,427;JP;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;KR
;RU;TW
Method and apparatus for processing primary and
secondary
synchronization
signals
for
wireless
communication
JP5038427
US13/900,727;US20100182979;EP;B
R;CA;CN;DE;ES;FR;GB;IN;IT;KR;RU;
TW
Uplink ACK transmission for SDMA in a wireless
communication system
JP4995916
US8,300,582;EP;BR;CA;CN;HK;IN;K
R;RU;SG;TW
Method and apparatus for utilizing other sector interference
(OSI) indication
JP2010-516113
US13/853,283;US8,433,357;EP;BR;C
A;CN;DE;ES;FR;GB;HK;IN;IT;KR;NL;
RU;SG;TW
Scheduling of dynamic broadcast channel
JP2010-521895
US13/889,095;US8,457,093;EP;AU;B
R;CA;CN;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;NZ;
PH;RU;SG;TW;UA;VN
Configurable acknowledgement processing in a wireless
communication system
JP2010-524282
US20080253318;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;K
R;RU;TW
Pilot transmission by relay stations in a multihop relay
communication system
JP2010-521928
US20080227386;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;K
R;RU;TW
Enhanced frequency division multiple access for wireless
communication
reporting
in
a
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2008-541671
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-106
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-522516
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20080233967;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;K
R;RU;TW
Method and apparatus for efficient support for multiple
authentications
JP5144751
US8,145,905;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;KR;R
U;TW
Self-configuration for femtocells
JP2011-514566
US8,467,304;EP;BR;CN;ID;IL;IN;KR;
MX;MY;NZ;PH;RU;SG;TW;VN
Fast carrier allocation in multi-carrier systems
JP2011-517895
US20090257387;JP;EP;AU;BR;CA;C
N;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;NZ;PH;RU;
SG;TW;UA;VN
Interference reduction between OFDM carriers by carrier
spacing optimization
JP5204302
US20090304100;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;K
R;RU;SG;TW
Interference mitigation by transmitting on a second, lower,
power level
JP2011-526468
US20090325626;JP;EP;AU;BR;CA;C
N;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;NZ;PH;RU;
SG;TW;UA;VN
Method and apparatus for downlink data arrival
JP2011-521540
US20090274077;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Management of UE
communication system
multi-carrier
JP2011-525782
US8,184,599;JP;EP;AU;BR;CA;CN;H
K;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;NZ;PH;RU;SG;
TW;UA;VN
Synchronous TDM-based communication in dominant
interference scenarios
JP2011-527876
US13/888,292;US13/888,320;US201
00008282;NO;JP;EP;AT;AU;BE;BR;C
A;CH;CN;DE;DK;ES;FI;FR;GB;GR;H
K;HU;ID;IE;IL;IN;IT;KR;MX;MY;NL;NZ
;PH;PL;PT;RO;RU;SE;SG;TW;UA;VN
Wireless communication channel blanking
JP2012-544484
US20110151790;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Relay architecture framework
JP2012-501155
US20100046418;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;K
R;RU;SG;TW
Supporting multiple access technologies in a wireless
environment
JP2012-501603
US20130094462;US8,325,661;JP;EP
;AU;BR;CA;CN;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;M
Y;PH;RU;SG;TW;UA;VN
Channel quality feedback in multicarrier systems
JP2012-508543
US20100118817;EP;BR;CA;CN;HK;I
D;IN;KR;MY;RU;TW;ZA
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Backhaul communication for interference management
operation
in
a
ARIB STD-T95
[Ver. 2.2]
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-107
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,457,599;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;TW
DGNSS correction for positioning
JP2012-509463
US8,259,008;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Method and apparatus for synchronization during a
handover failure in a wireless communication system
JP2012-514428
US20100165835;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Position location using multiple carriers
JP2012-521181
US20100240396;EP;CN;IN;KR
Apparatus and method for dual-cell high-speed uplink
packet access
JP2012-521178
US8,416,706;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Error-correcting multi-stage code generator and decoder
for communication systems having single transmitters or
multiple transmitters
JP4773356
US20090158114;US7,139,960;US7,4
51,377;JP;EP;CN;DE;FR;GB;HK;IN;K
R
Control information signaling
JP2013-506383
US8,433,251;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;TW
Dynamic selection of subframe formats in a wireless
network
JP2012-528547
US20100303013;EP;BR;CA;CN;HK;I
D;IN;KR;PH;RU;TW;UA;ZA
Hybrid automatic repeat request operation and decoding
status signaling for uplink multiple-input multiple-output
JP2013-501419
US20110026622;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Adaptive transmissions in coordinated multiple point
communications
JP2013-501409
US20110026421;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
Method and apparatus for physical uplink control channel
(PUCCH) resource mapping with transmit diversity
JP2013-501418
US20110026631;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
Methods and apparatus for subframe interlacing in
heterogeneous networks
JP2013-504984
US20110188481;EP;BR;CA;CN;HK;I
D;IL;IN;KR;PH;RU;TH;TW;VN;ZA
Method and apparatus for conducting measurements when
multiple carriers are supported
JP2013-507074
US20110242999;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
MBSFN subframe generation and processing for unicast
JP2013-507834
US20110103286;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Downlink control information for efficient decoding
JP2013-507843
US20130128838;US8,379,536;EP;C
N;IN;KR;TW
Method and apparatus for using channel state information
reference signal in wireless communication system
JP2013-507846
US20110244877;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
Apparatus and method for establishing a data connection
between a remote station and a wireless network
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2012-509026
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-108
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2013-507840
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20110085513;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Method and apparatus for reference signal resource
allocation
JP2013-509042
US20110249767;EP;CN;IN;KR
Improved downlink association set for uplink ACK/NACK in
time division duplex system
JP2013-509035
US20110255484;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Method and apparatus for uplink multi-carrier power
amplifier/antenna operation and channel prioritization
JP2013-509098
US20110092219;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
TDM-FDM relay backhaul channel for LTE advanced
JP2013-509848
US20110103296;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Apparatus and method for providing relay backhaul
communications in a wireless communication system
JP2013-509834
US20110103295;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Apparatus and method for joint encoding of user specific
reference signal information in wireless communication
JP2013-509847
US20110268050;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Restricting access point transmissions
JP2013-510518
US20110275361;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Sounding reference signal enhancements for wireless
communication
JP2012-542195
US20110294529;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
Apparatus and method for transmit-response timing for
relay operation in wireless communications
JP2012-544926
US20110149774;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Cross-carrier signaling in a multi-carrier system
JP2012-547177
US20120009923;EP;AE;BR;CA;CN;H
K;ID;IN;KR;PH;RU;TH;TW;VN;ZA
Interaction between accumulative power control and
minimum/maximum transmit power in LTE systems
JP2012-547172
US20110159914;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
Multiplexing demodulation reference signals in wireless
communications
JP2012-549012
US20120014318;EP;AE;BR;CA;CN;H
K;ID;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;TW;ZA
Channel feedback based on reference signal
JP2012-549141
US20120020230;EP;BR;CA;CN;ID;IN
;KR;MY;PH;RU;TW;ZA
Method and apparatus for power scaling for mutli-carrier
wireless terminals
JP2012-550147
US20120020286;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Aperiodic sounding reference signal transmission method
and apparatus
JP2012-553004
US20110199944;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Uplink resource allocation for LTE advanced
ARIB STD-T95
[Ver. 2.2]
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.2]
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20120044881;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Resource block mapping for cross-carrier assignments
JP2012-554068
US20120045014;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Channel state information reference signals
JP2012-555120
US20120058791;EP;BR;CA;CN;ID;IN
;KR;MY;PH;RU;SG;TW;VN;ZA
Method and apparatus for channel quality indicator (CQI)
enhancements
JP2012-556245
US20110216682;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR
Methods of resolving PDCCH payload size ambiguity in
LTE
JP2013-500195
US20110228732;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Random access design in a multiple component carrier
communication network
JP2013-500220
US20120063302;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
User-specific
operation
multi-carrier
JP2013-500204
US20110228724;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Data radio bearer mapping in a telecommunication network
with relays
JP2013-501526
US20110235514;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Feedback of control information for multiple carriers
JP2013-503860
US20110243012;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Aperiodic channel state information request in wireless
communication
JP2013-503855
US20120076017;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR
Power headroom reporting
JP2013-503859
US20120082041;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
Method and apparatus for signaling user equipment
capabilities
JP2013-503857
US20110243083;EP;CN;IN;KR
Methods and apparatuses for radio resource management
measurements of a user equipment in a heterogeneous
network
JP2013-505116
US13/851,815;US20120088516;EP;A
E;BR;CA;CN;IL;IN;KR;MX;PH;RU;TH;
UA;ZA
CQI estimation in a wireless communication network
JP2013-505086
US20110250919;EP;AE;AU;BR;CA;C
N;HK;IN;KR;MY;RU;TH;TW;ZA
Channel state information
communication network
JP2013-505089
US20110249643;EP;AE;BR;CA;CN;H
K;ID;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;TH;ZA
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
AT2-109
search
space
design
reporting
for
in
a
wireless
ARIB STD-T95
Methods and systems for uplink transmit diversity
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2012-554041
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-110
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2013-505092
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20110249584;EP;AE;BR;CA;CN;H
K;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;VN;ZA
Radio link monitoring (RLM) and reference signal received
power (RSRP) measurement for heterogeneous networks
JP2013-505188
US20110256861;EP;AE;BR;CA;CN;H
K;IL;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;TH;TW;ZA
Determination of radio link failure with
interference coordination and cancellation
enhanced
JP2013-505110
US20120087250;EP;AE;AR;BR;CA;C
N;ID;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;TH;TW;ZA
Resource
partitioning
interference coordination
enhanced
JP2013-505112
US13/897,214;US20110275394;EP;A
E;BR;CA;CN;ID;IN;KR;PH;RU;TH;UA;
VN;ZA
Adaptive resource negotiation between base stations for
enhanced interference coordination
JP2013-505109
US20110249642;EP;CN;IN;KR
Resource availability for physical downlink shared channel
(PDSCH) in relay backhaul transmissions
JP2013-509192
US20110268064;EP;CN;IN;KR
Methods and systems for SRS power scaling in carrier
aggregation
JP2013-509274
US20110275335;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Method and apparatus for control and data multiplexing in
wireless communication
JP2013-509185
US20110268080;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
Uplink power control in aggregated carrier communication
systems
JP2013-510183
US20110275403;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR
Transmission of control information on uplink channels
JP2013-510187
US20120113832;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Methods and apparatuses for downlink channel resource
assignment
JP2013-511242
US20120120882;EP;CN;IN;KR
System, apparatus and method for control channel
configuration in wireless communication systems
JP2013-510311
US20110280201;EP;CN;IN;KR
Power headroom reporting for multicarrier LTE systems
JP2013-513255
US20110292874;EP;CN;IN;KR
Methods and apparatuses facilitating synchronization of
security configurations
JP2013-515563
US20110312299;EP;AR;AU;BR;CA;C
N;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;PH;RU;SG;TH;TW
;UA;VN;ZA
Method and apparatus for relay node management and
authorization
JP2013-515562
US20110314522;EP;AR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Aperiodic CQI reporting in a wireless communication
network
information
for
ARIB STD-T95
[Ver. 2.2]
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-111
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20120155362;EP;CN;IN;KR
Interaction between maximum power reduction and power
scaling in wireless networks
JP2013-518541
US20110319120;EP;CN;IN;KR
Resource utilization measurements for heterogeneous
networks
JP2013-518576
US20110319090;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR
System, apparatus, and method for utilizing network
access parameters in wireless communication systems
JP2013-516805
US20110317661;EP;CN;IN;KR
Demodulation reference signals (DM-RS) for PHICH or
PDCCH based retransmission in LTE-A wireless
communication
JP2013-518661
US20110317646;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR
Apparatus and methods for inter-user equipment transfers
*US20120137008
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR
Aperiodic channel quality indicator report in carrier
aggregation
*US20120039199
JP;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR
Power control on a deactivated component carrier
*US20120058797
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR
Channel state information feedback for carrier aggregation
*US20120039252
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR
Physical uplink control channel
multiple component carriers
resource allocation for
*US20120039275
JP;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR
Interleaving for relay physical downlink control channel
(R-PDCCH)
*US20120039220
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR
Search space design for relay physical downlink control
channel (R-PDCCH)
*US20120039283
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR
UE receiver reference signal processing that utilizes
resource partitioning information
*US20120057480
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR
Uplink control channel resource mapping for carrier
aggregation
*US20120236771
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW
Aperiodic SRS for carrier aggregation
*US20120257582
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR
Power headroom for simultaneous voice and long term
evolution
*US20120082046
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR
Rate matching for data and control channels in wireless
communication systems
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2013-516678
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
AT2-112
Method and apparatus for PUCCH and PUSCH encoding
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
*US20120082075
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR
Control channel resources for multi-bit ACK/NAK
*US20120263121
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR
Resource assignments for uplink control channel
*WO2012051119
US20120263124;JP;EP;CN;KR;TW
Restricted resource in a wireless network
*WO2012061030
US20120275322;JP;EP;AE;AU;BR;C
A;ID;IN;KR;MY;PH;TH;VN
CQI-only transmission on the PUSCH
*WO2012064731
US20120113849;JP;EP;IN
Method and apparatus for improving uplink transmission
mode configuration
*WO2012064783
US20120113869;JP
Improved acknowledgement / negative acknowledgement
feedback for TDD
*WO2012064935
US20120287828;JP;EP;IN
Method
and
apparatus
for
improving
acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement feedback
*WO2012068141
US20120294204;JP;CN;IN;TW
Method and apparatus for determining timing information
for cells
*WO2012100200
US20120190373
Uplink transmit antenna selection in carrier aggregation
*WO2012116091
US20120213154
Devices, methods, and apparatuses for mobile device
acquisition assistance
*US13/732,071
US61/678,021
Method and apparatus for supervising a potentially gated
signal in a wireless communication system
JP4773009
US7,054,284;NO;JP;EP;AT;AU;BE;B
R;CA;CH;CN;DE;DK;ES;FI;FR;GB;G
R;HK;ID;IE;IL;IN;IT;KR;MX;NL;PT;RU
;SE;SG;TW;UA
PN code based addressing methods, computer readable
medium and apparatus for airlink communications
JP4955762
US8,134,952;EP;BR;CA;CL;CN;DE;E
S;FR;GB;IN;IT;KR;RU;TW
Method of communicating between an access terminal and
a femto node, wireless communication apparatus, and
computer program product
JP5108150
US20100040019;EP;AU;BR;CA;CN;H
K;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;NZ;PH;RU;SG;
TW;UA;VN
Method and apparatus to control visited network access for
devices
JP2012-557136
US20110217978;EP;CN;IN;KR
Method and apparatus to control local internet protocol
access for devices
JP2012-557137
US20120057574;EP;CN;IN;KR
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
ARIB STD-T95
[Ver. 2.2]
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2013-503926
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20120076106;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W
Reference signal patterns
JP2013-513333
US20120134273;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR
ACK/NACK transmission for multi-carrier operation
*US20120039279
JP;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR
Method and apparatus for performing mobile assisted hard
handoff between communication sSystems
JP4234209
US5,940,761;US6,304,755;US6,810,
254;EP;AM;AU;AZ;BR;BY;CA;CL;CN;
DE;EA;ES;FI;FR;GB;HK;ID;IE;IL;IN;IT
;KG;KR;KZ;MD;MX;NL;NZ;RU;SE;SG
;TJ;TM;TW;UA;ZA
Method and apparatus for sequentially synchronized
network
JP2003-505977
US6,671,291;JP
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Muting schemes for channel state information reference
signal and signaling thereof
AT2-113
*The deadline for filing of a Japan counterpart of this patent application has not yet passed. Therefore a Japanese counterpart may still be
filed or granted in Japan.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-114
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and system for a multicast service initiation in a
communication system
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4727986
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,796,631; JP; AT; BE; BR; CH;
CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR;
HK; HU; IE; IT; KR; NL; PT; RO; SE;
TW
Method and system
communication system
JP4546475
US7,912,485; US20110170470; JP;
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; RU; TW; UA
Method and apparatus for providing antenna diversity in a
wireless communication system
JP2009-506656
US20070041457; US20120140798;
US20120140838; US20120120925;
JP; CL; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; TH; TW
Acknowledgement of control messages in a wireless
communication system
JP5059870
US8,477,684; BR; CA; CN; EP; IN;
KR; RU; TW
Method and apparatus for cell search in an orthogonal
wireless communication system
JP2010-508788
US20100103906; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
Cyclic delay diversity
communication
wireless
JP5180233
US20080247364; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
User profile, policy, and PMIP key distribution in a wireless
communication network
JP4965671
US20080263631; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; TW
Methods and apparatus for mobility support and IP
multimedia subsytem (IMS) registration in a multimode
network environment
JP5329550
US20090103455; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN
System and method for cell search and selection in a
wireless communication system
JP5209789
US8,588,773; US14/056,641; CN; EP;
IN; KR
Support for optional system parameter values
JP2013-501427
US20110182234; CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
Methods and apparatus for employing different capabilities
for different duplexing modes
US20120218922*
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR
Methods and apparatus for updating the UE capability in an
E-UTRAN
WO2013063793*
US13/823,706
for
and
signaling
in
precoding
for
broadcast
*The deadline for filing of a Japan counterpart of this patent application has not yet passed. Therefore a Japanese counterpart may still be
filed or granted in Japan.
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.0]
Approved by the 91st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
ソニー株式会社
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Approved by the 92th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION
NO./
APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95.
AT2-115
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-116
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4537004
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,907,972;
US7,248,879;
US6,662,024;
US8,489,107;
AU; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR;
GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL;
NO; RU; SG; TW; UA
Method and apparatus for out-of-band transmission of
broadcast service option in a wireless communication
system
JP4615828
US6,909,702;
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; FR; GB; KR;
MX; TW
Method and apparatus for broadcast signaling in a wireless
communication system
JP4087713
US7,693,508;
BR; CN; EP; KR; NO; TW
Method and apparatus for overhead messaging in a
wireless communication system
JP4773042
US7,349,425;
JP; AU; BR; CN; DE; EP; GB; ID; IL;
IN; KR; MX; NO; RU; SG; TW; UA
Wireless network optimization through remote device data
JP2005532717
US7,263,351;
JP; AR; AU; BR; CL; CN; DE; EP; GB;
HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NZ; PE; RU;
SG; VE; VN
System and method for controlling broadcast multimedia
using plural wireless network connections
JP2006523386
US7,925,203;
US20110143653;
JP; BR; CN; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX
Methods and apparatus to optimize delivery of multicast
content using probabilistic feedback
JP2007-519371
US7,127,655;
JP; CN; HK; IN; KR; TW; ZA
Spatial
processing
with
steering
matrices
pseudo-random transmit steering in a multi-antenna
for
JP5139473
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR;
MX; PH; RU; SG; TW; VN
Methods and Apparatus for Creation and Transport of
Multimedia Content Flows
JP4870662
US7,912,457;
US8,472,930;
JP; AU; BR; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB;
HK; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; PH; RU;
VN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for allocating resources in a
multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communication
system
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.3]
Approved by the 95th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.3]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 95th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-117
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5112864
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,042,170;
JP; BR; CN; DE; EP; GB; HK; IN; KR;
MX; TW
Spatial spreading with space-time and space-frequency
transmit diversity schemes for a wireless communication
system
JP4564060
US7,894,548;
AR; AT; BE; CA; CH; CN; DE; DK; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; IE; IN;
IT; KR; NL; PL; PT; RO; SE; TH; TW
Time multiplexing of unicast and multicast signals on a
downlink carrier frequency in a wireless communication
system
JP4653174
US8,644,200;
JP; BR; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; MX; MY
Systems, methods and apparatus for determining a
radiated performance of a wireless device
JP4625087
US7,773,964;
US8,467,756;
CN; EP; HK; IN; KR
1x and 1xEV-DO hybrid call setup
JP4880706
US8,706,144;
US20140141817;
CN; DE; EP; GB; IN; KR; TH
Transmit spatial diversity for cellular single frequency
networks
JP2008-547267
US8,059,608;
US8,570,982;
JP; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; IN; IT;
KR; MY; NL; TW
Geography-based filtering of broadcasts
JP5254019
US20070124395;
JP; CN; DE; EP; GB; IN; KR; TW
JP5362803
US8,045,512;
US8,842,619;
JP; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; TW
Fast channel switching in a multimedia broadcast system
JP5059782
US8,638,714;
JP; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; RU;
SG; TW
Discovery of neighbor cells
JP5118135
US20070291770;
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
IN; IT; KR; NL; RU; SE; TW
Scalable frequency band
communication systems
operation
in
wireless
ARIB STD-T95
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Bearer control of encrypted data flows in packet data
communications
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-118
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for determining a radiated
performance of a wireless device
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5502478
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,925,253;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Pilot Tones In a Multi-Transmit OFDM System Usable to
Capture Transmitter Diversity Benefits
JP4891239
US7,792,208;
US7,372,913;
CN; EP; TW
Methods and systems for mobile WIMAX three-way
downlink concurrent processing and three-way handover
JP2011-523280
US8,223,622;
US8,565,061;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Switching carriers to join a multicast session in a wireless
communications network
JP5318939
US8,654,690;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU
Method and apparatus to report and manage cells in a multi
carrier system
JP5373052
US8,165,026;
AU; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; GB; HK; ID;
IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN
Uplink resource management in a wireless communication
system
JP5290404
US8,675,573;
CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
Handover between mobile communication networks
JP3433186
US6,385,451;
CN; DE; EP; FI; FR; GB; HK
Performing packet flow optimization with policy and
charging control
JP5611973
US8,325,638;
US8,582,480;
JP; BR; CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
System and method for packet acknowledgment using an
acknowledgment codebook
JP5536101
US8,737,374;
US20130242948;
JP; CN; DE; EP; GB; IN; TW
Methods and apparatus for coordination of sending
reference signals from multiple cells
JP2012-531170
US8,670,432;
US20130301531;
US20130303217;
US20130303157;
JP; AE; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IN;
KR; MX; MY; PH; RU; TH; TW; ZA
Method and apparatus that facilitates a timing alignment in
a multicarrier system
JP5362911
US8,634,313;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IN; KR; MX;
PH; RU; SG; TH; TW; ZA
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.3]
Approved by the 95th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.3]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 95th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2012-532516
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,605,584;
CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
Apparatus and method for allocating data flows based on
indication of selection criteria
JP2013-517708
US20110188376;
CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
Method and apparatus for signaling expansion and
backward
compatibility
preservation
in
wireless
communication systems
JP2013-518535
US20110188462;
CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
Method and apparatus for multi-radio coexistence
JP2013-528972
US20110256834;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR
JP5596229
US20120016942;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Apparatus and method for random access channel power
prioritization
JP2013-531427
US20120127931;
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR
System, apparatus, and method for improving circuit
switched fallback call setup delay in wireless
communication systems
JP5654125
US20110312321;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Rate matching for coordinated multipoint transmission
schemes
JP2013-550542
US20120182946;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR
Method and apparatus for enabling channel
interference estimations in macro/RRH system
and
JP2014-508464
US20120207043;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Methods and apparatus for effective allocation of adaptive
resource partitioning information (ARPI) to pico enhanced
Node B by macro enhanced Node B in heterogeneous
network
JP2014-509167
US20120243488;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Transmission of control information for FDD-TDD carrier
aggregation
JP2014-511092
US20120257552;
CN; EP; IN; KR
System and method for configuring remote radio heads
JP2014-513506
US8,570,971;
BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU
System and method for managing invalid reference
subframes for channel state information feedback
JP2014-516506
US20120275398;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Method
and
apparatus
for
machine-to-machine addressing
providing
uniform
AT2-119
ARIB STD-T95
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Transmission of control information across multiple packets
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2014-521266
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20130016692;
CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
carrier
JP2014-519750
US20120300641;
BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU
Power headroom reporting related to power management
maximum power reduction
JP2014-517595
US20120281568;
BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU
Allocating physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel (PHICH)
resources
JP2014-524689
US20130034028;
BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU
Transmission of control information in a wireless network
with carrier aggregation
JP2014-526196
US20130028205;
AE; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL;
IN; KR; MX; MY; PH; RU; SG; TH; UA;
VN; ZA
Method and apparatus for transport of dynamic adaptive
streaming over HTTP (DASH) initialization segment
description fragments as user service description
fragments
JP2014-527745
US20130036234;
BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU
Support of multiple timing advance groups for user
equipment in carrier aggregation in LTE
JP2014-526834
US20130064165;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Adaptive control channel design for balancing data payload
size and decoding time
JP2014-530575
US20130083666;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Uplink resource management under coordinated multipoint
transmission
JP2014-528677
US20130083754;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Method and apparatus for uplink transmission power
control and timing in coordinated multipoint transmission
schemes
JP2014-528672
US20130084913;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR
Half-duplex/full-duplex
aggregation
carrier
JP2014-533900
US20130083704;
CN; EP; IN; KR
User equipment, base stations, and methods allowing for
handling of colliding channel state information reports
JP2014-540229
US20130114455;
CN; EP; IN; KR
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Downlink control with control-less subframes
A channel state information feedback for
aggregation with flexible carrier configurations
AT2-120
operation
for
TDD
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.3]
Approved by the 95th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.3]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 95th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2014-540064
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20130114565;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR
Resource management for enhanced PDCCH
JP2014-534777
US20130114419;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR
wireless
JP2014-533047
US20130114529;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR
Method and apparatus for managing retransmission
resources
JP2014-533050
US20130114530;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR
Systems, apparatus, and methods
information in a smart storage device
WO2014078473*
US20140141760;
TW
Signaling of supported carrier bandwidths for carrier
aggregation
JP2014-544887
US20130142139;
CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
Processing enhanced PDCCH (ePDCCH) in LTE
JP2014-550412
US20130170449;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR; TW
Improved reference signals design for time tracking in
LTE-A
JP2014-549154
US20130163530;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Method and apparatus for enabling channel
interference estimations in macro/RRH system
and
JP2014-512713
US20120208547;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Method and system for transitions of broadcast dash
service receptions between unicast and broadcast
JP2014-552386
US20130182643;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR
Maximum power reduction for interference control in
adjacent channels
JP2014-552403
US20130182663;
BR; CN; EP; IN; KR
Method and apparatus to solve physical layer issues
related to multiple timing advance group support
JP2014-554737
US20130195084;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Flexible
radio
resource
management
measurements for wireless networks
US20130196603*
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR
JP2014-554910
US20130195038;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IN; KR; MY;
PH; RU; TH; UA; ZA
Search space design
communication networks
for
e-PDCCH
in
for
managing
AT2-121
(RRM)
Systems and methods for priority based session and
mobility management
ARIB STD-T95
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Structure of enhanced physical downlink control channel
(e-PDCCH) in long term evolution (LTE)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-122
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Resource allocation for enhanced physical downlink control
channel (EPDCCH)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2014-555840
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20130201975;
CN; EP; IN; KR
Signaling of virtual cell identifiers and fallback operation
US20130235821*
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR
eMBMS service activation and maintenance procedure in
multi-frequency networks
US20130258934*
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR
Secure reception reporting
US20130267202*
US14/557,273;
US14/557,315;
JP; CN; EP; IN
Method and apparatus for LTE radio access network
sharing
US14/387,836*
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR
A method to enable LTE RAN sharing between multiple
HRPD operators
PCT/CN2012/080622*
Channel state information dependent ACK/NAK bundling
US20130258960*
JP; CN; EP; IN
H-ARQ timing determination under cross-carrier scheduling
in LTE
US20130258864*
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR
Channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS)
configuration and CSI reporting restrictions
US20130258965*
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR
Rank-specific feedback for improved MIMO support
WO2013169666*
US20130301560;
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR
Network driven cell reselection method for UEs playing
eMBMS content in unicast idle mode
WO2014004927*
US20140003390;
JP; CN; IN
Methods and apparatus for coordinated multipoint (CoMP)
communications
WO2014022209*
US20140036806;
IN
Method and apparatus for processing control and shared
channels in an LTE system
WO2014022165*
US20140036804
Multiple timing advance groups (TAGS)for UL carrier
aggregation (CA)
WO2014028908*
US20140050194
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.3]
Approved by the 95th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.3]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 95th Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-123
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Reference signals for an enhanced physical downlink
control channel
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2014058594*
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20140098751
Managing cross-carrier scheduling in carrier aggregation
with EPDCCH in LTE
WO2014070761*
US20140126485
EPDCCH resource and quasi-co-location management in
LTE
WO2014070311*
US20140126490
Apparatus and methods for negotiating proactive polling
interval
PCT/US2014/054772*
US14/276,680
Interleaver and deinterleaver for use in a diversity
transmission communication system
JP4574866
US7,158,498;
US6,356,528;
AU; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL;
NO; RU; SE; SG; UA
Method and apparatus for encrypting transmissions in a
communication system
JP2011-172244
US8,787,578;
US6,980,658;
JP; AU; BR; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL;
NO; RU; SE; SG; UA
Method and System for Providing Personal Base Station
Communications
JP4318860
US6,381,230;
CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK;
IE; IT; KR; MX; SE
*The deadline for filing of a Japan counterpart of this patent application has not yet passed. Therefore a Japanese counterpart may still
be filed or granted in Japan.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
(selection of option 2)
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
Approved by the 98th Standard Assembly
AT2-124
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.1]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-125
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,773,547;
US7,190,687;
AT;AU;BE;BR;CA;CH;CN;DE;DK;EP;
ES;FI;FR;GB;GR;HK;ID;IE;IL;IN;IT;K
R;MX;NL;NO;NZ;PT;RU;SE;SG;TR;T
W;UA
GPS receiver and method for processing GPS signals
JP5455542
JP;AU;BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;G
B;HK;IT;KR;NL;RU;SE
Reducing Cross-Interference in a Combined GPS Receiver
and Communication System
JP4859273
US6,107,960;
BE;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;IE;IT;NL;SE
Methods and apparatuses for controlling distribution of
location information
JP5345566
US7,570,958;
JP;AU;CA;DE;EP;FR;GB;IL;IN;KR
Methods and apparatuses for using mobile GPS stations to
synchronize basestations
JP5215440
US7,171,225;
US6,665,541;
US7,801,108;
JP;AU;CA;CN;HK;KR
Position determination system that uses a cellular
communication system
JP4226477
US7,877,100;
CN;DE;EP;FR;GB
Flexible ARQ for packet data transmission
JP4740285
US8,089,940;
JP;BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;FR;GB;ID;IN;IT;
KR;MX;RU;TW;UA
for
JP4236582
US6,987,764;
BR;CN;DE;EP;ES;FR;GB;HK;IN;IT;K
R;MX;TW;UA
Method and apparatus for flow treatment and mapping on
multicast/broadcast services
JP4361372
CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;HK;HU;IN;IT
;KR;NL;SE;TW
Bandwidth-adaptive quantization
JP5280480
US8,090,577;
BR;DE;EP;FR;GB;HK;IN;KR;SG
Method and apparatus for broadcast application in a
wireless communication system
JP5259637
US7,991,396;
JP;BE;BR;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;HU;IE;IN;
KR;MX;NL;PL;RO
Method and apparatus for requesting point-to-point
protocol (PPP) instances from a packet data services
network
Selecting
a
packet
data
multi-cast/broadcast services
serving
node
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5032686
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5410455
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,160,580;
JP;BR;CN;DE;EP;GB;HK;IN;KR;MX
Data transmission with spatial spreading in a MIMO
communication system
JP4668928
US7,336,746;
US7,764,754;
US8,325,844;
US7,194,042;
AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;IL;IN;KR;MX;P
H;RU;SG;TW;VN
Method and apparatus for policy control enhancement in a
wireless communication system
JP4554618
US8,325,688;
BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;IN;IT;
KR;MX;NL;TW
Secure bootstrapping for wireless communications
JP4763726
US8,391,841;
US7,966,000;
US7,715,822;
AT;AU;BE;BR;CA;CH;CN;DE;DK;EP;
ES;FI;FR;GB;GR;HK;HU;ID;IE;IL;IN;I
T;KR;MX;MY;NL;PH;PL;PT;RO;RU;S
E;SG;TW;UA;VN
Systems and methods for coordinating supplementary
services for voice telephone calls in a centralized fashion
JP5155312
US8,391,873;
JP;AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;
MX;MY;NO;PH;RU;SG;TW;UA;VN
System and method to facilitate acquisition of access point
base stations
JP5345628
US8,948,749;
BR;CN;HK;ID;IN;KR;MX;RU;UA;VN
Efficient interworking between circuit-switched and
packet-switched multimedia services defining a maximum
packet size attribute
JP5746112
US20090180470;
JP;AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;
MX;MY;PH;RU;SG;TW;UA;VN
Method and apparatus for supporting emergency calls
(Ecalls)
JP5290399
US8,200,185;
BR;CN;ID;IN;KR;MX;PH;RU;SG;UA;V
N
Method and apparatus for supporting location-based
services by a removable module
JP5490792
US8,639,271;
CN;EP;IN;KR
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Systems and methods for home carrier determination using
a centralized server
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.1]
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
AT2-126
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.1]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,155,319;
US7,289,630;
US7,577,256;
AT;BR;CA;CH;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;G
B;IT;KR;NL;SE;TR
Method and system for re-authentication in IP multimedia
core network system (IMS)
JP4191613
US6,859,651;
CA;CN;EP;KR;MX;RU
Lost packet recovery method for packet transmission
protocols
JP3976163
US7,233,264;
US7,057,534;
US6,614,366;
US9,246,633;
US7,812,743;
US6,307,487;
US6,373,406;
JP;AT;AU;BE;CA;CH;DE;DK;EP;ES;F
I;FR;GB;GR;HK;IE;IL;IT;KR;NL;SE;S
G
Multi-stage code generator and decoder for communication
systems
JP4157041
US7,711,068;
US7,720,174;
US7,068,729;
US9,236,976;
CN;EP;HK;IN;KR;TW
Decoding of chain reaction codes through inactivation of
recovered symbols
JP4224022
US6,856,263;
US7,265,688;
US7,030,785;
US7,633,413;
CN;DE;EP;ES;FR;GB;IN;IT;KR;NL
Systematic encoding and decoding of chain reaction codes
JP5485008
USRE43,741;
US7,532,132;
US7,394,407;
US6,909,383;
US9,236,885;
JP;CN;EP;HK;IN;KR
Counter initialization, particularly for radio frames
AT2-127
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP3706580
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-128
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5485302
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US9,236,887;
US9,136,878;
US7,418,651;
JP;CN;EP;IN;KR
Systems, apparatus and methods to facilitate handover
security
JP5485387
US9,002,357;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Method and apparatus for handling policy and charging
control rule or quality of service rule modification failures
JP2014-222915
US8,972,553;
CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION
DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE
COMMUNICATION METHOD
JP4646337
US8,989,153;
US8,625,540;
AM;AT;AU;AZ;BR;BY;CA;CN;DE;EA;
EP;ES;FR;GB;HK;HU;ID;IN;KG;KR;K
Z;LU;MD;MX;TJ;TM
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, RECEIVING
METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE
JP4968956
US8,045,538;
EP;VN
RADIO TRANSMITTING DEVICE
JP5280169
US8,098,763;
US8,116,403;
US8,625,717;
US8,170,133;
JP;AM;AT;AZ;BY;CH;CN;DE;DK;EA;
EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;HK;HU;ID;IN;IT;KG;
KZ;LI;MD;NL;PL;PT;RO;RU;SE;TJ;T
M
WIRELESS
JP4658146
US8,165,537;
BE;CH;CN;DE;EP;FR;GB;LI;LU
METHOD, SYSTEM AND NETWORK EQUIPMENT FOR
IMPLEMENTING HTTP-BASED STREAMING MEDIA
SERVICE
JP5500531
US20120110138;
AU;BR;CN;IN;KR
Method and apparatus for acquiring IPTV service media
description information
JP5042370
US8,307,049;
CN
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND BASE STATION AND
STATIONS USED THEREIN
JP4870093
US7,764,647;
EP
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
File download and streaming system
WIRELESS
TRANSMITTER
TRANSMISSION METHOD
AND
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.1]
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.1]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-129
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,121,184;
US8,116,708;
US8,111,743;
US8,170,512;
US8,121,559;
US8,107,897;
JP;AM;AZ;BE;BY;CH;CN;DE;EA;EP;
ES;FI;FR;GB;HK;HU;ID;IE;IN;IT;KG;K
Z;LU;MC;MD;PL;PT;RO;RU;TJ;TM
Mobile communication system, mobile station apparatus,
base station apparatus, mobile communication method,
program and recording medium
JP4628424
US8,107,418;
CN;EP
RADIO TRANSMISSION DEVICE
JP4387414
US8,416,757;
US7,948,960;
US8,422,478;
CN;EP
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
JP3898533
US7,447,169;
CN;KR
Method and apparatus for reducing pilot search times
utilizing mobile station location information
JP4634425
US6,542,743;
US7,236,796;
JP;BR;CN;DE;EP;GB;ID;IN;KR;MX;R
U;TW;UA
Establishing a packet network call between a mobile
terminal device and an interworking function
JP4394319
US6,483,822;
CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FR;GB;ID;IL;IN;IT;
KR;MX
Method and apparatus for reducing code phase search
space
JP2013-117536
US7,369,599;
US7,738,531;
JP;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR
Method and apparatus for channel optimization during
point-to-point protocol (PPP) session requests
JP4842484
US7,197,017;
US8,363,616;
JP;AU;BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;GB;HK;ID;I
L;IN;KR;MX;NZ;RU;SG;TW;UA
WIRELESS TRANSMITTER
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4405573
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-130
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4861379
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US6,215,442;
US6,839,021;
US6,597,311;
US6,433,731;
JP;AU;BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;G
B;HK;ID;IN;IT;KR;MX;NL;SE;SG
Method and apparatus for measurement processing of
satellite positioning system (SPS) signals
JP5558683
US6,313,786;
US6,707,422;
JP;AU;BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;G
B;HK;IN;IT;KR;MX;NL;SE;SG;VN
Reverse link automatic repeat request
JP5053513
US8,213,390;
JP;AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;
RU;TW;UA
Adaptive de-jitter buffer for voice over IP
JP4933605
US7,830,900;
JP;BE;BG;BR;CA;CH;CN;CZ;DE;DK;
EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;GR;HK;HU;IE;IN;IT;
KR;LI;MX;NL;PL;PT;RO;SE
Message compression
JP4988849
US20080089357;
CN;EP;HK;IN;TW
Information additive group code generator and decoder for
communications systems
JP4680359
US6,320,520;
AU;CA;DE;EP;FR;GB;IL;SG
Variable Rate Vocoder
JP2002-202800
FI
Method and System for Selecting and Determining
Encoding Rate in Variable Rate Vocoder
JP2004-004971
BR;CL;CN;MY
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for determining time in a satellite
positioning system
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.1]
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5296123
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,976,858;
EP;IN;KR
JP5221562
US8,537,197;
CN;EP;IN;KR
User equipment (UE) session notification in a collaborative
communication session
JP2013-504945
US20110231560;
JP;BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Enhanced block-request streaming system using signaling
or block creation
JP5911926
US20110238789;
JP;AE;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IN;KR;M
Y;RU;TH;ZA
Enhanced block-request streaming using URL templates
and construction rules
JP5666599
US20110231519;
AE;AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IN;KR;P
H;RU;UA;ZA
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Improving error resilience using out of band directory
information
Content- and link-dependent
multimedia telephony
coding
adaptation
for
AT2-131
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-132
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP4555261
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US6,535,979;
AT;AU;BR;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;H
K;IN;IT;KR;NL
Closed-loop power control in multi-carrier high-speed
uplink packet access
JP5726762
US8,521,207;
AE;AT;BE;BR;CA;CH;CN;DE;DK;EP;
ES;FI;FR;GB;GR;HK;HU;ID;IE;IN;IT;K
R;MY;NL;NO;PH;PL;PT;RO;RU;SE;Z
A
Arranging sub-track fragments for streaming video data
JP5551315
US8,930,562;
AR;AU;BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;G
B;HK;HU;ID;IL;IN;IT;KR;MY;NL;PH;R
U;SG;TH;TW;UA;VN;ZA
Systems and methods for wireless communications
JP5823520
US9,078,118;
CN;DE;EP;ES;FR;GB;IN;IT;KR;NL;T
W
Method and apparatus of deactivating carriers in wireless
communications
JP5684387
US8,861,451;
CN;DE;EP;ES;FR;GB;IN;IT;KR;NL
Reporting of channel properties in heterogeneous networks
JP5762546
US9,307,431;
US15/009,491;
JP;CN;EP;IN;KR
Methods and apparatus for transmitting and receiving
secure and non-secure data
JP5739006
US9,179,303;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Dynamic uplink power control
JP5795380
US20120115534;
JP;CN;EP;IN
Paging and power management schemes for local network
access
JP5784650
US9,271,228;
JP;BR;CA;CN;EP;IN;KR;RU;TW
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method of ciphering data transmission and cellular radio
system employing the method
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.0]
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-133
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US9,100,457;
BR;CA;CN;EP;KR;MX;TW
Method and apparatus for header compression in a
wireless communication system
JP4270874
US7,031,666;
BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;IT;K
R;MX;NL;SE;TW
Handoff in a multi-frequency network
JP5226767
US8,457,064;
CN;KR;TW
Streaming encoded video data
JP5619908
US8,938,767;
US8,914,835;
JP;BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Signaling data for multiplexing video components
JP5866354
US9,185,439;
JP;AR;BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Method and apparatus for assigning wireless network
packet resources to wireless terminals
JP5410645
US20120127951;
CN;DE;EP;FR;GB;IN;KR
Method and apparatus of using CDD like schemes with
UE-RS based open loop beamforming
JP5805771
US8,934,560;
US20150085948;
JP;CN;EP;IN;KR
Method and apparatus for counting devices related to
broadcast data services
JP2016-007007
US20120202493;
JP;CN;EP;IN;KR
Target cell selection for multimedia broadcast multicast
service continuity
JP2014-511360
US9,173,192;
US20150373638;
US20160007321;
US20150373533;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Application transport level location filtering of internet
protocol multicast content delivery
JP2014-515586
US20120303745;
JP;CN;EP;IN;KR
Managing handoff triggering between unicast and multicast
services
JP5819527
US20130028118;
BR;CA;CN;EP;IN;KR;RU
Method and apparatus for signaling control data of
aggregated carriers
JP5784835
US9,160,513;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Systems and methods for pre-FEC metrics and reception
reports
JP015-502121
US20130159457;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Method and apparatus for transmission framing in a
wireless communication system
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5738932
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Connected mode mobility between radio access networks
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2015-516735
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20150056993;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Differentiating measurement reporting mechanism
JP2015-523834
US20140036707;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Live timing for dynamic adaptive streaming over HTTP
(DASH)
JP2016-509400
US20140195651;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Handoff in a multi-frequency network
JP5038493
US8,737,350;
BR;CN;ID;KR;MX;MY;RU;VN
JP5209743
US8,750,248;
CN;IN;KR
Handoff in a multi-frequency network
JP5221683
US8,948,757;
CN;IN;KR
Media representation groups for network streaming of
coded video data
JP2015-111898
US20120042050;
AR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Trick modes for network streaming of coded video data
JP5612211
US9,319,448;
AE;AR;AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IL;IN
;KR;MY;PH;RU;SG;TH;TW;UA;VN;ZA
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
RF channel handoff in a multi-frequency
network
AT2-134
*The deadline for filing of a Japan counterpart of this patent application has not yet passed. Therefore a Japanese counterpart may still
be filed or granted in Japan.
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.2]
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-135
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,426,466;
US8,660,840;
BR;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;HK;IT;K
R;NL;SE;TW
Method and apparatus for coding of unvoiced speech
JP4270866
US7,191,125;
US7,493,256;
US6,947,888;
BR;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;HK;IT;K
R;SE;TW
Wireless local access network system detection and
selection
JP4653070
US7,146,130;
US8,064,927;
US7,778,593;
JP;BR;CN;DE;EP;GB;IN;KR;MX
Frame erasure concealment in voice communications
JP5362808
US7,519,535;
CN;EP;IN;KR;MY
Systems, methods, and apparatus for wideband speech
coding
JP5161069
US8,484,036;
AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;IL;IN;KR;MX;P
H;RU;TW;UA;VN
Systems, methods, and apparatus for highband excitation
generation
JP4955649
US8,260,611;
AT;AU;BE;BR;CA;CH;CN;DE;DK;EP;
ES;FI;FR;GB;GR;HK;HU;ID;IE;IL;IN;I
T;KR;MX;NL;NO;PH;PL;PT;RO;RU;S
E;SG;TW;UA;VN
Methods and apparatus for encoding and decoding an
highband portion of a speech signal
JP5129117
US8,140,324;
AU;BE;BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;G
B;HK;HU;ID;IE;IL;IN;IT;KR;MX;NL;NO
;PH;PL;RO;RU;SE;SG;TW;UA;VN
Method and apparatus for split-band encoding of speech
signals
JP5129116
US8,364,494;
AU;BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;H
U;ID;IL;IN;IT;KR;MX;NL;PH;RU;SE;S
G;TW;UA;VN
Method and apparatus for predictively quantizing voiced
speech
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5037772
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-136
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5497121
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US7,450,543;
US20130329707;
US20090046663;
JP;AT;BE;CH;CN;DE;DK;EP;ES;FI;F
R;GB;GR;HK;IE;IN;IT;KR;NL;PT;SE;T
W
Methods and apparatus for performing resource tracking
and accounting at an end node
JP4903700
US7,610,225;
JP;BR;CA;CN;IN;KR;MX;PH;RU;UA;
VN
Methods and apparatus for wideband encoding of active
frames
JP5275231
US8,532,984;
BR;CN;DE;EP;GB;IN;KR;RU;SG;TW
Systems, methods, and apparatus for signal change
detection
JP4995913
US8,725,499;
BR;CA;CN;EP;IN;KR;RU;SG;TW
Systems, methods, and apparatus for wideband encoding
and decoding of inactive frames
JP5596189
US9,324,333;
US8,260,609;
JP;BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FR;GB;HK;I
N;IT;KR;NL;RU;SG;TW
Systems and methods for modifying a window with a frame
associated with an audio signal
JP4991854
US7,987,089;
BR;CA;CN;EP;IN;KR;RU;SG;TW
Systems, methods, and apparatus for gain factor limiting
JP5290173
US20080027718;
BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FR;GB;IN;IT;K
R;NL;RU;SG;TW
Systems and methods for dynamic normalization to reduce
loss in precision for low-level signals
JP5518482
US8,005,671;
AT;BE;BR;CA;CH;CN;DE;DK;EP;ES;
FI;FR;GB;GR;HU;IE;IN;IT;KR;NL;PL;
PT;RO;RU;SE;TW
Methods for intra base station handover optimizations
JP4991939
US8,284,734;
US8,437,312;
BR;CN;EP;HK;IN;KR;MX;RU;UA;VN
Systems and methods for reconstructing an erased speech
frame
JP5405659
US8,428,938;
CN;DE;EP;ES;FR;GB;IN;IT;KR;TW
Systems and methods for preventing the loss of information
within a speech frame
JP5587405
US8,352,252;
BR;CN;DE;EP;GB;IN;KR;TW
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatus for wireless network connectivity
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-137
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,559,359;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;RU
Methods and apparatus for combined peer to peer and
wide area network based discovery
JP5507664
US8,082,303;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Method and apparatus for mitigation of interference due to
peer-to-peer communication
JP5431587
US8,817,702;
US9,210,668;
JP;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IN;KR;MY;P
H;RU;TH;TW;ZA
Separate resource partitioning management for uplink
control and uplink data signals
JP5646727
US9,031,010;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Network-assisted peer discovery
JP5514957
US8,812,657;
US20140337432;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Transmission and reception of proximity detection signal
for peer discovery
JP5646730
US20110268101;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Multi-homed peer-to-peer network
JP5623633
US20110294474;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Systems, methods, apparatus, and computer-readable
media for coding of harmonic signals
JP5694531
US8,924,222;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Systems, methods, apparatus, and computer-readable
media for dynamic bit allocation
JP5694532
US9,236,063;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Systems, methods, apparatus, and computer-readable
media for multi-stage shape vector quantization
JP5587501
US8,831,933;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Systems, methods, apparatus, and computer-readable
media for noise injection
JP5680755
US9,208,792;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Method and apparatus for signaling paging configurations
and channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS)
configurations
JP5823536
US8,964,663;
JP;CN;DE;EP;GB;IN;KR
System and method for network provisioning of mobile
entities for peer-to-peer service
JP2015-173481
US20120243437;
JP;BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Inter access point interference information exchange
mechanisms to achieve network QoS target in wireless
cellular systems
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5738907
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Noise-robust speech coding mode classification
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP5813864
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,990,074;
BR;CA;CN;EP;IN;KR;RU;TW
Reference signal detection
JP5833251
US8,934,326;
US20140334434;
JP;CN;EP;IN;KR
Systems, methods, apparatus, and computer-readable
media for criticality threshold control
JP2016-089359
US9,047,863;
JP;BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Systems, methods, apparatus, and computer-readable
media for bit allocation for redundant transmission of audio
data
JP2015-507221
US9,053,702;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Multiple coding mode signal classification
JP2015-507222
US9,111,531;
AT;BE;BR;CH;CN;DE;DK;EP;ES;FI;F
R;GB;GR;HU;IE;IN;IT;KR;NL;NO;PT;
SE;SI;TR
Method and apparatus for performing random access on a
secondary carrier
JP2015-503888
US9,094,988;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Devices for redundant frame coding and decoding
JP2015-509214
US9,275,644;
AT;BE;CH;CN;DE;DK;EP;ES;FI;FR;G
B;GR;HU;IE;IN;IT;KR;NL;NO;PT;SE;
SI;TR
Voice activity detection in presence of background noise
JP5905608
US9,099,098;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Methods and apparatus for uplink power control
JP2015-514353
US20130250875;
CN
Communication in a heterogeneous network with carrier
aggregation
JP2015-517276
US9,320,062;
US15/015,906;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Methods and apparatus for subframe configuration for
wireless networks
JP2015-523772
US20130308568;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Transmission
aggregation
JP2015-525546
US20130343239;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
AT2-138
in
combined
TDD
and
FDD
carrier
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-139
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20130336193;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Communicating with an enhanced new carrier type for
energy saving
JP2015-523838
US20140036812;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Evolved multimedia broadcast/multicast services (eMBMS)
cluster management
JP2016-508336
US9,191,922;
CN;EP;IN;TW
Enhanced uplink and downlink power control for LTE TDD
EIMTA
JP2015-530852
US20150256320;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Resource allocation for the coexistence of peer discovery
and legacy LTE traffic
JP2015-558908
US20140241256;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Signaling of refresh rate for efficient data update in
distributed computing environments
JP2015-530057
US20140082147;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Processing PMCH/PRS and EPDCCH in LTE
JP2015-534788
US20140098732;
CN;EP;IN
Transport of control protocol for trusted WLAN (TWAN)
offload
JP2015-536586
US20140086226;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Buffer status reporting and logical channel prioritization in
dual connectivity
JP2016-501454
US9,264,930;
US20160113017;
CN;EP;IN;KR
PUCCH resource determination for EPDCCH
JP2016-501461
US20140133370;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Systems and methods for mitigating potential frame
instability
JP2016-510134
US20140236588;
AE;AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR
;MY;PH;RU;SG;TH;TW;UA;VN;ZA
Systems and methods of performing gain control
JP2016-507087
US20140229170;
AE;AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR
;MY;PH;RU;SG;TH;UA;VN;ZA
Systems and methods of performing filtering for gain
determination
JP2015-556929
US20140229171;
AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MY
;PH;RU;SG;TH;UA;VN;ZA
Network information for assisting user equipment
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2015-525544
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-140
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2015-559225
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20140236583;
AE;AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR
;MY;PH;RU;SG;TH;TW;UA;VN;ZA
Systems and methods for controlling an average encoding
rate
JP2016-507789
US9,263,054;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Systems and methods of performing noise modulation and
gain adjustment
JP2016-507783
US20140229172;
AE;AU;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR
;MX;MY;PH;RU;SG;TH;UA;VN;ZA
Identifying modulation and coding schemes and channel
quality indicators
JP2016-506202
US20140192732;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Hybrid reconfiguration methods and apparatus for TDD
adaptation
JP2016-507978
US20150341927;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Method and apparatus for utilizing a reconfiguration timer
for updating TDD configuration
JP2016-504888
US20150318974;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Supporting transport diversity and time-shifted buffers for
media streaming over a network
JP2015-552894
US20140201323;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Prioritizing radio access types for closed subscriber group
cells
JP2016-507994
US20140198753;
CN;EP;IN;KR
TDD reconfiguration with consideration of DTX/DRX
JP2016-510552
US20150327324;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Apparatus and method of network selection based on
available bandwidth
JP2016-506213
US20140213256;
CN;DE;EP;FR;GB;IN;KR
Uplink power headroom management for connectivity with
logically separate cells
JP2016-515135
US20140349701;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Method for policy control and charging for D2D services
JP2016-512100
US20140329494;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Decoupling WLAN selection from PLMN/service provider
selection
JP2016-504322
US20140287746;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Methods and apparatus for transmission restriction and
efficient signaling
JP2016-506604
US20140301298;
CN;EP;IN;KR
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Systems and methods for determining an interpolation
factor set
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-141
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20140307703;
CN;EP;IN;KR
RESOURCE
ALLOCATION
FOR
DISTRIBUTED
DEVICE-TO-DEVICE SYNCHRONIZATION
WO2015034658*
US9,307,510;
JP;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR
Methods and apparatus for employing multiple subframe
configurations for HARQ operations
JP2016-507578
US20140307595;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Distributed algorithm for constructing and maintaining a
hierarchical structure for device-to-device synchronization
WO2015065888*
US20150117437;
JP;BR;CN;EP;IN
Method for efficiently supporting multiple simultaneous
group PTT calls requiring low call setup latency
JP2016-516784
US20140355508;
BR;CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Signaling of enhanced
interference mitigation
JP2016-512217
US20160066288;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Efficient downlink operation for EIMTA
JP2016-512939
US20140334400;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Channel state information (CSI) measurement and
reporting for enhanced interference management for traffic
adaptation (eIMTA) in LTE
JP2016-514058
US20140341051;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Full file repair using schedule description fragment in
eMBMS
JP2016-516816
US20140358866;
CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
Methods for direct discovery in asynchronous network
deployments
US20150029893*
JP;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR
Trusted wireless local area network (WLAN) access
scenarios
US20150020168*
JP;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR;TW
DYNAMIC INDICATION OF TIME DIVISION (TDD)
DUPLEX
UPLINK/DOWNLINK
SUBFRAME
CONFIGURATIONS
US14/905,929*
JP;AE;AU;BR;CA;CL;CN;EG;EP;ID;IL
;IN;KR;MX;MY;NG;NZ;PH;RU;SA;SG;
TH;VN;ZA
Techniques for allocating user equipment processing
capability among multiple access nodes
US20150043479*
JP;BR;CA;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR
PUUCH RESOURCE
FEEDBACK
US14/910,567*
JP;BR;CA;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR
Precoder resource bundling information for interference
cancellation in LTE
power
MAPPING
control
AN
for
eIMTA
HARQ-ACK
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
JP2016-507651
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-142
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2015167732*
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20150317994;
AR;BD;GC;TW
ESTIMATION OF MIXING FACTORS TO GENERATE
HIGH-BAND EXCITATION SIGNAL
JP2016-521680
US20150106084;
WO;AU;BR;CA;CL;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR;
MX;MY;NG;NZ;PH;RU;SG;TH;VN;ZA
Gain shape estimation for improved tracking of high-band
temporal characteristics
JP2016-521700
US20150106102;
WO;AU;BR;CA;CL;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR;
MX;MY;NG;NZ;PH;RU;SA;SG;TH;TW
;VN;ZA
Operator controlled APN routing mapping
US20150063301*
JP;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR;TW
METHOD,
APPARATUS,
DEVICE,
COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR BANDWIDTH
EXTENSION OF AN AUDIO SIGNAL USING A SCALED
HIGH-BAND EXCITATION
WO2015057680*
US20150106107;
JP;AU;BR;CA;CL;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR;M
X;MY;NG;NZ;PH;RU;SG;VN;ZA
Systems and methods of communicating redundant frame
information
JP2016-521592
US20150106106;
WO;AU;BR;CA;CL;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR;
MY;NG;NZ;RU;SG;TH;VN;ZA
LTE MAC SUBHEADER FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE, D2D
COMMUNICATION IN THE CONTEXT OF PUBLIC
SAFETY APPLICATIONS
JP2016-515474
US20150085791;
WO;BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Method and apparatus for efficient usage of DAI bits for
EIMTA in LTE
JP2016-516893
US14/916,173;
WO;BR;CA;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR
CSI reporting for LTE-TDD eIMTA
JP2016-517382
US14/913,889;
WO;BR;CA;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR
Simplified FDD-TDD carrier aggregation
JP2016-516878
US20150085718;
WO;BR;CA;CN;EP;ID;IN;KR
CROSS-CARRIER INDICATION OF UPLINK/DOWNLINK
SUBFRAME CONFIGURATIONS
WO2015061987*
US15/028,805;
JP;WO;BR;CN;EP;IN
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING TO
USE X2 GATEWAY FOR X2 INTERFACE
WO2015066527*
US20150124702;
JP;BR;CA;CN;EP;ID;IN
High-band signal modeling
WO2015095008*
US20150170662;
CA;IN
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
High band excitation signal generation
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
AT2-143
WO
Serving gateway relocation and secondary node eligibility
for dual connectivity
WO2015095708*
US20150181473
Parameters for device to device discovery
WO2015112259*
US20150208332
Device-to-device discovery signaling for radio resource
allocation
WO2015112256*
US20150208384
Aperiodic CQI reporting for LTE-TDD EIMTA system
WO2015109942*
WO
Carrier aggregation with dynamic TDD DL/UL subframe
configuration
WO2015116767*
US20150215078
Uplink transmit power allocation and power headroom
reporting by a user equipment in a multi-connectivity
environment
WO2015116757*
US20150215943
Switching mode of operation in D2D communications
WO2015116421*
US20150215981
Procedures for managing secondary eNB (SeNB) radio link
failure (S-RLF) in dual connectivity scenarios
WO2015116877*
US20150223282
Handling FDD and TDD timing offset in FDD and TDD CA
in LTE
WO2015119846*
US20150230268
Harmonic bandwidth extension of audio signals
WO2015123210*
US20150228288;
TW
Methods and systems for returning an early positioning fix
WO2015123356*
US20150230057
Scheduling assignment content and transmission in
wireless communications
WO2015142429*
US20150271840;
TW
Time hopping in device-to-device transmissions
WO2015142632*
US20150271818
Prevention of replay attack in long term evolution
device-to-device discovery
WO2015142430*
US20150271675
Signaling flows and buffer status report for a group in
device-to-device broadcast communication
WO2015142431*
US20150271860
SCHEDULING
COMMUNICATIONS
WO2015142425*
US20150271807;
TW
Two subframe set CSI feedback for eIMTA in LTE
OF
DEVICE-TO-DEVICE
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2015103803*
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
AT2-144
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2015153491*
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20150279382;
BD;TW
High-band signal coding using multiple sub-bands
WO2015153548*
US20150279384;
BD;TW
Flexible channel state information feedback management
WO2015147997*
US20150280877
Power sharing and power headroom reporting in dual
connectivity scenarios
WO2015153382*
US20150282104
Cell ID management for discovery reference signals for
small cells in LTE
WO2015171201*
US20150326335
UE
AUTONOMOUS
RADIO
CONFIGURATION EXTENSION
WO2015172057*
US20150327249
HD-FDD HARQ operation
WO2015172041*
US20150326381
Wireless local area network offloading through radio
access network rules
WO2015171992*
US20150327129;
TW
Reporting device statistics in wireless communications
WO2015175101*
US20150327248
TECHNIQUES FOR REPORTING POWER HEADROOM
IN
MULTIPLE
CONNECTIVITY
WIRELESS
COMMUNICATIONS
WO2015187267*
US20150350944
Offset selection for error correction data
WO2016014211*
US20160028418
High-band signal coding using mismatched frequency
ranges
WO2015200859*
US20150380008
Techniques for optimizing HTTP implementation as a
transport protocol for EPC-level proximity services (ProSe)
discovery
WO2016053591*
US20160100288
Type 1 and type
communications
WO2016010644*
US20160020822
Device-to-device capability signaling
WO2016022935*
US20160044730
Techniques for managing services following an
authentication failure in a wireless communication system
PCT/US2015/058598*
US14/928,899
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Apparatus and methods of switching coding technologies
at a device
2
hopping
for
RESOURCE
device-to-device
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
Attachment 2
[Ver. 3.4]
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
(selection of option 2)
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POWER CONTROL IN
D2D/WAN COEXISTENCE NETWORKS
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US14/842,194*
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
AT2-145
User equipment testing techniques for device-to-device
transmission channels
PCT/US2016/017949*
US15/042,348
Spectral Magnitude Quantization for a Speech Coder
JP4659314
US6,324,505;
AT;BE;BR;CH;CN;CY;DE;EP;ES;FI;F
R;GB;HK;IT;KR;NL;SE
Multiplexing of peer-to-peer (P2P) communication and wide
area network (WAN) communication
WO2016007957*
US9,084,240
Configuration of
communication
peer-to-peer
JP5815734
US9,320,067;
JP;BR;CN;EP;IN;KR
Implicitly linking aperiodic channel state information
(A-CSI) reports to CSI-reference signal (CSI-RS) resources
JP5763219
US20130028182;
CN;EP;IN;KR
Aggregation of data bearers for carrier aggregation
JP2015-529035
US20140010207;
AE;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;RU
;TH;TW;ZA
Packet-level splitting for data transmission via multiple
carriers
JP2016-507658
US20140307622;
AE;BR;CA;CN;EP;HK;ID;IN;KR;PH;R
U;TH;TW;ZA
Transmission of uplink control channels to multiple nodes
JP2016-503614
US20140133474;
AP;CN;CO;EC;EG;EP;IN;KR;MA;NG;
SA;TW;UZ
user
equipment
for
*The deadline for filing of a Japan counterpart of this patent application has not yet passed. Therefore a Japanese counterpart may still
be filed or granted in Japan.
ARIB STD-T95
ARIB STD-T95
(Intentionally blanked)
AT2-146
ARIB STD-T95
Reference
This is the list of Essential Industrial Property Rights
(IPRs) filed or applied to countries other than Japan.
These are listed here as a reference, as the companies
voluntarily informed ARIB of these IPRs.
AT2-147
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *10
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and Apparatus for Radio Link Control of
Signaling Messages and Short Message Data Services
in a Communication System
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US 7,142,565
Packet Flow Processing in a Communication System
US 7,277,455
Reverse Link Automatic Repeat Request
US 20040100927
System and method for scheduling transmissions in a
wireless communication system
US 20050003843
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
AT2-148
Signaling method in an OFDM multiple access system PCT/US2001/028314
US 7,295,509, US 20080063099,
US 20050254416, EP, TW
OFDM communications methods and apparatus
PCT/US2001/028315
US, EP, TW
Methods and apparatuses for resource allocation
randomization
US 61/021,005
*10: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.
ARIB STD-T95
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
Approved by the 73rd Standard Assembly
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
GPS Receiver Utilizing a Communication Link
Approved by the 83rd Standard Assembly
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US5,874,914
AT2-149
Reducing Satellite Signal Interference in a Global
Positioning System Receiver
US6,236,354
Channel allocations in a communications system
US7,826,414
Method and apparatus for message segmentation in a
wireless communication system
US7,542,482
Data transfer procedure for transferring data of a data
sequence between a transmitting entity and a receiving
entity
US7,720,079
BR; GB; HK; IL; IN; KR; SG
Scheduled and Autonomous Transmission and
Acknowledgement
US7,155,236
US20060264220; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; KR; MX; RU;
TW; UA
Methods and apparatus for content based notification
using hierarchical groups
US20070073820
Method and apparatus for seamless and efficient
wireless handoffs
US8,059,581
Control channel assignment in a wireless
communication network
US20060133262
Methods and apparatus for mobile terminal-based radio
resource management and wireless network
optimization
US20080032677
AR; AU; BR; IL; MX; PH; RU;
SG; TH; TW; VN
ARIB STD-T95
*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
TW
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Mobile device-initiated measurement gap request
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US20070097914
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
AR; BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR;
RU; SG; TW
AT2-150
Allocating a channel resource in a system
CA2547913
EP
Apparatus and method for use in effecting automatic
repeat requests in wireless multiple access
communications systems
CA2547910
EP
Method for extending mobile IP and AAA to enable
integrated support for local access and roaming access
connectivity
US6,785,256
Method to convey uplink traffic information
US7,382,755
Methods and apparatus for the utilization of core based
nodes for state transfer
US6,862,446
Methods and apparatus for operating mobile nodes in
multiple states
US6,788,963
Method and apparatus for optimization of SIGCOMP
UDVM performance
US7,685,293
Generation and detection of synchronization signal in a
wireless communication system
US20080273522
Cell detection for mobile location with grouping diversity
US20100227612
TW
Reprioritization of wireless networks for reselection to
support voice call
US20100113010
TW
*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
US6,990,337; US7,369,855;
US7,962,142; AU; CA; CN; EP; IN
TW
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Data transmission in a TDMA system
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US7,158,489
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
AT; DE; EP; FR; GB
AT2-151
Channel allocation for communication system
US7,986,660
Transmission of reference signal on non-contiguous
clusters of resources
WO2011005536
US20110141982; IN; TW
Random access channel (RACH) optimization for a
self-organizing network (SON)
US20100232318
TW
Joint layer 3 signalling coding for multicarrier operation
WO2010127316
US20110110441; TW
Downlink assignment indicator design for multi-carrier
wireless communication
WO2010141607
Method and apparatus for facilitating radio link
monitoring and recovery
WO2010144601
US20110143675; IN; TW
Data prioritization for a power-limited UE in a wireless
communication system
WO2010144864
US20110141959; TW
A method and apparatus for dispatching a channel
quality indicator feedback in multicarrier system using an
anchor carrier scheme
WO2010144875
US20110141926; IL; MY; TW
Method and apparatus for network optimization using
SON solutions
WO2011005524
US20100325267; TW
Managing video adaptation algorithms
WO2010148048
US20100316066; TW
US20110128922; AE; AU; CA;
CN; IN; SG; TW; ZA
ARIB STD-T95
*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
AT; BE; CH; DE; DK; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; GR; IE; IT; NL; PT;
RU; SE
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus that facilitates measurement
procedures in multicarrier operation
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2010148403
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100322079; TW
AT2-152
Selecting a quality of service class identifier for a bearer
WO2011005546
US20100322069; TW
Transport of LCS-related messages for LTE access
WO2011005516
US20110143771; TW
GPS Receiver Utilizing a Communication Link
US6,421,002
GPS Receiver Utilizing a Communication Link
US6,400,314
Method and Apparatus for Utilizing Channel State
Information in a Wireless Communication System
US7,006,848
Method and apparatus for time-aligning transmissions
from multiple base stations in a CDMA communication
system
US7,433,321
Signal acquisition in a wireless communication system
US8,068,530
Method of providing a gap indication during a sticky
assignment
US20060164993
Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency
division wireless communication system
US20090213950
Resource allocation for shared signaling channels
US20070211616
Method and apparatus for performing position
determination with a short circuit call flow
US7,974,639
*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
TW
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Controlling hand-off in a mobile node with two mobile IP
clients
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US7,020,465
AT2-153
Methods and apparatus for tunneling between different
addressing domains
US7,366,147
Methods and apparatus for extending mobile IP
US7,623,497
Methods and apparatus for aggregating MIP and AAA
messages
US7,564,824
Packet forwarding methods for use in handoffs
US20030193912
Multiple access wireless communications system using
a multisector configuration
US7,388,845
Beacon signaling in a wireless system
US6,985,498
CN; EP; HK; IN; KR
Synchronization Techniques for a Wireless System
US7,133,354
CA
Beacon signaling in a wireless system
US7,366,200
Methods and apparatus for determining, communicating
and using information which can be used for interference
control purposes
US20060092881
Method of creating and utilizing diversity in a multiple
carrier communication system
US7,363,039
Power and timing control methods and apparatus
US7,778,643
Wireless timing and power control
US7,668,573
ARIB STD-T95
*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
US20080182580; CA; EP
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for operating mobile nodes in
multiple states
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
CA2534851
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; RU; ZA
AT2-154
Seamless context switching for radio link protocol
US20080186920
MIMO transmission with explicit and implicit cyclic
delays
US20090197546
Method and apparatus for handoff between source and
target access systems
US20080318575
Secondary synchronization codebook for E-UTRAN
US8,009,701
Data transmission via a relay station in a wireless
communication system
US20100097978
EP
Cell relay packet routing
US20100103861
TW
Device attachment and bearer activation using cell
relays
US20100103862
TW
Cell relay mobility procedures
US20100103845
TW
Cell relay protocol
US20100103864
TW
Data transmission in a TDMA system
US6,819,937
Selectively including allowed CSG list in page message
US20100195573
TW
Optimized inter-access point packet routing for IP relay
nodes
WO2010118428
US20100260109; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
WO2010120826
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Split-cell relay application protocol
AT2-155
Split-cell relay packet routing
WO2010120827
Mobile Station Assisted Soft Handoff in a CDMA Cellular
Communications System
US5,640,414
Comprehensive Mobile Communications Device
Registration Method
US5,588,043
Dual Channel Slotted Paging
US6,111,865
Method and Apparatus for Transmitting and Receiving
Data Multiplexed onto Multiple Code Channels,
Frequencies and Base Stations
US6,215,777
Method and Apparatus for Performing Mobile Station
Assisted Hard Handoff Using Error Correction Codes
US6,553,064
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20100260096; TW
US20100260126; TW
*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.
ARIB STD-T95
[Ver. 2.1]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Comprehensive Mobile Communications Device
Registration Method
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US5,629,975
Method and Apparatus for Controlling Transmission
Power in a CDMA Cellular Mobile Telephone System
MY-110833-A
Comprehensive Mobile Communications Device
Registration Method
US5,588,043
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US5,621,784; US5,642,398
ARIB STD-T95
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
Approved by the 86th Standard Assembly
AT2-156
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
Approved by the 88th Standard Assembly
[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and System for Data and Voice Transmission
Over Shared and Dedicated Channels
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US6,985,510
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20060109890
AT2-157
US20110280333
TW
Devices for determining a reference subframe and
determining a mode
US20120082049
EP;CN;IN;KR
Reference signal configuration and relay downlink
control channel
WO2012048203
US20120087299;EP
Hybrid automatic repeat request feedback transmission
in a multi component-carrier communication system
using scheduling request resources
WO2012061257
US20120134305;EP;IN;TW
Method and apparatus for rate matching with muting
WO2012061521
US20120113917;EP;AE;BR;CA
;IN;MY;PH;TH
Method and apparatus for specific absorption rate
backoff in power headroom report
WO2012061582
US20120147801;EP;AR;IN;KR;
TW
Inter-frequency measurement control in a multi-carrier
system
WO2012064780
US20120113866;BR;IN
System and method for assisting in powering on
sleeping network entities
WO2013002825
US20120142328;IN
Carrier grouping for power headroom report
WO2012064872
US20120115537;IN
Interference randomization for uplink signaling
WO2012088444
US20120163159
ARIB STD-T95
Dedicated reference signal
[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Cross-carrier/cross-subframe indication
in a multi-carrier wireless network
Method for Using Only Two Base Stations for
Determining the Position of a Mobile Subscriber in a
CDMA Cellular Telephone System
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US20110105050
US6,034,635
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
ARIB STD-T95
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
AT2-158
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
Approved by the 91st Standard Assembly
[Ver. 3.0]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Synchronization of wireless nodes
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US8,374,163
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
AT2-159
ARIB STD-T95
Approved by the 95th Standard Assembly
[Ver. 3.3]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
AT2-160
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US6,681,115
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
AU; CA; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; IT
Methods and apparatus for separating home agent
functionality
US7,697,501
US8,077,695;
US8,457,099
Time orthogonalization of reference signals
US20110085606
TW
Utilizing a same target cell during circuit-switched and
packet switched handover
US7,643,450
CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; IN;
IT; MY; NL; SG; TW
Apparatus and method for determining multi-antenna
radiated performance of wireless devices
US8,412,110
TW
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Communique Subscriber Handoff Between A
Narrowcast Cellular Communication Network And A
Point-To-Point Cellular Communication Network
File delivery over a broadcast network using file system US8,914,471
abstraction, broadcast schedule messages and selective
reception
Method and apparatus for sending
channel state information using subframe-dependent
control channel formats
US20130121270
Phase difference signaling in MIMO mode uplink
US20130176868
Method for configuring a home node with a secure
address for an operator network node
US20130258944
Multiband eMBMS enhancement using carrier
aggregation
US20140119265
US14/569,318
CN; EP; IN; KR
ARIB STD-T95
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
Approved by the 101st Standard Assembly
[Ver. 2.1]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for determining search center
and size in searches for GPS transmissions
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US6,429,815
AT2-161
GPS Receiver and Method for Processing GPS Signals
US6,272,430
US6,104,340;
US6,542,821;
US6,725,159;
US5,884,214;
DE;EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;GR;IE;IT;NL;
PT;SE
Client-Server Based Remote Locator Device
US6,131,067
US6,661,372
System and method for reference data processing in
network assisted position determination
US7,522,588
CN;MX
Method and apparatus for negotiation of transmission
parameters for broadcast/multicast services
US8,959,230
BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;FI;FR;GB;IN;IT
;KR;MX;SE
IL;KR;SG
Method and Apparatus for Performing Position
Determination with a Short Circuit Call Flow
US7,421,277
BR;IL;IN;KR;SG
Multimedia communication using co-located care of
address for bearer traffic
US8,792,420
US7,924,771;
AU;BR;CN;KR;MX;TW;UA
Multiple registrations with different access networks
US9,265,022
Quality of service (QoS) aware establishment of
communication sessions
US8,077,626
ARIB STD-T95
Creating and Using Base Station Almanac Information in BRPI0215377-7
a Wireless Communication System Having a Position
Location Capability
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
AT2-162
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US8,798,634
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,229,440;
US20140228021;
TW
Integrity protection method for radio network signaling
US7,246,242
BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;ES;FR;GB;IN;I
T
Scheduling of multiple files for serving on a server
US8,122,139
US7,512,697;
US7,072,971;
US8,495,233;
Multi-output packet server with independent streams
US8,671,163
US8,185,809;
TW
LOSS RESILENT DECODING TECHNIQUE
US6,073,250
Irregularly graphed encoding technique
US6,081,909
Message encoding with irregular graphing
US6,163,870
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Systems, methods and apparatus to facilitate
identification and acquisition of access points
Method and apparatus for fast encoding of data symbols US7,721,184
according to half-weight codes
FEC architecture for streaming services including
symbol based operations and packet tagging
US8,279,755
US7,660,245
AFC device and method of controlling reception
frequency in a dual-mode terminal
US6,356,599
BR
METHOD FOR PROCESSING NETWORK SELECTION CA2531110
INFORMATION OF USER TERMINAL IN WIRELESS
LOCAL AREA NETWORK
Reserved resource release method, apparatus and base CNZL200810217789.0
station device thereof
CN;RU
ARIB STD-T95
[Ver. 2.1]
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
[Ver. 2.1]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method, device and system for recommending medium
content
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
CNZL200810126527.3
AT2-163
METHOD FOR OPTIMIZED REFERENCE SIGNAL
DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
US8,411,556
US7,808,882
METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR
MULTI-ANTENNA TRANSMISSION
IN3070/CHENP/2011
KR;RU
Method of interactive processing of user terminal
network selection information in WLAN
CNZL03146218.9
METHOD FOR SELECTING THE AUTHENTICATION
MANNER AT THE NETWORK SIDE
US7,822,407
CN;DE;EP;GB
ACCESS NETWORK SWITCHING METHOD, ANCHOR EP2169849
MANAGEMENT DEVICE, AND MOBILE ACCESSING
DEVICE
CN;DE;GB
Cell load balancing method, cell load measuring method, US8,676,186
and devices thereof
US8,958,812;
CN;EP
Method for transmitting traffic data to wireless local area
network users
AU;CN;FR;GB;RU
EP1638247
CA;CN;EP
METHOD AND NETWORK SIDE EQUIPMENT FOR
MANAGING CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP
MEMBERSHIP
CN;DE;FR;GB
EP2448296
Business processing method, communication equipment CNZL200910148427.5
and communication system
ARIB STD-T95
METHOD FOR VERIFYING THE VALIDITY OF A USER US7,941,121
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method of disconnecting terminal from service network
during switching process
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
CNZL200510001856.1
AT2-164
Distributed Satellite Position System Processing and
Application Network
US6,185,427
Method and apparatus for providing location-based
information via a computer network
US6,677,894
Method and apparatus for an adaptive de-jitter buffer in
a wireless communication system
US7,826,441
Method and apparatus for flexible packet selection in a
wireless communication system
US8,331,385
US6,677,894
Method and apparatus for processing packetized data in US7,817,677
a wireless communication system
Methods and apparatus related to assignment in a
wireless communications system
US8,099,099
IN
Systems and methods for broadcasting information
additive codes
US7,243,285
Method and apparatus for the formatting of data for
transmission
CL48.583
CL
Method and apparatus for the formatting of data for
transmission
BRPI9606833-7
MY;VN
Method for Providing Service and Rate Negotiation in a
Mobile Communication System
US7,072,388
CL;MY
Cellular Internet Telephone
US5,953,322
Method and apparatus for generating encryption stream
ciphers
US6,510,228
EP;HK;TW
ARIB STD-T95
[Ver. 2.1]
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
[Ver. 2.1]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and Apparatus for Generating Encryption
Stream Ciphers
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US6,252,958
TW
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
AT2-165
SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMING THE
POSITION OF A WIRELESS CDMA TRANSCEIVER
US6,081,229
BR;CL;CN;DE;EP;FR;GB;HK;ID;I
N;MX;RU;TW;UA;VN
Method and Apparatus for generating encryption stream
ciphers
US6,490,357
US6,888,941
Limiting Delays Associated with the Generation of
Encryption Stream Ciphers
US6,560,338
Method and Apparatus Using Multi-Path Multi-Stage
Vector Quantizer
US6,148,283
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Apparatus and methods for continuous inter-frequency
measurement reconfigurations of DC-HSUPA UE
Method and apparatus for processing emergency calls
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US9,137,695
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US20150063227
ARIB STD-T95
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
Joint use of multi-carrier and single-carrier multiplexing US8,705,441
schemes for wireless communication
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving US20110126021
secure and non-secure data
METHOD FOR TRIGGERING TERMINAL TO SEND US9,148,879
SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL, TERMINAL, AND
BASE STATION
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
AT;BE;BR;CH;CN;DE;DK;EP;ES;F
I;FR;GB;GR;HU;IE;IN;IT;KR;NL;P
L;PT;RO;RU;SE;SG;TW
CA;DE;EP;ES;FR;GB;IT;NL
US8,767,629;
CN;EP
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
AT2-166
[Ver. 3.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
Method and Apparatus for Data Transport in a Wireless US6,707,801
Communication System
Power control for point-to-multipoint services provided in US7,742,781
communication systems
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for channel management for
point-to-multipoint services in a communication system
Providing frame packing type information for video
coding
Method and apparatus for providing protocol options in a
wireless communication system
METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RF HANDOFF IN A
MULTI-FREQUENCY NETWORK
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
BR;CA;CN;DE;EP;GB;KR;MX;TW
US7,792,074
US20110045864;
AU;BE;BR;CN;EP;ES;FI;FR;GB;H
K;ID;IE;IL;IN;KR;MX;NL;RU;SG;T
W;UA
CN;HK;IN;MX;TW
US20140009578
US20120020413;
US8,077,679
BR;EP
US8,737,353
ARIB STD-T95
[Ver. 3.0]
(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
[Ver. 3.4]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
QUALCOMM
Incorporated
Arbitrary average data rates for variable rate coders
AT2-167
備考
(出願国名)
REMARKS
US8,892,448
CN;EP;IN;KR;TW
US9,043,214
CN;DE;EP;GB;HK;IN;KR;TW
US8,081,603
US20130250818
US20130294321
BR;IN;MX;VN
US20130286904
US20140036809
CN;EP;IN
CN;EP;IN
US20140064068
CN;EP;IN
CN;EP
US20140226504
US9,270,440
WO2015041989
US20150078369
US20150045017
CN;EP;ID;IN;KR
US8,090,573
US8,346,544
US8,126,708
ARIB STD-T95
Systems, methods, and apparatus for gain factor
smoothing
Systems, methods, and apparatus for gain factor
attenuation
Compression static and semi-static context transfer
Synchronization channel design for new carrier type
Smooth transition between multimedia broadcast
multicast service (MBMS) and unicast service by
demand
Methods and apparatus for TDD reconfiguration
Method and apparatus for sounding reference signal
triggering and power control for coordinated multi-point
operations
Interactions between RAN-based and legacy WLAN
mobility
Joint scheduling of device-to-device (D2D) links and wide
area network (WAN) uplink (UL) user equipments (UEs)
Processing overlapping EPDCCH resource sets
Method and apparatus for dissemination of timing
information in distributed synchronization device to
device networks
Timing synchronization for device-to-device discovery for
asynchronous LTE deployments
Selection of encoding modes and/or encoding rates for
speech compression with open loop re-decision
Selection of encoding modes and/or encoding rates for
speech compression with closed loop re-decision
Systems, methods, and apparatus for dynamic
normalization to reduce loss in precision for low-level
signals
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./
APPLICATION NO.
US8,032,369
ARIB STD-T95
Attachment 3
XGP specifications
Note:
This Document is reproduced without any modification from the XGP Forum
Technical Standard; “A-GN4.00-03-TS XGP Specifications” under the
agreement with ARIB and XGP Forum.
XGP Forum Document
A-GN4.00-03-TS
Title: XGP Specifications
Version:
03
(revision02)
Date:
XGP Forum Classification: Unrestricted
List of contents:
Abbreviations and Acronyms.
Chapter 0 Scope and Introduction.
Chapter 1 General
Chapter 2 System Overview
Chapter 3 Physical Channel Specification
Chapter 4 Individual Channel Specification
Chapter 5 Common Channel Specification
Chapter 6 Channel Assignment
Chapter 7 Message Format and Information Elements
Chapter 8 Sequence
Chapter 9 Access Phase
Chapter 10 Global mode
Annex X Regional Condition
Appendix A: Full Subcarrier Mode
Appendix B: Modulation
Appendix C: Training Sequence
Appendix D: TCCH Sequence
Appendix E: Network Interface Requirements
Appendix F: Improvement for CCH link budget
Number of pages:
810
XGP Forum
c/o Association of Radio Industries and Businesses (ARIB)
11F, Nittochi Bldg., 4-1, Kasumigaseki 1-choume, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0013, Japan
TEL +81-3-5510-8599 FAX +81-3-3592-1103
© XGP Forum2010
Hist ory o f Revised Versio ns/ Revisio ns
Version
01
01
01
Revision
01
02
03
Date
Outline
August
Approved by 20th General Meeting.
22, 2007
Established
September
Approved by 22nd General Meeting.
13, 2007
Revised.
October
Approved by NWG on October 26, 2007.
26, 2007
Corrected
typographical,
grammatical,
editorial,
and
clerical errors.
01
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
04
01
02
03
04
0
01
02
April
Approved by TWG on April 3, 2009.
3, 2009
Revised.
October
Approved by Letter Voting.
5, 2010
Revised.
April
Approved by 27th Extra General Meeting.
26, 2011
Revised.
January
Approved by Letter Voting.
12, 2012
Revised.
November
Approved by 29th General Meeting.
14, 2012
Revised.
May
Approved by Letter Voting.
15, 2013
Revised.
February
Approved by Letter Voting.
28, 2014
Revised.
September
Approved by Letter Voting.
3, 2015
Revised.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
1
Remarks
1. The definition.
1.1. Version:
A major change such as changing of basic specifications or adding new sections that would be unable to achieve only with
existing technologies, or methods written into the former version. The change made to a new version shall only be
authorized by General Meeting.
1.2. Revision:
A minor change such as partial changing, or adding some words which shall not affect the basics. The change made to a
new revision shall be authorized by each WG, and reported to the latest General Meeting.
2. Copyright Notice.
XGP Forum reserves all rights concerning the copyright to this document. The XGP Forum reserves the right to modify or
amend this document in its own discretion without notice.
3. IPR Policy.
This document adopts fully the IPR policy of XGP Forum specified separately on its website.
4. Limitation of Liability
NOTHING IN THIS DOCUMENT CREATES ANY WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NONINFRINGEMENT WITH
RESPECT TO ANY TECHNOLOGIES, STANDARDS OR SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCED OR INCORPORATED
INTO THIS DOCUMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE XGP FORUM OR ANY MEMBER BE LIABLE TO THE USER OR TO A THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY CLAIM ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, A CLAIM THAT SUCH USE INFRINGES A THIRD PARTY’S INTELLECTUAL
PROPERTY RIGHTS OR THAT IT FAILS TO COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE LAWS OR REGULATIONS. BY USE
OF THIS DOCUMENT, THE USER WAIVES ANY SUCH CLAIM AGAINST THE XGP FORUM AND ITS
MEMBERS RELATING TO THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
2
Amendment History
Section
Ver.3.2
Number
Object document
Date
Ver.03 Rev.02
July 21, 2015
in Amendment Record
10.1
Updated explanatory description referring to the relation of 3GPP Release 8,
9 , 10, 11 and R12 to be co-existed in XGP Global Mode.
10.2
Added abbreviations below:
ANDSF, CoMP, DC, eCoMP, eIMTA, GNSS, HetNet, HARQ, MCG, MCS,
MTC, NAICS, PCell, ProSe, RIBS, SCell, SCG, TTI, and TTT.
10.5.1.7, 10.5.6.24
10.6.1.7, 10.6.6.24
10.7.1.7, 10.7.6.24
10.8
Following texts have been corrected appropriately:
• Changed “E-UTRAN” to “XGP Global Mode Network”
Changed “E-UTRA” to “XGP Global Mode”
Added a new section 10.8 “Specification – referring to “Release 12 of
3GPP”. In this section, Release 12 of LTE TDD specifications are introduced
into XGP specification, and the references documents are listed from 3GPP
Release 12.
Following new features of Release 12 are specified with the descriptions:
10.8.1.1.1 General Enhancements
•
TDD-FDD Carrier Aggregation (CA)
Further Downlink MIMO Enhancements
Coverage Enhancements with TTI Bundling Operation
Network Assisted Interference Cancellation and Suppression
(NAICS)
10.8.1.1.2 Small Cell Related Enhancements
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Small cell enhancements (SCE) - physical layer aspects
Dual Connectivity (DC)
Hetrogeneous Network (HetNet) Mobility Enhancements
Dynamic adaptation of UL:DL configuration (eIMTA)
• Inter-eNB Coordinated Multipoint (e-CoMP)
• RAN assisted WLAN interworking
10.8.1.1.3 Radio Service Related Enhancements
•
•
ProSe (Proximity-based Services)
MBMS Minimum Drive Test (MDT)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
3
Low Cost Machine Type Communication (MTC) UEs
•
• Structure of section10.8 follows the previous versions of XGP Global
Mode standard which were specified in the sections 10.5 to 10.7 of the
XGP Ver. 3.1.
∙
∙
∙
∙
∙
10.8.1 Overview
10.8.2 Physical layer
10.8.3 MAC layer –MSL1
10.8.4 Radio Link Control (RLC) layer –MSL2
10.8.5 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer –MSL 3
•
10.8.6 Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer
In the sub-sections above, those texts specifically related to Release 12
features have been adjusted to the associated specs of R12 accordingly.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
4
Scope 32
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 32
1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................... 34
1.2 Application Scope ....................................................................................................................... 34
1.3 Mandatory and Optional ............................................................................................................. 35
1.4 Public Mode and Private Mode .................................................................................................. 35
2.1 System Structure......................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.1 Mobile Station (MS) ........................................................................................................ 36
2.1.2 Base Station (BS) ........................................................................................................... 36
2.1.3 Relay Station (RS) .......................................................................................................... 36
2.2 Interface Definition ...................................................................................................................... 37
2.3 Frequency Structure ................................................................................................................... 38
2.3.1 System Bandwidth (SBW) .............................................................................................. 38
2.3.2 Effective Channel Bandwidth (ECBW) ........................................................................... 38
2.3.3 Guard Bandwidth (GBW) ................................................................................................ 38
2.3.4 Frequency Structure Parameters ................................................................................... 39
2.4 Access Method............................................................................................................................ 40
2.4.1 Transmission Method ..................................................................................................... 40
2.4.2 TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access).......................................................................... 41
2.4.2.1 TDMA Slot ........................................................................................................................ 42
2.4.2.2 TDMA Frame .................................................................................................................... 42
2.4.2.3 Mandatory TDMA frame structure ................................................................................... 43
2.4.2.4 Limitation for expanded TDMA frame structure .............................................................. 43
2.4.3 OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) .......................................... 44
2.4.3.1 Subcarrier Spacing ........................................................................................................... 45
2.4.3.2 Subchannel (SCH) ........................................................................................................... 45
2.4.3.3 DC Carrier......................................................................................................................... 48
2.4.3.4 Guard Carrier.................................................................................................................... 48
2.4.4 OFDMA and TDMA ......................................................................................................... 48
2.4.5 Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) Mode Coexistence with
OFDMA UL ............................................................................................................................... 49
2.5 Physical Resource Unit (PRU) ................................................................................................... 51
2.6 Frame Structure .......................................................................................................................... 52
2.7 Full Subcarrier Mode................................................................................................................... 54
2.8 Multiple Input and Multiple Output Control................................................................................. 54
2.9 Protocol Model ............................................................................................................................ 55
2.9.1 Link Establishment Phase .............................................................................................. 55
A-GN4.00-03-TS
5
2.9.2 Access Establishment Phase ......................................................................................... 55
2.9.3 Access Phase ................................................................................................................. 55
2.9.4 Optional Protocol Model ................................................................................................. 55
2.9.4.1 User plane ........................................................................................................................ 55
2.9.4.2 Control plane .................................................................................................................... 55
2.10 Correspondence of PRU, Function Channel and Physical Channel ...................................... 57
2.11 Service Description ................................................................................................................... 59
2.12 Protocol Structure ..................................................................................................................... 59
3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................... 60
3.2 The General Conditions for OFDM PHY Layer ......................................................................... 61
3.2.1 OFDM Burst Structure .................................................................................................... 61
3.2.2 OFDM Symbol Structure for 37.5 kHz subcarrier spacing ............................................ 61
3.2.2.1 Guard Interval ................................................................................................................... 62
3.2.2.2 Windowing ........................................................................................................................ 62
3.2.3 OFDM Parameters for 37.5 kHz subcarrier spacing ..................................................... 63
3.3 The General Conditions for SC PHY Layer ............................................................................... 66
3.3.1 SC Burst Structure .......................................................................................................... 66
3.3.2 SC Block Structure ......................................................................................................... 66
3.3.2.1 Guard Interval ................................................................................................................... 66
3.3.2.2 Pulse Shaping Filter ......................................................................................................... 67
3.3.3 SC Parameters ............................................................................................................... 68
3.4 DL OFDM PHY Layer ................................................................................................................. 69
3.4.1 Channel Coding for PHY Frame .................................................................................... 69
3.4.1.1 CRC .................................................................................................................................. 70
3.4.1.2 Scrambling ........................................................................................................................ 71
3.4.1.3 Encoding ........................................................................................................................... 73
3.4.1.4 Bit-interleaving.................................................................................................................. 84
3.4.1.5 Modulation Method ........................................................................................................... 92
3.4.1.6 Precoding Method ............................................................................................................ 92
3.4.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU .................................................................................. 100
3.4.1.8 Summary of OFDM DL Channel Coding ....................................................................... 113
3.4.2 Training Format for DL OFDM ..................................................................................... 114
3.4.2.1 Training Format .............................................................................................................. 114
3.4.2.2 Training Sequence ......................................................................................................... 115
3.4.2.3 Training Index ................................................................................................................. 115
3.4.2.4 Advanced Synchronization Signal ................................................................................. 118
3.4.3 Pilot for DL OFDM......................................................................................................... 120
A-GN4.00-03-TS
6
3.4.3.1 Pilot for DL CCCH .......................................................................................................... 120
3.4.3.2 Pilot for DL ICH .............................................................................................................. 120
3.4.3.3 Optional Pilots for DL OFDM ......................................................................................... 120
3.4.4 Training and Pilot Boosting .......................................................................................... 124
3.4.4.1 1 Layer Format SISO/SDMA ......................................................................................... 124
3.4.4.2 2 Layer MIMO Format except for SDMA ....................................................................... 125
3.4.4.3 4 Layer MIMO Format except for SDMA ....................................................................... 127
3.4.4.4 Summary for Training and Pilot Boosting ..................................................................... 128
3.4.4.5 Optional Downlink Pilot boosting ................................................................................... 128
3.4.5 Signal for DL OFDM ..................................................................................................... 128
3.4.5.1 Encoding and Small Scrambling.................................................................................... 128
3.4.5.2 Modulation for Signal ..................................................................................................... 130
3.4.5.3 Signal for Optional DL Physical Channel ...................................................................... 130
3.4.6 Null (DTX/DC Carrier/Guard carrier) for DL OFDM..................................................... 135
3.4.7 TCCH Format for DL OFDM......................................................................................... 135
3.4.8 PRU Structure for DL OFDM ........................................................................................ 136
3.4.8.1 CCH for DL OFDM ......................................................................................................... 136
3.5 UL OFDM PHY Layer ............................................................................................................... 152
3.5.1 Channel Coding for PHY Frame .................................................................................. 152
3.5.1.1 CRC ................................................................................................................................ 152
3.5.1.2 Scrambling ...................................................................................................................... 152
3.5.1.3 Encoding ......................................................................................................................... 152
3.5.1.4 Bit-interleaving ................................................................................................................ 153
3.5.1.5 Modulation Method ......................................................................................................... 153
3.5.1.6 Precoding Method .......................................................................................................... 153
3.5.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU .................................................................................. 154
3.5.1.8 Summary of OFDM UL Channel Coding ....................................................................... 154
3.5.1.9 Training for UL OFDM .................................................................................................... 154
3.5.1.10 UL Training Sequence for MS transmission frame antenna switching ...................... 154
3.5.1.11 UL Training Sequence for MS transmission slot antenna switching.......................... 154
3.5.2 Pilot for UL OFDM......................................................................................................... 154
3.5.3 Signal for UL OFDM ..................................................................................................... 154
3.5.4 Null (DTX/DC Carrier/Guard Carrier) for UL OFDM .................................................... 154
3.5.5 TCCH Format for UL OFDM......................................................................................... 155
3.5.5.1 TCCH Format ................................................................................................................. 155
3.5.5.2 TCCH Sequence and TCCH Sub-slot ........................................................................... 155
3.5.6 PRU Structure for UL OFDM ........................................................................................ 156
A-GN4.00-03-TS
7
3.5.6.1 CCH for UL OFDM ......................................................................................................... 156
3.5.6.2 ICH for UL OFDM ........................................................................................................... 158
3.6 UL SC PHY Layer ..................................................................................................................... 161
3.6.1 Channel Coding for PHY Frame .................................................................................. 161
3.6.1.1 CRC ................................................................................................................................ 162
3.6.1.2 Scrambling ...................................................................................................................... 162
3.6.1.3 Encoding ......................................................................................................................... 163
3.6.1.4 Bit-interleaving ................................................................................................................ 163
3.6.1.5 Modulation Method ......................................................................................................... 173
3.6.1.6 Symbol Mapping Method for Data Block ....................................................................... 173
3.6.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method for SC Burst .......................................................................... 176
3.6.1.8 Summary of SC UL Channel Coding............................................................................. 179
3.6.1.9 Optional Channel Coding for PHY Frame ..................................................................... 180
3.6.2 Training for UL SC ........................................................................................................ 182
3.6.2.1 Training Block Format .................................................................................................... 182
3.6.2.2 Training Sequence ......................................................................................................... 183
3.6.2.3 Training Index ................................................................................................................. 183
3.6.3 Pilot for UL SC .............................................................................................................. 184
3.6.3.1 Pilot Index ....................................................................................................................... 185
3.6.3.2 Pilot for CCCH ................................................................................................................ 185
3.6.3.3 Pilot for ICH .................................................................................................................... 185
3.6.3.4 Advanced Optional Pilot Signals ................................................................................... 186
3.6.4 Signal for UL SC ........................................................................................................... 188
3.6.4.1 Signal Encoding ............................................................................................................. 188
3.6.4.2 Modulation for Signal ..................................................................................................... 190
3.6.5 Null (DTX) for UL SC .................................................................................................... 191
3.6.6 TCCH for UL SC ........................................................................................................... 192
3.6.6.2 TCCH Sequence and TCCH Sub-slot ........................................................................... 193
3.6.6.3 ATCCH for UL SC .......................................................................................................... 193
3.6.7 SC Burst Structure for UL SC ...................................................................................... 196
3.6.7.1 CCH for UL SC ............................................................................................................... 196
3.6.7.2 ICH for UL SC................................................................................................................. 198
3.6.7.3 CRC Unit for UL SC ....................................................................................................... 205
3.6.7.4 Transmission Timing of SC Burst for UL SC................................................................. 205
3.6.7.5 Optional SC Burst Structure for UL SC ......................................................................... 206
4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................... 207
4.1.1 Usage of PRU ............................................................................................................... 207
A-GN4.00-03-TS
8
4.1.1.1 Common Channel (CCH) ............................................................................................... 208
4.1.1.2 Individual Channel (ICH) ................................................................................................ 208
4.1.2 QoS Class (Access Mode) ........................................................................................... 211
4.1.2.1 Fast Access Channel Based on Map (FM-Mode)......................................................... 211
4.1.2.2 High Quality Channel Based on Carrier Sensing (QS-Mode) ...................................... 211
4.1.3 XGP Protocol Outline.................................................................................................... 212
4.1.3.1 Frame Structure ............................................................................................................. 212
4.1.3.2 Protocol Structure........................................................................................................... 213
4.2 Functional Channel ................................................................................................................... 215
4.2.1 Channel Composition ................................................................................................... 215
4.2.1.1 Individual Control Channel (ICCH) ................................................................................ 216
4.2.1.2 EXCH Control Channel (ECCH) .................................................................................... 216
4.2.1.3 EXCH Data Channel (EDCH) ........................................................................................ 216
4.2.1.4 CSCH Data Channel (CDCH) ........................................................................................ 217
4.2.1.5 Traffic Channel (TCH) .................................................................................................... 217
4.2.1.6 Accompanied Control Channel (ACCH) ........................................................................ 217
4.3 Optional Functional Control Channel ....................................................................................... 217
4.3.1 DL Control Channel Composition ................................................................................ 218
4.3.1.1 Advanced Downlink EXCH Control Channel (ADECCH) ............................................. 218
4.3.1.2 Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel (ADEFICH) ............................. 219
4.3.1.3 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel (ADHICH)................................... 219
4.3.2 Uplink Control Channel Composition ........................................................................... 219
4.3.2.1 AUANCH/RCH................................................................................................................ 219
4.3.2.2 AUANCH/ACKCH........................................................................................................... 219
4.3.2.3 AUANCH/CQICH............................................................................................................ 219
4.4 PHY Layer Structure and Frame Format ................................................................................. 220
4.4.1 PHY Frame Structure ................................................................................................... 220
4.4.1.1 ANCH/ICCH .................................................................................................................... 221
4.4.1.2 ANCH/ECCH .................................................................................................................. 222
4.4.1.3 EXCH/EDCH .................................................................................................................. 223
4.4.1.4 CSCH/TCH ..................................................................................................................... 225
4.4.1.5 CSCH/CDCH .................................................................................................................. 226
4.4.1.6 AUANCH/RCH................................................................................................................ 226
4.4.1.7 AUANCH/ACKCH........................................................................................................... 228
4.4.1.8 AUANCH/CQICH............................................................................................................ 229
4.4.2 Signal Symbol ............................................................................................................... 230
4.4.2.1 Signal Symbol Structure ................................................................................................ 230
A-GN4.00-03-TS
9
4.4.3 PHY Header .................................................................................................................. 231
4.4.3.1 PHY Header Structure ................................................................................................... 231
4.4.3.2 ECCH .............................................................................................................................. 236
4.4.4 PHY Payload ................................................................................................................. 238
4.4.4.1 PHY Payload Structure .................................................................................................. 238
4.4.5 PHY Trailer .................................................................................................................... 238
4.4.5.1 CRC ................................................................................................................................ 238
4.4.5.2 TAIL................................................................................................................................. 238
4.4.6 PHY Control Layer ........................................................................................................ 238
4.4.6.1 Channel Identifier (CI) .................................................................................................... 238
4.4.6.2 Shift Direction (SD) ........................................................................................................ 239
4.4.6.3 ANCH Power Control (APC) .......................................................................................... 240
4.4.6.4 Power Control (PC) ........................................................................................................ 240
4.4.6.5 MCS Indicator (MI) and MCS Request (MR) ................................................................ 241
4.4.6.6 Acknowledgement (ACK) ............................................................................................... 247
4.4.6.7 Channel quality report .................................................................................................... 253
4.4.6.8 MAP ................................................................................................................................ 258
4.4.6.9 Validity (V) ...................................................................................................................... 261
4.4.6.10 HARQ Cancel (HC) ...................................................................................................... 267
4.4.6.11 Request Channel (RCH) .............................................................................................. 270
4.4.6.12 Request Channel (RCH) .............................................................................................. 271
4.4.6.13 ANCH MCS Indicator (AMI) ......................................................................................... 273
4.4.6.14 ANCH MCS Request (AMR) ........................................................................................ 274
4.4.6.15 MIMO type for EXCH (MT) .......................................................................................... 274
4.4.6.16 Stream Indicator for EXCH (SI) ................................................................................... 275
4.4.6.17 MIMO type for EXCH (SR) ........................................................................................... 275
4.4.6.18 Bandwidth Indicator for EXCH (BI) .............................................................................. 275
4.4.7 PHY Control Layer for ADECCH .................................................................................. 277
4.4.7.1 ADECI format 0 .............................................................................................................. 278
4.4.7.2 ADECI format 1 .............................................................................................................. 281
4.4.7.3 ADECI format 1A ............................................................................................................ 282
4.4.7.4 ADECI format 1B ............................................................................................................ 284
4.4.7.5 ADECI format 1C............................................................................................................ 285
4.4.7.6 ADECI format 1D............................................................................................................ 285
4.4.7.7 ADECI format 2 .............................................................................................................. 287
4.4.7.8 ADECI format 2A ............................................................................................................ 289
4.4.7.9 ADECI format 3 .............................................................................................................. 290
A-GN4.00-03-TS
10
4.4.7.10 ADECI format 3A .......................................................................................................... 290
4.4.8 Summary of PHY Frame Format.................................................................................. 291
4.5 MAC Layer Structure and Frame Format ................................................................................ 293
4.5.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 293
4.5.1.1 Format Regulations ........................................................................................................ 293
4.5.1.2 MAC Frame Composition............................................................................................... 294
4.5.2 MAC Frame Format ...................................................................................................... 295
4.5.2.1 MAC Frame Structure .................................................................................................... 296
4.5.2.2 MAC Header ................................................................................................................... 300
4.5.2.3 MAC Payload.................................................................................................................. 306
4.5.3 Segmentation, Combining and Concatenation ............................................................ 307
4.5.3.1 Upper Layer Data Segmentation ................................................................................... 307
4.5.3.2 MAC Frame Segmentation in case of Retransmission................................................. 308
4.5.3.3 Combining Multiple Upper Layer Data into Single MAC Payload ................................ 309
4.5.3.4 MAC Frame Concatenation ........................................................................................... 310
4.5.4 Segmentation, Combining and Concatenation ............................................................ 311
4.5.5 MAC Control Layer ....................................................................................................... 312
4.5.5.1 MAC Control Protocol .................................................................................................... 313
4.5.5.2 Control Operation Elements .......................................................................................... 316
4.5.5.3 Access Establishment Phase Control Protocol............................................................. 318
4.6 Optional MAC Layer Structure and sub-layer .......................................................................... 318
4.6.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 318
4.6.2 MAC sub-layer1 (MSL1) ............................................................................................... 318
4.6.3 MAC sub-layer2 (MSL2) ............................................................................................... 321
4.6.3.1 TMD PDU ....................................................................................................................... 322
4.6.3.2 UMD PDU ....................................................................................................................... 322
4.6.3.3 AMD PDU ....................................................................................................................... 322
4.6.3.4 AMD PDU segment ........................................................................................................ 323
4.6.3.5 State variables parameter and timers ........................................................................... 323
4.6.4 MAC sublayer 3 (MSL3) ............................................................................................... 325
4.6.4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 325
4.6.4.2 UL Data Transfer Procedures ........................................................................................ 326
4.6.4.3 DL Data Transfer Procedures ........................................................................................ 326
4.6.4.4 MSL 3 chuck ................................................................................................................... 327
4.6.4.5 Header Compression and Decompression ................................................................... 327
4.6.4.6 Ciphering and Deciphering ............................................................................................ 328
4.6.4.7 Integrity Protection and Verification............................................................................... 328
A-GN4.00-03-TS
11
4.6.4.8 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data ................................. 328
4.6.4.9 Protocol data units, formats and parameters ................................................................ 328
4.6.4.10 Formats ......................................................................................................................... 329
4.6.4.11 Parameters ................................................................................................................... 329
4.6.4.12 State variables.............................................................................................................. 329
4.6.4.13 Timers ........................................................................................................................... 330
4.6.4.14 Constants...................................................................................................................... 330
5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................... 331
5.2 Common Channel (CCH).......................................................................................................... 331
5.2.1 Logical Common Channel (LCCH) .............................................................................. 333
5.2.2 Definition of Superframe ............................................................................................... 334
5.2.3 Superframe Structure of DL LCCH .............................................................................. 334
5.2.3.1 LCCH Interval Value (n) ................................................................................................. 334
5.2.3.2 Frame Basic Unit Length (nSUB)..................................................................................... 335
5.2.3.3 Number of Same Paging Groups (nSG) ......................................................................... 335
5.2.3.4 PCH Number (nPCH) ....................................................................................................... 335
5.2.3.5 Paging Grouping Factor (nGROUP) .................................................................................. 335
5.2.3.6 Battery Saving Cycle Maximum value (nBS).................................................................. 335
5.2.3.7 The Relationship Among Profile Data ........................................................................... 336
5.2.3.8 Paging Group Calculation Rules ................................................................................... 336
5.2.3.9 Optional Paging Group Calculation Rules .................................................................... 337
5.2.3.10 Intermittent Transmission Timing for ICH ................................................................... 337
5.2.4 Structure of UL LCCH ................................................................................................... 338
5.2.5 Structure of DL LCCH ................................................................................................... 338
5.2.6 LCCH Multiplexing ........................................................................................................ 339
5.2.6.1 When PCH Paging Groups Being Independent............................................................ 340
5.2.6.2 When PCH Paging Groups Being Inter-related ............................................................ 340
5.3 PHY Frame Format ................................................................................................................... 341
5.3.1 BCCH ............................................................................................................................ 341
5.3.2 PCH ............................................................................................................................... 342
5.3.3 TCCH............................................................................................................................. 342
5.3.4 SCCH ............................................................................................................................ 342
5.3.4.1 DL SCCH ........................................................................................................................ 342
5.3.4.2 UL SCCH for OFDMA .................................................................................................... 343
5.3.4.3 UL SCCH for SC ............................................................................................................ 343
5.4 Control Field Format ................................................................................................................. 344
5.4.1 Channel Identifier (CI) .................................................................................................. 344
A-GN4.00-03-TS
12
5.4.2 BS Information (BS-Info) .............................................................................................. 344
5.4.2.1 Base Station ID (BSID) .................................................................................................. 345
5.4.2.2 BS Additional ID ............................................................................................................. 345
5.4.3 Common Control Information (CCI) ............................................................................. 346
5.4.3.1 Absolute Slot Number .................................................................................................... 346
5.4.4 Mobile Station ID (MSID) .............................................................................................. 346
5.5 MSG Field.................................................................................................................................. 347
5.5.1 Message Type List........................................................................................................ 347
5.5.2 MSG (BCCH) ................................................................................................................ 348
5.5.2.1 "Radio Channel Information Broadcasting" Message .................................................. 348
5.5.2.2 "System Information Broadcasting" Message ............................................................... 355
5.5.2.3 "Optional Information Broadcasting" Message ............................................................. 358
5.5.3 MSG (Optional BCCH) ................................................................................................. 359
5.5.3.1 MSG (BCCH) .................................................................................................................. 359
5.5.4 MSG (PCH) ................................................................................................................... 360
5.5.4.1 “No Paging” Message .................................................................................................... 362
5.5.4.2 "Paging Type 1" Message (single paging / 50 bits' Paging ID) .................................... 364
5.5.4.3 "Paging Type 2" Message (single paging / 34 bits' Paging ID) .................................... 366
5.5.4.4 "Paging Type 3" Message (single paging / 24 bits' Paging ID) .................................... 368
5.5.4.5 "Paging Type 4" Message (multiplex paging / 34 bits' Paging ID) ............................... 370
5.5.4.6 "Paging Type 5" Message (multiplex paging / 24 bits' Paging ID) ............................... 373
5.5.4.7 "Paging Type 6" Message (paging and LCH assignment / 34 bits' Paging ID) ........... 375
5.5.4.8 "Paging Type 7" Message (paging and LCH assignment / 24 bits' Paging ID) ........... 378
5.5.5 MSG (Optional PCCH) ................................................................................................. 380
5.5.6 MSG (SCCH) ................................................................................................................ 380
5.5.6.1 DL SCCH ........................................................................................................................ 381
5.5.6.2 UL SCCH ........................................................................................................................ 407
6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................... 410
6.2 Link Establishment Control ....................................................................................................... 410
6.3 Channel Assignment Control .................................................................................................... 412
6.4 Connection Control ................................................................................................................... 413
6.4.1 FM-Mode ....................................................................................................................... 413
6.4.1.1 Connection Control ........................................................................................................ 413
6.4.1.2 Channel Selection .......................................................................................................... 422
6.4.2 QS-Mode ....................................................................................................................... 424
6.4.2.1 Channel Selection .......................................................................................................... 424
6.5 Radio State Management ......................................................................................................... 425
A-GN4.00-03-TS
13
6.5.1 Idle State ....................................................................................................................... 426
6.5.2 Active State ................................................................................................................... 427
6.5.3 Sleep State .................................................................................................................... 428
6.6 Optional Radio State Management .......................................................................................... 429
6.6.1 Idle State ....................................................................................................................... 430
6.6.2 Active State ................................................................................................................... 430
6.7 ICH continuation transmission.................................................................................................. 431
6.8 Optional Random access procedure ........................................................................................ 431
6.9 Summary of Parameters ........................................................................................................... 433
7.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................... 435
7.2 Message Format ....................................................................................................................... 435
7.2.1 Format Regulations ...................................................................................................... 435
7.2.2 Message Type............................................................................................................... 436
7.2.2.1 Link Setup Request ........................................................................................................ 437
7.2.2.2 Link Setup Request (SC) ............................................................................................... 438
7.2.2.3 Link Setup Response ..................................................................................................... 439
7.2.2.4 Extension Function Request .......................................................................................... 440
7.2.2.5 Extension Function Response ....................................................................................... 441
7.2.2.6 Connection Request....................................................................................................... 442
7.2.2.7 Connection Response .................................................................................................... 443
7.2.2.8 ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation ........................................................................... 444
7.2.2.9 ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication ................................................................................ 445
7.2.2.10 ANCH/CSCH Switching Request ................................................................................ 446
7.2.2.11 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection............................................................................... 447
7.2.2.12 ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request............................................................................ 448
7.2.2.13 TDMA Slot Limitation Request .................................................................................... 449
7.2.2.14 CQI Report ................................................................................................................... 449
7.2.2.15 CQI Report Indication .................................................................................................. 450
7.2.2.16 Additional LCH Confirmation ....................................................................................... 450
7.2.2.17 Additional LCH Indication ............................................................................................ 451
7.2.2.18 Additional QCS Request .............................................................................................. 451
7.2.2.19 Additional QCS Request Indication ............................................................................. 452
7.2.2.20 Additional QCS Response ........................................................................................... 452
7.2.2.21 Additional QCS Rejection ............................................................................................ 452
7.2.2.22 Additional QCS Re-request ......................................................................................... 453
7.2.2.23 Connection Release ..................................................................................................... 454
7.2.2.24 Connection Release Acknowledgement ..................................................................... 455
A-GN4.00-03-TS
14
7.2.2.25 QCS Release................................................................................................................ 455
7.2.2.26 QCS Release Acknowledgement ................................................................................ 456
7.2.2.27 Authentication Information 1 ........................................................................................ 456
7.2.2.28 Authentication Information 2 ........................................................................................ 457
7.2.2.29 Encryption Key Indication ............................................................................................ 457
7.2.2.30 QCS Status Enquiry Response ................................................................................... 458
7.2.2.31 QCS Status Enquiry Request ...................................................................................... 458
7.3 Information Element Format ..................................................................................................... 459
7.3.1 Format Regulations ...................................................................................................... 459
7.3.2 Single Octet Information Element Identifier ................................................................. 460
7.3.2.1 Channel Type ................................................................................................................. 460
7.3.2.2 Connection Type ............................................................................................................ 461
7.3.2.3 Extension Function Sequence ....................................................................................... 461
7.3.2.4 Result of Location Registration...................................................................................... 462
7.3.2.5 TDMA Slot Specification ................................................................................................ 463
7.3.3 Multiple Octet Information Element Identifier .............................................................. 464
7.3.3.1 Area Information ............................................................................................................. 466
7.3.3.2 Authentication Information 1 .......................................................................................... 469
7.3.3.3 Authentication Information 2 .......................................................................................... 472
7.3.3.4 Cause.............................................................................................................................. 475
7.3.3.5 CCH Superframe Configuration..................................................................................... 477
7.3.3.6 Communication Parameter ............................................................................................ 482
7.3.3.7 Connection-ID................................................................................................................. 487
7.3.3.8 CQI .................................................................................................................................. 487
7.3.3.9 Disconnection Type........................................................................................................ 489
7.3.3.10 Encryption Key Set....................................................................................................... 490
7.3.3.11 Extension Function Number ........................................................................................ 490
7.3.3.12 MS Performance .......................................................................................................... 492
7.3.3.13 MSID ............................................................................................................................. 498
7.3.3.14 Protocol Version ........................................................................................................... 500
7.3.3.15 PRU Information ........................................................................................................... 500
7.3.3.16 QCS Information........................................................................................................... 502
7.3.3.17 QoS ............................................................................................................................... 503
7.3.3.18 QCS Status ................................................................................................................... 503
7.3.3.19 Scheduling Information ................................................................................................ 505
7.3.3.20 Source BS-info ............................................................................................................. 506
7.3.3.21 Target BS-info .............................................................................................................. 507
A-GN4.00-03-TS
15
7.3.3.22 MAP Origin ................................................................................................................... 507
7.3.3.23 MSID (SC) .................................................................................................................... 508
7.3.3.24 Power Report................................................................................................................ 511
7.3.3.25 Report Indication .......................................................................................................... 511
7.3.3.26 Encryption Key Information.......................................................................................... 512
7.3.3.27 MIMO Information ........................................................................................................ 512
7.3.3.28 ICH Continuation Transmission Information ............................................................... 514
7.3.4 Information Element Rules ........................................................................................... 515
7.3.4.1 Error process .................................................................................................................. 515
7.3.4.2 Information elements order ............................................................................................ 516
7.3.4.3 Duplicated information elements ................................................................................... 517
8.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................... 518
8.2 Sequence .................................................................................................................................. 518
8.2.1 Outgoing Call ................................................................................................................ 518
8.2.2 Incoming Call ................................................................................................................ 520
8.2.3 Release ......................................................................................................................... 522
8.2.3.1 Connection Release ....................................................................................................... 522
8.2.3.2 QCS Release.................................................................................................................. 523
8.2.4 Location Registration .................................................................................................... 525
8.2.5 ANCH/CSCH Switching ................................................................................................ 527
8.2.5.1 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by MS ..................................................................... 527
8.2.5.2 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by BS ..................................................................... 528
8.2.5.3 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection ................................................................................. 529
8.2.5.4 ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request .............................................................................. 530
8.2.6 Handover ....................................................................................................................... 531
8.2.6.1 Normal Handover Triggered by BS ............................................................................... 531
8.2.6.2 Normal Handover Triggered by MS............................................................................... 533
8.2.6.3 Seamless Handover ....................................................................................................... 535
8.2.7 Link Channel Establishment ......................................................................................... 537
8.2.7.1 Link Channel Assignment .............................................................................................. 537
8.2.7.2 Link Channel Assignment Standby ............................................................................... 537
8.2.7.3 Link Channel Re-request Sequence ............................................................................. 538
8.2.7.4 Link Channel Request Standby and Link Channel Assignment Re-request ............... 538
8.2.7.5 Link Channel Assignment Rejection.............................................................................. 539
8.2.8 Additional QCS ............................................................................................................. 540
8.2.8.1 Additional QCS ............................................................................................................... 540
8.2.8.2 Additional QCS Request Indication ............................................................................... 540
A-GN4.00-03-TS
16
8.2.8.3 Additional QCS Rejection .............................................................................................. 541
8.2.8.4 Additional QCS with Extra LCH ..................................................................................... 541
8.2.8.5 Additional QCS with Re-request of Extra LCH ............................................................. 542
8.2.9 Status Check ................................................................................................................. 543
8.2.9.1 QCS Status Check Triggered by MS............................................................................. 543
8.2.9.2 QCS Status Check Triggered by BS ............................................................................. 543
8.2.10 CQI Transmission ....................................................................................................... 543
8.2.10.1 CQI Report ................................................................................................................... 544
8.2.10.2 CQI Report Indication .................................................................................................. 544
8.3 Radio Connection Management Sequence ............................................................................. 544
8.3.1 Paging ........................................................................................................................... 545
8.3.2 Radio connection establishment .................................................................................. 545
8.3.2.1 Radio connectionSetupComplete .................................................................................. 546
8.3.3 Radio connection reconfiguration ................................................................................ 547
8.3.4 Radio connection re-establishment.............................................................................. 548
8.3.5 Radio connection release ............................................................................................. 549
8.3.6 Radio Link Failure ......................................................................................................... 549
8.4 Optional Mobility sequence ...................................................................................................... 550
8.4.1 Mobility Management in IDLE State............................................................................. 550
8.4.1.1 Cell selection .................................................................................................................. 550
8.4.1.2 Cell reselection ............................................................................................................... 551
8.4.2 Mobility Management in active state ............................................................................ 552
8.4.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 552
8.4.2.2 Handover ........................................................................................................................ 553
8.4.3 Measurements .............................................................................................................. 555
8.4.3.1 Intra-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements ........................................................... 556
8.4.3.2 Inter-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements ........................................................... 556
8.4.3.3 measurement configuration ........................................................................................... 556
8.4.3.4 Measurement reporting .................................................................................................. 557
9.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................... 558
9.2 Retransmission Control Method ............................................................................................... 558
9.2.1 ARQ ............................................................................................................................... 558
9.2.1.1 Procedure of ARQ .......................................................................................................... 558
9.2.1.2 Setting the Timing for Transmission of the ACK Field in CDCH .................................. 558
9.2.1.3 Timing of Retransmission .............................................................................................. 559
9.2.1.4 Example of ARQ Retransmission .................................................................................. 559
9.2.1.5 Example of Sequence .................................................................................................... 560
A-GN4.00-03-TS
17
9.2.1.6 About the Switch of ARQ and the Adaptive Modulation ............................................... 561
9.2.2 HARQ ............................................................................................................................ 561
9.2.2.1 Procedure of HARQ ....................................................................................................... 561
9.2.2.2 Retransmission Rule in FM-Mode ................................................................................. 562
9.2.2.3 HARQ Approval Condition ............................................................................................. 564
9.2.2.4 HARQ Cancel Condition ................................................................................................ 564
9.2.2.5 Setting the Timing for the Transmission of the ACK Field in the ANCH ...................... 564
9.2.2.6 Timing of Retransmission .............................................................................................. 567
9.2.2.7 Example of HARQ Retransmission ............................................................................... 569
9.2.2.8 Example of Sequence .................................................................................................... 570
9.2.2.9 Switch of HARQ and the Adaptive Modulation ............................................................. 571
9.2.2.10 Increment Redundancy (IR) Method ........................................................................... 572
9.2.2.11 Retransmission Count.................................................................................................. 573
9.3 Optional Retransmission Control Method ................................................................................ 573
9.3.1 HARQ ............................................................................................................................ 573
9.3.2 ARQ ............................................................................................................................... 575
9.3.2.1 ARQ Retransmission procedure .................................................................................... 575
9.3.2.2 Polling ............................................................................................................................. 577
9.3.2.3 Status report ................................................................................................................... 578
9.4 QCS and Connection ................................................................................................................ 579
9.4.1 Service Class ................................................................................................................ 581
9.4.2 QoS Parameter ............................................................................................................. 582
9.4.2.1 Forwarding Delay ........................................................................................................... 582
9.4.2.2 Jitter ................................................................................................................................ 582
9.4.2.3 Frame Error Rate (FER) ................................................................................................ 583
9.4.2.4 Guarantee Bandwidth .................................................................................................... 583
9.4.2.5 Average Bit Rate ............................................................................................................ 583
9.4.2.6 Traffic Priority ................................................................................................................. 583
9.5 Access Phase Control .............................................................................................................. 584
9.5.1 Power Control ............................................................................................................... 584
9.5.2 Timing Control ............................................................................................................... 585
9.5.3 Link Adaptation Control ................................................................................................ 587
9.5.3.1 MCS Switching ............................................................................................................... 587
9.5.4 ANCH/CSCH Scheduling Control ................................................................................ 589
9.5.5 Interference Avoidance Control.................................................................................... 590
9.5.5.1 ANCH/CSCH Disconnect Detection .............................................................................. 590
9.5.5.2 ANCH/CSCH Switching ................................................................................................. 591
A-GN4.00-03-TS
18
9.5.6 Handover Control .......................................................................................................... 596
9.5.6.1 Normal Handover ........................................................................................................... 596
9.5.6.2 Seamless Handover ....................................................................................................... 597
9.6 MAC Layer Control ................................................................................................................... 598
9.6.1 Window Control............................................................................................................. 598
9.6.2 Flow Control .................................................................................................................. 600
9.6.3 Retransmission Control by SR Method........................................................................ 602
9.6.4 Notification and Recovery of Error Condition .............................................................. 604
9.7 Encryption Field ........................................................................................................................ 605
9.8 Semi-Persistent Scheduling (SPS) .......................................................................................... 605
10.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................. 606
10.2 Abbreviations and Acronyms for Global Mode ...................................................................... 607
10.3 XGP unique optional feature .................................................................................................. 609
10.3.1 Public Waning System (PWS).................................................................................... 609
10.3.1.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 609
10.3.1.2 Reception of the Paging message by the UE ............................................................. 609
10.3.1.3 Actions upon reception of the SystemInformationBlockType1 message .................. 610
10.3.1.4 Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType10 message ...................... 610
10.3.1.5 Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType11 message ...................... 610
10.3.1.6 Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType12 message ...................... 610
10.3.1.7 Paging message update .............................................................................................. 610
10.4 Specification - referring to “Release 8 of 3GPP” ................................................................... 611
10.4.1 System Overview ........................................................................................................ 612
10.4.1.1 System Structure .......................................................................................................... 612
10.4.1.2 Interface Definition ....................................................................................................... 612
10.4.1.3 Frequency structure ..................................................................................................... 613
10.4.1.4 Access Method ............................................................................................................. 613
10.4.1.5 Frame Structure ........................................................................................................... 613
10.4.1.6 Physical Resource Unit (PRU) .................................................................................... 613
10.4.1.7 MAC and Radio Connection for Global Mode............................................................. 614
10.4.1.8 Protocol Model ............................................................................................................. 614
10.4.1.9 RF characteristics ........................................................................................................ 614
10.4.2 Physical Channel Specification .................................................................................. 616
10.4.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 616
10.4.2.2 The General Conditions for OFDM PHY Layer .......................................................... 616
10.4.2.3 The General Conditions for SC PHY Layer ................................................................ 616
10.4.2.4 DL OFDM PHY Layer .................................................................................................. 616
A-GN4.00-03-TS
19
10.4.2.5 UL SC PHY Layer ........................................................................................................ 619
10.4.2.6 Modulation mapper ...................................................................................................... 620
10.4.2.7 Pseudo-random sequence generation ........................................................................ 620
10.4.3 Individual Channel Specification ................................................................................ 620
10.4.3.1 Functional Channel Composition ................................................................................ 620
10.4.3.2 Mapping to physical channels ..................................................................................... 621
10.4.3.3 PHY control procedures ............................................................................................... 621
10.4.3.4 MAC Layer Control....................................................................................................... 622
10.4.4 Common Channel Specification ................................................................................. 623
10.4.4.1 Common control channel Composition ....................................................................... 623
10.4.4.2 Common control channel reception............................................................................. 623
10.4.4.3 Paging Group Calculation Rules ................................................................................. 623
10.4.5 Channel Assignment .................................................................................................. 623
10.4.5.1 Radio State Management ............................................................................................ 623
10.4.5.2 Random Access procedure ......................................................................................... 624
10.4.6 Message Format and Information Elements ............................................................. 624
10.4.6.1 ADECI format ............................................................................................................... 624
10.4.6.2 MSG (BCCH) ................................................................................................................ 624
10.4.6.3 MSG (PCCH) ................................................................................................................ 624
10.4.7 Sequence .................................................................................................................... 625
10.4.7.1 Radio Connection Management Sequence ................................................................ 625
10.4.7.2 Mobility sequence ........................................................................................................ 627
10.4.7.3 Measurements.............................................................................................................. 627
10.4.8 Access Phase ............................................................................................................. 628
10.4.8.1 Retransmission Control Method .................................................................................. 628
10.4.8.2 Semi-Persistent Scheduling......................................................................................... 628
10.5 Specification - referring to “Release 9 of 3GPP” ................................................................... 628
10.5.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 630
10.5.1.1 Overall architecture ...................................................................................................... 630
10.5.1.2 Physical layer – Layer 1 ............................................................................................... 630
10.5.1.3 MAC, RLC, and PDCP layers - Layer 2 ...................................................................... 630
10.5.1.4 RRC layer – Layer 3..................................................................................................... 630
10.5.1.5 E-UTRAN identities ...................................................................................................... 631
10.5.1.6 ARQ and HARQ ........................................................................................................... 631
10.5.1.7 Mobility .......................................................................................................................... 631
10.5.1.8 Scheduling and Rate Control....................................................................................... 631
10.5.1.9 DRX in RRC_CONNECTED ........................................................................................ 631
A-GN4.00-03-TS
20
10.5.1.10 QoS ............................................................................................................................. 632
10.5.1.11 Security ....................................................................................................................... 632
10.5.1.12 Radio Resource Management aspects ..................................................................... 632
10.5.1.13 Operation bands......................................................................................................... 632
10.5.1.14 UE capabilities............................................................................................................ 632
10.5.1.15 Support for self-configuration and self-optimization ................................................. 632
10.5.2 Physical layer .............................................................................................................. 633
10.5.2.1 General description ...................................................................................................... 633
10.5.2.2 Frame Structure ........................................................................................................... 633
10.5.2.3 Uplink Physical Channels and Modulation .................................................................. 633
10.5.2.4 Downlink Physical Channels and Modulation ............................................................. 635
10.5.2.5 Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving ........................................................... 637
10.5.2.6 Physical layer procedures............................................................................................ 639
10.5.2.7 Measurements.............................................................................................................. 641
10.5.3 MAC layer – MSL1...................................................................................................... 642
10.5.3.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 642
10.5.3.2 MAC procedures .......................................................................................................... 642
10.5.3.3 Protocol Data Units, formats and parameters............................................................. 644
10.5.3.4 Variables and constants............................................................................................... 644
10.5.4 Radio Link Control (RLC) layer – MSL2 .................................................................... 644
10.5.4.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 644
10.5.4.2 Procedures ................................................................................................................... 645
10.5.4.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 646
10.5.4.4 Variables, constants and timers .................................................................................. 646
10.5.5 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer – MSL3 ...................................... 646
10.5.5.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 646
10.5.5.2 PDCP procedures ........................................................................................................ 647
10.5.5.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 648
10.5.5.4 Variables, constants and timers .................................................................................. 648
10.5.6 Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer ........................................................................ 648
10.5.6.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 648
10.5.6.2 Procedures ................................................................................................................... 649
10.5.6.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 652
10.5.6.4 Variables and constants............................................................................................... 653
10.5.6.5 Protocol data unit abstract syntax ............................................................................... 653
10.5.6.6 Specified and default radio configurations .................................................................. 653
10.5.6.7 Radio information related interactions between network nodes ................................ 653
A-GN4.00-03-TS
21
10.5.6.8 UE capability related constraints and performance requirements ............................. 653
10.6 Specification - referring to “Release 10 of 3GPP” ................................................................. 654
10.6.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 655
10.6.1.1 Overall architecture ...................................................................................................... 655
10.6.1.2 Physical layer – Layer 1 ............................................................................................... 657
10.6.1.3 MAC, RLC, and PDCP layers - Layer 2 ...................................................................... 658
10.6.1.4 RRC layer – Layer 3..................................................................................................... 658
10.6.1.5 E-UTRAN identities ...................................................................................................... 658
10.6.1.6 ARQ and HARQ ........................................................................................................... 658
10.6.1.7 Mobility .......................................................................................................................... 659
10.6.1.8 Scheduling and Rate Control....................................................................................... 659
10.6.1.9 DRX in RRC_CONNECTED ........................................................................................ 659
10.6.1.10 QoS ............................................................................................................................. 660
10.6.1.11 Security ....................................................................................................................... 660
10.6.1.12 Radio Resource Management aspects ..................................................................... 660
10.6.1.13 Operation bands......................................................................................................... 660
10.6.1.14 UE capabilities............................................................................................................ 661
10.6.1.15 Support for self-configuration and self-optimisation ................................................. 661
10.6.1.16 Deployment Scenarios for CA ................................................................................... 661
10.6.2 Physical layer .............................................................................................................. 661
10.6.2.1 General description ...................................................................................................... 661
10.6.2.2 Frame Structure ........................................................................................................... 661
10.6.2.3 Uplink Physical Channels and Modulation .................................................................. 662
10.6.2.4 Downlink Physical Channels and Modulation ............................................................. 664
10.6.2.5 Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving ........................................................... 667
10.6.2.6 Physical layer procedures............................................................................................ 670
10.6.2.7 Measurements.............................................................................................................. 673
10.6.3 MAC layer – MSL1...................................................................................................... 673
10.6.3.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 673
10.6.3.2 MAC procedures .......................................................................................................... 674
10.6.3.3 Protocol Data Units, formats and parameters............................................................. 676
10.6.3.4 Variables and constants............................................................................................... 676
10.6.4 Radio Link Control (RLC) layer – MSL2 .................................................................... 676
10.6.4.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 676
10.6.4.2 Procedures ................................................................................................................... 677
10.6.4.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 678
10.6.4.4 Variables, constants and timers .................................................................................. 678
A-GN4.00-03-TS
22
10.6.5 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer – MSL3 ...................................... 678
10.6.5.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 678
10.6.5.2 PDCP procedures ........................................................................................................ 679
10.6.5.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 680
10.6.5.4 Variables, constants and timers .................................................................................. 680
10.6.6 Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer ........................................................................ 680
10.6.6.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 680
10.6.6.2 Procedures ................................................................................................................... 681
10.6.6.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 685
10.6.6.4 Variables and constants............................................................................................... 685
10.6.6.5 Protocol data unit abstract syntax ............................................................................... 685
10.6.6.6 Specified and default radio configurations .................................................................. 685
10.6.6.7 Radio information related interactions between network nodes ................................ 686
10.6.6.8 UE capability related constraints and performance requirements ............................. 686
10.7 Specification - referring to “Release 11 of 3GPP” ................................................................. 686
10.7.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 687
10.7.1.1 Overall architecture ...................................................................................................... 687
10.7.1.2 Physical layer – Layer 1 ............................................................................................... 690
10.7.1.3 MAC, RLC, and PDCP layers - Layer 2 ...................................................................... 690
10.7.1.4 RRC layer – Layer 3..................................................................................................... 691
10.7.1.5 E-UTRAN identities ...................................................................................................... 691
10.7.1.6 ARQ and HARQ ........................................................................................................... 691
10.7.1.7 Mobility .......................................................................................................................... 691
10.7.1.8 Scheduling and Rate Control....................................................................................... 691
10.7.1.9 DRX in RRC_CONNECTED ........................................................................................ 691
10.7.1.10 QoS ............................................................................................................................. 692
10.7.1.11 Security ....................................................................................................................... 692
10.7.1.12 Service continuity for MBMS ..................................................................................... 692
10.7.1.13 Radio Resource Management aspects ..................................................................... 692
10.7.1.14 Operation bands......................................................................................................... 692
10.7.1.15 UE capabilities............................................................................................................ 692
10.7.1.16 Support for self-configuration and self-optimisation ................................................. 693
10.7.1.17 Deployment Scenarios for CA ................................................................................... 693
10.7.2 Physical layer .............................................................................................................. 693
10.7.2.1 General description ...................................................................................................... 693
10.7.2.2 Frame Structure ........................................................................................................... 693
10.7.2.3 Uplink Physical Channels and Modulation .................................................................. 694
A-GN4.00-03-TS
23
10.7.2.4 Downlink Physical Channels and Modulation ............................................................. 696
10.7.2.5 Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving ........................................................... 699
10.7.2.6 Physical layer procedures............................................................................................ 702
10.7.2.7 Measurements.............................................................................................................. 705
10.7.3 MAC layer – MSL1...................................................................................................... 705
10.7.3.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 705
10.7.3.2 MAC procedures .......................................................................................................... 706
10.7.3.3 Protocol Data Units, formats and parameters............................................................. 707
10.7.3.4 Variables and constants............................................................................................... 708
10.7.4 Radio Link Control (RLC) layer – MSL2 .................................................................... 708
10.7.4.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 708
10.7.4.2 Procedures ................................................................................................................... 709
10.7.4.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 709
10.7.4.4 Variables, constants and timers .................................................................................. 710
10.7.5 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer – MSL3 ...................................... 710
10.7.5.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 710
10.7.5.2 PDCP procedures ........................................................................................................ 710
10.7.5.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 711
10.7.5.4 Variables, constants and timers .................................................................................. 712
10.7.6 Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer ........................................................................ 712
10.7.6.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 712
10.7.6.2 Procedures ................................................................................................................... 712
10.7.6.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 716
10.7.6.4 Variables and constants............................................................................................... 717
10.7.6.5 Protocol data unit abstract syntax ............................................................................... 717
10.7.6.6 Specified and default radio configurations .................................................................. 717
10.7.6.7 Radio information related interactions between network nodes ................................ 717
10.7.6.8 UE capability related constraints and performance requirements ............................. 718
10.8 Specification - referring to “Release 12 of 3GPP” ................................................................. 719
10.8.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 720
10.8.1.1 Overall architecture and features ................................................................................ 720
10.8.1.2 Physical layer – Layer 1 ............................................................................................... 730
10.8.1.3 MAC, RLC, and PDCP layers - Layer 2 ...................................................................... 730
10.8.1.4 RRC layer – Layer 3..................................................................................................... 731
10.8.1.5 E-UTRAN identities ...................................................................................................... 731
10.8.1.6 ARQ and HARQ ........................................................................................................... 731
10.8.1.7 Mobility .......................................................................................................................... 732
A-GN4.00-03-TS
24
10.8.1.8 Scheduling and Rate Control....................................................................................... 732
10.8.1.9 DRX in RRC_CONNECTED ........................................................................................ 732
10.8.1.10 QoS ............................................................................................................................. 732
10.8.1.11 Security ....................................................................................................................... 732
10.8.1.12 Service continuity for MBMS ..................................................................................... 733
10.8.1.13 Radio Resource Management aspects ..................................................................... 733
10.8.1.14 Operation bands......................................................................................................... 733
10.8.1.15 UE capabilities............................................................................................................ 733
10.8.1.16 Support for self-configuration and self-optimisation ................................................. 734
10.8.1.17 Deployment Scenarios for CA ................................................................................... 734
10.8.1.18 Dual connectivity operation ....................................................................................... 734
10.8.1.19 RAN assisted WLAN interworking ............................................................................. 734
10.8.1.20 Radio Interface based Synchronization .................................................................... 734
10.8.1.21 Network-assisted interference cancellation/suppression ......................................... 734
10.8.1.22 ProSe Direct Communication Scenarios................................................................... 735
10.8.2 Physical layer .............................................................................................................. 735
10.8.2.1 General description ...................................................................................................... 735
10.8.2.2 Frame Structure ........................................................................................................... 735
10.8.2.3 Uplink Physical Channels and Modulation .................................................................. 736
10.8.2.4 Downlink Physical Channels and Modulation ............................................................. 738
10.8.2.5 Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving ........................................................... 741
10.8.2.6 Physical layer procedures............................................................................................ 744
10.8.2.7 Measurements.............................................................................................................. 748
10.8.2.8 Assumptions independent of physical channel ........................................................... 748
10.8.2.9 Uplink/Downlink configuration determination procedure for Frame Structure Type 2
..................................................................................................................................................... 748
10.8.2.10 Sidelink ....................................................................................................................... 748
10.8.3 MAC layer – MSL1...................................................................................................... 750
10.8.3.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 750
10.8.3.2 MAC procedures .......................................................................................................... 751
10.8.3.3 Protocol Data Units, formats and parameters............................................................. 753
10.8.3.4 Variables and constants............................................................................................... 753
10.8.4 Radio Link Control (RLC) layer – MSL2 .................................................................... 754
10.8.4.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 754
10.8.4.2 Procedures ................................................................................................................... 754
10.8.4.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 755
10.8.4.4 Variables, constants and timers .................................................................................. 755
A-GN4.00-03-TS
25
10.8.5 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer – MSL3 ...................................... 755
10.8.5.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 755
10.8.5.2 PDCP procedures ........................................................................................................ 756
10.8.5.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 757
10.8.5.4 Variables, constants and timers .................................................................................. 758
10.8.6 Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer ........................................................................ 758
10.8.6.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 758
10.8.6.2 Procedures ................................................................................................................... 758
10.8.6.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .............................................................. 763
10.8.6.4 Variables and constants............................................................................................... 763
10.8.6.5 Protocol data unit abstract syntax ............................................................................... 763
10.8.6.6 Specified and default radio configurations .................................................................. 764
10.8.6.7 Radio information related interactions between network nodes ................................ 764
10.8.6.8 UE capability related constraints and performance requirements ............................. 764
X.1 Scope ........................................................................................................................................ 765
X.2 The Radio Band ........................................................................................................................ 765
X.2.1 Taiwan Condition .......................................................................................................... 765
X.3 The Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) ...................................................................... 765
X.3.1 Taiwan Condition .......................................................................................................... 765
A.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 766
A.2 Definition of Full Subcarrier Mode ........................................................................................... 766
B.1 BPSK ......................................................................................................................................... 767
B.2 π/2 - BPSK ................................................................................................................................ 768
B.3 QPSK ........................................................................................................................................ 769
B.4 π/4 - QPSK ............................................................................................................................... 770
B.5 8PSK ......................................................................................................................................... 771
B.6 16QAM ...................................................................................................................................... 772
B.7 64QAM ...................................................................................................................................... 774
B.8 256QAM .................................................................................................................................... 777
B.9 16PSK ....................................................................................................................................... 783
B.10 Optional Modulation Method .................................................................................................. 783
B.10.1 BPSK........................................................................................................................... 784
B.10.2 QPSK .......................................................................................................................... 785
B.10.3 16QAM ........................................................................................................................ 786
B.10.4 64QAM ........................................................................................................................ 789
C.1 OFDM Training Sequence ....................................................................................................... 792
C.2 SC Training Sequence ............................................................................................................. 797
A-GN4.00-03-TS
26
D.1 OFDM TCCH Sequence .......................................................................................................... 802
D.2 SC TCCH sequence ................................................................................................................. 803
E.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 804
E.2 Network Functions .................................................................................................................... 804
E.2.1 Paging Function ............................................................................................................ 804
E.2.1.1 Paging Area ................................................................................................................... 804
E.2.1.2 The Recognition of Paging Area ................................................................................... 805
E.2.1.3 Paging Group ................................................................................................................. 806
E.2.1.4 Incoming Call ................................................................................................................. 806
E.2.2 Home Location Register (HLR) Function .................................................................... 806
E.2.3 Handover Functions ..................................................................................................... 807
E.2.4 Authentication Authorization Accounting (AAA) Function .......................................... 807
E.2.4.1 Authentication Procedure .............................................................................................. 807
E.2.4.2 Authentication Timing .................................................................................................... 808
F.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 809
F.2 Dual CCH .................................................................................................................................. 809
F.3 CCH Continuation Transmission .............................................................................................. 809
A-GN4.00-03-TS
27
Abbreviations and Acronyms
AAA
AAS
ABCCH
ACCH
ACK
ACS
ADC
ADECCH
ADECI
ADECFII
ADEDCH
ADEFICH
ADHICH
ADPCM
AGT
al-VRC
AMI
AMT
AMR
ANCH
ANDI
ATCCH
ATPMN
AUANCH
AUEDCH
BCCH
BER
BI
BPSK
BS
BSID
CB
CC
CCH
CCCH
CC-HARQ
CCI
CDCH
CI
CQI
CRC
CSCH
CSI
Authentication, Authorization, Accounting
Adaptive array Antenna System
Advanced Broadcast Control Channel
Accompanied Control Channel
Acknowledgment
Advanced Cyclic Shift
Advanced Direct Current
Advanced Downlink ECCH
Advanced Downlink ECCH Control Information
Advanced Downlink ECCH Control Format Indicator Information
Advanced Downlink EDCH
Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel
Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation
Advanced Guard Time
allowable Packet loss and Variable Rate Class
ANCH MCS Indicator
Advanced MIMO Type
ANCH MCS Request
Anchor Channel
Advanced New Data Indicator
Advanced Timing Correct Channel
Advanced Transmission Power Margin Notification
Advanced Uplink ANCH
Advanced Uplink EDCH
Broadcast Control Channel
Bit Error Rate
Bandwidth Indication
Binary Phase Shift Keying
Base Station
BS Identification
Code block
Convolutional Code
Common Channel
Common Control Channel
Chase Combining -HARQ
Common Control Information
CSCH Data Channel
Channel Identifier
Channel Quality Indicator
Cyclic Redundancy Code
Circuit Switching Channel
Channel State Information
A-GN4.00-03-TS
28
DSI
DSS
DTX
DL
ECBW
ECCH
EDCH
EMB
EMI
EPRP
EXCH
FCID
FER
FFT
FM-Mode
FRMR
GBW
GI
HARQ
HC
HLR
IBI
ICCH
ICH
ICI
IFFT
IL
IP
IR-HARQ
ISI
LAC
LCH
LCCH
LD-BE
LDPC
LPF
LSB
MAC
MCS
MI
MIMO
MM
MR
MS
MSB
MSID
Downlink Scheduling Index
Downlink Special Slot
Discontinuous Transmission
DownLink
Effective Channel Bandwidth
EXCH Control Channel
EXCH Data Channel
Eigen Mode Based
EMB-MIMO MCS Indicator
Engergy Per Resource Point
Extra Channel
Function Channel ID
Frame Error Rate
Fast Fourier Transform
Fast access channel based on MAP -Mode
Frame Reject
Guard Bandwidth
Guard Interval
Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request
HARQ Cancel
Home Location Register
Inter-Block Interference
Individual Control Channel
Individual Channel
Inter-Carrier Interference
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
Information Link bit
Internet Protocol
Incremental Redundancy -HARQ
Inter-Symbol Interference
Leave Alone Class
Link Channel
Logical Common Channel
Low - Delay Best Effort Class
Low Density Parity Check
Low Pass Filter
Least Significant Bit
Media Access Control
Modulation and Coding Scheme
MCS Indicator
Multiple Input Multiple Output
Mobility Management
MCS Request
Mobile Station
Most Significant Bit
MS Identification
A-GN4.00-03-TS
29
MT
NACK
NCL
NGN
nl-VRC
OFDMA
PAD
PAPR
PC
PCH
PDU
PHY
PLC
PN
PRU
PSP
QAM
QCS
QoS
QPSK
QS-Mode
RAN
RB
RCH
REJ
RIL
RNR
RP
RR
RROF
RS
RSSI
RT
RU
SBW
SC
SCCH
SC-FDMA
SCH
SD
SDMA
SFBC
SINR
SI
SISO
SM
MIMO Type
Negative ACK
Neighbour Cell List
Next Generation Network
no Packet loss and Variable Rate Class
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
Padding
Peak to Average Power Ratio
Power Control
Paging Channel
Protocol Data Unit
Physical layer
Private Line Class
Pseudo Noise
Physical Resource Unit
Primary Synchronization Pilot
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QoS Control Session
Quality of Service
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
high Quality channel based on carrier Sensing -Mode
Radio Access Network
Radio Bearer
Request Channel
Reject
Remaining Information Length indication bit
Receive Not Ready
Resource Point
Receive Ready
Root Roll-Off Filter
Relay Station
Received Signal Strength Indicator/Indication
Radio frequency Transmission management
Resource Unit
System Bandwidth
Single Carrier
Signaling Control Channel
Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
Subchannel
Shift Direction
Space Division Multiple Access
Space Frequency Block Coding
Signal to Interference and Noise Ratio
Stream Indication
Single Input Single Output
Spatial Multiplexing
A-GN4.00-03-TS
30
SR
SR
SREJ
SSP
STBC
SVD
TB
TCCH
TCH
TDD
TDMA
UL
USS
V
VoIP
VRC
VRU
XGP
Selective Repeat
Stream Request
Selective Reject
Secondary Synchronization Pilot
Space Time Block Coding
Singular Value Decomposition
Transport block
Timing Correct Channel
Traffic Channel
Time Division Duplex
Time Division Multiple Access
UpLink
Uplink Special Slot
Validity
Voice over IP
Variable Rate Class
Virtual Resource Unit
eXtended Global Platform / neXt Genernation PHS
A-GN4.00-03-TS
31
Chapter 0 Scope and Introduction
Scope
This standard is being established principally for “eXtended Global Platform / neXt Genernation
PHS (XGP)”. In order to ensure the fairness and the openness among all parties involved in
developing this system, the radio equipment manufacturers, telecommunications operators and
the users were invited openly to the Standard Assembly so as to gain this standard with the total
agreement of all parties involved in developing standard.
The scope of application of this standard covers the minimum requirements for the service and
communication provided by this system.
This standard of XGP is promoted by the XGP Forum (formerly PHS MoU Group, PHS means
Personal Handy phone System.), PHS MoU Group was established in 1995; for the purpose of
expanding PHS service to all over the world.
Introduction
XGP is one of the future Broadband Wireless Access systems (BWA), and also a migration
standard of Original PHS based on all-IP core network, which will realize the high speed data
communication and large capacity data communication with mobile communication network. This
“XGP standard” shows the developed future status of “Original PHS standard”. The description
for this system will be added to “Original PHS standard” in order to develop “XGP standard”.
Original PHS is the standard of Association of Radio Industries and Business (ARIB), which has
been standardized since 1993. The XGP standard is in compliance with ARIB standards too.
However, to apply it as an international convention, the standard is also adopted by XGP Forum.
And being a global platform, the XGP standard is being established to ensure the applicability for
worldwide deployment. Some specific requirements regarded for complying with regional
regulations are therefore specified in “Annex X: Regional Condition”. XGP will support all the
services that Original PHS is now supplying. It will also display further technical potentiality for
subscribers to enjoy better services that might be requested by future PHS users.
Especially, the major expanded features of “XGP” which is aimed to realize are as follows.
- Expanded function variety and performance of Original PHS.
- Co-existence with Original PHS
- Higher capacity for traffic density
- Higher data transfer throughput
- Flexibility for cell mapping for various cell types
- Higher capability for mobility service
XGP is constructed on the same mobile communication structure as Original PHS. It is absolutely
possible to operate Original PHS and XGP in the co-existing network and to supply both services
within the same area.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
32
The concept of co-existence situation is shown in Figure 0. The MS for Original PHS can make
communication to Original PHS and Dual type Base Station (BS). The Mobile Station (MS) for
XGP can make communication to XGP and Dual type BS. The Dual type MS can make
communication to all kinds of BS. It is possible for both systems to be on service in the same
network.
Original PHS
MS1
(PHS)
BS1
(PHS)
MS2
(Dual)
Access Network
BS2
(Dual)
XGP
BS3
(XGP)
MS3
(XGP)
MS: Mobile Station
BS: Base Station
PHS: Original PHS
XGP: eXtended Global Platform
Dual: Hybrid of Original PHS and XGP
Figure 0 Concept of Co-existence with Original PHS
Original PHS specifications is compliance with the reference document 1-1.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
33
Chapter 1 General
1.1 Overview
The standard is provided to specify the radio interface of communication systems that performs
XGP.
1.2 Application Scope
XGP is composed of MS, BS and Relay Station (RS) (radio stations which relay communication
between BS and MS) shown in Figure 1.1.
This standard specifies the radio interface between BS and MS, as shown in Figure 1.1, for XGP.
Mobile
MS
statio
n
Mobile
MS
statio
n
BaseBS
station
Access
Equipment
Network
Regulated Point (Um Point)
Relay
RS
statio
n
Regulated Point (Um Point)
BaseBS
station
Access Network
Equipment
Figure 1.1 Structure of XGP
A-GN4.00-03-TS
34
1.3 Mandatory and Optional
This standard includes both mandatory and optional descriptions.
The items necessary for system interface are defined as mandatory, and the items that depend
on the manufacture are defined as optional.
1.4 Public Mode and Private Mode
Original PHS takes both service forms in public mode and in private mode. Because Original PHS
concept is that it is utilized both in public system such as office extension line and in private
system such as home circuit, XGP will have the same function of public mode and private mode.
The standard of private mode will be defined in the future.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
35
Chapter 2 System Overview
2.1 System Structure
XGP consists of MS, BS and relay station which relays communications between BS and MS
(hereinafter, referred to as RS).
2.1.1 Mobile Station (MS)
A mobile station, or a subscriber communication terminal, is used to make mobile radio
communication to either mobile station or base station.
A mobile station consists of radio equipment with antenna, transmitter and receiver; interface to
external equipments, voice encoding equipment, control equipment, and a sending/receiving
handset etc.
In addition, the terminal, such as personal computer, can be connected to the MS if needed.
2.1.2 Base Station (BS)
A base station carries out mobile radio communication with mobile stations.
A base station consists of radio equipment with antenna, transmitter and receiver and control
equipment.
2.1.3 Relay Station (RS)
A relay station relays mobile radio communication between BS and MS. The detail specification
of RS will be defined in the future.
Counterpart of relay station to BS or MS consists of radio equipment with antenna, transmitter
and receiver and control equipment.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
36
2.2 Interface Definition
There is “Um” interface point for XGP, as shown in Figure 2.1.
Scope of Specifications
BS
Access Network
Equipment
MS2
BS
Access Network
Equipment
MS3
RS
MS0
MS1
Um
- Um Point
: Interface point between MS and BS, interface point between RS and BS or
MS, or interface point between MS and MS.
- MS0, MS1, MS2, MS3
: MS, including integrated man/machine interface with terminals etc.
Figure 2.1 Interface Points
A-GN4.00-03-TS
37
2.3 Frequency Structure
Figure 2.2 shows relation among system bandwidth, effective channel bandwidth and guard
bandwidth.
See more details in the following sections.
Guard Bandwidth
Guard Bandwidth
Effective Channel Bandwidth
Frequency
System Bandwidth
Figure 2.2 Frequency Structure
2.3.1 System Bandwidth (SBW)
System bandwidth is defined as total bandwidth including guard bandwidth and effective channel
bandwidth and can be chosen from 1.25MHz, 2.5 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 20MHz, 22.5MHz,
25MHz and 30 MHz.
2.3.2 Effective Channel Bandwidth (ECBW)
Effective channel bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth excluding guard bandwidth from system
bandwidth. One or more users can exist in this bandwidth.
2.3.3 Guard Bandwidth (GBW)
Guard bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth to prevent interference into/from the adjacent
system.
The structure in frequency domain for XGP is shown in Figure 2.2. Half of GBW is set to each
side of frequency that is either lower or higher than ECBW.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
38
2.3.4 Frequency Structure Parameters
Summary of actual values which is explained in Section 2.3 is shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1 Frequency Structure Parameters
System Bandwidth [MHz]
1.25
2.5
Effective Channel Bandwidth [MHz]
Guard Bandwidth [MHz]
Frequency Division Downlink (DL)
Multiple Access
Uplink (UL)
Method
0.9
0.35
1.8
0.7
22.5
Effective Channel Bandwidth [MHz]
Guard Bandwidth [MHz]
19.8
2.7
Downlink (DL)
Uplink (UL)
3.6
1.4
10
20
4.5 8.1 9
0.5 1.9 1
OFDMA
16.2
3.8
17.1 18
2.9 2
OFDMA/SC-FDMA
System Bandwidth [MHz]
Frequency Division
Multiple Access
Method
5
25
21.6
3.4
30
22.5
2.5
24.3 25.2
5.7
4.8
OFDMA
26.1
3.9
27
3
OFDMA/SC-FDMA
A-GN4.00-03-TS
39
2.4 Access Method
The access method of DL for XGP is OFDMA/TDMA-TDD.
The access method of UL for XGP is OFDMA/TDMA-TDD or SC-FDMA/TDMA-TDD.
TDD frame period is 2.5ms, 5 ms and 10ms.
The ratio between transmission and the reception slots are variable and their combination are
repeated.
Each slot time is 625 us and TDMA access, and is operated by single carrier for Original PHS.
XGP has the same frame format as Original PHS, and adopts the OFDMA for frequency division
multiple access.
UL
Frequency
DL
5 ms/frame
Time
UL
Frequency
TDMA-TDD (Original PHS)
DL
Time
1 frame
Figure 2.3 OFDMA/SC-FDMA/TDMA-TDD (XGP) in case of 5ms frame and UL/DL equal ratio
2.4.1 Transmission Method
The basic configurations for XGP are shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2 Basic Configuration of XGP
Basic Configuration
Duplex Method
DL Access Method
UL Access Method
TDMA Frame Period
Sub-carrier Spacing
Number of Slots in One Frame
Contents
TDD
OFDMA/TDMA
OFDMA, SC-FDMA/TDMA
2.5, 5, 10 ms
10.94kHz,12.5 kHz,15 kHz, 37.5 kHz
The number of slot is adopted 4, 8 and 16 slots
A-GN4.00-03-TS
40
per 1 frame and the structure is symmetly or
asymmetry.
- 4 slots : Both of transmission and reception
slots are between 1 to 3.
- 8 slots : Both of transmission and reception
slots are between 1 to 7.
- 16 slots : Both of transmission and reception
slots are between 2 to 14.
Number of Subchannels
-1 subchannel in 1.25 MHz system bandwidth
-2 subchannels in 2.5 MHz system bandwidth
-4 subchannels in 5 MHz system bandwidth
-9 subchannels or 10 subchannels in 10 MHz
system bandwidth
-18 subchannels, 19 subchannels or 20
subchannels in 20 MHz system bandwidth
-22 subchannels in 22.5 MHz
system bandwidth
-24 subchannels or 25 subchannels in 25 MHz
system bandwidth
-27 subchannels, 28 subchannels, 29
subchannels or 30 subchannels in 30 MHz
system bandwidth
Refer to Sections 2.4.2, 2.4.2.1 and 2.4.2.2 for TDMA slot and TDMA frame.
Refer to Section 2.4.3.2 for subchannel.
2.4.2 TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access)
Figure 2.4 shows an example of TDMA slot arrangement in the light of appropriate
sending/receiving slot separation in TDD transmission.
5 ms
2.5 ms
2.5 ms
625 us
MS→BS
V
U2
V
U4
V
D2
V
D4
MS(1)→BS
V
U2
V
V
V
D2
V
V
MS(2)→BS
V
V
V
U4
V
V
V
D4
A-GN4.00-03-TS
41
U: UL, D : DL, V : Vacant
Ui - Di : Corresponding UL / DL slot
Figure 2.4 TDMA Slot Arrangement in case of 5ms symmetrical frame
2.4.2.1 TDMA Slot
A slot is a minimum unit that composes TDMA, and its period is 625 us. This period is the same
as Original PHS.
2.4.2.2 TDMA Frame
A frame is composed one of 4, 8 or 16 slots. A frame structure is symmetly or asymmetry
depended on the ration between UL and DL. The structure should be calculated as follows.
1 frame = 625us  ( NUSL + N DSL )
UL slot " NUSL": 1  NUSL  14
DL slot " N DSL": 1  N DSL  14
Total number of slot : NUSL + N DSL = 4, 8 or 16
Transmission burst lengths for UL and DL are below.
UL:625us× NUSL or under (1≤NUSL≤14)
DL:625us× NDSL or under (1≤NDSL≤14)
Frame : 2.5, 5 or 10 ms
UL Subframe : 625 us x N USL ms
DL Subframe : 625 us x N DSL ms
Slot :
625 us
Slot1
.......
Slot
N USL
Slot1
.......
Slot
N DSL
Figure 2.5 TDMA frame structure
Figure 2.5 shows the TDMA frame structure.
Example for 1 frame is composed 16 slots, N USL is 4 slots and NDSL is 12 slots, UL time per 1
frame is 2.5ms and DL’s is 7.5ms.
Transmission burst lengths tolerance is less than or equal to +5us/+5us, and greater than or
equal to -30us/-50us for BS/MS.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
42
2.4.2.3 Mandatory TDMA frame structure
Both of MS and BS should be supported the following TDMA structure. And the other is optional
- Frame length
: 5ms
- The number of UL slot “NUSL”
: 4 slots
- The number of DL slot “NDSL”
: 4 slots
2.4.2.4 Limitation for expanded TDMA frame structure
Expanded frame structure as asymmetry, 2.5ms and 10 ms described in section 2.4.2.2 has a
limitation as follows.
- Supported System Bandwidth is 1.25, 2.5, 5 and 10MHz.
- MIMO is not supported
More expansion will be specified in the future.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
43
2.4.3 OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access)
Figure 2.6 shows the OFDMA subchannel structure.
Subcarrier Spacing
Guard Carrier
DC Carrier
Subcarrier
Frequency
Subchannel
Subcarrier
number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 19 21 23 Frequency
18 20 22
24
Figure 2.6 OFDMA Structure
A-GN4.00-03-TS
44
Figure 2.7 shows an example of OFDMA subchannel arrangement for a specific
sending/receiving slot in which multiple access is realized in frequency domain.
Effective Channel Bandwidth
SCH 1 SCH 2 SCH 3 SCH 4 SCH 5
BS→MS
CH1
V
CH2
V
CH3
SCH i
V
SCH i : Subchannel Number V : Vacant
CH N : CHannel transmission/reception
MS(1)→BS CH1
V
V
V
V
V
MS(2)→BS
V
V
CH2
V
V
V
MS(3)→BS
V
V
V
V
CH3
V
Figure 2.7 OFDMA Frequency Arrangement
2.4.3.1 Subcarrier Spacing
Subcarrier is defined as a “carrier” of OFDM in XGP.
In addition, plural subcarriers can be used as one block at the same time.
Subcarrier spacing is defined at 10.94kHz,12.5kHz,15kHz or 37.5 kHz as a space between
neighboring subcarriers.
2.4.3.2 Subchannel (SCH)
Subchannel is defined as a group of subcarriers with 900 kHz bandwidth. Subchannel is
composed of 24 subcarriers. The lowest frequency subcarrier included in one subchannel is
defined as subcarrier No. 1. The highest frequency subcarrier included in one subchannel is
defined as subcarrier No. 24. Figure 2.8 shows subchannel number in each ECBW.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
45
SBW = 1.25 MHz, ECBW = 900 kHz
SCH
1
Frequency
900 kHz
SBW = 2.5 MHz, ECBW = 1.8 MHz
SCH
1
SCH
2
Frequency
SBW = 5 MHz, ECBW = 3.6 MHz
SCH
1
SCH
2
SCH
3
SCH
4
Frequency
SBW = 10 MHz, ECBW = 8.1 MHz
SCH
1
SCH
2
SCH
3
SCH
4
SCH
9
Frequency
SBW = 10 MHz, ECBW = 9 MHz
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
1
2
3
4
9
10
Frequency
SBW = 20 MHz, ECBW = 16.2 MHz
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
1
2
3
4
9
10
18
Frequency
SBW = 20 MHz, ECBW = 17.1 MHz
SCH
1
SCH
2
SCH
3
SCH
4
SCH
9
SCH
10
SCH
18
SCH
19
Frequency
SBW = 20 MHz, ECBW = 18 MHz
SCH
1
SCH
2
SCH
3
SCH
4
SCH
9
SCH
10
SCH
18
SCH
19
SCH
20
Frequency
A-GN4.00-03-TS
46
SBW = 22.5 MHz, ECBW = 19.8 MHz
kHz
SCH
1
900 kHz
SCH
22
Frequency
SBW = 25 MHz, ECBW = 21.6 MHz
SCH
1
SCH
22
SCH
23
SCH
24
Frequency
SBW = 25 MHz, ECBW = 22.5 MHz
SCH
1
SCH
22
SCH
23
SCH
24
SCH
25
Frequency
SBW = 30 MHz, ECBW = 24.3 MHz
SCH
1
SCH
22
SCH
23
SCH
24
SCH
25
SCH
27
Frequency
SCH
25
SCH
27
SCH
28
Frequency
SCH
24
SCH
25
SCH
27
SCH
28
SCH
29
Frequency
SBW = 30 MHz, ECBW = 25.2 MHz
SCH
1
SCH
22
SCH
23
SCH
24
SBW = 30 MHz, ECBW = 26.1 MHz
SCH
1
SCH
22
SCH
23
SBW = 30 MHz, ECBW = 27 MHz
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
1
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
Frequency
Figure 2.8 Definition of Subchannel Number in each ECBW
A-GN4.00-03-TS
47
2.4.3.3 DC Carrier
DC carrier is not used for data transmission. When one subchannel is in use, DC carrier is set at
subcarrier No. 13 as shown in Figure 2.6. The way to set DC carrier for the improvement of data
throughput is described in Section 2.7.
2.4.3.4 Guard Carrier
To avoid the interference between subcarriers used by different MS, the guard carrier is not used
for data transmission. Guard carrier insertion depends on the DL/UL subchannel format. When
one subchannel is in use, guard carrier is set at subcarrier No. 1 as shown in Figure 2.6. The way
to set guard carrier for the improvement of data throughput is described in Section 2.7.
2.4.4 OFDMA and TDMA
This XGP allows both frequency division multiple access and time division multiple access. Figure
2.9 shows the example of the combination of OFDMA/TDMA access. The detail of channel
assignment is defined in 0.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
48
Time
SCH1
V
V
SCH2
SCH3
V
V
V
V
SCH i
U1
V
V
V
U2
V
V
Frequency
V
V
V
V
V
V
D1
V
V
V
D2
V
V
BS→MS
U : UL D : DL V : Vacant
Ui – Di : Corresponding UL/DL Slot
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SCH i
U1
V
V
V
D1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
MS(1)→BS
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SCH i
V
V
V
V
U2
V
D2
V
MS(2)→BS
Figure 2.9 OFDMA/TDMA Slot Arrangement
2.4.5 Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) Mode Coexistence with
OFDMA UL
XGP has SC-FDMA mode in UL, and allows the coexistence of SC-FDMA and OFDMA. Figure
2.10 shows the example of the combination of OFDMA and SC-FDMA UL access.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
49
Time
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SCH i
U1
U2
V
SCH2
SCH3
SCH i
U3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
VI
D1
D2
V
VI
D3
V
BS→MS(OFDMA and SC-FDMA UL)
U : UL D : DL V : Vacant
Ui – Di : Corresponding UL/DL Slot
Frequency
SCH1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
U1
V
V
V
D1
V
V
V
MS(1)(OFDMA)→BS
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SCH i
V
U2
V
V
V
D2
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
MS(2)(SC-FDMA)→BS
SCH1
V
V
SCH2
SCH3
V
V
V
V
SCH i
V
V
V
V
U3
V
V
D3
V
V
MS(2)(OFDMA)→BS
Figure 2.10 OFDMA and SC-FDMA Slot Arrangement
A-GN4.00-03-TS
50
2.5 Physical Resource Unit (PRU)
The word PRU defined in XGP stands for a block divided by the time axis unit (TDMA slot 625 us)
and the frequency axis unit (OFDM subchannel 900 kHz) for 37.5kHz Subcarrier Spacing. Figure
2.11 shows the correspondence between subchannel number and PRU number.
UL 2.5 ms
DL 2.5 ms
SCH1
PRU
1
PRU
2
PRU
3
PRU
4
PRU
1
PRU
2
SCH2
PRU
PRU
PRU
PRU
PRU
5
6
7
8
SCH i
PRU
PRU
PRU
n-3
n-2
n-1
Time
PRU
PRU
3
PRU
PRU
4
PRU
5
6
7
8
PRU
PRU
PRU
PRU
PRU
n
n-3
n-2
n-1
n
Frequency
Subchannel
TDMA Slot
SCH i : Subchannel Number (i = 1~m, m=1,2,4,9,10,18,19,20,22,24,25,27,28,29, 30)
PRU n : PRU number (n = 4*m)
Figure 2.11 Correspondence between Subchannel Number and PRU Number in case of 5ms
symmetric frame
Table 2.3 PRU
System Bandwidth [MHz]
1.25
2.5
5
Effective Channel Bandwidth
[MHz]
Subchannel Bandwidth [kHz]
Number of Subchannels
0.9
1.8
3.6 4.5
Total Number of PRU (in case
of 4 slots)
TDMA Slot Period [us]
10
1
2
4
-
4
8
16
25
8.1
20
9
16.2
17.1
18
900
9
10
18
19
20
36
72
76
80
40
625
A-GN4.00-03-TS
51
System Bandwidth [MHz]
22.5
Effective Channel Bandwidth
[MHz]
Subchannel Bandwidth [kHz]
Number of Subchannels
Total Number of PRU
19.8
22
88
25
21.6
24
96
30
22.5
24.3
25.2
26.1
27
25
100
900
27
108
28
112
29
116
30
120
TDMA Slot Period [us]
625
For 10.94kHz, 12.5kHz and 15kHz Subcarrier Spacing, PRU defined in XGP stands for a block
divided by the frequency axis unit ( N scRU consecutive subcarriers) and time axis unit (
DL
N symb
DL
UL
consecutive OFDM symbols or N symb
consecutive OFDM symbols). The parameters of PRU for
10.94kHz, 12.5kHz and 15kHz are given in Table 2.4.
Table 2.4 Physical Resource Units Parameters for △f =10.94kHz, 12.5kHz and 15kHz
Subcarrier Spacing Configuration
RU
N sc
DL
N symb
(or
10.94 kHz
18
6
12.5 kHz
12
6
15 KHz
12
7
UL
N symb
)
A virtual resource unit is of the same size as a physical resource unit. Two types of virtual
resource units are defined:
- Virtual resource units of localized type
- Virtual resource units of distributed type
For each type of virtual resource units, a pair of virtual resource units over two half-slots in a slot
is assigned together by a single virtual resource unit number, nVRU .
2.6 Frame Structure
Figure 2.12 shows the frame structure in each ECBW in case of 5ms symmetrical frame.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
52
900kHz
PRU 4
PRU 5
PRU 6
PRU 7
PRU 8
PRU 5
PRU 6
PRU 7
PRU 8
PRU 9
PRU 10
PRU 11
PRU 12
PRU 9
PRU 10
PRU 11
PRU 12
PRU 13
PRU 14
PRU 15
PRU 16
PRU 13
PRU 14
PRU 15
PRU 16
PRU 33
PRU 34
PRU 35
PRU 36
PRU 33
PRU 34
PRU 35
PRU 36
PRU 37
PRU 38
PRU 39
PRU 40
PRU 37
PRU 38
PRU 39
PRU 40
PRU 69
PRU 70
PRU 71
PRU 72
PRU 69
PRU 70
PRU 71
PRU 72
PRU 73
PRU 74
PRU 75
PRU 76
PRU 73
PRU 74
PRU 75
PRU 76
PRU 77
PRU 78
PRU 79
PRU 80
PRU 77
PRU 78
PRU 79
PRU 80
PRU 85
PRU 86
PRU 87
PRU 88
PRU 85
PRU 86
PRU 87
PRU 88
PRU 93
PRU 94
PRU 95
PRU 96
PRU 93
PRU 94
PRU 95
PRU 96
PRU 97
PRU 98
PRU 99
PRU 100
PRU 97
PRU 98
PRU 99
PRU 100
16.2 MHz
19.8MHz
21.6MHz
22.5 MHz
24.3 MHz
PRU 105 PRU 106 PRU 107 PRU 108 PRU 105 PRU 106 PRU 107 PRU 108
PRU 109 PRU 110 PRU 111 PRU 112 PRU 109 PRU 110 PRU 111 PRU 112
PRU 113 PRU 114 PRU 115 PRU 116 PRU 113 PRU 114 PRU 115 PRU 116
18 MHz
PRU 3
17.1 MHz
PRU 2
27 MHz
PRU 1
26.1 MHz
PRU 4
9 MHz
PRU 3
25.2 MHz
PRU 2
8.1
PRU 1
3.6
DL
1.8MHz
UL
PRU 117 PRU 118 PRU 119 PRU 120 PRU 117 PRU 118 PRU 119 PRU 120
Frequency
UL PRU
DL PRU
Figure 2.12 Frame Structure in case of 5ms symmetrical frame
Figure 2.13. shows the frame structure in case of 10ms frame. Each frame consists of two 5ms
half-frames. Each half-frame consists of five slots of length 1ms. Each slot is defined as two
half-slots of length 0.5ms. Downlink slot is reserved for downlink transmissions, uplink slot is
reserved for uplink transmissions.
The special slot exists in both half-frames. Slot 1 and Slot 6 are reserved for special slot with the
three fields DSS, AGT and USS. Two special slot configuration can be used according to different
deployment scenario. For the first slot configuration, the length of DSS is
of USS is
103
ms and the length
480
137
343
ms . For the second slot configuration, the length of DSS is
ms and the
960
480
A-GN4.00-03-TS
53
length of USS is
137
ms .
960
There are four supported uplink-downlink configurations. Slot 0 and 5 and DSS are always
reserved for downlink transmission. USS and the slot immediately following the special slot (Slot
2 and Slot 7) are always reserved for uplink transmission.For Uplink-downlink configuration 0,
Slot 3,4,8 and 9 are configured for uplink transmission. For Uplink-downlink configuration 1, Slot 4
and 9 are configured for downlink transmission and slot 3 and 8 are configured for uplink
transmission. For Uplink-downlink configuration 2, Slot 3,4,8 and 9 are configured for downlink
transmission. For Uplink-downlink configuration 3, Slot 9 is configured for downlink transmission
and slot 3,4 and 8 are configured for uplink transmission.
Frame: 10 ms
half-frame: 5ms
half-frame: 5ms
half-slot
0.5ms
Slot #0
Slot #1
Slot #2
Slot #3
Slot #4
Slot #5
Slot #6
Slot #7
Slot #8
Slot #9
One slot
1ms
Figure 2.13. Frame structure for 10ms frame
Transmission burst lengths for UL and DL generally correspond to those of described in section
2.4.2.2 “TDMA Frame”.
e.g. Lengths of the configuration 1 are correspond to the lengths in case of “NUSL=4, NDSL=4”.
Lengths of the configuration 2 (some patterns) are correspond to the lengths in cases of
“NUSL=3, NDSL=5 and NUSL=2, NDSL=6”
2.7 Full Subcarrier Mode
Full subcarrier mode is optional and is used only in DL. When full subcarrier mode is used, all of
DC carriers and guard carriers except central subcarrier are replaced with data symbols. Details
are described in Appendix A.
2.8 Multiple Input and Multiple Output Control
Multiple Input and Multiple Output (MIMO), compared with Single Input and Single Output (SISO),
is a technique to increase the data throughput without additional bandwidth. MIMO transfers
multiple data streams in parallel by using multiple antennas at the transmitter and receiver. In
addition, it has an effect to provide stable communications by the transmission diversity function.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
54
2.9 Protocol Model
Protocol model is composed of link establishment phase, access establishment phase and
access phase.
2.9.1 Link Establishment Phase
Link establishment phase is defined as the stage to use common channel (CCH) functions to
select the protocol type required in the next phase.
2.9.2 Access Establishment Phase
Access establishment phase is defined as the stage to use functions which is obtained in the link
establishment phase to select the protocol type required in the next phase.
2.9.3 Access Phase
In the access phase, it is possible to employ the optimum channel and the optimum protocol for
each service.
2.9.4 Optional Protocol Model
2.9.4.1 User plane
Figure 2.14 shows the protocol stack for the user-plane, where MSL 1, MSL 2 and MSL 3
sublayers (terminated in BS on the network side) perform the functions listed for the user plane,
e.g. header compression, ciphering, scheduling, ARQ and HARQ;
MS
BS
MSL 3
MSL 3
MSL 2
MSL 2
MSL 1
MSL 1
PHY
PHY
Figure 2.14 User-plane protocol stack
2.9.4.2 Control plane
The figure below shows the protocol stack for the control-plane, where:
A-GN4.00-03-TS
55
- MSL 3 (terminated in BS on the network side) performs the functions, e.g. ciphering and
integrity protection;
- MSL 2 and MSL 1 sublayers (terminated in BS on the network side) perform the same
functions as for the user plane;
- Radio connection (terminated in BS on the network side) performs the function,
e.g.:Broadcast, Paging, Radio connection management, Mobility functions, MS
measurement reporting and control.
MS
BS
Radio
connection
Radio
connection
MSL 3
MSL 3
MSL 2
MSL 2
MSL 1
MSL 1
PHY
PHY
Figure 2.15 Control-plane protocol stack
A-GN4.00-03-TS
56
2.10 Correspondence of PRU, Function Channel and Physical Channel
Figure 2.16 shows function channel classification.
ICH (Individual Channel)
CCH(Common Channel)
BCCH (Broadcast Control Channel)
ABCCH(Advanced BCCH)
ECCH (EXCH Control Channel)
ADECCH(Advanced DL ECCH)
AUANCH(Advanced UL ANCHl)
For Control
PCH (Paging Channel)
ADEFICH(ADECCH Format Indicator)
ADHICH(Advanced DL HARQ Indicator)
SCCH (Signaling Control Channel)
TCCH (Timing Correct Channel)
ATCCH(Advanced TCCH)
ICCH (Individual Control Channel)
ACCH (Accompanied Control Channel)
For Control or
Communication
EDCH (EXCH Data Channel)
ADEDCH(Advanced DL EDCH)
AUEDCH(Advanced UL EDCH)
CDCH (CSCH Data Channel)
TCH (Traffic Channel)
Figure 2.16 Function Channel Classification
Table 2.5 explains function channel.
Table 2.5 Function Channel Description
Channel Name
BCCH
ABCCH
PCH
CCH
SCCH
TCCH
ATCCH
Function Description
BCCH is a DL channel to broadcast the control information from
BS to MS.
ABCCH is a optinal Advanced DL channel to broadcast the control
information from BS to MS.
PCH is a DL channel to inform the paging information from BS to
MS.
SCCH is both DL and UL channel for LCH assignment. DL SCCH
notifies allocation of an individual channel to MS. And, UL SCCH
requests LCH re-assignment to BS.
TCCH is an UL channel to detect UL transmission timing. Also,
MS requires LCH establishment using TCCH.
ATCCH is an UL channel to detect and correct UL transmission
timing
A-GN4.00-03-TS
57
Channel Name
ECCH
ADECCH
AUANCH
ADEFICH
ADHICH
ICCH
ICH
ACCH
EDCH
ADEDCH
AUEDCH
CDCH
TCH
Function Description
UL/DL bidirectional control channel which put into ANCH. It has
some information to control channel allocation, modulation
method, transmission power and timing and others for EXCH.
Advanced Downlink ECCH
Advanced Uplink ANCH
Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel, used for
indicating the region of ADECCH in XGP mode 2
Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel, used for
sending ACK/NACK of UL data
UL/DL bidirectional control channel which put into ANCH. It
transmits the signaling message.
UL/DL bidirectional control channel which accompanies TCH in
CSCH. It transmits the signaling message.
UL/DL bidirectional channel which put into EXCH. It transmits user
traffic data or the signaling message.
DL channel transmits user traffic data or the signaling message.
UL channel transmits user traffic data or the signaling message.
UL/DL bidirectional channel which put into allocated CSCH. It
transmits user traffic data or the signaling message.
UL/DL bidirectional channel which put into CSCH. It transmits user
traffic data.
Figure 2.17 shows the correspondence of between PHY PRU and function channel in each
protocol phase.
PRU
Protocol Link Establishment
Phase Phase
UL
SCCH
TCCH
DL
BCCH
PCH
SCCH
CCH
ICH
Access
Establishment
Phase
ICCH
Access Phase
ECCH
ICCH
ACCH
EDCH
CDCH
TCH
Figure 2.17 Correspondence between PHY PRU and Function Channel in Each Protocol Phase
A-GN4.00-03-TS
58
2.11 Service Description
XGP provides various wireless telecommunication services. There are not only bearer of voice
but also packet data communication such as VoIP, Video-phone, Streaming and Multi-cast
service. The services are based on a network constructed with IP etc, and providing packet
transporter for air-interface.
2.12 Protocol Structure
The protocol structure of XGP is shown in
Figure 2.18. The protocol layer between MS and BS consists of PHY and MAC layer.
PHY layer controls physical wireless line between MS and BS. It defines the modulation method,
physical frame format etc. The details are described in Chapter 3.
MAC layer controls link establishment, channel assignment, channel quality maintenance etc.
The detail function is described in Chapter 4 and 5.
The upper network layer is based on IP protocols etc. This document complies with the
specification of PHY and MAC layer between MS and BS.
(Network
layer)
(Network layer)
Scope of specification
XGP MAC
XGP MAC
MAC
MAC
XGP PHY
XGP PHY
PHY
PHY
MS
BS
Figure 2.18 Protocol Stack for XGP
Network
A-GN4.00-03-TS
59
Chapter 3 Physical Channel Specification
3.1 Overview
This chapter describes the technical requirements applied to radio transmission facilities for XGP.
The following physical (PHY) layer specification is designed to satisfy the functional requirements
that have been defined for XGP. It incorporates many aspects of existing standards in order to
ensure reliable operation in the targeted 1 GHz to 3 GHz frequency band. In addition, PHY layer
was designed with a high degree of flexibility in order to provide operators in different regulatory
domains with the ability to optimize system deployments with respect to cell planning, cost
considerations, radio capabilities, offered services, and capacity requirements.
The DL PHY layer described in this chapter is based on Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
and Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) modulation. The general condition
of OFDM PHY layer is described in Section 3.2. The details of the DL PHY layer are described in
Section 3.4.
The UL PHY layer described in this chapter is based on TDMA and OFDMA modulation or TDMA
and Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) modulation. UL PHY layer in
compliance with this standard shall support at least either OFDMA or SC-FDMA. The general
condition of SC PHY layer is described in Section 3.3. The detail of the UL OFDM PHY layer is
described in Section 3.5. The details of the UL SC PHY layer are described in Section 3.6.
Physical channel is composed of two channels - Common Channel (CCH) and Individual Channel
(ICH). CCH is composed of two channels – Common Control Channel (CCCH) and Timing
Correct Channel (TCCH). ICH is composed of three channels - Anchor Channel (ANCH), Extra
Channel (EXCH) and Circuit Switching Channel (CSCH). CCCH format is described in Sections
3.4.8.1.1, 3.5.6.1.1 and 3.6.7.1.1. TCCH format is described in Sections 3.5.6.1.2 and 3.6.7.1.2.
ANCH is described in Sections 3.4.8.1.2, 3.5.6.2.1 and 3.6.7.2.1. EXCH format is described in
Sections 3.4.8.1.3, 3.5.6.2.2 and 3.6.7.2.2. CSCH format is described in Sections 3.4.8.1.4,
3.5.7.2.3 and 3.6.7.2.3. The detail of ICH is described in Chapter 4. The detail of CCH is
described in Chapter 5. Additional optional DL Physical channels are composed of: ADEDCH,
ABCCH, ADEFICH, ADECCH and ADHICH. Additional optional UL Physical channel are
composed of: AUEDCH, AUANCH and ATCCH.
Subcarrier spacing in frequency is dictated by the multipath characteristics of the channels in
which XGP is designated to operate. As the channel propagation characteristics depend on the
topography of the area and on the cell radius, the amount of carriers into which the channels are
subdivided depends on the overall channel width and the carrier spacing. This PHY layer
specification contains the programmability to deal with this range of applications.
Generally, several MIMO types have been already established. The effect achieved by the MIMO
technology includes array gain, space diversity, spatial multiplexing, and interference reduction.
In this document, the MIMO functions up to four streams is defined. The MIMO function relates to
STBC, SM and EMB-MIMO method.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
60
3.2 The General Conditions for OFDM PHY Layer
3.2.1 OFDM Burst Structure
Figure 3.1 describes a frame structure for OFDM transmission method. As shown in the figure,
OFDM burst consists of 19 OFDM symbols and OFDM burst length is defined as 573.33 us and
580 us in one slot of UL and DL, respectively. Guard time is the time between the OFDM burst
and subsequent OFDM burst. And the total guard time length is defined as 51.67 us and 45 us in
one slot. For OFDM, a modulated symbol is mapped and then is sent in each subcarrier. In one
frame, several units of data are processed in symbols.
Frame : 2.5, 5 or 10 ms
UL Subframe : 625 us x N UL ms
DL Subframe : 625 us x N DL ms
Slot :
625 us
Slot1
UL: 21.67 us
DL: 15 us
.......
Slot N UL
Slot1
.......
UL OFDM Burst : 573.33 us
DL OFDM Burst : 580 us
Guard Time
OFDM Burst
Slot N DL
30.00 us
Guard Time
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
OFDM Symbol
GI
OFDM Data
Figure 3.1 OFDM Symbols
Another optional downlink and uplink transmissions are organized into radio frames with 10ms
duration. Each radio frame consists of two half-frames. Each half-frame consists of five slots.
Each slot i is defined as two half-slots. Please refer to section 2.6.
3.2.2 OFDM Symbol Structure for 37.5 kHz subcarrier spacing
OFDM symbol is composed of OFDM data and Guard Interval (GI) as shown in Figure 3.2.
OFDM data length is defined as the reciprocal of subcarrier spacing and is 26.67 us for 37.5 kHz
subcarrier spacing. GI is described in Section 3.2.2.1. There are two OFDM symbol lengths in
A-GN4.00-03-TS
61
one OFDM burst. The first OFDM symbol (S1) length is defined as 33.33 and 40 us for DL and
UL, respectively. Other symbols (S2-S19) length is defined as 30 us.
3.2.2.1 Guard Interval
Guard Interval (GI) is defined as a time interval between OFDM symbols in order to avoid the
interference caused by delay spread. GI is the cyclic extension of the OFDM symbols itself. In
addition, the guard interval ratio is defined as the ratio of Data length and guard interval length.
As shown in Figure 3.2, GI for the first OFDM symbol (S1) in UL and DL is defined as 6.66 us and
13.33 us, respectively. The GI ratio is defined as 1/4 and 1/2. For other symbols (S2-S19), GI is
defined as 3.33 us and GI ratio is defined as 1/8 as shown in Figure 3.3.
6.66 us
GI
33.33 us
26.67 us
40 us
13.33 us
OFDM Data
GI
26.67 us
OFDM Data
Copy
Copy
(a) UL
(b) DL
Figure 3.2 Guard Interval (S1)
3.33 us
GI
30.00 us
26.67 us
OFDM Data
Copy
Figure 3.3 Guard Interval (S2-S19)
3.2.2.2 Windowing
Windowing may be used to alleviate discontinuity between symbols as shown in Figure 3.4. The
windowing function w(t) depends on the value of the duration parameter. Twin is the windowing
interval. Tgi and Tdata is guard interval duration and OFDM data duration. Figure 3.4. illustrates
smoothed transitions by applying the windowing function shown as follows.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
62

0

 0.5  0.5 cos    t  3Twin 

2 
Twin 

w(t )   1

  
Twin 

0.5  0.5 cos T  t  Tgi  Tdata  2 
 win


0

Tgi
Twin
Tdata
GI
,t  
,
Twin
2
Twin
T
 t  win
2
2
Twin
T
 t  Tgi  Tdata  win
2
2
Twin
T
, Tgi  Tdata 
 t  Tgi  Tdata  win
2
2
Twin
, Tgi  Tdata 
t
2
,
Twin
OFDM Data
t=0
GI
OFDM Data
GI
OFDM Data
Figure 3.4 Windowing
3.2.3 OFDM Parameters for 37.5 kHz subcarrier spacing
OFDM parameters for XGP are shown in Table 3.1. One of 14 types, Type 1 to Type 14, can be
chosen on slot-by-slot basis for MS and can be chosen on the system basis for BS.
Table 3.1 OFDM Parameters
Parameter
Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System Bandwidth
[MHz]
2.5
5
10
10
20
20
20
Effective Channel
Bandwidth
[MHz]
1.8
3.6
8.1
9.0
16.2
17.1
18.0
A-GN4.00-03-TS
63
Used Subcarrier
Number(*1)
48
96
216
240
Subcarrier Spacing [kHz]
37.5
SCH Bandwidth [kHz]
900
Guard Interval Length [us]
OFDM Data Length [us]
OFDM Symbol Length [us]
Guard Interval Ratio
432
456
480
6.66 (UL S1), 13.33 (DL S1)
3.33 (S2-S19)
26.67
33.33 (UL S1), 40 (DL S1)
30 (S2-S19)
1/4 (UL S1) 1/2 (DL S1)
1/8 (S2-S19)
Total Guard Time [us]
51.67 (21.67 + 30; UL), 45 (15 + 30; DL)
OFDM Symbol Number
per Subcarrier
19
Windowing
(*2)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
64
Parameter
System Bandwidth
[MHz]
Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
22.5
25
25
30
30
30
30
19.8
21.6
22.5
24.3
25.2
26.1
27.0
528
576
600
648
672
696
720
Effective Channel
Bandwidth
[MHz]
Used Subcarrier
Number(*1)
Subcarrier Spacing [kHz]
37.5
SCH Bandwidth [kHz]
900
6.66 (UL S1), 13.33 (DL S1)
Guard Interval Length [us]
3.33 (S2-S19)
OFDM Data Length [us]
26.67
33.33 (UL S1), 40 (DL S1)
OFDM Symbol Length [us]
30 (S2-S19)
1/4 (UL S1) 1/2 (DL S1)
Guard Interval Ratio
1/8 (S2-S19)
Total Guard Time [us]
51.67 (21.67 + 30; UL), 45 (15 + 30; DL)
OFDM Symbol Number
per Subcarrier
19
Windowing
(*2)
(*1) Include DC carrier and Guard carrier
(*2) Refer to Section 3.2.2.2.
Although the length of 3.33 us, 6.66 us, 13.33 us, 26.67 us, 33.33 us, 21.67 us or 51.67 us is
used in this document as either of GI length, OFDM data length, OFDM symbol length or guard
time for notational convenience, the corresponding length is precisely represented by 10/3 us,
20/3 us, 40/3 us, 80/3 us, 100/3 us, 65/3 us or 155/3 us, respectively.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
65
3.3 The General Conditions for SC PHY Layer
3.3.1 SC Burst Structure
Figure 3.5 describes a frame structure for SC transmission method. As shown in the figure, one
SC burst consists of 19 SC blocks and SC burst length is defined as 573.33 us in one slot. Guard
time is the time between the SC burst and subsequent SC burst. Total guard time length is
defined as 51.67 us in one slot. For SC transmission method, modulated symbols are mapped
into SC blocks.
Frame : 5 ms
UL Subframe : 2.5 ms
DL Subframe : 2.5 ms
Slot :
625 us
Slot1
Slot2
Slot3
21.67 us
Slot4
S2
Slot2
Slot3
SC Burst : 573.33 us
Guard Time
S1
Slot1
30.00 us
SC Burst
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8 S9
Slot4
Guard Time
S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
SC Block with GI
GI
SC Block
Figure 3.5 Structure of SC Burst for SC Transmission Method
3.3.2 SC Block Structure
SC block is composed of plural symbols. Guard Interval (GI) precedes the SC block as shown in
Figure 3.6. SC block length is 26.67 us without GI. GI is described in Section 3.3.2.1. There are
two GI lengths for SC block in one SC burst. The length of the first SC block with GI (S1) is
defined as 33.33 us. The length of other SC blocks with GI (S2-S19) is defined as 30 us.
3.3.2.1 Guard Interval
GI is defined as a cyclic extension of the SC block in order to avoid the interference caused by
A-GN4.00-03-TS
66
delay spread. Guard interval ratio is defined as the ratio of SC block and guard interval length. As
shown in Figure 3.6, GI length is defined as 6.66 us and GI ratio is defined as 1/4 for the first SC
block (S1). For other SC blocks (S2-S19), GI length is defined as 3.33 us and GI ratio is defined
as 1/8 as shown in Figure 3.7.
33.33 us
6.66 us
GI
26.67 us
SC Block
Copy
Figure 3.6 SC Block with Guard Interval (S1)
30.00 us
3.33 us
GI
26.67 us
SC Block
Copy
Figure 3.7 SC Block with Guard Interval (S2 – S19)
3.3.2.2 Pulse Shaping Filter
Pulse shaping filter should be applied to a SC burst at the transmitter. Type of pulse shaping filter
should be Root Roll-Off Filter (RROF). Roll-off factor of RROF  is 0.45 for symbol rate of 0.6
Msps and 1.2 Msps, and is 0.36 for symbol rate of 2.4 Msps, 4.8 Msps and 9.6 Msps. Equation
3.1 shows the function of RROF pulse shaping filter.


t  T
t 
cos 1      s sin 1    
Ts  4t 
Ts 
2

Pt  
2
 Ts
 4t 

1  
 Ts 
(3.1)
In this equation, Ts is the reciprocal of the symbol rate.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
67
3.3.3 SC Parameters
SC Parameters for XGP are shown in Table 3.2. One of five types, Type 1 to Type 5, can be
chosen on slot-by-slot basis. In this table, SC block size is defined as the number of symbols in a
SC block. GI size is defined as the number of symbols in GI.
Center frequencies for Type 1 to Type 5 are defined by referring to the PRU structure defined in
Section 3.4.8. A center frequency is represented as (m, n) indicating the n-th subcarrier (Fn) in
the m-th PRU. The PRUs, which are occupied by SC signal, are incrementally numbered from
lower frequency to higher frequency, and the initial value for m is 1. The center frequencies are
(m,n)=(1,13) for type 1, (2,1) for type 2, (3,1) for type 3, (5,1) for type 4 and (9,1) for type 5.
Table 3.2 SC Parameters
Parameter
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
Symbol Rate [Msps]
0.6
1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
Bandwidth [MHz]
0.9
1.8
3.6
7.2
14.4
Number of PRUs
1
2
4
8
16
Number of CRC Units
1
1
2
4
8
SC Block Size [symbol]
16
32
64
128
256
4 (S1)
8 (S1)
16 (S1)
32 (S1)
64 (S1)
2
4
8
16
32(S2-S19
(S2-S19)
(S2-S19)
(S2-S19)
(S2-S19)
)
GI Size [symbol]
6.66 (S1)
Guard Interval Length [us]
3.33 (S2-S19)
SC Block Length [us]
26.67
Length of SC Block with GI
33.33 (S1)
[us]
30 (S2-S19)
1/4 (S1)
Guard Interval Ratio
1/8 (S2-S19)
Total Guard Time [us]
51.67 (21.67 + 30)
Pulse Shaping Filter
Root Roll-off Filter
Roll-off Factor
0.45
0.45
0.36
0.36
0.36
Although the length of 3.33 us, 6.66 us, 26.67 us, 33.33 us, 21.67 us or 51.67 us is used in this
document as either of GI length, SC block length, SC block with GI length or guard time for
notational convenience, the corresponding length is precisely represented by 10/3 us, 20/3 us,
80/3 us, 100/3 us, 65/3 us or 155/3 us, respectively.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
68
3.4 DL OFDM PHY Layer
Figure 3.8 describes a transmitter block diagram for OFDM transmission method.
Null
Modulation
S(t)
...
...
...
Sel
Training
Modulation
CRC
Attachment
Bit-Interleaving
S/P Conv (OFDM / TDM)
Encoding
Data
...
Modulation
...
User A
IFFT
Pilot
P/S coverter
Scrambling
Guard interval insertion
Encoding
AAS / MIMO Precoding
Signal
Modulation
Scrambling
User B
Antenna 1
Antenna 2
Antenna Y
Channel Coding
Sel
...
User X
Sel
Figure 3.8 Transmitter Block Diagram
3.4.1 Channel Coding for PHY Frame
PHY frame consists of one or more Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) data unit(s). CRC-bits are
first appended to the CRC data unit. Then tail-bits are appended to the CRC data unit with
CRC-bits after performing scrambling. CRC unit is defined as the scrambled CRC data unit with
CRC-bits and tail-bits. The size of CRC unit is described in Chapter 4. The CRC unit is encoded
according to error-correcting code. Then, bit -interleaving is performed for error-correcting coded
bits, and the output bits of bit-interleaving are converted to IQ signals by modulation method.
Then, MIMO precoding is performed for IQ signals.
Figure 3.9 describes the channel coding block diagram for DL OFDM of Figure 3.8.
Data (bit)
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Encoding
Bitinterleaving
Modulation
MIMO
Precoding
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.9 Channel Coding
A-GN4.00-03-TS
69
Figure 3.10 describes an optional channel coding block diagram for DL transmission.
CRC
Attachment
Encoding
Rate Matching
Scrambing
Modulation
Layer Mapping
Precoding
Figure 3.10 Optinal Channel Coding
3.4.1.1 CRC
Data (bit)
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Bitinterleaving
Encoding
Modulation
MIMO
Precoding
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.11 CRC Attachment
CRC-bits are appended to each CRC data unit. CRC-bits are generated by either of the following
generation polynomials.
CRC-8: 1+X+X^3+ X^4+ X^7+ X^8
CRC-16 : 1 + X^5 + X^12 + X^16
CRC-24(A): 1+X+X^3+X^4 +X^5 + X^6+ X^7 + X^10+ X^11 + X^14++ X^17 + X^18+
X^23 + X^24
CRC-24(B) : 1 + X + X^5 + X^6 + X^23 + X^24 (Optional)
Figure 3.12 shows the method of CRC code for CRC-16. The Initial values of shift register SR1SR16 are set to all 1. Figure 3.13 shows the method of CRC code for CRC-24(B). The Initial
values of shift register SR1-SR24 are set to all 1. The shift register of CRC encoder is initialized
for each CRC data unit. In case of Figure 3.12 and Figure 3.13, T1 is switched to the lower side
and T2 is closed when CRC-bits are calculated in CRC encoder. After all of data is input into
CRC encoder, T1 is switched to the upper side and T2 is opened to output CRC code.
SR1
...
SR5
SR6
...
SR12
...
SR13
SR16
T1
T2
: Exclusive OR
Data out
Data in
Figure 3.12 The Method of CRC Code for CRC-16
A-GN4.00-03-TS
70
SR1
SR2
...
SR5
SR6
SR7
...
SR23
SR24
T1
T2
Data out
Data in
Figure 3.13 The Method of CRC Code for CRC-24
CRC size depends on MAC described in Chapter 4. Application range of CRC is described in
Chapter 4.
CRC Unit
CRC-bits
Application Range
Reset
Figure 3.14 CRC Unit with CRC-bits
The Initial values of shift register for CRC-8, CRC-24(A) or CRC-24(B) should be set to all 0 for
Optional Channel Coding. If length of the input bit sequence is larger than the maximum code
block size 6144, segmentation of the input bit sequence is performed and an additional CRC
sequence is attached to each code block using the generator polynomial CRC-24(B).
3.4.1.2 Scrambling
Data (bit)
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Encoding
Bitinterleaving
Modulation
MIMO
Precoding
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.15 Scrambling
The scramble pattern is identical for DL and UL transmission. The generation polynomial is
defined as follows:
X^16 + X^12 + X^3 + X + 1
Figure 3.16 shows the structure of scrambling. Initial values of shift register SR16-SR1 are set to
the values shown in Table 3.3. The shift register of scrambler is initialized for each CRC data unit.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
71
Data In
SR1
SR2
SR3
SR4
SR5
SR6
SR7
SR8
SR9
SR10
SR11
SR12
SR13
SR14
SR15
SR16
Data Out
Figure 3.16 Scrambling
Table 3.3 Initial Value of Shift Register SR16-SR1 for Scrambling
Physical Channel
Initial Value of Shift Register SR16-SR1
CCH (for protocol version 1)
All 1
CCH (for protocol version 2)
1010 1010 1010 1010
ICH (EXCH only)
1000 0000 0000 0000 xor BSID lower 15 bit
xor MSID lower 15 bit
ICH
(except for EXCH after confirmation of MSID)
1000 0000 0000 0000 xor BSID lower 15 bit
xor MSID lower 15 bit xor (SCH number – 1)
(*1)
ICH
(except for EXCH before confirmation of MSID)
(*1) SCH number: Refer to Section 2.4.3.2.
1000 0000 0000 0000 xor BSID lower 15 bit
xor (SCH number – 1) (*1)
Application range of scrambling is CRC data unit and CRC-bits as shown in Figure 3.17.
CRC Data Unit
Reset
CRC-bits
Scrambling Application Range
Figure 3.17 Scrambling Application Range
Codeword is a block of coded bits to be transmitted on an optional physical channel. Each
codeword shall be scrambled prior to modulation. The scrambling sequence is a length-31 Gold
sequence and the generator shall be initialised at the start of each slot, where the initialisation
value of cinit depends on the transport channel type according to
BS
cinit  nMSID  214  q  213  ns 2  29  N ID
where nMSID corresponds to the MSID associated with the ADEDCH transmission.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
72
3.4.1.3 Encoding
Data (bit)
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Encoding
Bitinterleaving
Modulation
MIMO
Precoding
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.18 Encoding
Error correction code methods are defined as described below.
(a) Convolutional code (coding rate r=1/2) (Mandatory)
(b) Convolutional code (coding rate r=1/3) (Optional)
(c) Tail Biting Convolutional code (coding rate r=1/3)
(d) Turbo code (Optional)
Table 3.4 summarizes the error correction code for physical channel.
Table 3.4 The Error Correction Code for Physical Channel
Physical channel
CCCH
ANCH
EXCH
CSCH
Error correction code
Convolutional code
Convolutional code
Convolutional/Turbo code
Convolutional code
A-GN4.00-03-TS
73
3.4.1.3.1 Error Correction Encoding
3.4.1.3.1.1 Convolutional Code (coding rate r=1/2) (Mandatory)
3.4.1.3.1.1.1 Convolutional Encoder
Constraint length of convolutional encoder is 7. Generation polynomials are G1=133 and G2=171
in octal representation. Figure 3.19 illustrates the constitution of convolutional encoder. For this
figure, coding rate of convolutional coding becomes 1/2. The initial value of shift register in
encoder is 6-bit 0. As an input to the encoder, tail-bits, which consist of 6-bit 0, are appended to
the end of scrambled data bits.
A(k)
I(k)
D
D
D
D
D
D
B(k)
INPUT I(k)
Scrambled Data
6bit
Reset
OUTPUT A(k)
tail-bits
A(k)
OUTPUT B(k)
B(k)
Figure 3.19 Generation Polynomial and Application Range of Convolutional Code
3.4.1.3.1.1.2 Puncturing Pattern
Encoded bits are punctured in order to change coding rate. Table 3.5 describes puncturing
pattern related with puncturing rate. In this table, 1 denotes the bits selected and 0 denotes the
bits punctured. Figure 3.20 illustrates the puncturing procedure.
Table 3.5 Puncturing Pattern of Convolutional Code
A-GN4.00-03-TS
74
A
B
1
1
1
R 2=3/4 I(1) I(2)
P uncturing rate
3/4
4/6
11
110
10
101
A (1) A (2)
B (1) B (2)
R 2=4/6 I(1) I(2) I(3)
R2
6/10
11010
10101
8/14
1111010
1000101
A (1) B (1) A (2)
A (1) A (2) A (3)
B (1) B (2) B (3)
R 2=6/10 I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5)
A (1) B (1) A (2) B (3)
A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5)
B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5)
A (1) B (1) A (2) B (3) A (4) B (5)
R 2=8/14 I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7)
A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6) A (7)
B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6) B (7)
A (1) B (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) B (5) A (6) B (7)
Figure 3.20 Puncturing Procedure for Convolutional Code
3.4.1.3.1.2 Convolutional Code (coding rate r=1/3) (Optional)
3.4.1.3.1.2.1 Convolutional Encoder
Constraint length of convolutional encoder is 7. Generation polynomials are G1=133, G2=171
and G3=165 in octal representation. Figure 3.21 illustrates the constitution of convolutional
encoder. For this figure, coding rate of convolutional coding becomes 1/3. The initial value of shift
register in encoder is 6-bit 0. As an input to the encoder, tail-bits, which consist of 6-bit 0, are
appended to the end of scrambled data bits.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
75
A(k)
I(k)
D
D
D
D
D
D
B(k)
C(k)
INPUT I(k)
Scrambled Data
Reset
OUTPUT A(k)
6bit
tail-bits
A(k)
OUTPUT B(k)
B(k)
OUTPUT C(k)
C(k)
Figure 3.21 Generation Polynomial and Application Range of Convolutional Code
3.4.1.3.1.3 Tail Biting Convolutional Code
A tail biting convolutional code with constraint length 7 and coding rate 1/3 is defined.
The configuration of the convolutional encoder is presented in Figure 3.22.
The initial value of the shift register of the encoder shall be set to the values corresponding to the
last 6 information bits in the input stream so that the initial and final states of the shift register are
the same. Therefore, denoting the shift register of the encoder by s 0 , s1 , s 2 ,...,s5 , then the initial
value of the shift register shall be set to si  I K 1i  .
A-GN4.00-03-TS
76
Ik
D
D
D
D
D
D
Ak
G0 = 133 (octal)
Bk
G1 = 171 (octal)
Ck
G2 = 165 (octal)
Figure 3.22 Rate 1/3 Tail Biting Convolutional Encoder
The encoder output streams Ak , Bk and Ck correspond to the first, second and third parity
streams, respectively as shown in Figure 3.22.
3.4.1.3.1.4 Turbo Code (Optional)
3.4.1.3.1.4.1 Turbo Encoder
Turbo encoder consists of two recursive systematic convolutional encoders connected in parallel,
with an interleaver, which is called turbo interleaver, preceding the second constituent encoder.
Output bits from turbo encoder consist of systematic bits I(k) and parity bits A(k) and B(k) from
each constituent encoder. The two constituent encoders have the same structure as follows.
Generation polynomials of each constituent encoder are G1 = 15 and G2 = 13, which denote
feedforward and feedback polynomial in octal representation respectively. Figure 3.23 illustrates
the constitution of turbo encoder. For this figure, coding rate of turbo coding becomes 1/3.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
77
1st constituent encoder
I(k)
A(k)
I(k)
D
D
D
Turbo
Interleaver
2nd constituent encoder
I'(k)
B(k)
D
D
D
Figure 3.23 Structure of Turbo Encoder
3.4.1.3.1.4.2 Turbo Code Termination
After all information bits are encoded, trellis termination is performed by padding 6 tail-bits. First,
by setting switches to the down position, each encoder outputs 3 systematic bits and 3 parity bits.
If the number of information bits is N, outputs of 1st and 2nd constituent encoders are as follows:
I(N+1), A(N+1), I(N+2), A(N+2), I(N+3), A(N+3) from 1st constituent encoder
I’(N+1), B(N+1), I’(N+2), B(N+2), I’(N+3), B(N+3) from 2nd constituent encoder
Next, to generate rate-1/3 encoder outputs corresponding to the 6 tail-bits, every systematic bit is
repeated and 18 encoded bits are generated as follows:
I(N+1), I(N+1), A(N+1), I(N+2), I(N+2), A(N+2), I(N+3), I(N+3), A(N+3),
I’(N+1), I’(N+1), B(N+1), I’(N+2), I’(N+2), B(N+2), I’(N+3), I’(N+3), B(N+3)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
78
After performing this repetition process, these tail-corresponding bits are rearranged and added
after I(N), A(N) and B(N) as follows:
I(N+1), I(N+2), I(N+3), I’(N+1), I’(N+2) and I’(N+3) are added after I(N),
I(N+1), I(N+2), I(N+3), I’(N+1), I’(N+2) and I’(N+3) are added after A(N),
A(N+1), A(N+2), A(N+3), B(N+1), B(N+2) and B(N+3) are added after B(N).
3.4.1.3.1.4.3 Turbo Interleaver
Turbo interleaver interleaves with input information bits, and transmits the interleaved bits to the
second constituent encoder. Turbo interleaving is equivalent to a process, in which the entire
sequence of input information bits are written sequentially into an array, and then read out by the
given procedure. The input bits to the turbo interleaver are denoted by I(1), I(2),…,I(d), where d is
the length of input bits. The procedure of interleaving is described as follows:
1. Determine the turbo interleaver parameter M and N as shown in Table 3.6.
Table 3.6 Turbo Interleaver Parameter M and N
Payload size
M
N
372
20
19
744
28
27
1116
34
33
1488
41
37
2232
48
47
2976
57
53
4464
69
65
5952
78
77
6696
83
81
8928
95
94
2. Write the input information bits into the M rows N columns matrix row by row starting with bit
a1,1 in column 1 of row 1 as shown in Figure 3.24.
a1,1
a1,2
a1,3
a1,N
a2,1
a2,2
a2,3
a2,N
A-GN4.00-03-TS
79
a3,1
a3,2
a3,3
a3,N
aM-1,1
aM-1,2
aM-1,3
aM-1,N
aM,1
aM,2
aM,3
aM,N
Figure 3.24 Turbo Interleaver Matrix (Write-in)
If MN>d, dummy bits are padded in a M,N-MN+d+1 through aM,N. These dummy bits are pruned away
from read-out sequence.
3. Read out the interleaved bits as follows. First, set i=M and j=1. After reading out the bit a i,j, i is
decremented by 1 and j is incremented by 1. If i=0, then i is set to M. If j=N+1, then j is set to 1.
These process is repeated until M*N bits are read out. The order of reading out is described in
Figure 3.25.
a1,1
a1,2
a1,3
a1,N
a2,1
a2,2
a2,3
a2,N
a3,1
a3,2
a3,3
a3,N
aM-1,1
aM-1,2
aM-1,3
aM-1,N
aM,1
aM,2
aM,3
aM,N
Figure 3.25 Turbo Interleaver Matrix (Read-out)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
80
Another optional procedure of interleaving is described as follows: the output index j and the input
index I(j) of the Turbo Interleaver satisfies the following quadratic form:
I ( j )   f1  j  f 2  j 2 mod K
Where the parameters f1 and f 2 depend on the block size K. The block size K is from 40 to
6144.
4. Remove the dummy bits padded in 2.
The number of the read-out bits is M*N after reading out all the written bits, and the number of
dummy bits is M*N-d after deleting the padded dummy bits. Hence, the total number of output bits
becomes d.
3.4.1.3.1.4.4 Puncturing pattern
Punctured turbo encoded bits consist of systematic bits and punctured parity bits. Assume that
coding rate R2 is k/(k+1), while k is 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 parity bits are selected in every 2*k parity bits
at each constituent encoder, except for the case of k being 7. In case of k being 7, puncturing
pattern has to be specified so that all trellis state will be appeared because period of feedback
polynomial at each constituent encoder is 7. Table 3.7 describes puncturing patterns at each
coding rate. P(m1 m2 … ,n1 n2 …) represents that (m1,m2,…)-th parity bits are selected in every
2*k parity bits at the first constituent encoder and (n1,n2,…)-th parity bits are selected in every
2*k parity bits at the second constituent encoder, while k is 1, 2, 3 and 5. While k is 7,
(m1,m2,…)-th parity bits are selected in every 98 parity bits at the first constituent encoder and
(n1,n2,…)-th parity bits are selected in every 98 parity bits at the second constituent encoder.
Figure 3.26 illustrates the punctured turbo procedure with encoded bits while R2 is 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
and 5/6. Figure 3.27 illustrates the punctured turbo coding procedure while R2 is 7/8. As shown in
Figure 3.27, a parity bit is selected from every 15 bits in 98 parity bits at each constituent
encoder.
Table 3.7 Coding Rate and Puncturing Pattern
Coding Rate
1/2
2/3
3/4
5/6
7/8
Puncturing Pattern
P(1,2)
P(1,3)
P(1,4)
P(1,6)
P(1 16 31 46 61 76 91,8 23 38 53 68 83 98)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
81
R 2=1/2
I(1) I(2)
A (1) A (2)
B (1) B (2)
I(1) I(2)
A (1) A (2)
B (1) B (2)
R 2=2/3
I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4)
A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4)
B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4)
R 2=3/4
I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6)
A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6)
B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6)
R 2=5/6
I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7) I(8) I(9) I(10)
A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6) A (7) A (8) A (9) A (10)
B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6) B (7) B (8) B (9) B (10)
I(1) A (1) I(2) B (2)
I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4)
A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4)
B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4)
I(1) A (1) I(2) I(3) B (3) I(4)
I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6)
A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6)
B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6)
I(1) A (1) I(2) I(3) I(4) B (4) I(5) I(6)
I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7) I(8) I(9) I(10)
A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6) A (7) A (8) A (9) A (10)
B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6) B (7) B (8) B (9) B (10)
I(1) A (1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) B (6) I(7) I(8) I(9) I(10)
Figure 3.26 Puncturing Procedure while R2 is 1/2, 2/3, 3/4 and 5/6
A-GN4.00-03-TS
82
I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7) I(8) I(9) I(10) I(11) I(12) I(13) I(14)
A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6) A (7) A (8) A (9) A (10)A (11)A (12)A (13)A (14)
B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6) B (7) B (8) B (9) B (10)B (11)B (12)B (13)B (14)
…
I(15) I(16) I(17) I(18) I(19) I(20) I(21) I(22) I(23) I(24) I(25) I(26) I(27) I(28)
A (15)A (16)A (17)A (18)A (19)A (20)A (21)A (22)A (23)A (24)A (25)A (26)A (27)A (28)
B (15)B (16)B (17)B (18)B (19)B (20)B (21)B (22)B (23)B (24)B (25)B (26)B (27)B (28)
I(71) I(72) I(73) I(74) I(75) I(76) I(77) I(78) I(79) I(80) I(81) I(82) I(83) I(84)
A (71)A (72)A (73)A (74)A (75)A (76)A (77)A (78)A (79)A (80)A (81)A (82)A (83)A (84)
B (71)B (72)B (73)B (74)B (75)B (76)B (77)B (78)B (79)B (80)B (81)B (82)B (83)B (84)
I(85) I(86) I(87) I(88) I(89) I(90) I(91) I(92) I(93) I(94) I(95) I(96) I(97) I(98)
A (85)A (86)A (87)A (88)A (89)A (90)A (91)A (92)A (93)A (94)A (95)A (96)A (97)A (98)
B (85)B (86)B (87)B (88)B (89)B (90)B (91)B (92)B (93)B (94)B (95)B (96)B (97)B (98)
I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7) I(8) I(9) I(10) I(11) I(12) I(13) I(14)
A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6) A (7) A (8) A (9) A (10)A (11)A (12)A (13)A (14)
B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6) B (7) B (8) B (9) B (10)B (11)B (12)B (13)B (14)
I(15) I(16) I(17) I(18) I(19) I(20) I(21) I(22) I(23) I(24) I(25) I(26) I(27) I(28)
A (15)A (16)A (17)A (18)A (19)A (20)A (21)A (22)A (23)A (24)A (25)A (26)A (27)A (28)
B (15)B (16)B (17)B (18)B (19)B (20)B (21)B (22)B (23)B (24)B (25)B (26)B (27)B (28)
…
I(71) I(72) I(73) I(74) I(75) I(76) I(77) I(78) I(79) I(80) I(81) I(82) I(83) I(84)
A (71)A (72)A (73)A (74)A (75)A (76)A (77)A (78)A (79)A (80)A (81)A (82)A (83)A (84)
B (71)B (72)B (73)B (74)B (75)B (76)B (77)B (78)B (79)B (80)B (81)B (82)B (83)B (84)
I(85) I(86) I(87) I(88) I(89) I(90) I(91) I(92) I(93) I(94) I(95) I(96) I(97) I(98)
A (85)A (86)A (87)A (88)A (89)A (90)A (91)A (92)A (93)A (94)A (95)A (96)A (97)A (98)
B (85)B (86)B (87)B (88)B (89)B (90)B (91)B (92)B (93)B (94)B (95)B (96)B (97)B (98)
I(1) A (1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7) I(8) B (8) I(9) I(10) I(11) I(12) I(13) I(14)
I(15) I(16) A (16) I(17) I(18) I(19) I(20) I(21) I(22) I(23) B (23) I(24) I(25) I(26) I(27) I(28)
…
R 2=7/8
I(71) I(72) I(73) I(74) I(75) I(76) A (76) I(77) I(78) I(79) I(80) I(81) I(82) I(83) B (83) I(84)
I(85) I(86) I(87) I(88) I(89) I(90) I(91) A (91) I(92) I(93) I(94) I(95) I(96) I(97) I(98) B (98)
Figure 3.27 Puncturing Procedure while R2 is 7/8
A-GN4.00-03-TS
83
3.4.1.4 Bit-interleaving
Data (bit)
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Encoding
Bitinterleaving
Modulation
MIMO
Precoding
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.28 Interleaving
3.4.1.4.1 Bit-interleaver Structure
Figure 3.29 illustrates the application range of bit-interleaving. In this figure, the parameter
b(1),…,b(xy) is the bit series after encoding. The number of input bits to the interleaver is x*y,
where the parameter x is the number of bits in a symbol and the parameter y is the number of
symbols(*1). The bit-interleaver unit consists of x block interleavers. Each block interleaver
interleaves y bits separately. The details on the block interleaver are described in Section
3.4.1.4.2.
(*1) In case of BPSK or π/2-BPSK with coding rate of 2/3 for CSCH, one dummy bit of 0 is
appended to the end of the punctured bits. In other cases, the punctured bits equal to the input
bits of bit-interleaver.
The Number of Input Bits to Bit-interleaver
b(1) … b(y)
b(y+1) … b(2y)
…
Bit-interleaver Unit 1
b((x-1)y+1)…b(xy)
Bit-interleaver Unit x
Start Bit
Bit-interleaver Unit 1
(Block Interleaver)
…
Figure 3.29 Application Range of Bit-interleaving
A-GN4.00-03-TS
84
3.4.1.4.2 Block Interleaver Method
Block interleaver is used for each y bits in each column as explained in
Figure 3.29. Input bits are written sequentially into an array per bit in symbol, and then read out
by the given procedure. The number of input bits to the interleaver depends on symbol size of
physical channel and modulation class. The procedure of interleaving is described as follows:
1. Determine the interleaver parameter x and y based on the number of input bits and
modulation class.
2. Determine the block interleaver parameter N and M for each physical channel, where y= N*M,
N is column size, and M is row size.
3. Write the input information bits into the M-row N-column matrix row. Write starting position
shall be set according to bit position i (i=1,…,x) in a symbol. Figure 3.30 illustrates block
interleaver matrix for writing in case of n being 1.
4. Read the written bits from the M-row N-column matrix row to interleave each bit in symbol
and each symbol. Read starting position shall be set according to bit position in a symbol.
Figure 3.31 illustrates a block interleaver matrix for reading in case n being 1.
Position to
Start
Writing
a1,1
a1,2
a1,3
a1,N
a2,1
a2,2
a2,3
a2,N
a3,1
a3,2
a3,3
a3,N
aM-1,1
aM-1,2
aM-1,3
aM-1,N
aM,1
aM,2
aM,3
aM,N
Figure 3.30 Interleaver Matrix (Write-in) in case of n being 1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
85
Position to Start Reading
a1,1
a1,2
a1,3
a1,N
a2,1
a2,2
a2,3
a2,N
a3,1
a3,2
a3,3
a3,N
aM-1,1
aM-1,2
aM-1,3
aM-1,N
aM,1
aM,2
aM,3
aM,N
Figure 3.31 Interleaver Matrix (Read-out) in case of n being 1
3.4.1.4.3 Interleaver Parameters for OFDM
Table 3.8 and Table 3.9 summarize the parameters of the interleaver for input bit size and
modulation class.
The value of M and N in Table 3.8 are decided by the following processing.
1. Determine the interleaver parameter x and y based on the number of input bits and
modulation class, where x stands for coded bits per symbol and y stands for the number of
symbol.
2. Determine the block interleaver parameter N and M, where any CRC unit size “A” use the
largest valid interleaving matrix y=M*N that does not exceed A with N restricted to the range
[12.18]. Wasted allocated “P” symbol exist in case that y is not equal to M*N. Number of
A-GN4.00-03-TS
86
columns “N” is determined by choosing N from [13,12,18,17,16,15,14], such that
P=y-floor(y/N)*N is minimized. If N that P is minimized exists more than one value, N selects
first number of permutation [13,12,18,17,16,15,14]. The number of row “M” is defined by
equation M=floor(y/N). M*N denotes size of a block interleaver.
Note: It is not P=0 in case of y=358 and 366 as shown Table 3.8. This means the number of data
symbols “y” is not the same as interleave size “M*N”. In this case, “y-M*N” data symbols are
processed as DTX.
Table 3.8 Interleaver Parameter M, N and P
Number of Symbols
y
324
340
348
358
364
366
372
384
390
408
696
744
750
768
780
798
816
M
N
P
27
20
29
21
28
28
31
32
30
34
58
62
50
64
60
57
68
12
17
12
17
13
13
12
12
13
12
12
12
15
12
13
14
12
0
0
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Table 3.9 Interleaver Parameter
Modulation
BPSK
QPSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
The Number of Block Interleavers
1
2
4
6
8
Table 3.10 summarizes the definition of bit position i (i=1,..,x) in a symbol.
Table 3.10 The Definition of Bit Position i in a Symbol
A-GN4.00-03-TS
87
Modulation
BPSK
QPSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
Bit Position i in a Symbol
i = (1)
i = (1,2)
i = (1,2,3,4)
i = (1,2,3,4,5,6)
i = (1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8)
Table 3.11 summarizes the position to start writing and the position to start reading for
interleaver.
Table 3.11 Starting Position for Interleaver
Bit position i in a Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Position to Start Writing
a1,1
a3,1
a5,1
a7,1
a9,1
a11,1
a13,1
a15,1
Position to Start Reading
a1,1
a1,2
a1,3
a1,4
a1,5
a1,6
a1,7
a1,8
If this interleaver is represented by equation, the permutation of the i-th block interleaver is
defined as following.
lout = [{N*(j-1) mod M*N + (floor((j-1)/M)+(c-1)) mod N +N*(M-(r-1))} mod M*N] + (i-1)*M*N+1
y = M*N
j = 1,..,y
i = 1,..,x
lin = 1,..,xy
The function floor() denotes the largest integer not exceeding the parameter.
lout : the permutation after interleaver
r : Write starting position ar,1 in bit position of a symbol
c : Read starting position a1,c in bit position of a symbol
y : the number of symbol
x : the number in a symbol
M : row of block interleaver
N : column of block interleaver
lin : the permutation before interleaver : j + (i-1)*y
A-GN4.00-03-TS
88
For the parameter r and c, refer to Table 3.11 and Table 3.39.
The procedure of interleaving is performed as following:
1. Set j = 1 and i = 1. Then increase j to y.
2. Set j = 1 and i = i +1. Then increase j to y.
3. Repeat 2 until i equals to x.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
89
3.4.1.4.4 Output-bits after Bit-interleaver
The IQ data symbol is generated by using x bits, each of which is taken from each block
interleaver. Denote the output bits from i-th block interleaver by z(i,1), z(i,2), …, z(i,y). Thus, the
j-th IQ data symbol is converted from the bit series z(p1,j), z(p2,j),…,z(px,j), where pi is an offset
value to circulate the order of input bits to the modulator. The process is defined as follows:
Input bits to the modulator: z(p1,j), z(p2,j),…,z(px,j)
Offset value: pi = ( (i+j-2) mod x)+1
3.4.1.4.5 Bit-interleaving and Rate matching
3.4.1.4.5.1 Bit-interleaver Structure
The rate matching for convolutionally coded transport channels and control information consists
of interleaving the three bit streams, d k(0) , d k(1) and d k( 2) , followed by the collection of bits and
the generation of a circular buffer. The bit stream d k(0) is interleaved according to the sub-block
interleaver with an output sequence defined as v0(0) , v1(0) , v 2(0) ,...,v K(0) 1 .The bit stream d k(1) is
interleaved according to the sub-block interleaver with an output sequence defined as
v 0(1) , v1(1) , v 2(1) ,...,v K(1)
 1
. The bit stream d k( 2) is interleaved according to the sub-block interleaver
with an output sequence defined as v0(2) , v1(2) , v 2(2) ,...,v K(2) 1 .
3.4.1.4.5.2 Block Interleaver Method
The output bit sequence from the block interleaver is derived as follows:
(1) D is the number of bits input to the block interleaver.Determine the number of rows of the
matrix R, by finding minimum integer R such that D  R  C  .
(2) If R  C   D , then N D  R  C  D  dummy bits are padded.
y N D  k  d k(i )
, k = 0,
1,…, D-1, and the bit sequence y k is written into the matrix row by row starting with bit y 0 in
column 0 of row 0.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
90
(3) Perform the inter-column permutation for the matrix based on the pattern
 P(0), P(1),..., P(31)  = < 1, 17, 9, 25, 5, 21, 13, 29, 3, 19, 11, 27, 7, 23, 15, 31, 0, 16,
8, 24, 4, 20, 12, 28, 2, 18, 10, 26, 6, 22, 14, 30 >.
(4) The output of the block interleaver is the bit sequence read out column by column from the
inter-column permuted matrix.
This block interleaver is also used in interleaving ADEDCH modulation symbols. In that case, the
input bit sequence consists of ADEDCH symbol quadruplets.
3.4.1.4.5.3 Output-bits after Bit-interleaver
The circular buffer of length K w  3K  is generated as follows:
wk  v k(0) , wK  k  v k(1) ,
w2 K  k  v k( 2) ,
for k = 0,…, K   1
Denoting by E the rate matching output sequence length, the rate matching output bit sequence
is ek , k = 0,1,..., E  1 . The procedure of ek is shown as Figure 3.32.
K=0,j=0
K<E?
N
Y
end
w j mod K w  NULL 
N
Y
ek  w j mod K w ,
k  k 1
j  j 1
Figure 3.32 Procedure of Rate Matching Output Sequence
A-GN4.00-03-TS
91
3.4.1.5 Modulation Method
Data (bit)
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Encoding
Bitinterleaving
Modulation
MIMO
Precoding
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.33 Modulation
The serial signal input after interleaving is converted to IQ Data symbol on each symbol.
The constellation mapping for each modulation (BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM and 256QAM) is
shown in Appendix B.
a) BPSK
Refer to Appendix B.1.
b) QPSK
Refer to Appendix B.3.
c) 16QAM
Refer to Appendix B.6.
d) 64QAM
Refer to Appendix B.7.
e) 256QAM
Refer to Appendix B.8.
For optional Channel Coding, the block of scrambled bits in each codeword shall be modulated
using one of the modulation schemes {BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, 256QAM }, refer to
Appendix B.10, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols.
3.4.1.6 Precoding Method
MIMO Precoding is performed after first modulation and before symbol mapping as shown in
Figure 3.34. Since precoding method for SISO and SDMA is the same as protocol version 1, this
section describes precoding method for STBC, SM and EMB-MIMO.
1st
Modulation
MIMO
Precoding
Symbol
Pattern
Figure 3.34 MIMO Precoding
Precoded data Xk(t) of antenna number k with data number t is generally represented as
nos
X k t   Vk ,i Si t 
i 1
, where Si(t) means first modulation output of i-th stream with data number t (=1 to the number of
data symbol in a CRC unit). V is the transmit vector, and nos is the number of streams. Antenna
A-GN4.00-03-TS
92
number is defined as logical antenna number. The number of logical antenna is the same as the
number of layer. Note that the number of physical antenna is equal to or more than that of logical
antenna.
3.4.1.6.1 STBC-MIMO
Only 1 stream is defined for STBC-MIMO because it is MIMO technology to obtain stability.
STBC-MIMO with 2 and 4 transmission antennas is described in this section.
3.4.1.6.1.1 2 Layer STBC-MIMO
Precoding for 2 Layer STBC-MIMO with 2 antennas is defined as
*
 X 1 t1  X 1 t 2 
1  S1 t1   S1 t 2 


 X t  X t  
*
2  S1 t 2  S1 t1  
2 2 
 2 1
, where * represents complex conjugate.1
“1/ 2 ” described in the right side means that 1 antenna transmits 3dB lower signal than the
case of SISO because 2 stream data symbols are multiplexed. In addition, the pilot and training
symbols are transmitted with regular intervals in frequency. Therefore, the training and pilot
symbols are 5.5dB higher than data symbol.
1 This
equation assumes that the number of symbol in a PRU is even.
3.4.1.6.1.2 4 Layer STBC-MIMO
Precoding for 4 Layer STBC-MIMO with 4 antennas is defined as
 X 1 t1 
 X t 
 2 1
 X 3 t1 

 X 4 t1 
X 1 t 2 
X 1 t 3 
X 2 t 2  X 2 t 3 
X 3 t 2  X 3 t 3 
X 4 t 2  X 4 t 3 
 S1 t1   S1* t 2 
X 1 t 4 
0
0 



*
X 2 t 4 
0
0 
1  S1 t 2  S1 t1 

*
X 3 t 4 
0
S1 t 3   S1 t 4 
2 0



*
X 4 t 4 
0
S1 t 4  S1 t 3  
 0
, where * represents complex conjugate.2
“1/ 2 ” described in the right side means that 1 antenna transmits 3dB lower signal than the
case of SISO because 2 stream data symbols are multiplexed. In addition, the pilot and training
symbols are transmitted with regular intervals in frequency. Therefore, the training and pilot
symbols are 5.5dB higher than data symbol.
2 This
equation assumes that the number of symbol in a PRU is even.
3.4.1.6.2 SM-MIMO
SM-MIMO is a technique to increase user throughput. SM-MIMO with 2 and 4 transmission
A-GN4.00-03-TS
93
antennas is described in this section. The same MCS should be selected in all streams.
SM-MIMO performs vertical encoding. For example, 1st stream data is precoded and mapped to
each antenna at first, and then 2nd stream data is precoded after 1st stream data.
3.4.1.6.2.1 2 Layer SM-MIMO
Precoding for 2 Layer SM-MIMO with 2 antennas is defined as
 X 1 t1  X 1 t 2 
1  S1 t1  S1 t 3 
 X t  X t  


2 S1 t 2  S1 t 4 
2 2 
 2 1
“1/ 2 ” described in the right side means that 1 antenna transmits 3dB lower signal than the
case of SISO because 2 stream data symbols are multiplexed. In addition, the pilot and training
symbols are transmitted with regular intervals in frequency. Therefore, the training and pilot
symbols are 5.5dB higher than data symbol. Figure 3.35 shows SM-MIMO precoding for 2
antennas. Antenna 1 and 2 transmit stream 1 data, respectively, and then they transmit stream 2
data, respectively.
Stream 1
Stream 2
S1(1)
S2(1)
S1(2)
S2(2)
S1(3)
S2(3)
S1(4)
S2(4)
…

S1(t-1)
S2(t-1)
S1(t)
S2(t)
t
…
S2(t-1)
S2(t)
t
1
2
Antenna Port 1
Antenna Port 2
S1(1)
S1(2)
S1(3)
S1(4)
…
S1(t-1)
S1(t)
S2(1)
S2(2)
S2(3)
S2(4)
Figure 3.35 SM-MIMO Precoding for 2 antennas
3.4.1.6.2.2 4 Layer SM-MIMO
Precoding for 4 Layer SM-MIMO with 4 antennas is defined as
 X 1 t1  X 1 t 2  X 1 t3  X 1 t 4 
 S1 t1 
 X t  X t  X t  X t 

1 S t 
2 2
2 3
2 4 
 2 1
  1 2
 X 3 t1  X 3 t 2  X 3 t3  X 3 t 4  2  S1 t3 



 X 4 t1  X 4 t 2  X 4 t3  X 4 t 4 
 S1 t 4 
S1 t5 
S1 t9 
S1 t6  S1 t10 
S1 t7  S1 t11 
S1 t8  S1 t12 
S1 t13 
S1 t14 
S1 t15 

S1 t16 
“1/2” described in the right side means that 1 antenna transmits 6dB lower signal than the case of
SISO because 4 stream data symbols are multiplexed. In addition, the pilot and training symbols
are transmitted with regular intervals in frequency. Therefore, the training and pilot symbols are
8.5dB higher than data symbol. Figure 3.36 shows SM-MIMO precoding for 4 antennas. Antenna
1, 2, 3, and 4 transmit stream 1 data, respectively, and then they transmit stream 2, 3, 4 data as
with stream 1.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
94
S1(1)
S2(1)
S3(1)
S4(1)
Stream 1
Stream 2
Stream 3
Stream 4
S1(2)
S2(2)
S3(2)
S4(2)
S1(3)
S2(3)
S3(3)
S4(3)
S1(4)
S2(4)
S3(4)
S4(4)
…

S1(1)
S1(2)
S1(3)
S1(4)
Antenna Port 1
Antenna Port 2
Antenna Port 3
Antenna Port 4
S1(t-3)
S1(t-2)
S1(t-1)
S1(t)
…
S2(1)
S2(2)
S2(3)
S2(4)
…
S2(t-3)
S2(t-2)
S2(t-1)
S2(t)
S1(t-1)
S2(t-1)
S3(t-1)
S4(t-1)
S1(t)
S2(t)
S3(t)
S4(t)
t
…
S4(t-3)
S4(t-2)
S4(t-1)
S4(t)
t
1
2
S3(1)
S3(2)
S3(3)
S3(4)
…
S3(t-3)
S3(t-2)
S3(t-1)
S3(t)
S4(1)
S4(2)
S4(3)
S4(4)
Figure 3.36 SM-MIMO Precoding for 4 antennas
3.4.1.6.3 EMB-MIMO
EMB-MIMO is a technique to increase user throughput and adopted only for DL in protocol
version 2. EMB-MIMO block diagram is shown in Figure 3.37. Channel information obtained on
reception side is decomposed using SVD. Resultant unitary matrix is used as transmission weight.
However, the channel information is not limited to the above expression as long as that can
improve the reception at the receiver.
Channel
Estimation
in Rx side
1st
Modulation
H k ,i Tx Weights Vk ,i
Calculation
Si
Tx Power
Calculation
EMB-MIMO
Precoding
Pk ,i
X k ,i
Symbol
Mapping
Figure 3.37 EMB-MIMO block diagram
3.4.1.6.3.1 Transmission Weight Calculation
Tx weight V is obtained by k-by-i channel response matrix (H k,i) using SVD on reception side.
SVD of channel response matrix is represented as
H k ,i  U k ,i i ,iVk ,i

H
i ,i  diag 1  nos

Wk ,i  Vk ,i  Ck
H
H
A-GN4.00-03-TS
95
, where U and V are unitary matrices, and Σ is diagonal matrix with nonnegative numbers on the
diagonal. H means complex conjugate transposed. nos is the number of streams. C is calibration
vector. W is transmission weights. However, the transmission weight W is not limited to the above
expression as long as that can improve the reception at the receiver.
3.4.1.6.3.2 2 Layer EMB-MIMO
EMB precoding with 2 antennas is defined as
 X 1 t  W11 t  W12 t   P1 S1 t  

 X t   W t  W t  
22
 2   21
  P2 S 2 t 
Note that data, training, pilot and signal symbols are also weighted by transmission power.
Regarding signal symbols, transmission weight W and P are applied after STBC coded signal
Si(t).
3.4.1.6.3.3 4 Layer EMB-MIMO
EMB precoding with 4 antennas is defined as
 X 1 t  W11 t 
 X t  W t 
 2    21
 X 3 t  W31 t 

 
 X 4 t  W41 t 
W12 t  W13 t  W14 t  

W22 t  W23 t  W24 t  
W32 t  W33 t  W34 t  

W42 t  W43 t  W44 t  
P1 S1 t  

P2 S 2 t 
P3 S 3 t 

P4 S 4 t 
Note that data, training, pilot and signal symbols are also weighted by transmission power.
Regarding signal symbols, transmission weight W and P are applied after STBC coded signal
Si(t).
3.4.1.6.4 Optional Precoding Method
3.4.1.6.4.1 Precoding for transmission on a single antenna port
For transmission on a single antenna port, y ( p) (i) represents the signal for antenna port p ,
p  0,4,5,7,8 is the number of the single antenna port used for transmission of the physical


T
channel, x(i )  x ( 0) (i ) ... x ( l 1) (i ) , i  0,1,..., M layer  1 is input block of vectors from
the layer mapping. precoding for transmission on a signle antenna port is defined by
y ( p) (i)  x (0) (i) .
3.4.1.6.4.2 Precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with BS-specific pilot
A-GN4.00-03-TS
96
Precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with cell-specific pilot is only used in
combination with layer mapping for spatial multiplexing. Spatial multiplexing supports two or four
antenna ports and the set of antenna ports used is p  0,1 or p  0,1,2,3 , respectively.
3.4.1.6.4.2.1 Precoding without CDD
Without cyclic delay diversity (CDD), precoding for spatial multiplexing is defined by
Y (i )  W (i ) X (i ) ,where the precoding matrix W (i) is of size P  and i  0,1,...,M symb  1 ,
M symb  M layer . For spatial multiplexing, the values of
W (i) shall be selected among the
precoder elements in the codebook configured in the BS and the MS. The BS can further confine
the precoder selection in the MS to a subset of the elements in the codebook using codebook
subset restrictions.
3.4.1.6.4.2.2 Precoding for large delay CDD
For large-delay CDD, precoding for spatial multiplexing is defined by
Y (i )  W (i ) D(i )U X (i ) ,where the precoding matrix W (i) is of size P  l and
i  0,1,...,M symb  1 M symb  M layer
,
. The diagonal matrix D(i) supporting cyclic delay diversity
and the matrix U are different for different numbers of layers l .
1 
1 1
1 e  j 2 2 
2

Matrix U is
1
1
1 e  j 2
1
2 1 e  j 4

 j 6
1 e
0
1
0 e  j 2i 3

0
0
1
1
4
e  j 4
4
e  j 6
4
e  j8
4
e  j12
 j12 4
 j18
4
e
e



4

4

for 2 layers,
1 
e  j 4 3 
e  j 8 3 
3
3
for 3 layers and
4
for 4 layers.

0 
 j 4i 3

e
for 3 layers and
0
1
1
1 
 j 2
1
e
3 
 j 4
1 e
0
1
0 e  j 2i 4

0
0

0
0
Matrix D(i) is
0
0
e  j 4i 4
0
0 
1
0 e  j 2i 2 





0 

e  j 6i 4 
for 2 layers,
0
0
for 4 layers.
The values of the precoding matrix W shall be selected among the precoder elements in the
codebook configured in the BS and the MS. The BS can further confine the precoder selection in
the MS to a subset of the elements in the codebook using codebook subset restriction.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
97
3.4.1.6.4.2.3 Codebook for precoding
For transmission on two antenna ports, the precoding matrix W shall be selected from
1  1  1 1 
 
 
2 1 , 2  j 
1 1 
 
2  j  or
W (i) shall be selected from
1 1

2 1
,
a subset thereof for 1 layer. For 2 layers, the precoding matrix
1 1 0 1 1 1  1 1 1 






2 0 1 , 2 1 1 , 2  j  j  or
a subset thereof . For the
closed-loop spatial multiplexing transmission mode, the codebook index 0 is not used when the
number layers is 2. For transmission on four antenna ports, the precoding matrix W shall be
selected from a 16-matrix set or a subset thereof for different layer configuration.
3.4.1.6.4.3 Precoding for transmit diversity
For 2 antennas transmit diversity,SFBC is adopted,and for 4 antennas transmit diversity,SFBC
and FSTD are applied. f i denotes the subcarrier index.
-
2 Layer SFBC-MIMO
Precoding for 2 Layer SFBC-MIMO with 2 antennas is defined as
S2  f 2 
 X 1  f1  X 1  f 2 
1  S1  f1 
 X  f  X  f  
 S *  f  S *  f  , where * represents complex conjugate.
2 2 1
2
2 
1
2 
 2 1
-
4 Layer SFBC-MIMO
Precoding for 4 Layer SFBC-MIMO with 4 antennas is defined as
S2  f 2 
0
0 
 X 1  f1  X 1  f 2  X 1  f3  X 1  f 4 
 S1  f1 
 X  f  X  f  X  f  X  f 
 0
0
S3  f 3 
S4  f 4   ,
1 
2
2
2
3
2
4 
 2 1

*
*
 X 3  f1  X 3  f 2  X 3  f3  X 3  f 4 
0
0 
2  S2  f1  S1  f 2 




*
*
0
 S4  f3  S3  f 4 
 X 4  f1  X 4  f 2  X 4  f3  X 4  f 4 
 0
where * represents complex conjugate.
3.4.1.6.4.4 Precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with MS-specific pilot
Precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with MS-specific pilot is only used in
combination with layer mapping for spatial multiplexing. Spatial multiplexing using antenna ports
with MS-specific pilot supports two antenna ports and the set of antenna ports used is p  7,8 .
For transmission on two antenna ports, p  7,8 , the precoding operation is defined by
A-GN4.00-03-TS
98
y ( 7) (i )  x ( 0) (i ) and y (8) (i )  x(1) (i ) .
A-GN4.00-03-TS
99
3.4.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU
As described in section 3.4.1.6, Xk(t) represents MIMO-precoded data, where k and t mean
antenna number and data number, respectively. When the number of transmission antenna is 2,
X1(t) is mapped to transmission antenna 1 and X2(t) is mapped to transmission antenna 2. When
the number of transmission antenna is 4, X1(t) to X4(t) are mapped to transmission antenna 1 to 4
in the same way. Since symbol mapping method of single and multiple antenna case can be
considered to be the same, the following sections describe symbol mapping method to PRU for
single antenna.
Symbol mapping methods depend on physical channel type (CCCH, ANCH, EXCH and CSCH)
and MIMO type. Although STBC-MIMO has unique mapping method, data symbols are mapped
such that lower numbered OFDM symbol, subchannel and subcarrier are occupied first, that is,
data symbols are mapped along frequency axis from the earlier timing OFDM symbol in principle.
The detail of the mapping method is described later.
3.4.1.7.1 Symbol Mapping Method for CCCH, ANCH and CSCH
As shown in Figure 3.38, the data symbol mapping is performed by aligning the data symbols
along frequency axis, and then aligning them along time axis per PRU.
PHY Frame
The First CRC Unit
CCH, ANCH, CSCH@1PRU
900 kHz
Starting Point
Time
Frequency
625 us
Figure 3.38 Data Symbol Mapping Method for CCCH, ANCH and CSCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
100
3.4.1.7.2 Symbol Mapping Method for EXCH
3.4.1.7.2.1 Symbol Mapping without DTX Symbol
As shown in Figure 3.39, the data symbol mapping is performed by aligning the data symbols
along frequency axis, and then along time axis. The data symbols of the first CRC unit are
inserted firstly, and the symbols of the second CRC unit are inserted next.
PHY Frame
The First CRC Unit
The Second CRC Unit
EXCH@4 PRUs
The second CRC Unit
900 kHz
Starting Point
(The first CRC Unit)
Time
Frequency
625 us
Figure 3.39 Data Symbol Mapping Method for EXCH (In Case of PRU being 4)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
101
3.4.1.7.2.2 Symbol Mapping with DTX Symbol
DTX symbol is used in case of EXCH. As shown in Figure 3.40, when PHY frame is fewer than
PRU total size, all data symbols are inserted, and then DTX symbol is inserted to the last.
The definition of DTX is described in Section 3.4.6.
DTX
PHY Frame
The First CRC Unit
EXCH @ 4 PRUs
All DTX symbol is inserted to the
last.
900 kHz
Starting Point
(The first CRC Unit)
Time
Frequency
625 us
Figure 3.40 DTX Symbol Mapping Method for EXCH (In Case of PRU being 4)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
102
3.4.1.7.3 Symbol Mapping Method for MIMO
Symbol mapping method for EXCH except for EMB-MIMO is carried out slot by slot. Symbol
mapping method for EMB-MIMO is carried out within one PRU.
3.4.1.7.3.1 Symbol Mapping Method for STBC-MIMO
Data symbols except for STBC-MIMO are mapped to allocated PRU as shown in Figure 3.38,
Figure 3.39. Data symbols of STBC are mapped to allocated PRU as shown in Figure 3.41. The
difference from other MIMO types is that odd numbered data symbols X1(todd) are mapped to
even numbered OFDM symbols such as S2, S4,…, S18, and even numbered data symbols
X1(teven) are mapped to odd numbered OFDM symbols such as S3,S5,…,S19. There is no
difference in STBC symbol mapping method between 2 and 4 antenna transmissions.
SCH
900kHz
Subcarrier F1
Subcarrier F2
Subcarrier F3
.
.
.
Subcarrier F23
Subcarrier F24
Even numbered
OFDM symbol
(Seven:[S2,…,S18])
X1 t1  1
X1 t3 
Odd numbered
OFDM symbol
(Sodd:[S3,…,S19])
X1 t2  2
X1 t4 
47
48
Figure 3.41 Symbol Mapping Method for STBC-MIMO
3.4.1.7.3.2 Symbol Mapping Method for SM-MIMO
Figure 3.42 shows the symbol mapping method of EXCH. Data symbol mapping method for
EXCH is carried out to frequency direction independently for each slot. DTX symbol is transmitted
when there is no data to be transmitted. EXCH data symbol and DTX symbol can not be
transmitted from each antenna at the same time when MIMO type is SM-MIMO regarding EXCH.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
103
SLOT1
SLOT2
SLOT3
SLOT4
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
SCH4
SCH5
SCH6
SCH7
SCH8
SCH9
ANCH Signal Symbol
ANCH Data Symbol
EXCH Data Symbol
DTX Symbol
Figure 3.42 Symbol Mapping Method for SM-MIMO
3.4.1.7.3.3 Symbol Mapping Method for EMB-MIMO
Figure 3.43 shows the symbol mapping method of EXCH. Data symbol mapping method for
EXCH is carried out from a SCH with smaller SCH number and smaller slot number. DTX symbol
is transmitted when there is no data to be transmitted or when propagation environment is worse.
1st Stream
SLOT1
SLOT2
SLOT3
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
SCH4
SCH5
SCH6
SCH7
SCH8
SCH9
SLOT4
2nd Stream
SLOT1
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
SCH4
SCH5
SCH6
SCH7
SCH8
SCH9
SLOT2
SLOT3
SLOT4
ANCH Signal Symbol
ANCH Data Symbol
EXCH Signal Symbol
EXCH Data Symbol
DTX Symbol
No Area
Figure 3.43 Symbol Mapping Method for EMB-MIMO
3.4.1.7.3.4 Symbol Mapping in case that p is not 0
The rest of “p=y-M*N” symbols are transmitted as DTX after data symbols are transmitted in one
CRC unit in case that p is not 0.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
104
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
“p=y-MN” data symbols are transmitted as DTX.
Training Symbol(Antenna1)
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Training Symbol(Antenna2)
Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)
Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)
Data Symbol
aaaa
Figure 3.44 Symbol Mapping in case that p is not 0
A-GN4.00-03-TS
105
3.4.1.7.4 Symbol Mapping Method for Retransmission of CC-HARQ
3.4.1.7.4.1 Symbol Mapping Method except for EMB-MIMO
In case of EXCH retransmission, the retransmission data is mapped in an order from a head by
each layer and each slot. The example of retransmission by only 1 layer is shown in Figure 3.45.
The example of retransmission by some layers is shown in Figure 3.46.
1 Layer
CRC Unit 1 (NACK)
1 Layer
PRU1
CRC Unit 2 (ACK)
PRU2
PRU3
CRC Unit 3 (NACK)
PRU4
PRU5
Transmission
1 Layer
Retransmission Data of CRC Unit 1
Retransmission Data
of CRC Unit 3
New Data
Figure 3.45 In case of Retransmission of except for EMB-MIMO(only 1 layer)
1 Layer
CRC Unit 1 (NACK)
2 Layer
1 Layer
2 Layer
CRC Unit 2 (NACK)
CRC Unit 4 (NACK)
PRU1
PRU1
PRU2
PRU2
CRC Unit 3 (ACK)
CRC Unit 5 (ACK)
PRU3
PRU3
CRC Unit 6 (NACK)
PRU4
PRU5
PRU4
PRU5
Retransmission Data of CRC Unit 2
New Data
Transmission
1 Layer
2 Layer
Retransmission Data of CRC Unit 1
Retransmission Data of CRC Unit 4
Retransmission Data
of CRC Unit 6
New Data
Figure 3.46 In case of Retransmission of except for EMB-MIMO(some layers)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
106
3.4.1.7.4.2 Symbol Mapping Method for EMB-MIMO
In case of EXCH retransmission, EMB-MIMO is retransmitted by each PRU. The example of
retransmission of EMB-MIMO is shown in Figure 3.47.
1 Layer
2 Layer
1 Layer
2 Layer
CRC Unit 1 (NACK)
CRC Unit 6 (ACK)
PRU1
PRU1
CRC Unit 2 (ACK)
CRC Unit 7 (NACK)
PRU2
PRU2
CRC Unit 3 (NACK)
CRC Unit 8 (ACK)
PRU3
PRU3
CRC Unit 4 (NACK)
CRC Unit 9 (ACK)
PRU4
PRU4
CRC Unit 5 (ACK)
CRC Unit 10 (NACK)
PRU5
PRU5
Transmission
1 Layer
2 Layer
Retransmission of
CRC Unit 1
New CRC Unit
New CRC Unit
Retransmission Data
of CRC Unit 7
Retransmission Data
of CRC Unit 3
New CRC Unit
Retransmission Data
of CRC Unit 4
New CRC Unit
New CRC Unit
Retransmission Data
of CRC Unit 10
Figure 3.47 In case of Retransmission of EMB-MIMO
A-GN4.00-03-TS
107
3.4.1.7.4.3 Symbol Mapping Method in case of full subcarrier mode
It is necessary to consider full subcarrier mode except for EMB-MIMO. The retransmission CRC
unit size is not necessarily the same as the PRU size in case of PRU allocation. (a) explains the
case that the retransmission CRC unit size equals to the retransmission PRU size. (b) explains
the case that the retransmission CRC unit size is smaller than the retransmission PRU size. (c)
explains the case that the retransmission CRC unit size is larger than the retransmission PRU
size.
(a) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size equals to Retransmission PRU Size
Figure 3.48 and Figure 3.49 illustrate the case that retransmission CRC unit size equals to the
retransmission PRU size. Figure 3.48 shows the case that retransmission data 2 and PRU size 2
equal to retransmission data 1 and PRU size 1. Figure 3.49 shows the case that retransmission
data1 and PRU size 1 differ from retransmission data 2 and PRU size 2, when full subcarrier
mode is used.
Retransimission CRC Unit
New CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 1
Retransmission Data 2
New Data
PRU 1
PRU 2
PRU 3
Transmission
Retransmission Data 1
Retransmission Data 2
New Data
Figure 3.48 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size equals to Retransmission PRU Size
(1)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
108
Retransimission CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 1
New CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 2
PRU 1
New Data
PRU 2
PRU 3
Transmission
Retransmission Data 1
Retransmission Data 2
New Data
Figure 3.49 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size equals to Retransmission PRU Size
(2)
(b) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is smaller than Retransmission PRU Size
Figure 3.50 illustrates the case that retransmission CRC unit size is smaller than retransmission
PRU size. As shown in this figure, the rest of PRU 4 is used as DTX symbols.
The First Retransimission CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 1
PRU 1
Retransmission Data 2
PRU 2
The Second Retransimission CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 3
PRU 3
Retransmission Data 4
PRU 4
New CRC Unit
New Data
PRU 5
Transmission
Retransmission Data 1
Retransmission Data 2
Retransmission Data 3
Retransmission Data 4
New Data
DTX Symbol
Figure 3.50 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is smaller than Retransmission PRU
Size
A-GN4.00-03-TS
109
(c) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is larger than Retransmission PRU Size
Figure 3.51 illustrates the case that retransmission CRC unit size is larger than retransmission
PRU size. As shown in the figure, a part of retransmission data 4 takes up the symbols that can
be used by DTX symbols. In addition, a part of retransmission data 4 might also take up a part of
the guard time.
The First Retransimission CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 1
Retransmission Data 2
PRU 1
Retransmission Data 1
PRU 2
Retransmission Data 2
The Second Retransimission CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 3
PRU 3
New CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 4
PRU 4
Retransmission Data 3
New Data
PRU 5
Retransmission Data 4
Transmission
Retransmission Data 1
Retransmission Data 2
Retransmission Data 3
Retransmission Data 4
New Data
Figure 3.51 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is lager than Retransmission PRU
Size
3.4.1.7.5 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU for Optional Physical Channel
3.4.1.7.5.1 Advanced Physical broadcast channel
The block of complex-valued symbols y ( p ) (i ) with length Msymb for each antenna port is
transmitted during 4 consecutive radio frames starting in each radio frame fulfilling nf mod 4  0
and shall be mapped in sequence starting with y(0) to resource elements k, l  . The mapping
to resource elements k, l  not reserved for transmission of pilots shall be in increasing order of
first the index k , then the index l in slot 1 in slot 0 and finally the radio frame number. The
resource-element indices are given by
k
DL
N RU
N scRU
 36  k ' ,
2
k '  0,1,...,71, l  0,1,...,3
where resource units reserved for pilots shall be excluded. The mapping operation shall assume
BS-specific pilots for antenna ports 0-3 being present irrespective of the actual configuration. The
MS shall assume that the resource units assumed to be reserved for pilots in the mapping
operation above but not used for transmission of pilot are not available for ADEDCH
transmission.
3.4.1.7.5.2 Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel
A-GN4.00-03-TS
110
The mapping to resource units is defined in terms of quadruplets of complex-valued symbols.
For
each
of
the
antenna
ports,
symbol
quadruplets
A( p ) (i )  y ( p ) (4i ), y ( p ) (4i  1), y ( p ) (4i  2), y ( p ) (4i  3) shall be mapped in increasing order of i to
the four resource-point groups in the first OFDM symbol in a downlink slot with the representative
resource-unit.
is
A( p ) (i )
mapped
to
the
resource-unit
group
represented
by
BS
DL
DL
RU
 and N IDBS is the
mod 2 N RU
k  k  i  N RU
/ 2 N SC
/ 2 , where k  NscRU 2 N ID
physical-layer BS identity.
3.4.1.7.5.3 Advanced Downlink ECCH
The mapping to resource units is defined by operations on quadruplets of complex-valued
symbols.The block of quadruplets
w( p) (0),...,w( p) (M quad  1)
A( p ) (0),...,A( p ) ( M quad  1)
shall be permuted resulting in
( p)
. The block of quadruplets w shall be cyclically shifted, resulting in
( p)
( p)
BS
w ( p ) , where M quad  M symb 4 and w (i )  w ((i  N ID ) mod M quad ) .
Mapping of the block of quadruplets w ( p ) is defined in terms of resource-point groups,
according to steps as shown in Figure 3.52:
A-GN4.00-03-TS
111
m  0, k '  0
l'  0
resource-point group ( k , l ) assigned
to ADEFICH or ADHICH ?
Y
N
Map symbol-quadruplet
to the
( p)
resource-point groupw ( m' )for each antenna
m
( k , l )
port p, Increase
by 1
l'  l '  1
l ' than number of OFDM symbols
less
used for ADANCH transmission
N
Y
k'  k ' 1
DL
k '  N RU
 N scRU
Figure 3.52 Mapping of the block of quadruplets w ( p )
3.4.1.7.5.4 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel
The sequence y ( p ) (n) with length M symb for each of the ADHICH groups is the sum is over all
( p)
( p)
ADHICHs in the ADHICH group yi (n) , where yi (n) represents the symbol sequence from
the i ADHICH in the ADHICH group.ADHICH groups are mapped to ADHICH mapping units.
( p)
~ ( p)
The mapping of ADHICH group m to ADHICH mapping unit m' is defined by ym' (n)  ym (n)
group
Where m'  m  0,1,...,mi  N ADHICH  1 , mi equals to 1 for normal ADHICH duration and equals
A-GN4.00-03-TS
112
to 2 (slot 1 and 6) or 3 (other slots) for extend ADHICH duration. The ADHICH duration is
configurable by higher layers. The duration configured puts a lower limit on the size of the control
region signalled by the ADEFICH.
A( p ) (i )  ~y ( p ) (4i ), ~y ( p ) (4i  1), ~y ( p ) (4i  2), ~y ( p ) (4i  3)
Mapping
to resource units is defined in terms of
symbol quadruplets according to steps as below:
1) Number the resource-point groups not assigned to ADEFICH in OFDM symbol l from 0
to nl  1 , starting from the resource-point group with the lowest frequency-domain index.
2) Symbol-quadruplet A( p ) (i ) from ADHICH mapping unit m' is mapped to the
resource-point group represented by (k , l )i ,where the indices


BS
ki'  N ID
 nli n1   m' i  nli 3 mod nli ,
li equals to 0 for normal ADHICH duration and
equals to ( m' / 2  i  1) mod 2 for extended ADHICH in slot 1,6 and equals to i for
other cases.
3.4.1.8 Summary of OFDM DL Channel Coding
Combinations of coding and modulation are shown in Table 3.12. Also, the efficiency of each
combination is shown in the same table.
The OFDM DL channel coding for XGP is summarized in Table 3.12.
Table 3.12 Summary of OFDM DL Channel Coding
Modulation
BPSK
QPSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
Scaling
Coding rate R1
Puncturing
Coding rate R
Factor
@convolutional coding
rate R2
@total
1
1/2
0.5
3/4
2/3
0.67
1
1/2
1
4/6
3/4
1.5
1
1/2
2
4/6
3/4
3
3/4
4/6
4
6 / 10
5/6
5
4/6
6/8
6
8 / 14
7/8
7
1
1/√2
1/√10
1/√42
1/√170
1/2
A-GN4.00-03-TS
Efficiency
113
3.4.2 Training Format for DL OFDM
Training format is used mainly for synchronization, frequency offset estimation, automatic gain
control or weight calculation of beam-forming. Training format is composed of pre-defined data
(Refer to Appendix C.1). The details of training format, training sequence, and training pattern are
described in Sections 3.4.2.1, 3.4.2.2 and 3.4.2.3.
3.4.2.1 Training Format
Training format is used for ICH and CCCH as described in Sections 3.4.2.1.1 and 3.4.2.1.2.
Training format for ICH and the format for CCCH are chosen according to the training index as
defined in Section 3.4.2.3.
3.4.2.1.1 Training Format for ICH
ICH is composed of ANCH, EXCH and CSCH. As shown in Figure 3.53, 1/4 or 1/2 of the original
training data is copied ahead of the data. This training format is used for ICH. As described in
Sections 3.4.8.1.2 and 3.5.6.1.2, training symbol S1 is used for ICH.
6.66 us
33.33 us
26.67 us
Original
training data
GI
40 us
13.33 us
26.67 us
GI
Original
training data
Copy
Copy
(a) UL
(b) DL
Figure 3.53 Training Format for Single Symbol (S1)
3.4.2.1.2 Training Format for CCCH
As shown in Figure 3.54, 3/8 or 5/8 of the original training data (the second OFDM data) is copied
ahead of the first OFDM data. The phase of this format must be consecutive. As described in
Sections 3.4.8.1.1 and 3.5.6.1.1, training symbols S1 and S2 are used for CCCH.
10 us
63.33 us
53.33 us
The First OFDM Data The Second OFDM Data
16.67 us
70 us
53.33 us
The First OFDM Data The Second OFDM Data
Original
Training Data
Copy
(a) UL
Original
Training Data
Copy
(b) DL
A-GN4.00-03-TS
114
Figure 3.54 Training Format for Two Symbols
3.4.2.2 Training Sequence
The training sequence of each SCH is decided by the training core-sequence number and the
offset value number that is described in Sections 3.4.2.3.1 and 3.4.2.3.2. The calculated
core-sequence is chosen from 12 core-sequences defined in Table C.1 to Table C.3 in Appendix
C. The calculated offset value number chooses the offset sample as shown in Table C.4. The
offset sample shifts the core-sequence cyclically. To generate the training sequence of each SCH,
the core-sequence and the offset sample are substituted in Equation C.1. The example of
generation is shown in Table C.5. When offset value number is 1, the training sequence becomes
the same as the core-sequence. Offset value depends on the number of SCHs. Training symbol
should be boosted by 2.5 dB (=4/3) compared with data symbol. And further boosting power(over
2.5dB) is optional in case that MCS is lower as BPSK and QPSK.
3.4.2.3 Training Index
As described in Section 3.4.2.2, there are 12 core-sequences and offset values (cyclic-shift
values). Training index is numbered as follows:
Training Index = Core-sequence Number + (Offset Value Number-1)*12
3.4.2.3.1 Training Index for CCCH
Training index, core-sequence number and offset value number for CCCH are defined as follows:
Training Index
Core-sequence Number
Offset Value Number
: 2 for UL, 1 for DL
: 2 for UL, 1 for DL
:1
3.4.2.3.2 Training Index for ICH
3.4.2.3.2.1 Training Index for SISO
Training index, core-sequence number and offset value number for ICH are defined as follows:
Training Index
: (x + (y-1)*12
Core-sequence Number
: x=[A MOD 12] + 1
Offset Value Number
: y(m)=[{B + m} MOD (n-1)] + 2
n = maximum number of SCHs in a slot
m = SCH number : 1, 2,…,n
A = 1st to 5th bits including LSB in BSID
B = 1st to 5th bits next to A in BSID
A-GN4.00-03-TS
115
3.4.2.3.2.2 Training Index for MIMO
Training index, core sequence number and offset value number for MIMO are defined as follows:
Training index
: x + (y-1)*12
Core-sequence number
: x(k)=[{A + k -1} MOD 12] + 1
Offset value number
: y(m)=[{B + m} MOD (n-1)] + 2
k = SDMA-MIMO stream number (k=1,2,…)
n = maximum number of SCH in a slot
m = SCH number : 2,…,n
A = 1st to 5th bits including LSB in BSID
B = 1st to 5th bits next to A in BSID
Note: The parameter k is used only for SDMA-MIMO. In other cases, SM-MIMO, EMB-MIMO and
STBC-MIMO,k is 1 regardless of MIMO stream number.
3.4.2.3.2.3 Training Layer Mapping for MIMO
The generated training pattern is mapped to each layer, as shown in Figure 3.55. Figure 3.56
shows method of training layer mapping except for full subcarrier mode. Figure 3.57 shows
method of training layer mapping for full subcarrier mode.
Training
Coresequence
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1
Copy
Calculated by
Training Offset
Value Number
Copy
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1
1 Layer
Format
24 kind of
Training
Pattern
Training Layer
Mapping
2 Layer
Format
4 Layer
Format
Figure 3.55 Training Layer Mapping for MIMO
A-GN4.00-03-TS
116
1 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
2 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
4 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Training Symbol(Antenna1)
Training Symbol(Antenna2)
Training Symbol(Antenna4)
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Training Symbol(Antenna3)
Figure 3.56 Training Layer Mapping for MIMO except for full subcarrier mode
1 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Training Symbol(Antenna1)
2 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
4 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Training Symbol(Antenna2)
Training Symbol(Antenna3)
Training Symbol(Antenna4)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
117
Figure 3.57 Training Layer Mapping for MIMO for full subcarrier mode
3.4.2.4 Advanced Synchronization Signal
3.4.2.4.1 Advanced primary synchronization signal
3.4.2.4.1.1 Sequence generation
The sequence d (n) used for the advanced primary synchronization signal is generated from a
frequency-domain Zadoff-Chu sequence according to
( n 1)
  j un63
 e
d u (n )   u ( n 1)( n 2 )
j
63

e
n  0,1,...,30
n  31,32,...,61
where the Zadoff-Chu root sequence index u is 25, 29 and 34 for NID =0,1,2 repectively.
3.4.2.4.1.2 Mapping to resource units
The mapping of the sequence to resource units depends on the frame structure. The MS shall not
assume that the advanced primary synchronization signal is transmitted on the same antenna
port as any of the downlink pilots. The MS shall not assume that any transmission instance of the
advanced primary synchronization signal is transmitted on the same antenna port, or ports used
for any other transmission instance of the advanced primary synchronization signal.
The sequence d n  shall be mapped to the resource elements according to
DL
N RU
N scRU
ak ,l  d n , n  0,...,61, k  n  31 
2
The advanced primary synchronization signal shall be mapped to the third OFDM symbol in slots
1 and 6. Resource elements (k , l ) in the OFDM symbols used for transmission of the advanced
primary synchronization signal where
k  n  31 
DL
N RU
N scRU
, n  5,4,...,1,62,63,...66
2
are reserved and not used for transmission of the advanced primary synchronization signal.
3.4.2.4.2 Advanced secondary synchronization signal
3.4.2.4.2.1 Sequence generation
The sequence d (0),..., d (61) used for the advanced second synchronization signal is an
interleaved concatenation of two length-31 binary sequences. The concatenated sequence is
A-GN4.00-03-TS
118
scrambled with a scrambling sequence given by the advanced primary synchronization signal.
The combination of two length-31 sequences defining the secondary synchronization signal is
d (2n)  s0( m0 ) (n)c0 (n)
,
d (2n  1)  s1( m1 ) (n)c1 (n) z1( m0 ) (n)
for
slot
0
and
d (2n)  s1( m1 ) (n)c0 (n)
d (2n  1)  s0( m0 ) (n)c1 (n) z1( m1 ) (n) for slot 5,where 0  n  30 . The indices m 0
derived from the physical-layer BS-identification group
The two sequences
s0( m0 ) (n)
and
s1( m1 ) (n)
,
and m1 are
(1)
N ID
.
are defined as two different cyclic shifts of the
(m )
~
~
(m )
~
m-sequence s (n) according to s0 (n)  s (n  m0 ) mod 31 and s1 (n)  s (n  m1 ) mod 31 ,
0
1
~
where s (i)  1  2x(i) , 0  i  30 .The two scrambling sequences c0 (n) and c1 (n) depend on
the advanced primary synchronization signal and are defined by two different cyclic shifts of the
( 2)
~
~
m-sequence c (n) according to c0 (n)  c ((n  N ID ) mod 31) and
( 2)
( 2)
 0,1,2
c1 (n)  c~((n  N ID
 3) mod 31) , where N ID
is the physical-layer identification within
the physical-layer BS identification group
(1)
N ID
~
and c (i)  1  2x(i) , 0  i  30 . x(i ) is defined
by x(i  5)  x(i  3)  x(i )mod 2, 0  i  25
with initial conditions x(0)  0, x(1)  0, x(2)  0, x(3)  0, x(4)  1 .
(m )
( m0 )
z 1 ( n)
The scrambling sequences z1 (n) and 1
are defined by a cyclic shift of the
(m )
~
~
m-sequence z (n) according to z1 (n)  z (( n  (m0 mod 8)) mod 31) and
0
z1(m1 ) (n)  ~
z (( n  (m1 mod 8)) mod 31)
.
3.4.2.4.2.2 Mapping to resource elements
In a half-frame, the same antenna port as for the advanced primary synchronization signal shall
be used for the advanced secondary synchronization signal. The sequence d n  shall be
mapped to resource elements according to:
k ,l  d (n), n  0,...,61; k  n  31 
DL
N RU
N scRU
DL
, l  N symb
1
2
A-GN4.00-03-TS
119
3.4.3 Pilot for DL OFDM
Pilot is used mainly for channel estimation. Pilot symbol is identical to the training symbol in the
same subcarrier in a PRU. Pilot symbol should be boosted by 2.5 dB (=4/3) compared with data
symbol. And further boosting power(over 2.5dB) is optional in case that MCS is lower as BPSK
and QPSK.
3.4.3.1 Pilot for DL CCCH
Pilot symbol uses the same training index for CCH. As described in Section 3.4.8.1.1, Pilot
symbols (S3- S19) in the same subcarrier (F7 and F19) copy training symbol S2. Pilot symbols
(S5, S9, S13 and S17) in the same subcarrier (F3, F11, F15 and F23) copy training symbol S2.
3.4.3.2 Pilot for DL ICH
ICH is composed of ANCH, EXCH and CSCH. Pilot symbol uses the same training index for ICH.
Pilot symbols (S5, S9 S13 and S17) in the same subcarrier (F3, F7, F11, F15, F19 and F23) copy
training symbol S1.
3.4.3.3 Optional Pilots for DL OFDM
Three types of optional downlink pilots are defined:BS-specific pilots, MS-specific pilots and
Positioning pilots
There is one pilot transmitted per downlink antenna port.
3.4.3.3.1 BS-specific pilots
BS-specific pilots shall be transmitted in all downlink slots in a BS supporting ADEDCH
transmission.BS-specific pilots are transmitted on one or several of antenna ports 0 to 3.
3.4.3.3.1.1 Sequence generation
The reference-signal sequence rl ,ns (m) is defined by
rl ,ns (m) 
1
2
1  2  c(2m)  j
1
2
1  2  c(2m  1),
max,DL
m  0,1,...,2 N RU
1
where ns is the half slot number within a radio frame and l is the OFDM symbol number
within the half slot. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialised with
BS
BS
cinit  210   7   ns  1  l  1   2  N ID
 1  2  N ID
 NGI at the start of each OFDM symbol
where NGI  1 .
A-GN4.00-03-TS
120
3.4.3.3.1.2 Mapping to resource elements
The pilot sequence rl ,ns (m) shall be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols ak( ,pl)
used as reference symbols for antenna port p in half slot ns according to ak( ,pl)  rl ,ns (m' ) ,
where
k  6m  v  vshift  mod 6 ,
max,DL
DL
m  m  N RU
 N RU
DL
m  0,1,...,2  N RU
1 ,
and
DL
0, N symb
 3 if p  0,1 .
l
if p  2,3
1
The variables v and vshift define the position in the frequency domain for the different pilots
where v is given by v  0 if p  0 and l  0 and if p  1 and l  0 , v  3
if p  0 and l  0 and if p  1 and l  0 , v  3(ns mod 2) if p  2 , v  3  3(ns mod 2)
BS
if p  3 .The BS-specific frequency shift is given by vshift  NID
mod 6 .
Resource units k, l  used for pilot transmission on any of the antenna ports in a half slot shall
not be used for any transmission on any other antenna port in the same half slot and set to zero.
3.4.3.3.2 MS-specific pilots
MS-specific pilots are supported for single-antenna-port transmission of ADEDCH and are
transmitted on antenna port 5, 7, or 8. MS-specific pilots are also supported for spatial
multiplexing on antenna ports 7 and 8. MS specific pilots are present and are a valid reference for
ADEDCH demodulation only if the ADEDCH transmission is associated with the corresponding
antenna port. MS-specific pilots are transmitted only on the resource units upon which the
corresponding ADEDCH is mapped. The MS-specific pilot is not transmitted in resource elements
k, l  in which one of the physical channels or physical signals other than MS-specific pilot
defined in 6.1 are transmitted using resource elements with the same index pair k, l 
regardless of their antenna port p .
3.4.3.3.2.1 Sequence generation
For antenna port 5, the MS-specific reference-signal sequence rns (m) is defined by
rns (m) 
where
ADEDCH
N RU
transmission.
2
1  2  c(2m)  j
1
2
1  2  c(2m  1),
ADEDCH
m  0,1,...,12 N RU
1
denotes the bandwidth in resource units of the corresponding ADEDCH
The
Cinit  ns / 2  1
1

pseudo-random
BS
2 N ID

 1  2  nMSID
16
sequence generator
at the start of each slot.
shall
be
initialised
A-GN4.00-03-TS
with
121
For antenna ports 7 and 8, the reference-signal sequence r (m) is defined by
r ( m) 
The
1
2
1  2  c(2m)  j
pseudo-random
1
2
1  2  c(2m  1),
sequence
generator
max,DL
m  0,1,...,12 N RU
1 .
shall
be
initialised
with
BS
cinit   ns / 2  1   2 NID
 1  216  nSCID at the start of each slot, where nSCID is
0 or 1
according to the most recent ADECI format 2B associated with the ADEDCH transmission. If
there is no ADECI format 2B associated with the ADEDCH transmission, the MS shall assume
that nSCID is zero.
3.4.3.3.2.2 Mapping to resource elements
For antenna port 5, in a physical resource unit with frequency-domain index nPRU assigned for
the corresponding ADEDCH transmission, the pilot sequence
complex-valued
modulation
ADEDCH
ak( ,pl )  rns (3  l   N RU
 m' )
symbols
,where
if l  2,3
 4m'vshift
k  
4m' (2  vshift ) mod 4 if l  5,6,
with
p5
in
rns (m)
a
shall be mapped to
slot
k  (k ) mod NscRU  NscRU  nPRU
according
,
to
,
 0,1 if ns mod 2  0
l  
2,3 if ns mod 2  1 and l  3,6,2,5 for l '  0,1,2,3
ADEDCH
 1 is the counter of MS-specific pilot resource elements within
respectively. m'  0,1,...,3N RU
a respective OFDM symbol of the ADEDCH transmission.The BS-specific frequency shift is given
by vshift  NIDBS mod 3 . The mapping shall be in increasing order of the frequency-domain index
nPRU
of the physical resource units assigned for the corresponding ADEDCH transmission. The
ADEDCH
quantity N RU
denotes the bandwidth in resource units of the corresponding ADEDCH
transmission.
The notation R p is used to denote a resource unit used for pilot transmission on antenna port
p .For antenna ports 7 and 8, in a physical resource unit with frequency-domain index nPRU
assigned for the corresponding ADEDCH transmission, a part of the pilot sequence r (m) shall
A-GN4.00-03-TS
122
be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols ak( ,pl) with p {7,8} .
3.4.3.3.3 Positioning pilots
Positioning pilots shall only be transmitted in resource units in downlink slots configured for
positioning pilot transmission. In a slot configured for positioning pilot transmission, the starting
positions of the OFDM symbols configured for positioning pilot transmission shall be identical to
those in a slot in which all OFDM symbols have the same guard interval length as the OFDM
symbols configured for positioning pilot transmission.
Positioning pilots are transmitted on antenna port 6.
The positioning pilots shall not be mapped to resource elements k, l  allocated to ABCCH,
APSS or ASSS regardless of their antenna port p .
3.4.3.3.3.1 Sequence generation
The reference-signal sequence rl , ns (m) is defined by
rl ,ns (m) 
1
2
1  2  c(2m)  j
1
2
1  2  c(2m  1),
max,DL
m  0,1,...,2 N RU
1
where ns is the half slot number within a radio frame, l is the OFDM symbol number within
the half slot. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialised with
BS
BS
cinit  210   7   ns  1  l  1   2  NID
 1  2  NID
 NGI at the start of each OFDM symbol where
N GI  1 .
3.4.3.3.3.2 Mapping to resource elements
The pilot sequence rl ,ns (m) shall be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols ak( ,pl)
used as pilot for antenna port p  6 in half slot ns according to ak( ,pl)  rl , ns (m' ) , where
DL
PRS
  6  l  vshift mod 6 , m  0,1,,2  N RUPRS  1 ,
k  6m  N RU
 N RU
A-GN4.00-03-TS
123
3,5,6
if ns mod 2  0
2,3,5,6

if ns mod 2  1 and 4 ABCCH antenna ports
max,DL
PRS
m  m  N RU
 N RU
and l  1,2,3,5,6 if ns mod 2  1 and 1 or 2 ABCCH antenna ports .
PRS
The bandwidth for positioning pilots and N RU
is configured by higher layers and the
ID
mod 6 .
BS-specific frequency shift is given by vshift  NBS
3.4.3.3.3.3 Positioning pilot slot configuration
The PRS configuration index
I PRS
is configured by higher layers. The BS specific slot
configuration period TPRS and the BS specific slot offset  PRS for the transmission of
positioning pilots is determined by
I PRS . If
I PRS is from 1 to 159, TPRS is 160 and  PRS  I PRS .
If I PRS is from 160 to 479, TPRS is 320 and  PRS  I PRS  160 . If I PRS is from 480 to 1119,
TPRS is 640 and  PRS  I PRS  480 . If I PRS is from 1120 to 2399, TPRS is 1280 and
 PRS  I PRS  1120 . Positioning pilots are transmitted only in configured DL slots. Positioning
pilots shall not be transmitted in special slots. Positioning pilots shall be transmitted in N PRS
consecutive downlink slots, where N PRS is configured by higher layers.
The positioning pilot instances, for the first slot of the N PRS downlink slots, shall satisfy
10  nf  ns / 2  PRS  modTPRS  0 .
3.4.4 Training and Pilot Boosting
Boosting of training and pilot symbol should be defined to improve accuracy of channel estimation
as with protocol version 1. Transmission power should be always constant even if MIMO is
applied. Training and pilot boosting should change the boosting value of each layer because
"Total power of total antenna in one PRU" is the same as "Total power of single antenna in one
PRU". The power of the training and pilot symbol should equate in any case including MIMO in
consideration of the carrier sense. These boosting values defined in this section should be
default.
3.4.4.1 1 Layer Format SISO/SDMA
Figure 3.58 shows training and pilot boosting for 1 layer format. In this case, training and pilot
symbols are 2.5dB higher than data symbols as default.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
124
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Antenna1
Data Symbol
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
2.5dB Up
S1
f
2.5dB Up
S5
f
Tx Power
2.5dB Up
Total Power
Time
Figure 3.58 Training and Pilot boosting for 1 Layer format
3.4.4.2 2 Layer MIMO Format except for SDMA
Figure 3.59 shows training and pilot boosting for 2 layer format. In this case, training and pilot
symbols are 5.5dB higher than data symbols because data symbols are multiplexed, but training
and pilot are skipped with regular intervals.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
125
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Antenna1
Antenna2
Data Symbol
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
5.5dB Up
S1
f
5.5dB Up
S5
f
Tx Power
2.5dB Up
5.5dB Up
Total Power is same as SISO
Time
Figure 3.59 Training and Pilot boosting for 2 Layer format
A-GN4.00-03-TS
126
3.4.4.3 4 Layer MIMO Format except for SDMA
Figure 3.60 shows training and pilot boosting for 4 layer format. In this case, training and pilot
symbols are 8.5dB higher than data symbols because data symbols are multiplexed, but training
and pilot are skipped with regular intervals.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Antenna1
Antenna2
Data Symbol
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Antenna3
Antenna4
8.5dB Up
S1
f
8.5dB Up
S5
f
Tx Power
2.5dB Up
8.5dB Up
Total Power is same as SISO
Time
Figure 3.60 Training and Pilot boosting for 4 Layer format
A-GN4.00-03-TS
127
3.4.4.4 Summary for Training and Pilot Boosting
The amount of training and pilot boosting depends on the MIMO type. Table 3.13 summarizes the
relation between MIMO type and training and pilot boosting.
Table 3.13 Summary for Training and Pilot Boosting (Default)
SISO/SDMA
STBC
SM/EMB
1 Layer Format
2.5dB
-
2 Layer Format 4 Layer Format
5.5dB
5.5dB
8.5dB
3.4.4.5 Optional Downlink Pilot boosting
The BS determines the downlink transmit energy per resource element.
A MS may assume downlink BS-specific RS EPRP is constant across the downlink system
bandwidth and constant across all slots until different BS-specific RS power information is
received. The downlink reference-signal transmit power is defined as the linear average over the
power contributions (in [W]) of all resource elements that carry BS-specific pilots within the
operating system bandwidth.
The ratio of ADEDCH EPRP to BS-specific RS EPRP among ADEDCH REs for each OFDM
symbol is denoted by either  A or  B according to the OFDM symbol index.  A and  B are
MS-specific. If the number of antenna ports is 1 or 2,  A is from {1,2,3,5,6} and  B is 0 or 4. If
the number of antenna ports is 4,  A is from {2,3,5,6} and  B is from {0,1,4}.
3.4.5 Signal for DL OFDM
Figure 3.61 describes the channel coding block diagram for DL signal symbol.
Signal Data(bit)
Encoding
Small
Scrambling
ng
ng
Coded Signal Data(symbol)
Modulation
Figure 3.61 Signal Block Diagram
3.4.5.1 Encoding and Small Scrambling
Error correction code method is defined as hamming coding.
Hamming codes can detect and correct 1-bit errors, and can detect (but not correct) 2-bit errors.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
128
Hamming codes can work at high speed, because it can be calculated simply. Small scrambling
is applied for PAPR reduction.
Signal Data
Hamming(8,4)
Small Scrambling
Figure 3.62 Process for Applying Hamming Code and Scrambling for Symbols
3.4.5.1.1 (8,4)-Hamming Coding
Actual data (4 bits)
X1
X2
X3
X4
Coded data (8 bits)
X 1
X2
X3
X4
C1 C2 C3 C4 
Generation polynomial
C1  X 1  X 2  X 3
C 2  X1  X 2  X 4
C 3  X1  X 3  X 4
C4  X 2  X3  X 4
INPUT
Hamming Encoder
OUTPUT
Figure 3.63 Generation Polynomial
3.4.5.1.2 Small Scrambling Pattern
The generation polynomial is defined as follows;
X^5 + X^2 + 1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
129
Figure 3.64 shows the structure of small scrambling.
Data in
SR5
SR4
SR3
SR2
Data out
SR1
Figure 3.64 Small Scrambling for Hamming Code
Initial values of shift register SR5-SR1 are set to the lower 5 bits of SCH number(*1). The shift
register of scrambler is initialized for each Hamming code.
(*1)SCH number : Refer to Section 2.4.3.2.
3.4.5.2 Modulation for Signal
The serial signal input after interleaving is converted to IQ Data symbol on each symbol. The
modulation for signal is used as BPSK except for EMB-MIMO. In case of EMB-MIMO, QPSK
modulation is carried out for signal. Refer to Appendix B.1.1 for BPSK and B.1.3 for QPSK.
3.4.5.3 Signal for Optional DL Physical Channel
3.4.5.3.1 Advanced Physical Broadcast Channel
3.4.5.3.1.1 Scrambling
The block of bits b(0),...,b(M bit  1) shall be scrambled with a BS-specific sequence prior to
~
~
modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits
b (0),...,b (M bit  1) according to
~
b (i)  b(i)  c(i) mod 2 . M bit equals 1920,The scrambling sequence shall be initialised with
BS
cinit  NID
in each radio frame fulfilling nf mod 4  0 .
3.4.5.3.1.2 Modulation
~
~
The block of scrambled bits b (0),...,b (M bit  1) shall be modulated, resulting in a block of
complex-valued modulation symbols d (0),...,d (M symb  1) . B.10.2 QPSK is used for the physical
broadcast channel.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
130
3.4.5.3.1.3 Layer mapping and precoding
The block of modulation symbols d (0),...,d (M symb  1) shall be mapped to layers with


T
( 0)
M symb
 M symb and precoded, resulting in a block of vectors y(i)  y (0) (i) ... y ( P 1) (i) ,
i  0,...,M symb  1 ,
where y ( p) (i) represents the signal for antenna port p and where
p  0,...,P  1 and the number of antenna ports for
BS-specific pilots P  1,2,4 .
3.4.5.3.2 Advanced Downlink ECCH Indicator Channel
The ADEFICH shall be transmitted when the number of OFDM symbols for ADECCH is greater
than zero. 1 or 2 OFDM symbols are used for ADECCH in slot 1 and 6,. 1,2 or 3 OFDM symbols
are used for ADECCH in slots (except slot 6) configured with Positioning pilots,
3.4.5.3.2.1 Scrambling
The block of bits b(0),...,b(31) transmitted in one slot shall be scrambled with a BS-specific
~
~
sequence prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits b (0),...,b (31) according to
~
b (i)  b(i)  c(i) mod 2 . The scrambling sequence generator shall be initialised with
BS
BS
at the start of each slot.
cinit   ns 2  1   2 NID
 1  29  NID
3.4.5.3.2.2 Modulation
~
~
The block of scrambled bits b (0),...,b (31) shall be modulated, resulting in a block of
complex-valued modulation symbols d (0),...,d (15) . QPSK is used for the ADEFICH.
3.4.5.3.2.3 Layer mapping and precoding
( 0)
 16 and
The block of modulation symbols d (0),...,d (15) shall be mapped to layers with M symb


T
precoded, resulting in a block of vectors y(i)  y (0) (i) ... y ( P1) (i) , i  0,...,15 , where y ( p) (i)
represents the signal for antenna port p and where p  0,...,P 1 and the number of antenna
A-GN4.00-03-TS
131
ports for BS-specific pilots P  1,2,4 . The ADEFICH shall be transmitted on the same set of
antenna ports as the ABCCH.
3.4.5.3.3 Advanced Downlink ECCH
3.4.5.3.3.1 ADECCH formats
An ADECCH is transmitted on an aggregation of one or several consecutive RP(Resource Point)
groups. The number of resource-point groups not assigned to ADEFICH or ADHICH is N RPG .
The cluster of RP groups available in the system are numbered from 0 and NC RPG  1 , where
NC RPG  N RPG / 9 . An ADECCH consisting of n consecutive RPGs may only start on a RPG
fulfilling i mod n  0 , where i is the RPG number. Multiple ADECCHs can be transmitted in a slot.
N C  RPG
is 1,3,4,8, N RPG is 9,18,36,72 and Number of ADECCH bits is 72,144,288,576 for
ADECCH format 0,1,2,3 respectively.
3.4.5.3.3.2 ADECCH multiplexing and scrambling
(i)
b (i ) (0),...,b (i ) (M bit
 1)
The block of bits
slot, where
shall
(i)
M bit
on each of the control channels to be transmitted in a
is the number of bits in one slot to be transmitted on ADECCH number i ,
be
multiplexed,
resulting
in
a
block
(nADECCH -1)
(0)
(1)
b(0) (0),..., b(0) ( M bit
1), b(1) (0),..., b(1) ( M bit
1),..., b( nADECCH 1) (0),..., b( nADECCH 1) ( M bit
1)
is
the
number
of
ADECCHs
transmitted
in
the
slot.
The
of
bits
,where
nADECCH
block
of
(nADECCH -1)
(0)
(1)
b(0) (0),..., b(0) ( M bit
1), b(1) (0),..., b(1) ( M bit
1),..., b( nADECCH 1) (0),..., b( nADECCH 1) ( M bit
1)
bits
shall be
scrambled with a BS-specific sequence prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits
~
~
b (0),...,b (M tot  1)
according to b (i)  b(i)  c(i)mod 2 .
~
A-GN4.00-03-TS
132
9
BS
The scrambling sequence generator shall be initialised with cinit  ns 2 2  NID at the start of
each slot.Cluster of RP group number n corresponds to bits b(72n), b(72n  1),...,b(72n  71) . If
necessary, <NIL> units shall be inserted in the block of bits prior to scrambling to ensure that the
ADECCHs starts at the CCE positions to ensure that the length of the scrambled block of bits
matches the amount of resource-point groups not assigned to ADEFICH or ADHICH.
3.4.5.3.3.3 Modulation
~
~
The block of scrambled bits b (0),...,b (M tot  1) shall be modulated, resulting in a block of
complex-valued modulation symbols d (0),...,d (M symb  1) . QPSK is used for the ADECCH.
3.4.5.3.3.4 Layer mapping and precoding
The block of modulation symbols d (0),...,d (M symb  1) shall be mapped to layers

with

T
( 0)
M symb
 M symb and precoded, resulting in a block of vectors y(i)  y (0) (i) ... y ( P 1) (i) ,
i  0,...,M symb  1
to be mapped onto resources on the antenna ports used for transmission,
where y ( p) (i) represents the signal for antenna port p . The ADECCH shall be transmitted on
the same set of antenna ports as the ABCCH.
3.4.5.3.4 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel
Multiple ADHICHs mapped to the same set of resource elements constitute a ADHICH group,
where ADHICHs within the same ADHICH group are separated through different orthogonal
sequences. An ADHICH resource is identified by the index pair
n
group
ADHICH
seq
, nADHICH
 , where
group
seq
nADHICH
is the ADHICH group number and nADHICH
is the orthogonal sequence index within
group
the group. The index nADHICH
in a downlink slot with non-zero ADHICH resources ranges from
0 to
group
q  N ADHICH
 1 .The number of ADHICH groups may vary between downlink slots and is
group
group
given by q  N ADHICH
, where q is given by Table 3.14 and N ADHICH
by the expression
A-GN4.00-03-TS
133
above.
Table 3.14
value of factor q
Uplink-downlink
Configuration
Slot Number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0
2 1 -
-
-
1
0 1 -
-
1 0 1 -
- 1
2
0 0 -
1 0 0 0 -
1 0
3
1 1 -
-
- 1
-
2 1 -
1 1 -
-
-
3.4.5.3.4.1 Modulation
The block of bits b(0),...,b(M bit  1) transmitted on one ADHICH in one slot shall be modulated,
resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols z(0),...,z(M s  1) , where M s  M bit .
BPSK is used for the advanced downlink hybrid ARQ indicator channel.
The block of modulation symbols z(0),...,z(M s  1) shall be symbol-wise multiplied with an
orthogonal sequence and scrambled, resulting in a sequence of modulation symbols
d (0),...,d (M symb  1)
according to d (i)  w  i mod NSFADHICH   1  2c(i)   z  i NSFADHICH   , where
i  0,..., M symb  1 ,
ADHICH
ADHICH
 4 and
M symb  N SF
.M s , N SF
c(i )
is a BS-specific
scrambling sequence generated. The scrambling sequence generator shall be initialised with
BS
BS
cinit   ns 2  1   2 NID
 1  29  NID
at the start of each slot.
The sequence  w(0)
ADHICH
w( NSF
 1)  is given by Table 3.15 where the sequence
seq
index nADHICH
corresponds to the ADHICH number within the ADHICH group.
Table 3.15 Orthogonal Sequences [ w(i )] for ADHICH.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
134
Sequence Index
seq
ADHICH
Orthogonal Sequences
ADHICH
NSF
4
n
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
 1
 1
 1
 1
 j
 j
 j
 j
 1  1  1
 1  1  1
 1  1  1
 1  1  1
 j  j  j
 j  j  j
 j  j  j
 j  j  j
3.4.5.3.4.2 Resource group alignment, layer mapping and precoding
The block of symbols d (0),...,d (M symb  1) should be first aligned with resource point group size,
resulting in a block of symbols d (0) (0),...,d (0) (c  M symb  1) , where c  1 , d (0) (i)  d (i) , for
i  0,...,M symb  1 .The
block of symbols
d (0) (0),...,d (0) (c  M symb  1) shall be mapped to layers
and precoded, resulting in a block of vectors y(i)  y (0) (i) ... y ( P1) (i) , i  0,...,c  M symb  1 ,
T
where y ( p) (i) represents the signal for antenna port p , p  0,...,P 1 and the number of
antenna ports for BS-specific pilots P  1,2,4 . The layer mapping and precoding operation
depends on the number of antenna ports used for transmission of the ADHICH. The ADHICH
shall be transmitted on the same set of antenna ports as the ABCCH.
3.4.6 Null (DTX/DC Carrier/Guard carrier) for DL OFDM
Null symbol is defined as 0 + 0j. It includes Discontinuous Transmission (DTX), DC carrier and
Guard carrier. The details of DTX are described in Section 3.4.1.7.
3.4.7 TCCH Format for DL OFDM
TCCH format is not used for DL.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
135
3.4.8 PRU Structure for DL OFDM
The PRU structure for DL OFDM defined in this chapter is shown in Table 3.16.
Table 3.16 PRU Structure for DL OFDM
Channel Name
CCH
CCCH
Common Control Channel
ANCH
Anchor Channel
ICH
EXCH
CSCH
Extra Channel
Circuit Switching Channel
Format
Type
Layer
-
1
format 1
1
format 2
1
format 3
2
format 4
4
format 1
1
format 2
2
format 4
4
format 3
2
format 5
4
-
1
3.4.8.1 CCH for DL OFDM
3.4.8.1.1 OFDM PRU Structure for CCCH
The PRU diagram shown in Figure 3.65 is the diagram about CCCH for DL. As shown in the
figure and Table 3.17, CCCH is composed of data symbols, pilot symbols, training symbols and
null symbols (DC carrier, guard carrier).
A-GN4.00-03-TS
136
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Pilot Symbol
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Training Symbol
Figure 3.65 OFDM PRU Structure for CCCH
Table 3.17 Composition of CCCH
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
324
Training Symbol
44
Pilot Symbol
50
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
3.4.8.1.2 ICH for DL OFDM
3.4.8.1.2.1 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH
38
The PRU diagrams shown in Figure 3.66, Figure 3.67, Figure 3.68, and Figure 3.69 are the
diagrams about ANCH for DL. As shown in these figures, there are four kinds of ANCH formats.
ANCH format (1) and (2) are used in case of 1 layer, ANCH format (3) and (4) are used in case of
2 and 4 layers for STBC-MIMO.
When one antenna transmits pilot and training symbols, the other antenna(s) transmits not pilot
and training symbols but null symbols. The data and signal symbols are transmitted from each
antenna.
format (1)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
137
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
DC Carrier
Data Symbol
Pilot Symbol
Training Symbol
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Figure 3.66 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH format (1)
Table 3.18 Composition of ANCH format (1)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
372
Training Symbol
22
Pilot Symbol
24
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
138
format (2)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Pilot Symbol
Training Symbol
Data Symbol
Signal Symbol
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Figure 3.67 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH format (2)
Table 3.19 Composition of ANCH format (2)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
364
Signal Symbol
8
Training Symbol
22
Pilot Symbol
24
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
139
format (3)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Signal Symbol
Training Symbol (Antenna1)
DC Carrier, Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Training Symbol (Antenna2)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)
Figure 3.68 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH format (3)
Table 3.20 Composition of ANCH format (3)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
340
Signal Symbol
8
Training Symbol(Antenna1)
12
Training Symbol(Antenna2)
10
Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)
24
Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)
24
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
140
format (4)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Signal Symbol
DC Carrier, Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Training Symbol (Antenna1)
Training Symbol (Antenna2)
Training Symbol (Antenna3)
Training Symbol (Antenna4)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna3)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna4)
Figure 3.69 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH format (4)
Table 3.21 Composition of ANCH format (4)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
340
Signal Symbol
8
Training Symbol(Antenna1)
6
Training Symbol(Antenna2)
6
Training Symbol(Antenna3)
6
Training Symbol(Antenna4)
4
Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)
12
Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)
12
Pilot Symbol(Antenna3)
12
Pilot Symbol(Antenna4)
12
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
141
3.4.8.1.3 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH
The PRU diagrams shown in Figure 3.70, Figure 3.71, Figure 3.73, Figure 3.74 and Figure 3.72
are the diagrams about EXCH for DL. As shown in these figures, there are five kinds of EXCH
formats. EXCH format (a-1), (a-2), (a-3), (a-4) and (a-5) have always DC carrier and guard carrier.
These formats are the cases that full subcarrier mode is not used.
The PRU diagrams shown in Figure 3.75, Figure 3.76 and Figure 3.77 are the diagrams about
EXCH for DL. As shown in these figures, there are three kinds of EXCH formats. EXCH formats
(b), (c) and (d) are the case that full subcarrier mode is used. EXCH format (b) is used for all
SCHs except central SCH to which EXCH format (c) or (d) is applied.
EXCH Format (a-1) is used in case of 1 layer. EXCH Format (a-2) and (a-4) are used in case of 2
and 4 layers for SM and STBC-MIMO. EXCH Format (a-3) and (a-5) are used in case of 2 and 4
layers for EMB and STBC-MIMO.
There are two and four kinds of arrangement for pilot and training symbols. When one antenna
transmits pilot and training symbols, the other antenna(s) transmits not pilot and training symbols
but null symbols. The data and signal symbols are transmitted from each antenna.
As for training symbol for EXCH format (b), (c), (d), refer to 3.4.2.3.2.3.
EXCH data size depends on EXCH format and MCS which is indicated by ANCH/ECCH.
Moreover, each EXCH data size shall be equal to the number of bits which can be
accommodated in one or two PRU.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
142
format (a-1)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Pilot Symbol
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Training Symbol
Figure 3.70 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (a-1)
Table 3.22 Composition of EXCH format (a-1)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
372
Training Symbol
22
Pilot Symbol
24
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
143
format (a-2)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Training Symbol (Antenna1)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)
Training Symbol (Antenna2)
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)
Figure 3.71 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (a-2)
Table 3.23 Composition of EXCH format (a-2)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
348
Training Symbol(Antenna1)
12
Training Symbol(Antenna2)
10
Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)
24
Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)
24
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
144
format (a-3)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
DC Carrier, Guard Carrier, Guard Time
Signal Symbol
Training Symbol (Antenna1)
Training Symbol (Antenna2)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)
Figure 3.72 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (a-3)
Table 3.24 Composition of EXCH format (a-3)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
340
Signal Symbol
8
Training Symbol(Antenna1)
12
Training Symbol(Antenna2)
10
Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)
24
Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)
24
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
145
format (a-4)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
DC Carrier, Guard Carrier, Guard Time
Data Symbol
Training Symbol
(Antenna1)
Training Symbol
(Antenna4)
Training Symbol
(Antenna2)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna3)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna4)
Training Symbol
(Antenna3)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)
Figure 3.73 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (a-4)
Table 3.25 Composition of EXCH format (a-4)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
348
Training Symbol(Antenna1)
6
Training Symbol(Antenna2)
6
Training Symbol(Antenna3)
6
Training Symbol(Antenna4)
4
Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)
12
Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)
12
Pilot Symbol(Antenna3)
12
Pilot Symbol(Antenna4)
12
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
146
format (a-5)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
DC Carrier, Guard Carrier, Guard Time
Data Symbol
Signal Symbol
Training Symbol
Training Symbol
Training Symbol
(Antenna1)
(Antenna2)
(Antenna3)
Training Symbol
Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)
(Antenna4)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna3)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna4)
Figure 3.74 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (a-5)
Table 3.26 Composition of EXCH format (a-5)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
340
Signal Symbol
8
Training Symbol(Antenna1)
6
Training Symbol(Antenna2)
6
Training Symbol(Antenna3)
6
Training Symbol(Antenna4)
4
Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)
12
Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)
12
Pilot Symbol(Antenna3)
12
Pilot Symbol(Antenna4)
12
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
147
As shown in Figure 3.75, the training symbol of F1 is a copy of F12. The training symbol of F13 is
a copy of F24.
format (b)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Copy
Copy
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Pilot Symbol
Guard Time
Training Symbol
Figure 3.75 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (b)
Table 3.27 Composition of EXCH format (b)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
408
Training Symbol
24
Pilot Symbol
24
Null Symbol
0
A-GN4.00-03-TS
148
As shown in Figure 3.76, the training symbol of F1 is a copy of F12.
format (c)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Copy
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Pilot Symbol
Training Symbol
DC Carrier
Guard Time
Figure 3.76 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (c)
Table 3.28 Composition of EXCH format (c)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
390
Training Symbol
23
Pilot Symbol
24
Null Symbol (DC Carrier)
19
A-GN4.00-03-TS
149
As shown in Figure 3.77, the training symbol of F13 is a copy of F24.
format (d)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Copy
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Pilot Symbol
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Training Symbol
Figure 3.77 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (d)
Table 3.29 Composition of EXCH format (d)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
390
Training Symbol
23
Pilot Symbol
24
Null symbol (Guard Carrier)
19
A-GN4.00-03-TS
150
3.4.8.1.4 OFDM PRU Structure for CSCH
The PRU diagram shown in Figure 3.78 is the diagram about CSCH for DL. As shown in the
figure and Table 3.30, CSCH is composed of data symbols, signal symbols, pilot symbols,
training symbols and null symbols (DC carrier, Guard carrier).
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Pilot Symbol
Training Symbol
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Signal Symbol
Figure 3.78 OFDM PRU Structure for CSCH
Table 3.30 Composition of CSCH
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
364
Signal Symbol
8
Training Symbol
22
Pilot Symbol
24
Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
151
3.5 UL OFDM PHY Layer
Figure 3.79 describes a transmitter block diagram for OFDM transmission method.
TCCH
Modulation
Null
Signal
Encoding
Scrambling
Encoding
Data
CRC
Attachment
Bitinterleaving
Modulation
P/S converter
Modulation
S/P
Conv
(OFDM
/ TDM)
IFFT
Sel
Training
Guard interval insertion
Modulation
User A
AAS / MIMO Precoding (*1)
Pilot
Modulation
S(t)
Scrambling
Channel Coding
(*1) : Option
Figure 3.79 Transmitter Block Diagram
3.5.1 Channel Coding for PHY Frame
Refer to Section 3.4.1.
3.5.1.1 CRC
Refer to Section 3.4.1.1.
3.5.1.2 Scrambling
Refer to Section 3.4.1.2.
3.5.1.3 Encoding
Refer to Section 3.4.1.3.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
152
3.5.1.4 Bit-interleaving
Refer to Section 3.4.1.4.
3.5.1.5 Modulation Method
Refer to Section 3.4.1.5.
a) BPSK
Refer to Appendix B.1.
b) QPSK
Refer to Appendix B.3.
c) 16QAM
Refer to Appendix B.6.
d) 64QAM
Refer to Appendix B.7.
e) 256QAM
Refer to Appendix B.8.
3.5.1.6 Precoding Method
Refer to Section 3.4.1.6
3.5.1.6.1 MS Transmission Antenna Switching
This function is applied to the MIMO method for which CSI is necessary in the transmitting side.
For example, MS has one RF transmitter and plural RF receivers as shown in Figure 3.80.
Transmission antenna switching can be used in such a case to achieve multiple streams for one
MS. Antenna switching timing, i.e. switching every slot or every frame, is negotiated in negotiation
phase.
BS
Ant #1
MS
RF
Ant #1
Ant #2
SW
Rx-RF
SW
Tx-RF
SW
Rx-RF
RF
Ant #3
RF
Ant #4
Ant #2
RF
Figure 3.80 Multiple streams for MS with one Tx-RF and plural Rx-RF
A-GN4.00-03-TS
153
3.5.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU
Refer to Section 3.4.1.7.
3.5.1.8 Summary of OFDM UL Channel Coding
Refer to Section 3.4.1.8.
3.5.1.9 Training for UL OFDM
Refer to Section 3.4.2.
3.5.1.10 UL Training Sequence for MS transmission frame antenna switching
When the number of MS transmitter is one and the number of MS transmission antenna is two or
more and MS supports antenna switching, UL core-sequence number for MS transmission frame
antenna switching is calculated as follows:
UL Core-sequence Number : x = [(A+{Fk -1 MOD 4}) MOD 12] + 1
Fk = active frame number (Fk=1,2,…)
Fk is incremented every frame. Fk shall be initialized each scheduling term.
The parameter except for UL core-sequence number is same as Section 3.4.2.3.2.2.
3.5.1.11 UL Training Sequence for MS transmission slot antenna switching
When the number of MS transmitter is one and the number of MS transmission antenna is two or
more and MS supports antenna switching, UL core-sequence number for MS transmission slot
antenna switching is calculated as follows:
UL Core-sequence Number : x = [(A+{Sk -1 MOD 4}) MOD 12] + 1
Sk = absolute slot number (Sk=1,2,3,4)
The parameter except for UL core-sequence number is same as Section 3.4.2.3.2.2.
3.5.2 Pilot for UL OFDM
Refer to Section 3.4.3.
3.5.3 Signal for UL OFDM
Refer to Section 3.4.5.
3.5.4 Null (DTX/DC Carrier/Guard Carrier) for UL OFDM
Refer to Section 3.4.6.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
154
3.5.5 TCCH Format for UL OFDM
3.5.5.1 TCCH Format
TCCH is mainly used to request connection of individual channel from MS to BS, and to correct
transmission timing and transmission power according to measurement result at the channel
concerned. As shown in Figure 3.81, 3/8 of TCCH original data (the third OFDM data) is copied
ahead of the first OFDM data. The phase of this format must be consecutive. As described in
Section 3.5.6.1.2, TCCH symbols ({S3, S4, S5}, {S7, S8, S9}, {S11, S12, S13} and {S15, 16,
S17}) are used for TCCH. TCCH original data (the third OFDM data) is decided by the TCCH
core-sequence number as described in Section 3.5.5.2.
90 us
10 us
80 us
The First OFDM Data The Second OFDM Data TheThird OFDM Data
TCCH
original data
Copy
Figure 3.81 TCCH Format for OFDM
3.5.5.2 TCCH Sequence and TCCH Sub-slot
TCCH core-sequence number is described in Appendix D.1. TCCH sub-slots number is described
in Section 3.5.6.1.2. The application patterns of TCCH core-sequence number and TCCH
sub-slot number are described in Chapter 5.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
155
3.5.6 PRU Structure for UL OFDM
The PRU structure for UL OFDM defined in this chapter is shown in Table 3.16.
Table 3.31 PRU Structure for UL OFDM
Channel Name
CCH
Format
Type
Layer
CCCH
Common Control Channel
-
1
TCCH
Timing Correct Channel
-
-
format 1
1
format 2
1
format 3
2
format 4
4
format 1
1
format 2
2
format 4
4
-
1
ANCH
Anchor Channel
ICH
EXCH
CSCH
Extra Channel
Circuit Switching Channel
3.5.6.1 CCH for UL OFDM
3.5.6.1.1 OFDM PRU Structure for CCCH
Refer to Section 3.4.8.1.1.
3.5.6.1.2 OFDM PRU Structure for TCCH
The PRU diagram shown in Figure 3.82 is the diagram about TCCH for UL. As shown in the
figure, there are four sub-slots for TCCH, each of which is composed of three TCCH symbols({S3,
S4, S5}, {S7, S8, S9}, {S11, S12, S13} and {S15, S16, S17}).
A-GN4.00-03-TS
156
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Sub-slot 1
Sub-slot 2
Sub-slot 3
Sub-slot 4
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
TCCH Symbol
Figure 3.82 OFDM PRU Structure for TCCH
Table 3.32 Composition of TCCH
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
TCCH Symbol
66 x 4 sub-slots
A-GN4.00-03-TS
157
3.5.6.2 ICH for UL OFDM
3.5.6.2.1 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH
Refer to Section 3.4.8.1.2.
3.5.6.2.2 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH
The PRU diagrams in shown Figure 3.83, Figure 3.84 and Figure 3.86 are the diagrams about
EXCH for UL. As shown in these figures, there are three kinds of EXCH formats. EXCH format (1)
is used in case of 1 layer. EXCH Format (2) and (4) are used in case of 2 and 4 layers for SM and
STBC-MIMO. There are two and four kinds of arrangement for pilot and training symbols. When
one antenna transmits the reference symbol, the other antenna(s) transmits not pilot and training
symbols but null symbol. The data symbols are transmitted from each antenna. Note that full
subcarrier mode is not used for UL.
format (1)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Pilot Symbol
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Training Symbol
Figure 3.83 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (1a)
Table 3.33 Composition of EXCH format (1)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
A-GN4.00-03-TS
158
Data Symbol
372
Training Symbol
22
Pilot Symbol
24
Null Symbol (DC carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
format (2)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol
Training Symbol (Antenna1)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)
Training Symbol (Antenna2)
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)
Figure 3.84 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (2)
Table 3.34 Composition of EXCH format (2)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
348
Training Symbol(Antenna 1)
12
Training Symbol(Antenna 2)
10
Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 1)
24
Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 2)
24
Null Symbol (DC carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
159
format (4)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Data Symbol
Training Symbol
(Antenna 1)
Training Symbol
(Antenna 4)
Training Symbol
(Antenna 2)
Pilot Symbol
(Antenna 1)
Pilot Symbol
(Antenna 3)
Pilot Symbol
(Antenna 4)
Training Symbol
(Antenna 3)
Pilot Symbol
(Antenna 2)
Figure 3.85 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (4)
Table 3.35 Composition of EXCH format (4)
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
348
Training Symbol(Anntenna 1)
6
Training Symbol(Anntenna 2)
6
Training Symbol(Anntenna 3)
6
Training Symbol(Anntenna 4)
4
Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 1)
12
Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 2)
12
Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 3)
12
Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 4)
12
Null Symbol (DC carrier, Guard Carrier)
38
A-GN4.00-03-TS
160
3.5.6.2.3 OFDM PRU Structure for CSCH
Refer to Section 3.4.8.1.4.
3.6 UL SC PHY Layer
Figure 3.86 describes a transmitter block diagram for SC transmission method.
TCCH
Modulation
Null
Signal
Scrambling
Encoding
Modulation
Pilot
Modulation
Sel
Guard
Interval
Insertion
SC Block
Construction
User A
Training
S( t)
Modulation
Bit-interleaving
Data
Pulse
Shaping
Filter
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Modulation
Encoding
Channel Coding
Figure 3.86 Transmitter Block Diagram for SC Transmission Method
Figure 3.87 describes an optional transmitter block diagram for SC transmission method.
Coded symbol rate= R
DFT
Sub-carrier
Mapping
GI
insertion
IFFT
NTX symbols
Size-NTX
Size-NFFT
Figure 3.87 Transmitter structure for SC-FDMA
3.6.1 Channel Coding for PHY Frame
PHY frame consists of one or more Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) data unit(s). CRC-bits are
first appended to the CRC data unit. Then tail-bits are appended to the CRC data unit with
A-GN4.00-03-TS
161
CRC-bits after performing scrambling. CRC unit is defined as the scrambled CRC data unit with
CRC-bits and tail-bits. The size of CRC unit is described in Section 3.6.7.3. The CRC unit is
encoded according to error correction code. Then, bit-interleaving is performed for error
correction coded bits. When performing bit-interleaving, rate matching shall be applied by
puncturing some of coded bits if virtual GI extension is used. Then, the output bits of
bit-interleaving are converted to IQ signals by modulation method.
Figure 3.88 describes the channel coding block diagram for UL SC from Figure 3.86.
CRC
Data (bit)
Scrambling
Attachment
Bit-
Encoding
Modulation
Interleaving
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.88 Channel Coding for SC
3.6.1.1 CRC
CRC
Data (bit)
Attachment
Scrambling
Bit-
Encoding
Interleaving
Modulation
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.89 CRC Attachment
Refer to Section 3.4.1.1.
3.6.1.2 Scrambling
Data (bit)
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Encoding
BitInterleaving
Modulation
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.90 Scrambling
Refer to Section 3.4.1.2.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
162
3.6.1.3 Encoding
Data (bit)
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Encoding
BitInterleaving
Modulation
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.91 Encoding
Refer to Section 3.4.1.3.
3.6.1.4 Bit-interleaving
Data (bit)
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Encoding
BitInterleaving
Modulation
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.92 Bit-interleaving
3.6.1.4.1 Bit-interleaver Structure
Refer to Section 3.4.1.4.1.
3.6.1.4.2 Block Interleaver Method
Refer to Section 3.4.1.4.5.2.
3.6.1.4.3 Interleaver Parameters for UL SC
Table 3.36 to Table 3.39 summarize the parameters of the interleaver for input bit size and
modulation class. In Table 3.28, position to start reading (A) is used when the puncturing rate R2
is 1 or 4/6 at the convolutional encoder. Position to start reading (B) is used when the puncturing
rate R2 is 3/4 or 6/10 at the convolutional encoder.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
163
Table 3.36 Interleaver Parameter M and N
Physical Channel
Number of
Symbols: y
M
N
CCH
ICH (One PRU)
ICH (Otherwise)
240
256
512
15
16
32
16
16
16
Table 3.37 Interleaver Parameter
Modulation
BPSK
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
The Number of Block Interleavers
1
2
3
4
6
8
Table 3.38 The Definition of Bit Position i in a Symbol
Modulation
BPSK
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
Bit Position i in a Symbol
i = (1)
i = (1,2)
i = (1,2,3)
i = (1,2,3,4)
i = (1,2,3,4,5,6)
i = (1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8)
Table 3.39 Starting Position for Interleaver
Bit Position i in a
Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Position to Start
Writing
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
Position to Start
Reading (A)
a1,1
a1,2
a1,3
a1,4
a1,8
a1,9
a1,10
a1,7
Position to Start
Reading (B)
a1,1
a1,1
a1,2
a1,2
a1,2
a1,1
N/A
N/A
A-GN4.00-03-TS
164
3.6.1.4.4 Rate Matching Method
Rate matching is applied only when the virtual GI extension is used for SC. Table 3.40 shows the
matching rate of Rate Matching (Rm) for different symbol rates. Figure 3.93 shows the deleting bit
positions of rate matching for CCH defined in the form of block interleaver matrix of 16-column
and 15-row (N=16, M=15). Figure 3.94 shows the deleting bit positions of rate matching pattern A
for ICH in the form of block interleaver matrix of 16-column and 16-row (N=16, M=16). Figure
3.95 to Figure 3.97 show the deleting bit positions of rate matching pattern B1 to B3 for ICH in the
form of block interleaver matrix of 16-column and 16-row, respectively.
For ICH, when the puncturing rate R2 is 1 or 4/6 at convolutional encoder, pattern A is used.
When the puncturing rate R2 is 3/4 or 6/10 at convolutional encoder, patterns B1, B2 and B3 are
periodically used in an order such as B1 for the first block interleaver, B2 for the second block
interleaver, B3 for the third block interleaver and so on.
When the number of input bits is 512, two rate matching patterns are simply concatenated to
define the pattern for the block interleaver of 16-column and 32-row (N=16 and M=32). When
using pattern B1, B2 and B3, appropriate pairs are (B1, B2), (B3, B1) and (B2, B3). These pairs
(B1, B2), (B3, B1) and (B2, B3) are periodically used in an order such as (B1, B2) for the first
block interleaver, (B3, B1) for the second block interleaver, (B2, B3) for the third block interleaver
and so on. The pattern (Bi, Bj) means that Bi spans the first 16-row and Bj spans the last 16-row
of the block interleaver matrix.
Table 3.41 to Table 3.44 summarize the deleting bit numbers when a1,1 is the starting position to
read out of the block interleaver. When the coding rate R is 7/8 at the convolutional encoder,
virtual GI extension is not applied.
Table 3.40 Rate Matching Parameters
Parameter
Type1
Type2
Type3
Type4
Type5
Symbol Rate [Msps]
0.6
1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
206/240
220/256
N/A
238/256
N/A
251/256
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Matching Rate: Rm
CCH
ICH
(*) N/A: Not Available
A-GN4.00-03-TS
165
N=16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
M=15
1
1
1
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=206/240
Figure 3.93 Deleting Bit Position for CCH: Pattern A
A-GN4.00-03-TS
166
N=16
1
2
1
2
1
3
1
2
1
2
1
3
1
M=16
1
2
2
1
2
1
3
1
2
1
1
2
1
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256
2
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256 and 238/256
3
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256, 238/256 and 251/256
Figure 3.94 Deleting Bit Position for ICH: Pattern A
A-GN4.00-03-TS
167
N=16
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
2
2
1
3
2
1
1
M=16
2
1
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
1
2
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256
2
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256 and 238/256
3
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256, 238/256 and 251/256
Figure 3.95 Deleting Bit Position for ICH: Pattern B1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
168
N=16
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
1
M=16
3
2
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
2
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
3
1
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256
2
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256 and 238/256
3
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256, 238/256 and 251/256
Figure 3.96 Deleting Bit Position of ICH: Pattern B2
A-GN4.00-03-TS
169
N=16
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
1
2
2
1
3
2
1
M=16
2
1
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
1
2
2
1
3
2
1
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256
2
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256 and 238/256
3
Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256, 238/256 and 251/256
Figure 3.97 Deleting Bit Position of ICH: Pattern B3
A-GN4.00-03-TS
170
Table 3.41 Rate Matching Pattern for CCH
Rm
Puncturing Rate
@CC
206/240
1
Pattern Deleting Bit Number (1 - 240)
A
76-90, 138, 142, 146, 150, 196-210
Table 3.42 Rate Matching Pattern 1 for ICH
Rm
Puncturing Rate
@CC
1, 4/6
Pattern Deleting Bit Number (1 - 256)
A
B1
81-96, 147, 151, 155, 159, 209-224
50, 56, 59, 62, 83, 86, 89, 92, 95, 113, 116,
119, 122, 125, 128, 146, 149, 152, 155, 158,
179, 182, 185, 188, 191, 209, 212, 215, 218,
221, 224, 242, 245, 248, 251, 254
220/256
3/4, 6/10
B2
52, 55, 58, 64, 82, 85, 88, 91, 94, 115, 118,
121, 124, 127, 145, 148, 151, 154, 157, 160,
178, 181, 184, 187, 190, 211, 214, 217, 220,
223, 241, 244, 247, 250, 253, 256
B3
51, 54, 60, 63, 81, 84, 87, 90, 93, 96, 114,
117, 120, 123, 126, 147, 150, 153, 156, 159,
177, 180, 183, 186, 189, 192, 210, 213, 216,
219, 222, 243, 246, 249, 252, 255
A-GN4.00-03-TS
171
Table 3.43 Rate Matching Pattern 2 for ICH
Rm
Puncturing Rate
@CC
Pattern Deleting Bit Number (1 - 256)
1, 4/6
A
B1
238/256
3/4, 6/10
B2
B3
151, 159, 209-224
149, 158, 179, 182, 185, 188, 191, 209, 212,
215, 218, 221, 224, 242, 245, 248, 251, 254
148, 157, 178, 181, 184, 187, 190, 211, 214,
217, 220, 223, 241, 244, 247, 250, 253, 256
150, 159, 177, 180, 183, 186, 189, 192, 210,
213, 216, 219, 222, 243, 246, 249, 252, 255
Table 3.44 Rate Matching Pattern 3 for ICH
Rm
251/256
Puncturing Rate
@CC
Pattern
1, 4/6
A
211, 214, 217, 220, 223
B1
242, 245, 248, 251, 254
B2
244, 247, 250, 253, 256
B3
243, 246, 249, 252, 255
3/4, 6/10
Deleting Bit Number (1 - 256)
3.6.1.4.5 Output-bits After Bit-interleaver
The IQ data symbol is generated by using x bits, each of which is taken from each block
interleaver after applying the rate matching. Denote the output bits from i-th block interleaver by
z(i,1), z(i,2), …, z(i,y’), where y’ is Rm*y with rate matching or y’ is y without rate matching. Thus,
the j-th IQ data symbol is converted from the bit series z(p1,j), z(p2,j),…,z(px,j), where pi is a offset
value to circulate the order of input bits to the modulator, and is defined as follows:
Input bits to the modulator: z(p1,j), z(p2,j),…,z(px,j)
Offset value: pi = ( (i+j-2) mod x)+1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
172
3.6.1.5 Modulation Method
Data (bit)
CRC
Attachment
Scrambling
Encoding
BitInterleaving
Modulation
Data (symbol)
Figure 3.98 Modulation
The serial signal input after interleaving is converted to IQ Data symbol on each symbol. The
modulation (π/2-BPSK, π/4-QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM, 64QAM and 256QAM) is shown in Appendix
B.
a) π/2-BPSK
Refer to Appendix B.2.
b) π/4-QPSK
Refer to Appendix B.4.
c) 8PSK
Refer to Appendix B.5.
d) 16QAM
Refer to Appendix B.6.
e) 64QAM
Refer to Appendix B.7.
f) 256QAM
Refer to Appendix B.8.
3.6.1.6 Symbol Mapping Method for Data Block
Symbol mapping methods depend on the types of physical channel (CCH, ANCH, EXCH and
CSCH). The detail of the mapping method is described below.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
173
3.6.1.6.1 Data Block
Figure 3.99 illustrates a data block structure for UL SC. Data block is a SC block composed of
data symbols, in which N is the SC block size and G1 is the GI size. Data symbol mapping is
performed by aligning the data symbols along the time axis. That is, data symbols from the
modulator are mapped into the SC block by the order of D(1), D(2), …, D(N).
30.00 us
D(N)
..
D(4)
D(3)
D(2)
D(1)
..
26.67 us
D(N)
D(N-G1+1)
3.33 us
Copy
Figure 3.99 Symbol Mapping onto SC Block without Virtual GI Extension
3.6.1.6.2 Data Block with Virtual GI Extension
When the virtual GI extension is used, some symbols in the preceding SC block are copied into a
data block. Figure 3.100 shows the SC block format (n-th SC block) in the case that virtual GI
extension is used for data blocks (except for S8 and S16). In addition to this, data blocks S8 and
S16 include copies of the pilot symbols from S9 and S17 respectively with virtual GI extension.
Figure 3.101 shows the SC block format (n-th SC block) with virtual GI extension for data blocks
S8 and S16. Parameters for virtual GI extension are summarized in Table 3.45. Virtual GI length
is defined as the time length of SC block to which preceding or succeeding SC block is copied.
Virtual GI size is defined as the number of symbols in the virtual GI length.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
174
Virtual GI Length
(n-1)-th SC Block
26.67 us
GI
3.33 us
3.33 us
n-th SC Block
26.67 us
Copy
Figure 3.100 Symbol Mapping of SC Block with Virtual GI Extension (Data Blocks Except for S8
and S16)
Virtual GI Length
(n-1)-th SC Block
26.67 us
GI
3.33 us
3.33 us
n-th SC Block
26.67 us
Copy
(n+1)-th SC Block(Pilot Block)
26.67 us
Virtual GI Length
3.33 us
Figure 3.101 Symbol Mapping of SC Block with Virtual GI Extension (S8 and S16)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
175
Table 3.45 Parameters for Virtual GI Extension for UL SC
Parameter
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
Symbol Rate [Msps]
0.6
1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
Virtual GI Length [us]
Virtual GI Size [symbol]
3.33
2
1.67
2
0.417
1
0
0
0
0
3.6.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method for SC Burst
3.6.1.7.1 Symbol Mapping Method without DTX Symbol
Figure 3.102, data symbol mapping is performed by aligning the data symbols along time axis in
the SC burst except for the copied symbols in GI and virtual GI as described in Section 3.6.1.6.
PHY Frame
The Second CRC Unit
The First CRC Unit
EXCH or CSCH@4PRUs
2.4 MHz
Starting Point
The First CRC Unit
The Second CRC Unit
Time
SC Burst
Frequency
Figure 3.102 Data Symbol Mapping Method for SC Burst without DXT Symbols (2.4 Msps)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
176
3.6.1.7.1.1 Symbol Mapping Method with DTX Symbol
DTX symbol is used in EXCH and CSCH when the SC burst can accommodate more CRC units
than the number of CRC units to be transmitted as shown in Figure 3.103. All data blocks after
mapping all CRC units in the SC burst are DTX symbols. Details of DTX symbol are described in
Section 3.6.5.
PHY Frame
The First CRC Unit
Starting Point
DTX
EXCH or CSCH@4PRUs
2.4 MHz
DTX symbols are inserted to data blocks.
DTX
The first CRC Unit
Time
SC Burst
Frequency
Figure 3.103 Data Symbol Mapping Method for SC Burst with DTX Symbols (2.4 Msps)
3.6.1.7.2 Symbol Mapping Method for Retransmission (CC-HARQ)
Figure 3.104 to Figure 3.106 illustrate the retransmission of CRC unit, in which retransmission
CRC unit size is equal to, smaller than or larger than the available CRC unit size for
retransmission respectively.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
177
(a) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size equals to available CRC Unit Size
Retransmission Data
New Data
CRC Unit 1
CRC Unit 2
Transmission
Retransmission Data
New Data
Figure 3.104 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size equals to available CRC Unit Size
(b) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is less than available CRC Unit Size
As shown in Figure 3.105, the rest of CRC Unit 1 is used as DTX symbols.
Retransmission Data
CRC Unit 1
New Data
CRC Unit 2
Transmission
Retransmission Data
New Data
DTX Symbols
Figure 3.105 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is less than available CRC Unit Size
(c) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is larger than available CRC Unit Size
As shown in Figure 3.106, ,a part of retransmission data takes up the symbols that can be used
by DTX symbols. In addition, a part of retransmission data might also take up the part that can be
used by the guard time.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
178
Retransmission Data
CRC Unit 1
New Data
CRC Unit 2
Retransmission Data
Transmission
Retransmission Data
New Data
DTX Symbols (Null)
Figure 3.106 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is larger than available CRC Unit
Size
3.6.1.8 Summary of SC UL Channel Coding
Combinations of coding and modulation are shown in Table 3.46 for UL SC. Efficiency of each
combination is shown in the same table. Efficiency is defined as the number of information bits
carried by one data symbol in the SC burst. Efficiency and total coding rate are calculated
assuming no virtual GI extension in the table. Note that actual efficiency becomes higher with
virtual GI extension.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
179
Table 3.46 Summary of UL SC Channel Coding
Modulation
Scaling
Factor
1
π/2-BPSK
π/4-QPSK
1/√2
8PSK
1
16QAM
1/√10
64QAM
256QAM
Coding Rate
@Convolutional
Coding
1/2
1/√42
1/√170
Puncturing
Rate R2
Total Coding
Rate R
Efficiency
1
1/2
0.5
3/4
2/3
0.67
1
1/2
1
4/6
3/4
1.5
3/4
2/3
2
1
1/2
2
4/6
3/4
3
3/4
4/6
4
6 / 10
5/6
5
4/6
6/8
6
8 / 14
7/8
7
3.6.1.9 Optional Channel Coding for PHY Frame
3.6.1.9.1 CRC
Refer to 3.4.1.1.
3.6.1.9.2 Channel coding
3.6.1.9.2.1 Tail biting convolutional coding
Refer to 3.4.1.3.1.3.
3.6.1.9.2.2 Turbo coding
Refer to 3.4.1.3.1.4.
3.6.1.9.3 Rate matching
A-GN4.00-03-TS
180
Refer to 3.4.1.4.5
3.6.1.9.4 Code block concatenation
The code block concatenation consists of sequentially concatenating the rate matching outputs
for the different code blocks.
3.6.1.9.5 Channel Coding of UL Channels
3.6.1.9.5.1 Coding of data and control information on AUEDCH
Data arrives to the coding unit in the form of a maximum of one transport block every
transmission time interval (TTI). The following coding steps for the AUEDCH can be identified:
 Add CRC to the transport block
 Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment
 Channel coding of data and control information
 Rate matching
 Code block concatenation
 Multiplexing of data and control information
 Channel interleaver
Control data arrives at the coding unit in the form of channel quality information (CQI and/or PMI),
HARQ-ACK and rank indication. Different coding rates for the control information are achieved by
allocating different number of coded symbols for its transmission. When control data are
transmitted in the AUEDCH, the channel coding for HARQ-ACK, rank indication and channel
quality information
is done independently.
3.6.1.9.5.2 Coding of Uplink control information on AUANCH
Data arrives to the coding unit in the form of indicators for measurement indication, scheduling
request and HARQ acknowledgement. Three forms of channel coding are used, one for the
channel quality information CQI/PMI, another for HARQ-ACK (acknowledgement) and scheduling
request and another for combination of CQI/PMI and HARQ-ACK.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
181
3.6.1.9.5.3 Uplink control information on AUEDCH without traffic data
When control data are sent via AUEDCH without traffic data, the following coding steps can be
identified:
 Channel coding of control information
 Control information mapping
 Channel interleaver
3.6.2 Training for UL SC
Training block is a SC block used mainly for synchronization, frequency offset estimation,
automatic gain control or weight calculation of beam-forming. Training block is composed of
predefined data (Refer to Appendix C.2). The details of training block, training sequence and
training pattern are described in Sections 3.6.2.1, 3.6.2.2, and 3.6.2.3.
3.6.2.1 Training Block Format
Training block is constructed by training symbols, T(1) – T(N) as defined in Appendix C.2.
Training symbols are chosen according to the training index as defined in Section 3.6.2.3.
3.6.2.1.1 Training Format for ICH
Figure 3.107 illustrates the training block format for ICH, in which N is the SC block size and G2
is the GI size. In case of ICH, training data is the first SC block S1.
33.33 us (S1)
T(N)
..
T(4)
T(3)
T(2)
T(1)
..
26.67 us
T(N)
T(N-G2+1)
6.67 us
Copy
Figure 3.107 Training Format for ICH
3.6.2.1.2 Training Format for CCCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
182
Figure 3.108 illustrates the training format for CCCH. In case of CCCH, two training blocks S1
and S2 are used. Training symbols, T(1) – T(16), are mapped into S1 and S2 so that the training
sequence repeats itself during the two SC blocks (S1 and S2) as shown in the figure.
10.00 us
53.33 us
30.00 us (S2)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
T(1)
T(2)
T(3)
T(4)
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)
T(9)
T(10)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
T(1)
T(2)
T(3)
T(4)
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)
T(9)
T(10)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
33.33 us (S1)
Training Sequence
Training Sequence
Copy
Figure 3.108 Training format for CCH
3.6.2.2 Training Sequence
Refer to Appendix C.2 for training sequence and offset values.
Eight core-sequences are defined in Table C.5 to Table C.10. These core-sequences are on the
constellation of 8PSK or 16PSK as shown in Appendix B.5 or Appendix B.9. In addition to these
core-sequences, cyclic-shifted versions of them are also used for constructing training for ICH
and CCH as shown in Table C.12.
3.6.2.3 Training Index
As described in Section 3.6.2.2, there are 8 core-sequences and offset values (cyclic-shift values).
Training index is numbered as follows:
Training Index = Core-sequence Number + (Offset Value Number-1)*8
3.6.2.3.1 Training Index for CCCH
Training index, core-sequence number and offset value number for CCH are defined as follows:
Training Index
Core-sequence Number
Offset Value Number
:2
:2
:1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
183
3.6.2.3.2 Training Index for ICH
ICH is composed of ANCH, EXCH and CSCH. Training index, core-sequence number and offset
value number for ICH are defined as follows:
Training Index
Core-sequence Number
Offset Value Number
: x + (y-1)*8
: x=[A MOD 8]+ 1
: y=[{B+m} MOD (n-1)]+ 2
n = maximum number of SCHs in a slot
m = the smallest SCH number assigned to the MS in the slot (m=1,2,3,…)
A = 1st to 5th bits including LSB in BSID
B = 1st to 5th bits next to A in BSID
Training index, core-sequence number and offset value number for MIMO are defined as follows:
Training Index
Core-sequence Number
Offset Value Number
: x + (y-1)*8
: x=[{A+k-1} MOD 8]+ 1
: y=[{B+m} MOD (n-1)]+ 2
k =MIMO stream number (k=1,2,…)
n = maximum number of SCHs in a slot
m = the smallest SCH number assigned to the MS in the slot (m=1,2,3,…)
A = 1st to 5th bits including LSB in BSID
B = 1st to 5th bits next to A in BSID
3.6.3 Pilot for UL SC
Figure 3.109 illustrates a pilot block format. Pilot block is a SC block used mainly for channel
estimation. Pilot block consists of N pilot symbols, P(1) – P(N), as shown in this figure.
30.00 us (S9 and S17)
P(N)
..
P(4)
P(3)
P(2)
P(1)
..
26.67 us
P(N)
P(N-G1+1)
3.33 us
Copy
Figure 3.109 Pilot Block Format
A-GN4.00-03-TS
184
3.6.3.1 Pilot Index
Pilot index is defined by eight core-sequences and offset values (cyclic-shift value) in the same
way as training index described in Section 3.6.2.3. Pilot index is numbered as follows:
Pilot index = core-sequence number + (offset value number-1)*8
3.6.3.2 Pilot for CCCH
SC burst for CCCH has two pilot blocks at S9 and S17. Pilot block consists of 16 pilot symbols.
Pilot symbols P(1) – P(16) in the both pilot blocks (S9 and S17) are the same as training symbols
T(1) – T(16) in the training block S2 respectively. Pilot index is the same as training index in the
same SC burst.
3.6.3.3 Pilot for ICH
3.6.3.3.1 Pilot for ANCH
SC burst for ANCH has two pilot blocks at S9 and S17. Pilot block consists of 16 pilot symbols.
Pilot symbols P(1) – P(16) in both pilot blocks (S9 and S17) are the same as training symbols
T(1) – T(16) in the training block S1 correspondingly. Pilot index is the same as training index in
the same SC burst.
3.6.3.3.2 Pilot for EXCH
SC burst for EXCH has two pilot blocks at S9 and S17. Pilot block consists of 16 pilot symbols.
Pilot symbols P(1) – P(N) in the both pilot blocks (S9 and S17) are the same as training symbols
T(1) – T(N) in the training block S1 correspondingly. Pilot index is the same as training index in
the same SC burst.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
185
3.6.3.3.3 Pilot for CSCH
SC burst for CSCH has two pilot blocks at S9 and S17. Pilot symbols P(1) – P(N) in the pilot
block S17 are the same as training symbols T(1) – T(N) in the training block S1 correspondingly.
Pilot block S9 is different from as S17 for CSCH. For the symbol rate of 0.6 Msps (N=16), pilot
symbols P(1) – P(N) in S9 are selected from Table C.5 in Appendix C.2 with the same pilot index.
For 1.2 Msps and above (N>=32), pilot symbols in S9 are constructed by repeating the pilot block
of half-length (N/2) with the same pilot index twice. Pilot block S9 is then modulated in order to
multiplex signaling bits as described in Section 3.6.4.2.
3.6.3.4 Advanced Optional Pilot Signals
Two types of uplink pilot signals are supported:
- Advanced Demodulation Pilot Signal, associated with transmission of AUEDCH or
AUANCH
- Advanced Sounding Pilot Signal
The same set of base sequences is used for Advanced Demodulation Pilot Signal and Advanced
Sounding Pilot Signals.
Pilot signal sequence ru(,v ) (n) is defined by a cyclic shift  of a base sequence ru ,v (n)
according to ru(,v ) (n)  e jn ru,v (n), 0  n  M scPilot ,where M scPilot  mN scRU is the length of the
max,UL
trainning signal sequence and 1  m  N RU
. Multiple pilot signal sequences are defined from a
single base sequence through different values of  .
Base sequences ru ,v (n) are divided into groups, where u  0,1,...,29 is the group number and
is the base sequence number within the group, such that each group contains one base
sequence ( v  0 ) of each length M scPilot  mN scRU , 1  m  5 and two base sequences ( v  0,1 )
max,UL
of each length M scPilot  mN scRU , 6  m  N RU
.
The definition of the base sequence
v
ru,v (0),...,ru,v ( M scPilot  1) depends on the sequence length M scPilot .
3.6.3.4.1 Advanced Demodulation Pilot signal
3.6.3.4.1.1 Advanced Demodulation Pilot signal sequence
The aAdvanced Demodulation Pilot Signal sequence r AUEDCH  for AUEDCH is defined by
A-GN4.00-03-TS
186


r AUEDCH m  M scPilot  n  ru(,v ) n  , where m  0,1 ; n  0,..., M sc
Pilot
 1 and M scRS  M scAUEDCH .
The aAdvanced Demodulation Pilot Signal sequence r AUANCH  for AUANCH is defined by


AUANCH
r AUANCH m' N Pilot
M scPilot  mM scPilot  n  w (m) z(m)ru(,v ) n 
AUANCH
 1 , n  0,..., M scPilot  1 and m'  0,1 .For CQICH, z(m) equals
where m  0,..., N Pilot
d (10) for m  1 . For all other cases, z (m)  1.
3.6.3.4.1.2 Mapping to physical resources
The sequence r AUEDCH  shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor  AUEDCH and
mapped in sequence starting with r AUEDCH (0) to the same set of physical resource blockunits
used for the corresponding AUEDCH transmission.
3.6.3.4.2 Advanced Sounding Pilot signal
3.6.3.4.2.1 Advanced Souding Pilot signal sequence
The aAdvanced Sounding Pilot signal sequence rSP n   ru(,v ) n  ,where u is the AUANCH
sequence-group number and  is the base sequence number. The cyclic shift  of the
Advanced Sounding Pilot signal is given as   2
cs
nSP
cs
, where nSP
is configured for each MS
8
cs
by higher layers and nATS
 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 .
The BS-specific slot configuration period TSFC and the BS-specific slot offset SFC for the
transmission of advanced Sounding Pilot signals are determined by the higher layers parameter
SoundingPilot-SlotConfig. Advanced Sounding Pilot signal slots are the slots satisfying
ns / 2 modTSFC  SFC . Advanced Sounding Pilot signal is transmitted only in configured UL slots
or USS. When SoundingPilot-SlotConfig is from 0 to 7, TSFC is 5 slots while TSFC is 10 slots for
SoundingPilot-SlotConfig from 8 to 15. SFC is {1}, {1,2}, {1,3}, {1,4}, {1,2,3}, {1,2,4}, {1,3,4},
{1,2,3,4}, {1,2,6}, {1,3,6}, {1,6,7}, {1,2,6,8}, {1,3,6,9}, {1,4,6,7} for SoundingPilot-SlotConfig from 0
to 13 respectively.
3.6.3.4.3 Mapping to physical resources
A-GN4.00-03-TS
187
For all slots other than special slots, the Advanced Sounding Pilot signal shall be transmitted in
the last symbol of the slot.
The sequence shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor  SRS in order to conform to
the transmit power PSRS , and mapped in sequence starting with r SRS (0) to resource elements
(k , l ) according to
SP
 r SRS (k ) k  0,1,...,M sc,
b 1
a2k k0 ,l   SRS
0
otherwise

where k 0 is the frequency-domain starting position of the Advanced Sounding Pilot signal
SP
M sc,b
is the length of the Advanced Sounding Pilot signal sequence indicated by BS-specific
parameter and MS-specific parameter given by higher layers for each uplink bandwidth.
3.6.4 Signal for UL SC
Figure 3.110 describes the coding block diagram for signal data for UL SC.
Signal Data(bit)
Encoding
Pilot (symbol)
Small
Scrambling
ng
ng
Pilot with Signal (Symbol)
Modulation
Figure 3.110 Signal Encoding Block Diagram for UL SC
3.6.4.1 Signal Encoding
Signal Bits
4-bit
Hamming
Repetition-1
Encoding
X r1
Concatenation
Figure 3.111 illustrates the signal encoding for SC, which consists of (8,4) Hamming encoding
and repetition process. Table 3.47 summarizes the parameters for signal encoding for each
symbol rate. In this figure, signal data (4-bit) is first encoded by (8,4) Hamming encoding, and
then repeated r1 times. DI (0 – 3 bits) are simply repeated r2 times. Then, output bits from the
repetition-1 are followed by the output bits from the repetition-2 to form the encoded signal bits
(m-bit). DI indicates the number of CRC units filled with DTX symbols. Refer to Section 3.6.5 for
DTX symbols.
Coded Signal Bits
m-bit
A-GN4.00-03-TS
188
DI
k-bit (k=0 – 3)
Repetition-2
X r2
Figure 3.111 Signal Encoding for SC
A-GN4.00-03-TS
189
Table 3.47 Parameters for Signal Encoding
Type1 Type2 Type3 Type4 Type5
Symbol Rate [Msps]
0.6
1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
Number of Signal Bits
4
4
4
4
4
Number of DI Bits: k
0
0
1
2
3
Repetition Factor: r1
1
2
3
6
12
Repetition Factor: r2
N/A
N/A
8
16
32
Number of Coded Signal Bits: m
8
16
32
64
128
3.6.4.1.1 (8,4) Hamming Encoding
Refer to Section 3.4.5.1.1.
3.6.4.1.2 Small Scrambling
Refer to Section 3.4.5.1.2.
3.6.4.2 Modulation for Signal
Figure 3.112 illustrates the pilot block S9 modulated by encoded signal bits for CSCH. Encoded
signal bits of N/2-bit are multiplexed into the pilot block S9 of N-symbol. When the n-th encoded
signal bit c(n) (n=1,2,…,N/2) is 0, the pilot symbol P(n) is sent as it is, while the pilot symbol
P(N/2+n) is rotated by π/2 [rad]. When the n-th encoded signal bit c(n) (n=1,2,…,N/2) is 1, the
pilot symbol P(N/2+n) is sent as it is, while the pilot symbol P(n) is rotated by π/2 [rad]. This is
equivalent to frequency-multiplexing BPSK symbols modulated by encoded signal bits and pilot
symbols, in which each BPSK symbol is rotated by the angle of corresponding pilot symbol.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
190
30 us (S9)
3
4
..
N/2 N/2+1
P(N) *exp(j/2*(1-c(N/2)))
P(4) *exp(j/2*c(4))
2
P(N/2+1) *exp(j/2*(1-c(1)))
P(3) *exp(j/2*c(3))
1
..
P(N/2) *exp(j/2*c(N/2))
P(1)*exp(j/2*c(1))
P(2) *exp(j/2*c(2))
..
26.67 us
P(N) *exp(j/2*(1-c(N/2)))
P(N-G1+1) *exp(j/2*(1-c(N/2-G1+1)))
3.33 us
..
..
N
Copy
Figure 3.112 Pilot Block with Signaling Bits for CSCH
3.6.5 Null (DTX) for UL SC
Null symbol is defined as 0 + 0j. Null symbol is the same as DTX symbol. DTX symbol is used in
EXCH and CSCH when the SC burst can accommodate more CRC units than the number of
CRC units to be transmitted. All data blocks after mapping all CRC units in the SC burst are DTX
symbols. When all data symbols in S8 or S16 are DTX symbols, symbols in the GI of S8 or S16
should be DTX symbols with or without virtual GI extension.
Figure 3.113 shows the example of DTX symbol mapping for EXCH in case of 2.4 Msps, in which
one CRC unit is to be transmitted.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
191
625 us
2.4 MHz
573.3 us
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Training Block
Pilot Block
Data Block
Guard Time
sS
sS
sS
sS
DTX Block (Data Block with DTX Symbols)
sS
Figure 3.113 DTX Symbol Mapping Method for EXCH (In case of 2.4 Msps)
3.6.6 TCCH for UL SC
3.6.6.1.1 TCCH Format
TCCH is used mainly for transmission timing adjustment and for initial access to BS. Figure 3.114
shows the TCCH format. TCCH is composed of 3 consecutive SC blocks. TCCH symbols T(1) –
T(16) are decided by the TCCH core-sequence number as explained in Section 3.6.6.2.
90.00 us
SC Block b
SC Block c
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
T(1)
T(2)
T(3)
T(4)
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)
T(9)
T(10)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
T(1)
T(2)
T(3)
T(4)
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)
T(9)
T(10)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
T(1)
T(2)
T(3)
T(4)
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)
T(9)
T(10)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
SC Block a
10.00 us
Training Sequence
Training Sequence
Training Sequence
Copy
Figure 3.114 TCCH Block Structure
A-GN4.00-03-TS
192
3.6.6.2 TCCH Sequence and TCCH Sub-slot
TCCH core-sequence number is described in Appendix D.2. TCCH sub-slots number is described
in Section 3.6.7.1.2. The application patterns of TCCH core-sequence number and TCCH
sub-slot number are described in Chapter 5.
3.6.6.3 ATCCH for UL SC
3.6.6.3.1 Time and frequency structure
The physical layer random access sequence, illustrated in Figure 3.115, consists of a guard
interval of length TGI and a sequence part of length TSEQ . The parameter values depend on the
frame structure and the random access configuration. Higher layers control the access sequence
format. TGI is
TSEQ
33
ms and TSEQ is 0.8 ms for access sequence format 0.
320
is 0.8 ms for access sequence format 1. TGI is
sequence format 2. TGI is
TGI is 219 ms and
320
39
ms and TSEQ is 1.6 ms for access
64
219
ms and TSEQ is 1.6 ms for access sequence format 3.
320
TGI is
7
2
ms and TSEQ is
ms for access sequence format 4.
480
15
GI
Sequence
TGI
TSEQ
Figure 3.115 Random access sequence format
The transmission of a random access sequence, if triggered by the MAC layer, is restricted to
certain time and frequency resources. These resources are enumerated in increasing order of the
slot number within the radio frame and the physical resource units in the frequency domain such
that index 0 correspond to the lowest numbered physical resource unit and slot within the radio
frame. ATCCH resources within the radio frame are indicated by a ATCCH Resource Index.
There might be multiple random access resources in an UL slot (or USS for access sequence
format 4) depending on the UL/DL configuration. The 6 bits parameter
ATCCH-ConfigurationIndex given by higher layers indicates a triplet <access sequence format,
A-GN4.00-03-TS
193
Density Per 10 ms DATCCH , Version
rATCCH >, where access sequence format, DATCCH and
rATCCH are indicated by ATCCH-ConfigurationIndex value from 0 to 57 with mapping in sequence
to {0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,3,3,3,3,3,3,3,3,4,4,4,
4,4,4,4,4,4,4}, {0.5,0.5,0.5,1,1,1,2,2,2,3,3,3,4,4,4,5,5,5,6,6,0.5,0.5,0.5,1,1,2,3,4,5,6,0.5,0.5,0.5,
1,1,2,3,4,5,6,0.5,0.5,0.5,1,1,2,3,4,0.5,0.5,0.5,1,1,2,3,4,5,6} and {0,1,2,0,1,2,0,1,2,0,1,2,0,1,2,
0,1,2,0,1,0,1,2,0,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,1,2,0,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,1,2,0,1,0,0,0, 0,1,2,0,1,0,0,0,0,0} respectively.
The ATCCH opportunities are allocated in time first and then in frequency if and only if time
multiplexing is not sufficient to hold all opportunities of a configuration without overlap in time.
Then the location of random access resource for a certain ATCCH opportunity can be indicated
0
2
by time location triplet t ATCCH
and frequency location k ATCCH .
, t1ATCCH , t ATCCH
0
 0,1,2 indicates the random access resource is located in every, even
For time location, t ATCCH
or odd radio frame, respectively; t1ATCCH  0,1 indicates the random access resource is located
2
in the first half frame or in the second half frame of a radio frame, respectively; and t ATCCH
counting from 0 at the first UL slot (for access sequence format 0 to 3) or at USS (for access
sequence format 4) in a half frame, indicates which UL slot or USS the random access resource
0
2
, t1ATCCH , t ATCCH
starts from in a half frame. The time location triplet t ATCCH
is given by
0
t ATCCH
 2 DATCCH  mod 21  rATCCH DATCCH   d  mod 2
t1ATCCH  mind
ATCCH mod 2
ind
 
2
UL , HF 1
t ATCCH     mATCCH
t ATCCH
 N slot
  1 LATCCH
 2  
UL , HF
where d is index of ATCCH opportunities and 0  d  DATCCH   1 , N slot
i  is the number
of UL slots (for access sequence format 0 to 3) or USS (for access sequence format 4) in the 1st
( i  0 ) or the 2nd ( i  1 ) half frame, LATCCH is the number of slots occupied by the access
sequence, which equals to (TGI  TSEQ )  103 . For access sequence format 0 and DATCCH  4 ,
 rATCCH DATCCH   d 
ind
mind
ATCCH is defined by m ATCCH  
 , otherwise
1  2 DATCCH  mod 2 
A-GN4.00-03-TS
194
1
 rATCCH DATCCH   d 
 N UL,HF i 
mind
mod   slot
ATCCH  

.
i 0  LATCCH 
1  2 DATCCH  mod 2 
For access sequence format 0 to 3, the start of the random access sequence shall be aligned
with the start of the corresponding uplink slot at the MS assuming a timing advance of zero. For
access sequence format 4, the access sequence shall start 166.67s before the end of the
USS at the MS.
For frequency location, k ATCCH indicates the first resource block allocated to a certain ATCCH
opportunity. For access sequence format 0-3, k ATCCH is given by
k ATCCH

 f ATCCH 
if f ATCCH mod 2  0
k ATCCH  6 2 ,




 f ATCCH 
 N UL  6  k 
, otherwise
RU
ATCCH  6 
 2 

where k ATCCH indicates the first resource block available for ATCCH, f ATCCH is the index of
ATCCH opportunities in frequency domain and

0
2
 1,
0  f ATCCH  N ATCCH t ATCCH
, t1ATCCH , t ATCCH

0
2
, t1ATCCH , t ATCCH
where N ATCCH t ATCCH
is the number of ATCCH opportunities with identical time
0
2
, t1ATCCH , t ATCCH
location specified by triplet t ATCCH
. For access sequence format 4, k ATCCH is
given by

if t1ATCCH mod 2  0
k ATCCH  6 f ATCCH ,
k ATCCH   UL

 N RU  k ATCCH  6  6 f ATCCH , otherwise
where nf is the system frame number.Each random access sequence occupies a bandwidth
corresponding to 6 consecutive resource blocks.
3.6.6.3.2 Access sequence generation
The random access sequences are generated from Zadoff-Chu sequences with zero correlation
zone, generated from one or several root Zadoff-Chu sequences. The network configures the set
of access sequences the MS is allowed to use.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
195
There are 64 access sequences available in each cell. The set of 64 access sequences in a cell
is found by including first, in the order of increasing cyclic shift. Additional access sequences, in
case 64 Access sequences cannot be generated from a single root Zadoff-Chu sequence, are
obtained from the root sequences with the consecutive logical indexes until all the 64 sequences
are found.
The u
th
root Zadoff-Chu sequence is defined by xu n  e
j
un( n 1)
N ZC
, 0  n  N ZC  1 .The length
N ZC of the Zadoff-Chu sequence is 839 for access sequence format 0~3 and is 139 for access
sequence format 4.
3.6.6.3.3 Baseband signal generation
The time-continuous random access signal s(t ) is defined by
st    ATCCH
N ZC 1 N ZC 1
 x
k 0
n 0
u ,v
(n)  e
j
2nk
N ZC
1
 e j 2 k   K k0  2 f ATCCH t TGI  ,
where 0  t  TSEQ  TGI ,  ATCCH is an amplitude scaling factor in order to conform to the
ATCCH RU
UL
Nsc  N RU
NscRU 2 . The location in the frequency
transmit power PATCCH , and k0  nPRU
ATCCH
domain is controlled by the parameter nPRU
. The factor K  f f ATCCH accounts for the
difference in subcarrier spacing between the random access sequence and uplink data
transmission. The variable f ATCCH , the subcarrier spacing for the random access sequence, and
the variable  , a fixed offset determining the frequency-domain location of the random access
sequence within the physical resource units. f ATCCH is 1250 Hz and  is 7 for access
sequence format 0~3 while f ATCCH is 7500 Hz and  is 2 for access sequence format .
3.6.7 SC Burst Structure for UL SC
SC burst is composed of training block, pilot block, data block, DTX symbol and guard time.
3.6.7.1 CCH for UL SC
3.6.7.1.1 SC Burst Structure for CCCH
Figure 3.116 illustrates the SC burst structure for CCCH. Symbols in GI are not counted in the
A-GN4.00-03-TS
196
table. Table 3.48 summarizes the composition of CCCH. The number of CRC units is always 1 in
CCCH.
625 us
900 kHz
573.3 us
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Training Block
Pilot Block
Data Block
Guard Time
sS
sS
sS
sS
Figure 3.116 SC Burst Structure for CCCH
Table 3.48 Composition of CCCH
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with Virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
240
230
Distinct Data Symbol
240
206
Training Symbol
32
34
Pilot Symbol
32
40
Total
304
304
3.6.7.1.2 SC Burst Structure for TCCH
Figure 3.117 describes the SC burst format for TCCH for UL SC. Within a slot time, there are four
sub-slots, each of which is composed of three SC blocks. They are {S3, S4, S5}, {S7, S8, S9},
{S11, S12, S13} and {S15, S16, S17}. TCCH block defined in Section 3.6.6 is sent in one of the
four sub-slots. Table 3.49 summarizes the composition of TCCH. Symbols in GI are not counted
A-GN4.00-03-TS
197
in the table.
625 us
900 kHz
573.3 us
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
Sub-slot1
S8
S9
Sub-slot2
TCCH Block sS
sS
Guard Time
sS
sS
S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Sub-slot3
Sub-slot4
sS
sS
Figure 3.117 SC Burst Structure for TCCH
Table 3.49 Composition of TCCH
Symbol Name
TCCH Symbol
Number of Symbols
48*4 sub-slots
3.6.7.2 ICH for UL SC
3.6.7.2.1 SC Burst Structure for ANCH
Figure 3.118 describes a SC burst format for ANCH.
Table 3.50 summarizes the composition of ANCH. Symbols in GI are not counted in the table.
The number of CRC units is always 1 in ANCH.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
198
625 us
900 kHz
573.3 us
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Pilot Block
Training Block
Guard Time
sS
sS
sS
Figure 3.118 SC Burst Structure for ANCH
Table 3.50 Composition of ANCH
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with Virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
256
246
Distinct Data Symbol
256
220
Training Symbol
16
18
Pilot Symbol
32
40
Total
304
304
3.6.7.2.2 SC Burst Structure for EXCH
Figure 3.119 illustrates a SC burst format for EXCH. Table 3.51 to Table 3.55 summarize the
composition of EXCH for different symbol rates.
Table 3.56 summarizes the composition of CRC unit in EXCH. Symbols in GI are not counted in
these tables.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
199
625 us
900*n kHz (n=1,2,4,8,16)
573.3 us
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Block
Pilot Block
Training Block
Guard Time
sS
sS
sS
sS
Figure 3.119 SC Burst Structure for EXCH
Table 3.51 Composition of EXCH (0.6 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with Virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
256
246
Distinct Data Symbol
256
220
Training Symbol
16
18
Pilot Symbol
32
40
Total
304
304
Table 3.52 Composition of EXCH (1.2 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with Virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
512
502
Distinct Data Symbol
512
476
Training Symbol
32
34
Pilot Symbol
64
72
Total
608
608
A-GN4.00-03-TS
200
Table 3.53 Composition of EXCH (2.4 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with Virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
1024
1019
Distinct Data Symbol
1024
1006
Training Symbol
64
65
Pilot Symbol
128
132
Total
1216
1216
Table 3.54 Composition of EXCH (4.8 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with Virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
2048
N/A
Distinct Data Symbol
2048
N/A
Training Symbol
128
N/A
Pilot Symbol
256
N/A
Total
2432
N/A
Table 3.55 Composition of EXCH (9.6 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with Virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
4096
N/A
Distinct Data Symbol
4096
N/A
Training Symbol
256
N/A
Pilot Symbol
512
N/A
Total
4864
N/A
A-GN4.00-03-TS
201
Table 3.56 CRC Unit for EXCH
Parameter
Type1 Type2 Type3 Type4 Type5
Symbol Rate [Msps]
0.6
1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
Number of CRC Units
1
1
2
4
8
Number of Data Symbols w/o Virtual GI Extension
per CRC Unit
with Virtual GI Extension
256
512
512
512
512
250
506
510
N/A
N/A
Number of Distinct Data
Symbols per CRC Unit
w/o Virtual GI Extension
256
512
512
512
512
with Virtual GI Extension
220
476
503
N/A
N/A
3.6.7.2.3 SC Burst Structure for CSCH
Figure 3.120 describes a SC burst format for CSCH. Table 3.57 to Table 3.61 summarize the
composition of CSCH for different symbol rates. Table 3.62 summarizes the composition of CRC
unit in CSCH. Symbols in GI are not counted in these tables. Note that EXCH and CSCH have
the same compositions except for S9.
625 us
900*n kHz (n=1,2,4,8,16)
573.3 us
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Block
Pilot Block
Pilot with Signal
Training Block
Guard Time
sS
sS
data
sS
sS
sS
Figure 3.120 SC Burst Structure for CSCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
202
Table 3.57 Composition of CSCH (0.6 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
256
246
Distinct Data Symbol
256
220
Training Symbol
16
18
Pilot Symbol
32
40
Coded Signal Bit
8
8
304
304
Total*
(*) No encoded signal bit is counted in total.
Table 3.58 Composition of CSCH (1.2 Msps)
w/o virtual GI Extension
with virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
512
502
Distinct Data Symbol
512
476
Training Symbol
32
34
Pilot Symbol
64
72
Coded Signal Bit
16
16
608
608
Total*
(*) No encoded signal bit is counted in total.
Table 3.59 Composition of CSCH (2.4 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with Virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
1024
1019
Distinct Data Symbol
1024
1006
Training Symbol
64
65
Pilot Symbol
128
132
Coded Signal Bit
32
32
1216
1216
Total*
(*) No encoded signal bit is counted in total.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
203
Table 3.60 Composition of CSCH (4.8 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with Virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
2048
N/A
Distinct Data Symbol
2048
N/A
Training Symbol
128
N/A
Pilot Symbol
256
N/A
Coded Signal Bit
64
N/A
2432
N/A
Total*
(*) No encoded signal bit is counted in total.
Table 3.61 Composition of CSCH (9.6 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension
with Virtual GI Extension
Symbol Name
Number of Symbols
Number of Symbols
Data Symbol
4096
N/A
Distinct Data Symbol
4096
N/A
Training Symbol
256
N/A
Pilot Symbol
512
N/A
Coded Signal Bit
256
N/A
4864
N/A
Total*
(*) No encoded signal bit is counted in total.
Table 3.62 CRC Unit for CSCH
Parameter
Type1 Type2 Type3 Type4 Type5
Symbol Rate [Msps]
0.6
1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
Number of CRC Units
1
1
2
4
8
Number of Data Symbols w/o Virtual GI Extension
per CRC Unit
with Virtual GI Extension
256
512
512
512
512
250
506
510
N/A
N/A
Number of Distinct Data
Symbols per CRC Unit
w/o Virtual GI Extension
256
512
512
512
512
with Virtual GI Extension
220
476
503
N/A
N/A
A-GN4.00-03-TS
204
3.6.7.3 CRC Unit for UL SC
Table 3.63 summarizes the CRC unit size for each symbol rate and channel format. In this table,
CRC unit size means the number of bits in one CRC unit. Hence, the actual number of input bits
to the CRC attachment (CRC unit) is 22-bit less than these numbers. Refer to the definition of
CRC unit in Section 3.6.1.
Table 3.63 CRC Unit Size for UL SC
Modulation Total Coding Rate Efficiency Channel
(*)
Symbol Rate [Msps]
0.6
1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
1/2
0.5
CC
120
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1/2
0.5
A,E,CS
128
256
256
256
256
2/3
0.67
170
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1/2
1
256
512
512
512
512
3/4
1.5
384
768
768
768
768
8PSK
2/3
2
512
1024 1024 1024 1024
16QAM
1 /2
2
512
1024 1024 1024 1024
3/4
3
768
1536 1536 1536 1536
4/6
4
1024 2048 2048 2048 2048
5/6
5
1280 2560 2560 2560 2560
6/8
6
1536 3072 3072 3072 3072
π/2-BPSK
π/4-QPSK
64QAM
256QAM
E,CS
7/8
7
(*) CC: CCCH, A: ANCH, E: EXCH, CS: CSCH
1792 3584 3584 3584 3584
3.6.7.4 Transmission Timing of SC Burst for UL SC
Transmission timing is controlled by the BS in ANCH as described in Chapter 4. Since the symbol
rate of EXCH can be different from that of ANCH, relative transmission timing of SC burst should
be changed according to the symbol rate and virtual GI extension size in order to minimize the
inter-carrier interference at BS. Relative transmission timing of the target SC burst (EXCH) is
calculated from the reference SC burst (ANCH) using the following equation.
ts = 0.5( g1-vg1-1)/r1- 0.5(g2-vg2-1)/r2.
r1: Symbol rate of the reference SC burst
g1: GI size of the reference SC burst
vg1: Virtual GI size of the reference SC burst
r2: Symbol rate of the target SC burst
g2: GI size of the target SC burst
A-GN4.00-03-TS
205
vg2: Virtual GI size of the target SC burst
Table 3.64 to Table 3.65 show the relative transmission timing for different symbol rates with or
without virtual GI extension respectively.
Table 3.64 Relative Transmission Timing of SC Burst
Type1
Type2
Type3
Type4
Type5
Symbol Rate [Msps]
0.6
1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
GI Size [symbol]
2
4
8
16
32
Virtual GI Size [symbol]
0
0
0
0
0
Relative Timing [us]
0
-0.417
-0.625
-0.729
-0.781
Table 3.65 Relative Transmission Timing of SC Burst with Virtual GI Extension
Type1
Type2
Type3
Type4
Type5
Symbol Rate [Msps]
0.6
1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
GI size [symbol]
2
4
8
16
32
Virtual GI Size [symbol]
2
2
1
0
0
Relative Timing [us]
0
-1.25
-2.083
-2.396
-2.448
3.6.7.5 Optional SC Burst Structure for UL SC
UL
Refer to 2.5. The quantity N RU
depends on the uplink transmission bandwidth configured in the
min,UL
UL
max,UL
min,UL
max,UL
cell and shall fulfil N RU  N RU
, where N RU
 N RU
 6 and N RU
 110 are the
smallest and largest uplink bandwidths, respectively. The number of SC-FDMA symbols in a slot
depends on the Guard Interval length configured by the higher layer parameter.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
206
Chapter 4 Individual Channel Specification
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the service and operation requirements applied to radio transmission
facilities for XGP.
The concept of protocol structure is described in Chapter 2 based on the ALL-IP network. The
detail of the PHY layer for physical specification including several definitions of physical frame
requirements is described in Chapter 3.
4.1.1 Usage of PRU
XGP carries out control on information transmission necessary for call connection by making use
of common channel (CCH). XGP also carries out control on information to individual user and on
user traffic transmission by making use of individual channel (ICH).
Figure 4.1 shows the access units of the entire channel bandwidth. Time duration of the TDMA
frame is 2.5, 5 or 10 ms and each TDMA frame is divided into UL and DL slots on the time axis.
Their ratio is valiable and the equation for a frame structure is shown in section 2.4.2.2. Effective
channel bandwidth is divided into 900 kHz each to obtain FDMA slots. One unit, covering area of
625 us x 900 kHz, is defined as one physical resource unit (PRU).
TDMA Slots
1
2
3
UL
DL
...
...
900 kHz
Effective
Channel
Bandwidth
Subchannels
n-2
n-1
n
625
us
...
...
PRU
2.5, 5 or 10 ms
Figure 4.1 OFDMA/SC-FDMA/TDMA-TDD
A-GN4.00-03-TS
207
Generally, a certain fixed subchannel will be fit into common channel (CCH). Other FDMA slots
will be used as individual channel (ICH).
4.1.1.1 Common Channel (CCH)
Generally, a certain fixed subchannel is used for the CCH. One PRU pair out of eight PRUs is
used for a BS as CCH. One is in DL and the other is in UL.
4.1.1.2 Individual Channel (ICH)
ICH consists of an anchor channel (ANCH) which is used as a dedicated control channel, extra
channels (EXCH) which are mainly used for the user data transmission, and circuit switching
channels (CSCH) which are used for the user data and control transmission.
Figure 4.2 shows an example to use ICH. The figure shows that four users: User 1, User 2, User
3, and User 4 are connected to a BS. A1 is ANCH for User 1. E1 is EXCH for User 1. A2 is ANCH
for User 2. E2 is EXCH for User 2. C3 is CSCH for User 3. C4 is CSCH for User 4. The figure
shows that User 1 is using four EXCHs, User 2 is using two EXCHs, and User 3 and User 4 are
using one CSCH each.
TDMA Slots
1
UL
2
3
4
1
DL
2
3
4
1
CCH
ICH
2
3
4
5
6
C3
E1
E1
C3
E1
A1
C4
E2
E2
E1
E1
7
C4
E2
E2
E1
A2
E1
…
…
PRU
A2
E1
A1
Figure 4.2 Example of ICH Usage
Every active user is allocated with one PRU as ANCH or CSCH, and it may also be allocated with
either one or more PRU(s) as EXCH. The ANCH and CSCH for every active user is allocated with
the same PRU on every TDMA frame. However, the EXCH PRU allocation will be changed
dynamically in every TDMA frame.
When UL and DL subframe ratio is equal, PRUs of ICH are allocated symmetrically. Symmetrical
PRU stands for a PRU of same TDMA slot, same PRU on both UL and DL. As for ANCH, CSCH
and EXCH, the allocation control is performed in each PRU. In other case, PRUs of ICH are
allocated most asymmetrically in same frame because the number of assigned PRU is difference
between UL and DL.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
208
4.1.1.2.1 PRU Numbering
Figure 4.3 shows the PRU numbering rule. “NSLS” is the number of slot per 1 subframe.
All the given system bands are numbered and are defined as PRU number. MS is given a part of
effective channel bandwidth, and the PRU number in the given band is called logical PRU
number. First PRU means the PRU of the earliest timing and lowest frequency. PRU number is
counted in the direction of a time-axis by order.
Time Axis
SCH1
1
2
SCH2
1+NSLS
2+NSLS
...
NSLS
2NSLS
Frequency Axis
MAP
Origin
SCH
(M-1)
1+(M-2)
x NSLS
2+(M-2)
x NSLS
SCH M
1+(M-1)
x NSLS
2+(M-1)
x NSLS
...
(M-1)
x NSLS
1
2
1+NSLS
2+NSLS
1+(K-2)
x NSLS
2+(K-2)
x NSLS
1+(K-1)
x NSLS
2+(K-1)
x NSLS
M x NSLS
...
NSLS
2NSLS
...
(K-1)
x NSLS
K x NSLS
Logical PRU Numbering
TDMA Subframe
PRU Numbering
Figure 4.3 Rule of PRU Numbering
A-GN4.00-03-TS
209
4.1.1.2.2 PRU Numbering for Asymmetric frame
When TDMA frame structure is asymmetry, MAP needs to indicate larger number of slots either
DL or UL slots. But Logical PRU number is difference between UL and DL. The lower slot’s link,
DL or UL, should interpret same Logical PRU number itself as the othrer link.
Figure 4.4 shows PRU Numbering in case of asymmetric frame. In this case, the ratio of UL to DL
is 1 to 3. PRU numbering and Logical PRU numbering should be interpreted that their numbering
is same as DL. But the number of UL slot is only 2 not 6, Both valid numbering for UL are only 2
slots from leading UL.
Valid slot
1
Invalid slot
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
M -11 M -10 M -9
M -8
M -7
M -6
M -5
M -4
M -3
M -2
M -1
M
...
M AP Origin
Logical PRU Number
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
14
13
14
15
16
17
18
7
8
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
13
14
15
16
17
18
K-11 K-10 K-11 K-10
K-9
K-8
K-7
K-6
K-5
K-3
K-2
K-1
K
Effective
Channel
Bandwidth
Frequency Axis
M -11 M -10 M -11 M -10 M -9
M -8
M -7
M -6
M -5
M -2
M -1
M
M -4
UL TDMA
Slots
M -5
M -4
M -3
DL TDMA
Slots
K-4
K-5
PRU Number
K-4
MAP
Figure 4.4 PRU Numbering in case of asymmetric frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
210
4.1.2 QoS Class (Access Mode)
XGP provides multiple QoS class for user traffic transmission.
4.1.2.1 Fast Access Channel Based on Map (FM-Mode)
Four services of QoS class except PLC (Private Line Class) service are provided using a
communication control method called FM-Mode. In FM-Mode, BS assigns an ANCH as control
channel to MS. BS also assigns EXCH dynamically as traffic channel for data communication. BS
assigns EXCH using information elements in ANCH which changes according to the traffic, radio
conditions etc. In FM-Mode, control information is transmitted by stealing data channel or control
channel as required.
MIMO is expected to use only FM mode.
4.1.2.2 High Quality Channel Based on Carrier Sensing (QS-Mode)
PLC service of QoS class is provided using a communication control method called QS-Mode.
QS-Mode is achieved by making use of a channel called CSCH. BS makes sure that the
frequency band of CSCH resembles circuit switching connection. In addition, CSCH is a high
quality PRU as the result of the carrier sensing on UL and DL are both positive on assigning
PRU.
In QS-Mode, BS transmits control information instead of data to MS as required. BS uses control
channel at CSCH transmission of QS-Mode, which accompanies respective data PRU at all
times.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
211
4.1.3 XGP Protocol Outline
4.1.3.1 Frame Structure
The frame of each layer consists of a header and one data unit or more. Table 4.1 shows the
compositions of the PHY and MAC layer frame.
Table 4.1 Name of Frame Composition
Composition
PHY Layer
MAC Layer
Frame
PHY Frame
MAC Frame
Header
PHY Header
MAC Header
Data Unit
PHY Data Unit MAC Data Unit
Figure 4.5 shows the composition of the PHY and MAC layer frames. In each frame, a header is
put at top of the frame, and is followed by one or more data units. Figure 4.5 shows the order of
bits and octets. Transmission and reception are carried out from the upper bit. First transmission
and reception begin from the Octet 1.
Frame
PHY
PHY Header
Frame
PHY Payload
PHY Trailer
PHY Payload
PHY Data Unit
MAC
Frame
MAC Header
PHY Trailer
PHY Data Unit
MAC Payload
PHY Payload
PHY Trailer
PHY Data Unit
PAD
MAC Data Unit
Bit
8 765 4 3 21
Bit
8 765 4 3 21

Octet 1
Octet 2
Figure 4.5 General Frame Structure
A-GN4.00-03-TS
212
4.1.3.2 Protocol Structure
The protocol structure is shown in Figure 4.6. Basically, protocol layer between MS and BS
consists of a PHY and MAC layer. The PHY layer controls physical wireless line between MS and
BS.
MAC layer controls link establishment, channel assignment, channel quality maintenance etc.
The upper network layer is based on IP protocols. This document describes the specification of
PHY and MAC layer between MS and BS.
(Network
(Network
Layer)
Layer)
Scope of Specification
XGP-MAC
XGP-MAC
MAC
MAC
XGP-PHY
XGP-PHY
PHY
PHY
MS
BS
Network
Figure 4.6 Protocol Stack for XGP
Figure 4.7 shows the protocol structure for MAC control layer. The control messages are
transferred on the MAC-CNT (MAC control) layer of the XGP-MAC layer. These messages are
categorized functionally as mobility Management (MM), and radio frequency transmission
management (RT). In this specification, the message format on MAC layer level is defined in
Section 4.5.4.
Control messages processed between MS and network are transparently sent though on BS
MAC layer.
The packet data is transparently transferred to between MS and network.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
213
(Network
Layer)
MAC-CNT
Scope of Specification
MAC-CNT
XGP-MAC
XGP-MAC
XGP-PHY
XGP-PHY
MS
(Network
Layer)
MAC
MAC
PHY
PHY
Network
BS
Figure 4.7 Protocol Stack for XGP (MAC Control)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
214
4.2 Functional Channel
The channel classified according to the information it carries is defined as a functional channel.
4.2.1 Channel Composition
Figure 4.8 shows channel hierarchy composition. ICH contains CSCH, ANCH and EXCH. ICH is
classified into six functional channels, which are ICCH, ECCH, EDCH, CDCH, TCH and ACCH.
ICH
Individual Channel
For Control
For Control
or Communication
ICCH
Individual Control Channel
ECCH
EXCH Control Channel
ACCH
Accompanied Control Channel
EDCH
EXCH Data Channel
CDCH
CSCH Data Channel
TCH
Traffic Channel
Figure 4.8 Composition of Channels
The correspondence between the functional channels and protocol phase as well as PRU is
shown in Figure 4.9.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
215
PRU
Protocol
Phase Access Establishment Phase
ANCH
ICH
ICCH
Access Phase
ECCH
ICCH
EXCH
EDCH
CSCH
CDCH, ACCH, TCH
Figure 4.9 PRU, Protocol Phase and Functional Channel Correspondence
4.2.1.1 Individual Control Channel (ICCH)
ICCH is an UL/DL bidirectional control channel which is put into allocated PRU as ANCH. It
transmits control information.
ICCH is used with the communication method in both FM-Mode and QS-Mode. And ICCH is used
at not only access establishment phase but also access phase.
4.2.1.2 EXCH Control Channel (ECCH)
ECCH is an UL/DL bidirectional control channel which is put into allocated PRU as ANCH. It
contains some data that can be applied to control channel allocation for EXCH, MCS,
transmission power and timing etc.
ECCH is used in FM-Mode at access phase. ECCH is logically connected with EDCH(s). It
operates like the header of the connected format.
The MCS of ECCH is a fixed rate of BPSK-1/2 for OFDM and π/2-BPSK-1/2 for SC.
4.2.1.3 EXCH Data Channel (EDCH)
EDCH is an UL/DL bidirectional channel which is put into allocated PRU as EXCH. It transmits
user traffic data.
EDCH is used in access phase.
EDCH can change a modulation method in accordance with the state of radio wave
fundamentally, and can execute communication function.
EDCH is used in FM-Mode and it is put into allocated PRU as EXCH. One or more EDCHs are
connected to one ECCH logically to form one format. Then, EDCH operates like the data payload
of the connected format.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
216
4.2.1.4 CSCH Data Channel (CDCH)
CDCH is an UL/DL bidirectional channel which is put into allocated PRU as CSCH. It transmits
user traffic data.
CDCH is used in access phase.
CDCH can change a modulation method in accordance with the state of radio wave
fundamentally, and can execute communication function.
It is replaced in order to transmit control information constantly.
CDCH is used for the data communications in QS-Mode. It is put into allocated PRU as CSCH.
4.2.1.5 Traffic Channel (TCH)
TCH is an UL/DL bidirectional channel which is put into allocated PRU as CSCH.
TCH is used in QS-Mode at access phase to transmit bearer constant rate data fundamentally.
The MCS of TCH is pre-defined and retransmission control is not performed. TCH is transmitted
by the same PRU as ACCH which contains control information.
4.2.1.6 Accompanied Control Channel (ACCH)
ACCH is UL/DL bidirectional control channel which accompanies TCH in allocated PRU as CSCH.
It transmits control information.
ACCH is used by access phase in QS-Mode. Like TCH, the MCS of ACCH is the same as the
payload and retransmission control is not performed.
4.3 Optional Functional Control Channel
The following functional control channels are optional.
Figure 4.10 shows the downlink and uplink control channel composition.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
217
Optional Control Channels for PHY Layer
For Downlink Control
For Uplink Control
(AUANCH)
ADECCH
Advanced Downlink ECCH
ADEFICH
Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel
ADHICH
Advanced Downlink Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel
RCH
Scheduling Request Channel
ACKCH
ACK/NACK Channel
CQICH
CQI Channel
Figure 4.10 Composition of Optional Control Channels
4.3.1 DL Control Channel Composition
4.3.1.1 Advanced Downlink EXCH Control Channel (ADECCH)
4.3.1.1.1 Function of ADECCH
ADECCH is a downlink control channel carrying different Advanced Downlink ECCH Control
Information (ADECI) as defined in 4.4.7 and shall support semi-persistent scheduling. Totally four
ADECCH formats e.g. format 0/1/2/3 are supported and the number of ADECCH bits
corresponding to each format is 72/144/288/576.
4.3.1.1.2 Blind detection for ADECCH
The MS shall monitor two search space (common search space and MS-specific search space) in
the ADECCH region and attempt to decode the different ADECI formats carried on ADECCH
blindly in some certain candidate locations. The common search space carries on common
control information such as system information, paging information, and power control information.
The MS-specific search space carries on the uplink and downlink data scheduling information and
other control information for a certain MS. The candidate locations for ADECI format detection are
decided by the start location and different ADECCH formats. for the MS-specific search space
and is a fixed value for the common search space.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
218
The ADECI formats that the MS shall monitor depend on the configured AMT as defined in the
ADEDCH part.
4.3.1.2 Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel (ADEFICH)
ADEFICH is a downlink control channel carrying the information about the number of OFDM
symbols used for transmission of ADECCH in a slot. The set of OFDM symbols possibly used for
ADECCH in a slot is given in Table 4.2.
Table 4.2 Number of OFDM Symbols Used for ADECCH
Slot
Slot 1 and 6
All Other Cases
Number of OFDM
Symbols for ADECCH
DL
when N RU
 10
1, 2
1, 2, 3
4.3.1.3 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel (ADHICH)
ADHICH is a downlink control channel which carries the hybrid-ARQ ACK/NAK for UL data.
4.3.2 Uplink Control Channel Composition
4.3.2.1 AUANCH/RCH
RCH carries the Scheduling Request (SR) indication. The SR is received from higher layers.
4.3.2.2 AUANCH/ACKCH
ACKCH carries the uplink acknowledgement (ACK) field of corresponding received data in
downlink.
4.3.2.3 AUANCH/CQICH
CQICH carries the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI). CQICH also carries the Rank Indication (RI)
and Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) in case of MIMO.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
219
4.4 PHY Layer Structure and Frame Format
4.4.1 PHY Frame Structure
There are three PHY frame types including ANCH, EXCH, and CSCH.
ICCH, ECCH, EDCH, CDCH, TCH and ACCH are functional channels put into PHY frame.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
220
4.4.1.1 ANCH/ICCH
Figure 4.11 shows ANCH frame structure which contains ICCH for protocol version 1. The ANCH
contains PHY header, ICCH, CRC and TAIL bits.
Fixed Modulation, Interleave Unit
ICCH
PHY Header
TAIL
PHY Header
CRC
Scramble
Area
CRC Calculation
Area
PHY Data Unit
Figure 4.11 PHY Frame Format of ANCH/ICCH for protocol version 1
Figure 4.12 shows ANCH frame structure which contains ICCH for protocol version 2. The ANCH
contains PHY header, ICCH, CRC and TAIL bits.
A part of PHY control is used as signal symbol with hamming code. (Refer to Section 3.4.5). The
signal symbol is not included in the application range of CRC calculation.
Signal
Symbol
PHY
Control
Scramble
Adaptive Modulation, Interleave Unit
PHY Header
PHY Header
ICCH
TAIL
Data
Symbol
CRC
Scramble
Area
CRC Calculation
Area
PHY Data Unit
Figure 4.12 PHY Frame Format of ANCH/ICCH for protocol version 2
A-GN4.00-03-TS
221
4.4.1.2 ANCH/ECCH
Figure 4.13 shows the ANCH frame structure which contains ECCH for protocol version 1. The
ANCH contains PHY header, ECCH, CRC and TAIL bits.
Fixed Modulation, Interleave Unit
ECCH
PHY Header
TAIL
PHY Header
CRC
Scramble
Area
CRC Calculation
Area
PHY Data Unit
Figure 4.13 PHY Frame Format of ANCH/ECCH for protocol version 1
Figure 4.14 shows the ANCH frame structure which contains ECCH for protocol version 2. The
ANCH contains PHY header, ECCH, CRC and TAIL bits.
A part of PHY control is used as signal symbol with hamming code. (Refer to Section 3.4.5). The
signal symbol is not included in the application range of CRC calculation.
Signal
Symbol
PHY
Control
Scramble
Adaptive Modulation, Interleave
Unit
Scramble
PHY Header
PHY Header
ECCH
TAIL
Data
Symbol
CRC
Area
CRC Calculation
Area
PHY Data Unit
Figure 4.14 PHY Frame Format of ANCH/ECCH for protocol version 2
A-GN4.00-03-TS
222
4.4.1.3 EXCH/EDCH
Figure 4.15 shows EXCH/EDCH frame structure which consists of one or more EXCH(s) except
for EMB-MIMO. The EXCH contains EDCH, CRC and TAIL bits.
Adaptive Modulation, Interleave
Unit
Scramble
EDCH
TAIL
CRC
Area
CRC Calculation
Area
One or Two PRUs
PHY Data Unit
Figure 4.15 PHY Frame Format of EXCH/EDCH except for EMB-MIMO
Figure 4.16 shows EXCH/EDCH frame structure which consists of one or more EXCH(s) for
EMB-MIMO. The EXCH contains EDCH, CRC and TAIL bits.
A part of PHY control is used as signal symbol with hamming code. (Refer to Section 3.4.5). The
signal symbol is not included in the application range of CRC calculation.
Signal
Symbol
PHY
Control
Scramble
Adaptive Modulation, Interleave
EDCH
TAIL
Data
Symbol
CRC
Unit
Scramble
Area
CRC Calculation
Area
One PRU
PHY Data Unit
A-GN4.00-03-TS
223
Figure 4.16 PHY Frame Format of EXCH/EDCH for EMB-MIMO
4.4.1.3.1 PRU Combining
The PHY frame is made up of one or more PRUs. UL and DL PHY frame format is defined in the
following sections. PHY frame is created by combining the payloads of PRU(s) specified by the
MAP field. (Refer to Section 4.4.6.8 for MAP field). Figure 4.17 shows order of constructing PHY
frame. PRUs specified with MAP are connected in the direction of frequency.
Time Axis
Frequency
Axis
TDMA
Slots
Figure 4.17 Order of Logical PRU Combining
A-GN4.00-03-TS
224
4.4.1.4 CSCH/TCH
Figure 4.18 shows CSCH frame structure. CSCH/TCH consists of a PHY header, ACCH, TCH,
CRC and TAIL bits.
A part of PHY control is used as signal symbol with hamming code. (Refer to Section 3.4.5). The
signal symbol is not included in the application range of CRC calculation.
Signal
Symbol
PHY
Control
Scramble
Adaptive Modulation, Interleave
PHY Control
PHY Header
ACCH
Payloa
TCH
TAIL
Data
Symbol
CRC
Unit
Scramble
Area
CRC Calculation
Area
PHY Data Unit
d
Figure 4.18 PHY Frame Format
of CSCH/TCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
225
4.4.1.5 CSCH/CDCH
Figure 4.19 shows CSCH frame structure. CSCH/CDCH consists of a PHY header, CDCH, CRC
and TAIL bits.
A part of PHY control is used as signal symbol with hamming code. (Refer to Section 3.4.5). The
signal symbol is not included in the application range of CRC calculation.
Signal
Symbol
PHY
Control
Scramble
Adaptive Modulation, Interleave
PHY Control
PHY Header
CDCH
TAIL
Data
Symbol
CRC
Unit
Scramble
Area
CRC Calculation
Area
PHY Data Unit
Figure 4.19 PHY Frame Format of CSCH/CDCH
4.4.1.6 AUANCH/RCH
RCH carries the Scheduling Request (SR) indication. The SR is received from higher layers. For
SR, information is carried by the presence/absence of transmission of RCH from the MS.
d (0)  1 shall be assumed in case of the presence of transmission of RCH.
Figure 4.20 illustrates the half-slot structure for RCH.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
226
180 kHz
500 us
Pilot Block
Data Block
sS
sS
Figure 4.20 Half-slot Structure for RCH
In case of simultaneous transmission of sounding pilot and RCH, the last data block on RCH shall
be punctured within the slot.
The symbol d (0) shall be transmitted on all data blocks. Two block-wise spread codes are
applied to the pilot blocks and the data blocks within each half-slot, respectively. Table 4.3 and
Table 4.4 show the block-wise spread codes for the data blocks with a length of 4 and 3
respectively. Table 4.5 shows the block-wise spread codes for the pilot blocks.
Table 4.3
Block-wise Spread Codes for Data Blocks with a Length of 4
Code Index Block Codes
0
[+1, +1, +1, +1]
1
[+1, -1, +1, -1]
2
[+1, -1, -1, +1]
Table 4.4
Block-wise Spread Codes for Data Blocks with a Length of 3
Code Index
Block Codes
0
[+1, +1, +1]
[1, e j 2 / 3 , e j 4 / 3 ]
1
[1, e j 4 / 3 , e j 2 / 3 ]
2
A-GN4.00-03-TS
227
Table 4.5 Block-wise spread codes for pilot blocks
Code index
Block codes
0
[+1, +1, +1]
[1, e j 2 / 3 , e j 4 / 3 ]
1
[1, e j 4 / 3 , e j 2 / 3 ]
2
The SR shall be transmitted on the RCH resource which is MS specific and configured by higher
layers. The higher layer configured parameters include SR transmission periodicity SRPeriodicity and
slot offset NOFFSET,SR. SR transmission instances are the slots satisfying
10  n
f
 ns / 2  N OFFSET , SR mod SRPeriodicity  0 , where n f is the system frame number,
and ns = {0,1,…, 19} is the half-slot index within the frame.
4.4.1.7 AUANCH/ACKCH
ACKCH carries the uplink acknowledgement (ACK) field of corresponding received data in
downlink. This field is used for the acknowledgement of PHY layer retransmission control, such
as HARQ. The ACK/NACK bits are received per codeword from higher layers.
Figure 4.21 illustrates the half-slot structure for ACKCH.
180 kHz
500 us
Pilot Block
Data Block
sS
sS
A-GN4.00-03-TS
228
Figure 4.21 Half-slot Structure for ACKCH
In case of simultaneous transmission of sounding pilot and ACKCH, the last SC-FDMA symbol on
ACKCH shall be punctured.
For ACKCH, one or two explicit bits are transmitted, respectively. The block of bits
b(0),..., b(M bit  1) shall be modulated as described in Table 4.6, resulting in a complex-valued
symbol d (0) . The symbol d (0) shall be transmitted on all data blocks. Two block-wise spread
codes are applied to the pilot blocks and the data blocks respectively. Table 4.3 and Table 4.4
show the block-wise spread codes for the data blocks with a length of 4 and 3 respectively. Table
4.5 shows the block-wise spread codes for the pilot blocks.
Table 4.6
Modulation Symbol d (0) for ACKCH
b(0),...,b(M bit  1)
d (0)
0
1
00
01
10
11
1
1
1
j
j
1
4.4.1.8 AUANCH/CQICH
CQICH carries the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI). CQICH also carries the Rank Indication (RI)
and Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) in case of MIMO.
Figure 4.22 illustrates the half-slot structure for CQICH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
229
180 kHz
500 us
Pilot Block
Data Block
sS
sS
Figure 4.22 Half-slot Structure for CQICH
The channel quality bits input to the channel coding block are denoted by a0 , a1 , a 2 , a3 ,...,a A1
where A is the number of bits. The number of channel quality bits depends on the transmission
format.
The channel quality indication is coded with the (20, A) code.
The block of coded bits b(0),..., b(19) shall firstly be QPSK modulated as described in Appendix
B.10.2, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols d (0),...,d (9) . The i-th
modulated symbol is transmitted on the i-th data block within the slot.
4.4.2 Signal Symbol
4.4.2.1 Signal Symbol Structure
Figure 4.23 shows signal symbol structure for CSCH. It consists of MI only.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for MI field.
MSB
LSB
MI(4)
Signal
Symbol
Figure 4.23 Signal Symbol Structure for CSCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
230
Figure 4.24 shows signal symbol structure for ANCH in case of protocol version 2. It consists of
AMI only.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for AMI field.
MSB
LSB
AMI(4)
Signal
Symbol
Figure 4.24 Signal Symbol Structure for ANCH(protocol version 2)
Figure 4.25 shows signal symbol structure for EDCH in case of EMB-MIMO. It consists of EMI
only.
MSB
LSB
EMI(8)
Signal
Symbol
Figure 4.25 Signal Symbol Structure in case of EMB-MIMO
4.4.3 PHY Header
4.4.3.1 PHY Header Structure
A PRU format, functional channel type, and the direction of a link determine the format of a PHY
header.
4.4.3.1.1 ANCH/ECCH PHY Header Structure
Figure 4.26 shows ANCH/ECCH PHY header structure. It consists of only CI.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for CI field.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
231
MSB
LSB
CI(2)
PHY
Header
Figure 4.26 PHY Header Structure of ANCH/ECCH
4.4.3.1.2 ANCH/ICCH PHY Header Structure
Figure 4.27 shows ANCH/ICCH PHY header format for protocol version 1. DL ANCH/ICCH PHY
header format consists of CI, SD and APC. UL ANCH/ICCH PHY header format consists of CI
and APC.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
MSB
LSB
CI(2)
SD(2)
CI(2)
APC
(1)
DL
UL
APC
(1)
Reserved
(3)
Reserved(5)
PHY Header
Figure 4.27 PHY Header Structure of ANCH/ICCH for protocol version 1
Figure 4.28 shows ANCH/ICCH PHY header format for protocol version 2. DL ANCH/ICCH PHY
header format consists of CI, SD, APC and AMR. UL ANCH/ICCH PHY header format consists of
CI, APC and AMR.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
232
MSB
LSB
CI(2)
SD(2)
CI(2)
APC
(1)
DL
UL
AMR
(4)
APC
(1)
AMR
(4)
Reserved
(7)
Reserved(1)
PHY Header
PHY Header
Figure 4.28 PHY Header Structure of ANCH/ICCH for protocol version 2
4.4.3.1.3 CSCH/CDCH PHY Header Structure
Figure 4.29 shows the structure of UL/DL CSCH/CDCH PHY header.
DL CSCH/CDCH PHY header contains CI, MR, SD, PC and ACK. UL CSCH/CDCH PHY header
contains CI, MR, PC and ACK.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
MSB
DL
UL
LSB
CI(2)
MR(4)
SD(2)
PC(1)
ACK(1) Reserved
(6)
CI(2)
MR(4)
PC(1)
ACK(1)
Reserved
(8)
linkLink
PHY Header
Figure 4.29 PHY Header Structure of CSCH/CDCH
4.4.3.1.4 CSCH/TCH PHY Header Structure
Figure 4.30 shows the structure of UL/DL PHY header of CSCH/TCH. CI, MR, SD, and PC are
contained in DL PHY header. CI, MR and PC are contained in UL PHY header.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
233
MSB
DL
UL
LSB
CI(2)
MR(4)
SD(2)
CI(2)
MR(4)
PC(1)
PC(1)
Reserved
(7)
Reserved
(9)
PHY Header
Figure 4.30 PHY Header Structure of CSCH/TCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
234
4.4.3.1.5 ECCH PHY Header Structure
Figure 4.31 shows the configuration of the ANCH/ECCH PHY header structure for protocol
version 1.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
PHY Header
ECCH
MSB
LSB
DL ANCH
PHY Payload Structure
MAP
(72)
SD
(2)
APC
(1)
PC
(4)
ACK
(36)
V
(7)
MI MR
(16) (16)
HC
(1)
Reserved
(7)
UL OFDM ANCH
PHY Payload Structure
RCH
(7)
APC
(1)
PC
(1)
ACK
(36)
V
MI MR
(20) (16) (16)
HC
(1)
Reserved
(64)
UL SC ANCH
PHY Payload Structure
RCH
(7)
APC
(1)
PC
(1)
ACK
(36)
V
MI MR
(20) (16) (16)
HC
(1)
Reserved
(6)
Figure 4.31 Configuration of ANCH for protocol version 1
Figure 4.32 shows the configuration of the ANCH/ECCH PHY header structure for protocol
version 2.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
PHY Header
ECCH
MSB
DL ANCH
PHY Payload
Structure
UL OFDM ANCH
PHY Payload
Structure
LSB
SD APC PC HC AMR MT MI MR SI
(2) (1) ( * ) (1) ( 4) (2) ( * ) ( * ) (2)
APC PC HC AMR MT MI MR SI
(1) (1) (1) (4) (2) ( * ) ( * ) (2)
SR BI
(2) (10)
SR RCH
(2) (7)
MAP,ACK,V
and Reserved
(*)
ACK,V and Reserved
(*)
( * ) Depended on TDMA frame structure and ANCH MCS
Figure 4.32 Configuration of ANCH for protocol version 2
A-GN4.00-03-TS
235
4.4.3.2 ECCH
ECCH is used as PHY header (Refer to Section 4.4.3.1.5).
4.4.3.2.1 CRC Error Happening on the ANCH
Table 4.7 shows the processing of MS when the CRC error happens on the DL ANCH.
MS cannot recognize the MAP field indicated by DL ANCH when it is an error. As a result, MS
cannot transmit UL EXCH in the frame that the MAP cannot recognize. Then, MS sets V to 0 in
UL ANCH of the frame, and it cannot recognize the ACK field indicated by DL ANCH when it is an
error either. As a result, MS cannot recognize the receiving state of UL EXCH in a corresponding
frame. In this case, MS will set HC to 1 in the UL ANCH, and will inform that HARQ is canceled to
BS.
Furthermore, MS cannot recognize the DL EXCH assignment by DL ANCH when it is an error. As
a result, MS sets all bits of ACK to 1 in the corresponding UL ANCH.
Table 4.7 Processing when CRC Error Happens in DL ANCH
Name
MAP
ACK
SD
PC, APC
V
HC
MI
MR
AMI
AMR
MT
SI
SR
BI
Processing
Act as no bandwidth is allocated.
It is impossible to identify whether ACK or NACK.
Current transmission timing is maintained.
A current TX power is maintained.
It treats as 0.
It is set HARQ cancel.(HC=1)
Act as no bandwidth is allocated.
Valid MR most recently received is used.
Act as no bandwidth is allocated.
Valid AMR most recently received is used.
It treats as 0.
It treats as 0.
Valid SR most recently received is used.
Valid BI most recently received is used.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
236
Table 4.8 shows the processing when the CRC error happens on the UL ANCH.
BS cannot recognize the ACK field indicated by UL ANCH when it is an error. Therefore, BS
cannot recognize the receiving state of DL EXCH in a corresponding frame. In this case, BS will
set HC to 1 in the DL ANCH of the timing which retransmits data, and will inform that HARQ is
canceled to MS.
Additionally, BS cannot recognize the MI and V field indicated by UL ANCH when it is an error.
AS a result, BS cannot receive UL EXCH in the frame. Then, BS sets all bits of ACK to 1 in the
corresponding DL ANCH.
Table 4.8 Processing when Error Happens in UL ANCH
Name
RCH
ACK
PC , APC
V
HC
MI
MR
AMI
AMR
MT
SI
SR
Processing
Act as if no bandwidth assignment request has been sent.
If CRC error happens, it is impossible to identify whether it is.
A current TX power is maintained.
It treats as 0.
It is set HARQ cancel.(HC=1)
Act as no bandwidth is allocated.
Valid MR most recently received is used.
Act as no bandwidth is allocated.
Valid AMR most recently received is used.
It treats as 0.
It treats as 0.
Valid SR most recently received is used.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
237
4.4.4 PHY Payload
4.4.4.1 PHY Payload Structure
Figure 4.33 shows the configuration of PHY payload.
PHY Payload
MAC Frame
Figure 4.33 Configuration of PHY Payload
4.4.5 PHY Trailer
4.4.5.1 CRC
The PHY payload length and CRC length are changed flexibly according to the MCS. In this
section, PHY payload length, and CRC length is defined according to the MCS and the PHY data
unit.
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Code) 16 is inserted. Section 4.4.1 shows the range of the CRC
calculation.
4.4.5.2 TAIL
TAIL field is inserted so that the state of the shift register of the convolutional encoding module
becomes empty. Assuming K is the constraint length of error correction, then TAIL bit length is
K-1 bits. Number of TAIL bits is 6.
4.4.6 PHY Control Layer
This section explains each field in the PHY frame.
4.4.6.1 Channel Identifier (CI)
CI shows what kind of information has been transmitted by PRU.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
238
4.4.6.1.1 CI of ANCH
It indicates the channel identifier of PHY payload in FM-Mode. Table 4.9 shows the values of the
CI field.
Table 4.9 Value of CI Field
Bit
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Channel Identifier of PHY Payload
ANCH/ICCH
ANCH/ECCH
Reserved
Reserved
4.4.6.1.2 CI of CSCH
It indicates the channel identifier of PHY payload indicated in QS-Mode. Table 4.10 shows the
value of the CI field.
Table 4.10 Value of CI Field
Bit
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Channel Identifier of PHY Payload
CSCH/TCH
CSCH/CDCH
Reserved
Reserved
4.4.6.2 Shift Direction (SD)
SD controls the UL transmission timing of the MS. Table 4.11 specifies the value of the SD field
and its corresponding processing. (Refer to Section 9.5.2).
Table 4.11 Value of SD Field
Bit
Operation of MS
2
1
0
0
Stay
0
1
One Step Backward
1
0
Two Steps Forward
1
1
One Step Forward
(Note) Unit = 30 / (512 + 64) us
A-GN4.00-03-TS
239
4.4.6.3 ANCH Power Control (APC)
APC controls the transmission power of the ANCH of the MS so that signals from different MSs
will be received by BS at the same level. Because once UL radio wave which has different
reception level is detected, BS will control the UL transmission power either by increasing or
decreasing APC field according to the UL reception level for each MS. (Refer to Section 9.5.1).
Table 4.12 Value of APC Field
APC
Operation of MS
Value
0
Decrease transmission power.
1
Increase transmission power.
(Note) Unit = 1 dB
4.4.6.4 Power Control (PC)
PC controls the transmission power of the EXCH or CSCH of the MS so that signals from
different MSs will be received by BS at the same level. Because once UL radio wave which has
different reception level is detected, BS will control the UL transmission power either by
increasing or decreasing PC field according to the UL reception level for each MS. (Refer to
Section 9.5.1).
Table 4.13 Value of PC Field
PC Value
Operation of MS
0
Decrease transmission power.
1
Increase transmission power.
(Note) Unit = 1 dB
A-GN4.00-03-TS
240
UL ECCH contains power control fields for 1 frame by 1 bit, and DL ECCH contains power control
fields for each slot, and controls each slot separately. Table 4.14 shows the PC field of each slot.
This field length of DL ECCH is depended on TDMA frame structure as the number of UL slots
“NUSL”.
Table 4.14 PC Field Composition
Controlled Slot
First Bit
Slot 1
Second Bit
Slot 2
…
…
Last Bit
Slot NUSL
Uplink power control controls the transmit power of the different optional uplink physical channels.
The current maximum power can not exceed the configured MS transmitted power. The MS
Transmit power for the AUEDCH transmission is mainly determined by the bandwidth of the
AUEDCH resource assignment, pathloss and the value configured in TPC command. TPC
command is included in ADECCH with ADECI format 0 or jointly coded with other TPC
commands in ADECCH with ADECI format 3/3A whose CRC parity bits are scrambled with
TPC-AUEDCH-MSID. The MS Transmit power for the Sounding Pilot transmission is based on
the MS Transmit power for the AUEDCH transmission and some adjustment is introduced.
The MS Transmit power for the AUANCH transmission is mainly determined by a AUANCH
format dependent value and TPC command. TPC command is included in a ADECCH with
ADECI format 1A/1B/1D/1/2A/2 or sent jointly coded with other MS specific AUANCH correction
values on a ADECCH with ADECI format 3/3A whose CRC parity bits are scrambled with
TPC-AUANCH-MSID.
4.4.6.5 MCS Indicator (MI) and MCS Request (MR)
The MI field indicates the MCS of the adaptive modulation part in the DL PHY frame. The MR
field indicates the UL MCS requested by the MS according to the result of the UL signal
monitoring. Table 4.15 and Table 4.16 show the correspondence between each field and the
MCS.
Table 4.15 MCSs for OFDM
Bit
4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
Modulation Class
BPSK
QPSK
Reserved
16QAM
Puncturing Rate
Efficiency
1
0.5
3/4
0.67
1
1
4/6
1.5
-
-
1
2
4/6
3
A-GN4.00-03-TS
241
Bit
4 3 2 1
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
Modulation Class
64QAM
256QAM
Puncturing Rate
Efficiency
3/4
4
6/10
5
4/6
6
8/14
7
Table 4.16 MCSs for SC
Bit
4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
Modulation Class
π/2-BPSK
π/4-QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM
Puncturing Rate
Efficiency
1
0.5
3/4
0.67
1
1
4/6
1.5
3/4
2
1
2
4/6
3
3/4
4
6/10
5
4/6
6
8/14
7
4.4.6.5.1 MI and MR in ECCH
In ECCH MI and MR are specified for every slot. Figure 4.34 shows the structure of the MI/MR
field in ECCH. This field length is depended on TDMA frame structure as the number of UL slots
“NUSL“ and DL slots “NDSL”.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
242
MSB
Slot 1 MI
4
LSB
MI
MR
4 x the number of slots N
4 x the number of slots N
Slot 2 MI
4
…
Slot N MI Slot 1 MR Slot 2 MR
4
4
4
…
Slot N MR
4
Figure 4.34 MI and MR Indication in ECCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
243
4.4.6.5.1.1 MI Indication Timing of DL
Figure 4.35 shows an example of MI indication timing. DL MI applies to the EXCH to which the
MAP is in the same ANCH points in case of 5ms frame. DL MI indicates MCS of DL EXCH of one
frame after in case of (a) timing 1, and indicates MCS of DL EXCH two frames after in the case of
(b) timing 2. The definitions of timing 1 and 2 refer to Section 6.4.1.1.1.
The response timing between MS and BS is negotiated in access establishment phase.
MAP and MI
ANCH
5 ms
Time
DL
UL
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(a) Timing 1 Allocation
ANCH
MAP and MI
5 ms
Time
DL
UL
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(b) Timing 2 Allocation
Figure 4.35 Example of DL MI Indication Timing in ECCH on 5 ms frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
244
4.4.6.5.1.2 MI Indication Timing of UL
Figure 4.36 shows an example of MI indication timing. Regardless of MAP allocation timing, UL
MI applies to UL EXCH of the same frame as the UL ANCH that contains the MI.
5 ms
MAP
ANCH
Time
MI
DL
UL
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(a) Timing 1 Allocation
5 ms
Time
MI
DL
UL
MAP
ANCH
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(b) Timing 2 Allocation
Figure 4.36 Example of UL MI Indication Timing in ECCH on 5ms frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
245
4.4.6.5.2 MI and MR in CSCH
In CSCH, MI and MR show the MCS of the PRU itself under communication.
4.4.6.5.2.1 MI Indication Timing of DL
Figure 4.37 shows the frame position where MI field of DL PHY header is applied. MI applies to
the DL PHY payload following DL PHY header in the same frame.
DL
UL
MI
5 ms
Time
Figure 4.37 DL MI Indication Timing in CSCH
4.4.6.5.2.2 MI Indication Timing of UL
Figure 4.38 shows the frame position where MI field of UL PHY header is applied. MI applies to
the UL PHY payload following UL PHY header in the same frame.
5 ms
Time
MI
DL
UL
Figure 4.38 UL MI Indication Timing in CSCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
246
4.4.6.6 Acknowledgement (ACK)
This field indicates the acknowledgement of corresponding received data.
Table 4.17 shows the value of the ACK field. This field is used for the acknowledgement of PHY
layer retransmission control, such as HARQ. Each ACK is encoded as a binary ‘1’ and each
NACK is encoded as a binary ‘0’.
Table 4.17 Value of ACK Field
ACK Value
Description
0
0 stands for NACK.
1
1 stands for ACK.
4.4.6.6.1 ACK in ECCH
This field indicates the acknowledgement of the data. The acknowledgement bit and the EDCHs
correspond to each other in connected order of the PRU. The acknowledgement bits are allotted
from the head corresponding to the EDCHs of the frame. (Refer to Section 9.2). The frame
corresponds to the acknowledgement concerned transmission frame. ACK bits corresponding to
the unused acknowledgement field are assumed invalid.
ECCH
EDCH
EDCH
MSB
ACK Field
First bit
1
EDCH
......
LSB
2
3
....
Time
Figure 4.39 Correspondence between EDCH and ACK Field
A-GN4.00-03-TS
247
The number of DL ACK “NDACK” and UL ACK “NUACK” for protocol version 1 is defined as 36bits.
ACK for protocol version 2 depends on the number of effective SCH and the number of “reverse
link stream” and TDMA frame structure. The number of ACK for protocol version 2 should be
calculated as follows.
N 
N DACK  N SL   SCH   NUST
 2 
N 
NUACK  N SL   SCH   N DST
 2 
,where “NDST” denotes the number of stream (SI) for DL. “NUST” denotes the number of stream
(SI) for UL. ,where “NSL” denotes larger number of DL and UL slots, either “NDSL” or “NUSL”.
  denotes ceil function.
4.4.6.6.1.1 Response Timing of DL ACK
DL ACK is generated based on CRC calculation and sent in the DL ANCH that comes three
frames after UL EXCH reception.
5 ms
ACK
ANCH
DL
UL
Time
EXC
Time
DL
UL
Figure 4.40 DL ACK Response Timing
A-GN4.00-03-TS
248
4.4.6.6.1.2 Response Timing of UL ACK
Figure 4.41 shows UL ACK response timing. UL ACK is generated based on CRC calculation and
sent in UL ANCH which comes two frames after DL EXCH reception.
5 ms
ANCH
Time
ACK
DL
UL
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
Figure 4.41 UL ACK Response Timing
4.4.6.6.2 ACK in CDCH
This field indicates the acknowledgement of the data.
4.4.6.6.2.1 Response Timing of DL ACK
Figure 4.42 shows the frame position where ACK field of DL PHY header is applied. DL ACK is
generated based on CRC calculation and sent in the DL CDCH that comes 7.5 ms after UL
CDCH reception.
DL
UL
ACK
5 ms
Time
Figure 4.42 DL ACK Response Timing
A-GN4.00-03-TS
249
4.4.6.6.2.2 Response Timing of UL ACK
Figure 4.43 shows the frame position where ACK field of UL PHY header is applied. UL ACK is
generated based on CRC calculation and sent in the UL CDCH that comes 7.5 ms after UL
CDCH reception.
5 ms
Time
ACK
DL
UL
Figure 4.43 UL ACK Response Timing
4.4.6.6.3 ACK in AUANCH/ACKCH
This field indicates the ACK response of the received downlink data. The ACK/NACK bits are
received per codeword from higher layers.
Two ACK/NACK feedback modes are supported on ACKCH through higher layer configuration.
- ACK/NACK bundling and
- ACK/NACK multiplexing
4.4.6.6.3.1 Response Timing of UL ACK
The MS shall upon detection of a ADEDCH transmission or a ADECCH indicating downlink SPS
release within slot(s) n  k , where k  K and K is defined in Table 4.18 intended for the MS
and for which ACK/NACK response shall be provided, transmit the ACK/NACK response in UL
slot n.
Table 4.18 Downlink association set index
UL-DL
Configuration 0 1
K  k0 , k1 ,kM 1
Slot n
2
3 4 5 6
7
8 9
-
-
6
-
0
-
-
6
1
-
-
7, 6
2
-
3
-
4 -
4 -
-
-
7, 6
- 8, 7, 4, 6
-
-
-
8, 7, 4, 6
-
7 5 -
-
7
7
-
4
4 -
-
7 -
A-GN4.00-03-TS
250
4.4.6.6.3.2 ACK/NACK bundling
ACK/NACK bundling is performed per codeword across M multiple DL slots associated with a
single UL slot n, where M is the number of elements in the set K defined in Table 4.18, by a
logical AND operation of all the individual ADEDCH transmission (with and without corresponding
ADECCH) ACK/NACKs and ACK in response to ADECCH indicating downlink SPS release. The
bundled 1 or 2 ACK/NACK bits are transmitted using ACKCH.
(1)
For ACK/NACK bundling, the MS shall use ACKCH resource nACKCH
for transmission of ACK
response in slot n , where
- If there is ADEDCH transmission indicated by the detection of corresponding ADECCH or
there is ADECCH indicating DL SPS release within slot(s) n  k , where k  K is a set of M
elements k0 ,k1 , kM 1 depending on the slot n and the UL-DL configuration, the MS first
selects a p value out of {0, 1, 2, 3} which makes N p  n1C  N p 1 and shall use
(1)
(1)
(1)
, where K is defined in Table 4.18, nACKCH
is
nACKCH
 (M - m -1)  N p  m  Np 1  n1C  NACKCH
DL
configured by higher layers, N p  max 0, [ N RU
 ( N scRU  p  4)] / 36 , and n1C is the
number of the first cluster of RP group used for transmission of the corresponding ADECCH
in slot n  km and the corresponding m, where k m is the smallest value in set K such that
MS detects a ADECCH in slot n  km .
- If there is only a ADEDCH transmission where there is not a corresponding ADECCH detected
(1)
within slot(s) n  k , where k  K and K is defined in Table 4.18, the value of nACKCH
is
determined according to higher layer configuration.
For ACK/NACK bundling, if the MS detects that at least one downlink assignment has been
missed, the MS shall not transmit ACK/NACK in case the MS is not transmitting on AUEDCH.
4.4.6.6.3.3 ACK/NACK multiplexing
For ACK/NACK multiplexing and a slot n with M  1 , where M is the number of elements in the
set K defined in Table 4.18, spatial ACK/NACK bundling across multiple codewords within a
DL slot is performed by a logical AND operation of all the corresponding individual ACK/NACKs
and ACKCH with channel selection is used. For ACK/NACK multiplexing and a slot n with M  1,
spatial ACK/NACK bundling across multiple codewords within a DL slot is not performed, 1 or 2
ACK/NACK bits are transmitted using ACKCH.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
251
For ACK/NACK multiplexing and a slot n with M  1 where M is the number of elements in
(1)
the set K defined in Table 4.18, the MS shall use ACKCH resource nACKCH
for transmission
of ACK response in slot n , where
- If there is ADEDCH transmission indicated by the detection of corresponding ADECCH or
there is ADECCH indicating DL SPS release within slot(s) n  k , where k  K is a set of M
elements
k0 , k1 ,kM 1
depending on the slot n and the UL-DL configuration, the MS first
selects a p value out of {0, 1, 2, 3} which makes N p  n1C  N p1 and shall use
1)
(1)
, where K is defined in Table
n (ACKCH
 ( M  m  1)  N p  m  N p1  n1C  N ACKCH
(1)
DL
4.18, nACKCH
is configured by higher layers, N p  max 0, [ N RU
 ( N scRU  p  4)] / 36, and
n1C is the number of the first cluster of RP group used for transmission of the corresponding
ADECCH in slot
n  km and the corresponding m, where km is the smallest value in set
K such that MS detects a ADECCH in slot n  k m .
- If there is only a ADEDCH transmission where there is not a corresponding ADECCH detected
(1)
within slot(s) n  k , where k  K and K is defined in Table 4.18, the value of nACKCH
is
determined according to higher layer configuration.
For ACK/NACK multiplexing and slot n with M  1, where M is the number of elements in
(1)
the set K defined in Table 4.18, denote nACKCH,
i as the ACKCH resource derived from slot
n  ki and HARQ-ACK(i) as the ACK response from slot n  ki , where ki  K (defined in
Table 4.18) and 0  i  M  1.
- For a ADEDCH transmission or a ADECCH indicating downlink SPS release in slot n  ki
1)
(1)
p is
where ki  K , n (ACKCH
,i  ( M  i  1)  N p  i  N p 1  n1C ,i  N ACKCH , where
A-GN4.00-03-TS
252
selected
from
{0,
1,
2,
3}
such
N p  n1C  N p1
that
,
DL
N p  max 0, [ N RU
 ( N scRU  p  4)] / 36, n1C,i is the number of the first cluster of RP group
(1)
used for transmission of the corresponding ADECCH in slot n  ki , and N ACKCH
is
configured by higher layers.
- For a ADEDCH transmission where there is not a corresponding ADECCH detected in slot
(1)
n  ki , the value of nACKCH,
i is determined according to higher layer configuration.
For ACK/NACK multiplexing and slot n with M  1, the MS shall transmit a QPSK symbol on a
(1)
selected ACKCH resource nACKCH
in slot n according to the M ACK responses. The ACKCH
resource
(1)
(1)
nACKCH
is selected from the derived ACKCH resources nACKCH,
i.
4.4.6.6.4 ACK in ADHICH
This field indicates the ACK response of the received uplink data.
4.4.6.6.4.1 Response Timing of DL ACK
For scheduled UL data transmissions in slot n, a MS shall determine the corresponding ADHICH
resource carrying ACK/NACK in slot n+kADHICH, where kADHICH is given in Table 4.19.
Table 4.19 kADHICH value
UL/DL
UL slot index n
Configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0
4 7 6
4 7 6
1
4 6
4 6
2
6
6
3
4 6 6
4 7
4.4.6.7 Channel quality report
The time and frequency resources that can be used by the MS to report CQI, PMI, and RI are
controlled by the BS. In an optional way, for spatial multiplexing, the MS shall determine a RI
A-GN4.00-03-TS
253
corresponding to the number of useful transmission layers. For transmit diversity, RI is equal to
one.
A MS shall transmit periodic CQI/PMI, or RI reporting on CQICH in slots with no AUEDCH
allocation. A MS shall transmit periodic CQI/PMI or RI reporting on AUEDCH in slots with
AUEDCH allocation.
The set of subbands (S) a MS shall evaluate for CQI reporting spans the entire downlink system
bandwidth. A subband is a set of k contiguous PRUs where k is a function of system bandwidth.
DL
Note the last subband in set S may have fewer than k contiguous PRUs depending on N RU
.
DL
DL
The number of subbands for system bandwidth given by N RU
is defined by N  N RU
/ k .
The subbands shall be indexed in the order of increasing frequency and non-increasing sizes
starting at the lowest frequency.
4.4.6.7.1 CQI definition
Each CQI consists of a 4-bit CQI index, which indicates a suggested modulation order and coding
rate. CQI index 0 is used tor indicating out of range. Based on an unrestricted observation interval
in time and frequency, the MS shall derive for each CQI value reported in uplink slot n the highest
CQI index between 1 and 15, which satisfies the following condition, or CQI index 0 if CQI index 1
does not satisfy the condition:
- A single ADEDCH transport block with a combination of modulation scheme and
transport block size corresponding to the CQI index, and occupying a group of downlink
physical resource units termed the CQI reference resource, could be received with a
transport block error probability not exceeding 0.1.
A combination of modulation scheme and transport block size corresponds to a CQI index if:
- the combination could be signalled for transmission on the ADEDCH in the CQI reference
resource according to the relevant Transport Block Size table, and
-
the modulation scheme is indicated by the CQI index, and
-
the combination of transport block size and modulation scheme when applied to the
reference resource results in the code rate which is the closest possible to the code rate
indicated by the CQI index. If more than one combination of transport block size and
modulation scheme results in a code rate equally close to the code rate indicated by the
CQI index, only the combination with the smallest of such transport block sizes is
relevant.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
254
The CQI reference resource is defined as follows:
-
In the frequency domain, the CQI reference resource is defined by the group of downlink
physical resource units corresponding to the band to which the derived CQI value relates.
-
In the time domain, the CQI reference resource is defined by a single downlink slot
n-nCQI_ref,
o where for periodic CQI reporting nCQI_ref is the smallest value greater than or
equal to 4, such that it corresponds to a valid downlink slot;
A downlink slot shall be considered to be valid if:
 it is configured as a downlink slot for that MS, and

it does not contain a DSS field in case the length of DSS is 7680  Ts
and less, and

-
it does not fall within a configured measurement gap for that MS.
If there is no valid downlink slot for the CQI reference resource, CQI reporting is
omitted in uplink slot n.
In the layer domain, the CQI reference resource is defined by any RI and PMI on which
the CQI is conditioned.
4.4.6.7.2 PMI definition
For AMTs 4, 5, and 6, precoding feedback is used for channel dependent codebook based
precoding and relies on MSs reporting PMI. A MS shall report PMI based on the feedback modes.
Each PMI value corresponds to a codebook index.
For other AMTs, PMI reporting is not supported.
4.4.6.7.3 Periodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting on CQICH
A MS is semi-statically configured by higher layers to periodically feed back different CQI, PMI,
and RI on the CQICH. Multiple reporting modes, namely 1-0, 1-1, 2-0 and 2-1, are supported. In
reporting mode 1-0, only a wideband CQI will be reported. In reporting mode 1-1, a wideband CQI
and a single PMI will be reported. In reporting mode 2-0, both wideband CQI and subbamd CQI
will be reported. In reporting mode 2-1, wideband CQI, subband CQI and a signle PMI will be
reported.
The periodic CQI reporting mode is given by the parameter cqi-FormatIndicatorPeriodic which is
configured by higher-layer signaling.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
255
For subband CQI, a CQI report in a certain slot describes the channel quality in a particular part
or in particular parts of the bandwidth described subsequently as bandwidth part (BP) or parts.
The bandwidth parts shall be indexed in the order of increasing frequency and non-increasing
sizes starting at the lowest frequency. For subband CQI, the MS selects a single subband out of
N j subbands of a bandwidth part, and reports its CQI index along with a corresponding L-bit
DL
/ k / J  .
label indexed in the order of increasing frequency, where L  log 2 N RU
Four CQI/PMI and RI reporting types with distinct periods and offsets are supported for each
CQICH reporting mode:



Type 1 report supports CQI feedback for the MS selected sub-bands
Type 2 report supports wideband CQI and PMI feedback.
Type 3 report supports RI feedback

Type 4 report supports wideband CQI
In the case where wideband CQI/PMI reporting is configured:

The
reporting
10  n f
instances
for
wideband
CQI/PMI

 ns / 2  N OFFSET ,CQI mod N P  0 , where n f
are
slots
satisfying
is the system frame number, and
ns = {0,1,…, 19} is the half-slot index within the frame, and NOFFSET,CQI is the
corresponding wideband CQI/PMI reporting offset (in slots) and NP is the wideband
CQI/PMI period (in slots).

In case RI reporting is configured, the reporting interval of the RI reporting is an integer
multiple MRI of wideband CQI/PMI period NP (in slots).
o The
reporting
instances
for
RI
are
slots
satisfying
10  n f

 ns / 2  N OFFSET ,CQI  N OFFSET , RI modN P  M RI   0 ,
where NOFFSET,RI
is the corresponding relative RI offset to the wideband CQI/PMI reporting offset
(in slots).
o The reporting offset for RI NOFFSET,RI takes values from the set {0, −1, …,
−(NP−1)}.
o In case of collision of RI and wideband CQI/PMI the wideband CQI/PMI is
dropped.

The periodicity NP and offset NOFFSET,CQI for wideband CQI/PMI reporting are determined
based on the parameter configured by higher layer signaling. The periodicity MRI, and
A-GN4.00-03-TS
256
offset NOFFSET,RI
for RI reporting are determined based on the parameter configured by
higher layer signaling.
In the case where both wideband CQI/PMI and subband CQI reporting are configured:

The reporting instances for wideband CQI/PMI and subband CQI are slots satisfying
10  n f

 ns / 2  N OFFSET ,CQI mod N P  0 , where n f
is the system frame number, and
ns = {0,1,…, 19} is the half-slot index within the frame, NOFFSET,CQI is the corresponding
wideband CQI/PMI reporting offset (in slots) , and NP is the period of CQI/PMI reporting
instance (in slots).

The wideband CQI/PMI report has period H*NP, and is reported on the slots
satisfying 10  n f  ns / 2  N OFFSET ,CQI modH  N P   0 . The integer H is
defined as H=J*K+1, where J is the number of bandwidth parts.

Between every two consecutive wideband CQI/PMI reports, the remaining J*K
reporting instances are used in sequence for subband CQI reports on K full
cycles of bandwidth parts except when the gap between two consecutive
wideband CQI/PMI reports contains less than J*K reporting instances due to a
system frame number transition to 0, in which case the MS shall not transmit the
remainder of the subband CQI reports which have not been transmitted before
the second of the two wideband CQI/PMI reports. Each full cycle of bandwidth
parts shall be in increasing order starting from bandwidth part 0 to bandwidth
part J-1.

In case RI reporting is configured, the reporting interval of RI is MRI times the wideband
CQI/PMI period, and RI is reported on the same CQICH cyclic shift resource as both the
wideband CQI/PMI and subband CQI reports.

The
10  n f

reporting
instances
for
RI
are
slots
satisfying

 ns / 2  N OFFSET ,CQI  N OFFSET , RI modH  N P  M RI   0 .
In case of collision between RI and wideband CQI/PMI or subband CQI, the
wideband CQI/PMI or subband CQI is dropped.
 The parameter K is configured by higher-layer and the parameter NOFFSET,RI is selected
from the set {0, -1, …,-( NP -1), - NP }.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
257
 The periodicity NP and offset NOFFSET,CQI for CQI reporting are determined based on the
parameter configured by higher layer signaling. The periodicity MRI, and offset NOFFSET,RI
for RI reporting are determined based on the parameter configured by higher layer
signaling.
The CQI/PMI or RI report shall be transmitted on the CQICH resource which is MS specific and
configured by higher layers.
For periodic CQI/PMI reporting, the following periodicity values apply depending on the UL/DL
configuration:
o The reporting period of NP = 1 is only applicable to UL/DL configurations 0, 1 and 3,
where all UL slots in a radio frame are used for CQI/PMI reporting.
o The reporting period of NP = 5 is only applicable to UL/DL configurations 0, 1, 2 and
3.
o The reporting periods of NP = {10, 20, 40, 80, 160} are applicable to all UL/DL
configurations.
A RI report in a periodic reporting mode is valid only for CQI/PMI report on that periodic reporting
mode.
For the calculation of CQI/PMI conditioned on the last reported RI, in the absence of a last
reported RI the MS shall conduct the CQI/PMI calculation conditioned on the lowest possible RI
as given by the bitmap parameter codebookSubsetRestriction .
4.4.6.8 MAP
The PRU numbers are assigned as shown in Figure 4.44. This number is called logical PRU
number. MAP indicates logical PRU number, which includes CCH PRU(s). As for logical PRU
number, refer to section 4.1.1.2.1, 4.1.1.2.2 and .4.1.1.2.2.
MAP origin indicates the starting point of the logical PRU number for the MS. BS decides MAP
origin by negotiating with MS at access establishment phase.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
258
Logical PRU Number
M AP Origin
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
M -7
M -6
M -5
M -4
M -7
M -6
M -5
M -4
M -3
M -2
M -1
M
M -3
M -2
M -1
M
K-7
K-6
K-5
K-4
K-7
K-6
K-5
K-4
K-3
K-2
K-1
K
K-3
K-2
K-1
K
Effective
Channel
Bandwidth
Frequency Axis
UL TDMA
Slots
DL TDMA
Slots
PRU Number
MAP
Figure 4.44 Logical PRU Numbering in case of symmetric frame
While the number of MAP “NMAP” for protocol version 1 is fixed value as 72bits, the number of
MAP for protocol version 2 should be calculated as follows.
N MAP  N SL  N SCH
,where “NSL” denotes larger number of slots, either “NDSL” or “NUSL”. “NSCH” denotes the number of
SCH.
Figure 4.45 shows the relationship between logical PRU number and the bit assignment in the
MAP field. Logical PRU number is assigned from the top of the MAP field. 1 stands for the
allocated PRU and 0 stands for not allocated ones.
Time
(MSB)
1
(LSB)
2
3
4
5





First Bit
Figure 4.45 Correspondence between Logical PRU Number and Bit Position in the MAP Field
A-GN4.00-03-TS
259
4.4.6.8.1 Response Timing of MAP
Figure 4.46 shows MAP indication timing. BS determines this response time for each MS by
negotiating with the MS at access establishment phase.
MAP field indicates the PRU which can be used as EXCH one frame after in case of (a) timing 1.
It indicates the PRU which can be used as EXCH two frames after in case of (b) timing 2.
5 ms
MAP
ANCH
DL
UL
Time
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(a) Timing 1 Allocation
5 ms
DL
UL
MAP
ANCH
Time
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(b) Timing 2 Allocation
Figure 4.46 Example of MAP Indication Timing
A-GN4.00-03-TS
260
4.4.6.9 Validity (V)
This field shows the number of the PRU(s) that contains the valid data in a TDMA frame. The
data is then transmitted from the beginning of the PHY frame. In case when no data is transmitted,
DTX instead of user data will be put into the data symbols.
Figure 4.47 and Figure 4.48 show V field each DL and UL ECCH for protocol version 1. Figure
4.49 shows V field both of DL and UL ECCH for protocol version 2.
V means effective PRU. The number of DL V “NDV” for protocol version 1 is fixed value as 7 bits,
and the number of UL V “NUV” is 20bits. On the other hand, control method of DL V for protocol
version 2 should be controlled slot-by-slot as with UL V for protocol version 1. In addition, both
value of “NDV” and “NUV” are related on TDMA frame structure as the number of slot. The
number of V, “NUV” and “NDV”, for protocol version 2 should be calculated as follows.
N DV  N DSL  log 2 N SCH  1  N DST 
NUV  NUSL  log 2 N SCH  1  NUST 
,where “NDST” denotes the number of stream (SI) for DL. “NUST” denotes the number of stream
(SI) for UL. “NUSL“ denotes the number of UL slot. “NDSL“ denotes the number of DL slot.
  denotes ceil function. “NSCH” denotes the number of SCH.
MSB
LSB
TDMA Frame
V Field
V Field (7)
Figure 4.47 V field Structure in DL ECCH for protocol version 1
MSB
Slot 1
V Field
5
LSB
Slot 2
V Field
5
Slot 3
V Field
5
Slot 4
V Field
5
V Field (20)
Figure 4.48 V Field Structure in UL ECCH for protocol version 1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
261
MSB
LSB
Slot 1
V Field
Slot 2
V Field
1~7
1~7
….
Slot N
V Field
1~7
V Field (N~7N)
Figure 4.49 V field Structure in UL / DL ECCH for protocol version 2 (the number of SCH between
1 to 30)
Figure 4.50 shows an example of transmitting with DL OFDM when V field is 5. PRU(s) indicated
by the V field is recognized as a PHY data unit. Remaining PRU(s) will carry DTX.
PRU Assigned MAP
Time Axis
MAP Origin
EXCH 1
EXCH 5
Frequency Axis
EXCH 3
EXCH 2
ANCH
EXCH 6
EXCH 8
EXCH 4
EXCH 7 EXCH 9
…
TDMA Slots
DL ANCH In Case of V=5
ANCH
EXCH 1 EXCH 2 EXCH 3 EXCH 4 EXCH 5 EXCH 6 EXCH 7 EXCH 8 EXCH 9
First PHY
Data Unit
Second PHY
Data Unit
Data (5)
Third PHY Data Unit
DTX (4)
Figure 4.50 Example of Recognition Method of Data Burst and DTX from MAP Field for V as 5
(Case of DL V field for protocol version 1)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
262
Figure 4.51 shows an example of transmitting with UL OFDM when V fields are (Slot 1=2, Slot
2=0, Slot 3=1, Slot 4=2) respectively. PRU(s) indicated by the V field is recognized as a PHY data
unit. Remaining PRU(s) will carry DTX.
PRU Assigned MAP
Time Axis
MAP Origin
Frequency Axis
EXCH 1
EXCH 5
EXCH 3
EXCH 2
ANCH
EXCH 6
EXCH 8
EXCH 4
EXCH 7 EXCH 9
…
TDMA Slots
UL ANCH In Case of V=(2 0 1 2)
Slot 1
(V=2)
Slot 3
(V=1)
EXCH 1
EXCH 2
Data (2)
EXCH 5
Data (1)
EXCH 6
EXCH 7
DTX (2)
Slot 2
(V=0)
Slot 4
(V=2)
EXCH 3
EXCH 4
DTX (2)
EXCH 8
EXCH 9
Data (2)
Figure 4.51 Example of Recognition Method of Data Burst and DTX from MAP Field for V as
(2,0,1,2) (Case of UL V field for protocol version 1 and DL / UL V field for protocol version 2)
Used PRU numbers and positions when performing HARQ retransmission are specified in HARQ
rule described in section 9.2.2.2, so sender and receiver share these structure. V indicates PRU
number for HARQ retransmission data and new data (includes MAC-ARQ retransmission data); V
ignores DTX PRUs.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
263
Figure 4.52 shows an example of V value of DL in case of performing HARQ. In this case, 15
PRUs are assigned in the MAP in ANCH. There is a PRU of new data and 5 PRUs of HARQ
retransmission data. HARQ data are pushed into smaller numbered SCHs in each slot. V
indicates PRU number that has valid data.
MAP=15, V=6
SCH1
ANCH
HARQ
HARQ
HARQ
SCH2
HARQ
HARQ
DTX
DTX
SCH3
Data
DTX
DTX
DTX
SCH4
DTX
DTX
DTX
DTX
SCH5
:
Figure 4.52 Example of V value of DL in case of performing HARQ
A-GN4.00-03-TS
264
4.4.6.9.1 V Indication Timing of DL
Figure 4.53 shows an example of V indication timing. DL V applies to the EXCH to which the
MAP is in the same ANCH points.
DL V field indicates the number of valid EDCH(s) one frame after in the case of (a) timing 1. It
indicates the number of valid EDCH(s) two frames after in the case of (b) timing 2.
MAP and V
ANCH
5 ms
Time
DL
UL
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(a) Timing 1 MAP Allocation
ANCH
MAP and V
5 ms
Time
DL
UL
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(b) Timing 2 MAP Allocation
Figure 4.53 V Indication Timing in DL ECCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
265
4.4.6.9.2 V Indication Timing of UL
Figure 4.54 shows an example of V indication timing. Regardless of MAP allocation timing, UL V
applies to the UL EXCH of the same frame as the UL ANCH that contains the V. The MAP
response time for each MS is determined by negotiation at access establishment phase.
5 ms
MAP
ANCH
Time
V
DL
UL
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(a) Timing 1 MAP Allocation
5 ms
Time
V
DL
UL
MAP
ANCH
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(b) Timing 2 MAP Allocation
Figure 4.54 V Indication Timing in UL ECCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
266
4.4.6.10 HARQ Cancel (HC)
This field indicates cancellation of HARQ. HARQ can be activated when some conditions are
fulfilled. MS or BS received set-to-1 HC field, cancels the HARQ process. Refer to Section
4.4.3.2.1.
Table 4.20 Value of HC Field
HC Value
0
1
Description
HARQ Enable
HARQ Cancel
4.4.6.10.1 HC Indication Timing of DL
Figure 4.55 shows an example of HC indication timing. DL HC applies to the EXCH to which the
MAP is in the same ANCH points.
DL HC field indicates whether HARQ one frame later is valid or not in case of (a) timing 1. It
indicates whether HARQ two frames later is valid or not in case of (b) timing 2.
ANCH
MAP and HC
5 ms
Time
DL
UL
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(a) Timing 1 MAP Allocation
A-GN4.00-03-TS
267
ANCH
MAP and HC
5 ms
Time
DL
UL
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(b) Timing 2 MAP Allocation
Figure 4.55 HC Indication Timing in DL ECCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
268
4.4.6.10.2 HC Indication Timing of UL
Figure 4.56 shows an example of HC indication timing. Regardless of MAP allocation timing, UL
HC applies to the UL EXCH in the same frame as the UL ANCH that contains the HC.
5 ms
MAP
ANCH
Time
HC
DL
UL
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(a) Timing 1 MAP Allocation
5 ms
Time
HC
DL
UL
MAP
ANCH
EXCH
Time
DL
UL
(b) Timing 2 MAP Allocation
Figure 4.56 HC Indication Timing in UL ECCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
269
4.4.6.11 Request Channel (RCH)
This field is used for the bandwidth allocation request or transmission power margin notification
from the MS to BS. The type of content is distinguished by identifier in RCH field. MS informs BS
of data size to be sent.
Figure 4.57 shows structure of the RCH field.
Bit 7
6
5
Identifier
4
3
2
1
Data
Figure 4.57 RCH field
Table 4.21 Value of Identifier Field
Bit
7
0
0
1
1
Data Identifier of RCH Field
6
0
1
0
1
UL Data Size Notification
Transmission Power Margin Notification
Reserved
Reserved
4.4.6.11.1 UL Data Size Notification
Figure 4.58 shows UL Data Size Notification format. This field is used for the bandwidth
allocation request from the MS to BS. MS informs BS of data size to be sent.
Bit 7
6
5
0
0
Unit
4
3
2
1
Data Length
Figure 4.58 UL Data Size Notification
Table 4.22 Unit Field
Unit
Bit
5
0
0
1
1
4
0
1
0
1
MAC layer control message
100 bytes
1 kbytes
10 kbytes
For example, Unit=”0 1” (100 bytes), Data Length=”1 0 0” then it indicates 400 bytes. Note that it
does not show accurate value.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
270
4.4.6.11.2 Transmission Power Margin Notification
Figure 4.59 shows Transmission Power Margin Notification format. This field is used for the
notification of transmission power margin from MS to BS. BS may refer to this value when BS
allocates PRU.
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
Transmission Power Margin
Notification
Figure 4.59 Transmission Power Margin Notification
Table 4.23 Transmission Power Margin Notification
Bit
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
3
0
0
0
:
1
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0 dB
1 dB
2 dB
1
1
31 dB
4.4.6.12 Request Channel (RCH)
Request Channel (RCH) is allocated in MSL1(MSL1).
4.4.6.12.1 Optional UL Data Size Notification
UL Data Size Notification MSL1 control elements consist of either: Short UL Data Size
Notification and Truncated UL Data Size Notification format : one FCG ID field and one
corresponding UL Data Size (Figure 4.60); or Long UL Data Size Notification format : four UL
Data Size, corresponding to FCG IDs #0 through #3 (Figure 4.61).
The UL Data Size Notification formats are identified by MSL1 PDU subheaders with FCIDs as
specified in Table 4.58. The fields FCG ID and UL Data Size are defined as follow:
- FCG ID: The function Channel Group ID field identifies the group of function channel(s)
which UL Data Size is being reported. The length of the field is 2 bits;
-
UL Data Size: The UL Data Size field identifies the total amount of data available across all
function channels of a function channel group after the MSL1 PDU has been built. The
amount of data is indicated in number of bytes. The length of this field is 6 bits.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
271
FCG ID
UL Data Size
Oct 1
Figure 4.60: Short UL Data Size Notification and Truncated UL Data Size Notification MSL1
control element
UL
Data
Size #1
UL Data Size #2
UL Data Size #0
UL Data Size #1
UL
Data
UL Data Size #3
Size #2
Oct 1
Oct 2
Oct 3
Figure 4.61:Long UL Data Size Notification MSL1 control element
4.4.6.12.2 Advanced Transmission Power Margin Notification (ATPMN) Report
The ATPMN MSL1 control element is identified by a MSL1 PDU subheader with FCID as
specified in Table 4.58. It has a fixed size and consists of a single octet defined as follows (Figure
4.62):
- R: reserved bit, set to "0";
-
Power Margin (PM): this field indicates the power margin level. The length of the field is 6
bits. The reported PM and the corresponding margin levels are shown in Table 4.24 below.
R
R
PM
Oct 1
Figure 4.62: ATPMN MSL1 control element
Table 4.24: Power Margin Levels for ATPMN
A-GN4.00-03-TS
272
PM
Power Margin Level
0
Power_Margin_0
1
Power_Margin_1
2
Power_Margin_2
3
Power_Margin_3
…
…
60
Power_Margin_60
61
Power_Margin_61
62
Power_Margin_62
63
Power_Margin_63
4.4.6.13 ANCH MCS Indicator (AMI)
There are two purposes to adopt AMI (ANCH MCS Indicator) field. One is adaptive modulation for
ANCH/ECCH. ANCH/ECCH should select MCS that can send necessary and minimum volume of
control information because the volume of control information depends on the MIMO method and
system bandwidth.
MCS for ANCH/ECCH should be selected from BPSK 1/2 to QPAK 3/4. Another is link adaptation
for ANCH/ICCH. MCS for ANCH/ICCH should be selected from BPSK 1/2 to 256QAM 7/8
because of throughput improvement when one PRU is assigned for a user. Table 4.25 shows
applicative range of AMI.
When continuous transmission mode is selected, any information in retransmission data is not
changed from the first data in order to soft-combine both signal field and data filed at received
side.
Table 4.25 AMI Field
ID
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
AMI
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 2/3
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
Reserved
16QAM 1/2
16QAM 3/4
64QAM 2/3
64QAM 5/6
256QAM 3/4
256QAM 7/8
Reserved
Note
ICCH/ECCH
-
ICCH only
-
A-GN4.00-03-TS
273
4.4.6.14 ANCH MCS Request (AMR)
AMR means ANCH MCS Request. AMR notifies maximum ANCH MCS which is judged from
RSSI and SINR etc. AMI selects same MCS or smaller MCS compared with received AMR in
case of ANCH/ICCH. Minimum MCS is selected to send the amount of control information in case
of ANCH/ECCH. If CRC is error, AMR is not known. If HARQ is applied to ANCH/ICCH, AMR of
HARQ frame is set at the same AMR as the initial frame to perform soft-combing at receive side.
Table 4.26 shows AMR table.
Table 4.26 AMR Field
ID
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
AMR
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 2/3
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
Reserved
16QAM 1/2
16QAM 3/4
64QAM 2/3
64QAM 5/6
256QAM 3/4
256QAM 7/8
Reserved
4.4.6.15 MIMO type for EXCH (MT)
MT means MIMO type for EXCH. MT should be switched frame-by-frame. Table 4.27 shows
information element of MT. MT must be selected from MIMO performance that is decided in
negotiation phase. SISO (AAS) is chosen when “MIMO type is SDMA” and “number of stream is
1”.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
274
Table 4.27 MT field
ID
0
1
2
3
MT
STBC
SM
SVD
SDMA
4.4.6.16 Stream Indicator for EXCH (SI)
SI means Stream Indicator for EXCH. The number of stream is 1 to 4.
Table 4.28 SI field
ID
SI
0
1
1
2
2
4
3 Reserved
4.4.6.17 MIMO type for EXCH (SR)
SR means Stream Request for EXCH. The number of stream is 1 to 4. This value and MR should
be decided by RSSI, SINR etc.
Table 4.29 SR field
ID
SR
0
1
1
2
2
4
3 Reserved
4.4.6.18 Bandwidth Indicator for EXCH (BI)
BI means Bandwidth Indicator for EXCH. BI indicates range of applicative SCH bandwidth. BI
lower 5bits “NLBI” denotes initial number of applicative SCH bandwidth. BI upper 5bits “NUBI”
denotes last number of applicative SCH bandwidth.
Figure 4.63 shows concept of BI. In this example, ECB (Effective Channel Bandwidth) is 27MHz.
The total number of SCH is 30 in this case. Center frequency fc is guard carrier of SCH16. Case
A-GN4.00-03-TS
275
A shows that SCH9 to SCH13 are effective. Case B shows that SCH1 to SCH22 are effective.
Number of effective SCH “NSCH” is as follows,
N SCH  NUBI  N LBI   1
,where N SCH  1,..., NUBI , NUBI  N LBI
MAP, ACK, V should be calculated by “N SCH”. If AMR is low MCS, the amount of control
information may be limited because AMI must be lower than MCS of AMR. In this example, BI
should indicate the range of SCH that can select low ANCH MCS such as Case A.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
276
EBW = 27MHz
Center
Frequency fc
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
SCH4
SCH5
SCH6
SCH7
SCH8
SCH9
SCH10
SCH11
SCH12
SCH13
SCH14
SCH15
SCH16
SCH17
SCH18
SCH19
SCH20
SCH21
SCH22
SCH23
SCH24
SCH25
SCH26
SCH27
SCH28
SCH29
SCH30
BI lower 5bit
BI upper 5bit
Case A
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
SCH4
SCH5
SCH6
SCH7
SCH8
SCH9
SCH10
SCH11
SCH12
SCH13
SCH14
SCH15
SCH16
SCH17
SCH18
SCH19
SCH20
SCH21
SCH22
SCH23
SCH24
SCH25
SCH26
SCH27
SCH28
SCH29
SCH30
BI lower 5bit
BI upper 5bit
Case B
Figure 4.63 Concept of BI
4.4.7 PHY Control Layer for ADECCH
This section shows the information elements, e.g. the Advanced Downlink ECCH Control
Information (ADECI) carried on ADECCH and explains each field in the ADECI. There are totally
ten different formats for ADECI and the fields defined in the ADECI formats are described as
below:
A-GN4.00-03-TS
277
4.4.7.1 ADECI format 0
ADECI format 0 is used for scheduling of physical uplink data channel. The following information
is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 0.
4.4.7.1.1 Flag for format0/format1A differentiation
It indicates the differentiation between format 0 and format 1A by 1 bit. Table 4.30 shows the
values of this filed.
Table 4.30 Flag for Format0/Format1A Differentiation
Flag for
Indication
Format0/Format1A
Differentiation
0
ADECI format 0.
1
ADECI format 1A
4.4.7.1.2 Hopping flag
It indicates whether the MS shall perform AUEDCH frequency hopping by 1 bit. Table 4.31 shows
the values of this field.
Table 4.31 Hopping Flag
Hopping
Flag
0
1
Indication
AUEDCH frequency hopping
No AUEDCH frequency hopping
4.4.7.1.3 Resource unit assignment and hopping resource allocation
It indicates the resource allocation for AUEDCH and this field shall support to indicate the
resource allocation for different cases: AUEDCH frequency hopping or not..
4.4.7.1.4 Modulation and coding scheme and redundancy version
It indicates the modulation order (QPSK/16QAM/64QAM), transport block size and redundancy
version by 5 bit.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
278
4.4.7.1.5 Advanced New Data Indicator (ANDI)
ANDI is toggled for each new transport block by 1 bit. For example, if the ANDI is “0” for a
transport block (invariance for intial and retransmission), in the next new transport block, the
ANDI turns to the reverse state as “1”.
4.4.7.1.6 TPC command for scheduled AUEDCH
It impacts the power control for AUEDCH by 2 bit. Table 4.32 shows the values of this field.
Table 4.32 Mapping of TPC Command Field to Absolute and Accumulated Values*
TPC Command
Field in
ADECI format
0/3
Accumulated
[dB]**
Absolute [dB] only
ADECI format 0**
0
-1
-4
1
2
3
0
1
3
-1
1
4
*: This table also applies to ADECI format 3 (refer to section ).
**: The meaning of this value is discussed in the power control part.
4.4.7.1.7 Cyclic shift for DM RS
It impacts the demodulation pilot for AUEDCH by 3 bits.
4.4.7.1.8 UL index
It applies to UL/DL slot configuration 0 for multiple uplink slot scheduling by 2 bits. Table 4.33
shows the values of this field.
Table 4.33 ULIndex
UL Iindex
Indication*
00
Reserved
10
Only the first uplink slot is scheduled
01
Only the second uplink slot is scheduled
A-GN4.00-03-TS
279
11
Both the first and second slots are scheduled
* if ADECI format 0 is transmitted in slot n, the first/second uplink slot denotes a valid uplink slot n+x, where x is
the first/second smallest value greater than or equal to 4.
4.4.7.1.9 Downlink assignment index for uplink control signaling
It indicates the total number of slots with ADEDCH transmissions by 2 bits.Table 4.34 shows the
values of this field.
Table 4.34 Downlink Assignment Index for Uplink Control Signaling
DAI
MSB, LSB
Value
of DAI
Number of Slots with ADEDCH Transmission and with
ADECCH Indicating DL Semi-persistent Scheduling Release
0,0
1
1 or 5 or 9
0,1
2
2 or 6
1,0
3
3 or 7
1,1
4
0 or 4 or 8
4.4.7.1.10 CQI request
It triggers whether MS shall perform aperiodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting or not. Table 4.35 shows the
value of this field.
Table 4.35 CQI Request
CQI Request
Indication
0
Not performing aperiodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting
1
Performing aperiodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting
In addition, ADECI format 0 transmitted in the slot n indicates uplink scheulding information in the
slot n+k, where k is shown in Table 4.36. Further, for UL/DL configuration 0, k can also be set to
7 if the condition as defined in this section is satisfied.
Table 4.36 value k
UL/DL
DL Slot Number n
Configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A-GN4.00-03-TS
280
0
4 6
1
6
2
3
4 6
4
6
4
7 7
4
4
7 7
5
4.4.7.2 ADECI format 1
ADECI format 1 carries DL scheduling information for SIMO with bitmap resource allocation
indication. The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 1.
4.4.7.2.1 Resource allocation header
It indicates whether resource allocation type 0 or type 1 applies for ADEDCH by 1 bit.. Table 4.37
shows the values of this filed.
Table 4.37 Resource Allocation Header
Resource
Allocation
Header
0
1
Indication
Resource allocation type 0
Resource allocation type 1
4.4.7.2.2 Resource unit assignment
It indicates the resource unit assignment for ADEDCH and shall support both the resource
allocation for type 0 and type 1.
4.4.7.2.3 Modulation and coding scheme
It indicates the modulation order and transport block size for ADEDCH by 5 bits.
4.4.7.2.4 HARQ process number
It indicates the Hybrid-ARQ process number for ADEDCH by 4 bits.
4.4.7.2.5 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
281
4.4.7.2.6 Redundancy version
It indicates the redundancy version index for ADEDCH by 2 bits respectively corresponding to
redundancy version 0/1/2/3.
4.4.7.2.7 TPC command for AUANCH
It impacts the transmission power of AUANCH with 2 bits. Table 4.38 shows the values of this
filed.
Table 4.38 Mapping of TPC Command for AUANCH
TPC Command Field in
ADECI format
1A/1B/1D/1/2A/2/3
Adiusted Power
[dB]
0
-1
1
0
2
1
3
3
4.4.7.2.8 Downlink assignment index in downlink control signaling
It indicates the accumulative number of assigned ADEDCH transmission with corresponding
ADECCH(s) up to the present slot transmitted to the corresponding MS within all the M slot(s)
and applies for detection of missing DL grants for optional UL/DL slot configuration 1-3 by 2 bits.
4.4.7.3 ADECI format 1A
ADECI format 1A carries DL scheduling information for SIMO with compacted resource allocation
indication and it shall support the transmission of the downlink paging, ATCCH response and
dynamic ABCCH information scheduling. The following information is transmitted by means of the
ADECI format 1A scrambling with C-MSID.
4.4.7.3.1 Flag for format0/format1A differentiation
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.1.
4.4.7.3.2 Localized/Distributed VRU assignment flag
A-GN4.00-03-TS
282
It indicates whether localized virtual resource units or distributed virtual resource units are
assigned for ADEDCH: value 0 indicates localized and value 1 indicates distributed VRU
assignment.
4.4.7.3.3 Resource unit assignment
It indicates DL contiguous RUs assignment and shall support for Localized/Distributed VRU
assignment.
4.4.7.3.4 Modulation and coding scheme
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.3.
4.4.7.3.5 HARQ process number
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.4.
4.4.7.3.6 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.3.7 Redundancy version
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.6.
4.4.7.3.8 TPC command for AUANCH
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.7.
4.4.7.3.9 Downlink Assignment Index for downlink control signaling
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.8.
In addition, the information elements “access sequence index for ATCCH (by 6 bits)” and “mask
index for ATCCH (by 4 bits)” shall be supported in this ADECI format to support the transmission
of ATCCH.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
283
4.4.7.4 ADECI format 1B
ADECI format 1B carries DL scheduling information for closed-loop signal-rank SU-MIMO with
possibly contiguous resource allocation. The following information is transmitted by means of the
ADECI format 1B.
4.4.7.4.1 Localized/Distributed VRU assignment flag
Refer to section 4.4.7.3.2.
4.4.7.4.2 Resource unit assignment
Refer to section 4.4.7.3.3.
4.4.7.4.3 Modulation and coding scheme
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.3.
4.4.7.4.4 HARQ process number
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.4.
4.4.7.4.5 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.4.6 Redundancy version
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.6.
4.4.7.4.7 TPC command for AUANCH
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.7.
4.4.7.4.8 Downlink Assignment Index for downlink control signaling
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.8.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
284
4.4.7.4.9 TPMI information for precoding
It indicates the which codebook index is used for ADEDCH corresponding to the single-layer
transmission. The number of this information bits are listed in Table 4.39.
Table 4.39 Number of Bits for TPMI Information
Number of Antenna Ports Number
at BS
of Bits
2
2
4
4
4.4.7.4.10 PMI confirmation for precoding
It indicates whether the precoding is selected according to the latest PMI or the indicated TPMI.
4.4.7.5 ADECI format 1C
ADECI format 1C carries DL scheduling information for paging, ATCCH response and dynamic
BCCH transmission in ADEDCH. The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI
format 1C.
4.4.7.5.1 Gap value
It indicates the gap value when the virtual resouce unit is mapping to the physical resouce unit by
1 bits.
4.4.7.5.2 Resource unit assignment
It indicates the resouce unit assignment according to the type 2 resource allocation for ADEDCH.
4.4.7.5.3 Transport block size index
It indicates the transport block size for the ADEDCH scrambled with SI-MSID, RA-MSID, P-MSID
by 5 bits.
4.4.7.6 ADECI format 1D
ADECI format 1D carries DL scheduling information for MU-MIMO with compacted resource
A-GN4.00-03-TS
285
allocation indication. The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 1D.
4.4.7.6.1 Localized/Distributed VRU assignment flag
Refer to section 4.4.7.3.2.
4.4.7.6.2 Resource unit assignment
Refer to section 4.4.7.3.3.
4.4.7.6.3 Modulation and coding scheme
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.3.
4.4.7.6.4 HARQ process number
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.4.
4.4.7.6.5 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.6.6 Redundancy version
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.6.
4.4.7.6.7 TPC command for AUANCH
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.7.
4.4.7.6.8 Downlink assignment index for DL control signaling
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.8.
4.4.7.6.9 TPMI information for precoding
Refer to section 4.4.7.4.9.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
286
4.4.7.6.10 Downlink power offset
It indicates the downlink power offset value  power-offset used in power control for the multi-user
MIMO transmission scheme of the ADEDCH by 1 bit . Table 4.40 shows the value of this field.
Table 4.40 Mapping of Downlink Power Offset Field in ADECI format 1D to the  power-offset Value
Downlink Power Offset Field
 power-offset [dB]
0
-10log10(2)
1
0
4.4.7.7 ADECI format 2
ADECI format 2 carries DL scheduling information for close loop SU-MIMO with bitmap resource
allocation indication. The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 2.
4.4.7.7.1 Resource allocation header
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.1.
4.4.7.7.2 Resource unit assignment
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.2.
4.4.7.7.3 TPC command for AUANCH
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.7.
4.4.7.7.4 Downlink assignment index for downlink control signaling
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.8.
4.4.7.7.5 HARQ process number
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.4.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
287
4.4.7.7.6 Transport block to codeword swap flag
It indicates the transport block to codeword mapping by 1 bit when the two transport blocks are
enabled. Table 4.41 shows the value of this field.
Table 4.41 Transport Block to Codeword Mapping (two transport blocks enabled)
Transport Block
to Codeword
Swap Flag Value
Codeword 0
(enabled)
Codeword 1
(enabled)
0
transport block 1 transport block 2
1
transport block 2 transport block 1
4.4.7.7.7 Modulation and coding scheme
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.3.
4.4.7.7.8 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.7.9 Redundancy version
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.6.
Notes that the previous three information (modulation and coding scheme, ANDI, redundancy
version) shall support for the transport block 1 and 2.
4.4.7.7.10 Precoding information
It indicates the precoding information for ADECI format 2 by the certain bits as indicated in Table
4.42.
Table 4.42 Number of Bits for Precoding Information
A-GN4.00-03-TS
288
Number of Antenna Ports at BS
Number of Bits for Precoding Information
2
3
4
6
4.4.7.8 ADECI format 2A
ADECI format 2A carries DL scheduling information for open loop SU-MIMO with bitmap resource
allocation indication. The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 2A.
4.4.7.8.1 Resource allocation header
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.1.
4.4.7.8.2 Resource unit assignment
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.2.
4.4.7.8.3 TPC command for AUANCH
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.7.
4.4.7.8.4 Downlink assignment index for downlink control signaling
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.8.
4.4.7.8.5 HARQ process number
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.4.
4.4.7.8.6 Transport block to codeword swap flag
Refer to section 4.4.7.7.6.
4.4.7.8.7 Modulation and coding scheme
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.3.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
289
4.4.7.8.8 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.8.9 Redundancy version
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.6.
Notes that the previous three information (modulation and coding scheme, ANDI, redundancy
version) shall support for the transport block 1 and 2.
4.4.7.8.10 Precoding information
It indicates the precoding information for ADECI format 2A by the certain bits as indicated in
Table 4.43.
Table 4.43 Number of Bits for Precoding Information
Number of Antenna Ports at BS
Number of Bits for Precoding Information
2
0
4
2
4.4.7.9 ADECI format 3
ADECI format 3 carries TPC command of multiple users for UL power control (2 bits per user).
The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 3. Notes that the size of 3
should equal to ADECI format 0.
4.4.7.9.1 TPC command
It indicates the absolute and accumulated values for the AUANCH and AUEDCH power
adjustment by 2 bits (refer to Section 4.4.7.1.6).
4.4.7.10 ADECI format 3A
ADECI format 3A carries TPC command of multiple users for UL power control (single bit per
user). The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 3A. Notes that the
size of 3A should equal to ADECI format 1A.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
290
4.4.7.10.1 TPC command
It indicates the values for the AUANCH and AUEDCH power adjustment by 1 bit . Table 4.44
shows the value of this field.
Table 4.44
Mapping of TPC Command Field in ADECI format 3A to  PUSCH Values
TPC Command Field in
ADECI format 3A
Adjusted Power [dB]
0
-1
1
1
4.4.8 Summary of PHY Frame Format
Figure 4.64 and Figure 4.65 show all PHY frame formats.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
291
Signal
Symbol
Data Symbol
ANCH/ICCH
(DL)
CI
(2)
SD
(2)
ANCH/ICCH
(UL)
CI
(2)
APC
(1)
Reserved
(5)
ANCH/ECCH
(DL)
CI
(2)
MAP
(72)
SD APC PC
(2) (1) (4)
ACK
(36)
ANCH/ECCH
(UL OFDM)
CI
(2)
RCH
(7)
APC PC
(1) (1)
ACK
(36)
V MI MR HC
(20) (16) (16) (1)
Reserved
(64)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
ANCH/ECCH
(UL SC)
CI
(2)
RCH APC PC
(1) (1)
(7)
ACK
(36)
V MI MR
(20) (16) (16)
Reserved
(6)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
APC
(1)
Reserved
(3)
EXCH/EDCH
(UL/DL)
MAC Frame
(ICCH)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
MAC Frame
(ICCH)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
V MI MR HC Reserved CRC TAIL
(7)
(16) (6)
(7) (16) (16) (1)
HC
(1)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
MAC Frame
(EDCH)
CSCH/TCH
(DL)
MI
(4)
CI
(2)
MR
(4)
SD
(2)
PC
(1)
CSCH/TCH
(UL)
MI
(4)
CI
(2)
MR
(4)
PC
(1)
CSCH/CDCH
(DL)
MI
(4)
CI
(2)
MR
(4)
SD
(2)
PC
(1)
CSCH/CDCH
(UL)
MI
(4)
CI
(2)
MR
(4)
PC
(1)
ACK
(1)
Reserved
(7)
Reserved
(9)
ACK
(1)
Reserved
(6)
Reserved
(8)
MAC Frame
(ACCH+TCH)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
MAC Frame
(ACCH+TCH)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
MAC Frame
(CDCH)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
MAC Frame
(CDCH)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
Figure 4.64 ICH PHY Frame Format for protocol version 1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
292
Signal
Symbol
Data Symbol
ANCH/ICCH
(DL)
AMI
(4)
CI
(2)
SD
(2)
ANCH/ICCH
(UL)
AMI
(4)
CI
(2)
APC
(1)
ANCH/ECCH
(DL)
AMI
(4)
CI SD APC PC HC AMR MT
(2) (2) (1)
(1) (4) (2)
ANCH/ECCH
(UL)
AMI
(4)
CI APC PC
(2) (1) (1)
APC
(1)
AMR
(4)
Reserved
(7)
AMR
(4)
HC AMR MT
(1) (4) (2)
MI
EMI
(8)
MI
MR
MR
MAP, ACK, V,
Reserved
SI SR BI
(2) (2) (2)
MAP, ACK, V,
Reserved
SI SR RCH
(2) (2) (7)
CRC
(16)
TAIL
(6)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
MAC Frame
(ICCH)
Reserved
(1)
EXCH/EDCH
(UL/DL)
EXCH/EDCH
(UL/DL)
for EMB-MIMO
MAC Frame
(ICCH)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
MAC Frame
(EDCH)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
MAC Frame
(EDCH)
CRC TAIL
(16) (6)
Figure 4.65 ICH PHY Frame Format for protocol version 2
4.5 MAC Layer Structure and Frame Format
4.5.1 Overview
4.5.1.1 Format Regulations
Figure 4.66 shows basic format regulations used for in this specification. The bit in single octet is
horizontally aligned, and numbered from 1 to 8. Multiple octets are vertically aligned, and the
numbered is put from 1 to n.
Bit 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Octet 1
Octet 2
:
Octet n
Figure 4.66 Format Regulations
A-GN4.00-03-TS
293
The transmission is started from Bit 8 in Octet 1.
The format shown in Figure 4.67 is used when the list of a specific information types is in
application. The bit row that shows each information is horizontally aligned.
Information Name
Bit 8 7 6 5 4
3 2
1
Figure 4.67 Format that shows List of Information Type
The format shown in Table 4.45 is used to explain the meaning of an individual bit. The meaning
of the specific bit of 0 or 1 is tabulated and shown.
Table 4.45 Format for Explanation of Bit
Bit 1
0
1
4.5.1.2 MAC Frame Composition
Figure 4.68 shows the outline of MAC frame composition procedure. The figure gives an example
of data transmission. Firstly, as much as possible upper layer data are combined. The data length,
referred to as Ln, indicates each combined data when combination is performed. On the other
hand, upper layer data exceeding PHY data unit size is fragmented. Then, sequence number N,
which identifies each data transmission unit, is added. Finally, MAC header is to the MAC frames.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
294
Upper
Layer Data
Ln
N
Upper
Layer Data Combining
Internal Data
Unit
Upper
Layer Data
Upper
Layer Data
Put into PHY Data
Unit.
MAC
Payload
Segmentation
Add MAC Header
MAC
Frame
Figure 4.68 Procedure to Construct MAC Frame
At the reception side, upper layer data is reconstructed according to the MAC header.
4.5.2 MAC Frame Format
MAC Header
L
N
MAC
Frame
B
CD
MD
QI
Figure 4.69 shows a general MAC frame structure and the order of bits and octets in the MAC
frame. The MAC payload ends in byte boundary. The fraction bit of the PHY payload is PAD bit.
PAD bits are from 0 bit to 7 bits. PAD is filled by 0. Transmission and reception are carried out
from the upper bit. The first transmission and reception begin from the Octet 1.
Upper Layer Data or MAC Control
Information
PAD
MAC Payload
Figure 4.69 A General MAC Frame Structure (Included MAC Header)
According to the order of bits and octets that is described above, MAC frame composition is
shown in Figure 4.70. Refer to Section 0 for detail.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
295
Bit
8
B
7
6
CD
5
4
3
MD/F
E
E
2
1
QI
Octet 1
N(MSB)
Octet 1a
N(LSB)
Octet 1b
L/IX (MSB)
Octet 2
L/IX (LSB)
E
Octet 2a
IX (MSB)
Octet 3
IX (LSB)
Octet 3a
Upper Layer Data, MAC Control Information
Octet 4…
Figure 4.70 Bit Order in MAC Frame
4.5.2.1 MAC Frame Structure
4.5.2.1.1 ICCH, EDCH and CDCH
Figure 4.71 shows the configuration of ICCH, EDCH, and CDCH. They contain a MAC header
and MAC payloads.
ICCH, EDCH and CDCH
MAC Header
MAC Payload
Figure 4.71 Configuration of ICCH, EDCH and CDCH
4.5.2.1.2 TCH
Figure 4.72 shows the configuration of TCH. TCH does not have a MAC header but contains
voice data.
TCH
Voice Data
Reserved
Figure 4.72 Configuration of TCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
296
4.5.2.1.3 ACCH
ACCH is an accompanying channel. Control messages on ACCH can be transmitted with user
traffic simultaneously.
4.5.2.1.3.1 Frame Structure
Figure 4.73 shows the control message of ACCH, and its relation with Layer 2 frame.
Control Message
Layer 2 Frame
Data
8
…
24
8
…
24
1 ACCH
Unit: Bits
Figure 4.73 Relation between Control Message and Layer 2 Frame
4.5.2.1.3.2 ACCH Layer 2 Frame Signal Structure
8
7
6
Reserved
E
5
4
C
3
2
RIL
1
IL
Octet 1
N
Octet 1a (C=1)
Information Field (Control Message)
Octet 2 (C=0)
MSB
Data Length 1
Data Length 2
Information Field (Control Message)
Octet 2 (C=1, IL=1x)
LSB
Octet 2a (C=1, IL=1x)
Octet 3
Octet 4
Figure 4.74 Layer 2 Frame Signal Structure of ACCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
297

Information Link Bit (IL)
Bit

Description
2
1
0
0
Middle Frame
0
1
End Frame
1
0
Leading Frame
1
1
Undivided Frame
Remaining Information Length Indication Bit (RIL)
Bit

Description
4
3
0
0
Control Message length is no octet.(No message)
0
1
Control Message length is one octet.
1
0
Control Message length is two octets.
1
1
Control Message length is three octets.
Control Message Bit (C)
Bit
Description
0
It indicates that the MAC payload is unnumbered
control information.
1
It indicates that the MAC payload is numbered
control information.
 Sequence Number (N)
When C=1, Sequence Number (N) is appended as Octet 1a. Following figure shows information
element N.
Bit 8
7
6
5
4
N
3
2
1
Octet 1a
A-GN4.00-03-TS
298
 Data Length
When IL=1x and C=1, Data Length is appended as Octet 2. Data Length field indicates MAC
payload data length. It is shown by a byte unit. It can be expanded by using extension bit (E)
depending on the value. Following figure shows information element Data Length. The bit E=0 if
the value can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used, and the
second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described 7 bits. In this case, two
octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 2 shows upper 7 bits and Octet 2a shows lower 8 bits.
Bit 8
E
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Data Length 1
MSB
Octet 2
Data Length 2
LSB
Octet 2a
 Information Field
The message transferred on ACCH is considered QCS-ID=1.
When C=0, the message is stored in Octet 2~4. (3 Octets)
Bit 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Information Field
Octet 2
Information Field
Octet 3
Information Field
Octet 4
Otherwise, the message is stored in Octet 3~4. (2 Octets)
Bit 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Information Field
Octet 3
Information Field
Octet 4
A-GN4.00-03-TS
299
4.5.2.2 MAC Header
There are four basic types of different MAC frame headers as shown below:
Header of the MAC frame which carries,
1. the first segment of the segmented (Refer to Section 4.5.3.1) data, or the unsegmented data.
That is when B=1, and CD=x1. The case of combining (Refer to Section 4.5.3.3) is included
in this type. (Refer to Figure 4.75).
2. the second or later segment of the segmented data, and its MAC frame length is the same
as PHY payload length. That is when B=0, F=1, and CD=x1. (Refer to Figure 4.76).
3. the second or later segment of the segmented data, and its MAC frame length is shorter
than the PHY payload length. That is when B=0, F=0, and CD=x1. (Refer to Figure 4.77).
4. unnumbered control information. That is when B=1 and CD=00. (Refer to Figure 4.78).
Details of each element in these figures are described in Section 4.5.2.2.1.
MAC Header
B
CD MD QI
N
MAC Payload
L
DATA
L
Figure 4.75 MAC Frame Format (1)
MAC Header
B
CD
F
QI
N
MAC Payload
IX
DATA
Figure 4.76 MAC Frame Format (2)
PHY Payload Length
MAC Header
B
CD
F
QI
N
MAC Payload
L
IX
DATA
Figure 4.77 MAC Frame Format (3)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
300
PHY Payload Length
MAC Header
B
CD
MD
MAC Payload
L
QI
DATA
L
Figure 4.78 MAC Frame Format (4)
Table 4.46 shows the list of the information element included in the header of the MAC frame.
Table 4.46 Information Element List in MAC Header
Information
Element
Name
Sign
Information
Length
Frame
Division
Information
Identifier
Control
Explanation
It indicates the first frame of the set of divided
B
1 bit
segments or the frame of the second segments or
later.
It identifies control information or data. It stands for
the control information when the field is 00 or 01.
It stands for the data when the field is 11.
CD
2 bits
MD
1 bit
Identifier of
the Payload
Length
F
1 bit
It indicates that the data part length L equals to MAC
payload length.
QCS-ID
QI
4 bits
It indicates the QCS-ID.
Sequence
Number
N
8 or 16 bits
It indicates the sequence number.
Information
or Data
Data Part
Sharing
CD is referred by the MAC frame in case when B=1.
CD does not have specific meaning in case when
B=0.
It indicates that the MAC payload contains single user
data or multiple user data.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
301
Information
Element
Name
Index
Data Part
Length
Information
Length
Sign
IX
8 or 16 bits
L
8 or 16 bits
Explanation
It indicates the number of bytes of upper layer data
that has already been sent in the earlier MAC frames.
Basically, it indicates the location of the upper layer
data that the MAC payload is filled up.
It indicates data length contained in the MAC payload
in case when MD=0.
It indicates the total number of data lengths contained
in the MAC payload in case when MD=1.
Data Length
of User
Information
Area
Ln
8 or 16 bits
DATA
It indicates each length of multiple user data when
MD=1.
Upper layer data is included in the MAC payload.
4.5.2.2.1 Each Field of MAC Header
4.5.2.2.1.1 Frame Division Information (B)
B field shows the first frame in data transmission by dividing upper layer data into two or more
MAC frames. It is used to restructure the divided transmission data.
Table 4.47 Frame Division Information
Bit 1
0
The second frame or later when the upper
layer data is divided.
1
The first frame when the upper layer data is
divided or undivided frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
302
4.5.2.2.1.2 Data Type (CD)
CD field indicates whether the control information or upper layer data is included in the MAC
payload. CD is referred by the MAC frame in case when B=1. CD is invalid and shall be set zero
in case when B=0.
Table 4.48 Data Type
Bit
Identification
2
1
0
0
It indicates that the MAC payload is unnumbered control information.
0
1
It indicates that the MAC payload is numbered control information.
1
0
Reserved
1
1
It indicates that the MAC payload is upper layer data.
4.5.2.2.1.3 Data Part Sharing (MD)
An identifier shows whether the MAC payload is shared by multiple upper layer data. Table 4.49
shows the definition of the MD field.
This information element is omitted when B=0.
Table 4.49 Data Part Sharing
Bit 1
0
Single upper layer data is included in a MAC payload.
1
Multiple upper layer data are included in a MAC payload.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
303
4.5.2.2.1.4 Bit of Payload Length Identification (F)
An identifier indicates whether the MAC payload length is specified by L field or not, because the
MAC frame length is the same as the PHY payload length. The bit definition of F field is as shown
in Table 4.50.
This information element is omitted when B=1.
Table 4.50 Bit of Payload Surplus Judgment
Bit 1
0
The MAC payload is specified by L field.
1
Because PHY payload length is the same as
the MAC frame length, the length of the MAC
payload is not specified by L field.
4.5.2.2.1.5 QCS-ID (QI)
This number identifies the quality service sessions. QCS-ID is assigned for every session and
managed between MS and BS. The length of this field is 4 bits. When control information which
does not distinguish QCS is used, this value is set to 0 (QCS-ID=1). Otherwise it is set to any of
the number from 1 to 15 to specify each QCS.
4.5.2.2.1.6 Sequence Number (N)
This is a series of continuous numbers to identify the data. N is supervised for each user and
incremented by upper layer data unit or PHY data unit (CRC unit) for each QCS.
The area of index can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. The bit
E=0 if the value can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used,
and the second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described within 7 bits. In this
case, two octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 1a shows upper 7 bits and Octet 1b shows lower 8 bits.
Increment Timing
1. In case of combining (Refer to Section 4.5.3.3), N is incremented by PHY data unit.
2. In case of segmentation (Refer to Section 0), N is incremented by upper layer data unit.
3. In case of concatenation (Refer to Section 4.5.3.4), N is incremented by upper layer
data unit.
4. In other cases than combining segmentation or concatenation, N is incremented by
PHY data unit (= upper layer data unit).
A-GN4.00-03-TS
304
Table 4.51 Relation CD Field and Sequence Number
CD Field
Sequence Number
Unnumbered Control Information
It is no sequence number.
Octet 1a and 1b are omitted.
Numbered Control Information
Sequence number is 7 or 15 bits.
Upper Layer Data
Octet 1a and 1b are used.
4.5.2.2.1.7 Index (IX)
IX shows the numbers of the sent bytes from the beginning of the upper layer data. It also
indicates the position of the upper layer data that this MAC payload is filled up.
The area of index can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. Figure
4.79 shows information element IX, The bit E=0 if the value can be described within 7 bits. In this
case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used, and the second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value
cannot be described within 7 bits. In this case, two octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 1 shows upper 7
bits and Octet 2 shows lower 8 bits.
This information element is omitted when B=1.
Bit 8
7
6
E
5
4
3
2
1
INDEX 1
INDEX 2
Octet 1
Octet 2
Figure 4.79 Format of Index Field
Table 4.52 Explanation of the Extension Bit of Octet 1
Bit 8
0
Octet 2 (INDEX 2) is omitted.
1
Octet 2 (INDEX 2) is used.
4.5.2.2.1.8 Data Part Length (L)
L field indicates data length contained in the MAC payload when MD=0. It indicates the total
number of data lengths contained in the MAC payload when MD=1. The data part length is shown
by a byte unit.
The area of data part length can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value.
Figure 4.80 shows information element L. The bit E=0 if the value can be described within 7 bits.
In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used, and the second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the
value cannot be described 7 bits. In this case, two octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 1 shows upper 7
A-GN4.00-03-TS
305
bits and Octet 2 shows lower 8 bits.
This information element is omitted when F=1.
Bit 8
7
6
E
5
4
3
2
Data Length 1
Data Length 2
1
Octet 1
Octet 2
Figure 4.80 Data Part Length / User Data Length
Table 4.53 Explanation of the Extension Bit of Octet 1
Bit 8
0
Octet 2 (data length 2) is omitted.
1
Octet 2 (data length 2) is used.
4.5.2.2.1.9 User Data Length (Ln)
When one MAC payload includes upper layer data for multiple upper layer data, this information
element shows each upper layer data length. The format of the element uses the same data part
length. Refer to Figure 4.80 and Table 4.53. This information element is omitted when MD=0.
4.5.2.2.1.10 Information Area (DATA)
This is the dedicated data area for the MAC frame. It includes upper layer data, MAC control
protocol and access establishment phase control protocol information.
4.5.2.3 MAC Payload
There are two types of MAC payload as shown below:
 Upper Layer Data
 MAC Control Information
4.5.2.3.1 Upper Layer Data
When CD field in MAC header is upper layer data, upper layer data is included in MAC payload.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
306
4.5.2.3.2 MAC Control Information
When CD field in MAC header is either unnumbered MAC control information or numbered MAC
control information, MAC control information is included in MAC payload.
Satisfying following conditions, leading 2 bytes of upper layer data indicates network layer
protocol type.
(1) CD=01 (Numbered Control Information)
(2) QI is other than zero
When an upper layer data is segmented (Refer to section 4.5.3.1), the protocol type is only put on
the first segment (Figure 4.81). This protocol type is a part of encrypted region.
Upper Layer Data
Protocol type
Upper Layer Data
Upper Layer Data
24
Leading Segment
MAC header
Protocol type
Upper Layer Data
MAC frame
Figure 4.81 Relation between MAC Frame and Upper Layer Data with Protocol Type
4.5.3 Segmentation, Combining and Concatenation
4.5.3.1 Upper Layer Data Segmentation
Figure 4.82 shows the example, when the upper layer data which has data length of L bytes is
segmented. In this example, the length of the last segment of the data segments is shorter than
the PHY payload. At the reception side, data is reconstructed based on the information of L and
IX.
The segmented data can be transmitted by not only single TDMA frame but also multiple TDMA
frames.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
307
L byte
IX
DATA
2/n
B=0
CD
F=1
QI
N
IX
L
DATA
1/n
B=0
CD
F=1
QI
N
B=1
CD
MD=0
QI
N
Data from Upper
Layer
IX
Ln
B=0
CD
F=0
QI
N



DATA
n/n
Figure 4.82 MAC Frame Segmentation
4.5.3.2 MAC Frame Segmentation in case of Retransmission
If the same bandwidth to precede retransmission cannot be allocated, this MAC frame will be
segmented into multiple segments according to the allocated bandwidth for retransmission. N and
MD of the retransmitted MAC frame use the same N and MD of the original MAC frame in the first
segment. In the following segment(s), N will be the same and B will be set to 0.
Figure 4.83 shows the example of MAC retransmitting frame which is divided into two segments.
In this example, frame length of the first segment of the MAC frame is the same as the PHY
payload length. The length of the next segment of the MAC frame is shorter than the PHY
payload length.
In case of Figure 4.83, the length of the second segmented frame is shorter than the PHY
payload length, where F=0. IX shows the number of the data has already been sent from the
head of the MAC payload to be retransmitted. IX=L 0 as shown in Figure 4.83 displays that MAC
header is created by using the same rule, when the number of segmentation increases.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
308
DATA
L
MAC Frame
(Transmission Failed)
B=1
CD
MD=0
QI
N
L byte
DATA 1
L
MAC Frame 1
(Retransmission)
B=1
CD
MD=0
QI
N
L0 byte
L0
IX =
L’
MAC Frame 2
(Retransmission)
B=0
CD
F=0
QI
N
L’ = L – L0 byte
DATA 2
Figure 4.83 Data with MD=0 segmented in case of Retransmission
4.5.3.3 Combining Multiple Upper Layer Data into Single MAC Payload
Data length (L1, L2…) of each data is added respectively when MD=1 as shown in Figure 4.84
when multiple upper layer data shares one MAC payload. L is the sum of data length with all data
n
included. L=  L x in this case.
x 1
n
The format L   Lx will be applied when transmission carries forward to the N-th data.
x 1
L’ = L1 + L2 + L3 + ……. + Ln byte
B=1
CD
MD=1
QI
N
L
L1 byte
L1
DATA
1
L2 byte
L2
DATA
2
Ln byte

Ln
DATA
n
Figure 4.84 Combining Multiple Upper Layer Data into Single MAC Payload
When retransmission is performed, if the same bandwidth as preceding transmission cannot be
allocated, this MAC frame will be segmented into multiple segments according to the allocated
bandwidth for retransmission. Same N and MD of the MAC frame to be retransmitted will be used
A-GN4.00-03-TS
309
L
MAC Frame
(Transmission Failed)
B=1
CD
MD=1
QI
N
in the first segment. And N will be the same in the following segment and B will be 0.
Figure 4.85 shows the example of retransmitting MAC frame containing multiple upper layer data
divided into two segments. In this example, frame length of the first segment of the MAC frame is
the same as the PHY payload length. Length of the second segment of the MAC frame is shorter
than the PHY payload length.
In case of Figure 4.85, length of the second segmented frame is defined to be shorter than the
PHY payload length. Hence, F=0. IX shows the number of data sent from the head of the MAC
payload to be retransmitted. IX=L’ as shown in Figure 4.85. MAC header is created using the
same rule when the number of segmentation increases.
This feature is negotiated in information element Communication Parameter and MS
Performance.
L1
L = L1 + L2 + L3
byte
DATA [byte]
L2 DATA
1
2
L3
DATA
3
L’’ = L – L’
byte
DATA
2
L2 DATA
2
IX=L’
DATA
1
L’’
Segmented MAC Frame 2
(Retransmission)
L1
B=0
CD
F=0
QI
N
L
Segmented MAC
Frame 1
(Retransmission)
B=1
CD
MD=1
QI
N
L’ = L1 + L2‘ byte
L3
DATA
3
Figure 4.85 Data with MD=1 segmented in case of Retransmission
4.5.3.4 MAC Frame Concatenation
MAC frame concatenation is permitted with the following conditions. MAC frame concatenation
here stands for multiple MAC frame to be included in a PHY data unit. Subsequent 24bits of last
concatenated MAC frame are set to all 0. Satisfying following conditions, further MAC frame can
be concatenated.


PHY Payload Length – Current total MAC Frame Length  4 bytes
Twenty-four leading bits of trailing MAC frame is not all zero.
Figure 4.86 shows an example when MAC frames are concatenated in a PHY payload. In the
A-GN4.00-03-TS
310
example, 55 bytes upper layer data is followed by 150 bytes data. In a TDMA frame, PHY data
unit can transmit 43 bytes data when MCS is BPSK-1/2. In first TDMA frame, 40 bytes
segmented data can be transmitted. Then transmission of the rest of 15 bytes segmented data
will be continued to next TDMA frame.
In the next TDMA frame, 24 bytes data can be transmitted in addition to the rest of 15 bytes
segmented data, due to the fact that the difference between PHY payload length and first MAC
frame length is bigger than 4 bytes. Other conditions are satisfied in the sample case.
Data
Data
Data
40 bytes
15 bytes
150 bytes
Upper Layer Data
43 bytes
MAC Frame 1
B=1
CD=11
MD=0
QI
N=1
L=55
DATA
40 bytes
43 bytes
MAC Frame 2
B=0
CD=11
F=0
QI
4 bytes
N=1
L=15 IX=40 DATA
15byte
B=1
CD=11 MD=0 QI
N=2
L=150
3 bytes
DATA
21 byte
Figure 4.86 Example of MAC Frame Concatenation
4.5.4 Segmentation, Combining and Concatenation
The Segmentation, Combining and Concatenation function is handled in MSL2.
Figure 4.87 below depicts the MSL2 PDU structure where:
The PDU sequence number carried by the MSL2 header is independent of the SDU
sequence number (i.e. MAC-sublayer3 sequence number);
-
A red dotted line indicates the occurrence of segmentation;
Because segmentation only occurs when needed and concatenation is done in
sequence, the content of an MSL2 PDU can generally be described by the following
relations:
- {0; 1} last segment of SDUi + [0; n] complete SDUs + {0; 1} first segment of SDUi+n+1 ;
or
- 1 segment of SDUi .
A-GN4.00-03-TS
311
MSL2 SDU
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
...
...
MSL2
header
MSL2
header
MSL2 PDU
Figure 4.87: MSL2 PDU Structure
4.5.5 MAC Control Layer
The relationship among the MAC control information, MAC frame and the PHY frame is shown in
Figure 4.88. At the beginning of the MAC payload, protocol identifier and the message type are
included. The other control information can be added in the remaining fields.
PHY Frame
PHY Header
MAC Frame
B
CD
PHY Payload
MD
QI
N
CRC
L
Message
Type
Protocol
Identifier
MAC Header
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
TAIL
Control Data Field
MAC Payload
1
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 4.88 Relation among MAC Control Information, MAC Frame and PHY Frame
The MAC control and the access establishment phase control are performed by exchanging the
messages in the MAC frame, which are described in this chapter. MAC control messages always
include the protocol identifier and the message type. Other information elements can be added in
time of need. Table 4.54 shows the protocol identifier that is used in the MAC layer.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
312
Table 4.54 Protocol Identifier
Control Type
Protocol Identifier
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1
MAC Control
0 0 0 0 0
0 0
1
Access Establishment Phase Control
0 0 0 0 0
0 1
0
4.5.5.1 MAC Control Protocol
MAC control signals are defined in this section. The state of the reception side is informed to
transmission side by transmitting the message described in this section.
The message provides MAC control signal in this paragraph. Because it is control information,
CD of the MAC header is 00 or 01. Table 4.55 shows the list of the MAC control protocol
messages.
Table 4.55 MAC Control Protocol Message List
Message Name
Message Type
Bit 8 7 6 5 4
3 2
1
RR
P 0 0 0 0
0 0
1
RNR
P 0 0 0 0
0 1
0
SREJ
0
0 0 0 0
1 0
1
REJ
0
0 0 0 0
1 1
1
FRMR
0
0 0 0 0
1 0
0
4.5.5.1.1 Receive Ready (RR)
This message is used for reception confirmation of the received data and for the reception side to
receive new data. This message includes sequence number N(R) that is to be received as N+1.
Sequence number N(S), which indicates a sequence number that is to be sent, may be added to
RR. When message length is between 4 to 6 octets, it includes N(S).
Both of N(R) and N(S) can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. The
bit E=0 if the value can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used,
and the second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described within 7 bits. In this
case, two octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 3a and 4a show upper 7 bits and Octet 3b and 4b show
lower 8 bits.
RR has P (Poll) bit in its second octet. When transmission side requests RR to reception side as
a reception confirmation, P=1 must be set. RR with P=1 should not be sent until RR with P=0
reception or T1 timer timeout. See section 4.5.5.2.3.1 for more details.
Figure 4.89 shows the RR message format.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
313
Bit
8
0
P
E
7
6
5
4
3
2
Protocol Identifier: MAC Control Protocol
0
0
0
0
0
0
Message Type: RR
0
0
0
0
0
0
Sequence Number N(R) (MSB)
Sequence Number N(R) (LSB)
E
Sequence Number N(S) (MSB)
Sequence Number N(S) (LSB)
1
1
1
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3a
Octet 3b
Octet 4a
Octet 4b
Figure 4.89 RR Message Format
4.5.5.1.2 Receive Not Ready (RNR)
When the reception side cannot receive any data temporarily, then the reception side will inform
the following message. It is impossible to receive any data by using this message. Sequence
number N(R), which indicates a sequence number that is to be received, should be added to
RNR. When message length is Between 4 to 6 octets, it includes N(S).
Both of N(R) and N(S) can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. The
bit E=0 if the value can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used,
and the second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described within 7 bits. In this
case, two octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 3a and 4a show upper 7 bits and Octet 3b and 4b show
lower 8 bits.
RNR has P (Poll) bit in its second octet. RNR with P=1 is sent when a node which is in busy state
confirms if RNR has reached to opposite node or not. Figure 4.90 shows the RNR message
format.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Protocol Identifier: MAC Control Protocol
Octet 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Message Type: RNR
Octet 2
P
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Sequence Number N(R) (MSB)
E
Octet 3a
Sequence Number N(R) (LSB)
E
Sequence Number N(S) (MSB)
Sequence Number N(S) (LSB)
Octet 3b
Octet 4a
Octet 4b
Figure 4.90 RNR Message Format
A-GN4.00-03-TS
314
4.5.5.1.3 Frame Reject (FRMR)
Reception side notifies that the received frame is rejected because the reception side cannot
receive the expected data. Figure 4.91 shows the FRMR message. Table 4.56 shows the list of
rejected reasons.
Bit
8
0
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
Protocol Identifier: MAC Control Protocol
0
0
0
0
0
0
Message Type: FRMR
0
0
0
0
1
0
Reject Reason
1
1
0
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
Figure 4.91 FRMR Message Format
Table 4.56 Reject Reason List
Reject Reason
Reject Reason Field
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1
Undefined Protocol Identifier
0 0 0 0 0
0 0
1
Undefined Message Type
0 0 0 0 0
0 1
0
Undefined CD Field
0 0 0 0 0
0 1
1
Incorrect Data Part Length(L)
0 0 0 0 0
1 0
0
Incorrect Index(IX)
0 0 0 0 0
1 0
1
Incorrect Sequence Number(N)
0 0 0 0 0
1 1
0
Over the limit of retransmission times
0 0 0 0 0
1 1
1
Other Error
1 1 1 1 1
1 1
1
4.5.5.1.4 Selective Reject (SREJ)
SREJ message is sent when retransmission is requested to specify the sequence number. Figure
4.92 shows the SREJ message.
N(R) can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. The bit E=0 if the value
can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used, and the second
octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described within 7 bits. In this case, two octets
(15 bits) is used. Octet 3a shows upper 7 bits and Octet 3b shows lower 8 bits.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
315
Bit
8
0
0
E
7
6
5
4
3
2
Protocol Identifier: MAC Control Protocol
0
0
0
0
0
0
Message Type: SREJ
0
0
0
0
1
0
Sequence Number N(R) (MSB)
1
1
1
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3a
Sequence Number N(R) (LSB)
Octet 3b
Figure 4.92 SREJ Message Format
4.5.5.1.5 Reject (REJ)
This message is used to request the retransmission for the specified frame and the following
frames after specified sequence number. Figure 4.93 shows the REJ message.
N(R) can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. The bit E=0 if the value
can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used, and the second
octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described within 7 bits. In this case, two octets
(15 bits) is used. Octet 3a shows upper 7 bits and Octet 3b shows lower 8 bits.
Bit
8
0
0
E
7
6
5
4
3
2
Protocol Identifier: MAC Control Protocol
0
0
0
0
0
0
Message Type: REJ
0
0
0
0
1
1
Sequence Number N(R) (MSB)
Sequence Number N(R) (LSB)
1
1
1
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3a
Octet 3b
Figure 4.93 REJ Message Format
4.5.5.2 Control Operation Elements
4.5.5.2.1 Poll bit
RR and RNR have a poll bit (called “P bit”). The P bit provides the following function. P bit set at
“1” is used by the data link layer entity to poll the response frame from its peer’s data link layer
entity.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
316
4.5.5.2.2 Variables
4.5.5.2.2.1 The range of a sequence number and variable
The range of a sequence number and variable described in this section is from 0 to 32767. The
value wraps around within this range. Because sequence number N field in MAC header length is
15 bits including expanded octet, a maximum sequence number is a modulo value of 32768.
4.5.5.2.2.2 Send state variable V(S)
Data link layer entity has a send state variable V(S). V(S) indicates the sequence number that
should be transmitted next. V(S) is increased by one for each numbered frame transmission.
However, V(S) must not exceed the value of adding the maximum number of window size to
V(A).
4.5.5.2.2.3 Acknowledge state variable V(A)
Data link layer entity has an acknowledge state variable V(A). V(A) indicates the sequence
number that should be acknowledged next by its peer. (V(A)-1 is equal to N(S) of the numbered
frame acknowledged last.) The value of V(A) is updated by the correct N(R) value acknowledged
by the RR/RNR frame transmitted from its peer. The correct N(R) value is in the range of
V(A)≤N(R)≤V(S).
4.5.5.2.2.4 Send sequence number N(S)
Numbered frame have a send sequence number, N(S) indicates the sequence number of
transmitted frame. N(S) is set to V(S) prior to transmission of numbered frame(s).
4.5.5.2.2.5 Receive state variable V(R)
The data link layer entity has a receive state variable V(R). V(R) indicates the sequence number
of the numbered frame that should be received next. V(R) is set at the newest sequence number
added by 1 which can be continuously received by starting from current V(R).
4.5.5.2.2.6 Receive sequence number N(R)
RR/RNR frames have receive sequence numbers for data frames that should be received next.
Prior to RR/RNR frame transmission, N(R) is set so that it becomes equal to the newest V(R).
N(R) indicates the data link layer entity which sent such N(R) correctly received all data frames
having numbers up to N(R)-1.
4.5.5.2.3 Timers
4.5.5.2.3.1 Response acknowledge timer T1
T1 timer starts when RR/RNR frame with P=1 was received, and stops when receiving its
A-GN4.00-03-TS
317
response frame or REJ/SREJ frame. When the data link layer entity detects T1 timer’s time-out
retry out, it sends FRMR frame.
4.5.5.2.3.2 Response transfer timer T2
T2 timer is used to delay sending RR/RNR frame for receiving normal numbered frame. When T2
timer stopped and the data link layer entity receives numbered frame, it starts T2 timer. When T2
timer expires, the data link layer entity sends RR/RNR response frame with P=0. When T2 timer
is active, although it receives numbered frame, T2 timer goes on. When it receives command
frame with P=1, T2 timer is stopped.
4.5.5.2.3.3 Peer station busy supervisory timer T3
T3 is the timer to supervise the busy state of opposite side. When the data link layer entity
receives RNR frame, T3 timer is started. When T3 timer expires, the data link layer entity send
RR/RNR frame in order to check peer state. While T3 timer is in active, if the data link layer entity
receives RNR frame then restarts T3 timer, if it receives RR frame then stops T3 timer.
4.5.5.2.3.4 Link alive check timer T4
Satisfying one or more following conditions, the data link layer entity starts T4 timer.
- No data to send
- Outstanding
- My station is busy and outstanding
- Receive RR/REJ/SREJ when the data link layer entity has no data to send
Satisfying one or more following conditions, the data link layer entity stops T4 timer.
- V(S) equals to N(R) in received RR frame
- Receive newer numbered frame except for retransmission
- Start T3 timer
When T4 time out occurs, the data link layer entity sends RR/RNR frames.
When the data link layer entity detects T4 timer’s time-out retry out, it sends FRMR frame.
4.5.5.3 Access Establishment Phase Control Protocol
Refer to Chapter 7.
4.6 Optional MAC Layer Structure and sub-layer
4.6.1 Overview
MAC layer is composed of sublaye 1, sublaye 2 and sublaye 3.
4.6.2 MAC sub-layer1 (MSL1)
The main services and functions of the MSL1 include:
A-GN4.00-03-TS
318
-
Mapping between function channels and transport channels;
-
-
Multiplexing/demultiplexing of MSL1 SDUs belonging to one or different function
channels into/from transport blocks (TB) delivered to/from the physical layer on
transport channels;
scheduling information reporting;
-
Error correction through HARQ;
Priority handling between function channels of one MS;
Priority handling between MSs by means of dynamic scheduling;
Transport format selection;
Padding.
A MSL1 consists of a MSL1 header, zero or more MSL1 Service Data Units (MSL1 SDU), zero,
or more MSL1 control elements, and optionally padding.
A MSL1 PDU header consists of one or more MSL1 PDU subheaders; each subheader
corresponds to either a MSL1 SDU, a MSL1 control element or padding.
A MSL1 PDU subheader consists of the six header fields R/R/E/FCID/F/L but for the last
subheader in the MSL1 PDU and for fixed sized MSL1 control elements. The last subheader in
the MSL1 PDU and subheaders for fixed sized MSL1 control elements consist solely of the four
header fields R/R/E/FCID. A MSL1 PDU subheader corresponding to padding consists of the four
header fields R/R/E/FCID.
R
F
R
E
FCID
L
Oct 1
R
Oct 2
F
R
E
FCID
L
Oct 2
L
R/R/E/FCID/F/L sub-header with
7-bits L field
Oct 1
Oct 3
R/R/E/FCID/F/L sub-header with
15-bits L field
Figure 4.94: R/R/E/FCID/F/L MSL1 subheader
R
R
E
FCID
Oct 1
R/R/E/FCID sub-header
Figure 4.95: R/R/E/FCID MSL1 subheader
The MSL1 header consists of the following fields:
A-GN4.00-03-TS
319
-
-
-
FCID: The function Channel ID field identifies the function channel instance of the
corresponding MSL1 SDU or the type of the corresponding MSL1 control element or
padding.
L: The Length field indicates the length of the corresponding MSL1 SDU.The size of the
L field is indicated by the F field;
F: The Format field indicates the size of the Length field as indicated in Table 4.59. The
size of the F field is 1 bit. If the size of the MSL1 SDU is less than 128 bytes, the value
of the F field is set to 0, otherwise it is set to 1;
E: The Extension field is a flag indicating if more fields are present in the MSL1 header
or not. The E field is set to "1" to indicate another set of at least R/R/E/FCID fields. The
E field is set to "0" to indicate that either a MSL1 SDU, a MSL1 control element or
padding starts at the next byte;
R: Reserved bit, set to "0".
The MSL1 header and subheaders are octet aligned.
Table 4.57 Values of FCID for ADSCH
Index
FCID Values
00000
ACCCH
00001-01010
Identity of the function channel
01011-11011
Reserved
11111
Padding
Table 4.58 Values of FCID for AUSCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
320
Index
FCID Values
00000
ACCCH
00001-01010
Identity of the function channel
01011-11001
Reserved
11010
Advanced Transmission Power
Margin Notification Report
11011
C-MSID
11100
Truncated UL Data Size
Notification
11101
Short UL Data Size Notification
11110
Long UL Data Size Notification
11111
Padding
Table 4.59 Values of F field:
Index
Size of Length field (in bits)
0
7
1
15
4.6.3 MAC sub-layer2 (MSL2)
MSL2 includs three kinds PDU, TMD PDU, UMD PDU and AMD PDU.
The main services and functions of the MSL2 include:
A-GN4.00-03-TS
321
-
Transfer of upper layer PDUs;
-
Error Correction through ARQ (only for AM data transfer);
Concatenation, segmentation and reassembly of MSL2 SDUs (only for UM and AM data
transfer);
Re-segmentation of MSL2 data PDUs (only for AM data transfer);
-
Reordering of MSL2data PDUs (only for UM and AM data transfer);
Duplicate detection (only for UM and AM data transfer);
Protocol error detection (only for AM data transfer);
MSL2 SDU discard (only for UM and AM data transfer);
4.6.3.1 TMD PDU
TMD PDU consists only of a Data field and does not consist of any MSL2 headers.
4.6.3.2 UMD PDU
UMD PDU consists of a Data field and an UMD PDU header.
UMD PDU header consists of a fixed part (fields that are present for every UMD PDU) and an
extension part (fields that are present for an UMD PDU when necessary). The fixed part of the
UMD PDU header itself is byte aligned and consists of a FI, an E and a SN. The extension part of
the UMD PDU header itself is byte aligned and consists of E(s) and LI(s).
An UM MSL2 entity is configured by high layer to use either a 5 bit SN or a 10 bit SN. When the 5
bit SN is configured, the length of the fixed part of the UMD PDU header is one byte. When the
10 bit SN is configured, the fixed part of the UMD PDU header is identical to the fixed part of the
AMD PDU header, except for D/C, RF and P fields all being replaced with R1 fields. The
extension part of the UMD PDU header is identical to the extension part of the AMD PDU header
(regardless of the configured SN size).
An UMD PDU header consists of an extension part only when more than one Data field elements
are present in the UMD PDU, in which case an E and a LI are present for every Data field
element except the last. Furthermore, when an UMD PDU header consists of an odd number of
LI(s), four padding bits follow after the last LI.
4.6.3.3 AMD PDU
A-GN4.00-03-TS
322
AMD PDU is a kind of PDU of MSL2 and consists of a Data field and an AMD PDU header.
AMD PDU header consists of a fixed part (fields that are present for every AMD PDU) and an
extension part (fields that are present for an AMD PDU when necessary). The fixed part of the
AMD PDU header itself is byte aligned and consists of a D/C, a RF, a P, a FI, an E and a SN. The
extension part of the AMD PDU header itself is byte aligned and consists of E(s) and LI(s).
An AMD PDU header consists of an extension part only when more than one Data field elements
are present in the AMD PDU, in which case an E and a LI are present for every Data field
element except the last. Furthermore, when an AMD PDU header consists of an odd number of
LI(s), four padding bits follow after the last LI.
4.6.3.4 AMD PDU segment
AMD PDU segment consists of a Data field and an AMD PDU segment header.
AMD PDU segment header consists of a fixed part (fields that are present for every AMD PDU
segment) and an extension part (fields that are present for an AMD PDU segment when
necessary). The fixed part of the AMD PDU segment header itself is byte aligned and consists of
a D/C, a RF, a P, a FI, an E, a SN, a LSF and a SO. The extension part of the AMD PDU
segment header itself is byte aligned and consists of E(s) and LI(s).
An AMD PDU segment header consists of an extension part only when more than one Data field
elements are present in the AMD PDU segment, in which case an E and a LI are present for
every Data field element except the last. Furthermore, when an AMD PDU segment header
consists of an odd number of LI(s), four padding bits follow after the last LI.
4.6.3.5 State variables parameter and timers
All state variables and all counters are non-negative integers.
All state variables related to AM data transfer can take values from 0 to 1023.
The transmitting side of each AM MSL2 entity shall maintain the following state variables:
a) VT(A) – Acknowledgement state variable
This state variable holds the value of the SN of the next AMD PDU for which a positive
acknowledgment is to be received in-sequence, and it serves as the lower edge of the
transmitting window. It is initially set to 0, and is updated whenever the AM MSL2 entity receives
a positive acknowledgment for an AMD PDU with SN = VT(A).
b) VT(MS) – Maximum send state variable
A-GN4.00-03-TS
323
This state variable equals VT(A) + AM_Window_Size, and it serves as the higher edge of the
transmitting window.
c) VT(S) – Send state variable
This state variable holds the value of the SN to be assigned for the next newly generated AMD
PDU. It is initially set to 0, and is updated whenever the AM MSL2 entity delivers an AMD PDU
with SN = VT(S).
d) POLL_SN – Poll send state variable
This state variable holds the value of VT(S)-1 upon the most recent transmission of a MSL2 data
PDU with the poll bit set to “1”. It is initially set to 0.
The transmitting side of each AM MSL2 entity shall maintain the following counters:
a) PDU_WITHOUT_POLL – Counter
This counter is initially set to 0. It counts the number of AMD PDUs sent since the most recent
poll bit was transmitted.
b) BYTE_WITHOUT_POLL – Counter
This counter is initially set to 0. It counts the number of data bytes sent since the most recent poll
bit was transmitted.
c) RETX_COUNT – Counter
This counter counts the number of retransmissions of an AMD PDU (see subclause 5.2.1). There
is one RETX_COUNT counter per PDU that needs to be retransmitted.
The receiving side of each AM MSL2 entity shall maintain the following state variables:
a) VR(R) – Receive state variable
This state variable holds the value of the SN following the last in-sequence completely received
AMD PDU, and it serves as the lower edge of the receiving window. It is initially set to 0, and is
updated whenever the AM MSL2 entity receives an AMD PDU with SN = VR(R).
b) VR(MR) – Maximum acceptable receive state variable
This state variable equals VR(R) + AM_Window_Size, and it holds the value of the SN of the first
AMD PDU that is beyond the receiving window and serves as the higher edge of the receiving
window.
c) VR(X) – t-Reordering state variable
This state variable holds the value of the SN following the SN of the MSL2 data PDU which
triggered t-Reordering..
d) VR(MS) – Maximum STATUS transmit state variable
This state variable holds the highest possible value of the SN which can be indicated by
“ACK_SN” when a STATUS PDU needs to be constructed. It is initially set to 0.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
324
e) VR(H) – Highest received state variable
This state variable holds the value of the SN following the SN of the MSL2 data PDU with the
highest SN among received MSL2 data PDUs. It is initially set to 0.
The receiving side of each AM MSL2 entity shall maintain the following constant:
a) AM_Window_Size
This constant is used by both the transmitting side and the receiving side of each AM MSL2 entity
to calculate VT(MS) from VT(A), and VR(MR) from VR(R). AM_Window_Size = 512.
The receiving side of each AM MSL2 entity shall maintain the following timers:
a) t-PollRetransmit
This timer is used by the transmitting side of an AM MSL2 entity in order to retransmit a poll
b) t-Reordering
This timer is used by the receiving side of an AM MSL2 entity and receiving UM MSL2 entity in
order to detect loss of MSL2 PDUs at lower layer. If t-Reordering is running, t-Reordering shall
not be started additionally, i.e. only one t-Reordering per MSL2 entity is running at a given time.
c) t-StatusProhibit
This timer is used by the receiving side of an AM MSL2 entity in order to prohibit transmission of
a STATUS PDU.
4.6.4 MAC sublayer 3 (MSL3)
4.6.4.1 Overview
This subclause provides an overview on services, functions and PDU structure provided by the
MSL 3 sublayer.
The main services and functions of the MSL 3 sublayer for the user plane include:
- Header compression and decompression: ROHC only;
- Transfer of user data;
- In-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs at MSL 3 re-establishment procedure for MSL 2 AM;
- Duplicate detection of lower layer SDUs at MSL 3 re-establishment procedure for MSL 2 AM;
- Retransmission of MSL 3 SDUs at handover for MSL 2 AM;
- Ciphering and deciphering;
- Timer-based SDU chuck in uplink.
The main services and functions of the MSL 3 for the control plane include:
A-GN4.00-03-TS
325
-
Ciphering and Integrity Protection;
-
Transfer of control plane data.
4.6.4.2 UL Data Transfer Procedures
At reception of a MSL 3 SDU from upper layers, the MS shall:
- start the chuck Timer associated with this MSL 3 SDU (if configured);
For a MSL 3 SDU received from upper layers, the MS shall:
- associate the MSL 3 SN corresponding to Next_MSL 3_TX_SN to this MSL 3 SDU;
- perform header compression of the MSL 3 SDU;
- perform integrity protection (if needed), and ciphering (if needed) using COUNT based on
TX_HFN and the MSL 3 SN associated with this MSL 3 SDU respectively;
- increment Next_MSL 3_TX_SN by one;
- if Next_MSL 3_TX_SN > Maximum_MSL 3_SN:
- set Next_MSL 3_TX_SN to 0;
- increment TX_HFN by one;
- submit the resulting MSL 3 Data PDU to lower layer.
4.6.4.3 DL Data Transfer Procedures
- chuck the MSL 3 Data PDUs that are received from lower layers due to the re-establishment of
the lower layers;
- process the MSL 3 Data PDUs that are received from lower layers due to the re-establishment
of the lower layers, for both AM and UM;
- reset the header compression protocol for downlink (if configured) , for both AM and UM;
- set Next_ MSL 3_RX_SN, and RX_HFN to 0;
- chuck all stored MSL 3 SDUs and MSL 3 PDUs;
- apply the ciphering algorithm and key provided by upper layers during the re-establishment
procedure.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
326
Reception of a new
Data
Data out of
window ?
Window
Last
No
No
Yes
new SN >
Next_RX_SN
Data in next loop?
No
Window
0
0
No
Yes
RX_HFN++;
decipher with RX_HFN and
new SN;
Next_RX_SN = new SN+1
Yes
decipher with
RX_HFN - 1 and
new SN;
Last
Data in last loop?
Yes
decipher with
RX_HFN - 1 and
new SN;
decipher with
RX_HFN and
new SN;
new SN <
new SN ≥
Next_RX_SN
Next_RX_SN
Yes
decipher with RX_HFN and
new SN;
Next_RX_SN = new SN+1;
If Next_RX_SN > Max_SN,
Next_RX_SN =0 ,
RX_HFN++;
decipher with
RX_HFN and
new SN;
perform header
decompression
perform header
decompression ;
discard this SDU;
Yes
discard this SDU;
if the same SN is
stored?
No
store the SDU;
set Last_Submitted_RX_SN to the SN of the last
SDU delivered to upper layers
Data out of window : new SN – Last_Submitted_RX_SN > Reordering_Window or 0 <= Last_Submitted_RX_SN – new SN < Reordering_Window
Data in next loop:Next_RX_SN – new SN > Reordering_Window
Data in last loop:new SN - Next_RX_SN >= Reordering_Window
Figure 4.96 DL Data Transfer Procedures
4.6.4.4 MSL 3 chuck
When the chuckTimer expires for a MSL 3 SDU, or the successful delivery of a MSL 3 SDU is
confirmed by MSL 3 status report, the MS shall chuck the MSL 3 SDU along with the
corresponding MSL 3 PDU. If the corresponding MSL 3 PDU has already been submitted to lower
layers the chuck is indicated to lower layers.
4.6.4.5 Header Compression and Decompression
The header compression protocol is based on the Robust Header Compression (ROHC)
framework. There are multiple header compression algorithms, called profiles, defined for the
ROHC framework. Each profile is specific to the particular network layer, transport layer or upper
layer protocol combination e.g. TCP/IP and RTP/UDP/IP.
The detailed definition of the ROHC channel is specified as part of the ROHC framework. This
includes how to multiplex different flows (header compressed or not) over the ROHC channel, as
well as how to associate a specific IP flow with a specific context state during initialization of the
compression algorithm for that flow.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
327
4.6.4.6 Ciphering and Deciphering
The ciphering function includes both ciphering and deciphering and is performed in MSL 3. For
the control plane, the data unit that is ciphered is the data part of the MSL 3 PDU and the MAC-I.
For the user plane, the data unit that is ciphered is the data part of the MSL 3 PDU; ciphering is
not applicable to MSL 3 Control PDUs.
The ciphering algorithm and key to be used by the MSL 3 entity are configured by upper layers.
Meanwhile, the ciphering function is activated by upper layers. After security activation, the
ciphering function shall be applied to all MSL 3 PDUs indicated by upper layers for the downlink
and the uplink, respectively.
4.6.4.7 Integrity Protection and Verification
The integrity protection function includes both integrity protection and integrity verification and is
performed in MSL 3 for MSL 3 entities associated with SRBs. The data unit that is integrity
protected is the PDU header and the data part of the PDU before ciphering.
The integrity protection algorithm and key to be used by the MSL 3 entity are configured by upper
layers. Meanwhile, the integrity protection function is activated by upper layers.
As the RADIO CONNECTION message which activates the integrity protection function is itself
integrity protected with the configuration included in this RADIO CONNECTION message, this
message needs first be decoded by RADIO CONNECTION before the integrity protection
verification could be performed for the PDU in which the message was received.
4.6.4.8 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data
When a MSL 3 entity receives a MSL 3 PDU that contains reserved or invalid values, the MSL 3
entity shall:
- chuck the received PDU.
4.6.4.9 Protocol data units, formats and parameters
The MSL 3 Data PDU is used to convey:
- a MSL 3 SDU SN; and
- user plane data containing an uncompressed MSL 3 SDU; or
- user plane data containing a compressed MSL 3 SDU; or
- control plane data; and
- a MAC-I field for SRBs only;
A-GN4.00-03-TS
328
The MSL 3 Control PDU is used to convey:
- a MSL 3 status report indicating which MSL 3 SDUs are missing and which are not following a
MSL 3 re-establishment.
- header compression control information, e.g. interspersed ROHC feedback.
4.6.4.10 Formats
4.6.4.10.1 General
A MSL 3 PDU is a bit string that is byte aligned (i.e. multiple of 8 bits) in length. In the figures in
sub clause 6.2, bit strings are represented by tables in which the most significant bit is the
leftmost bit of the first line of the table, the least significant bit is the rightmost bit on the last line of
the table, and more generally the bit string is to be read from left to right and then in the reading
order of the lines. The bit order of each parameter field within a MSL 3 PDU is represented with
the first and most significant bit in the leftmost bit and the last and least significant bit in the
rightmost bit.
MSL 3 SDUs are bit strings that are byte aligned (i.e. multiple of 8 bits) in length. A compressed
or uncompressed SDU is included into a MSL 3 PDU from the first bit onward.
4.6.4.11 Parameters
If not otherwise mentioned in the definition of each field then the bits in the parameters shall be
interpreted as follows: the left most bit string is the first and most significant and the right most bit
is the last and least significant bit.
Unless otherwise mentioned, integers are encoded in standard binary encoding for unsigned
integers. In all cases the bits appear ordered from MSB to LSB when read in the PDU.
4.6.4.12 State variables
This sub clause describes the state variables used in MSL 3 entities in order to specify the MSL 3
protocol.
All state variables are non-negative integers.
The transmitting side of each MSL 3 entity shall maintain the following state variables:
a)
Next_ TX_SN
The variable Next_ TX_SN indicates the MSL 3 SN of the next MSL 3 SDU for a given MSL 3
entity.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
329
b)
TX_HFN
The variable TX_HFN indicates the HFN value for the generation of the COUNT value used for
MSL 3 PDUs for a given MSL 3 entity.
The receiving side of each MSL 3 entity shall maintain the following state variables:
c)
Next_ RX_SN
The variable Next_ RX_SN indicates the next expected MSL 3 SN by the receiver for a given
MSL 3 entity.
d)
RX_HFN
The variable RX_HFN indicates the HFN value for the generation of the COUNT value used for
the received MSL 3 PDUs for a given MSL 3 entity.
e) Last_Submitted_ RX_SN
For MSL 3 entities for DRBs mapped on MSL 2 AM the variable Last_Submitted_RX_SN
indicates the SN of the last MSL 3 SDU delivered to the upper layers.
4.6.4.13 Timers
The transmitting side of each MSL 3 entity for DRBs shall maintain the following timers:
chuckTimer
The duration of the timer is configured by upper layers. In the transmitter, a new timer is started
upon reception of an SDU from upper layer.
4.6.4.14
Constants
a) Reordering_Window
Indicates the size of the reordering window. The size equals to 2048, i.e. half of the MSL 3 SN
space, for radio bearers that are mapped on MSL 2 AM.
b) Maximum_MSL 3_SN is:
4095 if the MSL 3 entity is configured for the use of 12 bit SNs
-
127 if the MSL 3 entity is configured for the use of 7 bit SNs
31 if the MSL 3 entity is configured for the use of 5 bit SNs
A-GN4.00-03-TS
330
Chapter 5 Common Channel Specification
5.1 Overview
In this chapter, common channel (CCH) to apply to link establishment control is specified.
The structure of PHY layer, logical common channel (LCCH) structural methods and control
message format are clarified.
5.2 Common Channel (CCH)
CCH consists of BCCH, PCH, TCCH and SCCH as shown in Figure 5.1.
CCH
Common Channel
BCCH
Broadcast Control Channel
PCH
Paging Channel
SCCH
Signaling Control Channel
TCCH
Timing Correct Channel
Figure 5.1 CCH Structure
The function of CCH is summarized in Table 5.1.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
331
Table 5.1 Function Description of CCH
Channel
Name
Direction
BCCH
DL
PCH
DL
SCCH
Both
TCCH
UL
Function Description
BCCH is a DL channel to broadcast the control information
from BS to MS.
PCH is a DL channel to inform the paging information from BS
to MS.
SCCH is both DL and UL channel for LCH assignment. DL
SCCH notifies allocation of an individual channel to MS. And,
UL SCCH requests LCH re-assignment to BS.
TCCH is an UL channel to detect UL transmission timing.
Also, MS requires LCH establishment using TCCH.
Figure 5.2 shows the correspondence between PHY PRU and function channel in protocol phase.
Protocol
Phase
PRU
TCCH
Link Establishment Phase
TCCH
UL
CCH
SCCH
CCCH
BCCH
PCH
SCCH
DL
Figure 5.2 PRU, Protocol Phase and Functional Channel Correspondence
A-GN4.00-03-TS
332
5.2.1 Logical Common Channel (LCCH)
Rules of the structure of logical common channel (LCCH) are shown in Figure 5.3.
(5× n) ms
Interval time for downlink transmission
5 ms
TDMA frame
Uplink
Downlink
Subchannel of CCH
Slot 1
2 3 4
1
2 3 4
1
2 3 4
1
4
2 3 4
1
2 3 4
1
2 3 4
Downlink LCCH
1
m
2 3 4
1 2 3
Slot for Downlink CCH
Slot for Uplink CCH
Uplink LCCH
1
m
2 3 4
1 2 3
(5× n× m) ms
LCCH superframe
n is LCCH interval value. Refer to Section 5.2.3.1.
Figure 5.3 Slot and LCCH
LCCH has the superframe structure shown in Section 5.2.3. All transmission/reception timing of
slots for controlling intermittent transmission and so forth is generated based on the superframe.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
333
5.2.2 Definition of Superframe
The minimum cycle of the DL LCCH that specifies the slot position of all LCCH elements is
specified as the LCCH superframe. As DL LCCH elements, there are three types of LCCH
elements:
They are BCCH, which is used by the appropriate system, all PCH (P1-Pk: Number of groups =
k) corresponding to the paging group as well as the SCCH with fixed insertion.
BCCH(A) must be transmitted by the lead slot of the LCCH superframe. The leading position of
the superframe is reported via BCCH transmission. Also, BCCH(B) is defined by something other
than the superframe lead.
5.2.3 Superframe Structure of DL LCCH
The superframe structure of the DL LCCH that is defined by profile data is informed to each MS
on BCCH.
Depending on the way to select the profile data that defines the structure, the LCCH superframe
can transmit the identical paging group(pi: i = 1 to k) multiple times, but the number of continuous
transmissions (provided by nBS) for one paging call and the number of same paging groups nSG
included in the LCCH superframe are independent. Continuous transmission in response to one
paging call can be concluded within the LCCH superframe, or it can be spread over several
superframes.
If necessary, it is possible to temporarily replace LCCH elements except for BCCH (A), and send
the other LCCH elements.
Otherwise, the frame basic unit must follow the rules below.
(a) Within one frame basic unit, regularly intermittently transmitted BCCH or SCCH appears
first, and PCH is established as the function channel that follows it.
(b) Within one frame basic unit, if nPCH data is greater than or equal to two, the respective
PCHs are continuously established.
Further, during system operation, if profile data is modified, it is necessary to control information
flow and contents so that all MSs can receive those modified contents.
Specific profile data are shown below.
5.2.3.1 LCCH Interval Value (n)
LCCH interval value shows the cycle in which BS intermittently transmits an LCCH slot. It is the
value expressed by the number of TDMA frames (n) within the intermittent transmission cycle.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
334
5.2.3.2 Frame Basic Unit Length (nSUB)
This stands for the length of the LCCH superframe, which constitutes consecutive elements of
BCCH, SCCH and PCH. This LCCH superframe constituent element is called the frame basic
unit.
5.2.3.3 Number of Same Paging Groups (nSG)
This stands for the number of times that the same paging group is repeatedly transmitted in one
superframe.
5.2.3.4 PCH Number (nPCH)
This stands for the number of PCH signal elements in a frame basic unit.
5.2.3.5 Paging Grouping Factor (nGROUP)
This stands for the number of frame basic units required for one transmission of each PCH
belonging to all paging groups in one superframe.
Furthermore the multiple (nGROUP) of the number of PCHs (nPCH) is specified as the group division
number of PCH information.
However, when the PCH paging groups are mutually related as two LCCH are used, number of
group division is calculated as nGROUP× nPCH× 2.
5.2.3.6 Battery Saving Cycle Maximum value (nBS)
nBS stands for the number of times that BS continuously transmits the identical reception signal to
a certain paging group. The maximum battery saving cycles of MS that are permitted by the
system depending on nBS are specified.
(Maximum battery saving cycle = 5 ms × n × nSUB × nGROUP × nBS)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
335
5.2.3.7 The Relationship Among Profile Data
The relationship among profile data are shown below.
nSUB  nPCH + 1
In the frame basic unit, nPCH + 1 is the lowest frame basic unit
length because BCCH is always assigned.
The number of frame basic units N within an LCCH superframe is
given by the product of the number of the same paging groups n SG
and the paging grouping factor nGROUP.
N = nSG× nGROUP
(Units are frame basic units)
nFRM () nGROUP× nBS
If the number of the same paging groups nSG in the LCCH
superframe is the same as the battery saving cycle maximum
value nBS, there will be an equal sign. In other cases, there will not
be an equal sign.
Left side: Number of frame basic units in LCCH superframe
Right side: Maximum battery saving cycle
(The unit is referred to as the frame basic unit.)
(5 × n) ms
LCCH superframe
SCCH
PCH2
PCH1
BCCH
PCH8
PCH7
SCCH
PCH6
PCH5
SCCH
PCH4
PCH3
SCCH
PCH2
PCH1
BCCH
LCCH
Downlink
nSUB
nSUB× nGROUP

The diagram above shows an example in which n SG=1, nSUB=3, nPCH=2, nGROUP=4
Figure 5.4 An Example of LCCH Structure
5.2.3.8 Paging Group Calculation Rules
From the information on Paging ID and BCCH, PCH which should be received is computable with
the following formula. Refer to Section 5.5.4 for Paging ID.
[Paging Group formula]
Paging Group = (Paging ID) MOD (nPCH × nGROUP) + 1
Paging ID : Identification information for paging
nPCH
: Number of PCHs in the frame basic unit
nGROUP
: Paging grouping factor
A-GN4.00-03-TS
336
5.2.3.9 Optional Paging Group Calculation Rules
The MS may use Discontinuous Reception (DRX) in idle mode in order to reduce power
consumption. One Paging Occasion (PO) is a slot where there may be P-MSID transmitted on
ADECCH addressing the paging message. One Paging Frame (PF) is one Radio Frame, which
may contain one or multiple Paging Occasion(s). When DRX is used the MS needs only to
monitor one PO per DRX.
PF and PO is determined by following formulae using the DRX parameters provided in System
Information:
PF is given by following equation:
SFN mod T= (T div N)*(MS_ID mod N)
Index i_s pointing to PO from slot pattern will be derived from following calculation:
i_s = floor(MS_ID/N) mod Ns
The index i-s position to PO should meet the following subframe pattern: when i_s is 0, the PO
will be in subframe #0; when i_s is 1 and Ns is 2, the PO will be in subframe #5; when i_s is 1 and
Ns is 4, the PO will be in subframe #1; when i_s is 2 and Ns is 4, the PO will be in subframe #5
and when i_s is 3 and Ns is 4, the PO will be in subframe #6.
System Information DRX parameters stored in the MS shall be updated locally in the MS
whenever the DRX parameter values are changed in SI.
The following Parameters are used for the calculation of the PF and i_s:
T: DRX cycle of the MS. T is determined by the shortest of the MS specific
DRX value, if allocated by upper layers, and a default DRX value broadcast in system information.
If MS specific DRX is not configured by upper layers, the default value is applied.
nB: 4T, 2T, T, T/2, T/4, T/8, T/16, T/32.
N: min(T,nB);
Ns: max(1,nB/T)
MS_ID: IMSI mod 1024.
IMSI is given as sequence of digits of type Integer (0..9), IMSI shall in the formulae above be
interpreted as a decimal integer number, where the first digit given in the sequence represents
the highest order digit.
For example:
IMSI = 12 (digit1=1, digit2=2)
In the calculations, this shall be interpreted as the decimal integer "12", not "1x16+2 = 18".
5.2.3.10 Intermittent Transmission Timing for ICH
Figure 5.5 shows the intermittent transmission timing of ICH according to the ICH offset and the
ICH period. ICH offset indicates the beginning frame of ICH based on the CCH frame. ICH period
indicates the cycle of ICH based on the beginning frame by ICH offset. However, the intermittent
transmission timing of ICH must always be adjusted according to the beginning frame of ICH
based on the CCH frame.
Refer to Section 5.5.6.1.3 for information elements of the ICH offset and the ICH period.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
337
Interval time for downlink transmission
DL
CCH
UL
(5 × n) ms
5 ms
ICH DL
UL
ICH offset
ICH period
ICH period
Assigned ICH
n is LCCH interval value. Refer to Section 5.2.3.1.
Figure 5.5 Intermittent Transmission Timing for ICH
5.2.4 Structure of UL LCCH
The UL LCCH is sent from each MS only when needed. It is used as the UL slot 2.5 ms before
the DL LCCH. Refer to Figure 5.3.
5.2.5 Structure of DL LCCH
A standard structural example of the DL LCCH is shown in Figure 5.6.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
338
Downlink
LCCH
BCCH
BC
P1
P2
SC
P3
P4
SC
P5
P6
SC
P7
P8
BC
SCCH
Paging
Group 1
PCH
Paging
Group 2
PCH
Paging
Group 3
PCH
Paging
Group 4
PCH
Paging
Group 5
PCH
SC
SC
SC
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
Paging
Group 6
PCH
P6
Paging
Group 7
PCH
P7
Paging
Group 8
PCH
P8
BC: BCCH
Pnum: PCH
SC: SCCH
Figure 5.6 Structural Example of DL LCCH
5.2.6 LCCH Multiplexing
BS can multiply LCCHs within the scope of the physical slot transmission condition. In this case,
MS can receive at least one logical common channel transmission from BS. Shown here is a
standard structural example that uses two DL LCCHs.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
339
5.2.6.1 When PCH Paging Groups Being Independent
The PCH paging group of the LCCHs f1 and f2 are mutually independent, but each DL LCCH
superframe structure is identical. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for n1offset and noffset.
(5 x n) ms
LCCH superframe
f1
BC
P1
P2
SC
P3
...
P4
BC
(5 x noffset) ms
BC
f2
P1
P2
SC
P3
...
P4
BC
LCCH superframe
BC :BCCH
Pnum :PCH
SC :SCCH
Here, an example is shown for the case where two LCCH are the same
absolute slot.
Figure 5.7 Example of Multiplex for Independent LCCH
5.2.6.2 When PCH Paging Groups Being Inter-related
LCCH f1's PCH transmits odd-numbered groups, and f2 transmits even-numbered groups.
(5 x n) ms
LCCH superframe
f1
BC
P1
P3
SC
P5
...
P7
BC
(5 x noffset) ms
f2
BC
P2
P4
SC
P6
P8
...
BC
LCCH superframe
BC :BCCH
Pnum :PCH
SC :SCCH
Here, an example is shown for the case where two LCCH are the same
absolute slot.
Figure 5.8 Example of Multiplex for Inter-related LCCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
340
5.3 PHY Frame Format
The PHY frame formats for CCH are shown in Figure 5.9 to Figure 5.14.
Fixed modulation area
Interleave unit
Scramble area
Control field
TAIL
CRC
CRC calculation area
PHY frame
Figure 5.9 PHY Frame Format for CCH
Figure 5.9 shows that the modulation and the CRC calculation are of PHY format for CCH. CCH
uses the fixed Modulation. Modulation method is BPSK for OFDMA and π / 2 - BPSK for SC,
while the coding rate is 1/2. Interleaving process is done in the entire fixed modulation area. CRC
of the control field is calculated. After CRC addition, the scramble is done from the control field to
CRC.
The value of scramble refers to Table 3.3.
5.3.1 BCCH
162 bits
CI
BS-Info
CCI
MSG ( BCCH )
CRC
TAIL
4
40
4
92
16
6
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
876543218765
…..
Octet
1
2
11
12
Figure 5.10 BCCH Format
A-GN4.00-03-TS
341
5.3.2 PCH
162 bits
CI
BS-Info
CCI
MSG ( PCH )
CRC
TAIL
4
40
4
92
16
6
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
876543218765
…..
Octet
1
2
11
12
Figure 5.11 PCH Format
5.3.3 TCCH
TCCH is a signal pattern. It is defined as timing correct channel at Sections 3.5.5 and 3.6.6.
5.3.4 SCCH
5.3.4.1 DL SCCH
162 bits
CI
BS-Info
CCI
MSG ( SCCH )
CRC
TAIL
4
40
4
92
16
6
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
876543218765
…..
Octet
1
2
11
12
Figure 5.12 DL SCCH Format
A-GN4.00-03-TS
342
5.3.4.2 UL SCCH for OFDMA
162 bits
CI
BSID
MSID
MSG ( SCCH )
CRC
TAIL
4
nBL
34
102 - nBL
16
6
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
87654321
…..
Octet
1
2
…
n-1
n
Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for nBL.
Figure 5.13 UL SCCH Format for OFDMA
5.3.4.3 UL SCCH for SC
120 bits
CI
BSID
MSID
MSG ( SCCH )
CRC
TAIL
4
nBL
34
60 - nBL
16
6
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
87654321
…..
Octet
1
2
…
n-1
n
Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for nBL.
Figure 5.14 UL SCCH Format for SC (without virtual GI extension)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
343
5.4 Control Field Format
5.4.1 Channel Identifier (CI)
CI coding rules are shown in Table 5.2 and Table 5.3.
Table 5.2 CI Coding for DL CCH
Bit
4
0
0
1
1
3
0
1
0
0
2
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
BCCH (B)
BCCH (A)
SCCH
PCH
Other
Reserved
Table 5.3 CI Coding for UL CCH
Bit
4
1
3
0
2
1
1
0
SCCH
Other
Reserved
5.4.2 BS Information (BS-Info)
BS-Info must be composed according to the format shown in Figure 5.15.
BS-Info
BSID
System type
Operator ID
1 bit
3 bits
40 bits
nBL bits
System additional ID
Paging area
number
np bits
Sequence number
BS additional
ID
(40 - nBL) bits
(nBL - np - 4) bits
Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for nBL and np.
Figure 5.15 BS-Info Format
BS-Info is composed of BSID and BS additional ID. BSID is defined for individual ID of BS.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
344
5.4.2.1 Base Station ID (BSID)
The area of BSID is indicated in the BSID area bit length (nBL) as "radio channel information
broadcasting" message on BCCH. The following information elements are included in BSID.
5.4.2.1.1 System Type
The system type is indicated in public system.
Table 5.4 System Type
Bit
1
0
1
Reserved
Public system
5.4.2.1.2 Operator ID
Operator ID length is three bits. The allocation of the bit is separately specified.
5.4.2.1.3 System Additional ID
The system additional ID is composed of the paging area number and the sequence number. The
area of paging area number is indicated in the paging area number length (np) as "radio channel
information broadcasting" message on BCCH.
5.4.2.1.3.1 Paging Area Number
Paging area is identified by paging area number.
5.4.2.1.3.2 Sequence Number
BS is identified by sequence number.
5.4.2.2 BS Additional ID
BS additional ID is an area to notify of the function of each BS.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
345
5.4.3 Common Control Information (CCI)
CCI is composed of the absolute slot number.
CCI
4 bits
Absolute slot number
2 bits
Reserved
2 bits
Figure 5.16 CCI Format
5.4.3.1 Absolute Slot Number
Absolute slot number indicates the number of the slot which the BS sends CCH in.
Table 5.5 Absolute Slot Number
Bit
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1st TDMA slot for DL.
2nd TDMA slot for DL.
3rd TDMA slot for DL.
4th TDMA slot for DL.
5.4.4 Mobile Station ID (MSID)
The length of MSID is 34 bits.
MSID
34 bits
Figure 5.17 MSID Format
A-GN4.00-03-TS
346
5.5 MSG Field
5.5.1 Message Type List
A list of messages defined in the MSG field is shown in Table 5.6.
Table 5.6 Message for MSG Field
Message for MSG (BCCH)
Reference
"Radio channel information broadcasting" message
"System information broadcasting" message
5.5.2.1
5.5.2.2
"Optional information broadcasting" message
5.5.2.3
Message for MSG (PCH)
Reference
“No Paging” message
"Paging type 1" message
5.5.4.1
5.5.4.2
"Paging type 2" message
"Paging type 3" message
"Paging type 4" message
"Paging type 5" message
5.5.4.3
5.5.4.4
5.5.4.5
5.5.4.6
"Paging type 6" message
"Paging type 7" message
5.5.4.7
5.5.4.8
Message for MSG (SCCH)
Reference
"Idle" message
"LCH assignment 1" message
"LCH assignment 2" message
"LCH assignment 3" message
"LCH assignment standby" message
5.5.6.1.1
5.5.6.1.2
5.5.6.1.3
5.5.6.1.4
5.5.6.1.5
"LCH assignment reject" message
"LCH assignment re-request" message
5.5.6.1.6
5.5.6.2.1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
347
5.5.2 MSG (BCCH)
The format of message type for BCCH is shown in Table 5.7, and the coding is shown in Table
5.8.
Table 5.7 Format of Message Type for BCCH
Octet
Bit
8
7
1
6
5
4
3
Message type
2
1
Reserved
Table 5.8 Message Type Coding for BCCH
Bit
8
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
6
0
1
1
Other
5
1
0
1
"Radio channel information broadcasting" message
"System information broadcasting" message
"Optional information broadcasting" message
Reserved
5.5.2.1 "Radio Channel Information Broadcasting" Message
BS must broadcast the radio channel structure information to MS using this message. The
message format is shown in Table 5.9, and the information element explanations are shown in
Table 5.10. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for the relationship between the information elements of this
message and the superframe.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
348
Table 5.9 "Radio Channel Information Broadcasting" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
"Radio channel information broadcasting" message
BS → MS (DL)
BCCH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
Reserved
Message Type
Reserved
LCCH Interval Value n
Paging Grouping Factor nGROUP
Paging Area Number Length np
Odd /
ReNumber of Same Paging
Battery Saving Cycle
Even
served
Groups nSG
Maximum Value nBS
ID
Control Carrier
Frame Basic Unit Length
PCH Number nPCH
Structure
nSUB
noffset
n1offset
ReBroadcasting Status
Global Definition Information Pattern
served
Indication
Protocol Version
Reserved
BSID Area Bit Length nBL
MCC (Mobile Country Code)
MNC (Mobile Network Code)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Table 5.10 Information Elements in "Radio Channel Information Broadcasting" Message
LCCH Interval Value n (Octet 2)
It shows the DL LCCH slot intermittent cycle.
Bit
6
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
:
:
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
Reserved
n=1
n=2
n=3
:
n = 20
:
n = 63
A-GN4.00-03-TS
349
Paging Grouping Factor nGROUP (Octet 3)
It shows the value of PCH information corresponding to the number of group divisions.
Bit
8
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
1
1
:
6
0
0
1
5
0
1
1
1
1
LCCH superframe is not constructed (optional)
nGROUP = 1
nGROUP = 2
:
nGROUP = 15
(Note) If LCCH is multiplexed, the values of n PCH and nGROUP will be set so that the paging group
number does not exceed 127.
Paging Area Number Length np (Octet 3)
It shows the bit length of the paging area number included in the BSID.
Refer to Section 5.4.2 for composition of BSID.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Reserved
np = 4
np = 6
np = 8
np = 10
np = 12
np = 13
np = 14
np = 15
np = 16
np = 17
np = 18
np = 19
np = 20
np = 21
np = 22
(Note), np must be the same even in a different paging area if handover between paging areas is
executed.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
350
Odd / Even ID (Octet 4)
(a) This information element has the following meanings when (1 0) (shows that there is a mutual
relationship between PCH paging group) is set in the control carrier structure (Octet 5)
information element contained in "radio channel information broadcasting" message:
Bit
8
0
1
It shows LCCH which transmits even-numbered paging group.
It shows LCCH which transmits odd-numbered paging group.
(b) In other cases than stated above, it has the following meanings:
Bit
8
0
1
Reserved
Reserved
Number of Same Paging Groups nSG (Octet 4)
It shows the number of PCH slots belonging to the same paging group in the LCCH superframe.
Bit
6
0
0
1
5
0
0
:
1
4
0
1
1
LCCH superframe is not constructed (optional)
nSG = 1
:
nSG = 7
Battery Saving Cycle Maximum Value nBS (Octet 4)
It shows the times BS continuously sends the same paging signal to the paging group.
Bit
3
0
0
1
2
0
0
:
1
1
0
1
1
LCCH superframe is not constructed (optional)
nBS = 1
:
nBS = 7
A-GN4.00-03-TS
351
Control Carrier Structure (Octet 5)
It shows the presence or absence of a mutual relationship between paging group and number of
LCCHs used by the relevant BS.
Bit
8
0
7
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Shows that only 1 LCCH is used.
Shows that 2 LCCHs are used, and each individual LCCH is
independent.
Shows that 2 LCCHs are used, and PCH paging groups are mutually
related.
Reserved
PCH Number nPCH (Octet 5)
It shows the number of PCHs in the frame basic unit.
Bit
6
0
0
1
5
0
0
:
1
4
0
1
1
No PCH (optional)
1 PCH slots in frame basic unit (nPCH = 1)
:
7 PCH slots in frame basic unit (nPCH = 7)
(Note) If LCCH is multiplexed, the values of nPCH and nGROUP will be set so that the paging group
number does not exceed 127.
Frame Basic Unit Length nSUB (Octet 5)
It shows the length of the LCCH superframe structural element (frame basic unit).
Bit
3
0
0
1
2
0
0
:
1
1
0
1
1
(Optional)
nSUB = 1
:
nSUB = 7
A-GN4.00-03-TS
352
noffset (Octet 6)
When the value of control carrier structure is (0 1) or (1 0), this information element shows that
the other control slot has transmitted in one of the absolute slot numbers 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Bit
8
0
0
1
1
7
0
1
0
1
It shows that the absolute slot number is the 1st slot position for DL.
It shows that the absolute slot number is the 2nd slot position for DL.
It shows that the absolute slot number is the 3rd slot position for DL.
It shows that the absolute slot number is the 4th slot position for DL.
(Note) The time from the local control slot to the other control slot is given by the following
equation.
t ms = 5 × n1offset + 0.625 × (absolute slot number of other control slot – absolute slot number
of local control slot)
n1offset (Octet 6)
When the value of control carrier structure is (0 1) or (1 0), this information element shows that
the other control slot has conducted transmission in the TDMA frame after 5 × n1offset ms.
Bit
6
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
:
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
n1offset = 0
n1offset = 1
n1offset = 2
n1offset = 3
:
n1offset = 63
(Note) The time from the local control slot to the other control slot is given by the following
equation.
t ms = 5 × n1offset + 0.625 × (absolute slot number of other control slot – absolute slot number
of local control slot)
Broadcasting Status Indication (Octet 7)
It shows the presence or absence of information broadcasting messages other than "radio
channel information broadcasting" message sent on the relevant LCCH.
Bit
7
1/0
6
1/0
-
5
1/0
-
"System information broadcasting" message present / absent
"Optional information broadcasting" message present / absent
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
353
Global Definition Information Pattern (Octet 7)
It shows the relevant pattern number of the present "radio channel information broadcasting"
message. When "radio channel information broadcasting" message changes, the new global
definition information pattern is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
1
1
1
:
2
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
Global definition information pattern (2)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Other
Reserved
Protocol Version (Octet 8)
It shows protocol version supported by BS.
Bit
8
-
7
-
6
-
5
-
Other
4
-
3
-
2
1/0
1
1/0
-
Version 1 present / absent
Version 2 present / absent
Reserved
BSID Area Bit Length nBL (Octet 9)
It shows the BSID area bit length included in the BS information.
Refer to Section 5.4.2.
Bit
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
3
0
0
0
:
0
Other
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
nBL = 15
nBL = 16
nBL = 17
:
nBL = 40
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
354
Mobile Country Code (Octet 10-11)
It shows the country identification. The code assignment rule shall obey ITU-T E.212. Assigned
decimal digits shall be changed to binary digits in order to be set in this element area.
Mobile Network Code (Octet 11-12)
It shows the network identification. The code assignment rule shall obey ITU-T E.212. Assigned
decimal digits shall be changed to binary digits in order to be set in this element area.
5.5.2.2 "System Information Broadcasting" Message
BS can broadcast system information to MS using this message. The message format is shown
in Table 5.11 and explanation of elements is shown in Table 5.12.
Table 5.11 "System Information Broadcasting" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
"System information broadcasting" message
BS → MS (DL)
BCCH
7
6
0
1
Message Type
5
0
Reserved
3
2
1
Reserved
Restriction
Indication
Restriction Class
Reserved
Broadcasting Message
Status Number msys
11
12
4
Broadcasting Reception Indication
A-GN4.00-03-TS
355
Table 5.12 Information Elements in "System Information Broadcasting" Message
Restriction Indication (Octet 2)
It is used to indicate if this message includes restriction information.
Bit
1
0
1
This message does not include restriction information.
This message includes restriction information.
Restriction Class (Octet 3-4)
It shows the restriction class number equal to the last digit in decimal digits of MSID. It is a priority
class from class 10 to Class 15 over others. MS shall NOT start both outgoing call and incoming
call while indicated restriction from BS, except handover and location registration.
Octet 3
Bit
8
0/1
Octet 4
Bit
8
0/1
7
-
6
-
-
-
7
-
6
-
-
-
5
:
-
4
0/1
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
-
Class 0 no restriction/restriction
Class 1 no restriction/restriction
Class 2 no restriction/restriction
Class 3 no restriction/restriction
-
-
-
-
Class 7 no restriction/restriction
5
0/1
:
-
4
0/1
-
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
-
-
-
-
-
Class 8 no restriction/restriction
Class 9 no restriction/restriction
Class 10 no restriction/restriction (Reserved)
Class 11 no restriction/restriction
Class 12 no restriction/restriction (Reserved)
(Reserved)
Class 15 no restriction/restriction (Reserved)
Restriction start condition
(1) System Information Broadcasting Message is transmitted and
(2) System Information Broadcasting Message/Restriction Indication=1 and
(3) The class of System Information Broadcasting Message/Restriction Class=1 corresponds MS
class
Restriction clear condition
(1) No reception System Information Broadcasting Message between two times reception of
Global Definition Information Pattern or
(2) System Information Broadcasting Message/Restriction Indication=0 or
(3) The class of System Information Broadcasting Message/Restriction Class=0 corresponds MS
A-GN4.00-03-TS
356
class
Broadcasting Message Status Number msys (Octet 11)
It shows the status number of the present "system information broadcasting" message. This
element can be used arbitrarily, but when the status changes, the new status is set.
Bit
3
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
:
1
1
0
1
0
msys = 0
msys = 1
msys = 2
:
msys = 7
1
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 12)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indication
of broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
8
0
0
7
0
0
1
6
0
1
5
0
0
0
1
1
0
-
-
-
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
:
Other
Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Local information broadcasting reception indication
"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication
"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
357
5.5.2.3 "Optional Information Broadcasting" Message
BS can broadcast optional information to MS using this message. The message format is shown
in Table 5.13 and explanation of elements is shown in Table 5.14.
Table 5.13 "Optional Information Broadcasting" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
"Optional information broadcasting" message
BS → MS (DL)
BCCH
7
6
0
1
Message Type
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5
4
1
3
2
1
Reserved
Reserved
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mopt
11
12
Broadcasting Reception Indication
Table 5.14 Information Elements in "Optional Information Broadcasting" Message
Broadcasting Message Status Number mopt (Octet 11)
It shows the status number of the present "system information broadcasting" message. This
element can be used arbitrarily, but when the status changes, the new status is set.
Bit
3
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
:
1
1
0
1
0
1
mopt = 0
mopt = 1
mopt = 2
:
mopt = 7
A-GN4.00-03-TS
358
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 12)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indication
of broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
8
0
0
7
0
0
1
6
0
1
5
0
0
0
1
1
0
-
-
-
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
:
Other
Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Local information broadcasting reception indication
"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication
"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Reserved
5.5.3 MSG (Optional BCCH)
5.5.3.1 MSG (BCCH)
System information is divided into the MasterInformationBroadcastingBlock (MIBB) and a number
of SystemInformationBroadcastingBlocks (SIBBs);
The mapping of SIBBs to SI messages is flexibly configurable by schedulingInformation;
The BS may schedule ADSCH transmissions concerning function channels other than BCCH in
the same slot as used for BCCH. The minimum MS capability restricts the BCCH mapped to
ADSCH e.g. regarding the maximum rate.
System information validity and notification of changes:
Change of system information only occurs at specific radio frames, i.e. the concept of a
modification period is used. System information may be transmitted a number of times with the
same content within a modification period, as defined by its scheduling. The modification period
boundaries are defined by SFN values for which SFN mod m= 0, where m is the number of radio
frames comprising the modification period. The modification period is configured by system
information.
When the network changes (some of the) system information, it first notifies the MSs about this
change, i.e. this may be done throughout a modification period. In the next modification period,
the network transmits the updated system information. Upon receiving a change notification, the
A-GN4.00-03-TS
359
MS acquires the new system information immediately from the start of the next modification
period. The MS applies the previously acquired system information until the MS acquires the new
system information.
The Paging message is used to inform MSs in IDLE MODE and MSs in ACTIVE MODE about a
system information change. If the MS receives a Paging message including the
systemInfoModification, it knows that the system information will change at the next modification
period boundary. Although the MS may be informed about changes in system information, no
further details are provided e.g. regarding which system information will change.
SystemInformationBlockType1 includes a value tag, systemInfoValueTag, that indicates if a
change has occurred in the SI messages. MSs may use systemInfoValueTag, e.g. upon return
from out of coverage, to verify if the previously stored SI messages are still valid. Additionally, the
MS considers stored system information to be invalid after 3 hours from the moment it was
successfully confirmed as valid, unless specified otherwise.
The MS verifies that stored system information remains valid by either checking a flag in
SystemInformationBlockType1 after the modification period boundary, or attempting to find the
systemInfoModification indication at least modificationPeriodCoeff times during the modification
period in case no paging is received, in every modification period. If no paging message is
received by the MS during a modification period, the MS may assume that no change of system
information will occur at the next modification period boundary. If MS in ACTIVE MODE, during a
modification period, receives one paging message, it may deduce from the presence/ absence of
systemInfoModification whether a change of system information will occur in the next modification
period or not.
5.5.4 MSG (PCH)
The format of message type for PCH is shown in Table 5.15, and the coding is shown in Table
5.16.
Table 5.15 Format of Message Type for PCH
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
6
Message Type
5
4
3
2
1
Broadcasting Reception Indication
Table 5.16 Message Type Coding for PCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
360
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
6
0
0
1
1
0
0
5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
Other
No paging
"Paging type 1" message (single paging / 50 bits' Paging ID)
"Paging type 2" message (single paging / 34 bits' Paging ID)
"Paging type 3" message (single paging / 24 bits' Paging ID)
"Paging type 4" message (multiplex paging / 34 bits' Paging ID)
"Paging type 5" message (multiplex paging / 24 bits' Paging ID)
"Paging type 6" message (paging and LCH assignment / 34 bits'
Paging ID)
LCH assignment does not include intermitted information of ICH.
"Paging type 7" message (paging and LCH assignment / 24 bits'
Paging ID)
LCH assignment includes intermitted information of ICH.
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
361
5.5.4.1 “No Paging” Message
Using this message, BS can notify MS of no paging in this PCH.
The message format is shown in Table 5.17, and the explanation of information elements is
shown in Table 5.18.
Table 5.17 "No Paging" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
"No Paging" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7
6
0
0
Message Type
5
0
4
3
2
1
Broadcasting Reception Indication
Reserved
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
Table 5.18 Information Elements in "No Paging" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indication
of broadcasting information message other than “radio channel information broadcasting”
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
362
Bit
4
0
0
3
0
0
1
2
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
-
-
-
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
:
Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Local information broadcasting reception indication
"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication
"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Other
Reserved
Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
Meaning of mi
Global definition information pattern indication
D.C.
Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other
Bit
7
0
0
0
1
D.C.
6
0
0
1
:
1
5
0
1
0
1
mi = 0
mi = 1
mi = 2
:
mi = 7
A-GN4.00-03-TS
363
5.5.4.2 "Paging Type 1" Message (single paging / 50 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.19, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.20.
Table 5.19 "Paging Type 1" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
"Paging type 1" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7
6
0
0
Message Type
5
1
4
3
2
1
Broadcasting Reception Indication
MSB
Paging ID
Application Type
LSB
Reserved
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
Table 5.20 Information Elements in "Paging Type 1" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indication
of broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
364
Bit
4
0
0
3
0
0
1
2
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
-
-
-
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
:
Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Local information broadcasting reception indication
"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication
"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Other
Reserved
Paging ID (Octet 2 - 8)
Paging ID is specified as a 50 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
However, MSID can be allocated when Paging ID is a 34 bits' number.
Application Type (Octet 8)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Other
Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved
Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
Meaning of mi
Global definition information pattern indication
D.C.
Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other
Bit
D.C.
6
5
A-GN4.00-03-TS
365
7
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
1
0
1
0
mi = 0
mi = 1
mi = 2
:
mi = 7
1
5.5.4.3 "Paging Type 2" Message (single paging / 34 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.21, and the explanation of information elements is shown in
Table 5.22.
Table 5.21 "Paging Type 2" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
"Paging type 2" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7
6
0
1
Message Type
5
0
4
3
2
1
Broadcasting Reception Indication
MSB
Paging ID
Application Type
LSB
Reserved
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
12
Table 5.22 Information Elements in "Paging Type 2" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indication
of broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
3
2
1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
366
4
0
0
0
0
1
1
-
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
-
-
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
:
Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Local information broadcasting reception indication
"System information broadcasting message" reception
indication
"Optional information broadcasting message" reception
indication
Other
Reserved
Paging ID (Octet 2 - 6)
Paging ID is specified as a 34 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
Besides, MSID of a 34 bits' number can be allocated.
Application Type (Octet 6)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Other
Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved
Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
Meaning of mi
Global definition information pattern indication
D.C.
Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other
D.C.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
367
Bit
7
0
0
0
6
0
0
1
:
1
1
5
0
1
0
mi = 0
mi = 1
mi = 2
:
mi = 7
1
5.5.4.4 "Paging Type 3" Message (single paging / 24 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.23, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.24.
Table 5.23 "Paging Type 3" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
"Paging type 3" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7
6
0
1
Message Type
5
1
4
3
2
1
Broadcasting Reception Indication
MSB
Paging ID
LSB
Reserved
Application Type
Reserved
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
Table 5.24 Information Elements in "Paging Type 3" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indication
of broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
368
Bit
4
0
0
3
0
0
1
2
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
-
-
-
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
:
Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Local information broadcasting reception indication
"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication
"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Other
Reserved
Paging ID (Octet 2 - 4)
Paging ID is specified as a 24 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
However, MSID can be allocated when Paging ID is a 34 bits' number.
Application Type (Octet 5)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Other
Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved
Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
Meaning of mi
Global definition information pattern indication
D.C.
Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other
Bit
D.C.
6
5
A-GN4.00-03-TS
369
7
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
1
0
1
0
1
mi = 0
mi = 1
mi = 2
:
mi = 7
5.5.4.5 "Paging Type 4" Message (multiplex paging / 34 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.25, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.26.
Besides, this PCH may contain two messages.
Table 5.25 "Paging Type 4" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
"Paging type 4" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7
6
1
0
Message Type
5
0
4
3
2
1
Broadcasting Reception Indication
MSB
Paging ID
Application Type
LSB
MSB
Paging ID
LSB
Reserved
Application Type
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
A-GN4.00-03-TS
370
Table 5.26 Information Elements in "Paging Type 4" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indication
of broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
4
0
0
3
0
0
1
2
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
-
-
-
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
:
Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Local information broadcasting reception indication
"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication
"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Other
Reserved
Paging ID (Octet 2 - 6, 7 - 11)
Paging ID is specified as a 34 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
Besides, MSID of 34 bits' number can be allocated.
Application Type (Octet 6, 11)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
Other
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
371
Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
Meaning of mi
Global definition information pattern indication
D.C.
Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other
Bit
7
0
0
0
1
D.C.
6
0
0
1
:
1
5
0
1
0
1
mi = 0
mi = 1
mi = 2
:
mi = 7
A-GN4.00-03-TS
372
5.5.4.6 "Paging Type 5" Message (multiplex paging / 24 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.27, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.28.
Besides, this PCH may contain two messages.
Table 5.27 "Paging Type 5" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
"Paging type 5" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7
6
1
0
Message Type
5
1
4
3
2
1
Broadcasting Reception Indication
MSB
Paging ID
LSB
Reserved
Application Type
MSB
Paging ID
LSB
Reserved
Application Type
Reserved
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
Table 5.28 Information Elements in "Paging Type 5" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indication
of broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
373
Bit
4
0
0
3
0
0
1
2
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
-
-
-
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
:
Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Local information broadcasting reception indication
"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication
"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Other
Reserved
Paging ID(Octet 2 - 4, 6 - 8)
Paging ID is specified as a 24 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
However, MSID can be allocated when Paging ID is a 34 bits' number.
Application Type (Octet 5, 9)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Other
Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved
Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
Meaning of mi
Global definition information pattern indication
D.C.
Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other
Bit
D.C.
6
5
A-GN4.00-03-TS
374
7
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
1
0
1
0
mi = 0
mi = 1
mi = 2
:
mi = 7
1
5.5.4.7 "Paging Type 6" Message (paging and LCH assignment / 34 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.29, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.30.
Besides, this PCH may contain a LCH assignment message.
Table 5.29 "Paging Type 6" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
"Paging type 6" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7
1
1
Message Type
0
4
3
2
1
Broadcasting Reception Indication
Paging ID
Application Type
Temporary LCH Number
LSB
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
Timing
Assignment PRU Number
Shift Direction Control Information
Reserved
TCCH Pattern Number
11
12
5
MSB
9
10
6
Reserved
Power Control Information
ANCH MIMO
ANCH MIMO
(UL)
(DL)
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
(Note) Refer to Section 5.5.6.1.2 for information elements of LCH assignment message more
than Octet 6.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
375
Table 5.30 Information Elements in "Paging type 6" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indication
of broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
4
0
0
3
0
0
:
2
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
-
-
-
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Local information broadcasting reception indication
"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication
"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Other
Reserved
Paging ID(Octet 2 - 6)
Paging ID is specified as a 34 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
Besides, MSID of 34 bits' number can be allocated.
Application Type (Octet 6)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
Other
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
376
Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
Meaning of mi
Global definition information pattern indication
D.C.
Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other
Bit
7
0
0
0
1
D.C.
6
0
0
1
:
1
5
0
1
0
1
mi = 0
mi = 1
mi = 2
:
mi = 7
A-GN4.00-03-TS
377
5.5.4.8 "Paging Type 7" Message (paging and LCH assignment / 24 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.31, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.32.
Besides, this PCH may contain a LCH assignment message.
Table 5.31 "Paging Type 7" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
"Paging type 7" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7
1
1
Message Type
1
4
3
2
1
Broadcasting Reception Indication
Paging ID
LSB
Reserved
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
Timing
Application Type
Temporary LCH Number
Assignment PRU Number
Shift Direction Control Information
Reserved
10
TCCH Pattern Number
11
ICH Period
12
5
MSB
8
9
6
Reserved
Power Control Information
ICH Offset
ANCH MIMO
ANCH MIMO
(UL)
(DL)
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
(Note) Refer to Section 5.5.6.1.3 for information elements of LCH assignment message more
than Octet 5.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
378
Table 5.32 Information Elements in "Paging Type 7" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indication
of broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
4
0
0
3
0
0
:
2
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
-
-
-
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Local information broadcasting reception indication
"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication
"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Other
Reserved
Paging ID(Octet 2 - 4)
Paging ID is specified as a 24 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
However, MSID can be allocated when Paging ID is a 34 bits' number.
Application Type (Octet 5)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Other
Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved
Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
Meaning of mi
A-GN4.00-03-TS
379
Global definition information pattern indication
D.C.
Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other
Bit
7
0
0
0
1
D.C.
6
0
0
1
:
1
5
0
1
0
1
mi = 0
mi = 1
mi = 2
:
mi = 7
5.5.5 MSG (Optional PCCH)
Paging groups :
- Precise MS identity is found on PCH;
- DRX configurable via BCCH;
- Only one slot allocated per paging interval per MS;
- The network may divide MSs to different paging occasions in time;
- There is no grouping within paging occasion;
- One paging MSID for PCH.
The purpose of this procedure is to transmit paging information to a MS in IDLE MODE and/ or to
inform MSs in IDLE MODE and MSs in ACTIVE MODE about a system information change.
Paging Occasion (PO) :a slot where there may be P-MSID transmitted on ADECCH addressing
the paging message.
Paging Frame (PF) : one Radio Frame, which may contain one or multiple Paging Occasion(s).
The details Paging Group Calculation Rules please refer to the section 5.2.3.9.
5.5.6 MSG (SCCH)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
380
5.5.6.1 DL SCCH
The format of message type for DL SCCH is shown in Table 5.33, and the coding is shown in
Table 5.34.
Table 5.33 Format of Message Type for DL SCCH
Octet
Bit
8
7
1
6
5
4
Message type
3
2
1
Reserved
Table 5.34 Message Type Coding for DL SCCH
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
6
0
0
1
1
0
0
Other
5
0
1
0
1
0
1
"Idle" message
"LCH assignment 1" message
"LCH assignment 2" message
"LCH assignment 3" message
"LCH assignment standby" message
"LCH assignment reject" message
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
381
5.5.6.1.1 "Idle" Message
This message can be transmitted only when there is no information to be transmitted in DL SCCH.
The message format is shown in Table 5.35.
Table 5.35 "Idle" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
"Idle" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7
6
0
0
Message Type
5
4
0
3
2
1
Reserved
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
382
5.5.6.1.2 "LCH Assignment 1" Message
BS uses this message to perform channel assignment in response to MS after a LCH assignment
request from MS is received. The message format is shown in Table 5.36, and the explanation of
information elements is shown in Table 5.37.
Besides, this SCCH may contain two messages. Octet 2-6 and Octet 7-11 of messages does not
contain intermittent transmission timing information for ICH (Refer to Section 5.2.3.10). Each
message is sent to different MS.
Table 5.36 "LCH Assignment 1" Message
Message type
Direction
Function channel
Bit
Octet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
:
:
:
"LCH assignment 1" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
1
3
2
1
Reserved
Message Type
Sub-slot Number
Temporary LCH Number
LCH
Reque
Assignment PRU Number
st
Timing
Shift Direction Control Information
Reserved
TCCH Pattern Number
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
Timing
Power Control Information
ANCH MIMO
ANCH MIMO
(UL)
(DL)
Temporary LCH Number
Assignment PRU Number
Shift Direction Control Information
9
10
4
Reserved
11
TCCH Pattern Number
12
Reserved
Power Control Information
ANCH MIMO
ANCH MIMO
(UL)
(DL)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
383
Table 5.37 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment 1" Message
Sub-slot Number (Octet 2, 7)
Sub-slot number indicates timing used by UL TCCH as shown in Sections 3.5.5 of OFDMA and
3.6.6 of SC.
Bit
8
0
0
1
1
7
0
1
0
1
Sub-slot number 1
Sub-slot number 2
Sub-slot number 3
Sub-slot number 4
Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2, 7)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
1
:
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2
:
Temporary LCH number = 63
LCH Request Timing (Octet 3, 8)
LCH request timing indicates LCCH timing of UL TCCH.
Bit
8
0
UL TCCH timing before 625us x the number of UL slots
UL TCCH timing before LCCH Interval value n x frame length (ms) +
625us x the number of UL slot
1
Assignment PRU Number (Octet 3, 8)
Assignment PRU number indicates assigned number for PRU.
Bit
7
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
1
1
1
4
0
0
0
:
1
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Assignment PRU number = 1
Assignment PRU number = 2
Assignment PRU number = 3
:
Assignment PRU number = 128
A-GN4.00-03-TS
384
Shift Direction Control Information (Octet 4, 9)
Shift direction control information indicates control information of UL transmission timing for MS.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
1
7
0
0
0
0
1
6
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Stay
1 step forward
2 steps forward
3 steps forward
:
255 steps forward
(Note) Unit = -4 × 30 / (512 + 64) us
Power Control Information (Octet 5, 10)
Power control information indicates control information of UL transmission power for MS.
Bit
6
0
0
5
1
1
4
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
:
:
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
31 steps increase
30 steps increase
:
2 steps increase
1 step increase
Hold
1 step decrease
2 steps decrease
:
31 steps decrease
32 steps decrease
(Note) Unit = 3 dB
A-GN4.00-03-TS
385
TCCH Pattern Number (Octet 6, 11)
TCCH pattern number indicates the core-sequence number of UL TCCH used as shown in
Appendix D. "2nd LCH assignment message (Octet 7-11) absent " can be set only to TCCH
pattern of Octet 11.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
:
6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Other
Core-sequence number 1 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 2 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 3 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 4 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 5 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 6 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 1 for SC
Core-sequence number 2 for SC
Core-sequence number 3 for SC
Core-sequence number 4 for SC
Core-sequence number 5 for SC
Core-sequence number 6 for SC
:
Sub-slot number absent
2nd LCH assignment message (Octet 7-11) absent
Reserved
ANCH MIMO (UL) (Octet 6, 11)
ANCH MIMO (UL) indicates MIMO type for UL ANCH.
Bit
4
0
0
1
1
3
0
1
0
1
SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved
ANCH MIMO (DL) (Octet 6, 11)
ANCH MIMO (DL) indicates MIMO type for DL ANCH.
Bit
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
386
5.5.6.1.3 "LCH Assignment 2" Message
BS uses this message to perform channel assignment in response to MS after a LCH assignment
request from MS is received. The message format is shown in Table 5.38, and the explanation of
information elements is shown in Table ‎5.39.
Besides, this SCCH may contain two messages. The message from Octet 2-7 contains MIMO for
ANCH and intermittent transmission timing information for ICH (Refer to Section 5.2.3.10). And
the message from Octet 8-12 does not contain them. Each message is sent to different MS.
Table 5.38 "LCH Assignment 2" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
1
2
3
4
5
0
"LCH assignment 2" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7
6
5
0
1
0
Reserved
7
ICH Period
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
Timing
12
1
ICH Offset
ANCH MIMO
ANCH MIMO
(UL)
(DL)
Temporary LCH Number
Assignment PRU Number
Shift Direction Control Information
10
11
2
Power Control Information
TCCH Pattern Number
9
3
Reserved
Message Type
Sub-slot Number
Temporary LCH Number
LCH
Reque
Assignment PRU Number
st
Timing
Shift Direction Control Information
6
8
4
Reserved
Power Control Information
TCCH Pattern Number
A-GN4.00-03-TS
387
Table 5.39 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment 2" Message
Sub-slot Number (Octet 2, 8)
Sub-slot number indicates timing used by UL TCCH as shown in Sections 3.5.5 of OFDMA and
3.6.6 of SC.
Bit
8
0
0
1
1
7
0
1
0
1
Sub-slot number 1
Sub-slot number 2
Sub-slot number 3
Sub-slot number 4
Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2, 8)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
1
:
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2
:
Temporary LCH number = 63
LCH Request Timing (Octet 3, 9)
LCH request timing indicates LCCH timing of UL TCCH.
Bit
8
0
UL TCCH timing before 625us x the number of UL slots
UL TCCH timing before LCCH Interval value n x frame length (ms) +
625us x the number of UL slot
1
Assignment PRU Number (Octet 3, 9)
Assignment PRU number indicates assigned number for PRU.
Bit
7
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
1
1
1
4
0
0
0
:
1
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Assignment PRU number = 1
Assignment PRU number = 2
Assignment PRU number = 3
:
Assignment PRU number = 128
A-GN4.00-03-TS
388
Shift Direction Control Information (Octet 4, 10)
Shift direction control information indicates control information of UL transmission timing for MS.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
1
7
0
0
0
0
1
6
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Stay
1 step forward
2 steps forward
3 steps forward
:
255 steps forward
(Note) Unit = -4 × 30 / (512 + 64) us
Power Control Information (Octet 5, 11)
Power control information indicates control information of UL transmission power for MS.
Bit
6
0
0
5
1
1
4
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
:
:
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
31 steps increase
30 steps increase
:
2 steps increase
1 step increase
Hold
1 step decrease
2 steps decrease
:
31 steps decrease
32 steps decrease
(Note) Unit = 3 dB
A-GN4.00-03-TS
389
TCCH Pattern Number (Octet 6, 12)
TCCH pattern number indicates the core-sequence number of UL TCCH used as shown in
Appendix D. "2nd LCH assignment message (Octet 8 - 12) absent " can be set only to TCCH
pattern of Octet 12.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
:
6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Other
Core-sequence number 1 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 2 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 3 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 4 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 5 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 6 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 1 for SC
Core-sequence number 2 for SC
Core-sequence number 3 for SC
Core-sequence number 4 for SC
Core-sequence number 5 for SC
Core-sequence number 6 for SC
:
Sub-slot number absent
2nd LCH assignment message (Octet 8 - 12) absent
Reserved
ICH Offset (Octet 6)
The frame used as ICH is indicated by the offset of the TDMA frame from CCH.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH offset.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no offset" is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
No offset
TDMA frame after 1 frame from CCH
TDMA frame after 2 frames from CCH
TDMA frame after 3 frames from CCH
:
TDMA frame after 15 frames from CCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
390
ICH Period (Octet 7)
The cycle of the TDMA frame that ICH uses is indicated.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH period.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no scheduling" is set.
ICH Offset  ICH Period – 1 frame
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
6
0
0
1
1
5
0
1
0
1
1
1
No scheduling
2 frames
3 frames
4 frames
:
16 frames
ANCH MIMO (UL) (Octet 7)
ANCH MIMO (UL) indicates MIMO type for UL ANCH.
Bit
4
0
0
1
1
3
0
1
0
1
SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved
ANCH MIMO (DL) (Octet 7)
ANCH MIMO (DL) indicates MIMO type for DL ANCH.
Bit
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
391
5.5.6.1.4 "LCH Assignment 3" Message
BS uses this message to perform channel assignment in response to MS after a LCH assignment
request from MS is received. The message format is shown in Table 5.40, and the explanation of
information elements is shown in Table 5.41.
Besides, this SCCH include MSID.
Table 5.40 "LCH Assignment 3" Message
Message type
Direction
Function channel
Bit
Octet
1
2
3
4
:
:
:
8
"LCH assignment 3" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7
6
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
1
Reserved
Message Type
Sub-slot Number
Temporary LCH Number
LCH
Reque
Assignment PRU Number
st
Timing
Shift Direction Control Information
Reserved
5
Power Control Information
6
TCCH Pattern Number
7
ICH Period
8
5
ICH Offset
ANCH MIMO
ANCH MIMO
(UL)
(DL)
MSB
9
MSID
10
11
12
LSB
Reserved
Table 5.41 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment 3" Message
A-GN4.00-03-TS
392
Sub-slot Number (Octet 2)
Sub-slot number indicates timing used by UL TCCH as shown in Sections 3.5.5 of OFDMA and
3.6.6 of SC.
Bit
8
0
0
1
1
7
0
1
0
1
Sub-slot number 1
Sub-slot number 2
Sub-slot number 3
Sub-slot number 4
Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
1
:
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2
:
Temporary LCH number = 63
LCH Request Timing (Octet 3)
LCH request timing indicates LCCH timing of UL TCCH.
Bit
8
0
UL TCCH timing before 625us x the number of UL slots
UL TCCH timing before LCCH Interval value n x frame length (ms) +
625us x the number of UL slot
1
Assignment PRU Number (Octet 3)
Assignment PRU number indicates assigned number for PRU.
Bit
7
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
1
1
1
4
0
0
0
:
1
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Assignment PRU number = 1
Assignment PRU number = 2
Assignment PRU number = 3
:
Assignment PRU number = 128
A-GN4.00-03-TS
393
Shift Direction Control Information (Octet 4)
Shift direction control information indicates control information of UL transmission timing for MS.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
1
7
0
0
0
0
1
6
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Stay
1 step forward
2 steps forward
3 steps forward
:
255 steps forward
(Note) Unit = -4 × 30 / (512 + 64) us
Power Control Information (Octet 5)
Power control information indicates control information of UL transmission power for MS.
Bit
6
0
0
5
1
1
4
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
:
:
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
31 steps increase
30 steps increase
2 steps increase
1 step increase
Hold
1 step decrease
2 steps decrease
:
31 steps decrease
32 steps decrease
(Note) Unit = 3 dB
TCCH Pattern Number (Octet 6)
TCCH pattern number indicates the core-sequence number that the UL TCCH used as shown in
Appendix D. MSID is absent when TCCH pattern number is not "Sub-slot number absent / MSID
present".
A-GN4.00-03-TS
394
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
:
6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
Other
Core-sequence number 1 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 2 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 3 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 4 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 5 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 6 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 1 for SC
Core-sequence number 2 for SC
Core-sequence number 3 for SC
Core-sequence number 4 for SC
Core-sequence number 5 for SC
Core-sequence number 6 for SC
:
Sub-slot number absent / MSID present
Reserved
ICH Offset (Octet 6)
The frame used as ICH is indicated by the offset of the TDMA frame from CCH.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH offset.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no offset" is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
No offset
TDMA frame after 1 frame from CCH
TDMA frame after 2 frames from CCH
TDMA frame after 3 frames from CCH
:
TDMA frame after 15 frames from CCH
ICH Period (Octet 7)
The cycle of the TDMA frame that ICH uses is indicated.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH period.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no scheduling" is set.
ICH Offset  ICH Period – 1 frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
395
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
6
0
0
1
1
5
0
1
0
1
1
1
No scheduling
2 frames
3 frames
4 frames
:
16 frames
ANCH MIMO (UL) (Octet 7)
ANCH MIMO (UL) indicates MIMO type for UL ANCH.
Bit
4
0
0
1
1
3
0
1
0
1
SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved
ANCH MIMO (DL) (Octet 7)
ANCH MIMO (DL) indicates MIMO type for DL ANCH.
Bit
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved
MSID (Octet 8 - 12)
The length of MSID is 34 bits.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
396
5.5.6.1.5 "LCH Assignment Standby" Message
BS uses this message to inform BS to standby. The message format is shown in Table 5.42, and
the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.43.
Table 5.42 "LCH Assignment Standby" Message
Message type
Direction
Function channel
Bit
Octet
1
2
3
:
:
:
8
"LCH assignment standby" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7
6
0
1
0
Message Type
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
Reserved
st
Timing
4
7
8
TCCH Pattern Number
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
Timing
0
3
2
1
Reserved
Temporary LCH Number
Cause
Reserved
Temporary LCH Number
Assignment PRU Number
Shift Direction Control Information
9
10
4
Reserved
5
6
5
Reserved
11
TCCH Pattern Number
12
ICH Period
Power Control Information
ICH Offset
A-GN4.00-03-TS
397
Table 5.43 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment Standby" Message
Sub-slot Number (Octet 2, 7)
Sub-slot number indicates timing used by UL TCCH as shown in Sections 3.5.5 of OFDMA and
3.6.6 of SC.
Bit
8
7
0
0
Sub-slot number 1
0
1
Sub-slot number 2
1
0
Sub-slot number 3
1
1
Sub-slot number 4
Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2, 7)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
1
:
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2
:
Temporary LCH number = 63
LCH Request Timing (Octet 3, 8)
LCH request timing indicates LCCH timing of UL TCCH.
Bit
8
0
UL TCCH timing before 625us x the number of UL slots
UL TCCH timing before LCCH Interval value n x frame length (ms) +
625us x the number of UL slot
1
Cause (Octet 3)
Cause indicates standby reason.
Bit
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Other
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Reserved
All BS slots in use
No BS free channel
No free outgoing line on wire side
LCH type disagreement
Traffic restriction
Relevant BS use impossible (zone selection impossible)
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
398
TCCH Pattern Number (Octet 6, 11)
TCCH pattern number indicates the core-sequence number of UL TCCH used as shown in
Appendix D. "LCH assignment message (Octet 7 - 12) absent " can be set only to TCCH pattern
of Octet 11.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
:
6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Core-sequence number 1 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 2 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 3 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 4 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 5 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 6 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 1 for SC
Core-sequence number 2 for SC
Core-sequence number 3 for SC
Core-sequence number 4 for SC
Core-sequence number 5 for SC
Core-sequence number 6 for SC
:
Sub-slot number absent
LCH assignment message (Octet 7-12) absent
Assignment PRU Number (Octet 8)
Assignment PRU number indicates assigned number for PRU.
Bit
7
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
1
1
1
4
0
0
0
:
1
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Assignment PRU number = 1
Assignment PRU number = 2
Assignment PRU number = 3
:
Assignment PRU number = 128
Shift Direction Control Information (Octet 9)
Shift direction control information indicates control information of UL transmission timing for MS.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
:
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Stay
1 step forward
2 steps forward
3 steps forward
:
255 steps forward
(Note) Unit = -4 × 30 / (512 + 64) us
A-GN4.00-03-TS
399
Power Control Information (Octet 10)
Power control information indicates control information of UL transmission power for MS.
Bit
6
0
0
5
1
1
4
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
:
:
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
31 steps increase
30 steps increase
2 steps increase
1 step increase
Hold
1 step decrease
2 steps decrease
:
31 steps decrease
32 steps decrease
(Note) Unit = 3 dB
ICH Offset (Octet 11)
The frame used with ICH is indicated by the offset of CCH from the TDMA frame.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH offset.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no offset" is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
No offset
TDMA frame after 1 frame from CCH
TDMA frame after 2 frames from CCH
TDMA frame after 3 frames from CCH
:
TDMA frame after 15 frames from CCH
A-GN4.00-03-TS
400
ICH Period (Octet 12)
The cycle of the TDMA frame that ICH uses is indicated.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH period.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no scheduling" is set.
ICH Offset  ICH Period – 1 frame
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
6
0
0
1
1
5
0
1
0
1
1
1
No scheduling
2 frames
3 frames
4 frames
:
16 frames
A-GN4.00-03-TS
401
5.5.6.1.6 "LCH Assignment Reject" Message
BS uses this message to inform that channel setup is not possible in response to a link channel
(re-)request from MS. The message format is shown in Table 5.44, and the explanation of
information elements is shown in Table 5.45.
Table 5.44 "LCH Assignment Reject" Message
Message type
:
Direction
:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
1
2
3
"LCH assignment reject" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7
6
0
1
0
Message Type
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
Reserved
st
Timing
4
7
8
TCCH Pattern Number
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
Timing
1
3
2
1
Reserved
Temporary LCH Number
Cause
Reserved
Temporary LCH Number
Assignment PRU Number
Shift Direction Control Information
9
10
4
Reserved
5
6
5
Reserved
11
TCCH Pattern Number
12
ICH Period
Power Control Information
ICH Offset
A-GN4.00-03-TS
402
Table 5.45 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment Reject" Message
Sub-slot Number (Octet 2, 7)
Sub-slot number indicates timing used by UL TCCH as shown in Sections 3.5.5 of OFDMA and
3.6.6 of SC.
Bit
8
0
0
1
1
7
0
1
0
1
Sub-slot number 1
Sub-slot number 2
Sub-slot number 3
Sub-slot number 4
Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2, 7)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
1
:
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2
:
Temporary LCH number = 63
LCH Request Timing (Octet 3, 8)
LCH request timing indicates LCCH timing of UL TCCH.
Bit
8
0
1
UL TCCH timing before 625us x the number of UL slots
UL TCCH timing before LCCH Interval value n x frame length (ms) +
625us x the number of UL slot
A-GN4.00-03-TS
403
Cause (Octet 3)
Cause indicates rejected reason.
Bit
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
Other
Reserved
All BS slots in use
No BS free channel
No free outgoing line on wire side
LCH type disagreement
Traffic restriction
Relevant BS use impossible (zone selection
impossible)
Reserved
TCCH Pattern Number (Octet 6, 11)
TCCH pattern number indicates the core-sequence number of UL TCCH used as shown in
Appendix D. "LCH assignment message (Octet 7 - 12) absent " can be set only to TCCH pattern
of Octet 12.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
:
6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Core-sequence number 1 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 2 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 3 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 4 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 5 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 6 for OFDMA
Core-sequence number 1 for SC
Core-sequence number 2 for SC
Core-sequence number 3 for SC
Core-sequence number 4 for SC
Core-sequence number 5 for SC
Core-sequence number 6 for SC
:
Sub-slot number absent
LCH assignment message (Octet 7-12) absent
A-GN4.00-03-TS
404
Assignment PRU Number (Octet 8)
Assignment PRU number indicates assigned number for PRU.
Bit
7
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
1
1
1
4
0
0
0
:
1
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Assignment PRU number = 1
Assignment PRU number = 2
Assignment PRU number = 3
:
Assignment PRU number = 128
Shift Direction Control Information (Octet 9)
Shift direction control information indicates control information of UL transmission timing for MS.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
:
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Stay
1 step forward
2 steps forward
3 steps forward
:
255 steps forward
(Note) Unit = -4 × 30 / (512 + 64) us
Power Control Information (Octet 10)
Power control information indicates control information of UL transmission power for MS.
Bit
6
0
0
5
1
1
4
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
(Note) Unit = 3 dB
:
:
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
31 steps increase
30 steps increase
2 steps increase
1 step increase
Hold
1 step decrease
2 steps decrease
:
31 steps decrease
32 steps decrease
A-GN4.00-03-TS
405
ICH Offset (Octet 11)
The frame used with ICH is indicated by the offset of CCH from the TDMA frame.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH offset.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no offset" is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
No offset
TDMA frame after 1 frame from CCH
TDMA frame after 2 frames from CCH
TDMA frame after 3 frames from CCH
:
TDMA frame after 15 frames from CCH
ICH Period (Octet 12)
The cycle of the TDMA frame that ICH uses is indicated.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH period.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no scheduling" is set.
ICH Offset  ICH Period – 1 frame
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
:
6
0
0
1
1
5
0
1
0
1
1
1
No scheduling
2 frames
3 frames
4 frames
:
16 frames
A-GN4.00-03-TS
406
5.5.6.2 UL SCCH
The format of message type for UL SCCH is shown in Table 5.46, and the coding is shown in
Table 5.47.
Table 5.46 Format of Message Type for UL SCCH
Octet
Bit
8
7
1
6
Message Type
5
4
3
2
1
Reserved
Table 5.47 Message Type Coding for UL SCCH
Bit
8
0
7
0
6
1
Other
5
0
"LCH assignment re-request" message
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
407
5.5.6.2.1 "LCH Assignment Re-request" Message
MS can use this message for LCH re-assignment after a LCH assignment message from BS is
received. The message format is shown in Table 5.48, and the explanation of information
elements is shown in Table 5.49.
Table 5.48 "LCH Assignment Re-request" Message
Message type
Direction
Function channel
Bit
Octet
:
:
:
"LCH Assignment re-request" message
BS ← MS (UL)
SCCH
8
7
6
0
0
1
Message Type
Reserved
1
2
Reserved
3
5
0
4
3
2
1
Reserved
Temporary LCH Number
Cause
TDMA Slot
4
Table 5.49 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment Re-request" Message
Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
1
:
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2
:
Temporary LCH number = 63
A-GN4.00-03-TS
408
Cause (Octet 3)
Cause indicates re-request reason.
Bit
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Other
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Reserved
Assignment PRU use not possible
Assignment PRU non-corresponding MS
Assignment Scheduling term not possible
Request for assignment PRU
Notified MIMO Type use not possible (UL)
Notified MIMO Type use not possible (DL)
Notified MIMO Type use not possible (UL & DL)
Reserved
TDMA Slot (Octet 4)
This information element indicates the TDMA slot that MS can use.
Bit
8
1/0
7
1/0
-
6
1/0
-
5
1/0
-
1st TDMA slot can be / not used.
2nd TDMA slot can be / not used.
3rd TDMA slot can be / not used.
4th TDMA slot can be / not used.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
409
Chapter 6 Channel Assignment
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the link establishment control, the channel assignment control and the
connection control specification for radio-link. In Section 6.2, link establishment control is
described. Channel assignment control is described in Section 6.3; and connection control is
described in Section 6.4. Section 6.4 also defines the two channel access modes called “Fast
access channel based on MAP mode (FM-Mode)” and “high Quality channel based on carrier
sensing mode (QS-Mode)”. FM-Mode is used for high-speed packet access. PRUs of EXCH are
shared among MSs in FM-Mode. QS-Mode is used mainly for applications which require
guaranteed bandwidth or low latency. One PRU is dedicatedly assigned to one MS while the data
traffic is continued in QS-Mode. Radio state management is defined in Section 6.5; and
parameters introduced in this chapter are summarized in Section 6.9.
6.2 Link Establishment Control
The sequences of incoming call and outgoing call are shown in Figure 6.1 and Figure 6.2.
MS
CCH
BS
ICH
CCH
PCH
ICH
Paging of coming call
information
Request for link
channel
establishment
TCCH
SCCH
Confirmation of
Allocate a channel
ICCH
channel assign
Communicating
Figure 6.1 Incoming Call Sequence
A-GN4.00-03-TS
410
The sequence of an incoming call is initiated by BS’s transmitting PCH to MS. PCH includes
information on the MS being paged. By receiving the PCH from BS, MS is informed of the
incoming call, and is requested to respond to the PCH. The MS indicated by the PCH transmits
TCCH as “LCH assignment request” message in UL CCH. MS shall choose one pattern using
random logic from 24 patterns consisting of Sub-slot (4 patterns) and Core-sequence number (6
patterns). Upon the reception of TCCH by the BS, the BS transmits DL SCCH to notify the
allocation of a communication channel to the MS. DL SCCH transports information not only on
the allocated channel but also on the transmission power and transmission timing that the MS
should use. Note that the BS can only recognize the MS by TCCH rather than MSID. After
receiving the channel allocation in response to the transmitted TCCH in the assigned
communication channel, the MS transmits the allocation confirmation to the BS with the rectified
transmission power and transmission timing.
MS
CCH
BS
ICH
CCH
ICH
Start an
application
Request for link channel
TCCH
establishment
SCCH
Confirmation of
Allocate a channel
ICCH
channel assign
Communicating
Figure 6.2 Outgoing Call Sequence
Outgoing call sequence is initiated by MS’s transmitting TCCH in UL CCH. MS chooses one of
four sub-slots within a slot to transmit the TCCH in the UL CCH. The details on the sub-slots are
defined in Chapter 3. Not like the incoming call sequence, outgoing sequence can be initiated in
an arbitrary UL CCH. Outgoing call sequence after the transmission of TCCH is the same as the
incoming call sequence.
Even when the BS receives two or more TCCHs from two or more MSs simultaneously, the BS
can allocate a communication channel to each MS, as long as the BS can recognize and identify
each TCCH.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
411
Figure 6.3 shows relation between LCH Assignment Request (TCCH) and LCH Assignment
(SCCH). MS sends 2.5 ms or n * 5 + 2.5 ms before from downlink SCCH. Therefore, when a MS
sends LCH Assignment Request at timing (1), then the BS responses its LCH Assignment
(SCCH) at timing (2) or (3).
LCCH interval n
(2)
(3)
TCCH
TCCH
Up
SCCH
SCCH
Down
2.5ms
(1)
SCCH
TCCH
Figure 6.3 Relation between LCH Assignment Request (TCCH) and LCH Assignment (SCCH)
6.3 Channel Assignment Control
BS always performs UL carrier sensing on communication channels before they are allocated to
MS. If a communication channel is regarded vacant by carrier sensing for a fixed period of time
(four or more frames), it can be allocated to MS in DL SCCH after receiving the TCCH. At the
allocated communication channel, the MS carries out DL carrier sensing for a fixed period of time
(four or more frames) to confirm if the communication channel is vacant or not, by measuring the
signal power. If the signal power is lower than defined threshold level, the MS transmits “link
setup request” message in the communication channel.
When two or more MSs transmit the TCCH with the same pattern and the same sub-slot, the
communication channel allocation in DL SCCH can be received by two or more MSs. In such a
case, multiple MSs may transmit “link setup request” message simultaneously in the same
communication channel. Assume that BS detects the “link setup request” message from one of
these MSs, and that BS returns the “LCH assignment” message to the MS, then other MSs will
not be able to receive the “link setup request” messages intended to them. Then these MSs,
which did not receive the “link setup request” messages, will retransmit the “LCH assignment
request” message on UL CCH.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
412
MS
CCH
BS
ICH
CCH
ICH
Uplink
TCCH
carrier sense
SCCH
Downlink
carrier sense
ICCH
Communicating
Figure 6.4 Channel Assign Control
6.4 Connection Control
6.4.1 FM-Mode
6.4.1.1 Connection Control
Figure 6.5 shows the overview of the FM-Mode. The figure shows two MSs [MS1 and MS2]
accessing ICHs based on FM-Mode controlled by the BS. BS indicates the PRUs to MSs in active
state through the MAP field in DL ECCH. When MS receives the MAP field, it receives the
information of which PRUs can be used for communication. Then MS uses these PRUs for
communication with the BS.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
413
BS
Indication
Downlink
ECCH
Indication
MAP
Downlink
ECCH
MAP
Indication
Indication
Reference
Reference
Access
Access
ICH
MS1
MS2
Figure 6.5 Connection Control of FM-Mode
For more information on the relationship between the MAP field and PRUs for FM-Mode, refer to
Section 4.4.6.8.
BS assigns EXCHs to MS by sending MAP field on ECCH. Figure 6.6 shows an example of
EXCHs assignment to two MSs. In this figure, MAP in the ANCH refers to the EXCH assigned to
the MS with MAP. MS1 and MS2 are sharing the same PRUs for EXCH in this figure.
1 frame
MS1 ANCH
MAP
EXCH
MS2 ANCH
MS1
MAP
MAP
MAP
MS2
MS1
MAP
MAP
MS1
MS2
MS1
MS2
MAP
Figure 6.6 An Example of EXCH Assignment to Two MSs
A-GN4.00-03-TS
414
6.4.1.1.1 Access Timing
6.4.1.1.1.1 Overview
According to the slot number of allocated ANCH and the MS’s processing capability, access
timing to use EXCH after the reception of MAP field is defined.
Access timings, exactly timing 1 and timing 2, are negotiated by messages and information
elements in Access Establishment Phase. In addition, they are related on the number of slot in a
frame. This section describes a definition of timing and a relation between their timing and frame
structure.
6.4.1.1.1.2 5ms frame unit
MS should control timing 1 and 2 for ANCH as following in 5ms frame unit.
- Timing 1 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the next TDMA frame.
- Timing 2 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the second TDMA frame.
Figure 6.7 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 1 for 5ms
frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the next TDMA frame after the MAP
is received on the DL ANCH.
Figure 6.8 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 2 for 5ms
frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the second nextTDMA frame after
the MAP is received on the DL ANCH. In the figures, ANCH can be allocated in any of DL TDMA
slots. The access frame in the figures indicates the TDMA frame where the communication
access on the allocated EXCH is possible.
ANCH
EXCH
DL
UL
Time
DL
UL
Time
Access frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
415
ANCH
EXCH
DL
UL
Time
DL
UL
Time
Access frame
Figure 6.7 Timing 1 for 5ms frame
ANCH
EXCH
DL
UL
Time
DL
UL
Time
Access frame
ANCH
EXCH
DL
UL
Time
DL
UL
Time
Access frame
Figure 6.8 Timing 2 for 5ms frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
416
6.4.1.1.1.3 2.5ms frame unit
MS should control timing 1 and 2 for ANCH as following in 2.5ms frame unit.
- Timing 1 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the second TDMA frame.
- Timing 2 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the fourth TDMA frame.
Figure 6.9 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 1 for
2.5ms frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the second next TDMA frame
after the MAP is received on the DL ANCH.
Figure 6.10 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 2 for
2.5ms frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the fourth next TDMA frame
after the MAP is received on the DL ANCH. In the figures, ANCH can be allocated in any of DL
TDMA slots. The access frame in the figures indicates the TDMA frame where the communication
access on the allocated EXCH is possible.
ANCH
DL
UL
Time
EXCH
DL
UL
Time
Access frame
ANCH
DL
UL
Time
EXCH
DL
UL
Time
Access frame
Figure 6.9 Timing 1 for 2.5ms frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
417
ANCH
DL
UL
Time
EXCH
DL
UL
Time
Access frame
ANCH
DL
UL
Time
EXCH
DL
UL
Time
Access frame
Figure 6.10 Timing 2 for 2.5ms frame
6.4.1.1.1.4 10ms frame unit
MS should control timing 1 and 2 for ANCH as following in 10ms frame unit.
- Timing 1 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the next TDMA frame.
- Timing 2 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the second TDMA frame.
Figure 6.11 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 1 for
10ms frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the next TDMA frame after
the MAP is received on the DL ANCH.
Figure 6.12 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 2 for
10ms frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the second next TDMA frame
after the MAP is received on the DL ANCH. In the figures, ANCH can be allocated in any of DL
TDMA slots. The access frame in the figures indicates the TDMA frame where the communication
access on the allocated EXCH is possible.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
418
ANCH
EXCH
DL
Time
UL
DL
Time
UL
Access frame
ANCH
EXCH
DL
Time
UL
DL
Time
UL
Access frame
Figure 6.11 Timing 1 for 10ms frame
ANCH
EXCH
DL
Time
UL
DL
Time
UL
Access frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
419
ANCH
EXCH
DL
Time
UL
DL
Time
UL
Access frame
Figure 6.12 Timing 2 for 10ms frame
6.4.1.1.1.5 MS processing capabilities
Table 6.1 shows processing capabilities of different MSs.
Table 6.1 MS Processing Capabilities
MS
processing
capabilities
High
↑
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
↓
Low
Level 4
Explanation
Processing completes during the guard time between TDD UL and DL.
(51.67 us). MS can access the frame right after the MAP reception, it
does not depend on the ANCH position.
MS can complete its processing within 1 TDMA slot (625 us), then
transmit data in the UL TDMA slot.
MS cannot complete its processing within 1 TDMA slot but within 2
TDMA slots, then transmit data in the UL TDMA slot.
MS cannot complete its processing within 2 TDMA slots but within 3
TDMA slots, then transmit data in the UL TDMA slot.
MS cannot complete its processing within 3 TDMA slots but within 4
TDMA slots, then transmit data in the UL TDMA slot.
The access timing is decided as shown in Table 6.2 by the processing capability of MS and the
TDMA slot number of allocated ANCH. When TDMA frame structure is 2.5ms frame unit or the
number of DL slot is under 4 slots, TDMA slot number of allocated ANCH adopts from the fourth
to the first slot, in order. Example, when the number of DL slot is 2 slots, access timing for these
UL slot is that first DL slot adopts a condition of “The Third Slot” and second DL slot adopts a
condition of “The Fourth and Subsequent Slots”.
EXCH can be allocated to MS with a capability of timing 1 based on timing 2 when ANCH
scheduling control is used as explained in Section 9.5.4.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
420
Table 6.2 Access Timing
MS Processing
Capability
The First
Slot
The Second
Slot
The Third
Slot
The Fourth and
Subsequent Slots
Level 0
Timing 1
Timing 1
Timing 1
Timing 1
Level 1
Timing 1
Timing 1
Timing 1
Timing 2
Level 2
Timing 1
Timing 1
Timing 2
Timing 2
Level 3
Timing 1
Timing 2
Timing 2
Timing 2
Level 4
Timing 2
Timing 2
Timing 2
Timing 2
6.4.1.1.2 Bandwidth Request by MS
When MS requests bandwidth to the BS, MS informs the transmit data size to BS using the RCH
field in UL ANCH. According to the requested data size from the MS, BS reserves the bandwidth
and informs bandwidth allocation through the MAP field on the DL ANCH.
MAP
ANCH
DL
UL
Time
RCH
EXCH
DL
Time
UL
Figure 6.13 Bandwidth Allocation in Accordance with MS’s Request
6.4.1.1.3 DL EXCH Holding Duration
DL EXCH will not be released during DL EXCH holding duration to avoid ANCH assignment by
neighboring BSs, even when the DL EXCH is not used for information transmission. Figure 6.14
shows the relationship between the valid EXCH transmission and DL EXCH holding duration.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
421
Less than DL EXCH
holding duration
DL EXCH holding duration
Release
EXCHs
DL
Time
UL
Figure 6.14 Maintenance Condition of DL EXCH
The hatched TDMA frames indicate EXCH which is used for information transfer. The plain
frames indicate DL EXCH which is not used for information transfer to any MSs in active state. In
these frames, BS may send idle burst on DL EXCH.
BS counts the number of frames from the last reception or transmission. When the count reaches
DL EXCH holding duration, BS releases the allocated EXCH. BS will reset the count if data has
been received or transmitted within DL EXCH holding duration.
6.4.1.2 Channel Selection
BS always carries out UL carrier sensing for unused PRUs in the entire bandwidth. The result of
carrier sensing information will be used for channel selection.
6.4.1.2.1 Vacant PRU Judgment by UL Carrier Sensing
UL carrier sensing is carried out for UL EXCH monitoring time. Maximum value of UL carrier
sensing will be used for the judgment of the vacant PRUs. UL EXCH monitoring time should be
longer than DL EXCH holding duration. Based on this relationship, the neighbor BSs will avoid
using the PRUs which are occupied. BS should monitor continuously for the UL EXCH monitoring
time on all PRUs which the BS does not use in order to decide whether PRUs are vacant or
occupied by other BSs. If the UL EXCH monitoring time is shorter than DL EXCH holding duration,
then the neighbor BSs may regard a PRU which is actually occupied by EXCH, as a free PRU.
Collisions will be caused if PRU is allocated to other MSs. Therefore, the UL EXCH monitoring
time should be longer than the DL EXCH holding duration.
DL EXCH holding duration
Release
EXCHs
DL
Time
UL
Figure 6.15 EXCH Release Timing
A-GN4.00-03-TS
422
6.4.1.2.2 ANCH Allocation
BS allocates a vacant PRU for ANCH based on carrier sensing result when it receives ”LCH
assignment request” message on the UL TCCH from a MS. It then transmits “LCH assignment
response” message using DL SCCH in order to inform which PRU is assigned for ANCH to the
MS. The BS’s decision on whether or not a PRU is vacant is made with regard to “UL RSSI
threshold for ANCH selection”. The MS shall measure the power level on assigned PRU when it
receives “LCH assignment response” message. The state of MS will move from idle state to
active state if the result of the DL carrier sensing is lower than “DL RSSI threshold for ANCH
selection”. The MS will send “LCH assignment re-request” message to the BS on the UL SCCH if
the result of the DL carrier sensing is higher than “DL RSSI threshold for ANCH selection”. When
the BS receives “LCH assignment re-request” message from the MS, it will carry out the channel
selection procedure except for the previously allocated PRU.
When the average SINR of a PRU is lower than “ANCH/CSCH switch DL SINR threshold” in
“extension function response” message, that condition is informed to BS using CQI. Details are
described in Section 8.2.5.
6.4.1.2.3 EXCH Allocation
Figure 6.16 shows information about EXCH selection. It means the transmission on selecting
PRUs for EXCH. Based on the UL carrier sensing and the CQI information from the MS, BS
selects PRUs and informs MS by MAP field on ANCH. The BS’s decision on whether or not a
PRU is vacant is made with regard to “UL RSSI threshold for EXCH selection”. MS calculates
moving average of SINR, which refers to DL SINR calculation time, for each PRU assigned to the
MS. CQI message is generated based on the average SINR calculated by MS.
DL SINR
(assigned EXCH)
CQI
DL RSSI
(non-assigned
MS PRU)
BS
UL SINR
EXCH assignment
MAP
Result of UL
Carrier Sensing
Figure 6.16 Notification of EXCH Channel Selection Information
A-GN4.00-03-TS
423
The result of UL carrier sensing is used as the UL radio information when BS allocates vacant
PRUs. Instead of allocating low-quality PRUs for the MS, BS will replace these with the
higher-quality PRUs based on the CQI information. PRU, of which the UL carrier sensing result is
lower than “UL RSSI threshold for EXCH selection”, is selected as a candidate PRU for allocation.
PRU refused by CQI is not allocated by BS for the MS.
When the vacant PRU is used, judgment of vacancy will be done by making use of result of the
UL carrier sensing as shown in Section 6.4.1.2.1.
BS calculates moving average of SINR, which refers to UL SINR calculation time, for every used
PRU. When BS selects active PRU, it prioritizes PRUs which have high average SINR values.
The refused PRUs notified in the CQI information are excluded from the selection.
6.4.2 QS-Mode
6.4.2.1 Channel Selection
BS always carries out UL carrier sensing for unused PRUs in the entire bandwidth. The result of
carrier sensing information will be used for channel selection.
6.4.2.1.1 CSCH Allocation
When BS receives “LCH assignment request” message from the MS on the UL TCCH, it will
allocate a vacant PRU and sends “LCH assignment response” message to MS on DL SCCH. The
BS’s decision on whether or not a PRU is vacant is made with regard to “UL RSSI threshold for
CSCH selection”. DL carrier sensing will be carried out on the designated PRU when MS receives
“LCH assignment response” message. If the result of the DL carrier sensing is lower than “DL
RSSI threshold for CSCH selection”, the state of MS will move from idle state to active state. If
the result of the DL carrier sensing is higher than “DL RSSI threshold for CSCH selection”, the
MS will send “LCH assignment re-request” message to the BS on the UL SCCH. BS will carry out
the channel selection procedure except for the previously allocated PRU when the BS receives
“LCH assignment re-request” message.
When the average SINR of a PRU is lower than “ANCH/CSCH switch DL SINR threshold” in
“extension function response” message, that condition is informed to BS by CQI. Details are
described in Section 8.2.5.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
424
6.5 Radio State Management
Figure 6.17 describes the radio states of MS. MS has three states. They are idle state, active
state and sleep state.
Release
Session
Idle
Initiate
connection
Release
Connection
(release session)
Active
Release
Connection
(keep session)
Sleep
Re-establish
connection
Figure 6.17 State Transition of MS
Table 6.3 States of MS
State Name
Idle
Active
Sleep
Radio
Connection
State
Nothing
One or more
Nothing
QCS State
State of MS
Nothing
One or more
One or more
MS is waiting for paging messages.
Data exchange with BS using ICH.
MS keeps QCS, but no ICH is established.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
425
6.5.1 Idle State
Idle state is a state without radio connection and QCS.
In idle state, MS receives its own “paging” messages only on its PCH group. In time of incoming
call or out-going call, MS in idle state is assigned an ICH from BS by SCCH and triggered to
active state. The figure shows the sequence of an MS to move from idle state to active state.
MS
BS
Idle
TCCH
SCCH
ICCH
ICCH
Active
Communicating
Figure 6.18 Move to Active State
MS transmits “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH to request ICH allocation. BS selects
the vacant PRU from the result of the UL carrier sensing and informs the number of the allocated
ICH through “LCH assignment response” message on DL SCCH. The BS’s decision on whether
or not a PRU is vacant is made with regard to “UL RSSI threshold for ICCH selection”. MS carries
out the DL carrier sensing on the specified PRU when it receives “LCH assignment response”
message. MS will start transmission to the BS on this PRU if the result of the carrier sensing is
lower than “DL RSSI threshold for ICCH selection”. Then the PRU is used as ICCH. It is
considered that the radio connection between MS and BS is established when BS receives UL
ICCH. MS will then perform initial radio settings to establish QCS and move itself to active state.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
426
6.5.2 Active State
Active state is a state with one or more than one radio connections and QCSs.
In this state, MS can have one or more than one radio connections and QCSs. MS and BS can
exchange data using the radio connections. BS supervises data transmission and the reception. If
there is no data transmission and reception during sleep transfer time, BS releases all radio
connections but holds QCS connections, and the state of MS moves to sleep state.
The change from active state to sleep is executed according to the following procedure.
MS
Active
BS
Connection release
(sleep state )
Connection release acknowledge
Tx Off
Tx Off
Sleep
Figure 6.19 Move to Sleep State
When MS transmits UL data or receives DL data, data communication supervision timer is started.
If there is data transmission or reception before timer expires, the timer will be restarted
automatically. When data is not transmitted and received during sleep transfer time, data
communication supervision timer will expire, and MS will send “connection release (sleep state)”
message. BS transmits “connection release acknowledge” message when it receives the
message. MS and BS will then release radio connection, and move to sleep state as shown in
Figure 6.19.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
427
MS
Active
BS
Connection release
(Idle state )
Connection release acknowledge
Tx Off
Tx Off
Idle
Figure 6.20 Move to Idle State
MS releases radio connection and QCS by “connection release (Idle state)” message when MS in
active state has no data to exchange and it becomes unnecessary to maintain radio connection.
MS will then move to idle state as shown in Figure 6.20.
6.5.3 Sleep State
Sleep state is a state which does not have radio connection but has QCS.
There is connection information between the BS and MS, despite that radio connection will be
released. MS receives “paging” messages on PCH in sleep state. MS then transmits “LCH
assignment request” message on TCCH to request ICH allocation. After MS re-establishes radio
connection to BS and recovers QCS connection, it will move to active state and communication
will be restarted.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
428
MS
BS
Sleep
PCH
TCCH
SCCH
ICCH
ICCH
Active
Communicating
Figure 6.21 Recovery from Sleep State by DL Data Generation
When it becomes unnecessary for MS to maintain QCS, it releases QCS and moves itself to idle
state.
6.6 Optional Radio State Management
A MS is in Active state when an radio connection has been established. If this is not the case, i.e.
no radio connection is established, the MS is in IDLE state.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
429
Active
Connection release
Connection
establishment
Idle
Figure 6.22 Recovery from Sleep State by DL Data Generation
6.6.1 Idle State
- A MS specific DRX may be configured by upper layers.
- MS controlled mobility;
- The MS:
- Monitors a Paging channel to detect incoming calls, system information change;
- Performs neighbouring cell measurements and cell (re-)selection;
- Acquires system information.
6.6.2 Active State
- Transfer of unicast data to/from MS.
- At lower layers, the MS may be configured with a MS specific DRX.
- Network controlled mobility.
- The MS:
- Monitors a Paging channel and/ or System Information Broadcasting Block Type 1
contents to detect system information change;
- Monitors control channels associated with the shared data channel to determine if data
is scheduled for it;
- Provides channel quality and feedback information;
A-GN4.00-03-TS
430
- Performs neighbouring cell measurements and measurement reporting;
- Acquires system information.
6.7 ICH continuation transmission
ICH continuation transmission is expected to improve linkbudget. The receiver, both of BS and
MS, receives same ANCH and EXCH during several frames. The control of this function as start
and stop can be required by both of BS and MS. The information elements for this function are
added in ANCH/CSCH Switching Request, ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication and ANCH/CSCH
Switching Re-request.
Figure 6.23 shows to ICH continuation transmission is switched from inactive to active by each
MS and BS.
MS
BS
Normal transmission
ANCH/CSCH Switching Request
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
MS
BS
Normal transmission
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
ICH Continuation Transmission
ICH Continuation Transmission
Figure 6.23 Control ICH Continuation transmission
6.8 Optional Random access procedure
The MS Access and establish the link to the network by optional Random Access (RA) procedure.
There are four messages for four steps of RA procedure and one message maps on one step.
The contention based random access procedure is described below:
The four steps of the contention based random access procedures are:
1) Random Access Sequence on ATCCH in uplink:
There are two possible groups defined and one is optional. If both groups are
configured the size of message 3 and the pathloss are used to determine which group a
access sequence is selected from. The group to which a access sequence belongs
provides an indication of the size of the message 3 and the radio conditions at the MS.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
431
The access sequence group information along with the necessary thresholds are
2)
-
3)
-
-
broadcast on system information.
Random Access Response generated by MSL1 on ADSCH:
Semi-synchronous with message 1;
No HARQ;
Addressed to RA-MSID on ADECCH;
Conveys at least RA access sequence identifier, Timing Alignment information, initial
UL grant and assignment of Temporary C-MSID (which may or may not be made
permanent upon Contention Resolution);
Intended for a variable number of MSs in one ADSCH message.
First scheduled UL transmission on AUSCH:
Uses HARQ;
Size of the transport blocks depends on the UL grant conveyed in step 2 and is at least
80 bits.
For initial access:
Conveys the high layer Connection Request generated by the high layer layer and
transmitted via ACCCH
For high layer Connection Re-establishment procedure:
- Conveys the high layer Connection Re-establishment Request generated by the high
layer layer and transmitted via ACCCH;
After handover, in the target cell:
- Conveys the ciphered and integrity protected high layer Handover Confirm generated
by the high layer layer and transmitted via ADCCH;
- Conveys the C-MSID of the MS (which was allocated via the Handover Command);
-
4)
-
For other events:
- Conveys at least the C-MSID of the MS.
Contention Resolution on DL:
Not synchronised with message 3;
HARQ is supported;
Addressed to:
- The Temporary C-MSID on ADECCH for initial access and after radio link failure;
- The C-MSID on ADECCH for MS in high layer_CONNECTED;
-
HARQ feedback is transmitted only by the MS which detects its own MS identity, as
A-GN4.00-03-TS
432
provided in message 3, echoed in the Contention Resolution message;
The Temporary C-MSID is promoted to C-MSID for a MS which detects RA success and does not
already have a C-MSID; it is dropped by others. A MS which detects RA success and already has
a C-MSID, resumes using its C-MSID.
6.9 Summary of Parameters
Parameters used in Chapter 6 are summarized in Table 6.4 and Table 6.5.
Table 6.4 Parameters Related to Time Interval
Name
Description
UL EXCH Monitoring Time
Time interval during which BS continues UL carrier sensing
preceding EXCH allocation
DL EXCH Holding Duration
Time interval during which BS holds EXCH even if the EXCH is
not used for information transmission.
UL SINR Calculation Time
Time interval for which BS calculates moving average of UL
SINR.
DL SINR Calculation Time
Time interval for which MS calculates moving average of DL
SINR.
Sleep Transfer Time
Time interval which MS waits before moving to sleep state
after the last transmission or reception took place.
Table 6.5 Parameters related to RSSI and SINR
Name
Description
UL RSSI Threshold for ANCH Selection
RSSI threshold which is compared to UL carrier
sensing result preceding ANCH allocation
DL RSSI Threshold for ANCH Selection
RSSI threshold which is compared to DL carrier
sensing result preceding ANCH allocation
UL RSSI Threshold for EXCH Selection
RSSI threshold which is compared to UL carrier
sensing result preceding EXCH allocation
UL RSSI Threshold for CSCH Selection
RSSI threshold which is compared to UL carrier
sensing result preceding CSCH allocation
DL RSSI Threshold for CSCH Selection
RSSI threshold which is compared to DL carrier
sensing result preceding CSCH allocation
A-GN4.00-03-TS
433
UL RSSI Threshold for ICCH Selection
RSSI threshold which is compared to UL carrier
sensing result preceding ICCH allocation
DL RSSI Threshold for ICCH Selection
RSSI threshold which is compared to DL carrier
sensing result preceding ICCH allocation
ANCH/CSCH switch UL SINR Threshold
If UL SINR is lower than this threshold, BS Origin
ANCH/CSCH switch is triggered.
ANCH/CSCH switch DL SINR Threshold
If DL SINR is lower than this threshold, MS Origin
ANCH/CSCH switch is triggered.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
434
Chapter 7 Message Format and Information Elements
7.1 Overview
In this chapter, message formats in the access establishment phase after link assignment phase
are described. Information elements for each message are also defined. These messages are
transmitted or received on function channel such as ICCH, ACCH, EDCH or CDCH and the
messages are mapped on MAC payload.
7.2 Message Format
7.2.1 Format Regulations
Figure 7.1 shows the basic message format. The protocol identifier is shown in the first octet, and
message type is shown in the second octet. Message information are assigned from the 3rd octet.
These message information are described in Section 7.3.
The protocol identifier is defined in Section 4.5.4. Table 7.1 shows the protocol identifier, which is
defined as access establishment phase control.
Moreover, information element in message is shown as M or O. M is used in mandatory case in
the message. O is used in optional case in the message.
Bit
8
7
6
1/0
1/0
1/0
0
1/0
1/0
5
4
Protocol Identifier
1/0
1/0
Message Type
1/0
1/0
3
2
1
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
Message Information
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3~
Figure 7.1 Message Format
Table 7.1 Protocol Identifier
Protocol Type
Access Establishment Phase Control
Protocol Identifier
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
A-GN4.00-03-TS
435
7.2.2 Message Type
Table 7.2 shows the message types.
Table 7.2 Message Type List
Message Name
Reference
Link Setup Request
Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request
Extension Function Response
Link Setup Request (SC)
Connection Request
Connection Response
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Request
ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection
ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request
TDMA Slot Limitation Request
Additional LCH Confirmation
Additional LCH Indication
Additional QCS Request
Additional QCS Request Indication
Additional QCS Response
Additional QCS Rejection
Additional QCS Re-request
Connection Release
Connection Release Acknowledgement
QCS Release
QCS Release Acknowledgement
Authentication Information (1)
Authentication Information (2)
CQI Report
CQI Report Indication
Encryption Key Indication
QCS Status Enquiry Response
QCS Status Enquiry Request
7.2.2.1
7.2.2.3
7.2.2.4
7.2.2.5
7.2.2.2
7.2.2.6
7.2.2.7
7.2.2.8
7.2.2.9
7.2.2.10
7.2.2.11
7.2.2.12
7.2.2.13
7.2.2.16
7.2.2.17
7.2.2.18
7.2.2.19
7.2.2.20
7.2.2.21
7.2.2.22
7.2.2.23
7.2.2.24
7.2.2.25
7.2.2.26
7.2.2.27
7.2.2.28
7.2.2.14
7.2.2.15
7.2.2.29
7.2.2.30
7.2.2.31
Message Type Bit Assign
8 7 6 5 4 3 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0 1 1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
436
7.2.2.1 Link Setup Request
This message is used for confirmation of BS assigned channel and notification of MSID. In
addition, MS may notify channel type, and MS performance according to the requirement of
network. (Note 1) This message is used in only OFDM mode.
Table 7.3 Link Setup Request Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Link Setup Request
: Local
: UL
: ICCH
Information Element
Reference Direction Type
Length
Remark
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
MSID
7.3.3.13
UL
M
6~9
Protocol Version
7.3.3.14
UL
M
3
Extension Function Sequence 7.3.2.3
UL
M
1
Channel Type
7.3.2.1
UL
O
1
(Note 2)(Note 3)
MS Performance
7.3.3.12
UL
O
11~
(Note 3)
Extension Function Number
7.3.3.11
UL
O
3
(Note 3)
(Note 1) This message is not recommended to be transmitted dividedly in the MAC layer. The
option information element that cannot be transmitted by "Link setup request" message
should be send by "Extension function request" message.
(Note 2) MS notifies the available physical channel type for itself. BS notifies the physical channel
actually assigned for the communication.
(Note 3) It is necessary to specify the execution of sequence by "extension function request"
message, when it is impossible for data to be transmitted by “link setup request”
message.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
437
7.2.2.2 Link Setup Request (SC)
This message is used for confirmation of BS assigned channel and notification of MSID. This
message is used in SC mode. Response message for the Link Setup Request (SC) is same as
OFDM.
Table 7.4 Link Setup Request (SC) Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Link Setup Request (SC)
: Local
: UL
: ICCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
MSID (SC)
7.3.3.23
UL
M
5/6/8
Remark
A-GN4.00-03-TS
438
7.2.2.3 Link Setup Response
This message is used for confirmation of channel type, communication parameter, etc.
Table 7.5 Link Setup Response Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Link Setup Response
: Local
: DL
: ICCH
Information Element
Reference Direction Type
Length
Remark
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
MSID
7.3.3.13
DL
M
6~9
Protocol Version
7.3.3.14
DL
M
3
Extension Function Sequence 7.3.2.3
DL
M
1
Channel Type
7.3.2.1
DL
O
1
(Note 1)
Communication Parameter
7.3.3.6
DL
O
11~
(Note 2)
(Note 1) BS responds indispensably when channel type is transmitted with “link setup request”
message.
(Note 2) BS responds indispensably when MS performance is transmitted with “link setup request”
message.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
439
7.2.2.4 Extension Function Request
This message is used for request of extension function.
Table 7.6 Extension Function Request Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Extension Function Request
: Local
: UL
: ICCH
Information Element
Reference Direction Type
Length
Remark
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
Channel Type
7.3.2.1
UL
O
1
(Note 1)
MS Performance
7.3.3.12
UL
O
11~
(Note 1)
Extension Function Number
7.3.3.11
UL
O
3
(Note 1)
Source BS-info
7.3.3.20
UL
O
7
(Note 2)
Power Report
7.3.3.24
UL
O
3
(Note 1) MS is indispensably transmitted when not transmitting with “link setup request” message.
(Note 2) When channel type shows handover, MS is indispensably transmitted.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
440
7.2.2.5 Extension Function Response
This message is used for notification of area Information and notification of CCH superframe
configuration.
Table 7.7 Extension Function Response Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Extension Function Response
: Local
: DL
: ICCH
Information Element
Reference Direction Type
Length
Remark
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
Channel Type
7.3.2.1
DL
O
1
(Note 1)
Communication Parameter
7.3.3.6
DL
O
11~
(Note 2)
CCH Superframe
Configuration
7.3.3.5
DL
O
13
(Note 3)
Area Information
7.3.3.1
DL
O
10
(Note 4)
(Note 1) BS responds indispensably when channel type is transmitted with “extension function
request” message.
(Note 2) BS responds indispensably when MS performance is transmitted with “extension
function request” message.
(Note 3) Only when global definition information pattern sent by MS and global definition
information pattern maintained by BS is different, data is transmitted by BS.
(Note 4) Only when area information status number sent by MS and area information status
number maintained by BS is different, data is transmitted by BS.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
441
7.2.2.6 Connection Request
This message is used for notification of QoS, notification of connection type, etc.
Table 7.8 Connection Request Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Connection Request
: Local
: UL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Remark
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
Connection Type
7.3.2.2
UL
M
1
Authentication Information 2
7.3.3.3
UL
O
3~
(Note 1)
QoS
7.3.3.17
UL
O
3
(Note 2)
QCS Information
7.3.3.16
UL
O
4
(Note 3)
Power Report
7.3.3.24
UL
O
3
QCS Status
7.3.3.18
UL
O
4~34
(Note 4)
(Note 1) In case of handover or sleep restoration, this information element is mandatory.
(Note 2) In case of outgoing call, this information element is mandatory, otherwise omitted.
(Note 3) In case of handover or sleep restoration, this information element is mandatory,
otherwise omitted.
(Note 4) In case of handover or sleep restoration, this information element is mandatory,
otherwise omitted or only specifies QCSID 1.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
442
7.2.2.7 Connection Response
This message is used for notification of QoS and connection-ID.
Table 7.9 Connection Response Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Connection Response
: Local
: DL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference Direction
Type
Length
Remark
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
QCS Information
7.3.3.16
DL
O
4
(Note 1) (Note 4)
Connection-ID
7.3.3.7
DL
O
3
(Note 1)
Authentication Information 1
7.3.3.2
DL
O
3~
(Note 3)
QCS Status
7.3.3.18
DL
O
4~34
(Note 5)
Result of Location Registration 7.3.2.4
DL
O
1
(Note 2)
Cause
7.3.3.4
DL
O
4
(Note 1)
MSID
7.3.3.13
DL
O
6~9
(Note 6)
(Note 1) Connection is disconnected when connection-ID and QCS information is omitted. At this
time, the cause of disconnection will be shown as no connection-ID or no QCS
information.
(Note 2) Result of location registration is mandatory when connection type in “connection request”
message is location registration or outgoing call with location registration
(Note 3) In case of handover or sleep restoration, this information element is mandatory.
(Note 4) In case of outgoing call, handover or sleep restoration, this information element is
mandatory.
(Note 5) In case of handover or sleep restoration, this information element is mandatory, In case
of outgoing call omitted or only specifies QCSID 1, otherwise (=location registration)
omitted.
(Note 6) This information element is used to indicate temporary ID value. If this is set in
Connection Response message, MS shall set the value in both this information element
and MSID field in SCCH afterwards. Note that the value used for scrambling shall be
available at the next transmission timing of LCH Request message.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
443
7.2.2.8 ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
This message is used for notification that MS has received “ANCH/CSCH switching indication”
message.
Table 7.10 ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
: Local
: UL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
Scheduling Information
7.3.3.19
UL
O
5
Remark
(Note)
(Note)This information element is omitted when scheduling term in scheduling information shows
one TDMA frame.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
444
7.2.2.9 ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
This message is used to request of handover or switching channel from BS to MS, change a
scheduling, MIMO type for ANCH or control ICH Continuation Transmission.
Table 7.11 ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
: Local
: DL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Remark
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
PRU Information
7.3.3.15
DL
O
4
(Note 1)
Scheduling Information
7.3.3.19
DL
O
5
(Note 2)
Connection-ID
7.3.3.7
DL
O
3
(Note 3)
MIMO Information
7.3.3.27
DL
O
3
(Note 4)
ICH Continuation
Transmission Information
7.3.3.28
DL
O
3
(Note 5)
(Note 1) This information element is omitted when the message is sent as handover indication.
(Note 2) Scheduling term is considered to be one TDMA frame when the scheduling information
is omitted.
(Note 3) The Connection-ID is specified when the QCS of switched channel is specified. The
message is transmitted by switching the PRU when the connection-ID is omitted.
(Note 4) MIMO Information is omitted when MIMO is not supported.
(Note 5) ICH Continuation Transmission Information is omitted when ICH Continuation
Transmission Information is not supported.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
445
7.2.2.10 ANCH/CSCH Switching Request
This message is used to request of handover or switching channel from MS to BS, change MIMO
type for ANCH or control ICH Continuation Transmission.
Table 7.12 ANCH/CSCH Switching Request Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: ANCH/CSCH Switching Request
: Local
: UL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Remark
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
Cause
7.3.3.4
UL
M
4
Connection-ID
7.3.3.7
UL
O
3
(Note 1)
Target BS-info
7.3.3.21
UL
O
7
(Note 2)
MIMO Information
7.3.3.27
UL
O
3
(Note 3)
ICH Continuation
Transmission Information
7.3.3.28
UL
O
3
(Note 4)
(Note 1) The connection-ID is specified when the QCS of switched channel is specified. The
message is transmitted by switching the PRU when the connection-ID is omitted.
(Note 2) MS notifies target BS-info by this information element when target BS is determined.
(Note 3) MIMO Information is omitted when MIMO is not supported.
(Note 4) ICH Continuation Transmission Information is omitted when ICH Continuation
Transmission Information is not supported.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
446
7.2.2.11 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection
This message is used to refuse request of ANCH/CSCH switching.
Table 7.13 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection
: Local
: DL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
Cause
7.3.3.4
DL
M
4
Remark
A-GN4.00-03-TS
447
7.2.2.12 ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request
This message is used to re-request of handover or switching channel from MS to BS, retry to
change MIMO type for ANCH or retry to control ICH Continuation Transmission, when MS has
rejected ANCH/CSCH switching indication from BS.
Table 7.14 ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request
: Local
: UL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Remark
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
Cause
7.3.3.4
UL
M
4
Connection-ID
7.3.3.7
UL
O
3
(Note 1)
Target BS-info
7.3.3.21
UL
O
7
(Note 2)
MIMO Information
7.3.3.27
UL
O
3
(Note 3)
ICH Continuation
7.3.3.28
UL
O
3
(Note 4)
Transmission Information
(Note 1) The connection-ID is specified when the QCS of switched channel is specified. The
message is transmitted by switching the PRU when the connection-ID is omitted.
(Note 2) MS notifies target BS-info by this information element when target BS is determined.
(Note 3) MIMO Information is omitted when MIMO is not supported.
(Note 4) ICH Continuation Transmission Information is omitted when ICH Continuation
Transmission Information is not supported.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
448
7.2.2.13 TDMA Slot Limitation Request
This message is used when MS requests a specific slot to be assigned. When the number of slot
is over 4 in the system, this message should not be used
Table 7.15 TDMA Slot Limitation Request Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: TDMA Slot Limitation Request
: Local
: UL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
TDMA Slot Specification
7.3.2.5
UL
M
1
Remark
7.2.2.14 CQI Report
This message is used to send CQI data that MS measures to BS.
Table 7.16 CQI Report Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: CQI Report
: Local
: UL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
CQI
7.3.3.8
UL
O
12
Power Report
7.3.3.24
UL
O
3
Remark
A-GN4.00-03-TS
449
7.2.2.15 CQI Report Indication
This message is used to direct the transmission of CQI.
Table 7.17 CQI Report Indication Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: CQI Report Indication
: Local
: DL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
Map Origin
7.3.3.22
DL
O
3
Report Indication
7.3.3.25
DL
O
3
Remark
7.2.2.16 Additional LCH Confirmation
This message is used to notify that assigned channel is available for communication.
Table 7.18 Additional LCH Confirmation Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Additional LCH Confirmation
: Local
: UL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
Remark
A-GN4.00-03-TS
450
7.2.2.17 Additional LCH Indication
This message is used for notification of channel type and PRU information at adding
connection-ID.
Table 7.19 Additional LCH Indication Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Additional LCH Indication
: Local
: DL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
PRU Information
7.3.3.15
DL
M
4
Channel type
7.3.2.1
DL
M
1
Remark
7.2.2.18 Additional QCS Request
This message is used to request additional QoS.
Table 7.20 Additional QCS Request Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Additional QCS Request
: Local
: UL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
QoS
7.3.3.17
UL
O
3
QCS Information
7.3.3.16
UL
O
4
Connection type
7.3.2.2
UL
M
1
Remark
A-GN4.00-03-TS
451
7.2.2.19 Additional QCS Request Indication
This message is used to direct MS to send “additional QCS request” message.
Table 7.21 Additional QCS Request Indication Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Additional QCS Request Indication
: Local
: DL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
QoS
7.3.3.17
DL
O
3
QCS Information
7.3.3.16
DL
O
4
Connection Type
7.3.2.2
DL
M
1
Remark
7.2.2.20 Additional QCS Response
This message is used for notification of QCS information, Connection-ID etc.
Table 7.22 Additional QCS Response Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Additional QCS Response
: Local
: DL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
QCS Information
7.3.3.16
DL
O
4
Connection-ID
7.3.3.7
DL
O
3
QCS Status
7.3.3.18
DL
M
4~34
Remark
(Note)
(Note) When the additional LCH is unnecessary, connection-ID is omitted.
7.2.2.21 Additional QCS Rejection
A-GN4.00-03-TS
452
This message is used to reject additional QoS.
Table 7.23 Additional QCS Rejection Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Additional QCS Rejection
: Local
: DL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
Cause
7.3.3.4
DL
M
4
Remark
7.2.2.22 Additional QCS Re-request
This message is used for re-request of extra QCS, when MS has rejected “additional LCH
indication” message from BS.
Table 7.24 Additional QCS Re-request Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Additional QCS Re-request
: Local
: UL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
Cause
7.3.3.4
UL
M
4
Remark
A-GN4.00-03-TS
453
7.2.2.23 Connection Release
This message is used to release connection-ID. It is also used to make connection-ID a sleep
state in addition.
Table 7.25 Connection Release Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Connection Release
: Local
: Both
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
Both
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
Both
M
1
Disconnection Type
7.3.3.9
Both
M
3~*
Cause
7.3.3.4
Both
O
4
Remark
MSID
7.3.3.13
DL
O
6~9
(Note)
(Note) This information element is used to indicate temporary ID value. If this is set in Connection
Release message, MS shall set the value in both this information element and MSID field
in SCCH afterwards. Note that the value used for scrambling shall be available at the
next transmission timing of LCH Request message.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
454
7.2.2.24 Connection Release Acknowledgement
This message is used to confirm release connection and the state of QoS.
Table 7.26 Connection Release Acknowledgement Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Connection Release Acknowledgement
: Local
: Both
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
Both
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
Both
M
1
QCS Status
7.3.3.18
Both
M
4~34
Remark
MSID
7.3.3.13
DL
O
6~9
(Note)
(Note) This information element is used to indicate temporary ID value. If this is set in Connection
Release Acknowledge message, MS shall set the value in both this information element
and MSID field in SCCH afterwards. Note that the value used for scrambling shall be
available at the next transmission timing of LCH Request message.
7.2.2.25 QCS Release
This message is used to release QCS.
Table 7.27 QCS Release Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: QCS Release
: Local
: Both
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
Both
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
Both
M
1
QCS Information
7.3.3.16
Both
M
4
Cause
7.3.3.4
Both
O
4
Remark
A-GN4.00-03-TS
455
7.2.2.26 QCS Release Acknowledgement
This message is used to confirm release of QCS, and the state of QoS.
Table 7.28 QCS Release Acknowledgement Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: QCS Release Acknowledgement
: Local
: Both
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
Both
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
Both
M
1
QCS Status
7.3.3.18
Both
M
4~34
Remark
7.2.2.27 Authentication Information 1
This message is used to authenticate MS.
Table 7.29 Authentication Information 1 Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Authentication Information 1
: Local
: DL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
Authentication Information 1
7.3.3.2
DL
M
3~*
Remark
A-GN4.00-03-TS
456
7.2.2.28 Authentication Information 2
This message is used to authenticate MS.
Table 7.30 Authentication Information 2 Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Authentication Information 2
: Local
: UL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
UL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
UL
M
1
Authentication Information 2
7.3.3.3
UL
M
3~*
Remark
7.2.2.29 Encryption Key Indication
This message is used to transmit encryption key to MS.
Table 7.31 Encryption Key Indication Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: Encryption Key Indication
: Local
: DL
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
DL
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
DL
M
1
Encryption Key Set
7.3.3.10
DL
O
3~*
Encryption Key Information
7.3.3.26
DL
O
6
Remark
A-GN4.00-03-TS
457
7.2.2.30 QCS Status Enquiry Response
This message is used to notify its own status of QCS or as a response to “QCS status enquiry
request” message.
Table 7.32 QCS Status Enquiry Response Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: QCS Status Enquiry Response
: Local
: Both
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
Both
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
Both
M
1
QCS Status
7.3.3.18
Both
M
4~34
Cause
7.3.3.4
Both
O
4
Remark
7.2.2.31 QCS Status Enquiry Request
This message is used to confirm QCS status. Response to the transmission of “QCS status
enquiry response” message will be mandatory if this message is received.
Table 7.33 QCS Status Enquiry Request Message Contents
Message Type
Significance
Direction
Function Channel
: QCS Status Enquiry Request
: Local
: Both
: ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element
Reference
Direction
Type
Length
Protocol Identifier
7.2.1
Both
M
1
Message Type
7.2.2
Both
M
1
QCS Status
7.3.3.18
Both
M
4~34
Remark
A-GN4.00-03-TS
458
7.3 Information Element Format
7.3.1 Format Regulations
The Bit 1 is considered single octet information element, while the Bit 0 is considered multiple
octet information elements.
Figure 7.2 shows the single octet information element format. The information element identifier is
shown in the Bit 7~5, and information element contents are shown Bit 4~1.
Bit
8
Type
1
7
6
5
Information Element
Identifier:
1/0
1/0
1/0
4
3
2
1
Information Element Contents
1/0
1/0
1/0
Octet 1
1/0
Figure 7.2 Single Octet Information Element Format
Figure 7.3 shows the multiple octet information element format. The information element identifier
is shown in Octet 1, and the length of the information contents is shown in Octet 2. The
information contents are assigned from Octet 3 on.
Bit
8
Type
0
7
6
1/0
1/0
1/0
5
4
3
2
Information Element Identifier:
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
Length
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1
1/0
1/0
Information Element Contents
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3~
Figure 7.3 Multiple Octet Information Element Format
A-GN4.00-03-TS
459
7.3.2 Single Octet Information Element Identifier
Table 7.34 shows the single octet information element identifiers.
Table 7.34 Single Octet Information Element Identifier List
Information Name
Information Identifier
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Channel Type
1 0 0 1 -
-
-
-
Connection Type
1 0 1 0 -
-
-
-
Extension Function Sequence
1 0 1 1 -
-
-
-
Result of Location Registration
1 1 0 0 -
-
-
-
TDMA Slot Specification
1 1 0 1 -
-
-
-
7.3.2.1 Channel Type
This information element is used to notify channel type.
Bit
Octet
1
8
Type
7
1
0
6
5
Channel Type
0
1
4
Assign
Channel
Type
3
2
Physical
Channel Type
1
Reserved
Assign Channel Type (Octet 1)
Bit
4
0 ANCH
1 CSCH
Physical Channel Type (Octet 1)
Bit
3
2
0/1 ANCH absent/present
0/1 CSCH absent/present
Figure 7.4 Channel Type
A-GN4.00-03-TS
460
7.3.2.2 Connection Type
This information element is used to notify connection type.
Octet
1
Bit
8
Type
1
7
6
5
Connection Type
0
1
0
4
3
2
Connection Type
1
Connection Type (Octet 1)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
Unallocated (unassigned) number
0
0
0
1
Outgoing call
0
0
1
0
Incoming call
0
0
1
1
Location registration
0
1
0
0
Handover
0
1
0
1
Restoration from sleep state
0
1
1
0
Outgoing call with location registration
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.5 Connection Type
7.3.2.3 Extension Function Sequence
This information element is used so that BS orders the start of extension function sequence to
MS.
Octet
1
Bit
8
Type
1
7
6
5
Extension Function
Sequence
0
1
1
4
Start
Indication
3
2
1
Reserved
Start Indication (Octet 1)
Bit
4
0 Extension function sequence absent
1 Extension function sequence present
Figure 7.6 Extension Function Sequence
A-GN4.00-03-TS
461
7.3.2.4 Result of Location Registration
This information element is used to notify result of the location registration.
Octet
1
Bit
8
Type
1
7
6
5
Result of Location
Registration
1
0
0
4
3
2
1
Result of Location Registration
Result of Location Registration (Octet 1)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
- Class of retry possible
0
0
0
0 OK
0
0
0
1 NG (Network trouble)
0
0
1
0 NG (Temporary failure)
0
0
1
1 NG (Timer expired)
0
1
0
0 NG (Protocol error)
0
1
0
1 NG(Others)
1
- Class of retry impossible
1
0
0
0 NG (User not contracted)
1
0
0
1 NG (Authentication error)
1
0
1
0 NG (Service un-implemented)
1
0
1
1 NG (Others)
1
1
0
0 NG (Call state and message mismatch)
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.7 Result of Location Registration
A-GN4.00-03-TS
462
7.3.2.5 TDMA Slot Specification
This information element is used to request to switch the connection of the specified slot to
another slot. When the number of slot is over 4 in the system, this information element should not
be used.
Octet
1
Bit
8
Type
1
Slot Number (Octet 1)
Bit
8
7
6
5
- 0/1
- 0/1 - 0/1 0/1 -
7
6
5
TDMA Slot Specification
1
0
1
4
3
2
1
Slot Number
TDMA Slot 1 uncontrollable / controllable
TDMA Slot 2 uncontrollable / controllable
TDMA Slot 3 uncontrollable / controllable
TDMA Slot 4 uncontrollable / controllable
Figure 7.8 TDMA Slot Specification
A-GN4.00-03-TS
463
7.3.3 Multiple Octet Information Element Identifier
Table 7.35 shows the multiple octet information element identifiers.
Table 7.35 Multiple Information Element Identifier List
Information name
Information identifier
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Area Information
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Authentication Information 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Authentication Information 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Cause
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
CCH Superframe Configuration
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
Communication Parameter
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
Connection-ID
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
CQI
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Disconnection Type
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Encryption Key Set
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
Extension Function Number
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
MS Performance
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
MSID
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
Protocol Version
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
PRU Information
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
QCS Information
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
QoS
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
QCS Status
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Scheduling Information
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
Source BS-info
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Target BS-info
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
MAP Origin
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
Power Report
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
Report Indication
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
A-GN4.00-03-TS
464
Information name
Information identifier
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Encryption Key Information
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
MIMO Information
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
ICH Continuation Transmission
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
Reserved
0 0 Other
Option
0 1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
465
7.3.3.1 Area Information
This information element is used so that MS can judge the communication area of BS.
Octet
1
2
3
Bit
8
7
0
0
6
5
4
3
Area information
0
0
0
0
Area Information Content Length
10
1
Handover Process Level
Handover Destination Zone Selection Level
Target BS Search Level
7
9
0
Standby Zone Hold Level
5
8
1
Standby Zone Selection Level
4
6
2
ANCH/CSCH Switching FER Threshold Value
ANCH/CSCH Switching SINR Threshold Value
Area Information
Status Number
Reserved
Standby Zone Selection Level (Octet 3)
It specifies the threshold value level (CCCH) at which MS selects BS.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0 80 dBuV
:
:
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 30 dBuV
:
:
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 10 dBuV
(Note) 1 dB unit
A-GN4.00-03-TS
466
Standby Zone Holding Level (Octet 4)
Specifies the threshold value level (CCCH) at which MS again selects BS.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0 80 dBuV
:
:
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 30 dBuV
:
:
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 10 dBuV
(Note) 1 dB unit
Handover Process Level (Octet 5)
It specifies the threshold value level (ANCH/CSCH) at which MS performs handover.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0 80 dBuV
:
:
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 30 dBuV
:
:
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 10 dBuV
(Note) 1 dB unit
Handover Destination Zone selection Level (Octet 6)
It specifies the threshold value level (C CCH) at which MS selects handover destination BS.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0 80 dBuV
:
:
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 30 dBuV
:
:
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 10 dBuV
(Note) 1 dB unit
Target BS Searching Level (Octet 7)
It specifies the threshold value level (ANCH/CSCH) at which MS searches handover destination
BS.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0 80 dBuV
:
:
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 30 dBuV
:
:
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 10 dBuV
(Note) 1 dB unit
A-GN4.00-03-TS
467
ANCH/CSCH Switching FER Threshold Value (Octet 8)
It specifies the number of errors of the 240 slots. And FER threshold value (ANCH/CSCH) shows
the number of errors at which the channel switching function of MS is activated.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 Number of slot errors n = 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 Number of slot errors n = 1
:
:
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0 Number of slot errors n = 240
Other
Reserved
ANCH/CSCH Switching SINR Threshold Value (Octet 9)
It specifies the SINR threshold value (ANCH/CSCH) at which MS performs channel switching
because of reception quality degradation.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0 SINR = -10 dB
:
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SINR = -1 dB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 SINR = 0 dB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 SINR = 1 dB
0
0
1
0
1
Other
0
0
0
SINR = 40 dB
Reserved
Area Information Status Number (Octet 10)
It shows the status number of area information reported by this information element.
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 No Area Information
0
0
1 Status number 1
:
:
1
1
1 Status number 7
Figure 7.9 Area Information
A-GN4.00-03-TS
468
7.3.3.2 Authentication Information 1
This information element is used to transmit authentication data, etc.
Octet
Bit
1
8
0
2
7
6
5
4
3
2
Authentication Information 1
0
0
0
0
0
1
Authentication Information 1 Content Length
1
0
Authentication Data 1
3~
(Note) The content of authentication data is not specified here.
Figure 7.10 Authentication Information 1
Authentication Data 1 (Authentication Message Type) (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 Authentication method Request
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 Authentication method Response
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1 Authentication method Acknowledge
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0 Transparent control information
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1 Encryption Indication
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0 Encryption Request
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1 Re-Authentication Request
Other
Reserved
7.3.3.2.1 Authentication Data 1 (Authentication method Request)
Octet
Bit
8
7
0
0
3
6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Authentication method Request)
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
469
7.3.3.2.2 Authentication Data 1 (Authentication method Acknowledge)
Bit
Octet
8
7
0
0
3
4
6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Authentication method Acknowledge)
0
0
0
0
Authentication method
2
1
1
1
Authentication method
5
Authentication method(Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
- 0/1
:
0/1 -
2
0/1
-
1
0/1 Authentication Method 1 absent/present
- Authentication Method 2 absent/present
- Authentication Method 3 absent/present
-
Authentication method(Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
- 0/1
- 0/1
- 0/1 :
0/1 (Note) BS notifies MS of authentication method.
Authentication Method 8 absent/present
Authentication Method 9 absent/present
Authentication Method 10 absent/present
Authentication Method 11 absent/present
Authentication Method 16 absent/present
7.3.3.2.3 Authentication Data 1 (Transparent control information)
Bit
Octet
8
7
0
0
3
4~
6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Transparent control information)
0
0
0
1
Authentication Information
2
1
0
0
Authentication Information (Octet 4~)
Authentication Information is transmitted between MS and network transparently via BS.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
470
7.3.3.2.4 Authentication Data 1 (Encryption Indication)
Octet
Bit
8
7
0
0
6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Encryption Indication)
0
0
0
1
Encryption Method
3
4
2
1
0
1
Encryption Method
5
Random Number
6~21
Encryption Method (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 :
-
3
-
2
-
-
-
Encryption Method (Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 :
-
3
-
2
-
-
-
1
-
Encryption Method 1 absent/present
Encryption Method 2 absent/present
Encryption Method 3 absent/present
0/1 Encryption Method 8 absent/present
1
-
Encryption Method 9 absent/present
Encryption Method 10 absent/present
Encryption Method 11 absent/present
0/1 Encryption Method 16 absent/present
Random Number (Octet 6~21)
Challenge value for challenge and response authentication check. This is a random value.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
471
7.3.3.3 Authentication Information 2
This information element is used to transmit authentication data etc.
Octet
1
2
3~
Bit
8
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
Authentication Information 2
0
0
0
0
0
1
Authentication Information 2 Content Length
1
1
Authentication Data 2
(Note) The content of authentication data is not specified here.
Figure 7.11 Authentication Information 2
Authentication Data 2 (Authentication Message Type) (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 Authentication method Request
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 Authentication method Response
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1 Authentication method Acknowledge
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0 Transparent control information
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1 Encryption Indication
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0 Encryption Request
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1 Re-Authentication Request
Other
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
472
7.3.3.3.1 Authentication Data 2 (Authentication method Response)
Bit
Octet
8
7
0
0
3
4
6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Authentication method Response)
0
0
0
0
Authentication method
2
1
1
0
Authentication method
5
Authentication method(Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
- 0/1
:
0/1 -
2
0/1
-
Authentication method(Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
- 0/1
:
0/1 -
2
0/1
-
-
-
1
0/1 Authentication Method 1 absent/present
- Authentication Method 2 absent/present
- Authentication Method 3 absent/present
-
Authentication Method 8 absent/present
1
0/1 Authentication Method 9 absent/present
- Authentication Method 10 absent/present
- Authentication Method 11 absent/present
-
Authentication Method 16 absent/present
A-GN4.00-03-TS
473
7.3.3.3.2 Authentication Data 2 (Transparent control information)
Bit
Octet
8
7
0
0
3
4~
6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Transparent control information)
0
0
0
1
Authentication Information
2
1
0
0
Authentication Information (Octet 4~)
Authentication Information is transmitted between MS and network transparently via BS.
7.3.3.3.3 Authentication Data 2 (Re-Authentication Request)
Octet
Bit
8
7
0
0
3
6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Re-Authentication Request)
0
0
0
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
0
7.3.3.3.4 Authentication Data 2 (Encryption Request)
Bit
Octet
8
7
0
0
3
4
5
6~21
6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Encryption Request)
0
0
0
1
Encryption Method
Encryption Method
Response Value
A-GN4.00-03-TS
474
Encryption Method (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 :
-
3
-
2
-
-
-
Encryption Method (Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 :
-
3
-
2
-
-
-
1
-
Encryption Method 1 absent/present
Encryption Method 2 absent/present
Encryption Method 3 absent/present
Encryption Method 4 absent/present
0/1 Encryption Method 8 absent/present
1
-
Encryption Method 9 absent/present
Encryption Method 10 absent/present
Encryption Method 11 absent/present
Encryption Method 12 absent/present
0/1 Encryption Method 16 absent/present
Response Value (Octet 6~21)
Response value for challenge and response check.
7.3.3.4 Cause
The information element is used to describe the reason and location of message generation.
Bit
Octet
8
7
6
1
0
0
0
2
3
4
Coding
Standard
5
4
3
2
1
Cause
0
0
1
Cause Content Length
0
0
Location
Cause Value
Reserved
Reserved
Coding Standard (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
0
0 XGP
1
1 Specific to the local network standard
Other
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
475
Location (Octet 3)
Bit
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Other
3
0
1
0
1
MS
BS
Network
Other
Reserved
Cause Value (Octet 4)
Bit
8 7 6 5 4 3
0 0 0 - - 0 0 0
0
1 0
0
1 1
1
0 0
1
0 1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1 0 0
0
0
0
1
Other
2
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Normal class
Normal disconnect
Response to QCS status enquiry request
Others
Resource busy class
No vacant PRU (include no slot available)
No available PRU
No route to specified transit network
No connection-ID
No QCS information
Equipment abnormal
Others
Resource down class
Temporary failure
Network out of order
Others
Service not available class
Requested function not responding
Service or option not implemented, unspecified (include no
channel adding function at BS side)
Invalid message (e.g.: Parameter out of range) class
Assigned PRU non corresponding
No channel adding function
Procedure error class
Message abnormal
Information element abnormal
Sequence abnormal
Timer expiration
Other procedure error class
Reserved
Figure 7.12 Cause
A-GN4.00-03-TS
476
7.3.3.5 CCH Superframe Configuration
This information element is used to notify superframe configuration of CCH.
Bit
Octet
8
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
CCH Superframe Configuration
0
0
0
0
1
0
CCH Superframe Configuration Content Length
2
3
4
1
Reserved
LCCH Interval Value n
Paging Grouping Factor nGROUP
Paging Area Number Length np
5
Reserved
6
Control Carrier
Structure
7
8
1
Battery Saving Cycle
Maximum Value nBS
Frame Basic Unit Length
nSUB
Reserved
Broadcasting Status
Global Definition Information
Indication
Pattern
Protocol Version
Reserved
9
10
Number of Same Paging
Groups nSG
PCH Number nPCH
Reserved
11
12
13
BSID Area Bit Length nBL
MCC (Mobile Country Code)
MNC (Mobile Network Code)
LCCH Interval Value n (Octet 3)
It shows the DL LCCH slot intermittent cycle.
Bit
6
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
:
0
1
0
:
1
1
1
Reserved
n=1
n=2
n=3
:
n = 20
:
n = 63
A-GN4.00-03-TS
477
Paging Grouping Factor nGROUP (Octet 4)
It shows the value of PCH information corresponding to the number of group divisions.
Bit
8
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
6
0
0
1
5
0
1
1
1
1
:
1
1
LCCH superframe is not constructed (option)
nGROUP = 1
nGROUP = 2
:
nGROUP = 15
(Note) If LCCH is multiplexed, the values of nPCH and nGROUP will be set so that the paging group
number does not exceed 127.
Paging Area Number Length np (Octet 4)
It shows the bit length of the paging area number included in BSID.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Reserved
np = 4
np = 6
np = 8
np = 10
np = 12
np = 13
np = 14
np = 15
np = 16
np = 17
np = 18
np = 19
np = 20
np = 21
np = 22
(Note 2) np must be the same even in a different paging area if handover between paging areas is
executed.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
478
Number of Same Paging Groups nSG (Octet 5)
It shows the number of PCH slots belonging to the same paging group in the LCCH superframe.
Bit
6
0
0
1
5
0
0
:
1
4
0
1
1
LCCH superframe is not constructed (option)
nSG = 1
:
nSG = 7
Battery Saving Cycle Maximum Value nBS (octet 5)
It shows the times that BS continuously sends the same paging signal to the paging group.
Bit
3
0
0
1
2
0
0
:
1
1
0
1
1
LCCH superframe is not constructed (option)
nBS = 1
:
nBS = 7
Control Carrier Structure (Octet 6)
It shows the presence or absence of a mutual relationship between paging group and number of
LCCHs used by the relevant BS.
Bit
8
0
7
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Shows that only 1 LCCH is used.
Shows that 2 LCCHs are used, and each individual LCCH is
independent.
Shows that 2 LCCHs are used, and PCH paging groups are mutually
related.
Reserved
PCH Number nPCH (Octet 6)
It shows the number of PCHs in the frame basic unit.
Bit
6
0
0
1
5
0
0
:
1
4
0
1
1
No PCH (optional)
1 PCH slots in frame basic unit (nPCH = 1)
:
7 PCH slots in frame basic unit (nPCH = 7)
(Note 3) If LCCH is multiplexed, the values of nPCH and nGROUP will be set so that the paging
group number does not exceed 127.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
479
Frame Basic Unit Length nSUB (Octet 6)
It shows the length of the LCCH superframe structural element (frame basic unit).
Bit
3
0
0
1
2
0
0
:
1
1
0
1
(Optional)
nSUB = 1
:
nSUB = 7
1
Broadcasting Status Indication (Octet 8)
It shows the presence or absence of information broadcasting messages other than “radio
channel information broadcasting” message sent on the relevant LCCH.
Bit
6
1/0
5
1/0
-
4
1/0
-
“System information broadcasting” message present / absent
“Optional information broadcasting” message present / absent
Reserved
Global Definition Information Pattern (Octet 8)
It shows the relevant pattern number of the present “radio channel information broadcasting”
message. When “radio channel information broadcasting” message changes, the new global
definition information pattern is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
1
1
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
:
Other
Global definition information pattern (0)
Global definition information pattern (1)
Global definition information pattern (2)
:
Global definition information pattern (7)
Reserved
Protocol Version (Octet 9)
It shows protocol version supported by BS.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
Other
2
1/0
1
1/0
-
Version 1 present / absent
Version 2 present / absent
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
480
BSID Area Bit Length nBL (Octet 10)
It shows the BSID area bit length included in the BS information.
Bit
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
3
0
0
0
:
0
Other
2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
nBL = 15
nBL = 16
nBL = 17
:
nBL = 40
Reserved
Mobile Country Code (Octet 11-12)
It is used to indicate a mobile phone operator along with Mobile Network Code.
Mobile Network Code (Octet 12-13)
It is used to indicate a mobile phone operator along with Mobile Country Code.
Figure 7.13 CCH Superframe Configuration
A-GN4.00-03-TS
481
7.3.3.6 Communication Parameter
This information element is used to notify MCS, map timing etc.
Octet
1
2
3
4
Bit
8
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
Communication parameter
0
0
0
0
1
1
Communication parameter Content Length
OFDM MCS for UL / SC MCS for UL
OFDM MCS for DL
OFDM MCS for DL
6
8
9
10
11
12
0
OFDM MCS for UL / SC MCS for UL
5
7
1
Map
Timing
EXCH Timing
Retransmission
Times(Note)
HARQ Method
Reserved
MAP Origin
Window Size
Reserved
Combine
Sequence
Number
Expansion
Full
SubReError Correct Encoding
carrier
served
Mode
Antenna Switch
Number of Layers (DL)
(DL)
SDMA Stream Number
Information
MIMO (DL)
(Note) MS notifies BS the maximum value that can correspond by MS performance. BS decides
the retransmission time, and indicates it by communication parameter.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
482
OFDM MCS for UL (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
OFDM MCS for UL (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
0/1
Other
SC MCS for UL (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
SC MCS for UL (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 Other
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
3
-
2
-
1
-
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
3
-
2
-
1
-
Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
BPSK [3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
Reserved
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present
64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present
256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved
Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
π/2- BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
π/2- BPSK [3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
π/4- QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
π/4- QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
8PSK [ 3/4 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present
64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present
256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
483
OFDM MCS for DL (Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
-
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
OFDM MCS for DL (Octet 6)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
-
3
-
2
-
1
Other
-
Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
BPSK [3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
Reserved
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present
64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present
256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved
Map Timing (Octet 7)
Bit
8
0 Timing 1
1 Timing 2
Map Origin (Octet 7)
Bit
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
1
1
1
4
0
0
1
3
0
1
0
1
1
SCH 1
SCH 2
SCH 3
:
SCH 32
EXCH Timing (Octet 8)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 Level 0
0
0
1 Level 1
0
1
0 Level 2
0
1
1 Level 3
1
0
0 Level 4
Other
Reserved
Window Size (Octet 8)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
484
Bit
5
0
0
0
1
4
0
0
1
:
1
3
0
1
0
1
Reserved
Window size pattern 1
Window size pattern 2
:
Window size pattern 7
MAC Combine (Octet 8)
Bit
2
0 MAC Combine absent
1 MAC Combine present
Sequence Number Expansion (Octet 8)
Bit
1
0 Sequence Number Expansion absent
1 Sequence Number Expansion present
Retransmission Times (Octet 9)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 No Retransmission
0
0
1 Once
0
1
0 Twice
:
:
1
1
1 7 times
Full Subcarrier Mode (Octet 9)
Bit
5
0/1 Full Subcarrier Mode function absent / present
Error Correction Encoding (Octet 9)
Bit
4
3
2
0/1 - Convolutional encoding (Mandatory) absent/present
- 0/1
- Turbo coding (Optional) absent/present
- 0/1 Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
485
HARQ Method (Octet 10)
Bit
8
7
6
0/1 - CC-HARQ absent/present
- 0/1
- IR-HARQ (Optional) absent/present
- 0/1 Reserved
Antenna Switch (DL) (Octet 10)
Bit
5
4
0/1 - Switching each slot absent / present
- 0/1 Switching each frame absent / present
Number of Layers (DL) (Octet 10)
Bit
3
2
1
0/1 - 2 layers absent / present
- 0/1
- 4 layers absent / present
- 0/1 Reserved
SDMA Stream Number Information (Octet 11)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0 Reserved
0
0
0
1 SDMA Stream Number Information = 1
0
0
1
0 SDMA Stream Number Information = 2
:
:
1
1
0
0 SDMA Stream Number Information = 12
Other
Reserved
MIMO (DL) (Octet 12)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0/1 - Expansion of bit (Note 1)
- 0/1
- STBC absent / present
- 0/1 - SM absent / present
- 0/1 - EMB absent / present
Other
Reserved
(Note 1) If Bit 8 is set “1”, MS and BS should consider next octet as expanded MIMO Information.
Figure 7.14 Communication Parameter
A-GN4.00-03-TS
486
7.3.3.7 Connection-ID
This information element is used to notify connection-ID.
Octet
Bit
1
8
7
0
0
2
6
5
4
3
Connection-ID
0
0
0
1
Connection-ID Content Length
Connection-ID
3
Connection-ID (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
:
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
Reserved
Connection-ID 1
Connection-ID 2
Connection-ID 3
:
Connection-ID 16
Figure 7.15 Connection-ID
7.3.3.8 CQI
This information element is used to notify the CQI to BS that is measured by MS.
Bit
Octet
8
7
6
1
0
0
0
2
5
CQI
0
1
CQI Content Length
3
2
1
0
0
0
RMAP (MSB)
3
:
:
RMAP (LSB)
11
12
4
MAP Origin
Reserved
RMAP is the number based on MAP origin. MS notifies the status of PRU as CQI, as requested
by BS. CQI information is composed of RMAP. RMAP notifies the status of PRU.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
487
RMAP (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1
-
5
0/1
-
4
0/1
-
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
RMAP (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
4
0/1
-
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
:
RMAP (Octet 11)
Bit
8
7
6
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1
-
5
0/1
-
Map Origin (Octet 12)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
1
1
1
4
0
1
0
1
Accept/Refuse PRU 1
Accept/Refuse PRU 2
Accept/Refuse PRU 3
Accept/Refuse PRU 4
Accept/Refuse PRU 5
Accept/Refuse PRU 6
Accept/Refuse PRU 7
Accept/Refuse PRU 8
Accept/Refuse PRU 9
Accept/Refuse PRU 10
Accept/Refuse PRU 11
:
Accept/Refuse PRU 65
Accept/Refuse PRU 66
Accept/Refuse PRU 67
Accept/Refuse PRU 68
Accept/Refuse PRU 69
Accept/Refuse PRU 70
Accept/Refuse PRU 71
Accept/Refuse PRU 72
SCH 1
SCH 2
SCH 3
:
SCH 32
Figure 7.16 CQI
A-GN4.00-03-TS
488
7.3.3.9 Disconnection Type
This information element is used to notify disconnected connection-ID, etc.
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
0
0
2
3~*
Continuation
6
5
4
3
Disconnection type
0
0
1
0
Disconnection Type Content Length
Connection-ID
2
1
0
1
Disconnection
Type
Reserved
Continuation (Octet 3)
Bit
8
0 Last octet
1 Continuation (Note)
(Note) When continuation is set to 1, other connection-ID and disconnection type is followed to
the next octet.
Connection-ID (Octet 3)
Bit
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
:
1
1
1
1
Connection-ID 1
Connection-ID 2
Connection-ID 3
:
Connection-ID 16
Disconnection Type (Octet 3)
Bit
3
2
0
0 Release connection and transit to sleep state
0
1 Release connection and transit to idle state
Others Reserved
Figure 7.17 Disconnection Type
A-GN4.00-03-TS
489
7.3.3.10 Encryption Key Set
This information element is used to report the key for performing encryption.
Octet
Bit
1
8
7
0
0
2
6
5
4
3
Encryption key set
0
0
1
0
Encryption Key Set Content Length
2
1
1
0
Encryption Key
3~*
Figure 7.18 Encryption Key Set
7.3.3.11 Extension Function Number
This information element is used to notify global definition information pattern and area
information number.
Bit
Octet
8
1
0
2
3
7
6
5
4
3
2
Extension Function Number
0
0
0
1
0
1
Extension Function Number Content Length
Global Definition Information
Pattern
Area Information
Status Number
1
1
Reserved
Global Definition Information Pattern (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0 Global definition information pattern 0
0
0
1
0 Global definition information pattern 1
:
:
1
1
1
0 Global definition information pattern 7
Other
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
490
Area Information Status Number (Octet 3)
Bit
4
3
2
0
0
0 No area information
0
0
1 Area information status number 1
:
:
1
1
1 Area information status number 7
Figure 7.19 Extension Function Number
A-GN4.00-03-TS
491
7.3.3.12 MS Performance
This information element is used to notify MCS, EXCH timing, etc.
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
0
0
6
5
4
3
MS Performance
0
0
1
1
MS Performance Content Length
2
OFDM MCS for DL
6
10
11
0
OFDM MCS for DL
5
9
0
OFDM MCS for UL / SC MCS for UL
4
8
1
OFDM MCS for UL / SC MCS for UL
3
7
2
EXCH Timing
Synthesizer
Self-owned Bandwidth
Error Correct Encoding
HARQ Method
Window Size
RF Number
Full
Subcarrier
Mode
Antenna Switch
Number of Layers (UL)
(UL)
Retransmission Times
Com- Sequence
Number
(Note)
bine Expansion
MIMO (UL)
(Note) MS notifies BS the maximum value that can correspond by MS performance. BS decides
the retransmission time, and indicates it by communication parameter.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
492
OFDM MCS for UL (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
OFDM MCS for UL (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
Other
SC MCS for UL (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
SC MCS for UL (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 Other
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
3
-
2
-
1
-
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
3
-
2
-
1
-
Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
BPSK [3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present
64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present
256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved
Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
π/2 BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
π/2 BPSK 3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
π/4 QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
π/4 QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
8PSK [ 3/4 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present
64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present
256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
493
OFDM MCS for DL (Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
OFDM MCS for DL (Octet 6)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
Other
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
3
-
2
-
1
-
Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
BPSK [3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present
64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present
256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved
EXCH Timing (Octet 7)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 Level 0
0
0
1 Level 1
0
1
0 Level 2
0
1
1 Level 3
1
0
0 Level 4
Other
Reserved
Self-owned Bandwidth (Octet 7)
Bit
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0 1 SCH
0
0
0
0
1 2 SCHs
0
0
0
1
0 3 SCHs
:
:
1
1
1
1
1 32 SCHs
A-GN4.00-03-TS
494
Synthesizer (Octet 8)
Bit
8
7
0
0 No center frequency switching capability (Note 1)
0
1 Center frequency switching time class 1 (Note 2)
1
0 Center frequency switching time class 2 (Note 3)
1
1 Center frequency switching time class 3
(Note 1) BS shall always assign same band to the MS.
(Note 2) When adjacent slots are used within/beyond a frame, BS shall assign same band to the
MS.
(Note 3) When adjacent slots next to each other across the TX/RX or RX/TX switching timing are
used, BS shall assign same band to the MS.
Error Correction Encoding (Octet 8)
Bit
6
5
4
0/1 - Convolutional encoding (Mandatory) absent/present
- 0/1
- Turbo coding (Optional) absent/present
- 0/1 Reserved
RF Number (Octet 8)
Bit
3
2
0
0 RF number 1
0
1 RF number 2
1
0 RF number 3
1
1 RF number 4
Full Subcarrier Mode (Octet 8)
Bit
1
0/1 Full Subcarrier Mode function absent / present
A-GN4.00-03-TS
495
HARQ Method (Octet 9)
Bit
8
7
6
0/1 - CC-HARQ absent/present
- 0/1
- IR-HARQ (Optional) absent/present
- 0/1 Reserved
Antenna Switch (UL) (Octet 9)
Bit
5
4
0/1 - Switching each slot absent / present
- 0/1 Switching each frame absent / present
Number of Layers (UL) (Octet 9)
Bit
3
2
1
0/1 - 2 layers absent / present
- 0/1
- 4 layers absent / present
- 0/1 Reserved
Window Size (Octet 10)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 Reserved
0
0
1 Window size pattern 1
0
1
0 Window size pattern 2
:
:
1
1
1 Window size pattern 7
Retransmission Times (Octet 10)
Bit
5
4
3
0
0
0 No Retransmission
0
0
1 Once
0
1
0 Twice
:
:
1
1
1 7 times
MAC Combine (Octet 10)
Bit
2
0 MAC Combine absent
1 MAC Combine present
Sequence Number Expansion (Octet 10)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
496
Bit
1
0
1
Sequence Number Expansion absent
Sequence Number Expansion present
MIMO (UL) (Octet 11)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0/1 - Expansion bit (Note 1)
- 0/1
- STBC absent / present
- 0/1 - SM absent / present
- 0/1 - EMB absent / present
Other
Reserved
(Note 1) If Bit 8 is set “1”, MS and BS should consider next octet as expanded MIMO Information.
Figure 7.20 MS Performance
A-GN4.00-03-TS
497
7.3.3.13 MSID
This information element is used to notify MSID.
Octet
Bit
8
7
6
5
1
0
0
0
2
3
2
1
0
1
1
MSID Content Length
0
1
MSID Indicator
0
0
0
3
(MSB)
MSID
5
MSID
6
MSID
7
1
Bit
8
7
6
5
Reserved
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
MSID Content Length
0
1
0
MSID Indicator
0
1
4
(MSB)
MSID
MSID
4
MSID
5
6
(LSB)
MSID
2
3
MSID
MSID
4
Octet
4
MSID
MSID
(LSB)
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
498
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
MSID Content Length
0
1
MSID
0
0
0
2
3
5
MSID Indicator
0
1
0
(MSB)
MSID
4
MSID
5
MSID
6
MSID
7
MSID
8
9
MSID
MSID
(LSB)
Reserved
MSID Indicator (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 34 bits MSID
0
0
1 24 bits MSID
0
1
0 50 bits MSID
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.21 MSID
A-GN4.00-03-TS
499
7.3.3.14 Protocol Version
This information element is used to notify protocol version.
Octet
Bit
1
8
7
0
0
6
5
4
3
Protocol Version
0
0
1
1
Protocol Version Content Length
2
2
1
1
0
Protocol Version Number
3
Protocol Version Number (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
Other
2
0/1
1
0/1 Version 1 absent / present
- Version 2 absent / present
Reserved
Figure 7.22 Protocol Version
7.3.3.15 PRU Information
This information element is used to specify additional PRU.
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
0
0
2
3
4
Map
Timing
(Note)
6
5
4
3
PRU Information
0
0
1
1
PRU Information Content Length
Map Origin (Note)
PRU Number
2
1
1
1
Reserved
Reserved
(Note) Map timing and map origin are considered to be undefined, when assign channel type in
“link setup request” message or “extension function response” message is CSCH.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
500
Map Timing (Octet 3)
Bit
8
0 Timing 1
1 Timing 2
Map Origin (Octet 3)
Bit
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
1
1
1
4
0
0
1
3
0
1
0
1
1
PRU Number (Octet 4)
Bit
8 7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
:
1 1 1 1 1
SCH 1
SCH 2
SCH 3
:
SCH 32
3
0
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
1
PRU 1
PRU 2
PRU 3
:
PRU 128
Figure 7.23 PRU Information
A-GN4.00-03-TS
501
7.3.3.16 QCS Information
This information element is used to notify QCS-ID.
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
0
0
6
5
4
3
QCS Information
0
1
0
0
QCS Information Content Length
2
1
0
0
Connection Status
3
Connection Status
4
Connection Status (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 :
(Note) Octet 3, Bit 8 (QCS-ID=1(for
receiver)
Connection Status (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1
- 0/1 :
-
2
2
-
1
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
-
-
QCS-ID 1 connection absent/present
QCS-ID 2 connection absent/present
QCS-ID 3 connection absent/present
:
- 0/1 QCS-ID 8 connection absent/present
control)) is always set to 1 on sender. (Don’t care for
QCS-ID 9 connection absent/present
QCS-ID 10 connection absent/present
QCS-ID 11 connection absent/present
:
0/1 QCS-ID 16 connection absent/present
Figure 7.24 QCS Information
A-GN4.00-03-TS
502
7.3.3.17 QoS
This information element is used to notify QoS.
Octet
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
QoS
1
0
0
0
2
1
0
QoS Content Length
Reserved
3
QoS Number
QoS Number (Octet 3)
Bit
4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 LAC
0 0 0 1 PLC
0 0 1 0 nl-VRC
0 0 1 1 al-VRC
0 1 0 0 Ld-BE
0 1 1 0 Voice
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.25 QoS
7.3.3.18 QCS Status
This information element is used to notify QCS Status.
Octet
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
QCS Status
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
2
QCS Status Content Length
3
QCS-ID
Connection-ID
4
Reserved
QoS Number
5
QCS-ID
Connection-ID
6
Reserved
QoS Number
:
:
33
QCS-ID
Connection-ID
34
Reserved
QoS Number
(Note) Omit the setting of QCS-ID=1 on sender. And receiver ignores setting of QCS-ID=1.
(Note) Omit the setting of unused QCS(s).
A-GN4.00-03-TS
503
QCS-ID (Octet 3~33)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0 QCS-ID 1
0
0
0
1 QCS-ID 2
0
0
1
0 QCS-ID 3
:
:
1
1
1
1 QCS-ID 16
(Note) Omit the setting of QCS-ID=1 on sender. And receiver ignores setting of QCS-ID=1.
Connection-ID (Octet 3~33)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0 Connection-ID 1
0
0
0
1 Connection-ID 2
0
0
1
0 Connection-ID 3
:
:
1
1
1
1 Connection-ID 16
QoS Number (Octet 4~34)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0 QoS Number 1
0
0
0
1 QoS Number 2
0
0
1
0 QoS Number 3
:
:
1
1
1
1 QoS Number 16
Figure 7.26 QCS Status
A-GN4.00-03-TS
504
7.3.3.19 Scheduling Information
This information element is used to notify scheduling information.
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
0
0
2
3
6
5
4
3
Scheduling Information
0
1
0
0
Scheduling Information Content Length
Scheduling Term
2
1
1
1
Reserved
Active Frame
4
Active Frame
5
Scheduling Term (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
1 TDMA frame
0
0
0
1
2 TDMA frames
0
0
1
0
3 TDMA frames
:
:
1
1
1
1
16 TDMA frames
Active Frame (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
-
4
0/1
-
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
Frame 1 not active/active
Frame 2 not active/active
Frame 3 not active/active
Frame 4 not active/active
Frame 5 not active/active
Frame 6 not active/active
Frame 7 not active/active
Frame 8 not active/active
A-GN4.00-03-TS
505
Active Frame (Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
-
4
0/1
-
3
0/1
-
2
0/1
-
1
0/1
Frame 9 not active/active
Frame 10 not active/active
Frame 11 not active/active
Frame 12 not active/active
Frame 13 not active/active
Frame 14 not active/active
Frame 15 not active/active
Frame 16 not active/active
Figure 7.27 Scheduling Information
7.3.3.20 Source BS-info
This information element is used to notify source BS-info before performing handover.
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
0
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
(MSB)
6
5
4
3
Source BS-info
0
1
0
1
Source BS-info Content Length
2
1
0
0
BS-info
BS-info
BS-info
BS-info
BS-info
(LSB)
Figure 7.28 Source BS-info
A-GN4.00-03-TS
506
7.3.3.21 Target BS-info
This information element is used to notify BS-info of handover schedule.
Octet
Bit
1
8
7
0
0
2
3
(MSB)
6
5
4
3
Target BS-info
0
1
0
1
Target BS-info Content Length
2
1
0
1
BS-info
BS-info
4
BS-info
5
BS-info
6
BS-info
7
(LSB)
(Note) This information element is used to notify BS-info before performing handover.
Figure 7.29 Target BS-info
7.3.3.22 MAP Origin
This information element is used to notify MAP origin.
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
0
0
2
3
Map
Timing
6
5
4
3
MAP Origin
0
1
0
1
MAP Origin Content Length
Map Origin
2
1
1
0
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
507
Map Timing (Octet 3)
Bit
8
0 Timing 1
1 Timing 2
Map Origin (Octet 3)
Bit
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
1
1
1
4
0
0
1
3
0
1
0
1
1
SCH 1
SCH 2
SCH 3
:
SCH 32
Figure 7.30 MAP Origin
7.3.3.23 MSID (SC)
This information element is used to notify MSID in Link Setup Request (SC) message. This
information element has particular structure in order to reduce the message size.
Octet
Bit
8
7
6
1
2
0
MSID Indicator
0
0
5
4
3
Protocol version Number
(MSB)
1
MSID
MSID
3
MSID
4
MSID
5
6
2
MSID
(LSB)
Reserved
Start
Indication
A-GN4.00-03-TS
508
Octet
Bit
8
7
6
1
5
4
3
Protocol version Number
MSID Indicator
0
0
1
2
(MSB)
MSID
MSID
4
MSID
5
Bit
8
7
(LSB)
6
1
2
1
MSID
3
Octet
2
0
Reserved
5
4
3
Protocol version Number
MSID Indicator
1
0
(MSB)
2
1
MSID
MSID
3
MSID
4
MSID
5
MSID
6
MSID
7
MSID
8
Protocol Version Number (Octet 1)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
Other
Start
Indication
2
-
(LSB)
Reserved
Start
Indication
1
0/1 Version 1 absent / present
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
509
MSID Indicator (Octet 2)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 34 bits MSID
0
0
1 24 bits MSID
0
1
0 50 bits MSID
Other
Reserved
Start Indication (Octet 6/5/8)
Bit
4
0 Extension function sequence absent
1 Extension function sequence present
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
0
0
2
3
Map
Timing
6
5
4
3
Protocol Version Number
0
1
0
1
MAP Origin Content Length
Map Origin
2
1
1
0
Reserved
Figure 7.31 MSID (SC)
A-GN4.00-03-TS
510
7.3.3.24 Power Report
This information element is used to notify ANCH transmission power margin by MS.
Octet
Bit
1
8
7
0
0
6
5
4
3
Power Report
0
1
0
1
Power Report Content Length
2
2
1
1
1
Transmission Power Margin
3
Transmission Power Margin (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
1
0
1
0
0
Other
(Note) 1dB unit
2
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0 dB
1 dB
:
80 dB
Reserved
Figure 7.32 Power Report
7.3.3.25 Report Indication
This information element is used to indicate of transmitting each CQI Report and Power Report,
or both.
Octet
1
Bit
8
7
0
0
2
3
Report
Indication
Content
6
5
4
3
Report Indication
0
1
1
0
Report Indication Content Length
2
1
0
0
Reserved
A-GN4.00-03-TS
511
Report Indication Content (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
0/1 - CQI Request absent/present
- 0/1 Power Report Request absent/present
Figure 7.33 Report Indication
7.3.3.26 Encryption Key Information
This information element is used to notify encryption key information.
Octet
1
2
Bit
8
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
Encryption Key Information
0
0
1
1
0
0
Encryption Key Information Content Length
1
1
Key Lifetime
6
Key Lifetime (Octet 6)
Key Lifetime notifies MS of encryption key lifetime.
Figure 7.34 Encryption Key Information
7.3.3.27 MIMO Information
This information element is used to negotiate or change MIMO type for ANCH.
Bit
Octet
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
MIMO Information
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
MIMO Information Content Length
2
3
ANCH MIMO
(UL)
ANCH MIMO
(DL)
1
0
SDMA Stream Number
Information
A-GN4.00-03-TS
512
ANCH MIMO (UL) (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
0
0 SISO
0
1 2 layers STBC
1
0 4 layers STBC
1
1 Reserved
ANCH MIMO (DL) (Octet 3)
Bit
6
5
0
0 SISO
0
1 2 layers STBC
1
0 4 layers STBC
1
1 Reserved
SDMA Stream Number Information (Octet 3)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0 Reserved
0
0
0
1 SDMA Stream Number Information = 1
0
0
1
0 SDMA Stream Number Information = 2
:
:
1
1
0
0 SDMA Stream Number Information = 12
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.35 MIMO Information
A-GN4.00-03-TS
513
7.3.3.28 ICH Continuation Transmission Information
This information element is used to start and stop ICH Continuation Transmission .
Octet
1
2
3
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ICH Continuation Transmission Information
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
ICH Continuation Transmission Information Content Length
ICH Transmission Times (UL)
ICH Transmission Times (DL)
ICH Transmission Times (UL) (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0 Once (disable)
0
0
0
1 Twice
0
0
1
0
~
1
0
0
1 10 times
Other
Reserved
ICH Retransmission times (DL) (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0 Once (disable)
0
0
0
1 Twice
0
0
1
0
~
1
0
0
1 10 times
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.36 ICH Continuation Transmission Information
A-GN4.00-03-TS
514
7.3.4 Information Element Rules
7.3.4.1 Error process
This section describes about error processing of messages and information elements in Access
Establishment Phase Control.
7.3.4.1.1 Protocol Identifier
When the message which has not protocol identifier “Access Establishment Phase Control” is
received, receiver shall ignore the message.
7.3.4.1.2 Incomplete message
When the message of which actual length is shorter than expected is received, receiver shall
ignore the message.
7.3.4.1.3 Unexpected message type or message sequence error
When unexpected message is received, receiver shall ignore the message and no state transition
occurs.
7.3.4.1.4 Mandatory information element error
7.3.4.1.4.1 Missing mandatory information element
When the message which does not include mandatory information element(s) is received,
receiver shall ignore the message and no state transition occurs.
7.3.4.1.4.2 Invalid mandatory information element
When the message which includes invalid mandatory information element(s) is received, the
message shall be ignored at reception side, and no state transition carried out.
When the message which has longer data length than expected one is received, reception side
shall ignore extra content(s).
When the message which has shorter data length than expected one is received, the message is
identified as a message which contains contents error.
7.3.4.1.4.3 Unexpected mandatory information element
A-GN4.00-03-TS
515
When the message which has unexpected mandatory information element(s) is received, receiver
shall ignore the unexpected information element(s).
Other information elements shall be adopted if they are expected ones.
7.3.4.1.4.4 Unrecognized mandatory information element
When the message which has unrecognized mandatory information element(s) is received,
receiver shall ignore the unrecognized information element(s).
Other information elements shall be adopted if they are recognized one.
7.3.4.1.5 Optional information element error
When a message which contains one or more invalid optional information elements is received,
receiver acts only for information elements which contains valid contents.
When a information element which has longer content length than expected one is received, the
information element is valid until the content length which is expected.
When a information element which has shorter content length than expected one is received, the
information is recognized as error information element.
7.3.4.2 Information elements order
This section describes about the order of each information element for message transmission and
reception, as follows.
<In case of message transmission>
Information elements are set from smaller information element code. Single octet information
element is judged by filling the lower four bits with zero.
< In case of message reception >
Receiver does not care information element order.
(Note) Even if reception information elements are not set from smaller information element code,
receiver always recognize as correct information elements.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
516
7.3.4.3 Duplicated information elements
This section describes about the operation when duplicated information elements are set in the
message, as follows.
<In case of message reception>
Receiver shall process only acceptable duplicated information elements from the top, and ignore
subsequent unacceptable duplicated information elements.
(Note) The number of duplication of information elements is only one in the current standard.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
517
Chapter 8 Sequence
8.1 Overview
In this section, the standard control sequences between BS and MS are described. The names of
messages transmitted and received between MS and BS are defined in Chapter 7.
8.2 Sequence
8.2.1 Outgoing Call
Figure 8.1 shows sequence of an outgoing call.
The control order is as follows:
[1]LCH Assignment Request and Response
MS requests LCH assignment by transmitting “LCH assignment request“ message on TCCH to
BS, and BS assigns a LCH by sending/transmitting “LCH assignment response” message on
SCCH.
[2] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. MS notifies the start of
communication by sending/transmitting “link setup request” message when it judges that the
assigned channel is not interfered and available. MS also notifies BS the communication ability,
MSID etc in this message. BS notifies MS the function to use in this communication by
sending/transmitting “link setup response” message.
[3] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified by “extension function request and response” message.
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when this message is necessary.
[4] Connection Request
MS notifies the type of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is outgoing
call.
[5] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in this
sequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[6] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[7] Connection Response
BS notifies MS Connection-ID, QCS information, etc.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
518
MS
BS
Idle or Sleep State
LCH Assignment Request
TCCH
LCH Assignment Response
SCCH
Link Setup Request
ICCH
ICCH
Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request
ICCH
Extension Function Response
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Request (outgoing call) EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (1)
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Authentication Information (2)
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Encryption Key Indication
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Connection Response
(Note 3)
(Note 3)
(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 4) (Note 5)
Active State
Communication
Figure 8.1 Outgoing Call Sequence
Note 1 When these control messages are transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the
MAC header is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
Note 3 This message is optional.
Note 4 When connection type is outgoing call with location registration, the sequence becomes a
similar sequence with that of an outgoing call. At this time, the result of location registration
is notified with “connection response” message.
Note 5 In case of having received Connection Response message including MSID information
element, MS shall use temporary ID value which is set in MSID information element
afterwards.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
519
8.2.2 Incoming Call
Figure 8.2 shows incoming call sequence.
The control order is as follows:
[1] Paging and LCH Assignment Request and Response
Paging message is sent on PCH from BS. MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending
“LCH assignment request“ message on TCCH, and BS assigns a LCH by sending “LCH
assignment response” message on SCCH.
[2] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. MS notifies the start of
communication by sending “Link Setup Request” message when it judges that this assigned
channel is not interfered and available. In this message, MS also notifies BS of the
communication ability, MSID etc. BS notifies MS the function to use in this communication by
sending “link setup response” message.
[3] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified with “extension function request and response” message.
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when this message is necessary.
[4] Connection Request
MS notifies the type of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is an incoming
call.
[5] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in this
sequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[6] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[7] Connection Response
BS notifies MS Connection-ID, QCS information, etc.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
520
MS
BS
Idle or Sleep State
Paging
LCH Assignment Request
PCH
TCCH
LCH Assignment Response
SCCH
Link Setup Request
ICCH
ICCH
Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request
Extension Function Response
Connection Request (incoming)
Authentication Information (1)
Authentication Information (2)
Encryption Key Indication
Connection Response
ICCH
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1)
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1) (Note 2)
ICCH/ ACCH (Note 1) (Note 2)
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1)
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1) (Note 3)
Active State
Communication
Figure 8.2 Incoming Call Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
Note 3 In case of having received Connection Response message including MSID information
element, MS shall use temporary ID value which is set in MSID information element
afterwards.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
521
8.2.3 Release
8.2.3.1 Connection Release
8.2.3.1.1 Connection Release from MS
Figure 8.3 shows the sequence of connection release from MS.
“connection release” message is used when connection-ID is released.
MS
BS
Active State
Communication
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1)
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Release Acknowledgement EDCH/CDCH (Note 1) (Note 2)
Connection Release
Idle or Sleep State
Figure 8.3 Connection Release from MS Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 In case of having received Connection Release Acknowledgement message including
MSID information element, MS shall use temporary ID value which is set in MSID
information element afterwards.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
522
8.2.3.1.2 Connection Release from BS
Figure 8.4 shows the sequence of connection release from BS. “connection release” message is
used when connection-ID is released.
MS
BS
Active State
Communication
ICCH/ ACCH
(Note 1) (Note 2)
EDCH/CDCH
Connection Release
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Release Acknowledge EDCH/CDCH (Note 1)
Idle or Sleep State
Figure 8.4 Connection release from BS Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 In case of having received Connection Release message including MSID information
element, MS shall use temporary ID value which is set in MSID information element
afterwards.
8.2.3.2 QCS Release
8.2.3.2.1 QCS Release Triggered by MS
Figure 8.5 shows the sequence of QCS release triggered by MS.
“QCS release” message is used when QCS information is released.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
523
MS
BS
Active State
Communication
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note)
ICCH/ ACCH
QCS Release Acknowledgement EDCH/CDCH (Note)
QCS Release
Idle State
Figure 8.5 QCS Release Triggered by MS Sequence
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.
8.2.3.2.2 QCS Release Triggered by BS
Figure 8.6 shows the sequence of QCS release triggered by BS.
When QCS is released, “QCS release” message is used.
MS
BS
Active State
Communication
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
QCS Release Acknowledgement EDCH/CDCH
QCS Release
(Note)
(Note)
Idle State
Figure 8.6 QCS Release Triggered by BS Sequence
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
524
8.2.4 Location Registration
Figure 8.7 shows the location registration sequence. Location registration is activated when MS
moves to others paging area, or is powered at a different paging area. Home Location Register
(HLR) control in network executes the location registration control. MS sends the location
registration data on ICCH before the call connection. The control order is as follows:
[1]LCH Assignment Request and Response
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request“ message on TCCH,
and BS assigns a LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message on SCCH.
[2] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. MS notifies the start of
communication by sending “link setup request” message when it judges that this assigned
channel is not interfered and available. In this message, MS also notifies BS of the
communication ability, MSID etc. BS notifies MS the function to use in this communication by
sending “link setup response” message.
[3] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified with “extension function request and response” message.
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when this message is necessary.
[4] Connection Request
MS notifies the kind of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is “location
registration”.
[5] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in this
sequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[6] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[7] Connection Response
Connection-ID is omitted and the result of location registration is notified in a “connection
response” message. Moreover, cause value in cause information element is set to no
connection-ID, and connection is disconnected.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
525
MS
BS
Idle or Sleep State
LCH Assignment Request
TCCH
LCH Assignment Response
SCCH
Link Setup Request
ICCH
ICCH
Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request
ICCH
Extension Function Response
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Request (location registration) EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Authentication Information (1)
ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (2)
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Response (location registration) EDCH/CDCH
(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1) (Note 3)
Idle or Sleep State
Figure 8.7 Location Registration Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
Note 3 Connection-ID is omitted when the result of location registration is notified. In addition,
cause value in cause information element is set to no connection-ID and connection is
disconnected.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
526
8.2.5 ANCH/CSCH Switching
8.2.5.1 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by MS
Figure 8.8 shows the sequence of ANCH/CSCH switching sequence triggered by MS.
When BS receives “ANCH/CSCH switching request” message, it transmits “ANCH/CSCH
switching indication” message to MS and MS performs required functions as channel switching,
ICH Continuation Transmission and MIMO.
BS
Original
Channel
MS
Added
Channel
Communication
Active State
ANCH/CSCH Switching Request
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
(Note 1) (Note
3)
(Note 1) (Note
3)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
Active State
Communication
Figure 8.8 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by MS Sequence
Note 1 This message is transmitted on by ICCH, while communicating in FM-Mode. This
message is transmitted on ACCH or CDCH while communicating in QS-Mode.
Note 2 This message is mandatory when communicating in ANCH/CSCH scheduling mode
(intermittent transmission).
Note 3 When ICH Continuation Transmission is required, ICH Continuation Transmission
Information should be set.
Note 4 When MIMO is supported, MIMO Information should be set.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
527
8.2.5.2 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by BS
Figure 8.9 shows the sequence of ANCH/CSCH switching sequence triggered by BS.
BS transmits “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message to MS When it detects the
communication quality degradation and MS performs required functions as channel switching,
ICH Continuation Transmission and MIMO.
BS
Original
Channel
MS
Added
Channel
Communication
Active State
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
(Note 1) (Note 3)
(Note 4)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
Active State
Communication
Figure 8.9 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by BS Sequence
Note 1 This message is transmitted on ICCH while communicating in FM-Mode. This message is
transmitted on ACCH or CDCH while communicating in QS-Mode.
Note 2 This message is mandatory when communicating in ANCH/CSCH scheduling mode
(intermittent transmission).
Note 3 When ICH Continuation Transmission is required, ICH Continuation Transmission
Information should be set.
Note 4 When MIMO is supported, MIMO Information should be set.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
528
8.2.5.3 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection
Figure 8.10 shows the sequence of ANCH/CSCH switching rejection sequence.
BS transmits “ANCH/CSCH switching rejection” message to MS when BS receive “ANCH/CSCH
switching request“ message from MS.
BS
Original
Channel
MS
Added
Channel
Communication
Active State
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection
ICCH/ACCH (Note 1) (Note
EDCH/CDCH 2)
ICCH/ACCH
(Note 1)
EDCH/CDCH
Active State
Communication
Figure 8.10 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection Sequence
Note 1 This message is transmitted on ICCH while communicating in FM-Mode. This message is
transmitted on with ACCH or CDCH while communicating in QS-Mode.
Note 2 When ICH Continuation Transmission is required, ICH Continuation Transmission
Information should be set.
Note 3 When MIMO is supported, MIMO Information should be set.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
529
8.2.5.4 ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request
Figure 8.11 shows the sequence of “ANCH/CSCH switching re-request” message triggered by
BS.
BS sends “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message to MS when it detects the communication
quality degradation transmits. MS then transmits “ANCH/CSCH switching re-request” message
instead of performing channel switching.
BS
Original
Channel
MS
Added
Channel
Communication
Active State
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
(Note 1) (Note
3)
(Note 1) (Note
3)
(Note 1) (Note
3)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
Active State
Communication
Figure 8.11 ANCH Switching Re-request Sequence
Note 1 This message is transmitted on ICCH while communicating in FM-Mode. This message is
transmitted on ACCH or CDCH while communicating in QS-Mode.
Note 2 This message is mandatory when communicating in ANCH/CSCH scheduling mode
(intermittent transmission).
Note 3 When ICH Continuation Transmission is required, ICH Continuation Transmission
Information should be set.
Note 4 When MIMO is supported, MIMO Information should be set.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
530
8.2.6 Handover
8.2.6.1 Normal Handover Triggered by BS
Figure 8.12 shows the normal handover sequence triggered by BS.
The control order is as follows:
[1] ANCH/CSCH Switching Request and Response
BS sends “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message and indicates handover on detecting
the communication quality degradation. MS shuts down the power and conduct transmission
on receiving “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message.
[2]LCH Assignment Request and Response
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH,
and BS assigns a LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message on SCCH.
[3] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. MS notifies start of the
communication by sending “link setup request” message when it judges that this assigned
channel is not interfered and available. In this message, MS also notifies BS of the
communication ability, MSID etc. BS notifies MS of the function to use in this communication
by sending “link setup response” message.
[4] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified with “extension function request and response” message.
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when necessary.
[5] Connection Request
MS notifies the type of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is handover.
[6] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in this
sequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[7] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[8] Connection Response
BS notifies MS of Connection-ID, QCS information, etc.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
531
MS
Old channel New channel
Serving BS
Target BS
Communication
Active
State
Idle
State
Idle
State
ICCH/ ACCH
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication EDCH/CDCH
LCH Assignment Request
TCCH
LCH Assignment Response
SCCH
Link Setup Request
ICCH
Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request
ICCH
Extension Function Response
Connection Request (Handover)
Authentication Information (1)
Authentication Information (2)
Encryption Key Indication
Connection Response
ICCH
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Active
State
Communication
Figure 8.12 Normal Handover Triggered by BS Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
532
8.2.6.2 Normal Handover Triggered by MS
Figure 8.13 shows the normal handover sequence triggered by MS.
The control order is as follows:
[1] ANCH/CSCH Switching Request and Response
MS sends “ANCH/CSCH switching request“ message when it detects the communication
quality degradation, and BS indicates handover by sending “ANCH/CSCH switching
indication“ message. MS shuts down the power and conduct transmission on receiving
“ANCH/CSCH switching indication“ message.
[2] LCH Assignment Request and Response
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request“ message on TCCH,
and BS assigns a LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message on SCCH.
[3] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. When MS notifies the start of
communication by sending “link setup request” message when it judges that this assigned
channel is not interfered and available. In this message, MS also notifies BS of the
communication ability, MSID etc. BS notifies MS of the function to use in this communication
by sending “link setup response” message.
[4] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified with “extension function request and response” message.
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when necessary.
[5] Connection Request
MS notifies the type of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is handover.
[6] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in this
sequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[7] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[8] Connection Response
BS notifies MS Connection-ID, QCS information, etc.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
533
MS
Old Channel New Channel
Serving BS
Target BS
Communication
Active
State
Idle
State
Idle
State
ICCH/ ACCH
ANCH/CSCH Switching Request EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication EDCH/CDCH
LCH Assignment Request
TCCH
LCH Assignment Response
SCCH
Link Setup Request
ICCH
Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request
ICCH
ICCH
Extension Function Response
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Request (Handover) EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (1)
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (2)
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Encryption Key Indication
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Connection Response
(Note 3)
(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Active
State
Communication
Figure 8.13 Normal Handover Triggered by MS Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
Note 3 Normal handover is performed when MS cannot find any target BS-info or communication
quality degradation.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
534
8.2.6.3 Seamless Handover
Figure 8.14 shows the seamless handover sequence.
The control order is as follows:
[1]TDMA Slot Limitation Request
To search BS in the surrounding, MS transmits “TDMA slot limitation request“ message to BS
and makes the slot vacant. Then MS searches for other BSs in the surrounding.
[2] ANCH/CSCH Switching Request and Response
MS sends “ANCH/CSCH switching request“ message and indicates target BS to serving BS.
Serving BS requests slot to target BS, and target BS responds slot to serving BS. Serving BS
then sends “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message to MS and indicates handover to
target BS.
[3] LCH Assignment Request and Response
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request“ message on TCCH,
and BS assigns a LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message on SCCH.
[4] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. MS notifies the start of
communication by sending “link setup request” message when it judges that this assigned
channel is not interfered and available. In this message, MS also notifies BS of the
communication ability, MSID etc. BS notifies MS of the function to use in this communication
by sending “link setup response” message.
[5] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified with “extension function request and response” message
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when necessary.
[6] Connection Request
MS notifies the type of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is handover.
[7] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in this
sequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[8] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[9] Connection Response
BS notifies MS of Connection-ID, QCS information, etc.
[10]Connection Release
After MS performed handover and transited to the active state, MS or BS sends “connection
release” message and radio connection is released.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
535
MS
Old Channel New Channel
Serving BS
Target BS
Communication
Active
State
Idle
State
TDMA Slot Limitation Request
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
(Note 1)
ICCH/ ACCH
ANCH/CSCH Switching Request (Target BS-Info) EDCH/CDCH (Note 3)
Slot Request
ICCH/ ACCH Slot Response
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication EDCH/CDCH
LCH Assignment Request
TCCH
LCH Assignment Response
SCCH
Link Setup Request
ICCH
Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request
ICCH
Extension Function Response
Connection Request (Handover)
Authentication Information (1)
Authentication Information (2)
Encryption Key Indication
Connection Response
ICCH
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Active
State
Communication
Connection Release
ICCH/
EDCH/CDCH
(Note 1) (Note 4)
Idle
State
Figure 8.14 Seamless Handover Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with DCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is set as 00 or
A-GN4.00-03-TS
536
01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
Note 3 Seamless handover is done when there is target BS-info and the communication quality
degrades.
Note 4 After MS performed handover and transit to active state, MS or BS sends “connection
release” message and radio connection is released.
8.2.7 Link Channel Establishment
8.2.7.1 Link Channel Assignment
Figure 8.15 shows LCH assignment response sequence.
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH.
BS sends “LCH assignment response” message on SCCH when it cannot assign LCH.
MS
BS
LCH Assignment Request
LCH Assignment Response
TCCH
SCCH
Figure 8.15 Link Channel Assignment Response Sequence
8.2.7.2 Link Channel Assignment Standby
Figure 8.16 shows LCH assignment request, standby and response sequence.
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH, when BS
cannot assign LCH temporarily, BS suspends assignment of LCH, and BS sends “LCH
assignment standby” message on SCCH. When BS is ready to assign LCH, BS assigns LCH by
“LCH assignment response” message SCCH.
MS
BS
LCH Assignment Request
LCH Assignment Standby
TCCH
SCCH
LCH Assignment Response
SCCH
Access Establishment Phase
Figure 8.16 Link Channel Assignment Standby Sequence
A-GN4.00-03-TS
537
8.2.7.3 Link Channel Re-request Sequence
Figure 8.17 shows LCH assignment re-request sequence.
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH.
After BS assigns LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message, MS sends “LCH
assignment re-request” message when it requests the assigned LCH to change to another LCH
(e.g.: DL carrier sensing NG, etc). Then, BS assigns another LCH by sending “LCH assignment
response” message.
MS
BS
LCH Assignment Request
LCH Assignment Response
LCH Assignment Re-request
LCH Assignment Response
TCCH
SCCH
SCCH
SCCH
Access Establishment Phase
Figure 8.17 Link Channel Assignment Re-request Sequence
8.2.7.4 Link Channel Request Standby and Link Channel Assignment Re-request
Figure 8.18 shows LCH request standby and LCH assignment re-request sequence.
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH.
BS suspends assignment of LCH when it cannot assign LCH temporarily and sends “LCH
assignment standby” message on SCCH. BS assigns LCH by “LCH assignment response”
message on SCCH when it is ready to assign LCH. When MS requests assigned LCH to change
to other LCH (e.g.: DL carrier sensing NG, etc), MS sends “LCH assignment re-request” message.
BS will then assign another LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message.
MS
BS
LCH Assignment Request
LCH Assignment Standby
LCH Assignment Response
LCH Assignment Re-request
LCH Assignment Response
TCCH
SCCH
SCCH
SCCH
SCCH
Access Establishment Phase
A-GN4.00-03-TS
538
Figure 8.18 Link Channel Assignment Standby and Link Channel Assignment Re-request
Sequence
8.2.7.5 Link Channel Assignment Rejection
Figure 8.19 shows LCH assignment rejection sequence.
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH.
BS sends “LCH assignment reject” message on SCCH when it cannot assign LCH.
MS
BS
LCH Assignment Request
LCH Assignment Reject
TCCH
SCCH
Figure 8.19 Link Channel Assignment Rejection Sequence
A-GN4.00-03-TS
539
8.2.8 Additional QCS
8.2.8.1 Additional QCS
Figure 8.20 shows the additional QCS sequence.
MS sends “additional QCS request” message when it requests new QCS. BS assigns new QCS
by sending “additional QCS response” message.
BS
MS
Additional QCS Request
Additional QCS Response
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
(Note)
Figure 8.20 Additional QCS Sequence
Note BS sends “additional LCH indication” message or “additional QCS response” message
when it received “additional QCS request” message from MS, according to the state of
communication.
8.2.8.2 Additional QCS Request Indication
Figure 8.21 shows the additional QCS request indication sequence.
BS indicate to transmit “additional QCS request” message to MS. MS sends “additional QCS
request” message when it requests new QCS. BS assigns new QCS by sending “additional QCS
response” message.
BS
MS
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional QCS Request Indication EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional QCS Request
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional QCS Response
EDCH/CDCH
(Note)
Figure 8.21 Additional QCS Request Indication Sequence
Note BS sends “additional LCH indication” message or “additional QCS response” message
when it received “additional QCS request” message from MS, according to the state of
communication.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
540
8.2.8.3 Additional QCS Rejection
Figure 8.22 shows additional QCS rejection sequence.
MS sends “additional QCS request” message when it requests new QCS. BS sends “additional
QCS rejection” message as response when it cannot assign specified QCS.
BS
MS
Additional QCS Request
Additional QCS Rejection
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Figure 8.22 Additional QCS Sequence
8.2.8.4 Additional QCS with Extra LCH
Figure 8.23 the sequence to obtain the additional QCS with extra LCH.
MS sends “additional QCS request” message when it requests new QCS. BS sends “additional
LCH indication” message when it needs LCH assignment in order to assign new QCS. MS sends
“additional LCH confirmation” message to new added channel and establishes new LCH. BS then
assigns new QCS on this LCH.
BS
Original
Added
MS
Channel
Channel
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional QCS Request
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional LCH Indication
EDCH/CDCH (Note)
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Additional LCH Confirmation
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional QCS Response
EDCH/CDCH (Note)
Figure 8.23 Additional QCS made through increasing LCH Sequence
Note BS sends “additional LCH indication” message or “additional QCS response” message on
receiving “additional QCS request” message, according to the state of communication.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
541
8.2.8.5 Additional QCS with Re-request of Extra LCH
Figure 8.24 shows the sequence to obtain the additional QCS with re-request of extra LCH.
MS sends “additional QCS request” message when it requests new QCS. BS sends “additional
LCH indication” message when it needs LCH assignment in order to assign new QCS. MS sends
“LCH assignment re-request” message when it requests assigned LCH to change to another LCH
(e.g.: DL carrier sensing NG, etc). Then, BS assigns another LCH by sending “LCH assignment
response” message. MS sends “additional LCH confirmation” message to new added channel
and establishes new LCH. BS then assigns new QCS on this LCH.
Original
Channel
MS
Additional QCS Request
Additional LCH Indication
Additional QCS Re-request
Additional LCH Indication
Additional LCH Confirmation
Additional QCS Response
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
BS
Added
Channel
(Note)
(Note)
(Note)
(Note)
(Note)
(Note)
Figure 8.24 Additional QCS with Re-request of Extra LCH Sequence
Note BS sends “additional LCH indication” message or “additional QCS response” message, on
receiving “additional QCS request” message, according to the state of communication.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
542
8.2.9 Status Check
Status check is used to check Connection-ID and QCS-ID in BS and MS.
8.2.9.1 QCS Status Check Triggered by MS
Figure 8.25 shows status check triggered by MS sequence.
MS sends “QCS status enquiry request” message to BS to check the status, and BS answers the
status by sending “QCS status enquiry response” message.
MS
BS
QCS Status Enquiry Request
QCS Status Enquiry Response
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note)
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note)
Figure 8.25 QCS Status Check Triggered by MS
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.
8.2.9.2 QCS Status Check Triggered by BS
Figure 8.26 shows status check triggered by BS sequence.
BS sends “QCS status enquiry request” message to MS to check the status, and MS answers the
status by sending “QCS status enquiry response” message.
BS
MS
QCS Status Enquiry Request
QCS Status Enquiry Response
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
(Note)
(Note)
Figure 8.26 QCS Status Check Sequence Triggered by BS
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.
8.2.10 CQI Transmission
A-GN4.00-03-TS
543
8.2.10.1 CQI Report
Figure 8.27 shows CQI report from MS sequence. MS sends “CQI report” message to BS
autonomously.
MS
BS
CQI Report
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
(Note)
Figure 8.27 CQI Report Sequence
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.
8.2.10.2 CQI Report Indication
Figure 8.28 shows “CQI request” message from BS sequence.
BS sends “CQI report indication” message to MS, and MS answers the CQI by sending “CQI
report” message.
BS
MS
CQI Report Indication
CQI Report
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
(Note)
(Note)
Figure 8.28 CQI Report Indication Sequence
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.
8.3 Radio Connection Management Sequence
The radio connection management sequence is optional.
Radio connection control includes the following main functions:
 Paging;
 Establishment/ modification/ release of Radio connection, including e.g.
assignment/ modification of MS identity, establishment/ modification/ release of
SRB1 and SRB2, access class barring;
 Initial security activation, i.e. initial configuration of AS integrity protection (CP)
and AS ciphering (CP, UP);
A-GN4.00-03-TS
544





Radio connection mobility including e.g. intra-frequency and inter-frequency
handover, associated security handling, i.e. key and/ or algorithm change,
specification of radio context information transferred between network nodes;
Establishment/ modification/ release of RBs carrying user data (DRBs);
Radio configuration control including e.g. assignment/ modification of ARQ
configuration, HARQ configuration, DRX configuration;
QoS control including assignment/ modification of semi-persistent configuration
information for DL and UL, assignment/ modification of parameters for UL rate
control in the MS, i.e. allocation of a priority and a prioritised bit rate (PBR) for
each RB;
Recovery from radio link failure;
8.3.1 Paging
MS
BS
Paging
Figure 8.29 Paging
The paging information is provided to upper layers, which in response may initiate Radio
connection establishment, e.g. to receive an incoming call.
BS initiates the paging procedure by transmitting the Paging message at the MS's paging
occasion. BS may address multiple MSs. BS may also indicate a change of system information in
the Paging message.
8.3.2 Radio connection establishment
A-GN4.00-03-TS
545
MS
BS
Radio ConnectionRequest
Radio ConnectionSetup
Radio ConnectionSetupComplete
Figure 8.30 Radio connection establishment
The purpose of this procedure is to establish an Radio connection. Radio connection
establishment involves SRB1 establishment.
Upon initiation of the procedure, the MS shall check ACB:

SIBB1 provides cellBarred indicator; no timer. Used before camp.

SIbb2 provides OriginatingCalls / EmergencyCalls and Originating
Signaling ’s ACB.


mobile terminating access is always allowed except for T302 running.
if access to cell is barred, MS shall inform upper layers about the failure to
establish the Radio connection and that access barring is applicable

if barring alleviation, MS shall inform upper layers about it.
The Radio connection Request message includes a MS Identity, establishment Cause for BS to
identify whether it is emergency connection and the priority of the requested connection.
The Radio connection Setup message includes the dedicated radio resource configuration for the
radio connection, which may includes the radio bearer ids and corresponding configurations to be
added and released,and the configuration for MAC layer.
8.3.2.1 Radio connectionSetupComplete
The Radio connectionSetupComplete message includes possible registered core network
information, etc.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
546
8.3.3 Radio connection reconfiguration
MS
BS
RadioConnectionReconfiguration
RadioConnectionReconfigurationComplete
Figure 8.31 Radio connection reconfiguration, successful
The purpose of this procedure is to modify an Radio connection, e.g. to establish/ modify/ release
RBs, to perform handover, to setup/ modify/ release measurements.
BS may initiate the Radio connection reconfiguration procedure to a MS in ACTIVE MODE. BS
applies the procedure as follows:
- the mobilityControlInfo is included only when AS-security has been activated, and SRB2 with
at least one DRB are setup and not suspended;
- the establishment of RBs (other than SRB1, that is established during Radio connection
establishment) is included only when AS security has been activated.
The Radio connectionReconfiguration message includes the possible measurement configuration,
possible mobility information and possible dedicated radio resource configuration, and may
includes the security information for handover.
The Radio connectionReconfigurationComplete message is just a message for confirmation, not
including the meaningful content.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
547
8.3.4 Radio connection re-establishment
MS
BS
RadioConnectionReestablishmentRequest
RadioConnectionReestablishment
RadioConnectionReestablishmentComplete
Figure 8.32 Radio connection re-establishment, successful
The purpose of this procedure is to re-establish the Radio connection, which involves the
resumption of SRB1 operation and the re-activation of security.
A MS in ACTIVE MODE, for which security has been activated, may initiate the procedure in
order to continue the Radio connection. The connection re-establishment succeeds only if the
concerned cell is prepared i.e. has a valid MS context. In case BS accepts the re-establishment,
SRB1 operation resumes while the operation of other radio bearers remains suspended. If AS
security has not been activated, the MS does not initiate the procedure but instead moves to
IDLE MODE directly.
BS applies the procedure as follows:
- to reconfigure SRB1 and to resume data transfer only for this RB;
- to re-activate AS security without changing algorithms.
The MS shall only initiate the procedure when AS security has been activated. The MS initiates
the procedure when one of the following conditions is met:
- upon detecting radio link failure; or
- upon handover failure; or
- upon integrity check failure indication from lower layers; or
- upon an Radio connection reconfiguration failure;
Upon initiation of the procedure, the MS shall:
- stop timer T310, if running;
- start timer T311;
A-GN4.00-03-TS
548
- suspend all RBs except SRB0;
- reset MSL1;
- apply the default physical channel configuration;
- apply the default semi-persistent scheduling configuration;
- apply the default MSL1main configuration;
- perform cell selection in accordance with the cell selection process;
The Radio connectionReestablishmentReques message includes a MS Identity, reestablishment
Cause for BS to identify whether it is due to reconfiguration Failure, handover Failure, or other
Failure.
The Radio connectionReestablishment message includes the dedicated radio resource
configuration for the radio connection, which may includes the radio bearer ids and corresponding
configurations to be added and released,and the configuration for MAC layer.
The Radio connectionReestablishmentComplete message is just a message for confirmation, not
including the meaningful content.
8.3.5 Radio connection release
MS
BS
Radio ConnectionRelease
Figure 8.33 Radio connection release, successful
The purpose of this procedure is to release the Radio connection, which includes the release of
the established radio bearers as well as all radio resources.
BS initiates the Radio connection release procedure to a MS in ACTIVE MODE.
The Radio connection Release message includes the release cause, possibly Redirected Carrier
Information and possibly Mobility Control Information for Idle Mode.
8.3.6 Radio Link Failure
Upon receiving N310 consecutive "out of sync" indications from lower layers , start timer T310
(T1).
A-GN4.00-03-TS
549
upon T310 expiry, consider radio link failure to be detected. If AS security has not been activated,
start T311(T2) and initiate the connection re-establishment procedure .
Upon T311 expiry, the MS shall perform the actions upon leaving ACTIVE MODE.
8.4 Optional Mobility sequence
Measurements to be performed by a MS for mobility are classified:
- Intra-frequency BS measurements;
- Inter-frequency BS measurements;
For each measurement type one or several measurement objects can be defined (a
measurement object defines e.g. the carrier frequency to be monitored).
For each measurement object one or several reporting configurations can be defined (a reporting
configuration defines the reporting criteria). Three reporting criteria are used: event triggered
reporting, periodic reporting and event triggered periodic reporting.
The association between a measurement object and a reporting configuration is created by a
measurement identity. By using several measurement identities (one for each measurement
object, reporting configuration pair) it is possible:
To associate several reporting configurations to one measurement object and;
To associate one reporting configuration to several measurement objects.
The measurements identity is as well used when reporting results of the measurements.
Measurement commands are used by BS to order the MS to start measurements, modify
measurements or stop measurements.
In BS ACTIVE MODE state, network-controlled MS-assisted handovers are performed and
various DRX cycles are supported.
In BS IDLE MODE state, cell reselections are performed and DRX is supported.
8.4.1 Mobility Management in IDLE State
8.4.1.1 Cell selection
- The MS may search each carrier in turn (“initial cell selection”) or make use of stored
information to shorten the search (“stored information cell selection”).
- The MS seeks to identify a suitable cell; if it is not able to identify a suitable cell it seeks to
identify an acceptable cell. When a suitable cell is found or if only an acceptable cell is found it
camps on that cell and commence the cell reselection procedure:
- An acceptable cell is one for which the measured cell attributes satisfy the cell selection criteria
A-GN4.00-03-TS
550
and the cell is not barred;
Transition to IDLE MODE:
- On transition from ACTIVE MODE to IDLE MODE, a MS should camp on the last cell for which
it was in ACTIVE MODE or a cell/any cell of set of cells or frequency be assigned by radio
connection aignalling in the state transition message.
Recovery from out of coverage:
- The MS should attempt to find a suitable cell in the manner described for stored information or
initial cell selection above. If no suitable cell is found on any frequency or RAT the MS should
attempt to find an acceptable cell.
8.4.1.2 Cell reselection
MS in IDLE MODE performs cell reselection. The principles of the procedure are the following:
- The MS makes measurements of attributes of the serving and neighbour cells to enable the
reselection process:
- There is no need to indicate neighbouring cell in the serving cell system information to enable
the MS to search and measure a cell i.e. BS relies on the MS to detect the neighbouring cells;
- For the search and measurement of inter-frequency neighbouring cells, only the carrier
frequencies need to be indicated;
- Measurements may be omitted if the serving cell attribute fulfils particular search or
measurement criteria.
- Cell reselection identifies the cell that the MS should camp on. It is based on cell reselection
criteria which involves measurements of the serving and neighbour cells:
- Intra-frequency reselection is based on ranking of cells;
- For inter-frequency neighbouring cells, it is possible to indicate layer-specific cell reselection
parameters (e.g., layer specific offset). These parameters are common to all neighbouring cells
on a frequency;
- An NCL can be provided by the serving cell to handle specific cases for intra- and
inter-frequency neighbouring cells. This NCL contains cell specific cell reselection parameters
(e.g., cell specific offset) for specific neighbouring cells;
- Black lists can be provided to prevent the MS from reselecting to specific intra- and
inter-frequency neighbouring cells;
- Cell reselection can be speed dependent;
- Cell reselection parameters are applicable for all MSs in a cell, but it is possible to configure
A-GN4.00-03-TS
551
specific reselection parameters per MS group or per MS.
- Cell access restrictions, which consist of access class (AC) barring and cell reservation (e.g. for
cells "reserved for operator use") applicable for mobiles in idle state.
8.4.2 Mobility Management in active state
8.4.2.1 General
The Mobility Support for MSs in active state handles all necessary steps for relocation/handover
procedures, like processes that precede the final HO decision on the source network side (control
and evaluation of MS and BS measurements taking into account certain MS specific area
restrictions), preparation of resources on the target network side, commanding the MS to the new
radio resources and finally releasing resources on the (old) source network side. It contains
mechanisms to transfer context data between BSs, and to update node relations on C-plane and
U-plane.
In active state, BS-controlled MS-assisted handovers are performed and various DRX cycles
are supported:
The MS makes measurements of attributes of the serving and neighbour cells to enable the
process:
- There is no need to indicate neighbouring cell to enable the MS to search and measure a cell
i.e. BS relies on the MS to detect the neighbouring cells;
- For the search and measurement of inter-frequency neighbouring cells, at least the carrier
frequencies need to be indicated;
- Network signals reporting criteria for event-triggered and periodical reporting;
- An NCL can be provided by the serving cell by radio connection dedicated signaling to handle
specific cases for intra- and inter-frequency neighbouring cells. This NCL contains cell specific
measurement parameters (e.g. cell specific offset) for specific neighbouring cells;
- Black lists can be provided to prevent the MS from measuring specific neighbouring cells.
Depending on whether the MS needs transmission/reception gaps to perform the relevant
measurements, measurements are classified as gap assisted or non-gap assisted. A non-gap
assisted measurement is a measurement on a cell that does not require transmission/reception
gaps to allow the measurement to be performed. A gap assisted measurement is a measurement
on a cell that does require transmission/reception gaps to allow the measurement to be
performed. Gap patterns (as opposed to individual gaps) are configured and activated by radio
connection.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
552
8.4.2.2 Handover
MS
Serving BS
Target BS
Channel
Communication
Active
State
Measurement Control
Measurement report
ADCCH
ADCCH
ADCCH Handover Request
Handover Request
RConnection Reconf. Including mobility control
ACK
information
SN Status Transfer
Synchronization
ADCCH
UL Allocation & TA
ADCCH
RConnection Recof. Complete
ADCCH
MS Context
Release
Communication
Figure 8.34 BS HO
Below is a more detailed description of the BS HO procedure, as shown in Figure 8.34:
0 The MS context within the source BS contains information regarding roaming restrictions which
where provided either at connection establishment or at the last TA update.
1 The source BS configures the MS measurement procedures according to the area restriction
information. Measurements provided by the source BS may assist the function controlling the
MS's connection mobility.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
553
2 MS is triggered to send MEASUREMENT REPORT by the rules set by i.e. system information,
specification etc.
3 Source BS makes decision based on MEASUREMENT REPORT and RRM information to hand
off MS.
4 The source BS issues a HANDOVER REQUEST message to the target BS to prepare the HO at
the target side.
5 Admission Control may be performed by the target BS dependent on the received E-RAB QoS
information to increase the likelihood of a successful HO, if the resources can be granted by target
BS.
6 Target BS prepares HO with L1/L2 and sends the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE to
the source BS.
7 The target BS generates the radio connection message to perform the handover, i.e Radio
connectionReconfiguration message including the mobilityControlInformation, to be sent by the
source BS towards the MS. The source BS performs the necessary integrity protection and
ciphering of the message.
8 The source BS sends the SN STATUS TRANSFER message to the target BS to convey the
uplink MSL 3 SN receiver status and the downlink MSL 3 SN transmitter status for which MSL 3
status preservation applies. The uplink MSL 3 SN receiver status includes at least the MSL 3 SN
of the first missing UL SDU and may include a bit map of the receive status of the out of sequence
UL SDUs that the MS needs to retransmit in the target cell, if there are any such SDUs. The
downlink MSL 3 SN transmitter status indicates the next MSL 3 SN that the target BS shall assign
to new SDUs, not having a MSL 3 SN yet. The source BS may omit sending this message if none
of the E-RABs of the MS shall be treated with MSL 3 status preservation.
9 After receiving the Radio connection Reconfiguration message including the
mobilityControlInformation , MS performs synchronisation to target BS and accesses the target
cell via ATCCH, following a contention-free procedure if a dedicated ATCCH access sequence
was indicated in the mobilityControlInformation, or following a contention-based procedure if no
dedicated access sequence was indicated. MS derives target BS specific keys and configures the
selected security algorithms to be used in the target cell.
10 The target BS responds with UL allocation and timing advance.
11 When the MS has successfully accessed the target cell, the MS sends the
RadioconnectionReconfigurationComplete message (C-MSID) to confirm the handover, along with
an uplink Buffer Status Report, whenever possible, to the target BS to indicate that the handover
procedure is completed for the MS. The target BS verifies the C-MSID sent in the
RadioconnectionReconfigurationComplete message. The target BS can now begin sending data
to the MS.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
554
12 Upon reception of the MS CONTEXT RELEASE message, the source BS can release radio and
C-plane related resources associated to the MS context. Any ongoing data forwarding may
continue.
8.4.3 Measurements
Measurements to be performed by a MS for intra/inter-frequency mobility can be controlled by BS,
using broadcast or dedicated control. In IDLE MODE state, a MS shall follow the measurement
parameters defined for cell reselection specified by the BS broadcast. The use of dedicated
measurement control for IDLE MODE state is possible through the provision of MS specific priorities .
In ACTIVE MODE state, a MS shall follow the measurement configurations specified by radio
connection signaling directed from the BS.
Intra-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements and inter-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements
are defined as follows:
- Intra-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements: Neighbour cell measurements performed by the
MS are intra-frequency measurements when the current and target cell operates on the same
carrier frequency. The MS shall be able to carry out such measurements without measurement
gaps.
- Inter-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements: Neighbour cell measurements performed by the
MS are inter-frequency measurements when the neighbour cell operates on a different carrier
frequency, compared to the current cell. The MS should not be assumed to be able to carry out
such measurements without measurement gaps.
- Whether a measurement is non gap assisted or gap assisted depends on the MS's capability and
current operating frequency. The MS determines whether a particular cell measurement needs to
be performed in a transmission/reception gap and the scheduler needs to know whether gaps are
needed:
- Same carrier frequency and cell bandwidths (Scenario A): an intra-frequency scenario; not
measurement gap assisted.
- Same carrier frequency, bandwidth of the target cell smaller than the bandwidth of the current cell
(Scenario B): an intra-frequency scenario; not measurement gap assisted.
- Same carrier frequency, bandwidth of the target cell larger than the bandwidth of the current cell
(Scenario C): an intra-frequency scenario; not measurement gap assisted.
- Different carrier frequencies, bandwidth of the target cell smaller than the bandwidth of the current
cell and bandwidth of the target cell within bandwidth of the current cell (Scenario D): an
inter-frequency scenario; measurement gap-assisted scenario.
- Different carrier frequencies, bandwidth of the target cell larger than the bandwidth of the current
A-GN4.00-03-TS
555
cell and bandwidth of the current cell within bandwidth of the target cell (Scenario E): an
inter-frequency scenario; measurement gap-assisted scenario.
- Different carrier frequencies and non-overlapping bandwidth, (Scenario F): an inter-frequency
scenario; measurement gap-assisted scenario.
- Measurement gaps patterns are configured and activated by Radio connection signaling.
8.4.3.1 Intra-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements
In a system with frequency reuse = 1, mobility within the same frequency layer (i.e. between cells
with the same carrier frequency) is predominant. Good neighbour cell measurements are needed for
cells that have the same carrier frequency as the serving cell in order to ensure good mobility
support and easy network deployment. Search for neighbour cells with the same carrier frequency
as the serving cell, and measurements of the relevant quantities for identified cells are needed.
NOTE: To avoid MS activity outside the DRX cycle, the reporting criteria for neighbour cell
measurements should match the used DRX cycle.
8.4.3.2 Inter-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements
Regarding mobility between different frequency layers (i.e. between cells with a different carrier
frequency), MS may need to perform neighbour cell measurements during DL/UL idle periods that
are provided by DRX or packet scheduling.
8.4.3.3 measurement configuration
The measurement configuration includes the following parameters:
1. Measurement objects: The objects on which the MS shall perform the measurements.
- For intra-frequency and inter-frequency measurements a measurement object is a single
carrier frequency. Associated with this carrier frequency, BS can configure a list of cell
specific offsets and a list of ‘blacklisted’ cells. Blacklisted cells are not considered in event
evaluation or measurement reporting.
2. Reporting configurations: A list of reporting configurations where each reporting configuration
consists of the following:
- Reporting criterion: The criterion that triggers the MS to send a measurement report. This
can either be periodical or a single event description.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
556
- Reporting format: The quantities that the MS includes in the measurement report and
associated information (e.g. number of cells to report).
3. Measurement identities: A list of measurement identities where each measurement identity
links one measurement object with one reporting configuration. By configuring multiple
measurement identities it is possible to link more than one measurement object to the same
reporting configuration, as well as to link more than one reporting configuration to the same
measurement object. The measurement identity is used as a reference number in the
measurement report.
4. Quantity configurations: One quantity configuration is configured for intra-frequency
measurements, one for inter-frequency measurements and one per RAT type. The quantity
configuration defines the measurement quantities and associated filtering used for all event
evaluation and related reporting of that measurement type. One filter can be configured per
measurement quantity.
5. Measurement gaps: Periods that the MS may use to perform measurements, i.e. no (UL, DL)
transmissions are scheduled.
8.4.3.4 Measurement reporting
MS
BS
MeasurementReport
Figure 8.35 Measurement reporting
The purpose of this procedure is to transfer measurement results from the MS to BS , as shown in
Figure 8.35.
For the measId for which the measurement reporting procedure was triggered, the MS shall set the
measResults within the MeasurementReport message, and submit the MeasurementReport
message to lower layers for transmission, upon which the procedure ends.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
557
Chapter 9 Access Phase
9.1 Overview
In this chapter, service channel specification in access phase is described. This is the phase after
the establishment of access and the phase for several communication controls and the
communication service. Voice and data communication is realized by the service channel on those
established radio link channel. Section 9.5 - 9.7 are written for reference, and supplementary
information.
9.2 Retransmission Control Method
9.2.1 ARQ
9.2.1.1 Procedure of ARQ
PHY layer recognizes the PHY data unit (CRC section) for every user based on the information on
the PRU assigned by MAC layer. ARQ is performed by the PHY data unit. This section describes
(selective repeat) SR type ARQ. In SR type ARQ, a resending control part resends the error data in
the following procedure: The receiving side will transmit NACK if CRC error is detected after
receiving data. The transmitting side recognizes the reason by which the error has occurred and
resends the data.
9.2.1.2 Setting the Timing for Transmission of the ACK Field in CDCH
Figure 9.1 shows the send timing of ACK. The ACK field is set at 7.5 ms after CDCH received data.
CDCH
5 ms
Down
Time
Up
Error confirmation is carried out by CRC and
ACK /NACK is returned.
Figure 9.1 ACK Sending Timing
A-GN4.00-03-TS
558
9.2.1.3 Timing of Retransmission
Figure 9.2 shows ARQ re-sending timing when the right of communication is continuously granted to
MS. MS will transmit NACK of CDCH after 7.5 ms, if the data error of 2 is detected. BS recognizes
an error on receiving NACK and, re-sends 2’ to MS on DL CDCH after 7.5 ms.
5 ms
CDCH
1’
2
1
3’
3
4
4’
2
2’
5
Down
Time
Up
If a CRC error occurs, NACK will be transmitted after 7.5 ms
and it will be resent after the 7.5 ms.
Figure 9.2 ARQ Retransmission Timing
9.2.1.4 Example of ARQ Retransmission
The example of resending an ARQ is introduced in this section.
Figure 9.3 shows the example of resending in case that the same data serve as an error
continuously. Data are re-sent to the specified retry count. Moreover, continuous data are
transmitted except for resending.
Figure 9.4 shows the example of resending in case that continuous different data serve as an error.
Since resending control is carried out by the same time relation, even if data 2 and 3 are continuous
data, they are resent independently.
5 ms
CDCH
A
1
2
N
3
A
4
A
2
N
5
A
6
A
2
A
7
Down
Time
Up
(A : ACK N : NACK)
Figure 9.3 Example of ARQ Retransmission 1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
559
5 ms
CDCH
A
1
2
N
3
N
4
A
2
A
3
A
5
A
6
A
7
Down
Time
Up
(A : ACK N : NACK )
Figure 9.4 Example of ARQ Retransmission 2
9.2.1.5 Example of Sequence
Figure 9.5 shows the example of UL ARQ sequence.
MS
BS
Uplink Data1
CRC Error
NACK
Uplink Data1(Retransmission)
ACK
Uplink Data2
Figure 9.5 Example of UL
A-GN4.00-03-TS
560
9.2.1.6 About the Switch of ARQ and the Adaptive Modulation
This section describes the way to switch ARQ and adaptive modulation. Transmission side changes
modulation class when the CRC error exceeds the defined limit of X times. Upper layer decides the
limit of X according to QoS etc.
9.2.2 HARQ
9.2.2.1 Procedure of HARQ
PHY Layer receives a set of PHY header and a set of PHY payload units on a TDMA frame,
identifies the users for these data units according to the MAP information provided by the MAC and
performs HARQ on the received PHY data units. Chase combining is described as follows as one
method of HARQ. Figure 9.6 shows the block diagram of the HARQ receiver. HARQ procedure is
described as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FFT operation is performed on the received base band signal The user signal is detected by
FFT operation.
De-interleaving operation is performed and buffered on the detected user signal. No maximum
ratio combining is done for the first time. De-interleaving operation is only applied after
retransmitted data for NACKs is received.
The buffer is released if no error is detected. The ACK field is set accordingly on the ANCH
channel’s PHY Header. The transmission timing of this ANCH is explained in the next chapter.
The reception buffer will not be released if an error is detected. The buffered data will be kept
in the buffer until the reception of the retransmitted data. [Retransmission timing of the
retransmitted data will be explained later.]. The NACK is set for the erroneous data in the ACK
field of the PHY header and transmitted on the ANCH channel. The timing of the ANCH
channel transmission is the second TDMA frame after the current frame.
NACK will be transmitted to the transmitting side if an error is detected. When the retransmitted
data is received, the FFT operation is performed on the received signal and then
de-Interleaving operation is conducted to the detected user signal. The de-Interleaved data is
combined with the buffered data. The Error correction is performed on the combined data and
then error detection will be performed. The process from FFT operation to error detection will
be done when HARQ condition is satisfied. The condition is described in Section 9.2.2.3.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
561
ACK or NACK Transmission
Base Band
Reception Signal
Second
Demodulation
De-interleaving
ACK
(PHY Header)
Maximal Ratio
Combining
First
Demodulation
(Error Correction)
Error
Detection
Reception
Buffer Pool
Figure 9.6 Reception of Block Diagram of HARQ
9.2.2.2 Retransmission Rule in FM-Mode
When EXCHs are retransmitted in FM-mode, the retransmission is done with the following rule.
 EXCHs in the same slot as the first transmission are used in HARQ retransmission.
 EXCHs with smaller logical PRU number are firstly used for HARQ retransmission and
remaining EXCHs are used for new data transmission.
 The number of EXCH used for retransmission does not change in HARQ
retransmission. When the original data size is one/two EXCHs, retransmission data
size is also one/two EXCHs, respectively.
Figure 9.7 shows an example of retransmission control. PHY data unit size does not change and the
data is transmitted first in a slot in HARQ retransmission. It also shows the relationship between
logical PRU assignment and symbol mapping method.
In the first transmission, Data 1 is transmitted by EDCH 1 which combined EXCH 1 and EXCH 2.
Data 2 is transmitted by EDCH 2 which combined EXCH 3 and EXCH 4. Data 3 is transmitted by
EDCH 3 which combined EXCH 5 and EXCH 6. And Data 4 is transmitted by EDCH 4 which
consists of only EXCH 7. Data 2 and Data 4 are retransmitted when an error occurs in
communication of EDCH 2 and EDCH 4. By the first and the second rule, Data 2 is retransmitted by
EDCH 1 which combined EXCH 1 and EXCH 2. According to the first, the second and the third rule,
Data 4 is retransmitted by EDCH 3 which consists of EXCH 5. EXCH 3, EXCH 4, EXCH 6, and
EXCH 7 which are not used by retransmission will then combine each other to from EDCH 2 and
EDCH 4. Data 5 and Data 6 which are ready for transmission for the first time, will be sent by EDCH
2 and EDCH 4.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
562
Logical PRU assignment
Retransmission
Slot 1
EXCH 1 EXCH 2 EXCH 3 EXCH 4
EDCH 1(Data 1) EDCH 2(Data 2)
EXCH 1 EXCH 2 EXCH 3 EXCH 4
EDCH 1(Data 1) EDCH 2(Data 5)
Slot 2
EXCH 5 EXCH 6 EXCH 7
EDCH 3(Data 3)
EXCH 5 EXCH 6 EXCH 7
EDCH 3(Data 6)
EDCH 4(Data 4)
Time Axis
EDCH 3(Data 4)
Time Axis
Frequency Axis
Retransmission
TDMA Slots
TDMA Slots
Symbol Mapping Method
Time Axis
Time Axis
Frequency Axis
Retransmission
TDMA Slots
TDMA Slots
Figure 9.7 Example of Retransmission Control
A-GN4.00-03-TS
563
9.2.2.3 HARQ Approval Condition
It is necessary to assign enough number of PRU to retransmit PHY data unit. The same MCS and
slot shall be used for the retransmission of the PHY data unit. If these conditions are not satisfied,
HARQ information will be released.
As an example, assume that ANCH, EXCH1, EXCH2, EXCH3 and EXCH4 are allocated for a user.
When NACK is received for a particular MAC frame, and two EXCHs are required for retransmission,
MAC will then request PHY layer to use the first two EXCHs given by the MAP field for the
retransmission.
When the NACK is received for multiple MAC frames simultaneously, the first MAC frame will be
allocated to the first few available EXCHs which are indicated by MAP field.
When the NACK is received for multiple MAC frames simultaneously, MAC will then try to allocate
EXCHs for the transmission of all the MAC frames. MAC will allocate as many EXCHs as possible
for frame transmission in case that sufficient EXCHs are not available.
Remaining MAC frames will be retransmitted by MAC-ARQ in the future.
9.2.2.4 HARQ Cancel Condition
HARQ cancel condition and the process are shown in Table 9.1. These conditions have a priority
numbered from 1 to 5. If some conditions occurred at the same time, higher priority condition should
be taken into use.
Table 9.1 Summary of HARQ Cancel Condition
No.
Condition
Outline of Process
1
Received ANCH is CRC error or ICCH
format.
The HARQ retransmission data in the frame
should be cleared, and notify the other side that
ANCH is CRC error by HC=1.
2
Received ANCH is set HC=1.
The HARQ retransmission data in the frame
should be cleared
3
There is no PRU in the slot which has
the HARQ retransmission data.
The HARQ retransmission data in the slot
should be cleared.
4
There is the difference of MI between
before and after retransmission.
The HARQ retransmission data in the MI
applicable to slot should be cleared.
5
There are not enough number of PRU
for HARQ retransmission data unit.
The PHY data unit which can not be
retransmitted should be cleared.
9.2.2.5 Setting the Timing for the Transmission of the ACK Field in the ANCH
This section will describe the timing setting for the transmission of the ACK field on the ANCH.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
564
EXCHs are receiving data during the DL part of the current TDMA frame. After that, the received
data will be forwarded to perform various operations like receiving block diagram in Figure 9.6.
Therefore, it is impossible to send the ACK for the received data in the UL part of the next TDMA
frame. The ACK or NACK for received data will be sent on the UL part of the TDMA frame after the
next one.
The example when ANCH is at the first slot is shown in Figure 9.8 and the example when ANCH is
at the 4th slot is shown in Figure 9.9.
5 ms
ANCH
Transmission
Reception
Time
ACK Field Setting
EXCH
Transmission
Reception
Time
Demodulation Processing
& CRC Detection
Figure 9.8 ACK Setting Timing When ANCH at the First Slot
5 ms
ANCH
Transmission
Reception
Time
ACK Field Setting
EXCH
Transmission
Reception
Time
Demodulation Processing
& CRC Detection
Figure 9.9 ACK Setting Timing When ANCH at the Last Slot
A-GN4.00-03-TS
565
A-GN4.00-03-TS
566
9.2.2.6 Timing of Retransmission
The timing of the retransmission of HARQ is different. It depends on the performance of MS.
Therefore, negotiation has to happen between the MS and BS before the connection is established.
9.2.2.6.1 HARQ Retransmission Timing for High Performance MS
MAP
ACK
MAP
ACK
MAP
ACK
MAP
NACK
MAP
ACK
DL
UL
MAP
ACK
ANCH
DL
UL
EXCH
Figure 9.10 shows the HARQ timing for the high performance MS. This figure shows the allocation of
EXCH on all the TDMA frames for the MS. In this case, the responses can be sent or received in the
adjacent TDMA frames. Firstly, MS detect an error on DL Slot 1’ (refer to the figure). Next, NACK is
sent after 7.5 ms on the ANCH. Then, BS allocates the required EXCHs after receiving the NACK.
The EXCHs will be intimated to MS through MAP of ANCH after 7.5 ms from the time of reception of
the NACK. In the next TDMA frame, the BS will then retransmit the Data 1’ to MS. MS will keep the
HARQ information until it receives the MAP information in case that the BS cannot allocate the
EXCHs for Data 1’ temporarily. MS receives the Data 1’ after 5 ms, that is, in the next TDMA frame
after receiving the MAP from BS.
Here, HARQ information stands for the ACK/NACK discrimination at the data sending node and the
I/Q pattern [Erroneous data set, which will be used at the time of chase combining, is stored in the
buffer] when error happens. BS detected error for the UL Data 1 as shown in the diagram. NACK will
be sent to MS after 12.5 ms. At the same time, BS will allocate the required EXCHs and informs it to
MS through the MAP field of the ANCH in the same DL data TDMA frame. After 2.5 ms, the MS will
retransmit the Data 1 according to the MAP field received from BS. In case when BS cannot allocate
EXCHs for the MS for retransmission, it will keep HARQ information until the resources are available
for allocation. MS will wait till it receives MAP from BS retransmit the Data 1 immediately after 2.5
ms.
4’
1’
5’
NACK
1’
1
2’
2
3’
3
1
4
5
Figure 9.10 HARQ Retransmission Timing with Early Response in case of 5ms frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
567
9.2.2.6.2 HARQ Retransmission Timing for Low Performance MS
MAP
ACK
MAP
ACK
MAP
ACK
MAP
NACK
MAP
ACK
DL
UL
MAP
ACK
ANCH
DL
UL
EXCH
Figure 9.11 shows the HARQ timing for the low performance MS. This figure shows the allocation of
EXCH on all the TDMA frames for the MS.
Firstly, MS detected an error on DL Slot 1’. Next, NACK is sent after 7.5 ms on the ANCH. Then, BS
allocates the required EXCHs on receiving the NACK. They will be intimated to MS through MAP of
ANCH after 7.5 ms from the time of reception of the NACK. The BS will retransmit the Data 1’ to MS
after 10 ms. MS will keep the HARQ information until it receives the MAP information if the BS
cannot allocate the EXCHs for Data 1’ temporarily. MS receives the Data 1’ after 10 ms that is, in the
second TDMA frame, after receiving the MAP from the BS. BS detects error for the UL Data 1 as
shown in the diagram. NACK will be sent to MS after 12.5 ms. Meanwhile, BS will allocate the
required EXCHs and inform it to MS through the MAP field of the ANCH in the same DL data TDMA
frame. After 7.5 ms, the MS will retransmit the Data 1 according to the MAP field received from BS.
In case when BS cannot allocate EXCHs for the MS for retransmission, it will keep HARQ
information until the resources are available for allocation. MS will wait till it receives MAP from BS to
retransmit the Data 1 immediately after 7.5 ms.
4’
5’
1’
NACK
1’
1
2’
2
3’
3
4
1
5
Figure 9.11 HARQ Retransmission Timing with Slow Response in case of 5ms frame
A-GN4.00-03-TS
568
9.2.2.7 Example of HARQ Retransmission
ANCH
DL
UL
EXCH
Example of HARQ retransmission is as shown in the below.
In Figure 9.12, the example of retransmitting the Data 1 repeatedly when the error happens
continuously is shown. In the Figure 9.12, the upper part shows the detail of ANCH and the lower
part shows the detail of EXCH. The retransmission of the Data 1 will be repeated until the
retransmission counter [As specified] becomes 0. In between two retransmission periods of Data 1,
the EXCHs can be used to transmit other data if the BS allocates EXCHs through the MAP.
In Figure 9.13, the example of retransmitting the Data 1 and Data 2 when error happens to both data
is shown. Both Data 1 and Data 2 are subject to the same rule for retransmission. That is, Data 1 is
retransmitted after 2.5 ms from the time of receiving the NACK. On the other hand, Data 2 is
retransmitted in a similar way but independently.
DL
UL
MA
1
MA
2
MN
3
MA
1
MA
4
MN
5
MA
1
MA
6
MN
7
ANCH
DL
UL
EXCH
Figure 9.12 Example of HARQ Retransmission 1
DL
UL
MA
1
MA
2
MN
3
MN
1
MA
2
MA
4
MA
5
MA
6
MA
7
Figure 9.13 Example of HARQ Retransmission 2
A-GN4.00-03-TS
569
9.2.2.8 Example of Sequence
Figure 9.14 and Figure 9.15 show the example of the sequence of UL HARQ.
UL example 1 is an example of normal HARQ sequence when the error occurs.
UL example 2 is a sequence example when the error occurs after MCS is changed at the next
transmission timing. In this case, the data 1 is usually demodulated because it does not meet the
HARQ approval requirement, and the buffering data for HARQ should be cleared at that timing.
MS
MI : MCS 1
UL Data 1
BS
CRC error.
NACK Transmission
MI : MCS 1
UL Data 1 (Retransmission)
After HARQ processing, demodulation
processing is carried out. CRC OK.
ACK Transmission
MI : MCS 1
UL Data 2
Figure 9.14 Example of UL 1
A-GN4.00-03-TS
570
MS
BS
MI : MCS 1
UL Data 1
CRC Error
NACK Transmission
MI : MCS 2
UL Data 2
NACK Transmission
MI : MCS 2
UL Data 2 (Re-transmission)
ACK Transmission
HARQ Cancelled, buffered
data for UL Data 1 is
cleared.And CRC Error
After HARQ processing,
demodulation processing is
carried out. And CRC OK
Figure 9.15 Example of UL 2
9.2.2.9 Switch of HARQ and the Adaptive Modulation
This section describes to the way to switch HARQ and adaptive modulation. When the CRC error
occurs repeatedly, transmission side changes modulation class and retransmits data by MAC-ARQ.
A-GN4.00-03-TS
571
9.2.2.10 Increment Redundancy (IR) Method
IR-HARQ is used as a HARQ method. Figure 9.16 shows the block diagram of the IR-HARQ
receiver. IR-HARQ procedure is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
FFT processes the baseband reception signal and the user signal is detected.
De-interleaving processes detected user signal and the result data is buffered. The process of
maximum ratio combining is not performed for the first time. Depending on the buffer size and
the base codeword length, maximum ratio combining is used only when the total received data
exceeds IR length (NIR).
The buffer is released if no error is detected. The ACK field is set accordingly on the PHY.
The reception buffer is not released if an error is detected. The buffered data is kept in the
buffer until the retransmitted data is received. [Retransmission timing of the retransmitted data
is described later.]. The NACK is set for the erroneous data in the ACK field of the PHY header
and transmitted on the ANCH. The timing of the ANCH transmission is the second from the
current TDMA frame.
The previous sequential signal is transmitted when the transmitter receives NACK. If total
transmitted data exceeds NIR, the data transmitted previously is retransmitted.
When the retransmitted data is received, FFT processed the received signal and de-interleaving
processes the detected user signal. The de-interleaved data is concatenated to the buffered
data if total transmitted data is less than or equal to NIR. If total transmitted data exceeds NIR,
the de-interleaved data is combined with the buffered data as CC. Figure